Introduction

These specifications are the programming manual used when creating the sequence program with the PLC development
software, or Mitsubishi Electric Co.'s integrated FA software MELSOFT Series(GX Developer).
The PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) instructions are largely categorized into the basic instructions, function
instructions and exclusive instructions. There are many types of instructions. The instructions can be used according to
the purpose and application such as the PLC support function used when supporting the user PLCs.
In addition to the explanation of instructions and functions, the environment to develop the user PLC using GX
Developer, especially the usage unique to MITSUBISHI CNC, is described. Explanations on the built-in PLC edit function
(onboard PLC edit function) operations are also given.
"M7 Series" in this manual indicates the following series:- M700V Series
- M70V Series
- M700 Series
- M70 Series
- E70 Series

Details described in this manual

CAUTION
An effort has been made to describe special handling of this machine, but items that are not described
must be interpreted as "not possible".
Some screens and functions may differ or some functions may not be usable depending on the NC version.

General precautions
Refer to each manual for details on the MITSUBISHI CNC Series PLC, and for details on the various tools in this
manual.
The explanations and screens for the various tools in this manual may differ slightly according to the tool version.
Refer to the respective manual for details.

[MELSEC Series Software Package Manual]

GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual (Startup Section)
GXDEV8-0-IN-E 13JU40 SH-080372E
GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual
GXDEV8-0-E 13JU41 SH-080373E
GX Converter Version 1 Operating Manual
SW0D5-CNVW (OPE)-E 13J949 IB-080004E

(Caution)
- The version numbers are current as of the editing of this manual, but may be updated in the future.
- GX Developer Version 8 (Model SW8D5C-GPPW) is the new name of the old "Windows Version GPP
Function Software Package" (common name GPPW).
- GX Converter Version 1 (Model SW2D5C-CNVW) is the new name of the old "Windows Version Data
Conversion Software Package" (common name CNVW).
 Precautions for Safety

Always read the specifications issued by the machine tool builder, this manual, related manuals and attached documents
before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use.
Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit.
This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

DANGER
When there is a great risk that the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if handling is
mistaken.

WARNING
When the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if handling is mistaken.

CAUTION
When the user could be subject to injuries or when physical damage could occur if handling is mistaken.

Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the situation. In any case,
important information that must always be observed is described.

The following sings indicate prohibition and compulsory.

This sign indicates prohibited behavior (must not do).

For example, indicates "Keep fire away".

This sign indicates a thing that is compulsory (must do).

For example, indicates "it must be grounded".

The meaning of each pictorial sing is as follows.

CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION Danger Danger

rotated object HOT Electric shock risk explosive

Prohibited Disassembly is KEEP FIRE AWAY General instruction Earth ground

prohibited

DANGER

Not applicable in this manual.

WARNING

Not applicable in this manual.

 CAUTION
1. Items related to product and manual

For items described as "Restrictions" or "Usable State" in this manual, the instruction manual issued by
the machine tool builder takes precedence over this manual.

An effort has been made to describe special handling of this machine, but items that are not described
must be interpreted as "not possible".

This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added. Refer to the specifications
issued by the machine tool builder before starting use.

Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine tool builder for details on each machine tool.

Some screens and functions may differ or some functions may not be usable depending on the NC version.
2. Items related to start up and maintenance

Read this manual carefully and confirm the safety enough before executing the operation of the program
change, forced output, RUN, STOP, etc. during operation. Operation mistakes may cause damage of the
machine and accidents.

3. Items related to program development

Always observe the cautions before development to develop a program.

If the data transferred does not follow the file name rule, unexpected operations will occur.
E.g. PLC program erasure

Do not read a sequence program on which a conversion error occurred into the GX Developer. The file may
include unexpected contents to result an illegal operation.

When an error occurred at GX Developer On-line function, the error message may not explain exactly the
state in the CNC side. Always refer to the error list.
 Disposal

(Note) This symbol mark is for EU countries only.

This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-
users and Annex II.

Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and
components which can be recycled and/or reused.
This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of
separately from your household waste.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol means that the
battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be indicated as
follows:
Hg: mercury (0,0005%), Cd: cadmium (0,002%), Pb: lead (0,004%)
In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators.
Please, dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community waste collection/
recycling centre.

Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!

 Trademarks

MELDAS, MELSEC, EZSocket, EZMotion, iQ Platform, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT and CC-Link
IE are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and/or other
countries.

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft® and Windows® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
CompactFlash and CF are either trademarks or registered trademarks of SanDisk Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and/or other countries.
Intel® and Pentium® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
respective companies.
 本製品の取扱いについて

( 日本語 /Japanese)
本製品は工業用 ( クラス A) 電磁環境適合機器です。販売者あるいは使用者はこの点に注意し、住商業環境以外で
の使用をお願いいたします。

Handling of our product

(English)
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the
user may be required to take adequate measures.

본 제품의 취급에 대해서

( 한국어 /Korean)
이 기기는 업무용 (A 급 ) 전자파적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 가정외의 지역에
서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다 .
 CONTENTS

I OUTLINE

1 System Configuration.................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 System Configuration for PLC Development ......................................................................................... 2
1.2 User PLC (Ladder) Development Procedure ......................................................................................... 3

II PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION

1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................... 1

2 PLC Processing Program............................................................................................................................ 3

2.1 PLC Processing Program Level and Operation ..................................................................................... 4
2.2 Outline of PLC Processing Program (Two Program Method) ................................................................ 5
2.3 Independent Program Method ............................................................................................................... 6
2.4 Multi-program Method............................................................................................................................ 7
2.4.1 Number and Types of Registerable Programs............................................................................... 7
2.4.2 Program Execution Order .............................................................................................................. 8
2.5 User Memory Area Configuration and Size ........................................................................................... 9
2.5.1 Independent Program Method ....................................................................................................... 9
2.5.2 Multi-program Method.................................................................................................................... 9
2.6 Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode ...................................................................... 10
2.6.1 Path from Storage to Execution ................................................................................................... 10
2.6.2 Conversion of Instruction Code at Execution............................................................................... 10
2.6.3 How to Confirm the Number of Steps at Storage/Execution........................................................ 10

3 Input/Output Signals.................................................................................................................................. 11
3.1 Input/Output Signal Types and Processing.......................................................................................... 12
3.2 Handling of Input Signals Designated for High-speed Input ................................................................ 13
3.3 High-speed Input/Output Designation Method..................................................................................... 14

4 Parameters.................................................................................................................................................. 15
4.1 PLC Constants..................................................................................................................................... 16
4.2 Bit Selection Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 18
4.3 Other Parameters ................................................................................................................................ 22
4.3.1 PLC Startup Condition Switchover............................................................................................... 22
4.3.2 SRAM.BIN Output type ................................................................................................................ 22

5 Explanation of Devices.............................................................................................................................. 23
5.1 Devices and Device No........................................................................................................................ 24
5.2 List of Devices...................................................................................................................................... 24
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices .......................................................................................................... 25
5.3.1 Input/Output X, Y ......................................................................................................................... 25
5.3.2 Internal Relays M and F, Latch Relay L....................................................................................... 26
5.3.3 Special Relay for Link (SB), Special Register for Link (SW)........................................................ 26
5.3.4 Link Relay B, Link Register W ..................................................................................................... 26
5.3.5 Special Relay SM, Special Register SD ...................................................................................... 27
5.3.6 Edge Relay V ............................................................................................................................... 28
5.3.7 Timer T......................................................................................................................................... 28
5.3.8 Integrated Timer ST ..................................................................................................................... 30
5.3.9 Counter C..................................................................................................................................... 31
5.3.10 Data Register D ......................................................................................................................... 32
5.3.11 File Register R ........................................................................................................................... 33
5.3.12 Index register Z .......................................................................................................................... 34
5.3.13 Nesting N ................................................................................................................................... 35
5.3.14 Pointer P .................................................................................................................................... 36
5.3.14.1 General Pointers................................................................................................................ 36
 5.3.14.2 Local Pointers .................................................................................................................... 37
5.3.14.3 Common Pointers .............................................................................................................. 38
5.3.14.4 Reserved Pointers ............................................................................................................. 39
5.3.15 Decimal Constant K ................................................................................................................... 40
5.3.16 Hexadecimal Constant H ........................................................................................................... 40

6 Explanation of Instructions....................................................................................................................... 41
6.1 Compatible Instructions and Extended Instructions ............................................................................. 42
6.2 Instruction Tables................................................................................................................................. 43
6.2.1 How to Read Instruction Table..................................................................................................... 43
6.2.2 Basic Instructions......................................................................................................................... 45
6.2.3 Comparison Operation Instructions ............................................................................................. 47
6.2.4 Arithmetic Operation Instructions................................................................................................. 48
6.2.5 Data Conversion Instructions....................................................................................................... 50
6.2.6 Data Transmission Instructions.................................................................................................... 51
6.2.7 Program Branch Instruction ......................................................................................................... 52
6.2.8 Logical Operation Instructions ..................................................................................................... 52
6.2.9 Rotation Instructions .................................................................................................................... 54
6.2.10 Data Processing Instructions ..................................................................................................... 55
6.2.11 Other Function Instructions........................................................................................................ 55
6.2.12 Special Instructions for Old Machine Type Compatible ............................................................. 56
6.2.13 Exclusive Instructions ................................................................................................................ 56
6.3 Data Designation Method..................................................................................................................... 57
6.3.1 Bit Data ........................................................................................................................................ 57
6.3.2 Word (16-bit) Data ....................................................................................................................... 58
6.3.3 Using Double Word Data (32 bits) ............................................................................................... 60
6.4 Index Modification ................................................................................................................................ 62
6.4.1 For Models without Extended Index Modification ........................................................................ 62
6.4.2 For Models with Extended Index Modification ............................................................................ 63
6.5 Operation Error .................................................................................................................................... 65
6.6 Execution Condition of Instruction........................................................................................................ 66
6.7 Counting Step Number......................................................................................................................... 67
6.8 Operations when the OUT, SET/RST, or PLS/PLF Instruction of the Same Device is Used............... 68
6.9 How to Read Instruction Tables ........................................................................................................... 71

7 Basic Instructions ...................................................................................................................................... 73

7.1 Contact instruction ............................................................................................................................... 75
7.2 Connection Instruction ......................................................................................................................... 78
7.3 Output Instruction................................................................................................................................. 90
7.4 Shift Instruction .................................................................................................................................. 105
7.5 Master Control Instruction .................................................................................................................. 107
7.6 Other Instructions............................................................................................................................... 110

8 Function Instructions .............................................................................................................................. 115

8.1 Comparison Operation Instruction ..................................................................................................... 117
8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instruction......................................................................................................... 121
8.3 Data Conversion Instruction............................................................................................................... 147
8.4 Data Transfer Instruction.................................................................................................................... 153
8.5 Program Branch Instruction ............................................................................................................... 167
8.6 Logical Operation Instructions............................................................................................................ 179
8.7 Rotation Instruction ............................................................................................................................ 199
8.8 Data Processing Instructions ............................................................................................................. 217
8.9 Other Instructions............................................................................................................................... 231
8.10 Special Instructions for Old Machine Type Compatible ................................................................... 233

9 Exclusive Instructions ............................................................................................................................. 239

9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction .................................................................................................................. 240
9.1.1 Outline of ATC Control............................................................................................................... 240
9.1.2 ATC Operation ........................................................................................................................... 240
9.1.3 Explanation of Terminology ....................................................................................................... 241
 9.1.4 Relationship between Tool Registration Screen and Magazines............................................... 242
9.1.5 Use of ATC and ROT Instructions ............................................................................................. 243
9.1.6 Basic Format of ATC Exclusive Instruction................................................................................ 244
9.1.7 Instruction List............................................................................................................................ 244
9.1.8 Control Data Buffer Contents..................................................................................................... 244
9.1.9 File Register (R Register) Assignment and Parameters ............................................................ 245
9.1.10 Details of Each Instruction ....................................................................................................... 249
9.1.11 Precautions for Using ATC Exclusive Instructions................................................................... 257
9.1.12 Examples of Tool Registration Screen..................................................................................... 258
9.1.13 Display of Spindle Tool and Standby Tool ............................................................................... 260
9.2 ROT Instructions ................................................................................................................................ 261
9.2.1 Instruction List............................................................................................................................ 261

10 PLC Help Function ................................................................................................................................. 265

10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)......................................................................... 267
10.1.1 Outline of Tool Life Management Function .............................................................................. 267
10.1.2 Tool Life Management Methods .............................................................................................. 268
10.1.3 Procedure when Tool Command is Executed.......................................................................... 268
10.1.4 Procedure when Spindle Tool is Changed............................................................................... 269
10.1.5 Tool Life Management II Method ............................................................................................. 269
10.1.6 Maximum Number of Registerable Tools................................................................................. 270
10.1.7 Tool Data ................................................................................................................................. 270
10.1.8 Usage Time, Work Count......................................................................................................... 272
10.1.9 Tool Data Flow (R Register) .................................................................................................... 273
10.1.10 User PLC Processing............................................................................................................. 275
10.1.11 Interface with PLC.................................................................................................................. 276
10.1.12 Switch of the Tool Status with the Tool Group No. Designation (Tool Life Management II) .. 279
10.2 Tool Life Management (Lathe System)............................................................................................ 281
10.2.1 Outline of Tool Life Management Function .............................................................................. 281
10.2.2 Tool Life Management Method ................................................................................................ 282
10.2.3 Display for Management Data Setting ..................................................................................... 282
10.2.4 PLC Interface Input/Output Signals ......................................................................................... 283
10.2.4.1 Timing Chart .................................................................................................................... 284
10.2.4.1.1 Tool Life Management 1 .......................................................................................... 284
10.2.4.1.2 Tool Life Management 2 ......................................................................................... 284
10.2.5 Read of Next Tool No. ............................................................................................................. 286
10.2.5.1 Operation Description ...................................................................................................... 286
10.2.5.2 Application Example ........................................................................................................ 287
10.3 External Search ............................................................................................................................... 288
10.3.1 Detailed Explanation ................................................................................................................ 288
10.3.2 PLC → NC Interface Signal ..................................................................................................... 289
10.3.3 NC → PLC Interface Signal ..................................................................................................... 290
10.3.4 Timing Chart ............................................................................................................................ 290
10.3.5 External Search Status ............................................................................................................ 290
10.3.6 Precautions .............................................................................................................................. 291
10.3.7 Usage Example........................................................................................................................ 291
10.4 PLC Axis Control.............................................................................................................................. 292
10.4.1 Specifications........................................................................................................................... 292
10.4.2 Detailed Explanation ................................................................................................................ 293
10.4.3 PLC Interface ........................................................................................................................... 294
10.4.4 Details of PLC Axis Control Information Data .......................................................................... 296
10.4.5 Timing Chart ............................................................................................................................ 301
10.4.6 Reference Position Return Near Point Detection..................................................................... 305
10.4.7 Handle Feed Axis Selection..................................................................................................... 305
10.4.8 Single Mode ............................................................................................................................. 306
10.4.9 Buffering Mode......................................................................................................................... 306
10.4.10 PLC Axis Monitor ................................................................................................................... 309
10.4.11 Absolute Position Detection ................................................................................................... 309
10.4.12 Device Random Assignment.................................................................................................. 309
10.4.13 Usage Example...................................................................................................................... 310
10.5 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation ..................................................................... 311
10.6 Alarm Message Display ................................................................................................................... 312
10.6.1 Interface ................................................................................................................................... 312
10.6.2 Screen Display......................................................................................................................... 314
10.6.3 Message Creation.................................................................................................................... 314
10.6.4 Parameters .............................................................................................................................. 314
10.7 Operator Message Display............................................................................................................... 316
10.7.1 Interface ................................................................................................................................... 316
10.7.2 Operator Message Preparation................................................................................................ 317
10.7.3 Operator Message Display Validity Parameter ........................................................................ 317
10.8 PLC Switches................................................................................................................................... 318
10.8.1 Explanation of Screen.............................................................................................................. 318
10.8.2 Explanation of Operation ......................................................................................................... 319
10.8.3 Signal Processing .................................................................................................................... 320
10.8.4 Switch Name Preparation ........................................................................................................ 324
10.9 Load Meter Display .......................................................................................................................... 325
10.9.1 Interface ................................................................................................................................... 325
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing.......................................................................................................................... 329
10.10.1 Functions ............................................................................................................................... 329
10.10.2 Programming and Setting ...................................................................................................... 331
10.10.2.1 Operation Function: Automatic Mode ............................................................................ 331
10.10.2.2 Operation Function: Manual Mode................................................................................. 336
10.10.2.3 Operation Function: JOG Mode ..................................................................................... 337
10.10.2.4 Operation Function: Incremental Feed .......................................................................... 338
10.10.2.5 Operation Function: Manual Handle Feed .................................................................... 339
10.10.2.6 Operation Function: Reference Position Return ........................................................... 340
10.10.2.7 Machine Compensation Function: Backlash Compensation.......................................... 341
10.10.2.8 Protection Function: Interlock ....................................................................................... 341
10.10.2.9 Protection Function: Stored Stroke Limit ....................................................................... 342
10.10.2.10 Protection Function: Servo OFF ................................................................................. 342
10.10.2.11 Miscellaneous Function: Feedrate Override ................................................................ 343
10.10.2.12 Miscellaneous Function: Position Switch .................................................................... 343
10.10.2.13 NC axis Control Selection ............................................................................................ 343
10.10.3 Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 347
10.10.3.1 Initial Parameter Settings: Selecting Axes to Use in PLC Axis Indexing (#12800) ....... 347
10.10.3.2 Initial Parameter Settings: Setting the Control Parameter 1 .......................................... 349
10.10.3.3 Initial Parameter Settings: Setting Stations (#12801 to #12805, #12850 to #12868) ... 350
10.10.3.4 Initial Parameter Settings: Setting Operation Parameter Groups (#12810 to #12848) . 354
10.10.3.5 Initial Parameter Settings: Setting Position Switches (#12870 to #12900) .................... 359
10.10.3.6 Absolute Position Zero Point Initialization Set: Machine End Stopper Method ............. 360
10.10.3.7 Absolute Position Zero Point Initial Setting: Marked Point Alignment Method............... 361
10.10.4 Test Operation in Auxiliary Axis Test Screen......................................................................... 361
10.11 Direct Screen Selection.................................................................................................................. 362
10.11.1 Screen Selection Information................................................................................................. 363
10.11.2 Timing Chart .......................................................................................................................... 364
10.11.3 Precautions ............................................................................................................................ 364
10.11.4 Restrictions ............................................................................................................................ 364
10.12 Control Axis Superimposition II ...................................................................................................... 365
10.12.1 Command Method ................................................................................................................. 365
10.12.2 Machining Program Example................................................................................................. 365
10.12.3 Precautions ............................................................................................................................ 366
10.13 Change the Area of Stored Stroke Limit I ...................................................................................... 367
10.13.1 Explanation of Function ......................................................................................................... 367
10.13.2 Usage Example...................................................................................................................... 369
10.13.3 Cautions................................................................................................................................. 371
10.14 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization ........................................................................................ 372
10.14.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................... 372
10.14.2 Detailed Explanation .............................................................................................................. 372
10.14.2.1 Operation of G/B Spindle Synchronization .................................................................... 372
10.14.2.1.1 How to Command ................................................................................................. 372
10.14.2.1.2 Explanation of Operation ...................................................................................... 373
10.14.2.2 Phase Alignment of Reference Spindle and G/B Spindle .............................................. 374
 10.14.2.2.1 Saving Phase Gap Between Reference Spindle and G/B Spindle ....................... 374
10.14.2.2.2 Phase Alignment of Reference Spindle and G/B Spindle..................................... 374
10.14.2.2.3 Explanation of Operation ...................................................................................... 375
10.14.2.3 G/B Spindle Synchronization Position Error Compensation .......................................... 376
10.14.2.3.1 How to Command ................................................................................................. 376
10.14.2.3.2 Explanation of Operation ...................................................................................... 377
10.14.2.3.3 Precautions........................................................................................................... 378
10.14.2.4 Relative Position Error Sampling ................................................................................... 379
10.14.2.4.1 How to Command ................................................................................................. 379
10.14.3 Relation with Other Functions................................................................................................ 381
10.14.4 Precautions and Restrictions ................................................................................................. 382

11 External PLC link.................................................................................................................................... 383

11.1 CC-Link ............................................................................................................................................ 384
11.1.1 Performance Specifications ..................................................................................................... 386
11.1.2 Usable Functions ..................................................................................................................... 389
11.1.2.1 Machine Input/Output Signal Allocation By CC-Link........................................................ 390
11.1.2.2 File Register By CC-Link ................................................................................................. 390
11.1.3 Communication Data ............................................................................................................... 391
11.1.3.1 Communication Data Flow............................................................................................... 391
11.1.3.2 Register Allocation........................................................................................................... 392
11.1.3.2.1 Ver.1 mode .............................................................................................................. 392
11.1.3.2.2 Ver.2 mode .............................................................................................................. 396
11.1.3.3 Automatic Refresh ........................................................................................................... 400
11.1.3.4 Occupied Number of Stations of the System and Settable Range of the Device ............ 401
11.1.4 Standby Master Function ......................................................................................................... 402
11.1.4.1 How to Set ....................................................................................................................... 403
11.1.4.2 Overview of Link Data Transmission When Standby Master Function is in Use ............. 404
11.1.4.3 Points to Note When Using Standby Master Function..................................................... 408
11.1.4.4 ON/OFF Timings of Link Special Relays (SB) Relating to Standby Master Function ...... 409
11.1.4.5 Program Example When Using Standby Master (Master Station Duplex) Function........ 410
11.1.5 Transient Function ................................................................................................................... 413

12 Appendix................................................................................................................................................. 417
12.1 Example of Faulty Circuit ................................................................................................................. 418

III PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT

1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Software Configuration .......................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Operating Environment .......................................................................................................................... 3

2 GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC....................................................................... 5

2.1 Function Support Conditions (General Section) .................................................................................... 6
2.2 Function Support Conditions (Online Section)..................................................................................... 10

3 Preparation ................................................................................................................................................. 13
3.1 Installing the Tools ............................................................................................................................... 14
3.2 Preparation for Serial (RS-232C) Communication............................................................................... 14
3.2.1 Connecting the Serial Cable ........................................................................................................ 14
3.2.2 Setting the Connection Target ..................................................................................................... 15
3.3 Preparation for Ethernet Communication............................................................................................. 16
3.3.1 Confirming IP Address of the CNC Unit....................................................................................... 16
3.3.2 Setting IP Address for the Personal Computer Side.................................................................... 16
3.3.3 Connecting the Ethernet Cable.................................................................................................... 17
3.3.4 Setting the Connection Target ..................................................................................................... 18

4 Common Items ........................................................................................................................................... 19

4.1 Precautions before Development......................................................................................................... 20
 4.2 NC-related Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 21
4.3 PLC Data Storage Areas...................................................................................................................... 22
4.4 File Name............................................................................................................................................. 24
4.4.1 File Name Rule for Sequence Program, Parameter, and Device Comment................................ 24
4.4.2 File Name Rule for Message Data............................................................................................... 25
4.5 Creating a Project ................................................................................................................................ 27
4.5.1 Project.......................................................................................................................................... 27
4.5.2 Operating Procedures.................................................................................................................. 28
4.6 Setting the Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 29
4.6.1 Parameter Setting Screen............................................................................................................ 29
4.6.2 Setting the Number of Device Points ........................................................................................... 30
4.6.3 Setting the Number of Common Pointer Points ........................................................................... 31
4.6.4 Setting the Program Execution Order .......................................................................................... 32
4.6.5 Writing and Reading Parameters to and from the CNC Controller .............................................. 33
4.7 Starting/Stopping the PLC.................................................................................................................... 34
4.7.1 Operation Procedure.................................................................................................................... 34
4.8 Ladder Program Writing during RUN ................................................................................................... 35
4.8.1 Setting Ladder Program Writing during RUN............................................................................... 35
4.8.2 PLC Data Available for Ladder Program Writing during RUN...................................................... 36
4.8.3 Data Unit for Writing..................................................................................................................... 36
4.8.4 Available Number of Steps for Writing ......................................................................................... 37
4.8.5 Operation with GX-Developer ...................................................................................................... 38
4.8.5.1 Common "Conversion" Operation........................................................................................ 38
4.8.5.2 Executing "Conversion (online change)".............................................................................. 39
4.8.5.3 Setting Ladder Program Writing during RUN before Executing "Conversion" ..................... 39
4.8.5.4 Executing "Conversion" in "Monitor (Write mode)" .............................................................. 40
4.8.5.5 Operation when Ladder Program Writing during RUN is Disabled ...................................... 40
4.8.6 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 41
4.8.6.1 Limitations on Program Configuration.................................................................................. 41
4.8.6.2 Precautions for Command Operation in Ladder Programming Writing during RUN............ 42
4.8.6.3 Other Precautions ................................................................................................................ 43
4.9 Keyword Registration ........................................................................................................................... 44
4.9.1 Data Protected by a Keyword ...................................................................................................... 44
4.9.2 Operations Prohibited by a Keyword ........................................................................................... 44
4.9.3 Structure of the Keyword Function............................................................................................... 44
4.9.4 File Names Excluded from the Target of Keyword Protection ..................................................... 45
4.9.5 Compatibility and Precautions when Using the System with No Keyword Support ..................... 45
4.9.6 Registering a Keyword................................................................................................................. 46
4.9.7 Canceling the Keyword ................................................................................................................ 47
4.9.8 Disabling the Keyword ................................................................................................................. 47
4.9.9 Disabling the Keyword as Required when Accessing to CNC ..................................................... 48

5 Sequence Program Development............................................................................................................. 49

5.1 Development Procedures..................................................................................................................... 50
5.1.1 Method for Using Sequence Program Developed with PLC4B.................................................... 50
5.2 Writing the Sequence Program to the CNC Controller......................................................................... 51
5.2.1 Operation Procedure.................................................................................................................... 51
5.2.2 Writing Operation ......................................................................................................................... 52
5.2.3 Operations and Check Items at Conversion Error ....................................................................... 52
5.2.4 Operations and Check Items at the Other Errors......................................................................... 54
5.3 Reading the Sequence Program from the CNC Controller .................................................................. 56
5.3.1 Operation Procedure.................................................................................................................... 56
5.4 Verifying the Sequence Programs ....................................................................................................... 58
5.4.1 Operation Procedure.................................................................................................................... 58
5.5 Using Sequence Programs from Older Models.................................................................................... 59
5.5.1 Starting GX Converter and Specifying the File to be Converted.................................................. 59
5.5.2 Conversion Format Setting .......................................................................................................... 59
5.6 Monitoring the Sequence Program ...................................................................................................... 62
5.6.1 Operation Procedure.................................................................................................................... 62
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device .................................................................................................. 63
5.7.1 Basic Operation ........................................................................................................................... 64
 5.7.2 Basic Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 65
5.7.3 Status of Special Relay during Sampling Trace........................................................................... 68
5.7.4 Sampling Trace Operation Screen............................................................................................... 69
5.7.4.1 Sampling Trace Main Screen .............................................................................................. 70
5.7.4.2 Wizard Setting/Execution Screen ........................................................................................ 71
5.7.4.3 Trace Setting ....................................................................................................................... 72
5.7.4.4 Trace Execution................................................................................................................... 77
5.7.4.5 Trace Result ........................................................................................................................ 79
5.7.5 Operation at Error ........................................................................................................................ 80
5.7.6 Operation Example ...................................................................................................................... 80
5.7.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 82

6 PLC Message Development ...................................................................................................................... 85

6.1 Development Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 86
6.1.1 Using a General Text Editor......................................................................................................... 86
6.1.2 Entering Messages Directly from GX Developer ......................................................................... 86
6.2 Message Data Description Method...................................................................................................... 87
6.2.1 Description Format....................................................................................................................... 87
6.2.2 Description Method ...................................................................................................................... 88
6.2.3 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 89
6.3 Converting Data into GX Developer Format ........................................................................................ 90
6.3.1 Starting GX Converter and Specifying the File to be Converted.................................................. 90
6.3.2 Conversion Format Setting .......................................................................................................... 90
6.4 Entering/Editing Data using GX Developer.......................................................................................... 93
6.4.1 Interlinear Statement Display using Circuit Display ..................................................................... 93
6.4.2 Interlinear Statement Display using List Display.......................................................................... 94
6.4.3 Editing of Integrated Type Interlinear Statements........................................................................ 95
6.5 Writing to the CNC Controller .............................................................................................................. 96
6.5.1 Operation Procedure.................................................................................................................... 96
6.5.2 Writing Operation ......................................................................................................................... 96
6.5.3 Operation at Write Error............................................................................................................... 97
6.5.4 How to Confirm the Error Position ............................................................................................... 98
6.6 Reading and Verifying from the CNC Controller .................................................................................. 99
6.6.1 Menu Selection/Screen Operation ............................................................................................... 99

7 Device Comment Creation ...................................................................................................................... 101

7.1 Development Procedure .................................................................................................................... 102
7.2 Description Method for Indirect Entry................................................................................................. 103
7.3 Converting Comment Data into GX Developer Data ......................................................................... 104
7.3.1 Starting GX Converter and Specifying the File to be Converted................................................ 104
7.3.2 Conversion Format Setting ........................................................................................................ 104

8 Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................... 107
8.1 List of Errors During GX Developer Online Operations ..................................................................... 108
8.2 Confirmation of PLC Alarms on CNC Controller Side........................................................................ 111
8.2.1 Operating Procedures................................................................................................................ 112
8.2.2 Details of Each Display .............................................................................................................. 113
8.2.3 Detailed Error Information Display ............................................................................................. 113
8.2.4 Display of the Error-generated Ladder....................................................................................... 114
8.2.5 List of Corresponding PLC Alarms............................................................................................. 115
8.3 Initialization for PLC Data Storage Area ............................................................................................ 116
8.3.1 Operation Procedure.................................................................................................................. 116

9 Procedures for Backing Up Data Such as Sequence Programs ......................................................... 117

9.1 Backup Target Data ........................................................................................................................... 118
9.2 Backup Procedures............................................................................................................................ 118
9.3 Restoring Backed Up Data ................................................................................................................ 119
IV EXPLANATION OF BUILT-IN EDITING FUNCTION

1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................... 1

2 Starting and Ending Onboard ..................................................................................................................... 7

2.1 Starting................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1.1 Startup with Standard Operation Mode.......................................................................................... 9
2.1.2 Startup with Simple Operation Mode ........................................................................................... 10
2.1.3 M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series Startup...................................................................................... 11
2.2 Ending .................................................................................................................................................. 12
2.3 Switching from Simple Operation Mode to Standard Operation Mode ................................................ 13
2.4 Switching from Standard Operation Mode to Simple Operation Mode ................................................ 14

3 Screens ....................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.1 Screen Resolution................................................................................................................................ 16
3.2 Types ................................................................................................................................................... 16
3.3 Full Screen Display .............................................................................................................................. 17
3.4 Color-coded Display of "LADDER" Screen .......................................................................................... 19
3.5 Split Display ......................................................................................................................................... 20
3.6 Popup Screen ...................................................................................................................................... 21
3.7 Confirmation Popup Screen ................................................................................................................. 22
3.8 Error Display Popup Screen................................................................................................................. 22
3.9 Screen Title Display ............................................................................................................................. 23
3.10 Menu Key Display .............................................................................................................................. 23
3.11 Basic Screen Operations ................................................................................................................... 24
3.12 Language ........................................................................................................................................... 29
3.12.1 Screen Display Language.......................................................................................................... 29
3.12.2 Comment (Statement, Note, Comment, Device Name) Language............................................ 29

4 PLC Data ..................................................................................................................................................... 31

4.1 PLC Data Storage Area ....................................................................................................................... 32
4.2 Type of Data......................................................................................................................................... 33
4.2.1 Program Data............................................................................................................................... 34
4.2.2 Device Comment Data................................................................................................................. 35
4.2.3 Parameter Data............................................................................................................................ 35
4.2.4 Precaution When Creating the Data ............................................................................................ 35

5 Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard) .................................................................................... 37

5.1 Basic Operation Keys........................................................................................................................... 38
5.2 Soft Key ............................................................................................................................................... 39
5.2.1 Soft Keys for M700VW/M700 Series ........................................................................................... 39
5.2.2 Soft Keys for M700VS/M70V/M70 Series .................................................................................... 41
5.2.2.1 Display Mode for the Soft Keys............................................................................................ 41
5.2.2.2 Device Search and Ladder Input Using the Soft Keys......................................................... 43
5.2.3 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 43
5.3 Menu Keys ........................................................................................................................................... 44
5.3.1 Menu Keys in Standard Operation Mode and Simple Operation Mode ....................................... 44
5.3.2 Menu Key Hierarchies and Movement......................................................................................... 44
5.3.2.1 Menu Keys in Standard Operation Mode............................................................................. 44
5.3.2.2 Menu Keys in Simple Operation Mode ................................................................................ 45
5.3.2.3 Menu Keys in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series ................................................................... 45
5.3.3 Details of Menu Keys ................................................................................................................... 46
5.3.3.1 Menu Keys in Standard Operation Mode............................................................................. 46
5.3.3.2 Menu Keys in Simple Operation Mode ................................................................................ 51
5.3.3.3 Menu Keys in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series ................................................................... 55

6 Environment Setting .................................................................................................................................. 59

6.1 Setting the Connected NC Control Unit ............................................................................................... 61
6.1.1 Arbitrary Switchover of Connected NC ........................................................................................ 62
6.1.2 Information to be Updated at Connection Switchover.................................................................. 62
 6.2 NC File Operation Setting .................................................................................................................... 63
6.2.1 Setting the Storage Destination of Device Comment................................................................... 63
6.3 Simple Operation Mode Menu Key Switchover ................................................................................... 65
6.4 Ladder Display Setting......................................................................................................................... 66
6.4.1 Maximum Number of Contacts .................................................................................................... 66
6.4.2 Zoom Display ............................................................................................................................... 66
6.4.3 Current Monitor Value Display ..................................................................................................... 66
6.5 Comment Display Setting .................................................................................................................... 67
6.5.1 Comment Line.............................................................................................................................. 67
6.5.2 Various Displays .......................................................................................................................... 67
6.5.3 Common Comment File ............................................................................................................... 68

7 Basic Operations........................................................................................................................................ 69
7.1 Basic Operations 1 (Steps for Creating a Program for the First Time) ................................................ 70
7.2 Basic Operations 2 (Creating, Monitoring and Testing Programs) ...................................................... 71
7.3 Basic Operations 3 (Correcting Programs Stored in NC) .................................................................... 72
7.4 Basic Operations 4 (Creating Multiple Programs with Multi-program Method) .................................... 73
7.5 Basic Operations 5 (Creating Device Comments) ............................................................................... 74
7.6 Basic Operations 6 (Upgrading the Program Version)......................................................................... 75
7.7 Basic Operations 7 (Loading Programs Created with GX Developer) ................................................. 76

8 Circuit Operations...................................................................................................................................... 77
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)............................................................................................................ 78
8.1.1 Restrictions .................................................................................................................................. 79
8.1.2 Starting and Stopping Monitoring................................................................................................. 80
8.1.3 Device Registration Monitor (Split Screens) ................................................................................ 81
8.1.4 Ladder Entry Monitor (Split Screens)........................................................................................... 84
8.1.5 Registering the Monitor................................................................................................................ 85
8.1.6 Testing the Devices ..................................................................................................................... 87
8.1.7 Changing the Current Value Monitor ........................................................................................... 89
8.1.8 Movement on Split Screen........................................................................................................... 89
8.1.9 Searching..................................................................................................................................... 89
8.1.10 Deleting All the Entry Ladders ................................................................................................... 89
8.1.11 Changing the Split Ratio ............................................................................................................ 90
8.1.12 Setting the Monitor Stop Conditions .......................................................................................... 91
8.2 Editing .................................................................................................................................................. 92
8.2.1 Changing to Circuit Editable Screen ............................................................................................ 93
8.2.2 Restrictions .................................................................................................................................. 94
8.2.3 Inputting a Circuit ......................................................................................................................... 95
8.2.4 Inserting a Line ............................................................................................................................ 98
8.2.5 Deleting a Line ............................................................................................................................. 98
8.2.6 Designating the Range ................................................................................................................ 99
8.2.7 Deleting in a Batch..................................................................................................................... 100
8.2.8 Copy & Paste ............................................................................................................................. 100
8.2.9 Converting a Program................................................................................................................ 101
8.2.10 Editing a Statement.................................................................................................................. 103
8.2.11 Editing a Note .......................................................................................................................... 105
8.2.12 Editing a Comment .................................................................................................................. 106
8.2.13 Editing a PLC Message ........................................................................................................... 107
8.2.14 Undoing the Last Editing Operation ......................................................................................... 111
8.2.15 Ladder Program Writing during RUN by Conversion ............................................................... 112
8.3 Searching and Replacing................................................................................................................... 114
8.3.1 Searching for Ladder (Simple search) ....................................................................................... 114
8.3.2 Searching for Step No. (Simple search) .................................................................................... 116
8.3.3 Searching for Contacts and Coils .............................................................................................. 117
8.3.4 Searching for Device.................................................................................................................. 118
8.3.5 Instruction Search ...................................................................................................................... 120
8.3.6 Step No. Search......................................................................................................................... 122
8.3.7 Character String Search ............................................................................................................ 123
8.3.8 Changing the AB Contacts......................................................................................................... 124
8.3.9 Replacing Devices ..................................................................................................................... 126
 8.3.10 Changing the T/C Setting Value .............................................................................................. 129
8.4 Changing the Displayed Details ......................................................................................................... 130
8.4.1 Program Changeover................................................................................................................. 130
8.4.2 Comment Display....................................................................................................................... 131
8.4.3 Comment ON/OFF..................................................................................................................... 134
8.4.4 Setting the Circuit Display Scale................................................................................................ 135
8.4.5 Restrictions ................................................................................................................................ 138

9 Other Functions ....................................................................................................................................... 139

9.1 Contact Coil Usage List...................................................................................................................... 140
9.2 List of Used Devices .......................................................................................................................... 143
9.3 Program Check .................................................................................................................................. 146

10 Device Monitor Operations ................................................................................................................... 149

10.1 Device Batch Monitor ....................................................................................................................... 151
10.2 Device Registration Monitor ............................................................................................................. 153
10.3 Sampling Trace ................................................................................................................................ 155
10.3.1 MAIN Screen............................................................................................................................ 159
10.3.2 Trace Count Setting ................................................................................................................. 163
10.3.3 Trace Point Setting .................................................................................................................. 165
10.3.4 Trigger Point Setting ................................................................................................................ 169
10.3.5 Trace Data Setting ................................................................................................................... 172
10.3.6 Trace Execution ....................................................................................................................... 174
10.3.7 Trace Result Display................................................................................................................ 176
10.3.8 Creating CSV File .................................................................................................................... 179
10.3.9 File Input .................................................................................................................................. 181
10.3.10 File Output ............................................................................................................................. 182
10.3.11 Deleting File ........................................................................................................................... 183
10.3.12 Selecting Project .................................................................................................................... 184

11 Setting the Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 185

11.1 Setting the Program ......................................................................................................................... 187
11.2 Common Pointer Setting .................................................................................................................. 190

12 File Operations ....................................................................................................................................... 191

12.1 Adding New Data ............................................................................................................................. 193
12.2 Deleting PLC Data ........................................................................................................................... 195
12.3 Renaming the PLC Data .................................................................................................................. 196
12.4 Initialization ...................................................................................................................................... 198

13 NC File Operations................................................................................................................................. 199

13.1 Opening PLC Data from the Temporary Memory ............................................................................ 201
13.2 Saving PLC Data to the Temporary Memory ................................................................................... 205
13.3 Verifying with the PLC Data in the Temporary Memory ................................................................... 207
13.4 Writing PLC Data in Temporary Memory to ROM............................................................................ 209
13.5 Deleting the PLC Data from the Temporary Memory....................................................................... 210
13.6 Formatting the Temporary Memory.................................................................................................. 212
13.7 Controlling the PLC RUN/STOP ...................................................................................................... 213
13.8 Updating the PLC Version (Maintenance Function)......................................................................... 214
13.8.1 Storing the Upgraded Data ...................................................................................................... 215
13.8.2 PLC VERSION UP Screen ...................................................................................................... 216
13.8.3 Operations of This Function..................................................................................................... 217
13.9 Keyword ........................................................................................................................................... 218
13.9.1 Disabling the Keyword on the KEYWORD Screen .................................................................. 219
13.9.2 Disabling the Keyword as Required at the Read or Write Operation ...................................... 220
13.10 File List........................................................................................................................................... 221

14 Project Operation/External File Operations......................................................................................... 223

14.1 Opening PLC Data from a Project.................................................................................................... 226
14.2 Saving PLC Data from a Project ...................................................................................................... 230
 14.3 Deleting a Project............................................................................................................................. 234
14.4 Verifying the Project PLC Data ........................................................................................................ 236

15 Diagnostics............................................................................................................................................. 241
15.1 PLC Diagnostics .............................................................................................................................. 242

16 Help ......................................................................................................................................................... 245

17 Error Messages ...................................................................................................................................... 247

17.1 Warning Messages .......................................................................................................................... 248
17.2 User PLC Alarm ............................................................................................................................... 248
17.3 Error Message ................................................................................................................................. 249

V APPENDIX

1 Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model .............................................................................. 1

1.1 Development Tools, etc. ........................................................................................................................ 2
1.2 Devices and Device Assignments.......................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Instructions with Changed Designation Format ..................................................................................... 7
1.3.1 Alternative Circuits Resulted from the Ban on DEFR Instruction................................................... 9

2 List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer ....................................................................................... 11

2.1 Sequence Instructions ......................................................................................................................... 13
2.2 Comparison Operation Instructions ..................................................................................................... 15
2.3 Application Instructions ........................................................................................................................ 27

3 List of Special Relays and Special Registers.......................................................................................... 35

3.1 Special Relay ....................................................................................................................................... 36
3.2 Special Register................................................................................................................................... 37

4 List of PLC Alarms ..................................................................................................................................... 39

I OUTLINE
 1
System Configuration

I-1
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 System Configuration

1.1 System Configuration for PLC Development

The general configuration of the development environment is shown below.
Most of the development work is carried out with "GX Developer", which runs on a personal computer. GX Developer
and the CNC control unit are connected with Ethernet or an RS-232C cable at this time.
On the CNC unit PLC onboard edit screen, it is possible to use the data saved with GX Developer or develop PLC
programs, as well. Note that some functions may be limited. (Print output, Japanese input, etc.)
(Note 1) Do not connect GX Developer while displaying PLC onboard.
(Note 2) Do not use GX Developer simultaneously when several PCs are connected with NC.

Offline development
Personal computer
GX Developer Printout
General-purpose printer

PLC program creation

Message creation Ladder printout
Ladder monitor Message printout

Ethernet
or IC card (CF card/USB memory)
RS-232C

CNC control unit PLC onboard edit screen

PLC program creation

Ladder monitor
㻾㻻㻹㻌㼙㼍㼗㼕㼚㼓

General configuration of development environment

Note the following points when using the CF card or USB memory.
(1) Do not remove the CF card/USB memory during reading data.
(2) If a card must be inserted and removed while the power is ON, make sure to take sufficient time (approve. ten
seconds or more) between the insertion and removal.
(3) Do not pull out the card or turn OFF the power during access to the CF card. Failure to observe this could cause the
memory contents to be erased.
(4) Do not connect devices other than USB memory (including extension cable and USB hub).
(5) It is recommended to use genuine CF cards. A genuine CF card dedicated for MITSUBISHI CNC is available for
sale. Please contact our sales office in your area for purchasing. MITSUBISHI is unable to guarantee the machine
operation when a commercially available CF card/USB memory is used. In that case, performance check must be
made carefully by machine tool builder.

I-2
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
1.2 User PLC (Ladder) Development Procedure

1.2 User PLC (Ladder) Development Procedure

User PLC programs can be created and input by means of either GX Developer installed in the external PC or PLC
onboard edit screen.
Procedures for creating/inputting PLC programs with either method are shown below.

 Start

GX Developer PLC onboard

Create

Create by GX Developer Create by PLC

onboard

GX Developer PLC onboard

Write into NC
Write
temporary memory

Ethernet RS232C Save sequence program in

Connection IC card by using GX
Developer

Write into NC Write into NC Open the sequence program

temporary memory by temporary memory by saved in IC card by using
using Ethernet using RS232C PLC onboard
communication

Write into NC temporary

memory

Write sequence program into NC

ROM

Complete

I-3
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 System Configuration

Next, procedures for creating sequence programs are shown below.

Procedure Personal Computer CNC Unit

Start

Determination of
machine Determination
of CNC and PLC
specifications
Determination of the Commercially available
numbers of I/O points
spreadsheet tool The data created with the
Device Name Comment
commercially available
Assignment of I/O X0 X-OT X-axis OT
signals X1 Y-OT Y-axis OT spreadsheet tool can be
Assignment of internal X2 Z-OT Z-axis OT
used as ladder comment
relays
data.
GX Developer Onboard
PLC onboard edit screen
Use GX Developer for
Programming programming.
After completion, download
the data through RS-232C.
A new program can also be
created by using the CNC
GX Developer Onboard onboard function.
Debugging
Debugging Perform monitoring/correction
(temporary
(RAM memory)
operation)
with GX Developer's online
function or onboard function.
Program correction

Is debugging Onboard
NO complete? Perform ROM making
YES operations with F-ROM write
screen.
ROM writing

ROM operation by Input/output

CNC unit screen
Output binary data with
Is ROM maintenance data format
operation OK? using input/output screen.
NO
YES GX Developer

Printout Printout to a commercial

printer connected with the
personal computer from GX
Developer.

Program data:
Data save onto FLD
Saved using GX Developer
Binary data:
Completion Program data Binary data
(Maintenance data format) Saved using input/output
screen

It is recommended to use genuine CF cards.

MITSUBISHI is unable to guarantee the machine operation when a commercially available CF card is used.
In that case, performance check must be made carefully by machine tool builder.
A genuine CF card dedicated for MITSUBISHI CNC is available for sale.
Please contact our sales office in your area for purchasing.

I-4
II PROGRAMMING
EXPLANATION
 1
Outline

II - 1
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 Outline

This programming manual is used when creating a sequence program for this CNC using the MELSEC PLC
development software package (GX Developer).
The PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) instructions are largely categorized into the basic instructions, function
instructions and exclusive instructions. There are many types of instructions. The instructions can be used according to
the purpose and application such as the PLC support function used when supporting the user PLCs.

II - 2
 2
PLC Processing Program

II - 3
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 PLC Processing Program

2.1 PLC Processing Program Level and Operation

The details of the user PLC processing level and the time chart are shown below.

PLC processing level

Program name Description (frequency, level, etc.)

This program starts only once at power ON. When this program operates, machine input and
Initial processing program
operation board input are not read.
This program starts periodically at each standard interrupt signal.
This program has the highest level as a program that starts periodically.
It is used in signal processing where high-speed processing is required.
The steps for high-speed processing program should be up to 1000 steps with basic
High-speed processing program
instructions.
(Application example) Position count control of turret and ATC magazine
(Note) The standard interrupt signal cycle differs according to each model, and must be
confirmed separately.
This program runs constantly except during the high-speed process program.
Main processing program When the user PLC one-scan process is completed, the next scan process starts at the next
reference interrupt signal cycle.

When reference interrupt signal is 3.5ms

3.5ms
Reference
interrupt signal

High speed
processing

Main processing

NC processing

PLC processing program operation timing chart

High-speed processing cycle Main processing cycle

M70 TypeB 7.1ms 14.2ms
M700VW, M700VS, M700
3.5ms 14.2ms
M70 TypeA, M70V, E70

II - 4
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.2 Outline of PLC Processing Program (Two Program Method)

2.2 Outline of PLC Processing Program (Two Program Method)

The M7 Series program execution control methods include the conventional method which controls with one program,
and the method that splits the program into multiple sections for each control unit.
When splitting into multiple programs, the order for executing the split programs can be designated on the setting screen.
This is called the multi-programming function.

Method controlling with one program (conventional method) : Independent program method
Method splitting control into multiple programs : Multi-program method

Control with one program Control by splitting into multiple

(Independent control method) programs (Multi-program method)

Program A
Control details A Control details A

Program B
Control details B Control details B Split and register for
each control detail

Program n
Control details n Control details n

II - 5
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 PLC Processing Program

2.3 Independent Program Method

This method lays importance on compatibility with the conventional models.
One sequence program can be stored. The execution type and head of processing are designated with reserved labels.
The execution type and execution order cannot be designated on the setting screen.

- Initialization process (reserved label P4003) : This starts up only once when the power is turned ON.
- High-speed process (reserved label P4001) : This starts up at the standard interrupt cycle.
- Main process (reserved label P4002) : This starts up constantly except during the high-speed process.

II - 6
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.4 Multi-program Method

2.4 Multi-program Method

Several sequence programs can be registered in the CNC and sequentially executed.
By using this function, the sequence program can be split into each process and developed.
With the multi-program method, the execution type and execution order are designated on the GX Developer setting
screen, and the parameter files are sent to the NC.
The execution type and the head of the process cannot be designated with reserved labels.

2.4.1 Number and Types of Registerable Programs

Up to 30 sequence programs (20 for M70V/M70/E70 Series) can be registered. Only one execution type can be set in
one program. The following five types of execution types can be used.

- "Initial" (Initialization process) : This starts up only once when the power is turned ON.
- "Scan" (High-speed process) : This starts up at the standard interrupt cycle.
- "Scan" (Main process) : This starts up constantly except during the high-speed process.
- "Standby" (Standby process) : This is called from the high-speed process or main process.
- "Low speed" : This execution type is not used.

II - 7
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 PLC Processing Program

2.4.2 Program Execution Order

Several programs are executed in a predetermined order. They are not executed simultaneously. The order is
determined with the development tool (GX Developer or onboard) setting screen. The programs are executed from the
smallest number in the same execution type. An example of the setting screen for GX Developer is shown below.

The execution order when seven sequence programs are registered in the CNC, as shown in the above setting screen,
is indicated below.

Executio
Program name Execution type Remarks
n order
INIT Initialization sequence program 1 Starts up only once when the power is turned ON.
HLAD1 High-speed process execution program 1
"Scan type" for which program name starts with "H"
HLAD2 Execution type is set as "Scan" 2
MAIN 1
Main process sequence
MLAD1 2 "Scan type" for which program name does not start with "H"
programExecution type is set as "Scan"
MLAD2 3
Here, subroutine that is called from MLAD2 with CALL
SUB1 Standby sequence program 1
instruction is stored

HLAD1 HLAD2

SUB1
High-speed
process

Main process
MAIN MLAD1 MLAD2 MAIN MLAD1
One scan

(Note) If the process jumps to END (P4005) in the sequence program, the process will jump to the end of each
process (high-speed, main) instead of the end of the program.

II - 8
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.5 User Memory Area Configuration and Size

2.5 User Memory Area Configuration and Size

The user memory area approximate configuration and size are shown below. The configuration and size differ according
to the program method.

2.5.1 Independent Program Method

(1) Internal information table of User PLC
P4001 Control information
(The table is automatically generated.)
(high-speed)
P4002 High speed processing
(2) Sequence program storage area
(medium-
This is not required for programs other than the main process.
speed)
The initialization, high-speed and main process programorder is
arbitrary.
Main processing
User PLC There are 64000 (128000) steps (Note 1) in the storage area,
data area of which the executable area is as follows.

Total M700VS/M700VW Series 64000(128000)steps (Note 1)

M700 Series 42000 steps
- Message data M70V/M70 Series type A 32000 steps
- Contact/coil type B 20000 steps
comment data E70 Series 8000 steps

(3) Data storage area (Other than sequence program)

- Alarm messages
- Operator messages
- PLC switches
- Load meter (Each can be stored in eight languages)
- Contact/coil comment data, etc.

Total M700VS/M700VW Series 256(512)Kbyte (Note 2)

Others 256 Kbyte

(Note 1) 128000 steps is an option.

(Note 2) 512 Kbyte is an option.

2.5.2 Multi-program Method

(1) Internal information table of User PLC

Control information
(The table is automatically generated.)
Program 1
(2) Sequence program storage area
The initialization, high-speed, main and standby processes
Program 2 can be split into multiple programs for each control unit and
stored.
User PLC Program 3 The program storage order is arbitrary.
data area There must be at least one main process.
There are 64000 (128000) steps (Note 1) in the storage area,
of which the executable area is as follows.
Program n
Total M700VS/M700VW Series 64000(128000)steps (Note1)
M700 Series 42000 steps
- Message data M70V/M70 Series type A 32000 steps
- Contact/coil
type B 20000 steps
comment data
E70 Series 8000 steps

(3) Data storage area (Other than sequence program)

- Alarm messages
- Operator messages
- PLC switches
- Load meter (Each can be stored in eight languages)
- Contact/coil comment data, etc.

Total M700VS/M700VW Series 256(512) Kbyte (Note 2)

Others 256 Kbyte

(Note 1) 128000 steps is an option.

(Note 2) 512 Kbyte is an option.

II - 9
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 PLC Processing Program

2.6 Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode

The user memory area storage method and the PLC processing program execution method are explained. User memory
area is stored in the internal flash ROM (internal F-ROM) and a sequence program is executed according to the following
path.

2.6.1 Path from Storage to Execution

(1) During PLC development
Sequence program data transferred from development environment such as GX Developer or PLC onboard is
stored in the volatile RAM (hereinafter, D-RAM) for the temporary memory. The sequence program is transferred to
the PLC processor execution area before PLC execution, and is then executed.
The D-RAM in the temporary memory is not held when the power is turned OFF. If the data needs to be held even
after the power is turned OFF, it must be stored in the internal F-ROM.

(2) At power ON
The data is transferred from the internal F-ROM to the PLC processor execution area via the temporary memory D-
RAM, and is then executed.

Right after the PLC RUN

instruction, converts into the
PLC processor instruction
MELSEC instruction code method and copies to
code format PLC onboard the execution area.
Edit
Transfer Temporary PLC processor
GX Developer memory area Conversion execution area
D-RAM
Manual
save At power ON

Internal F-ROM

CNC

2.6.2 Conversion of Instruction Code at Execution

In the internal F-ROM/temporary memory area shown on the left in the figure above, a sequence program is stored in the
instruction code format that is compatible with the MELSEC sequencer.
During execution, however, a sequence program is analyzed to optimize the references and/or converted into the PLC
processing processor instruction code for the CNC. Thus, the length (number of steps) of an instruction for each
instruction changes before and after the conversion. Refer to ""Explanation of Instructions: Instruction List" for details on
the number of steps during storage and execution for each instruction.

2.6.3 How to Confirm the Number of Steps at Storage/Execution

The number of steps under the PLC development environment (GX Developer, PLC onboard edit function) is usually all
displayed as the number of steps at "storage".
The number of steps at execution can be checked with some dedicated methods. Refer to "III PERIPHERAL
DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT: Sequence Program Development: Writing the Sequence Program to the CNC
Controller: Operations and Check Items at the Other Errors: (2) How to confirm the size of execution area" or "IV
EXPLANATION OF BUILT- IN EDITING FUNCTION: NC File Operations: Saving PLC Data to the Temporary Memory:
(9) EXECUTE STEP" for details.

II - 10
 3
Input/Output Signals

II - 11
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals

3.1 Input/Output Signal Types and Processing

The input/output signals handled in user PLC are as follows:
(1) Input/output from/to controller
(2) Input/output from/to operation board (Note 1)
(3) Input/output from/to machine
The user PLC does not directly input or output these signals from or to hardware or controller; it inputs or outputs the
signals from or to input/output image memory. For the reading and writing with the hardware or controller, the controller
will perform the input/output according to the level of the main process or high-speed process.

Concept of input/output processing

Controller

Input/output
Operation Controller image memory User PLC
board (device X, Y)

Machine

(Note 1) The operation board here refers to when the remote I/O is installed on the communication terminal.

Input/output processing conforming to program level

High-speed processing Main processing
input/output input/output

The controller reads the The controller reads the

high-speed input input other than the high-
designation input, and speed input designation, and
sets in the image memory. sets in the image memory.

User PLC high-speed User PLC main

processing processing

The controller outputs The controller outputs

the high-speed output the output other than the
designation output from high speed output
the image memory to the designation from the
machine. image memory to the machine.

The table below shows whether or not high-speed input/output can be performed.
Whether or not high-speed input/output can be performed

High-speed input High-speed output

specification specification
Input signal from control unit x x
Output signal to control unit x x
Input signal from machine o (2-byte units) x o : Possible
Output signal to machine x o (2-byte units) x : Not possible
Input signal from operation board x x
Output signal to operation board x x
Input signal from MELSEC when connected to
x x
MELSEC
Output signal to MELSEC when connected to
x x
MELSEC
The operation board here refers to when the remote I/O is installed on the communication terminal.

II - 12
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
3.2 Handling of Input Signals Designated for High-speed Input

3.2 Handling of Input Signals Designated for High-speed Input

The input/output signals used in user PLC are input/output for each program level as shown in the figure below.
In high-speed processing, input/output signal for which high-speed input or output designation (parameter) is made is
input or output each time the high-speed processing program runs. In main processing, signals other than the high-
speed input/output designation are input/output.
When high-speed input designation signal is used in main processing, the input signal may change within one scan
because high-speed processing whose level is higher than main processing interrupts. Input signal which must not
change within one scan should be saved in temporary memory (M), etc., at the head of main processing and the
temporary memory should be used in the main program, for example.

Input image memory

PLC one scan

Main processing A B

(1)
High-speed
processing

(2)

(1) Set at the head of main processing.

(2) Set at the head of high-speed processing.

The hatched area is high-speed input designation part. Whenever the high-speed processing program runs, data is reset
in the hatched area. Thus, the signal in the hatched area may change in main processing (A) and (B) because the high-
speed process interrupts between (A) and (B) and re-reads the input signal in the hatched area.

II - 13
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Input/Output Signals

3.3 High-speed Input/Output Designation Method

High-speed input/output is designated by setting the corresponding bit of the bit selection parameter as shown below.
(1) High-speed input designation

These bits correspond

Bit selection 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 bit to the low-order byte
parameter
(bits 0 to 7) of file
#6457
X70 X60 X50 X40 X30 X20 X10 X00 register R7828
: : : : : : : :
X7F X6F X5F X4F X3F X2F X1F X0F
These bits correspond
to the high-order byte
#6458 XF0 XE0 XD0 XC0 XB0 XA0 X90 X80 (bits 8 to F) of file
: : : : : : : : register R7828
XFF XEF XDF XCF XBF XAF X9F X8F

If there are multiple remote I/O connection channels, designate RIO2 with the same configuration as RIO1 above.
RIO2 : Designate X100 to X1FF with bit selection parameters #6459 and #6460
RIO3 : Designate X200 to X2FF with bit selection parameters #6465 and #6466
(2) High-speed output designation

These bits correspond

Bit selection 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 bit to the low-order byte
parameter
(bits 0 to 7) of file
#6461 Y70 Y60 Y50 Y40 Y30 Y20 Y10 Y00 register R7830
: : : : : : : :
Y7F Y6F Y5F Y4F Y3F Y2F Y1F Y0F
These bits correspond
to the high-order byte
#6462 YF0 YE0 YD0 YC0 YB0 YA0 Y90 Y80
(bits 8 to F) of file
: : : : : : : : register R7830
YFF YEF YDF YCF YBF YAF Y9F Y8F

If there are multiple remote I/O connection channels, designate RIO2 with the same configuration as RIO1 above.
RIO2 : Designate Y100 to Y1FF with bit selection parameters #6463 and #6464
RIO3 : Designate Y200 to Y2FF with bit selection parameters #6473 and #6474

- As listed above, one bit corresponds to two bytes (16 points).

- Input or output in which 1 is set in the table is not performed at the main processing program level.
- Although the number of bits set to 1 is not limited, set only necessary ones from viewpoint of overhead.
- High-speed input/output designation corresponds to the bit selection parameter and can be set in the
parameter. However, it is recommended to set in a sequence program to prevent a parameter setting
error, etc.

(Example)  H3 R7828

MOV  ..... To designate X00 to X0F, X10 to X1F (bit 0 and 1 for H3)

II - 14
 4
Parameters

II - 15
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Parameters

4.1 PLC Constants

The parameters that can be used in user PLC include PLC constants set in the data type. The PLC constants include the
basic area and the extended area.

(1) Basic area

Set up data is stored in a file register and is backed up. In contrast, if data is stored in the file register corresponding
to PLC constant by using sequence program MOV instruction, etc., it is backed up.
However, display remains unchanged. Display another screen once and then select the screen again.
150 PLC constants are set (the setting range is ±8 digits). (Signed 4-byte binary data)

PLC constant No. and R register correspondence table

Corresponding
Item (# No.) Details Setting range
register
PLC constant #1 LOW side R7500
(#18001) HIGH side R7501
PLC constant #2 LOW side R7502
(#18002) HIGH side R7503
PLC constant #3 LOW side R7504
(#18003) HIGH side R7505 Data type parameters
-99999999 to 99999999
… … which can be used in user
(Signed 8-digit integer)
LOW side R7794 PLC
PLC constant #148
(#18148) HIGH side R7795
PLC constant #149 LOW side R7796
(#18149) HIGH side R7797
PLC constant #150 LOW side R7798
(#18150) HIGH side R7799

PLC constant setting and display screen

II - 16
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.1 PLC Constants

(2) Extended area

Up to 750 PLC constants can be secured by using the user backup area (R8300 to R9799) as the extended area.
The extended area start register and number can be set with the parameters. A total of 900 PLC constants can be
set with 150 (#18001 to #18150) in the basic area and up to 750 (#18151 to #18900) in the extended area.
Set up data is stored in a file register and is backed up. In contrast, if data is stored in the file register corresponding
to PLC constant by using sequence program MOV instruction, etc., it is backed up.
However, display remains unchanged. Display another screen once and then select the screen again.
750 PLC constants are set (the setting range is ±8 digits). (Signed 4-byte binary data)

PLC constant No. and R register correspondence table

Corresponding
Item (# No.) Details Setting range
register
PLC constant #151 LOW side
(#18151) HIGH side
PLC constant #152 LOW side
(#18152) HIGH side
PLC constant #153 LOW side R8300 to R9799
(#18153) HIGH side The area for the
Data type parameters
number determined -99999999 to 99999999
… which can be used in user
with parameter (Signed 8-digit integer)
LOW side PLC
PLC constant #898 #1326 is continuously
(#18898) HIGH side secured.
PLC constant #899 LOW side
(#18899) HIGH side
PLC constant #900 LOW side
(#18900) HIGH side

The extended area quantity is set with basic common parameter #1326.

# No. Item Details Setting range

- Set number of PLC constant extension points.
1326 PLC Const Ext. Number - This is valid after the power is turned OFF and 0 ～ 750
ON.

II - 17
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Parameters

4.2 Bit Selection Parameters

The parameters that can be used in user PLC include bit selection parameters set in the bit type.
Set up data is stored in a file register and is backed up.
When using bit operation in a sequence program, use a word device bit-designation format.
If data is stored in the file register corresponding to bit selection by using the MOV instruction etc., it is backed up.
However, display remains unchanged. Once display another screen and again select screen.
The corresponding between the bit selection parameters and file registers is listed below. The setting and display
screens are also shown.

Bit selection parameter (# No.) Corresponding register Details Setting range

#1 (#6401) R7800-Low side
#2 (#6402) R7800-High side
#3 (#6403) R7801-L
#4 (#6404) R7801-H
Use bit selection parameters
... ...
#6401 to #6448 freely.
#45 (#6445) R7822-L
#46 (#6446) R7822-H
#47 (#6447) R7823-L
#48 (#6448) R7823-H
#49 (#6449) R7824-L
#50 (#6450) R7824-H
#51 (#6451) R7825-L
Bit selection parameter #6449 to
#52 (#6452) R7825-H #6496 are PLC operation
... ... parameters used by the machine
#93 (#6493) R7846-L tool builder and MITSUBISHI.
The contents are fixed.
#94 (#6494) R7846-H
#95 (#6495) R7847-L
#96 (#6496) R7847-H
#97 (#6497) R7848-L
#98 (#6498) R7848-H 8 bits
#99 (#6499) R7849-L
#100 (#6500) R7849-H
#101 (#6501) R7850-L
#102 (#6502) R7850-H
#103 (#6503) R7851-L
#104 (#6504) R7851-H
#105 (#6505) R7852-L
#106 (#6506) R7852-H
Use bit selection parameters
... ...
#6497 to #6596 freely.
#187 (#6587) R7893-L
#188 (#6588) R7893-H
#189 (#6589) R7894-L
#190 (#6590) R7894-H
#191 (#6591) R7895-L
#192 (#6592) R7895-H
#193 (#6593) R7896-L
#194 (#6594) R7896-H
#195 (#6595) R7897-L
#196 (#6596) R7897-H

II - 18
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.2 Bit Selection Parameters

Contents of bit selection parameters #6449 to #6496

Symbol
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
name
#6449 Setting and Battery alarm /
Control unit Integrated
display unit warning Counter C PLC counter PLC timer
0 R7824 L thermal - detection timer ST
thermal retention program on program on
alarm on disabled retention
mgmt on
#6450 External 1 0
alarm Alarm/ Full screen R F
Operator Alarm
1 R7824 H - operator display of -
message message on method method message
change message
display on
#6451 GX Onboard Onboard
Developer editing not simple Onboard
2 R7825 L - - serial
communication
possible operation mode on
on on
#6452 Branch
destination Serial handy Extended PLC
3 R7825 H - terminal - - instruction -
label check
comm. on mode valid
valid
#6453 Integrated timer ST
4 R7826 L - Variable/fixed
- - Message language change code
Number of points setting

#6454 Counter C Timer T

5 R7826 H Variable/fixed Variable/fixed
Number of points setting Number of points setting

#6455 Enable Enable ladder

ladder program writ-
R device access variables 
6 R7827 L program ing during RUN - - - - - -
writing (in high-speed decimal point valid region
during RUN processing)
#6456
7 R7827 H - - - - - - - -

#6457
8 R7828 L
High-speed input specification 1
#6458
9 R7828 H

#6459
A R7829 L
High-speed input specification 2
#6460
B R7829 H

#6461
C R7830 L
High-speed output specification 1
#6462
D R7830 H

#6463
E R7831 L

High-speed output specification 2

#6464
F R7831 H

II - 19
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Parameters

Symbol
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
name
#6465
0 - - - - - - - -
R7832 L High-speed input specification 3
#6466
1 R7832 H - - - - - - - -

#6467
2 R7833 L - - - - - - - -
High-speed input specification 4
#6468
3 R7833 H
#6469
4 R7834 L - - - - - - - -

#6470
5 R7834 H - - - - - - - -

#6471
6 R7835 L - - - - - - - -

#6472
7 R7835 H - - - - - - - -

#6473
8 R7836 L - -
High-speed output specification 3
#6474
9 R7836 H
#6475
A R7837 L
High-speed output specification 4
#6476
B R7837 H
#6477
C R7838 L - - - - - - - -

#6478
D R7838 H - - - - - - - -

#6479
E R7839 L - - - - - - - -

#6480
F R7839 H - - - - - - - -

(Note 1) Be sure to set the bits indicated - and blanks to 0.

(Note 2) Parameters #6481 to #6496 are reserved for debugging by MITSUBISHI.
(Note 3) Functions marked with ■ may not be available for some machine types.

II - 20
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.2 Bit Selection Parameters

Bit selection screen

II - 21
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Parameters

4.3 Other Parameters

4.3.1 PLC Startup Condition Switchover
Parameter "#11004 PLCautorun enable" allows PLC to startup at NC startup even if no setting display unit is used.
For safety, use this function only for the machine with no NC screen displayed by HMI.

(1) Basic common parameter

# No. Item Details Setting range Standard value

Switch starting condition of the PLC.
11004 PLCautorun PLC automatic
0: Start PLC after NC screen startup 0,1 0
(PR) enable startup valid
1: Start PLC at NC startup

(2) Precautions
Parameter "#11004 PLCautorun enable" is the parameter prepared on the assumption that the setting and display
unit is not used.
For the machine with NC screen displayed, to ensure your safety, always set "#11004 PLCautorun enable" to "0"
and start PLC after NC screen startup.
When PLC automatic startup is validated without confirming the pre-operation status on the NC screen, unexpected
incident may occur.

4.3.2 SRAM.BIN Output type

Select the SRAM output type by this parameter.

Setting Standard
# No. Item Details
range value
SSet the SRAM output type.
(Note) In M700 Series, the conventional SRAM output type is set
regardless of the setting of this parameter.
11022 SRAM Output Type 0: The latest SRAM output type is set. 0,1 0
(Not compatible with F3 and versions older than F3.)
1: The conventional SRAM output type is set.
(Compatible with F3 and versions older than F3.)
(Note 1) When it is set to "1", R13312 and subsequent are not output.
(Note 2) When the power is turned ON again, this parameter returns to "0 (the latest SRAM output type)".

II - 22
 5
Explanation of Devices

II - 23
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Devices

5.1 Devices and Device No.

The devices are address symbols to identify signals handled in PLC. The device Nos. are serial Nos. assigned to the
devices. The device Nos. of devices X, Y, SB, B, SW, W and H are represented in hexadecimal notation. The device
numbers of other devices are represented in decimal notation.

5.2 List of Devices

Device Device Range Units Details Remarks
X X0 to X1FFF 8192 points 1-bit Input signals to the PLC. Machine input, etc.
Y Y0 to Y1FFF 8192 points 1-bit Output signals from the PLC. Machine output,etc.
M M0 to M10239 10240 points 1-bit Temporary memory
L L0 to L511 512 points 1-bit Latch relay (Backup memory)
F F0 to F1023 1024 points 1-bit Temporary memory. Alarm message interface
SB SB to SB1FF 512 points 1-bit Special relay for link
B B0 to B1FFF 8192 points 1-bit Link relay
SM SM0 to SM1023 1024 points 1-bit Special relay
V V0 to V255 256 points 1-bit Edge relay
SW SW0 to SW1FF 512 points 16-bit Special register for link
SD SD0 to SD1023 1024 points 16-bit Special register
T T0 to T703 704 points 1-bit/16-bit Timer (Fixed/variable boundary is set with parameters) *1
Incremented timer (100ms unit)
ST ST0 to ST63 64 points 1-bit/16-bit
(Fixed/variable boundary is set with parameter)
Counter (Fixed/variable boundary is set with
C C0 to C255 256 points 1-bit/16-bit
parameters)
D D0 to D2047 2048 points 16-bit/32-bit Data register. Register for calculation
R R0 to R32767 32768 points 16-bit/32-bit File register. CNC word I/F
W W0 to W1FFF 8192 points 16-bit/32-bit Link register
Z Z0 to Z1 2 points 16-bit Address index *2
N N0 to N7 8 points Master controller nesting level
P0 to P2047
P 2048 points Conditional jump, subroutine call label *3
P4000 to P4005
K-32768 to K32767 Decimal constant for 16-bit instruction
K
K-2147483648 to K2147483647 Decimal constant for 32-bit instruction
H0 to HFFFF Hexadecimal constant for 16-bit instruction
H
H0 to HFFFFFFFF Hexadecimal constant for 32-bit instruction

*1 : The 10ms timer and 100ms timer are differentiated with instructions. (Refer to Explanation of Devices: Timer T)
*2 : The Z device has 14 points, Z0 to Z13 when the machine has extended index modification.
*3 : The P device has two types of pointers, local and common. The number of points given above is the total number of
points.
*4 : For M700 Series, the number of points for the file register are R0 to R13311 (13312 points).

II - 24
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.1 Input/Output X, Y
Input/output X and Y are windows for executing communication with the PLC and external device or controller.

Input X
(a)This issued commands or data from an external device such as a push-button, changeover switch, limit switch or
digital switch to the PLC.

(b)Assuming that there is a hypothetical relay Xn built-in the PLC per input point, the program uses the "A" contact and
"B" contact of that Xn.

(c)There is no limit to the number of "A" contacts and "B" contacts of the input Xn that can be used in the program.

PLC
Hypothetical relay

PB1 X10 X10

LS2 X11 X11

PB16 X1F X1F

‫ޟ‬ ‫ޟ‬ ‫ޟ‬

Input circuit Program

(d)The input No. is expressed with a hexadecimal.

utput Y
(a)This outputs the results of the program control to the solenoid, magnetic switch, signal lamp or digital indicator, etc.

(b)The output (Y) can be retrieved with the equivalent of one "A" contact.

(c)There is no limit to the number of "A" contacts and "B" contacts of the output Yn that can be used in the program.

PLC

Y10
24V

Y10 Load

Y10

Y10

Program Output circuit

(d)The output No. is expressed with a hexadecimal.

II - 25
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Devices

5.3.2 Internal Relays M and F, Latch Relay L

The internal relay and latch relay are auxiliary relays in the PLC that cannot directly output to an external source.

Internal relay M
(a)The relay is cleared when the power is turned OFF.

(b)There is no limit to the number of "A" contacts and "B" contacts of the internal relays that can be used in the program.

(c)The internal relay No. is expressed with a decimal.

Internal relay F
Internal relay F is an interface for the alarm message display.
Use the bit selection parameter to determine whether to use this relay for the alarm message interface.
The target will be all F0 to F1023. This internal relay can be used in the same manner as the internal relay M when not
used as the alarm message interface.

Latch relay L
(a)The original state is held even when the power is turned OFF.

(b)There is no limit to the number of "A" contacts and "B" contacts of the latch relay that can be used in the program.

(c)The latch No. is expressed with a decimal.

5.3.3 Special Relay for Link (SB), Special Register for Link (SW)

Special relay for link (SB)

(a)This interacts between various kinds of network cards and PLC programs.

(b)ON/OFF control is applied due to various factors occurred at the time of data link. By monitoring the special relay
for link, abnormal state of data link can be detected.

Special register for link (SW)

(a)This interacts between various kinds of network cards and PLC programs.

(b)Information at the time of data link is stored. By monitoring the special register for link, abnormal area and the cause
can be examined.

5.3.4 Link Relay B, Link Register W

(1) Link relay B is the bit type device that performs data link with various link functions.
Unused area can be used as the primary memory, etc.

(2) Link register W is the word type device that performs data link with various link functions.
Unused area can be used as the primary memory, etc.

Link relay B, link register W

(a)This relay is cleared when the power is turned OFF.

(b)There is no limit in the number that can be used in the program.

(c)The relay and register No. are expressed with a hexadecimal.

II - 26
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.5 Special Relay SM, Special Register SD

(1) Special relay is the relay whose application is fixed. (i.e. Carry flag of operation result, display request
signal to the setting display device, etc.) Do not use the currently unused area from SM0 to SM1023 as
the primary memory.

(2) Special register SD is the data register whose application is fixed. (i.e. 1-second counter) Do not use the
currently unused area from SD0 to SD1023 as the primary memory.

Link relay B, link register W

(a) This relay is cleared when the power is turned OFF.
(b) There is no limit in the number that can be used in the program.
(c) The relay and register No. are expressed with a decimal.

(3) Some of the main relays and registers whose applications are fixed are listed below.
Refer to "V APPENDIX: List of Special Relays and Special Registers" for details.

Device Name Outline

SM0 PLC error Turns ON at PLC error occurrence; resets when
changed from STOP to RUN.
SM12 Carry flag Carry flag used during function instruction.
SM400 Always ON Always ON
SM401 Always OFF Always OFF
SM402 After RUN, turned ON by only (For medium-speed ladder)
1 scan.
SM403 After RUN, turned OFF by
only 1 scan.
SM404 After RUN, turned ON by only (For high-speed ladder)
1 scan.
SM405 After RUN, turned OFF by
only 1 scan.
SM410 0.1-second clock - ON/OFF is repeated by the specified second.
SM411 0.2-second clock - Operation is continued even during STOP.
SM412 1-second clock - Starts from OFF when the power is turned ON.
SM413 2-second clock
SM414 2n-second clock ON/OFF is repeated according to the second
specified with SD414.
Device Name Details
SD0 PLC error No. Error code when a PLC error occurs.
SD412 1-second clock Number of counts in 1sec unit
SD414 2n-second clock set Used for the 2n-second clock setting
SD420 Scan counter (Medium-speed Number of counts per 1 scan
ladder) - After RUN, +1 is added every 1 scan.
SD430 Scan counter (High-speed
ladder)

II - 27
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Devices

5.3.6 Edge Relay V

Edge relay V
(a)This stores the operation result (ON/OFF information) from the head of ladder block.
(b) This can be used only at contacts. This cannot be used as a coil.

X0 X1 X10 V1

Edge relay
Operation results of X0,X1 and X10
are stored.

(c)The relay No. is expressed with a decimal.

5.3.7 Timer T
(1) The 100ms timer and 10ms timer are available for this count-up type timer.
The 100ms timer and 10ms timer are differentiated by the instructions used. Refer to the following explanation
on basic instructions for details.

100ms Timer T
(a)When the input conditions are set, the count starts. When the set value is counted, that timer contact will turn ON.
(b)If the input conditions are turned OFF, the 100ms timer count value will be set to 0, and the contact will turn OFF.

ON
X5 X5 OFF
K50
ࠕ
T193 T193 coil OFF ON
5 seconds
T193 contact OFF
Input 100ms timer
conditions ON

(c)The value is set with a decimal, and can be designated from 1 to 32767 (0.1 to 3276.7 s).The data register D or file
register R data can be used as the setting value.

10ms Timer T
(a)When the input conditions are set, the count starts. When the set value is counted, that timer contact will turn ON.
(b)If the input conditions are turned OFF, the 10ms timer count value will be set to 0, and the contact will turn OFF

Display for 10ms timer instruction

ON
X5 X5 OFF
H K500
T1 T1 coil OFF ON
5 secnds
T1 contact OFF
Input 10ms timer
conditions ON

(c)The value is set with a decimal, and can be designated from 1 to 32767 (0.01 to 327.67 s). The data register D or
file register R data can be used as the setting value.

(2) With the device T, the contact/coil is handled as bit device, and the current value is handled as word device.
In the function instructions described after, the word device T indicates the current value even if there is
no description about it.

II - 28
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

(3) Setting the timer setting value from the setting and display unit
The timer T setting value can be set with the following two methods.
・Method to validate the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program (Fixed timer)
・Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (Variable timer)
(Note that even when this method is used, the setting value (Kn) must be programmed in the sequence
program. In this case, the Kn value will be ignored during the operation. When a data register D is used for the
setting value, the contents of the data register D will be the setting value regardless of the parameter.)

(a) Methods for setting the number of fixed timer and variable timer points
The ratio of the fixed timer and variable timer in all of the timer T points can be set with the bit selection
parameter.
The boundary of the two setting methods is set using 100 points of the timer as one unit. This setting is
validated when the PLC is restarted.

Variable timer Bit selection (#6454)

Remarks
Number of points Range Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 0 0 Use all points as fixed timer
100 (0 to 99) 0 0 0 1
200 (0 to 199) 0 0 1 0
300 (0 to 299) 0 0 1 1 Use range other than that shown on
400 (0 to 399) 0 1 0 0 left as fixed timer
500 (0 to 499) 0 1 0 1
600 (0 to 599) 0 1 1 0
All points (0 to 703) 0 1 1 1 Use all points as variable timer

(b) Variable timer validity setting bit on program side

A bit selection parameter is provided as a switch for the variable timer to invalidate all of the setting
values set from the setting and display unit and validate the setting values in the sequence program. This
setting is valid when the PLC is restarted. (This bit is valid also for the integrated timer.)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
# (6449) Data (0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1)
↑
0: PLC timer screen setting valid
Use No. 6449
1: PLC timer program valid
0: PLC counter screen setting valid
1: PLC counter program valid

(c) Methods for setting the setting value from the setting and display unit
The timer and counter setting value can be set from the parameter setting screen. Steps 1 to 4 also apply
for the counter.

1) The set value is validated when the PLC is restarted.

2) On the setting screen, only the number of variable timer points set with (a) are valid. The (a) setting
is immediately reflected on the display of the settable range.
3) The setting screen values are not affected even if the (b) "variable timer validity setting bit on
program side" setting is changed.
4) It is possible to judge whether the setting value is valid within the current storage ladder (whether
that timer is used with the setting value (Kn) in the ladder).
5) The timer type (10ms, 100ms) can be judged on the setting screen.

II - 29
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Devices

5.3.8 Integrated Timer ST

(1) The 100ms integrated timer is available for this count-up type timer.

100ms Integrated timer ST

(a)When the input conditions are set, the count starts. When the set value is counted, that timer contact will turn ON.
(b)Even the input conditions are turned OFF, the 100ms integrated timer current value (count value) will be held, and the contact
state will not change.
(c)The 100ms integrated timer count value will be set to 0 and the contact will turn OFF when the RST instruction is executed.

X5
K100
ST47 ON
X5 OFF 9 seconds 6 seconds
Input conditions 1.5 seconds
X7 100ms integrated timer
ON
RST ST47 X7 OFF

Reset input ST47 reset instruction

ON
9 seconds 6 seconds
ST47 coil OFF
1 second

ON
ST47 contact OFF

ST47 current value 0 1 90 91 100 0 1 60

(d)The value is set with a decimal, and can be designated from 1 to 32767 (0.1 to 3267.7 s). The data register D or file register
R data can be used as the setting value.
(e)When the bit selection parameter is set, the 100ms integrated timer current value (count value) will be held even when the
power is turned OFF.

(2) Handling the device ST types

With the device ST, the contact/coil is handled as bit device, and the current value is handled as word device.
In the function instructions described after, the word device T indicates the current value even if there is no
description about it.

(3) Setting the timer setting value from the setting and display unit
The ratio of the variable and fixed can be set with the bit selection parameter in the same manner as timer T.

Variable integrated timer Bit selection (#6453)

Remarks
Number of points Range Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5
0 0 0 0 Use all points as fixed integrated timer
20 (0 to 19) 0 0 1 Use range other than that shown on left
40 (0 to 39) 0 1 0 as fixed integrated counter
All points (0 to 63) 0 1 1 Use all points as variable integrated timer

In the same manner as timer T, a bit selection parameter is provided as a switch for the variable integrated timer to
invalidate all of the setting values set from the setting and display unit and validate the setting values in the
sequence program. (This bit is used for both the timer T and integrated timer ST.)

II - 30
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.9 Counter C
(1)The counter counts up and detects the rising edge of the input conditions. Thus, the count will not take place when the
input conditions are ON.

Counter C
(a)The value is set with a decimal, and can be designated from 1 to 32767. The data register D or file register R data
can be used as the setting value.
(b)The counter count value will not be cleared even if the input conditions turn OFF. The counter count value must be
cleared with the RST instruction.
(c)When the bit selection parameter is set, the counter current value (count value) will be held even when the power
is turned OFF. Note that some cannot be held depending on the version of CNC.

(2)With the device C, the contact/coil is handled as bit device, and the current value (counter value) is handled as word
device.
In the function instructions described after, the word device C indicates the current value (counter value) even if
there is no description about it.

(3)The counter C setting value can be set with the following two methods.
(a)Method to validate the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program (Fixed counter)
(b)Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (Variable counter)
(Note that even when this method is used, the setting value (Kn) must be programmed in the sequence
program. In this case, the Kn value will be ignored during the operation. When a data register D is used for the
setting value, the contents of the data register D will be the setting value regardless of the parameter.)

The ratio of the fixed counter and variable counter in all of the counter C points can be set with the bit selection
parameter.

Variable counter Bit selection (#6454)

Remarks
Number of points Range Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
0 0 0 0 0 Use all points as fixed counter
40 (0 to 39) 0 0 0 1
80 (0 to 79) 0 0 1 0
120 (0 to 119) 0 0 1 1 Use range other than that shown on
160 (0 to 159) 0 1 0 0 left as fixed counter
200 (0 to 199) 0 1 0 1
240 (0 to 239) 0 1 1 0
All points (0 to 255) 0 1 1 1 Use all points as variable counter

The bit selection parameter is set using 40 counter points as one unit.
A bit selection parameter is provided as a switch for the variable counter to invalidate all of the setting values
set from the setting and display unit and validate the setting values in the sequence program. (Refer to the
explanation on the timer.)

II - 31
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Devices

5.3.10 Data Register D

(1)The data register is the memory that stores the data in the PLC.

(2)The data register has a 1-point 16-bit configuration, and can be read and written in 16-bit units.
To handle 32-bit data, two points must be used. The data register No. designated with the 32-bit instruction
will be the low-order 16-bit, and the designated data register No. +1 will be the high-order 16-bit.

Circuit example (Example) Use of the DMOV instruction is shown below.

The X0 to 1F data is
0 DMOV K8X0 D0 stored in D0, 1.

Data storage
D1 D0

High-order 16-bit Low-order 16-bit

(X1F to X10) (XF to X0)

(3)The data that is stored once in the sequence program is held until other data is stored.

(4)The data stored in the data register is cleared when the power is turned OFF.

(5)Values that can be stored:

Decimal -32768 to 32767 

For 16-bit instruction(Using Dn)
Hexadecimal 0 to FFFF
   

Decimal 
-2147483648 to 2147483647  For 32-bit instruction 


Hexadecimal 0 to FFFFFFFF  (Using Dn+1, Dn) 

(6)Data registers D0 to D2047 are all user release data registers.

II - 32
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.11 File Register R

(1) As with the data registers, the file registers are memories used to store data. However, there are some that have
fixed applications, and those that are released.
The file register has a 1-point 16-bit configuration, and can be read and written in 16-bit units.
To handle 32-bit data, two points must be used. The file register No. designated with the 32-bit instruction will be the
low-order 16-bit, and the designated file register No. +1 will be the high-order 16-bit.

Circuit example (Example) Use of the DMOV instruction is shown below.

The X0 to 1F data is
0 DMOV K8X0 R0 stored in R0, 1.

Data storage
R1 R0
High-order 16-bit Low-order 16-bit

(X1F to X10) (XF to X0)

(2) The data that is stored once in the sequence program is held until other data is stored.

(3) With the file registers, the following registers are the user release.

Data are not cleared even when the power is turned

R8300 ～ R9799
OFF.
R9800 ～ R9899
Data are not cleared even when the power is turned
R18300 ～ R19799
OFF.
R19800 ～ R19899
Not available with M700 Series
Data are not cleared even when the power is turned
R28300 ～ R29799
OFF.
R29800 ～ R29899

The other file registers have fixed applications such as interface of the PLC and CNC, parameter interface, etc., so
use according to the application.

(4) Values that can be stored:

Decimal -32768 to 32767 

For 16-bit instruction(Using Rn)
Hexadecimal 0 to FFFF
   

Decimal 
-2147483648 to 2147483647  For 32-bit instruction 


Hexadecimal 0 to FFFFFFFF  (Using Rn+1, Rn) 

II - 33
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Devices

5.3.12 Index register Z

(1)The index register is used as ornaments for the device. *

159 MOV K3 Z0

165 MOV K4X0 D5Z0 D5Z0 indicates D(5+Z0)=D8

(2)The index register has a 1-point 16-bit configuration, and can be read and written in 16-bit units.

(3)The data stored in the index register is cleared when the power is turned OFF.

(4)Values that can be stored:Decimal　-32768 to 32767

Hexadecimal　0 to FFFF

* Refer to " Explanation of Instructions: Index Modification" for the modifiaction target device.

II - 34
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.13 Nesting N
(1)This indicates the master control nesting structure.

(2)The master control nesting N is used in order from smallest No.

MC N0 M15
N0 M15

B Execute when A condition is set.

MC N1 M16
N1 M16

C Execute when A, B conditions are set.

MC N2 M17
N2 M17

Execute when A, B, C conditions are set.

MCR N2
Reset MC2 to 7
Execute when A, B conditions are set.
MCR N1
Reset MC1 to 7
Execute when A condition is set.
Reset MC0 to 7
MCR N0

Execute regardless of A,B,C conditions.

(a)The conditions for each master control to turn ON are as follow.

　MC　N0　M15　........　ON when condition A is ON
　MC　N0　M16　........　ON when conditions A, B are ON
　MC　N0　M17　........　ON when conditions A, B, C are ON

(b)The timer and counter when the master control is OFF is as follows.
・100ms timer, 10ms timer : The count value is set to 0.
・100ms integrated timer : The current count value is retained.
・Counter : The current counter value is retained.
・OUT instruction : All turn OFF

II - 35
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Devices

5.3.14 Pointer P
(1)What is a pointer?
A pointer is a device used with branch instructions. A total of 2048 points is used in all executed programs.
The reserved pointers use the 4000 addresses separately.

(2)Pointer applications
(a)Jump instruction (CJ, JMP) jump destination designation and label (Designation of jump destination head)

X13
CJ P20 Jump to label P20 when
X13 turns ON.
Label
Pointer

P20

(b)Subroutine call instruction (CALL) call destination and label (Designation of subroutine program head)

X10
CALL P33 Execute sub-routine
Label program designated with
Pointer
label P33 when X10 turns
P33 ON.

RET

(3)Types of pointers
The details of the pointers differ according to the program method.
(a)Independent program method
The following two types of pointers are used.
・General pointer 　:　Pointer which can jump or call with a jump instruction or subroutine call instruction
・Reserved pointer　:　Pointer with fixed application, such as a start label

(b)Multi-program method
The following three types of pointers are used.
・Local pointer 　:　Pointer used independently in each program
・Common pointer　:　Pointer which can be called with subroutine call instruction from all programs being
executed
・Reserved pointer　:　Pointer with fixed application, such as an END label

5.3.14.1 General Pointers

General pointers are pointer which can be used only with the independent program method, which lays importance on
compatibility with conventional models.
The general pointer can be used with the jump instructions and subroutine call instructions. The same pointer No. cannot
be used.

II - 36
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.14.2 Local Pointers

Local pointers are pointers that can be used only with the multi-program method.
(1)What is a local pointer?
(a)A local pointer is a pointer that can be used independently with each program stored in the CNC controller.
The local pointer can be used with the jump instructions and subroutine call instructions.
(b)The same pointer No. can be used in each program.
The pointers from P0 to the common pointer usage range setting value (P0 to P2047) can be used.

Program A Program B
The same pointer
can be used.
CALL P0 CALL P0

FEND FEND

P0 P0

RET RET

END END

(2)Concept of number of local pointer points

The local pointers split and use the local pointer area (arbitrarily settable with user settings) in all programs. Up to
the maximum No. of local pointers in use can be used in each program. When using the local pointers in multiple
programs, start use from P0.
An error will occur if the total of local pointers used in each program exceeds the setting number.

Program A Program B Program C

Use P0 to P99 Use P100 to P199 Use only P249

in the program in the program in the program

100 points from P0 to 200 points from P0 to 250 points from P0 to Total of 550 points
P99 are occupied P199 are occupied P249 are occupied are used

When P0 to P99 are When P0 is

used, only 100 used, only one
points are occupied. point is occupied.

II - 37
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Devices

5.3.14.3 Common Pointers

Common pointers are pointers that can be used only with the multi-program method.
(1)What is a common pointer?
(a)A common pointer is a pointer that calls the subroutine program from all programs executed with the CNC
controller.
The common pointer can be used only with the subroutine call instruction, and cannot be used with the jump
instruction.
(b)The same pointer No. cannot be used as a label.

Program A Program C

CALL P1804 P1804 CALL P0

END RET

Program B P1805

CALL P1805 RET

END END

(2)Common pointer usage range

The common pointer usage range can be set with the GX Developer parameter settings. The range following the
set No. is the common pointers. The range that can be set as the head No. of the common pointer is P0 to P2047.
The default value is set to 1800, and P1800 to P2047 can be used as common pointers.

II - 38
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices

5.3.14.4 Reserved Pointers

Reserved pointers are pointers with fixed applications.

(1)Independent program method

P4001 (high-speed) : Start label for PLC high-speed processing program.
P4002 (medium-speed) : Start label for PLC main (ladder) processing program.
P4005 (END) : Label indicating END.

P4005 (END) can be used as a device for the CJ instruction, etc., but cannot be used as a label.
In addition, it cannot be used for a CALL instruction device.

X17
723 CJ P4005 Jump to END when X17
turns ON.
726

[CAUTION]
1.Do not omit the P4002 (medium-speed) label even when using only the PLC main processing program.
2.Do not use P4001 (high-speed) or P4002 (medium-speed) as a CJ instruction or CALL instruction device.
3.Do not program to jump to P** in the PLC high-speed processing program from the PLC main processing
program.
4.P** used as a CJ instruction or CALL instruction device must be programmed so that it is in the same
program file as the label instruction.

The PLC will not run properly if even one of Cautions 1 to 4 is not observed.

(2)Multi-program method
(a)Label indicating END (P4005)
P4005 is used as the CJ instruction jump destination, and cannot be used as a normal label. It also cannot be
used as the CALL instruction call destination.
If CJ P4005 is executed when multiple PLC programs are registered with the multi-programming function, the
process will jump to the end of all PLC programs (in other words, the scan process is canceled).

To jump to end of all processes

X17
CJ P4005 Cancel process (jump to
END of last program in
process) when X17 turns
ON.

II - 39
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Devices

The following two methods of jumping to the end of each program are available.
・Sets the local pointer right before the END instruction and jumps to that position.
・Executes GOEND instruction. (Usable only with the extended instruction mode)

To jump to the end of the program

X17
CJ P100 Jump to pointer before
END when X17 turns
ON.

P100 END

X17
GOEND Jump to END with
GOEND instruction
when X17 turns ON.

[Cautions for pointers in multi-program method]

1.Each process (initialization, high-speed, main) is executed from the head of the program executed at the
start of each process.
Thus, the reserved labels for starting, used with the conventional models, cannot be used.
2.The common pointers can be used only with subroutine call instructions, and cannot be used with jump
instructions.
3.The labels using the CJ instruction, JMP instruction or CALL instruction as a device must be programmed so
that one of the following exists.
・If the pointer is a local pointer, it must exist in the same program file as the used instruction.
・If the pointer is a common pointer, it must exist in one of the registered program files.

The PLC will not run properly if even one of Cautions 1 to 3 is not observed.

5.3.15 Decimal Constant K

(1)The decimal constant can be used in the following ways.

(a)Timer counter setting value : Designate in the range of 1 to 32767.

(b)Pointer No. : 0 to 159
(c)Bit device digit designation : 1 to 8
(d)Basic instruction, function instruction, exclusive instruction value setting
16-bit instruction : -32768 to 32767
32-bit instruction : -2147483648 to 2147483647

(2)The decimal constant is stored by binary value in the PLC.

5.3.16 Hexadecimal Constant H

(1)The hexadecimal constant is used to designate the basic instruction, function instruction and exclusive instruction
values.
16-bit instruction : 0 to FFFF
32-bit instruction : 0 to FFFFFFFF

II - 40
 6
Explanation of Instructions

II - 41
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

6.1 Compatible Instructions and Extended Instructions

The following two PLC instruction modes are available with this CNC. Some model has extended index Modification in
the extended PLC instruction mode. Characteristics and setting methods for these instructions are explained here.
・Compatible PLC instruction mode
・ Extended PLC instruction mode (Model with extended index Modification: M700/M70V/E70 Series)
(Note) The index modification is available from Version G1 and above for M70V typeB.

(1) Outline and differences of each mode

"Compatible PLC instruction mode" is upward compatible with those of the conventional machine type. In this
mode, the PLC instruction specification which is conventionally compatible with can be used. Thus if the extended
PLC instruction is used, an execution error occurs at the time of input or edit.

"Extended PLC instruction mode" is set when the extended instruction specification is used. "Extended PLC
instruction mode" includes the specification of "Compatible PLC instruction mode". (Note that operations may differ
for some instructions. Details are explained later.)
Specifications for each mode are given below.

Extended PLC instruction mode

Conventional Compatible PLC
Extended index
machine type instruction mode
Modification
Number of basic
instructions
22 instructions ← 37 instructions ←

Number of function
instructions
71 instructions ← 198 instructions ←

Usable device 15 devices 22 devices ← ←

Device designation range of Extended +Index
instruction argument
- ← Extended
Modification

(2) Setting method of PLC instruction mode

PLC instruction mode is set by bit selection parameter #6452.
(a) Bit selection parameter

# No. Bit Item Details Setting range Standard value

The condition of the usable instruction for the built-in
PLC instruction PLC can be switched.
6452 Bit 1 0,1 0
extension valid 0: Operated in the compatible PLC instruction mode
1: Operated in the extended PLC instruction mode

(b) Notes
- This parameter will be valid when the power is turned OFF and ON again.
- If expanding the PLC instruction is disabled during the use of expansion PLC instruction, an error occurs at
PLC RUN.

(3) Notes
The following instructions have different operations even if they are the same instructions, depending on each
instruction mode. For these instructions, it is highly recommended that the instructions should be replaced with
ones that are usable in both modes.

Compatible PLC instruction Extended PLC instruction Instruction

Instruction
mode mode replacement method
LD<= Operated as bit test instruction. Operated as comparison operation
AND<= (Alternative instruction for instruction. "Replaceable instructions" given in the
OR<= LDBIT,ANDBIT,ORBIT) (LD<=,AND<=,OR<= instruction) instruction specification details for "LDBIT"
LD<> Operated as bit test instruction. Operated as comparison operation indicated in "Instruction Tables: Special
AND<> (Alternative instruction for instruction. Instructions for Old Machine Type Compatible"
OR<> LDBII,ANDBII,ORBII) (LD<>,AND<>,OR<> instruction)
Alternative instruction for DEFR Operated as leading edge pulse Refer to "Instructions with Changed
ANDP (pulse in respect to the operation series connection instruction. Designation Format: Alternative Circuits
result) instruction (ANDP instruction) Resulted from the Ban on DEFR Instruction"

II - 42
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2.1 How to Read Instruction Table
The instruction tables have been made according to the following format.

No. of

Process unit
steps

Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
+ + S D
(D)+(S) (D) ■ 3 3
(BIN)
+P +P S D ■ 3 7
+ (BIN)

16-bit

+ + S1 S2 D 4 4
(S1)+(S2) (D)
(BIN)
+P + P S1 S2 D ■ 4 8

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(1) … Classifies instructions according to their application

(2) … Indicates the processing unit of instructions.

(3) … Indicates the instruction symbol used to enter the instruction in a program
Instruction code is built around the 16-bit instruction, with the following notations used to mark 32-bit
instructions, instructions executed only at the leading edge of OFF to ON,
real number instructions, and character string instructions.
- 32-bit instruction o o o The letter "D" is added to the first line of the instruction
(Example)

+ D+

16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- Instructions executed only at the leading edge of OFF to ON o o o The letter "P" is appended to the end of the
instruction
(Example)

+ +P

Instructions Instructions executed only at the

executed when ON leading edge of OFF to ON

(4) … Shows symbol drawing on the ladder

+ S D + S1 S2 D

Indicates destination Indicates destination

Indicates source Indicates source
Indicates instruction symbol Indicates instruction symbol

Destination……….Indicates where data will be sent following operation

Source………………Stores data prior to operation

II - 43
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

(5) … Indicates the type of processing that is performed by individual instructions

(D) + (S) (D) (D+1,D) + (S+1,S) (D+1,D)

16 bits 16 bits

Indicates 16 bits Indicates 32 bits

D+1 D
Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits

(6) … The details of conditions for the execution of individual instructions are as follows.

Symbol Execution Condition

No Instruction executed under normal circumstances, with no regard to the ON/OFF status of conditions prior to the
symbol instruction.
recorded If the precondition is OFF, the instruction will conduct OFF processing.

Executed during ON; instruction is executed only while the precondition is ON. If the precondition is OFF, the
instruction is not executed and no processing is conducted.

Executed once at ON; instruction executed only at leading edge when precondition goes from OFF to ON.
Following execution, instruction will not be executed and no processing conducted even if condition remains ON.

Executed once at OFF; instruction executed only at trailing edge when precondition goes from ON to OFF.
Following execution, instruction will not be executed and no processing conducted even if condition remains OFF.

(7) … " ■ " mark indicates that the instruction is an extended instruction.
An extended instruction operates in "Extended PLC instruction mode". When an extended instruction is used
in "Compatible PLC instruction mode", an error occurs at input, edit or execution.

(8) … Indicates the number of steps when storing each instruction.

This is the number of steps that is consumed when each instruction is stored in F-ROM. Refer to "PLC
Processing Program:Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode " for details.

(9) … Indicates the number of steps when executing each instruction.

This is the number of steps that is consumed in the PLC processor execution area when each instruction is
executed. The number of steps may be different from that of when stored in F-ROM. Refer to "PLC Processing
Program: Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode " for details.

II - 44
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2.2 Basic Instructions

No. of
Process unit steps

Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
Start of logic operation 1/2
LD 1
(A contact operation start) *2

Start of logic negation operation 1/2

LDI 1
(B contact operation start) *2

Logical AND 1/2

AND 1
(A contact serial connection) *2

Logical AND negation 1/2

ANI 1
(B contact serial connection) *2

Logical OR 1/2
OR 1
(A contact parallel connection) *2

Logical OR negation 1/2

ORI 1
(B contact parallel connection) *2

AND between logical blocks (Serial

ANB 1 1
connection between blocks)
OR between logical blocks
ORB 1 1
(Parallel connection between blocks)
LDP Starts leading edge pulse operation ■ 2 4
Basic instruction

LDF Starts trailing edge pulse operation ■ 2 4

Bit

ANDP Leading edge pulse series connection ■ 2 4

ANDF Trailing edge pulse series connection ■ 2 4

ORP Leading edge pulse parallel connection ■ 2 4

ORF Trailing edge pulse parallel connection ■ 2 4

INV Inversion of operation result ■ 1 3

Conversion of operation result to leading edge

MEP
pulse
■ 1 3

Conversion of operation result to trailing

MEF ■ 1 3
edge pulse
Vn Conversion of operation result to leading
EGP ■ 1 3
edge pulse (Stored at Vn)
Vn Conversion of operation result to trailing
EGF ■ 1 3
edge pulse (Stored at Vn)
OUT Device output 1/2 1/2
*1 *2

OUT T/C 100ms timer/counter output 4 3

OUT H 10ms timer output 4 3

(To be continued on the next page)

*1: Argument will be 2 steps at F device.
*2: Argument will be 1 step at bit device, 2 steps at word device.
When the machine has the extended index Modification, an argument with an index will be two steps.

II - 45
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

Basic instructions (continued)

No. of
Process unit

steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
SET SET D Device set 1/2 1/2
*1 *2

RST RST D Device reset 1/2 1/2

*1 *2

RST T/C RST D Timer/counter reset 4 2

MC MC n D Master control start 2 2

MCR MCR n Master control release 1 1

PLS D
Generate one cycle worth of pulses at
PLS 2 2
rising edge of input signal
PLF
Generate one cycle worth of pulses at
PLF D 2 2
falling edge of input signal
Basic instruction

FF FF D Reversal of device output ■ 2 5

Bit

SFT SFT D 2 1/2

*2
Device 1-bit shift
SFTP SFTP D ■ 2 6

MPS Registration of operation result 1 1

MPS Read of operation results registered in

MRD 1 1
MRD
MPS
Reading and resetting of operation
MPP MPP 1 1
results registered in MPS
NOP Ignored (For program deletion or space) 1 1
Ignored (To change pages during
NOPLF NOPLF ■ 1 1
printouts)
Ignored (Subsequent programs will be
PAGE PAGE n ■ 1 1
controlled from step 0 of page n)

*1: 2 steps when the argument is F device.

*2: 1 step when the argument is bit device; 2 steps when the argument is word device.
When the machine has the extended index Modification, an argument with an index will be two steps.

II - 46
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2.3 Comparison Operation Instructions

No. of
Process unit steps

Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
LD= = S1 S2 3 3
16-bit

Continuity state when (S1) (S2)

AND= = S1 S2 3 3
Non-continuity state when (S1) (S2)
OR= = S1 S2 3 3

LDD= D= S1 S2 3/4 3/4

*1 *1
Continuity state when (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
32-bit

ANDD= D= S1 S2 Non-continuity state when 3/4 3/4

*1 *1
(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
ORD= D= S1 S2 3/4 3/4
*1 *1

LD<> <> S1 S2 ■ 3 3
16-bit

Continuity state when (S1) (S2)

AND<> <> S1 S2 ■ 3 3
Non-continuity state when (S1) (S2)
OR<> <> S1 S2 ■ 3 3

LDD<> D <> S1 S2 ■ 3/4 3/4

*1 *1
Continuity state when (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
32-bit

ANDD<> D <> S1 S2 Non-continuity state when ■ 3/4 3/4

*1 *1
(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
ORD<> D <> S1 S2 ■ 3/4 3/4
*1 *1

LD> > S1 S2 3 3
16-bit

Continuity state when (S1) (S2)

AND> > S1 S2 3 3
Non-continuity state when (S1) (S2)
OR> > S1 S2 3 3

LDD> D> S1 S2 3/4 3/4

*1 *1
Continuity state when (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
32-bit

3/4 3/4
ANDD> D> S1 S2 Non-continuity state when
*1 *1
(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
ORD> D> S1 S2 3/4 3/4
*1 *1

LD>= >= S1 S2 ■ 3 3
16-bit

Continuity state when (S1) (S2)

AND>= >= S1 S2 ■ 3 3
Non-continuity state when (S1) (S2)
OR>= >= S1 S2 ■ 3 3

LDD>= D > = S1 S2 ■ 3/4 3/4

*1 *1
Continuity state when (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
32-bit

ANDD>= D > = S1 S2 Non-continuity state when ■ 3/4 3/4

*1 *1
(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
ORD>= D > = S1 S2 ■ 3/4 3/4
*1 *1

(To be continued on the next page)

*1: 1 step is added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number.

II - 47
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

Comparison operation instructions (continued)

No. of
Process unit

steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
LD< < S1 S2 3 3
16-bit

Continuity state when (S1) (S2)

AND< < S1 S2 3 3
Non-continuity state when (S1) (S2)
OR< < S1 S2 3 3

LDD< D< S1 S2 3/4 3/4

*1 *1
Continuity state when (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
32-bit

ANDD< D< S1 S2 Non-continuity state when 3/4 3/4

*1 *1
(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
ORD< D< S1 S2 3/4 3/4
*1 *1

LD<= <= S1 S2 ■ 3 3
16-bit

Continuity state when (S1) (S2)

AND<= <= S1 S2 ■ 3 3
Non-continuity state when (S1) (S2)
OR<= <= S1 S2 ■ 3 3

LDD<= D < = S1 S2 ■ 3/4 3/4

*1 *1
Continuity state when (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
32-bit

ANDD<= D < = S1 S2 Non-continuity state when ■ 3/4 3/4

*1 *1
(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2)
ORD<= D < = S1 S2 ■ 3/4 3/4
*1 *1

*1: 1 step is added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number.

6.2.4 Arithmetic Operation Instructions

No. of
Process unit

steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution

Symbol Process details

Storage

+ + S D ■ 3 3
(D)+(S) (D)
(BIN)
+P +P S D ■ 3 7
16-bit

+ + S1 S2 D 4 4
(S1)+(S2) (D)
(BIN)
+P + P S1 S2 D ■ 4 8
+ (BIN)

D+ D+ S D ■ 3/4 3/4
(D+1,D)+(S+1,S) (D+1,D) *1 *1

(BIN) 3/4 7/8

D+P D+P S D ■
32-bit

*1 *1

D+ D + S1 S2 D 4/5 4/5
(S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) *2 *2

(BIN) 4/5 8/9

D+P D+P S1 S2 D ■ *2 *2

(To be continued on the next page)

*1: 1 step is added when S is a constant number.
*2: 1 step is added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number.

II - 48
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.2 Instruction Tables

Arithmetic operation instructions (continued)

No. of
Process unit

steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
- - S D ■ 3 3
(D) (S) (D)
(BIN)
-P -P S D ■ 3 7
16-bit

- - S1 S2 D 4 4
(S1) (S2) (D)
(BIN)
-P -P S1 S2 D ■ 4 8
- (BIN)

D- D- S D ■ 3/4 3/4
(D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D) *1 *1

(BIN) 3/4 7/8

D-P D-P S D ■
32-bit

*1 *1

D- D- S1 S2 D 4/5 4/5
(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) *2 *2

(BIN) 4/5 8/9

D-P D-P S1 S2 D ■ *2 *2

* * S1 S2 D 4 4
16-bit

(S1) (S2) (D+1,D)

(BIN)
*P *P S1 S2 D ■ 4 8
* (BIN)

D* D * S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) 4/5 4/5

32-bit

*2 *2
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
D*P D*P S1 S2 D (BIN) ■ 4/5 8/9
*2 *2

/ / S1 S2 D (S1) (S2) 4 4
16-bit

Quotient(D),Remainder(D+1)
/P /P S1 S2 D (BIN) ■ 4 8
/ (BIN)

D/ S1 S2 D
(S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) 4/5 4/5
D/
32-bit

Quotient(D+1,D), *2 *2

Remainder(D+3,D+2) 4/5 8/9

D/P D/P S1 S2 D ■ *2 *2
(BIN)
B+ B + S1 S2 D ■ 4 5
(S1)+(S2) (D)
(BCD)
Four arithmetic operations (BCD)

B+P B+P S1 S2 D ■ 4 9

B- B- S1 S2 D ■ 4 5
(S1) (S2) (D)
(BCD)
B-P B-P S1 S2 D ■ 4 9
16-bit

B* B* S1 S2 D ■ 4 5
(S1) (S2) (D+1,D)
(BCD)
B*P B*P S1 S2 D ■ 4 9

B/ B/ S1 S2 D (S1) (S2) ■ 4 5
Quotient(D),Remainder(D+1)
B/P B/P S1 S2 D (BCD) ■ 4 9

(To be continued on the next page)

*1: 1 step is added when S is a constant number.
*2: 1 step is added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number.

II - 49
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

Arithmetic operation instructions (continued)

No. of
Process unit

steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
INC INC D 2 2
16-bit

(D)+1 (D)
INCP INCP D ■ 2 6
+1
DINC DINC D 2 2
32-bit

(D+1,D)+1 (D+1,D)
DINCP DINCP D ■ 2 6

DEC DEC D 2 2
16-bit

(D) 1 (D)
DECP DECP D ■ 2 6
-1
DDEC DDEC D 2 2
32-bit

(D+1,D) 1 (D+1,D)
DDECP DDECP D ■ 2 6

NEG NEG D 2 2
Complement of 2

16-bit

• (D) (D)

NEGP NEGP D BIN data ■ 2 6

DNEG DNEG D ■ 2 2
32-bit

• (D+1, D) (D+1, D)

DNEGP DNEGP D BIN data ■ 2 6

*1: 1 step is added when S is a constant number.

*2: 1 step is added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number.

6.2.5 Data Conversion Instructions

No. of
Process unit

steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution

Symbol Process details

Storage

BCD BCD S D BCD 3 3

16-bit

conversion
• ___
(S) (D)
BCDP BCDP S D BIN (0 to 9999) ■ 3 7
BCD

DBCD DBCD S D BCD 3 3

32-bit

conversion
• _______
(S+1, S) (D+1, D)
DBCDP DBCDP S D BIN (0 to 99999999) ■ 3 7

BIN BIN S D BIN 3 3

16-bit

conversion
• ___
(S) (D)
BINP BINP S D BCD (0 to 9999) ■ 3 7
BIN

DBIN DBIN S D BIN 3 3

32-bit

conversion
• _______
(S+1, S) (D+1, D)
DBINP DBINP S D BCD (0 to 99999999) ■ 3 7

II - 50
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2.6 Data Transmission Instructions

No. of

Process unit
steps

Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
MOV MOV S D 2/3 3
16-bit

*1
⋅ (S) (D)
MOVP MOVP S D ■ 3 7

DMOV DMOV S D 3/4 3/4

32-bit

*2 *2
⋅ (S+1,S)
Transmission

(D+1,D)
DMOVP DMOVP S D ■ 3/4 7/8
*2 *2

CML CML S D ■ 3 3
16-bit

⋅ (S) (D)
CMLP CMLP S D ■ 3 7

DCML DCML S D ■ 3/4 3/4

32-bit

*2 *2
⋅ (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
DCMLP DCMLP S D ■ 3/4 7/8
*2 *2

XCH XCH D1 D2 3 3
16-bit

⋅ (D1) (D2)
Conversion

XCHP XCHP D1 D2 ■ 3 7

DXCH DXCH D1 D2 3 3
32-bit

⋅ (D1+1,D1) (D2+1,D2)
DXCHP DXCH D1 D2 ■ 3 7
transmission of same data transmission

BMOV BMOV S D n (S) (D) 4 4

16-bit
Batch

n
BMOVP BMOVP S D n ■ 4 8
transmission

FMOV FMOV S D n (D) 4 4

16-bit
Batch

(S)
n
FMOVP FMOVP S D n ■ 4 8

S.TMOV S D
Timer

Transfer of timer and counter setting

S.TMOV 6 3
value

*1: It becomes 3 steps when either S or D is a bit device and the device No. is other than multiples of 16.
It becomes 3 steps when either S or D is a bit device and the index modification.
It becomes 3 steps when either S or D is an index register.
*2: 1 step is added when S is a constant number.

II - 51
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

6.2.7 Program Branch Instruction

No. of
Process unit
steps

Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
Jump to Pn upon establishment of input
CJ CJ P** 2 2
condition
Jump

- JMP JMP P** Jump to Pn unconditionally ■ 2 2

Jump to END instruction upon
GOEND GOEND ■ 1 2
establishment of input condition
Program Subroutine

- FEND FEND End process during sequence program 1 1

end

END END End sequence program 1 1

- CALL CALL P** 2 3

Execute P** sub-routine program after
call

input conditions are met

- CALLP CALLP P** ■ 2 7

RET
Return

Return to main program from subroutine

- RET 1 1
program

- FOR FOR n Execute the interval between FOR and ■ 2 3

Repetition

- NEXT NEXT NEXT for n times. ■ 1 3

- BREAK BREAK D P**

Forcibly end the execution of the interval ■ 3 4
between FOR and NEXT , and jump
- BREAKP BREAKP D P** to the pointer Pn. ■ 3 8

6.2.8 Logical Operation Instructions

No. of
Process unit

steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution

Symbol Process details

Storage

WAND WAND S D ■ 3 3
⋅ (D) (S) (D)
WANDP WAND S D ■ 3 7
16-bit

WAND WAND S1 S2 D 4 4
⋅ (S1) (S2) (D)
Logical AND

WANDP WANDP S1 S2 D ■ 4 8

DAND DAND S D 3/4 3/4

*1 *1
⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
DANDP DAND S1 S2 D ■ 3/4 7/8
32-bit

*1 *1

DAND DAND S1 S2 D ■ 4/5 4/5

*2 *2
⋅ (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
DANDP DANDP S1 S2 D ■ 4/5 8/9
*2 *2

(To be continued on the next page)

*1: 1 step is added when S is a constant number.
*2: 1step is added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number.

II - 52
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.2 Instruction Tables

Logical operation instructions (continued)

No. of
Process unit

steps

Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
WOR WOR S D ■ 3 3
⋅ (D) (S) (D)
WORP WORP S D ■ 3 7
16-bit

WOR WOR S1 S2 D 4 4
⋅ (S1) (S2) (D)
Logical OR

WORP WORP S1 S2 D ■ 4 8

DOR DOR S D 3/4 3/4

*1 *1
⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
DORP WNXR S1 S2 D ■ 3/4 7/8
32-bit

*1 *1

DOR DOR S1 S2 D ■ 4/5 4/5

*2 *2
⋅ (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
DORP DORP S1 S2 D ■ 4/5 8/9
*2 *2

WXOR WXOR S D ■ 3 3
⋅ (D) (S) (D)
WXORP WXORP S D ■ 3 7
16-bit

WXOR WXOR S1 S2 D 4 4
⋅ (S1)
Exclusive OR

(S2) (D)
WXORP WXORP S1 S2 D ■ 4 8

DXOR DXOR S D 3/4 3/4

*1 *1
⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
DXORP DXORP S D ■ 3/4 7/8
32-bit

*1 *1

DXOR DXOR S1 S2 D ■ 4/5 4/5

*2 *2
⋅ (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
DXORP DXORP S1 S2 D ■ 4/5 8/9
*2 *2

WXNR WXNR S D ■ 3 3
⋅ (D) (S) (D)
WXNRP WXNR S D ■ 3 7
16-bit
Non exclusive logical sum

WXNR WXNR S1 S2 D ■ 4 4
⋅ (S1) (S2) (D)
WXNRP WXNRP S1 S2 D ■ 4 8

DXNR DXNR S D ■ 3/4 3/4

*1 *1
⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
DXNRP DXNRP S D ■ 3/4 7/8
32-bit

*1 *1

DXNR DXNR S1 S2 D ■ 4/5 4/5

*2 *2
⋅ (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
DXNRP DXNRP S1 S2 D ■ 4/5 8/9
*2 *2

*1: 1 step is added when S is a constant number.

*2: 1 step is added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number.

II - 53
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

6.2.9 Rotation Instructions

No. of
Process unit

steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
ROR b15 (D) b0 SM12 3 3/4
ROR D n

RORP RORP D n ■ 3 7/8

16-bit

Rotate n bits right.

RCR RCR D n b15 (D) b0 SM12 3 3/4

Right rotation

RCRP RCRP D n Rotate n bits right. ■ 3 7/8

(D+1) (D)
DROR DROR D n b31 ~ b16 b15 ~ b0 SM12 3 3/4

DRORP DRORP D n ■ 3 7/8

32-bit

Rotate n bits right.

(D+1) (D)
DRCR DRCR D n b31 ~ b16 b15 ~ b0 SM12 3 3/4

DRCRP DRCRP D n ■ 3 7/8

Rotate n bits right.

ROL ROL D n SM12 b15 (D) b0 3 3/4

ROLP ROLP D n ■ 3 7/8

16-bit

Rotate n bits left.

RCL RCL D n SM12 b15 (D) b0 3 3/4

Left rotation

RCLP RCLP D n Rotate n bits left. ■ 3 7/8

(D+1) (D)
DROL DROL D n SM12 b31 ~ b16 b15 ~ b0 3 3/4

DROLP DROLP D n ■ 3 7/8

32-bit

Rotate n bits left.

(D+1) (D)
DRCL DRCL D n SM12 b31 ~ b16 b15 ~ b0 3 3/4

DRCLP DRCLP D n ■ 3 7/8

Rotate n bits left.

SFR SFR D n b15 bn b0 3 3/4

16-bit
Right shift

SFRP SFRP D n b15 b0 SM12 ■ 3 7/8

0~0
n
Device unit

DSFR DSFR D n 3 3
(D)

DSFRP DSFRP D n ■ 3 7
0

SFL SFL D n b15 bn b0 3 3/4

16-bit

SFLP SFLP D n SM12 b15 b0 ■ 3 7/8

Left shift

0~0
n
Device unit

DSFL DSFL D n 3 3
(D)

DSFLP DSFLP D n ■ 3 7
0

II - 54
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.2 Instruction Tables

6.2.10 Data Processing Instructions

No. of
Process unit steps

Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
(S2)
SER SER S1 S2 D (S1) 5 6
16-bit

SERP SERP S1 S2 D (D): Match No. ■ 5 10

Search

(D+1): Number of matches

32 bit
DSER DSER S1 S2 D (S2) ■ 5 6
(S1)
32-bit

n
DSERP DSERP S1 S2 D (D): Match No. ■ 5 10
(D+1): Number of matches
Number of bits set to "1"

SUM SUM S D (S) 3 3

16-bit

b15 b0
SUMP SUMP S D (D): Number of "1"s ■ 3 7

DSUM DSUM S D (S㸩1) (S) ■ 3 3

32-bit

DSUMP DSUMP S D (D): Number of "1"s ■ 3 7

SEG SEG S D 3 3
16-bit

b3 to bO
(S) (D)
7SEG
Decode

SEGP SEGP S D ■ 3 7

DECO DECO S D n 8 256 decode 4 4

2n bit

(D)
(S) Decode
DECOP DECOP S D n n 2 n bit ■ 4 8

■
Encode

ENCO ENCO S D n 256 8 encode 4 4

2n bit

(S)
Encode (D)
ENCOP ENCOP S D n 2 bit n ■ 4 8

16-bit data average value

Average
16-bit
value

S.AVE S.AVE S D n 1 n 7 4
Σ
n i=1 (S+i) Ѝ (D)

6.2.11 Other Function Instructions

No. of
Process unit

steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution

Symbol Process details

Storage
Carry flag set

̆ S.STC S.STC Carry flag contact (SM12) is turned ON. 4 1

Carry flag
reset

̆ S.CLC S.CLC Carry flag contact (SM12) is turned OFF. 4 1

II - 55
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

6.2.12 Special Instructions for Old Machine Type Compatible

No. of
Process unit

Instruction steps

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
Bit test (A contact operation start
LDBIT <= S1 n 3 2
handling) (Note 1)
Bit test (A contact series connection
ANDBIT <= S1 n 3 2
handling) (Note 1)
Bit test (A contact parallel connection
ORBIT <= S1 n 3 2
handling) (Note 1)
1-bit
BIT

Bit test (B contact operation start

LDBII <> S1 n 3 2
handling) (Note 1)
Bit test (B contact series connection
ANDBII <> S1 n 3 2
handling) (Note 1)
Bit test (B contact parallel connection
ORBII <> S1 n 3 2
handling) (Note 1)

(Note) These instructions can be used with the compatible instruction mode as they are compatible with old machine
types but will not be available in the future.

6.2.13 Exclusive Instructions

No. of
Process unit

steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution
Symbol Process details

Storage
K1: Tool No. search
K2: Tool No. AND operation search
K3: Tool change
K4: Arbitrary position tool change
K5: Forward run of pointer
ATC

̆ S.ATC S.ATC Kn Rn Rm Mn K6: Reverse run of pointer 8 5

K7: Forward run of tool table
K8: Reverse run of tool table
K9: Tool table read
K10: Tool table write
K11: Automatic write of tool table
K1: Rotary body index
ROT

̆ S.ROT S.ROT Kn Rn Rm Mn 8 5
K3: Ring counter

II - 56
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.3 Data Designation Method

6.3 Data Designation Method

The following three types of data can be used in each instruction.
(1) Bit data
(2) Word (16-bit) data
(3) Double-word (32-bit) data

6.3.1 Bit Data

Bit data is data which handles contacts and coils, etc., in 1-bit units.
"Bit devices" and "bit-designated word devices" can be used for bit data.

(1) When using bit devices

The bit device is designated with a 1-point unit.

One M0 point is target.

M0
SET Y10

One Y10 point is target.

(2) When using word devices

With the word device, when the bit No. is designated, the bit for the designated bit No. can be used as bit data.

b15 ~ b0
Word device 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0

Each bit can be used with 1 as ON and 0 as OFF

The word device bit is designated as "word device","bit number".

(The bit No. is designated with a hexadecimal.)
For example, D0 bit 5 (b5) is designated as D0.5, and D0 bit 10 (b10) is designated as D0.A.
Note that the bit designated cannot be used for the timer (T), integrated timer (ST) , counter (C) or Index register
(Z).
(Example: Z0.0 is invalid)

Word device bit designation

X0
(Turn D0 bit 5(b5) ON(1).)
SET D0.5
Word device bit designation
D0.5 (Turn ON/OFF by setting D0 bit 5(b5) to 1/0.)
SET Y10

II - 57
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

6.3.2 Word (16-bit) Data

Word data is a 16-bit numerical value data used with the basic instructions and applied instructions.
Word devices and digit-designated bit devices can be used with the word data.

(1) When using bit devices

Bit devices can be used as word devices by designating digits.
The bit data digit is designated as "number of digits""bit device head No.".
The digits can be designated between K1 and K4 with a 4-point (4-bit) unit.
The target numbers of points when X0 is designated as the digit are shown below.
・K1X0 --- 4 points X0 to X3 are the target
・K2X0 --- 8 points X0 to X7 are the target
・K3X0 --- 12 points X0 to XB are the target
・K4X0 --- 16 points X0 to XF are the target

XF to XC XB to X8 X7 to X4 X3 to X0

K1 designation
range
(4 points)
K2 designation
range
(8 points)
K3 designation
range
(12 points)
K4 designation
range
(16 points)

List of Numeric Values that Can Be Dealt with as Source Data for Digit Designation at Source (S) Side

Number of Digits Designated With 16-Bit Instruction

K1 (4 points) 0 to 15
K2 (8 points) 0 to 255
K3 (12 points) 0 to 4095
K4 (16 points) -32768 to 32767

If the source side is a digit-designated bit device, and the destination is a word device, the word device on the
destination side will be 0 after the digit-designated bits on the source side.

Ladder Example Processing

With 16-bit instruction

K1X0 X3X2X1X0

MOV K1X0 D0 Become 0

b15 …………………… b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X3X2X1X0
Source (S) data

II - 58
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.3 Data Designation Method

When a digit is designated on the destination (D) side, the No. of points designated by the digit will be the target of
the destination side.

Ladder Example Processing

When source data (S) is a numerical
value 1 2 3 4

H1234 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

MOV H1234 K2M0

M15㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯M8M7㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯M0
K2M0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Destination (D)
Do not change 3 4

When source data (S) is a bit device

M15㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯M8M7㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯M0
K1M0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

(Note)
M115㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯M108M107㨯㨯M104M103㨯㨯M100
MOV K1M0 K2M100
K2M100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

Do not change 0 is Data in M3 to

Destination (D) transferred M0 is
transferred.

When source data (S) is a word device

M15㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯M8M7㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯M0
D0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1

MOV D0 K2M100
M115㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯M108M107㨯㨯M104M103㨯㨯M100
K2M100 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
Destination (D)
Do not change

(2) When using word devices

Word devices are designated in 1-point (16 bits) units.

M0
MOV K100 D0

1 D0 point (16 bits) is word device

II - 59
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

6.3.3 Using Double Word Data (32 bits)

Double word data is 32-bit numerical data used by basic instructions and application instructions.
Word devices and bit devices designated by digit designation can be used as double word data.

(1) When using bit devices

Digit designation can be used to enable a bit device to deal with double word data.
Digit designation of bit devices is done by designating "Number of digits" and "Initial number of bit device".
Digit designation of bit devices can be done in 4-point (4-bit) units, and designation can be made for K1 to K8.
For example, if X0 is designated for digit designation, the following points would be designated:
・K1X0 ….. The 4 points X0 through X3 are designated
・K2X0 ….. The 8 points X0 through X7 are designated
・K3X0 ….. The 12 points X0 through XB are designated
・K4X0 ….. The 16 points X0 through XF are designated

X1F X1CX1B X18X17 X14X13 X10XF XCXB X8X7 X4X3 X0

K1 designation range
(4 points)
K2 designation range
(8 points)
K3 designation range
(12points)
K4 designation range
(16 points)
K5 designation range
(20 points)
K6 designation range
(24 points)
K7 designation range
(28 points)
K8 designation range
(32 points)

List of Numeric Values that Can Be Dealt with as Source Data for Digit Designation at Source (S) Side

Number of Digits Number of Digits

With 32-bit Instructions With 32-bit Instructions
Designated Designated
K1 (4 points) 0 to 15 K5 (20 points) 0 to 1048575
K2 (8 points) 0 to 255 K6 (24 points) 0 to 16772165
K3 (12 points) 0 to 4095 K7 (28 points) 0 to 268435455
K4 (16 points) 0 to 65535 K8 (32 points) -2147483648 to 2147483647

II - 60
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.3 Data Designation Method

In cases where the source is a bit device designated by digit designation, and the destination is a word device, the
word device for the destination becomes 0 following the bit designated by digit designation at the source.

Ladder Example Processing

With 32-bit Instructions

K1X0 X3X2X1X0

Become 0
b15㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯㨯b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
DMOV K1X0 D0 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X3X2X1X0
D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b31 ̕̕̕̕̕̕̕̕̕̕̕̕̕̕̕̕ b16
Source (S) data
Become 0

(2) When using word devices

A word device designates devices used by the lower 16 bits of data.
A 32-bit instruction uses (designation device number) and (designation device number + 1).

M0
DMOV K100 D0

The 2 points D0 and D1(32 bits) are used

32-bit data transfer instruction

II - 61
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

6.4 Index Modification

Index modification is an indirect setting made by using an index register.
When an index modification is used in a sequence program, the device to be used will become the device number
designated directly plus the contents of the index register.
For example, if D0Z2 has been designated, and the content of Z2 is 3, D(2+3), or D5, will become the designated device.
The model with extended index modification has different specifications of index modification.
Refer to "II PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION: Explanation of Instructions: Compatible Instructions and Extended
Instructions" for the model with extended index modification.

6.4.1 For Models without Extended Index Modification

(1) The index register (Z0,Z1) can be set in the range of -32768 to 32767 with a sign added.

(2) The index modification is used only for the MOV instruction. (DMOV cannot be used.)

(3) The usable instruction format is as shown below.

(a) Transmission of data to Z0, Z1.

MOV Kn Z0

MOV
Kn or Hn is used
Z0 or Z1

(b) Possible device combination of MOV instruction with index modification

S (Source) D (Destination) Program example

Constant (Word device)・Z
MOV K100 D0Z0
Kn or Hn Example: D0Z0, R500Z1
Word device (Word device)・Z
MOV D0 D100Z1
Example: D0,R1900 Example: D0Z0, R500Z1
(Word device)・Z (Word device)・Z
MOV MOV D0Z0 D20Z0
Example: D0Z0 Example: D1Z0, D0Z1
(Word device)・Z Bit device digit designation
MOV D0Z0 K2M10
Example: D0Z0 Example: K2Y20
Bit device digit designation (Word device)・Z
MOV K2M10 D0Z0
Example: K2M00 Example: D0Z0, R1900Z1

(Note 1) Word device indicates T, C, D, R, W, SW, and SD.

[Note]
The range of the devices will not be checked if index modification is applied to the devices during sequence
program execution. Thus, keep in mind that the index register contents exceeds the device range at
modification, unexpected type of device are referred or renewed.

II - 62
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.4 Index Modification

6.4.2 For Models with Extended Index Modification

(1) Index register (Z0 to Z13) can be set from -32768 to 32767 with sign.

(2) Index modification is available in most instructions. (Refer to each instruction's explanation for specification details of
instructions.)

(3) Following is the method for using index register.

(a) Transferring data to index register

MOV Kn Zn

MOV
Kn or Hn is used.
Z0 to Z13

(b) Example of modification

:
/18-< KUUVQTGFKP<

: &<&]
_&
/18&<<
FCVCKUUVQTGFKP&
ω
+PFGZSWCNKHKECVKQP

The ladder example with modification and actual processing devices are showed below.

(Example) When Z0 = 20, Z1 = -5

Ladder example Actual processing device

X0 :
MOV K20 Z0 /18-9'

'ZRNCPCVKQP
MOV K-5 Z1 -< ̖-
 -
9< ̖-
9'
X1 ω
MOV K100Z0 W53Z1 *GZCFGEKOCN

X0 :
MOV K20 Z0 /18-:-/

'ZRNCPCVKQP
MOV K-5 Z1 -:< ̖-:
 -:
ω
X1 -KUEQPXGTVGFVQJGZCFGEKOCN
MOV K2X50Z0 K1M38Z -/< ̖-/
-/

X0 :
MOV K20 Z0 /18&-;#

'ZRNCPCVKQP
MOV K-5 Z1 &< ̖&
 &
-;( ̖-;
(-;#
X1
MOV D0Z0 K3Y12FZ1 ω
*GZCFGEKOCN

[Note]
The range check is invalid for device which operates modification during executing sequence program. So, be
careful when using modification with index registers which exceeds the device' allowable range. Unexpected
type of device might be referred or updated.
When using modification with 16 bit constant, following responses will be taken. Be careful with using beyond
the maximum value or bellow the minimum value of 16 bit constant.
- When using larger value than the maximum -> Index modification will be executed on the minimum value.
（Z0=1 with K32767Z0 will be considered as K-32768.)
-When using smaller value than the minimum -> Index modification will be executed on maximum value.
（Z0=-1 with K-32768Z0 will be considered as K32767.)

II - 63
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

(4) Restrictions of modification

Index modification has following restrictions
(a) Invalid devices for modification
Devices in following table are invalid for modification.

Devices Description
32 bit constant (16 bit constant is available for modification)
K,H
(Note)
□.□ Word device bit designation
P Pointer as a label
N Master controller nesting level
Z Index register
T,ST Timer set value
C Counter set value
(Note) Constant designation of rotation instruction except for DSFR(P)/DSFL(P) is invalid for modification.

(b) Devices with restriction for index register usage

Devices Description Examples

- Only Z0 and Z1 can be used for timer contact point. T0Z0 K100
T T1Z1
- Not available for timer coil.

- Only Z0 and Z1 can be used for counter contact point. C0Z1 K100
C C1Z0
- Not available for counter coil.

(Remark)
No restriction of index register No. for current value of timer and counter.
Timer set value
: - (Invalid for index qualificatio
6

5/ Timer current value

$%&6<-;
Counter set value
: - (Invalid for index qualificatio
%

5/ Counter current value

$%&%<-;

(c) Index modification on digit-designated bit device

Digit-designated bit device can be executed modification.
Digit-designated itself cannot be executed modification.

$+0-:<&
5GVVKPIKUXCNKFFWGVQCPKPFGZ
SWCNKHKECVKQPKUCRRNKGFVQFGXKEG0Q
9JGP<:
 :
$+0-<:&
5GVVKPIKUKPXCNKFFWGVQCP
KPFGZSWCNKHKECVKQPKUCRRNKGFVQ
FKIKVFGUKIPCVKQP

II - 64
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.5 Operation Error

6.5 Operation Error

Operation error occurs in the following cases during execution of basic instruction and function instruction.

・In the case where an error described in each instruction's explanation page has occurred:

(1) Device range check

The range check for the devices to be used in basic instruction and function instruction is as shown below.
(a) If instruction handles a fixed length of device (MOV, DMOV, etc.), device range check will not be performed. In
case that the relevant device range has exceeded, the data is written into another device.
In such a case indicated below, error will not occur even if D2047 has been exceeded.

DMOV K100 D2047

D2047 and D2048 are supposed to be the

targets; however, since D2048 does not exist, the
contents of the other device will be destroyed.

Device range check will not be performed when index Modification is carried out

(b) If instruction handles a variable length of device (BMOV, FMOV, etc. that would specify the number of transfers),
device range check will not be performed. In case that the relevant device range has exceeded, the data is
written into another device.
In such a case indicated below, error will not occur even if D2047 has been exceeded.

BMOV K100 D2047 K2

D2047 and D2048 are supposed to be the
targets; however, since D2048 does not exist, the
contents of the other device will be destroyed.

(2) Device data check

Device's data check used for the basic instruction and function instruction is as shown below.
(a) BIN data
・Error does not occur even if the operation result is overflowed or underflowed.
　At this time, carry flag does not turn ON either.
(b) BCD data
・Checking as to whether each digit is BCD value (0/ to 9) is performed.
　If the digit is other than 0 to 9 (A to F), an operation error will result.
・Error does not occur even if the operation result is overflowed or underflowed.
　At this time, carry flag does not turn ON either.

II - 65
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

6.6 Execution Condition of Instruction

There are the following 4 kinds of execution conditions for basic instruction and function instruction.
・Execute all the time … Instruction executed regardless of device's ON/OFF
Example: LD X0 , OUT Y10
・ Execute at ON … Instruction executed when input condition is turned ON
Example: MOV instruction, CJ instruction
・ Execute at rising edge … Instruction executed only at the rising edge (OFF to ON) of input condition
Example: PLS instruction, MOVP instruction
・ Execute at falling edge … Instruction executed only at the falling edge (ON to OFF) of input condition
Example: PLF instruction

With coil equivalent basic instruction and function instruction, if "execution at ON" and "execution at rising edge" are both
possible with the same instruction, add "P" at the end of instruction to differentiate the execution condition.
・Instruction when executed at ON　　　　 Instruction name
・Instruction when executed at rising edge　　　Instruction name + P

With MOV instruction, execution at ON and execution at rising edge are specified as shown below.

MOV K4X0 D0

Execute at ON

MOVP K4X0 D0

Execute at rising edge

II - 66
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.7 Counting Step Number

6.7 Counting Step Number

There are the following 2 step numbers. Refer to "PLC Processing Program: Storing PLC Processing Program and
Execution Mode "
for details on the sequence program storage and execution.

(1) Number of steps during storage

This is the number of steps to be consumed when each instruction is stored in F-ROM. This is stored in the
instruction code format which is compatible with the MELSEC sequencer.

Basic number of steps for basic instruction and function instruction is (number of specified devices + 1). For
example, if "+ instruction", the number of steps is as shown below.

+ D0 R0
(1) (2) Indicates the number of devices
3 steps

+ D0 R0 D10
(1) (2) (3)
4 steps

Devices where number of steps increases

Condition Added Steps Example

Specified device is a 32 bit constant １ DMOV K123 D0
When the number of characters (S.xxx's
"xxx") in the character string is:
Instruction is a character string
Even number : Number of characters /2 + 1 S.AVE D882 D0 K7
(S.xxx)
Odd number : (Number of characters+1)/2 +
1

(2) Number of steps during execution

This is the number of steps to be consumed when each instruction is executed. When executed, a sequence
program is analyzed, optimizing the references and converting into the instruction code for the PLC processing
processor which is unique to the CNC. Thus, the length of each instruction (number of step) is varied before and
after the conversion.
The number of steps at storage and execution for each instruction is shown in " II PROGRAMMING
EXPLANATION: Explanation of Instrctions: Instruction Tables".

Instruction list

No. of
Process unit

steps
Instruction

Execution
Condition

Ext. inst.
Class

sign

Execution

Symbol Process details

Storage

+ + S D ٨ 3 3
+ (BIN)

16-bit

(D)+(S) (D)
(BIN)
+P +P S D ٨ 3 7

(a) (b)

II - 67
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

6.8 Operations when the OUT, SET/RST, or PLS/PLF Instruction of the

Same Device is Used
Operations when multiple OUT instructions, SET/RST instructions or PLS/PLF instructions using the same device are
executed in one scan are explained.

(1) When the OUT instruction of the same device is used:

Do not execute the OUT instruction of the same device multiple times within one scan.
When the OUT instruction of the same device is executed multiple times in one scan, a specified device is turned
ON/OFF at the time of each execution of OUT instruction, depending on the operation result up to the OUT
instruction.
Because ON/OFF of the specified device is determined at the time of each execution of OUT instruction, ON/OFF
may be repeated within one scan.
In the ladder example below, the same internal relay (M0) is turned ON/OFF with the input X0 and X1.

[Ladder] [Timing chart]

X0 X0
X0 M0 M0
M0 X1 X1
M0 M0
END END END
X1
M0 ON
X0 OFF
ON
X1 OFF
ON
M0 OFF

M0 turns OFF M0 turns ON when

because X1 is OFF X1 is ON.
M0 turns ON
M0 remains OFF
because X0 is ON.
because X0 is OFF.

In the case of refresh type CPU unit, when output (Y) is specified with OUT instruction, ON/OFF status of the OUT
instruction executed at the end of 1 scan is output.

II - 68
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.8 Operations when the OUT, SET/RST, or PLS/PLF Instruction of the Same Device is Used

(2) When the SET/RST instruction of the same device is used:

(a) The SET instruction turns a specified device ON when the SET command is ON and it does not operate when
the SET command is OFF.
Therefore, when the SET instructions of the same device are executed multiple times within one scan, and if
one or more SET commands are ON, the specified device will be turned ON.
(b) The RST instruction turns a specified device OFF when the RST command is ON and it does not operate when
the RST command is OFF.
Therefore, when the RST instructions of the same device are executed multiple times within one scan, and if
one or more RST commands are ON, the specified device will be turned OFF.
(c) When both the SET instruction and RST instruction of the same device exist within one scan, the SET instruction
turns a specified device ON when the SET command is ON, and the RST instruction turns a specified device
OFF when the RST command is ON.
When both the SET command and RST command are OFF, the specified device's ON/OFF status does not
change.

[Ladder] [Timing chart]

X0 X0
X0 SET M0 SET M0
SET M0 X1 X1
RST M0 RST M0
END END END
X1
RST M0
X0 OFF
ON
X1 OFF
ON
M0 OFF

RST executes no M0 turns OFF

operation because X1 is because X1 is ON.
OFF. (M0 remains ON.)
SET executes no
M0 turns ON operation because X0 is
because X0 is ON. OFF. (M0 remains ON.)

II - 69
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

(3) When the PLS/PLF instruction of the same device is used:

The PLS instruction turns a specified device ON when the PLS command changes from OFF to ON, and it turns a
specified device OFF when the PLS command changes in a way other than "from OFF to ON" (which means from
OFF to OFF, ON to ON, or ON to OFF). Also, the PLF instruction turns a specified device ON when the PLF
command changes from ON to OFF, and it turns a specified device OFF when the PLF command changes in a way
other than "from ON to OFF" (which means from OFF to OFF, OFF to ON, or ON to ON).
Note that, however, the PLS/PLF command's previous scan status is stored in the area that is unique to the device
specified with the PLS/PLF instruction. Thus, when the PLS/PLF instruction of the same device is executed multiple
times in one scan, the PLS/PLF command status saved with the first PLS/PLF instruction is used as the second
PLS/PLF instruction's PLS/PLF command's previous scan status. In this way, when the PLS/PLF instruction is
executed multiple times in one scan, the operation may not be carried out in a way as expected by the PLS/PLF
instruction.

[Ladder] [Timing chart]

X0 X0
X0 PLS M0 PLS M0
PLS M0 X1 X1
PLS M0 PLS M0
END END END
X1
PLF M0
X0 OFF
ON
X1 OFF
ON
M0’ OFF

ON
M0 OFF

(Saves PLS/PLF M0 turns OFF because M0 turns ON because

instruction status.) MO’ = ON → X1 = ON. MO’ = OFF → X1 = ON.
MO’ saves X1 = ON. MO’ saves X1 = ON.
M0 turns ON because M0 remains OFF because
MO’ = OFF → X0 = ON. MO’ = ON → X0 = OFF.
MO’ saves X0 = ON at the MO’ saves X0 = OFF.
same time.

II - 70
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.9 How to Read Instruction Tables

6.9 How to Read Instruction Tables

The basic instructions and function instructions are explained as follows.

Instruction symbol is displayed Outline of instruction is displayed

٤D+, D+P, D-, D-P ̖̖BIN32-bit addition and subtraction (Storage destination device independent type)
Compatible
Usable instruction: D+, D-
instruction mode
Usable device Digit
Setting
data
Bit device Word device Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٌ ٌ
S2 ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٌ ٌ
D ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤
Non-
Extended Extended index Provi-
- - Blank - - (Usable for any instructions) ded
instruction mode qualification 
Provided

Usable device
Digit
Setting
data
Bit device Word device Constant Pointer desig- Index
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٌ ٌ
S2 ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٌ ٌ ٤
٤
D ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤ ٤

A circle is placed when digit

"T" is representing T, ST, and C. designation is possible for the bit
A circle is placed for the device that can be device.
used with the D+/D- instruction. A triangle is
A circle is placed for the instruction
placed when there is a restriction in use.
where index (Z device) can be used.
Upper left indicates the model without extended index modification:
Down right with extended index modification.
A list of usable instructions and devices for each instruction mode is provided here.
"Compatible instruction mode" is the PLC instruction mode having instruction's compatibility
with the conventional machine type. "Extended instruction mode" is the instruction mode in
which the kinds of instructions and usable devices are extended. Refer to " Compatible
Instructions and Extended Instructions" for details.

Instruction Execution
indicates D+ / D-
symbol condition
Command
D+, D-
S1 S2 D
D + P, D - P Command
P S1 S2 D

-
Execution condition and ladder display of D+ / D instructions are shown below.
Execution Always Executes at Executes Executes once
condition executes ON once at ON at OFF
Signs in the No sign
explanation page


Setting data Details Data type

Augend/minuend data or head No. of the device where
S1
augend/minuend data is stored.
Addend/subtrahend data or head No. of the device where BIN 32 bits
S2
addend/subtrahend data is stored.
D Head No. of the device to store addition/subtraction result.

Explanation of the setting data and data type for each instruction is provided.

The functions first, then execution conditions, then program examples are described on the following pages.

II - 71
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Explanation of Instructions

II - 72
 7
Basic Instructions

II - 73
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

Basic instructions include instructions to describe relay control ladders, etc. They are divided into the following
categories.

Instruction Meaning
Contact instruction Operation start, series connection, parallel connection
Ladder block connection, creation of pulses from operation results, store/read
Connection instruction
operation results
Output instruction Bit device output, pulse output, output reversal
Shift instruction Bit device shift
Master control instruction Master control
Other instructions Instructions which do not fall into the above categories, such as no operation.

II - 74
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.1 Contact instruction

7.1 Contact instruction

○ LD, LDI (Operation start) AND, ANI (Series connection) OR, ORI (Parallel connection)

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode qualification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / /○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Bit device number / Bit designation of word device
LD X1/D0.1

X1/D0.1
LDI

X2/D0.2
AND

X2/D0.2
ANI

OR X3/D0.3

ORI X3/D0.3

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Devices used as connections Bit

II - 75
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

Functions

LD,LDI

(1) LD is the A contact operation start instruction, and LDI is the B contact operation start instruction.
They read ON/OFF information from the designated device (if a word device bit has been
designated, this becomes the 1/0 status of the designated bit), and use that as an operation result.

AND,ANI

(1) AND is the A contact series connection instruction, and ANI is the B contact series connection
instruction. They read the ON/OFF data of the designated bit device (if a bit designation has been
made for a word device, the 1/0 status of the designated bit is read), perform an AND operation on
that data and the operation result to that point, and take this value as the operation result.

OR,ORI

(1) OR is the A contact single parallel connection instruction, and ORI is the B contact single parallel
connection instruction. They read ON/OFF information from the designated device (if a word device
bit has been designated, this becomes the 1/0 status of the designated bit), and perform an OR
operation with the operation results to that point, and use the resulting value as the operation result.

[REMARK]
Word device bit designations are made in hexadecimal. Bit b11 of D0 would be D0.B.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors with LD,LDI,AND,ANI,OR,or ORI instructions.

Program Example
(1) A program using LD, AND,OR, and ORI instructions.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X3 Y33
0
D0.5 Steps Inst. Device
b15 ‥‥‥ b5 ‥ b0 0 LD X3
D0
1 1 ORD0.5
0 X5
2 OR X5
3 OUT Y33
X5 M11 Y34 4 LD X5
4 5 AND M11
X6 6 ORI X6
7 OUT Y34
8 END
8 END

II - 76
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.1 Contact instruction

(2) A program linking contact points established through the use of ANB and ORB instructions.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device

Y33 0 LD X3
X3 D6.1 M9
b15 ‥‥‥‥‥ b4 b1b0 1 AND D6.1
1 1 0 2 LDI D6.4
D6 0 0
D6.4 X7 3 ANI X7
ORB
4 ORB
X5 M8 M1 Y34 5 ANI M9
6 OUT Y33
7 7 LD X5
M9 8 LD M8
ANB 9 OR M9
10 ANB
13 END 11 ANI M11
12 OUT Y34
13 END

(3) A parallel program with OUT instruction

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X3 Y35
Steps Inst. Device
0
0 LD X5
X8 Y36
1 OUT X35
2 AND X8
X9 Y37 3 OUT Y36
4 ANI X9
5 OUT Y37
6 END 6 END

II - 77
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

7.2 Connection Instruction

○ ANB,ORB ... Ladder block series connections and parallel connections

Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W

The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for this
instruction.

Instruction symbol Execution condition

ANB

ANB

Block A Block B

Block A
ORB
ORI
1 contact series connections
Block B use OR or ORI.

II - 78
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.2 Connection Instruction

Functions

ANB

(1) Performs an AND operation on block A and block B, and takes the resulting value as the operation
result.

(2) The symbol for ANB is not the contact symbol, but rather is the connection symbol.

(3) When programming in the list mode, up to 7 instructions of ANB and ORB combined (8 blocks) can be
used consecutively.

ORB

(1) Conducts an OR operation on block A and block B, and takes the resulting value as the operation
result.

(2) ORB is used to perform parallel connections for ladder blocks with two or more contacts. For ladder
blocks with only one contact, use OR or ORI; there is no need for ORB in such cases.
[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]
X0 X1 Y10 0 LD X0
0 1 AND X1
2 LD X2
X2 X3
3 AND X3
4 ORB
5 OR X4
X4
6 OUT Y10

(3) The ORB symbol is not the contact symbol, but rather is the connection symbol.

(4) When programming in the list mode, up to 7 instructions of ANB and ORB combined (8 blocks) can be
used consecutively.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors with ANB or ORB instructions.

Program Example
(1) A program using ANB and ORB instructions

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
M0 0 LD X0
X0 X1
1 OR X2
0 2 LD X1
X2 X3
3 OR X3
4 ANB
X4 X5 5 LD X4
6 AND X5
9 7 ORB
END
8 OUT M0
9 END

II - 79
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

○ LDP,LDF,ANDP,ANDF,ORP,ORF ... Pulse operation start, pulse series connection, pulse parallel connection

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / /○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Bit device number / Bit designation of word device
LDP X1/D0.1

X1/D0.1
LDF

X2/D0.2
ANDP

X2/D0.2
ANDF

ORP X3/D0.3

ORF X3/D0.3

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Devices used as contacts Bit

II - 80
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.2 Connection Instruction

Functions

LDP,LDF

(1) LDP is the leading edge pulse operation start instruction, and is ON only at the leading edge of the
designated bit device (when it goes from OFF to ON).
If a word device has been designated, it is ON only when the designated bit changes from 0 to 1.
In cases where there is only an LDP instruction, it acts identically to instructions for the creation of a
pulse that are executed during ON ( □ P).

A ladder using LDP instruction A ladder not using an LDP instruction

X0 X0
MOV K0 D0 MOVP K0 D0
X0 X0
M0 PLS M0

(2) LDF is the trailing edge pulse operation start instruction, and is ON only at the trailing edge of the
designated bit device (when it goes from ON to OFF). If a word device has been designated, it is ON
only when the designated bit changes from 1 to 0.

ANDP,ANDF

(1) ANDP is a leading edge pulse series connection instruction, and ANDF is a trailing edge pulse series
connection instruction. They perform an AND operation with the operation result to that point, and
take the resulting value as the operation result.
The ON/OFF data used by ANDP and ANDF are indicated in the table below:

Devices Designated by ANDP Devices Designated by ANDF

Word Device Bit ANDP State Word Device Bit ANDF State
Bit Device Bit Device
Designation Designation
OFF → ON 0→1 ON OFF → ON 0→1
OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF
ON 1 OFF ON 1
ON → OFF 1→0 ON → OFF 1→0 ON

ORP,ORF

(1) ORP is a leading edge pulse parallel connection instruction, and ORF is a trailing edge pulse parallel
connection instruction. They perform an OR operation with the operation result to that point and take
the resulting value as the operation result.

Devices Designated by ORP Devices Designated by ORF

Word Device Bit ORP State Word Device Bit ORF State
Bit Device Bit Device
Designation Designation
OFF → ON 0→1 ON OFF → ON 0→1
OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF
ON 1 OFF ON 1
ON → OFF 1→0 ON → OFF 1→0 ON

II - 81
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors with LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, or ORF instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program executes the MOV instruction at input X0, or at the leading edge of b10 (bit 10)
of data register D0.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0 Steps Inst. Device

0 MOV K0 D0 0 LDP X0
D0. A* 2 ORP D0. A
4 MOV K0
6 END D0
6 END

[REMARK]
1)*: Word device bit designations are performed in hexadecimal.
Bit b10 of D0 would be D0.A.

II - 82
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.2 Connection Instruction

○ INV ... Operation results inversion

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
/ /

Instruction symbol Execution condition

INV

Functions
Inverts the operation result immediately prior to the INV instruction.

Operation Result Immediately Prior to the INV Operation Result Following the Execution of the INV
Instruction. Instruction.
OFF ON
ON OFF

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the INV instruction.

Program Example
(1) A program which inverts the X0 ON/OFF data, and outputs from Y10.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0 Y10 Steps Inst. Device

0 0 LD X0
1 INV
3 END 2 OUT Y10
3 END

[Timing Chart]
ON

X0 OFF

Y10 ON
OFF

POINT
(1) The INV instruction operates based on the results of calculation made until the INV instruction is given.
Accordingly, use it in the same position as that of the AND instruction.
The INV instruction cannot be used at the LD and OR positions.

II - 83
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

○ MEP,MEF ... Operation result pulse conversion

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
/ /

Instruction symbol Execution condition

MEP

MEF

Functions

MEP

(1) If operation results up to MEP instruction are leading edge (from OFF to ON), goes ON (continuity
state).
If operation results up to MEP instruction are anything other than leading edge, goes OFF (non-
continuity state).

(2) Use of the MEP instruction simplifies pulse conversion processing when multiple contacts are
connected in series.

MEF

(1) If operation results up to MEF instruction are trailing edge (from ON to OFF), goes ON (continuity
state).
If operation results up to MEF instruction are anything other than trailing edge, goes OFF (non-
continuity state).

(2) Use of the MEF instruction simplifies pulse conversion processing when multiple contacts are
connected in series.

II - 84
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.2 Connection Instruction

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the MEP or MEF instructions.

Program Example
(1) A program which performs pulse conversion on the operation results of X0 and X1.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X0 X1
0 LD X0
0 SET M0
1 AND X1
2 MEP
4 END
3 SET M0
4 END

POINT
(1) The MEP and MEF instructions may not work properly after the pulse conversion of contacts with index
in a subroutine program or in a FOR - NEXT instruction.
Use EGP/ EGF instruction when executing a pulse conversion of contact with index in a FOR - NEXT
instruction or in a subroutine program.
(2) Because the MEP and MEF instructions operate with the operation results immediately prior to the
MEP and MEF instructions, the AND instruction should be used at the same position.
The MEP and MEF instructions cannot be used at the LD or OR position.

II - 85
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

○ EGP,EGF ... Pulse conversion of edge relay operation results

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
○ / /○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

C ommand Vn
EGP

Command Vn
EGF

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

Vn Edge relay No. where operation results are stored Bit

Functions

EGP

(1) Operation results up to the EGP instruction are stored in memory by the edge relay (V).

(2) Goes ON (continuity state) at the leading edge (OFF to ON) of the operation result up to the EGP
instruction.
If the operation result up to the EGP instruction is other than a leading edge (i.e., from ON to ON, ON
to OFF, or OFF to OFF), it goes OFF (non-continuity state).

(3) Use the EGP instruction to execute a pulse operation of programs such as subroutine programs or
programs with index modification between FOR and NEXT.

(4) The EGP instruction can be used like an AND instruction.

EGF

(1) Operation results up to the EGF instruction are stored in memory by the edge relay (V).

(2) Goes ON (continuity state) at the trailing edge (from ON to OFF) of the operation result up to the EGF
instruction.
If the operation result up to the EGF instruction is other than a trailing edge (i.e., from OFF to ON,
ON to ON, or OFF to OFF), it goes OFF (non-continuity state).

(3) Use the EGF instruction to execute a pulse operation of programs such as subroutine programs or
programs with index modification between FOR and NEXT.

(4) The EGF instruction can be used like an AND instruction.

II - 86
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.2 Connection Instruction

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the EGP or EGF instructions.

Program Example
(1) Program which uses EGF instruction in sub routine program.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

SM400
0 MOV K0 Z0
① Steps Inst. Device
CALL P0 0 LD SM400
1 MOV K0
MOV K1 Z0 Z0
4 CALL P0
② 6 MOV K1
CALL P0
Z0
9 CALL P0
11 FEND 11 FEND
12 P0
P0 X0Z0 V0Z0 13 LD X0Z0
12 ↑
｜ INC D0Z0
14 EGP V0Z0
15 INC D0Z0
17 RET 17 RET
18 END
18 END

[Operation]

ENDprocessing ① ② ① ②

ON

X0 OFF

ON

X1 OFF
ON

V0 OFF
ON

V1 OFF

D0 1

D1 1

POINT
(1) Because the EGP and EGF instructions operate with the operation results immediately prior to the EGP
and EGF instructions, the AND instruction should be used at the same position.
The EGP and EGF instructions cannot be used at the LD or OR position.

II - 87
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

○ MPS,MRD,MPP ... Store, read and clear of operation result

Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W

The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for this
instruction.

Instruction symbol Execution condition

MPS, MRD, and MPP are not displayed as a part of the ladder display.

MPS

MRD

MPP

Functions

MPS

(1) Stores in memory the operation result (ON or OFF) immediately prior to the MPS instruction.

(2) Up to 7 MPS instructions can be used successively. However, if an MPP instruction is used in the
middle of process, the number of uses calculated for the MPS instruction will be decremented by
one.

MRD

(1) Reads the operation result stored for the MPS instruction, and uses that result to perform the
operation in the next step.

MPP

(1) Reads the operation result stored for the MPS instruction, and uses that result to perform the
operation in the next step.

(2) Clears the operation results stored by the MPS instruction.

POINT
(1) The following shows ladders both using and not using the MPS, MRD, and MPP instructions.
Ladder using the MPS, MRD, and MPP instructions. Ladder not using MPS, MRD, and MPP instructions.
X0 X1 X2 X0 X1 X2
Y10 Y10
X3 X4 X0 X1 X3 X4
Y11 Y11
X5 X0 X1 X5
Y12 Y12

　　

II - 88
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.2 Connection Instruction

Operation Errors
(1) There are no errors associated with the MPS, MRD, or MPP instructions.

Program Example
(1) A program using the MPS, MRD, and MPP instructions.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X1C M8
10 Y30 Steps Inst. Device
(a)
10 LD X1C
(b) Y31 (a) 11 MPS
X1D (c) M9 (d) M68 12 AND M8
16 Y32
13 OUT Y30
T0
(b) 14 MPP
(e) Y33
15 OUT Y31
(f) Y34
X1E M81(g) M96 16 LD X1D
27 Y35 (c) 17 MPS
M97 18 AND M9
(h) Y36 (d) 19 MPS
M98 20 AND M68
(i) Y37
21 OUT Y32
(j) Y38 (e) 22 MPP
23 AND T0
40 END 24 OUT Y33
(f) 25 MPP
26 OUT Y34

27 LD X1E
28 AND M81
(g) 29 MPS
30 AND M96
31 OUT Y35
(h) 32 MRD
33 AND M97
34 OUT Y36
(i) 35 MRD
36 AND M98
37 OUT Y37
(j) 38 MPP
39 OUT Y38
40 END

II - 89
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

7.3 Output Instruction

○ OUT(Y,M,L,F,B,SB,SM) ... Out instructions (Y,M,L,F,B,SB,SM)

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / /○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Bit device number (D)

OUT
Y35

Bit designation of word devic e (D)

D0.5

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D Number of device to be turned ON and OFF Bit

Functions
(1) Operation results up to the OUT instruction are output to the designated device.

When Bit Designation has been

When Using Bit Devices
Made for Word Device
Operation results
Contact
Coil Bit Designated
A Contact B Contact
OFF ON Non-continuity Continuity 0
ON ON Continuity Non-continuity 1

II - 90
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.3 Output Instruction

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the OUT instruction.

Program Example
(1) When bit device is in use

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X5 Steps Inst. Device

0 Y33 0 LD X5
X6 1 OUT Y33
2 Y34
2 LD X6
3 OUT Y34
Y35
4 OUT Y35
5 END 5 END

(2) When bit designation has been made for word device

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X5
0 D0.5
X6 Steps Inst. Device
2 D0.6 0 LD X5
1 OUT D0.5
D0.7 2 LD X6
5 END 3 OUT D0.6
4 OUT D0.7
5 END
b15 ‥‥‥ b7b6b5 ‥ b0

D0

II - 91
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

○ OUT(T,ST), OUTH(T) ... 100ms, 10ms timer output

Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
D ○
Set
value ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for this
instruction.

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Set value (Valid from 1 to 32767)

K50
OUT T □ T0
(100ms timer)
OUT ST □
Set value
(100ms retentive
(Valid from 1 to 32767 of the c ontents of data regis ter)
timer) D10
T0

Set value (Valid from 1 t o 32767)

OUTH T □ Display of 10ms timer output inst ruct ion H K50
(10ms timer) T0

Set value (Valid from 1 t o 32767 of the cont ents of data regist er)
H D10
T0

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D Timer number Bit
Set value Value set for timer BIN 16 bits

[REMARK]
(1) Timer values can be set only as a decimal constant (K). Hexadecimal constants (H) cannot be used
for timer settings.
(2) The retentive timer (ST) cannot be used for the 10ms timer.

II - 92
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.3 Output Instruction

Functions
(1) When the operation results up to the OUT instruction are ON, the timer coil goes ON and the timer
counts up to the value that has been set; when the time up state (total numeric value is equal to or
greater than the setting value), the contact responds as follows:

A contact Continuity
B contact Non-continuity

(2) The following will apply if the calculation result up to OUT instruction changes from ON to OFF.

Prior to Time Up After Time Up

Type of Timer Timer Coil Present Value of Timer
A Contact B Contact A Contact B Contact
Non- Non-
100ms timer OFF 0 Continuity Continuity
continuity continuity
Maintains the present Non- Non-
100ms retentive timer OFF Continuity Continuity
value continuity continuity
Non- Non-
10ms timer OFF 0 Continuity Continuity
continuity continuity

(3) The contact status of retentive timer after time-up will not be changed until the RST instruction is
executed.

(4) A negative number (-32768 to -1) cannot be set as the setting value for the timer.
If a negative value is set for the word device, operation is carried out taking the value as a positive
value with no signs.

(5) When 0 is set for the set value, time will be up instantly.

(6) In cases where the OUT instruction is not executed while the OUT instruction is ON due to the JMP
instruction, etc., no present value update or contact ON/OFF operation is conducted. Also, if the
same OUT instruction is conducted two or more times during the same scan, the present value will
be updated for the number of times executed.

POINT
(1) Setting the timer setting value using the setting display device.
The method for setting the value of timer T and retentive timer ST includes the following two ways.
- A method in which the setting value (Kn) programmed by a sequence
program is validated. (Fixed timer)
- A method in which the setting value set with the setting display device is validated. (Variable timer)
Refer to "Explanation of Devices:Detailed Explanation of Devices" for details on variable timer.

II - 93
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the OUT T □ or OUTH T □ instruction.

Program Example
(1) The following program turns Y10 and Y14 ON 10 seconds after X0 has gone ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0 K100 Steps Inst. Device

0 T1 0 LD X0
T1 1 OUT T1
4 Y10
K100
4 LD T1
Y14
5OUT Y10
7 END 6 OUT Y14
7 END

(2) The following program uses the BCD data at X10 to X1F as the timer's set value.

[Ladder Mode]

X0
0 BINP K4X10 D10
X2 D10 Converts BCD data at X10 to X1F to BIN and
4 T2 stores at D10.
T2 When X2 goes ON, the data stored at D10 is
8 Y15 calculated as the set value.
Y15 goes ON when T2 counts up.
10 END

[List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
0 LD X0
1 BINP K4X10
D10
4 LDX2
5 OUT T2
D10
8 LD T2
9 OUT Y15
10 END

(3) The following program turns Y10 ON 250ms after X0 has gone ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

H K25 Steps Inst. Device

X0
T0 0 LD X0
0
T0 1 OUTH T0
5 Y10 K25
5 LD T0
7 END 6 OUT Y10
7 END

II - 94
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.3 Output Instruction

○ OUT(C) ... Counters

Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable devices
Constan Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
t desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
D ○
Set
value ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for this
instruction.

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Set value (Valid from 1 t o 32767)

K50
OUT C □
C0

Set value (Valid from 1 to 32767 of the cont ents of data regist er)
D10
C0

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D Counter No. Bit
Set value Counter set value BIN 16 bits

[REMARK]
(1) Only decimal constant (K) can be used for the counter setting value.
Hexadecimal constant (H) cannot be used for the counter setting value.

Functions
(1) When the operation results up to the OUT instruction change from OFF to ON, 1 is added to the
present value (count value) and the count up status (present value = set value), and the contacts
respond as follows:

A contact Continuity
B contact Non-continuity

(2) Not counted if the operation result is remained ON. (There is no need to perform pulse conversion on
count input.)

(3) After "present value ≧ set value" has been realized, the contact state will not be changed until RST
instruction is executed, but the present value is further added by +1.
In this case, the present value is added by +1 up to 65535, and then counted up again by +1 from 0.

(4) A negative number (-32768 to -1) cannot be set as the setting value. If a negative value is set for the
word device, operation is carried out taking the value as a positive value with no signs. If the set
value is 0, the processing is identical to that of when 1 is set.

II - 95
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

POINT
(1) Setting the timer setting value using the setting display device.
The method for setting the value of timer T and retentive timer ST includes the following two ways.
- A method in which the setting value (Kn) programmed by a sequence program is validated.
(Fixed timer)
- A method in which the setting value set with the setting display device is validated. (Variable timer)
Refer to "Explanation of Devices:Detailed Explanation of Devices" for details on variable timer.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the OUT C □ instruction.

Program Example
(1) The following program turns Y30 ON after X0 has gone ON 10 times, and resets the counter when X1
goes ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0 K10 Steps Inst. Device

0 C10 0 LD X0
C10 1 OUT C10
4 Y30 K10
X1 4 LD C10
6 RST C10 5 OUT Y30
6 LD X1
9 END 7 RST C10
9 END

(2) The following program sets the value for C10 at 10 when X0 goes ON, and at 20 when X1 goes ON.

[Ladder Mode]

X0 X1
0 MOVP K10 D0 Stores 10 at D0 when X0 goes ON

X1 X0 Stores 20 at D0 when X1 goes ON

5 MOVP K20 D0
X3 D0 C10 takes data stored at D0 as set value, and
10 C10 counts

C10 Y30 goes ON when C10 reaches count up

14 Y30
state

16 END

[List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
0 LD X0
1 ANI X1
2 MOVP K10
D0
5 LD X1
6 ANI X0
7 MOVP K20
D0
10 LD X3
11 OUT C10
D0
14 LD C10
15 OUT Y30
16 END

II - 96
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.3 Output Instruction

○ SET ... Setting devices (ON)

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / /○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

SET input
SET
SET D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D Bit device number to be set (ON) Bit

Functions
(1) When SET input is ON, the designated devices respond as follows:

Device Device Status

Bit device Coils and contacts turned ON
Word device Designation bit set at 1

(2) Devices turned ON will stay ON even if SET input goes to OFF. Devices turned ON by the SET
instruction can be turned OFF by the RST instruction.
ON
X5 X5 OFF
SET Y10
X7 ON
RST Y10 X7 OFF

Y10 OFF ON

(3) Device status does not change when SET input is OFF.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the SET instruction.

II - 97
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

Program Example
(1) When X8 is turned ON, Y8B is set (turned ON); when X9 is turned ON, Y8B is reset (turned OFF).

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X8 Steps Inst. Device

0 SET Y8B 0 LD X8
X9 1 SET Y8B
2 RST Y8B 2 LD X9
3 RST Y8B
4 END 4 END

(2) When X8 is turned ON, D0 bit5 (b5) is turned to 1; when X9 is turned ON, D0 bit 5 (b5) is turned to 0.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X8
0 SET D0.5 Steps Inst. Device
X9 Turn D0 b5 to 1 0 LD X8
2 RST D0.5 1 SET D0.5
Turn D0 b5 to 0 2 LD X9
4 END 3 RST D0.5
4 END
b5 b0
D0

II - 98
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.3 Output Instruction

○ RST ... Resetting devices

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / /○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

RST input
RST
RST D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D Device No. to be reset Bit

Functions
(1) Designated devices respond as follows when RST input is turned ON:

Device Device Status

Bit device Turns coils and contacts OFF
Timers and counters Sets the present value to 0, and turns coils and contacts OFF
Word device Sets value of designated bit to 0

(2) Device status does not change when RST input goes OFF

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the RST instruction.

II - 99
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

Program Example
(1) Reset of 100ms retentive timer and counter is executed.

[Ladder Mode]

X4 K18000 When ST60 is set for the retentive timer,

0 ST60 ST60 is turned ON when X4's ON time
ST60 reaches 30 minutes.
K16
5 C23
The number of times when ST60 has turned
ON is counted.
RST ST60
C23 When ST60 is turned ON, ST60 is reset.
14 Y55
X5 When C23 counts up, Y55 is turned ON.
16 RST C23
When X5 is turned ON, C23 is reset.
21 END

[List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
0 LD X4
1 OUT ST60
K18000
5 LD ST60
6 OUT C23
K16
10 RST ST60
14 LD C23
15 OUT Y55
16 LD X5
17 RST C23
21 END

II - 100
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.3 Output Instruction

○ PLS,PLF ... Pulse (1 scan ON)

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / /○

Instruction Execution
symbol condition

Command
PLS
PLS D

Command
PLF
PLF D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D Pulse conversion device Bit

Functions

PLS

(1) When PLS instruction is turned OFF to ON, turn specified device ON for 1 scan; otherwise
(ON→ON,ON→OFF,OFF→ON), turn OFF.
ON
X5 X5 OFF
PLS D ON

M0 OFF
1 scan 1 scan

(2) If the RUN key switch is changed from RUN to STOP after the execution of the PLS instruction, the
PLS instruction will not be executed again even if the switch is set back to RUN. PLS instruction will
be executed if the PLS instruction has been ON when the power was turned ON.

(3) When a latch relay (L) is specified for the PLS instruction, switching power OFF with the latch relay (L)
ON and then switching it ON again executes the specified device's 1scan ON.

II - 101
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

PLF

(1) When PLF instruction is changed from ON to OFF, the designated device is turned 1 scan ON. For the
other cases (OFF→OFF,OFF→ON,ON→ON), the designated device is turned OFF.
ON
X5 X5 OFF
PLF D ON

M0 OFF

1 scan 1 scan

(2) Turn the sequence program RUN switch to STOP after PLF instruction. Even if switched to RUN
again, PLF instruction will not be executed.

POINT
Note that the device designated by D may be ON more than one scan if the PLS or PLF instruction is jumped
by the CJ instruction or if the subroutine program where the PLS/PLF instruction had been executed was not
called by the CALL instruction.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the PLS or PLF instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program executes the PLS instruction when X9 goes ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X9
0 PLS M9 0 LD X9
1 PLS M9
3 END 3 END

ON

X9 OFF
ON

M9 OFF
1 scan

(2) The following program executes the PLF instruction when X9 goes OFF.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X9 Steps Inst. Device

0 PLF M9 0 LD X9
1 PLF M9
3 END 3 END

ON

X9 OFF
ON

M9 OFF
1 scan

II - 102
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.3 Output Instruction

○ FF ... Reversing the operation result

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / /○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Command
FF
FF D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D Device number to invert Bit

Functions
(1) The status of the device designated by (D) is inverted when the inversion command goes from OFF to
ON.

Device Status
Device
Prior to FF execution After FF execution
OFF ON
Bit device
ON OFF
0 1
Bit designation of word device
1 0

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the FF instruction.

Program Example
(1) The following program inverts the output of Y10 when X9 goes ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X9 Steps Inst. Device

0 FF Y10 0 LD X9
1 FF Y10
3 END 3 END

ON

X9 OFF
ON

Y10 OFF

II - 103
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

(2) The following program reverses b10 (bit 10) of D10 when X0 goes ON

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0 Steps Inst. Device

0 FF D10.A 0 LD X0
1 FF D10.A
3 END 3 END

II - 104
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.4 Shift Instruction

7.4 Shift Instruction

○ SFT, SFTP ... Device shift

Compatible
Usable instruction : SFT
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / /○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Command
SFT
SFT D

Command
SFTP
SFTP D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D Number of device to shift Bit

Functions
(1) When bit device is used
(a) Shifts to a device designated by (D) the ON/OFF status of the device immediately prior to the one
designated, and turns the prior device OFF.
Shift input
Shift range
M0
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8
SFTP M14
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 X02 ON
0
SFTP M13
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 After first shift input
0
SFTP M12
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 After second shift input
SFTP M11 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 X02 ON
X2 0
SET M10 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 After third shift input
0
First device to shift 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 After fourth shift input
0
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 After fifth shift input

*At M8 to 15, "1" indicates ON and "0" indicates OFF.

For example, if M11 has been designated by the SFT instruction, when the SFT instruction is
executed, it will shift the ON/OFF status of M10 to M11, and turn M10 OFF.

II - 105
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

(b) Turn the first device to be shifted ON with the SET instruction.

(c) When the SFT and SFTP are to be used consecutively, the program starts from the device with the
larger number.

(2) When word device bit designation is used

(a) Shifts to a bit in the device designated by (D) the 1/0 status of the bit immediately prior to the one
designated, and turns the prior bit to 0.
For example, if D0.5 (bit 5 [b5] of D0) has been designated by the SFT instruction, when the SFT
instruction is executed, it will shift the 1/0 status of b4 of D0 to b5, and turn b4 to 0.

Prior to shift b15 b5 b4 b0

execution 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
D0 0
After shift
execution 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the SFT(P) instruction.

Program Example
(1) The following program shifts Y57 to Y5B when X8 goes ON.

[Ladder Mode]

X8
0 SFT Y5B

SFT Y5A Shifts Y57 to Y5B when X8 goes ON

SFT Y59
Begin programming from larger
device number
SFT Y58
X7
10 SET Y57
Y57 turned ON when X7 goes ON
13 END

[Timing Chart] [List Mode]

ON
X8 OFF

X7 OFF Steps Inst. Device

0 LDP X8
Y57 OFF 2 SFT Y5B
4 SFT Y5A
Y58 OFF 6 SFT Y59
8 SFT Y58
10 LDP X7
Y59 OFF
12 SET Y57
13 END
Y5A OFF

Y5B OFF

II - 106
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.5 Master Control Instruction

7.5 Master Control Instruction

○ MC,MCR ... Setting and resetting the master control

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Level
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H N
W
n ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Level desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H N
n / ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / / ○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Command
MC MC n D
n
D
Master control ladder

MCR MCR n

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

n Nesting (N0 to N7) Nesting
D Number of device to turn ON Bit

Functions
The master control instruction is used to enable the creation of highly efficient ladder switching sequence
programs, through the opening and closing of a common bus for ladders.
A ladder using the master control would look as shown below:

Ladder as displayed in Ladder Mode Ladder as it actually operates

X0 X0
MC N1 M0 MC N1 M0
N1 M0 X1 X3 M7 N1 M0 X1 X3 M7
Y47 Y47
Executed only
M5 M5 when X0 is ON
Y4F Y4F
X6 X4 X6 X4

X0 X0
MCR N1 MCR N1
X0F XF
Y10 Y10

II - 107
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

MC

(1) If the ON/OFF command of the MC instruction is ON when master control is commenced, the
operation result between the MC instruction and MCR instruction will be exactly as the instruction
(ladder) shows.
If the MC ON/OFF instruction is OFF, the operation result between MC and MCR instructions will be
as follows:

Device Device Status

100ms, 10ms timer Count value goes to 0
100ms cumulative timer counter Current count value is kept as it is.
Devices in OUT instruction All turned OFF
Devices in the following instructions:
Maintain current status
SET/RST, SFT function

(2) Nesting can be used up to 8 times (N0 to 7). When using nesting, nests should be inserted from the
lower to higher nesting number (N) with the MC instruction, and from the higher to the lower order
with the MCR instruction.

(3) Regardless of the MC instruction's ON/OFF state, scan between MC instruction and MCR instruction
can be executed.

(4) MC instruction can be used as many times as you wish within one scan by changing devices in the
destination D.

(5) When MC instruction is ON, coil of the device specified in the destination turns ON.

MCR

(1) This is the instruction for recovery from the master control, and indicates the end of the master control
range of operation.

(2) Specified nesting (N) No. and after are cleared.

MCR N3 N3 to N7 master control

is cleared

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the MC or MCR instructions.

II - 108
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.5 Master Control Instruction

Program Example
The master control instruction can be used in nesting. The different master control regions are
distinguished by nesting (N). Nesting can be used from N0 through N7.
The use of nesting enables the creation of ladders which successively limit the execution condition of the
program.
A ladder using nesting would appear as shown below:

Ladder as displayed in ladder mode Ladder as it actually operates

A A
MC N0 M15 MC N0 M15
N0 M15 N0 M15
Executed when A
is ON
B B
MC N1 M16 MC N1 M16
N1 M16 N1 M16
Executed when A
and B are ON
C C
MC N2 M17 MC N2 M17
N2 M17 N2 M17
Executed when A,
B, and C are ON
MCR N2 MCR N2
Executed when A
and B are ON
MCR N1 MCR N1

Executed when
A is ON
MCR N0 MCR N0

No relation to
status of A, B, or C

II - 109
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

7.6 Other Instructions

○ NOP,NOPLF,PAGE n ... No operation

Compatible
Usable instruction : NOP
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
n / ○ /

Instruction symbol Execution condition *NOP is not displayed in ladder display.

NOP NOP

NOPLF NOPLF

PAGE n PAGE n

II - 110
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.6 Other Instructions

Functions

NOP

(1) This is a no operation instruction that has no impact on any operations up to this point.

(2) The NOP instruction is used in the following cases:

(a) To insert space for sequence program debugging.
(b) To delete an instruction without having to change the number of steps. (Replace the instruction
with NOP)
(c) To temporarily delete an instruction.

NOPLF

(1) This is a no operation instruction that has no impact on any operations up to that point.

(2) The NOPLF instruction is used when printing from a peripheral device to force a page change at any
desired location.
(a) When printing ladders
- A page break will be inserted between ladder blocks with the presence of the NOPLF
instruction.
- The ladder cannot be displayed correctly if an NOPLF instruction is inserted in the midst of a
ladder block.
Do not insert an NOPLF instruction in the midst of a ladder block.
(b) When printing instruction lists
- The page will be changed after the printing of the NOPLF instruction.

(3) See the Operating Manual for the peripheral device in use for more information regarding printouts
from peripheral devices.

PAGE n

(1) This is a no operation instruction that has no impact on any operations up to that point.

(2) Programs after PAGEn instruction are controlled as 0 step and after of the specified n-th page.
(Peripheral device display, printers, etc.)

(3) If there is no PAGEn instruction, processing begins from page 0.

II - 111
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

Operation Errors
(1) There are no errors associated with the NOP, NOPLF, or PAGE instructions.

Program Example
NOP
(1) Contact closed...Deletes AND or ANI instruction

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Before change Steps Inst. Device

0 LD X8
X8 Y97 Y96 1 AND Y97
0 Y12
2 ANI X96
3 OUT Y12
Changed to NOP
4 END

After change Steps Inst. Device

0 LD X8
X8 Y96 1 NOP
0 Y12
2 ANI X96
3 OUT Y12
4 END

(2) Contact closed...LD, LDI changed to NOP

(Note carefully that changing the LD and LDI instructions to NOP completely changes the nature of
ladder.)

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Before change Steps Inst. Device

0 LD X0
X0 1 OUT Y16
0 Y16
2 LD X56
X56 T3 3 AND T3
2 Y66
4 OUT Y66
5 END
Changed to NOP

Steps Inst. Device

After change
0 LD X0
X0 1 OUT Y16
0 Y16 2 NOP
T3 3 AND T3
Y66 4 OUT Y66
5 END

II - 112
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.6 Other Instructions

NOPLF

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0
0 MOV K1 D30 Steps Inst. Device
0 LD X0
1 MOV K1
4 NOPLF
D30
4 NOPLF
5 MOV K2 D40 5 MOV K2
D40
8 NOPLF
8 NOPLF
9 LD X1
X1 10 OUT Y40
9 Y40 11 END

- Printing the ladder will result in the following:

X000
0 MOV K1 D30

MOV K2 D40

8 NOPLF
Page change forced when NOPLF
is inserted between two ladder
blocks.
‐1‐

X001
9 X001

PAGE n

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

10 PAGE K5 Steps Inst. Device

10 PAGE K5
X0 X1
12 LD X0
12 Y0
13 AND X1
X2 14 OUT Y0
15 NOP Y1 15 LD X2
16 NOP
NOPLF 17 OUT Y1
18
18 NOPLF
19 PAGE K6
19 PAGE K6 21 LD X3
X3 22 OUT Y2
21 Y2 23

II - 113
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Instructions

II - 114
 8
Function Instructions

II - 115
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

The function instruction includes the following types.

Instruction Meaning
Comparison operation instruction Compare data to data
Adds, subtracts, multiplies, divides, increments, or decrements data with other
Arithmetic operation instruction
data
Data conversion instruction Coverts data types
Data transfer instruction Transmits designated data
Program branch instruction Program jumps
Logical operation instructions Logical operations such as logical sum, logical product, etc.
Rotation instruction Rotation/shift of designated data
Data processing instructions Data searches, data processing such as decoding and encoding
Other instructions Instructions which do not fall into the above categories
Instructions used to achieve the compatibility with sequence programs in the
Special instructions for old machine
old machine type.
type compatible
(Can be used in the compatible instruction mode only.)

II - 116
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.1 Comparison Operation Instruction

8.1 Comparison Operation Instruction

○ =, <>, >, <=, <, >= ... 16-bit data comparisons

Compatible
Usable instruction : =, >, <
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ △
○
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ △

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ △ △
○ /○
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ △ △
△ : S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs =, <>, >, <=, <, >=

LD S1 S2

AND S1 S2

OR
S1 S2

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S1
Comparative data, or device No. where comparative data is stored BIN 16 bits
S2

Functions
(1) Treats BIN 16-bit data from device designated by (S1) and BIN 16-bit data from device designated by
(S2) as an A contact, and performs comparison operation.

(2) The results of the comparison operations for the individual instructions are as follows:

Instruction Symbol Comparison Instruction Symbol Comparison

Condition Condition
in Operation Result in Operation Result
= S1 = S2 = S1 ≠ S2
<> S1 ≠ S2 <> S1 = S2
> S1 > S2 > S1 ≦ S2
Continuity Non-continuity
<= S1 ≦ S2 <= S1 > S2
< S1 < S2 < S1 ≧ S2
>= S1 ≧ S2 >= S1 < S2

II - 117
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

(3) In cases where hexadecimal constants have been designated by (S1) and (S2), or when a numerical
value (8 to F) where the highest bit (b15) will be 1 has been designated, the value will be read as a
negative BIN value number for purposes of the comparison.
Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the =, <>, >, <=, <, or >= instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program compares the data at X0 to XF with the data at D3, and turns Y33 ON if the
data is identical.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Y33 Steps Inst. Device

0 = K4X0 D3 0 LD= K4X0
D3
4 END 3 OUT Y33
4 END

(2) The following program compares BIN value K100 to the data at D3, and establishes continuity if the
data in D3 is something other than 100.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device

M3 Y33
0 LD M3
0 <> K100 D3 1 AND<> K100
D3
5 END 4 OUT Y33
5 END

(3) The following program compares BIN value K100 to the data at D3, and establishes continuity if the
D3 data is less than 100.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device

M3 Y33 0 LD M3
0 > K100 D3 1 LD> K100
M8 D3
4 OR M8
5 ANB
7 END
6 OUT Y33
7 END

(4) The following program compares the data in D0 and D3, and if the data in D0 is equal to or less than
the data in D3, establishes continuity.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M3 M8 Y33 Steps Inst. Device

0 LD M3
0
1 AND M8
2 OR<= D0
<= D0 D3
D3
6 END 5 OUT Y33
6 END

II - 118
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.1 Comparison Operation Instruction

○ D=,D<>,D>,D<=,D<,D>= ... 32-bit data comparison

Compatible
Usable instruction : D=, D>, D<
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ △
○
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ △

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / △ △
○ /○
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / △ △
△ : S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs D=, D<>, D>, D<=, D<, D>=

LD S1 S2

AND S1 S2

OR
S1 S2

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S1
Comparative data, or device No. where comparative data is stored BIN 32 bits
S2

Functions
(1) Treats BIN 32-bit data from device designated by (S1) and BIN 32-bit data from device designated by
(S2) as an A contact, and performs comparison operation.
(2) The results of the comparison operations for the individual instructions are as follows:

Instruction Symbol Comparison Instruction Symbol Comparison

Condition Condition
in Operation Result in Operation Result
D= S1 = S2 D= S1 ≠ S2
D<> S1 ≠ S2 D<> S1 = S2
D> S1 > S2 D> S1 ≦ S2
Continuity Non-Non-continuity
D<= S1 ≦ S2 D<= S1 > S2
D< S1 < S2 D< S1 ≧ S2
D>= S1 ≧ S2 D>= S1 < S2
(3) In cases where hexadecimal constants have been designated by (S1) and (S2), or when a numerical
value
(8 to F) where the highest bit (b31) will be 1 has been designated, the value will be read as a
negative BIN value number for the purpose of the comparison.

II - 119
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the D=, D<>, D>, D<=, D<, or D>= instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program compares the data at X0 to XF with the data at D3 and D4, and turns Y33 ON if
the data is identical.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Y33 Steps Inst. Device

0 D= K8X0 D3 0 LDD= K8X0
D3
4 END 3 OUT Y33
4 END

(2) The following program compares BIN value K38000 to the data at D3 and D4, and establishes
continuity if the data in D3 and D4 is something other than 38000.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
M3 Y33
0 LD M3
0 D<> K38000 D3 1 ANDD<> K38000
D3
6 END 5 OUT Y33
6 END

(3) The following program compares BIN value K-80000 to the data at D3 and D4, and establishes
continuity if the data in D3 and D4 is less than -80000.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device

M3 Y33 0 LD M3
0 D> K-80000 D3 1 LDD> K-80000
M8 D3
5 OR M8
6 ANB
8 END
7 OUT Y33
8 END

(4) The following program compares the data in D0 and D1 with the data in D3 and D4, and establishes
continuity if the data in D0 and D1 is equal to or less than the data in D3 and D4.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M3 M8 Y33 Steps Inst. Device

0 LD M3
0
1 AND M8
2 ORD<= D0
D<= D0 D3
D3
6 END 5 OUT Y33
6 END

II - 120
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instruction

8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instruction

○ +, +P, -, -P ... BIN 16-bit addition and subtraction operations
(Device at storage destination: Independent type)

Compatible
Usable instruction : +, -
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ △
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ △
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ △ △
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ △ △ ○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○
△ : S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs + / -

Command
+, -
S1 S2 D

Command
+P, -P
P S1 S2 D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

Data to be added to or subtracted from, or the first number of the
S1
device storing such data
Addition or subtraction data, or first number of device storing addition BIN 16 bits
S2
or subtraction data
D First number of device storing addition or subtraction data

II - 121
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Functions

(1) Adds 16-bit BIN data designated by (S1) to 16-bit BIN data designated by (S2) and stores at the
device designated by (D).
S1 S2 D

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) + 1234 (BIN) 6912 (BIN)

(2) Values for S1, S2, and D can be designated between -32768 and 32767 (BIN 16 bits).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b15).

b15 Judgment (+/-)

0 Positive
1 Negative

(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result:
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
- K32767+K2 → K-32767 ---- A negative value is generated if b15 is 1.
(H7FFF) (H0002) (H8001)
- K-32768+K-2 → K32766 ---- A positive value is generated if b15 is 0.
(H8000) (HFFFE) (H7FFE)

(1) Subtracts 16-bit BIN data designated by (S1) from 16-bit BIN data designated by (S2) and stores the
result of the subtraction at the device designated by (D).
S1 S2 D

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) - 1234 (BIN) 4444 (BIN)

(2) Values for S1, S2, and D can be designated between -32768 and 32767 (BIN 16 bits).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b15).

b15 Judgment (+/-)

0 Positive
1 Negative

(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result:
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
- K-32768-K2 → K32766 ---- A positive value is generated if b15 is 0.
(H8000) (H0002) (H7FFE)
- K32767-K-2 → K-32767 ---- A negative value is generated if b15 is 1.
(H7FFF) (HFFFE) (H8001)

II - 122
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instruction

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the +(P) or -(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program adds the contents of D3 and the contents of D0 when X5 goes ON, and outputs
result to Y38 through 3F.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X5
0 LD X5
0 +P D3 D0 K2Y38
1 +P D3
D0
5 END
K2Y38
5 END

(2) The following program outputs the difference between the set value for timer T3 and its present value
to Y40 to 53 by BCD.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X3 0 LD X3
K18000
0 T3 1 OUT T3
M400 K18000
5 - K18000 T3 D3 5 LD M400
6 - K18000
DBCD D3 K5Y40 T3
D3
13 END 10 DBCD D3
K5Y40
13 END

II - 123
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ +, +P, -, -P ... BIN 16-bit addition and subtraction operations

(Device at storage destination: Shared type)

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ ○ ○
○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○
This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "Explanation of Instructions:Instruction
Tables" for correspondence.

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs + / -

Command
+, -
S D

Command
+P, -P
P S D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

Addition or subtraction data, or first number of device storing addition
S
or subtraction data
BIN 16 bits
First number of device storing data to be added to or subtracted from
D
(Addition or subtraction data is stored in this device.)

Functions

(1) Adds 16 bit BIN data designated by (D) to 16 bit BIN data designated by (S), and stores the result of
the addition at the device designated by (D).
D S D

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) + 1234 (BIN) 6912 (BIN)

(2) The value for (S) and (D) can be designated at between -32768 and 32767 (BIN 16 bits).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b15).

b15 Judgment (+/-)

0 Positive
1 Negative

II - 124
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instruction

(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result.
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
- K32767+K2 → K-32767 ---- A negative value is generated if b15 is 1.
(H7FFF) (H0002) (H8001)
- K-32768+K-2 → K32766 ---- A positive value is generated if b15 is 0.
(H8000) (HFFFE) (7FFE)

(1) Subtracts 16-bit BIN data designated by (D) from 16-bit BIN data designated by (S) and stores the
result of the subtraction at the device designated by (D).
D S D

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) - 1234 (BIN) 4444 (BIN)

(2) The values for (S) and (D) can be designated at between -32768 and 32767 (BIN 16 bits).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b15).

b15 Judgment (+/-)

0 Positive
1 Negative

(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result.
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
- K-32768-K2 → K32766 ---- A positive value is generated if b15 is 0.
(H8000) (H0002) (H7FFE)
- K32767-K-2 → K-32767 ---- A negative value is generated if b15 is 1.
(H7FFF) (HFFFE) (H8001)

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the +(P) or -(P) instructions.

II - 125
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ D+, D+P, D-, D-P ... BIN 32-bit addition and subtraction operations
(Device at storage destination: Independent type)

Compatible
Usable instruction : D+, D-
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ △
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ △
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / △ △
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / △ △ ○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /
△ : S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs D+ / D-

Command
D+, D-
S1 S2 D

Command
D+P, D-P
P S1 S2 D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

Data to be added to or subtracted from, or the first number of the
S1
device storing such data
Addition or subtraction data, or number of device storing addition or BIN 32 bits
S2
subtraction data
D First number of device storing addition or subtraction data

II - 126
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instruction

Functions

D+

(1) Adds 32-bit BIN data designated by (S1) to 32-bit BIN data designated by (S2), and stores the result
of the addition at the device designated by (D).
S1+1 S1 S2+1 S2 D+1 D

b31͏͏b16b15͏͏b0 b31͏͏b16b15͏͏b0 b31͏͏b16b15͏͏b0

567890 (BIN)  123456 (BIN) 691346 (BIN)

(2) The values for (S1), (S2) and (D) can be designated at between -2147483648 and 2147483647 (BIN
32 bits).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b31).

b31 Judgment (+/-)

0 Positive
1 Negative

(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result.
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
- K2147483647+K2 → K-2147483647 ---- A negative value is generated if b31 is 1.
(H7FFFFFFF) (H0002) (H80000001)
- K-2147483648+K-2 → K2147483646 ---- A positive value is generated if b31 is 0.
(H80000000) (HFFFE) (H7FFFFFFE)

D-

(1) Subtracts 32-bit BIN data designated by (S1) from 32-bit BIN data designated by (S2), and stores the
result of the subtraction at the device designated by (D).
S1+1 S1 S2+1 S2 D+1 D

b31͏͏b16b15͏͏b0 b31͏͏b16b15͏͏b0 b31͏͏b16b15͏͏b0

567890 (BIN)  123456 (BIN) 444434 (BIN)

(2) The values for (S1), (S2) and (D) can be designated at between -2147483648 and 2147483647 (BIN
32 bits).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b31).

b31 Judgment (+/-)

0 Positive
1 Negative

II - 127
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result.
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
- K-2147483648-K2 → K2147483646 ---- A positive value is generated if b31 is 0.
(H80000000) (H0002) (H7FFFFFFE)
- K2147483647-K-2 → K-2147483647 ---- A negative value is generated if b31 is 1.
(H7FFFFFFF) (HFFFE) (H80000001)

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the D+(P) or D-(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program adds 28-bit data from X10 to X2B to the data at D9 and D10 when X0 goes ON,
and outputs the result of the operation to Y30 to Y4B.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X0
0 LD X0
0 D+P K7X10 D9 K7Y30
1 D+P K7X10
D9
5 END
K7Y30
5 END

(2) The following program subtracts the data from M0 to M23 from the data at D0 and D1 when XB goes
ON, and stores the result at D10 and D11.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
XB
0 LD X0B
0 D-P D0 K6M0 D10
1 D-P D0
K6M0
5 END
D10
5 END

II - 128
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instruction

○ D+, D+P, D-, D-P ... BIN 32-bit addition and subtraction operations
(Device at storage destination: Shared type)

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / ○ ○
○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /
This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "Explanation of Instructions:Instruction
Tables" for correspondence.

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs D+ / D-

Command
D+, D-
S D

Command
D+P, D-P
P S D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

Head No. of the addition/subtraction data or device in which addition
S
or subtraction data is stored.
BIN 32 bits
Head No. of the device in which augend/dividend data is stored.
D
(Addition result is stored in this device.)

Functions

D+

(1) Adds 32-bit BIN data designated by (D) to 32-bit BIN data designated by (S) and stores at the device
designated by (D).
D+1 D S+1 S D+1 D
b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0
567890 (BIN) + 123456 (BIN) 691346 (BIN)

(2) The values for (S) and (D) can be designated at between -2147483648 and 2147483647 (BIN 32 bits).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b31).

b31 Judgment (+/-)

0 Positive
1 Negative

II - 129
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result.
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
- K2147483647+K2 → K-2147483647 ---- A negative value is generated if b31 is 1.
(H7FFFFFFF) (H0002) (H80000001)
- K-2147483648+K-2 → K2147483646 ---- A positive value is generated if b31 is 0.
(H80000000) (HFFFE) (H7FFFFFFE)

D-

(1) Subtracts 32-bit data designated by (D) from 32-bit data designated by (S) and stores the result of the
subtraction at the device designated by (D).
D+1 D S+1 S D+1 D
b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0
567890 (BIN) - 123456 (BIN) 444434 (BIN)

(2) The values for (S) and (D) can be designated at between -2147483648 and 2147483647 (BIN 32 bit).

(3) The judgment of whether data is positive or negative is made by the most significant bit (b31).

b31 Judgment (+/-)

0 Positive
1 Negative

(4) The following will happen when an underflow or overflow is generated in an operation result.
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.
- K-2147483648-K2 → K2147483646 ---- A positive value is generated if b31 is 0.
(H80000000) (H0002) (H7FFFFFFE)
- K2147483647-K-2 → K-2147483647 ---- A negative value is generated if b31 is 1.
(H7FFFFFFF) (HFFFE) (H80000001)

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the D+(P) or D-(P) instructions.

II - 130
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instruction

○ *, *P, /, /P ... BIN 16-bit multiplication and division operations

Compatible
Usable instruction : *, /
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ △
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ △
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ △ △
○
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ △ △ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /
△ : S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs * / /

Command
*, /
S1 S2 D

Command
*P, /P
P S1 S2 D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

Data to be added to or subtracted from, or the first number of the
S1
device storing such data
BIN 16 bits
Addition or subtraction data, or first number of device storing addition
S2
or subtraction data
D First number of device storing addition or subtraction data BIN 32 bits

II - 131
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Functions

(1) Multiplies BIN 16-bit data designated by (S1) and BIN 16-bit data designated by (S2), and stores the
multiplication result in the device designated by (D).
S1 S2 D+1 D

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) 1234 (BIN) 7006652 (BIN)

(2) If (D) is a bit device, designation is made from the lower bits.
Example K1 --- Lower 4 bits (b0 to 3)
K4 --- Lower 16 bits (b0 to 15)
K8 --- 32 bits (b0 to 31)

(3) The values for (S1) and (S2) can be designated at between -32768 and 32767 (BIN 16 bits).

(4) Judgments whether (S1),(S2), and (D) are positive or negative are made on the basis of the most
significant bit (b15 for (S1) and (S2), and b31 for (D)).

b15/b31 Judgment (+/-)

0 Positive
1 Negative

(1) Divides BIN 16-bit data designated by (S1) and BIN 16-bit data designated by (S2), and stores the
division result in the device designated by (D).
Quotient Remainder
S1 S2 D D+1

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) 1234 (BIN) 4(BIN) 742 (BIN)

(2) If a word device has been used, the result of the division operation is stored as 32 bits, and both the
quotient and remainder are stored.
Quotient ---- Stored at the lower 16 bits
Remainder --- Stored at the higher 16 bits

(3) The values for (S1) and (S2) can be designated at between -32768 and 32767 (BIN 16 bits).

(4) Judgment whether values for (S1), (S2), and (D) are positive or negative is made on the basis of the
most significant bit (b15 for (S1) and (S2), and b31 for (D)).

b15/b31 Judgment (+/-)

0 Positive
1 Negative

(5) When divisor S2 is 0, no operation is carried out.

II - 132
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instruction

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the *, *P, /, or /P instructions.

Program Example
(1) When X5 is turned ON, "5678" of BIN and multiplication result of D0 are stored in D3 and D4.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X5
0 LD X5
0 *P K5678 D0 D3
1 *P K5678
D0
5 END
D3
5 END

(2) Multiplication result of BIN data of X8 to XF and BIN data of X10 to X1B is output to D0 and D1.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
M402
0 LD M402
0 * K2X8 K3X10 D0
1 * K2X8
K3X10
5 END
D0
5 END

(3) When X3 is turned ON, the data of X8 to XF is divided by 3.14 and the result is output to D3 and D4.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X3 0 LD X3
0 *P K2X8 K100 D0 1 *P K2X8
K100
/P D0 K314 D3 D0
5 /P D0
9 END K314
D3
9 END

II - 133
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ D*, D*P, D/, D/P ... BIN 32-bit multiplication and division operations

Compatible
Usable instruction : D*, D/
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ △
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ △
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / △ △
○
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / △ △ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /
△ : S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs D* / D/

Command
D*, D/
S1 S2 D

Command
D*P, D/P
P S1 S2 D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

Data to be added to or subtracted from, or the first number of the
S1
device storing such data
Addition or subtraction data, or first number of device storing addition BIN 32 bits
S2
or subtraction data
D First number of device storing addition or subtraction data

II - 134
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instruction

Functions

D*

(1) Multiplies BIN 32-bit data designated by (S1) and BIN 32-bit data designated by (S2), and stores the
multiplication result in the device designated by (D).
S1+1 S1 S2+1 S2 D+3 D+2 D+1 D
b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b63‥‥b48b47‥‥b32b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0
567890 (BIN) 123456 (BIN) 70109427840 (BIN)

(2) The values for (S1) and (S2) can be designated at between -2147483648 and 2147483647 (BIN 32
bits).

(3) Judgment whether values for (S1), (S2), and (D) are positive or negative are made on the basis of the
most significant bit (b31 for (S1) and (S2), and b63 for (D)).

b31/b63 Judgment (+/-)

0 Positive
1 Negative

D/

(1) Divides BIN 32-bit data designated by (S1) and BIN 32-bit data designated by (S2), and stores the
division result in the device designated by (D).
S1+1 S1 S2+1 S2 D+1 D D+3 D+2
b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0
567890 (BIN) 123456 (BIN) 4 (BIN) 74066 (BIN)

(2) If a word device has been used, the result of the division operation is stored as 64 bits, and both the
quotient and remainder are stored.
Quotient ---- Stored at the lower 32 bits
Remainder --- Stored at the upper 32 bits

(3) The values for (S1) and (S2) can be designated at between -2147483648 and 2147483647 (BIN 32
bits).

(4) Judgment whether values for (S1), (S2), (D), and (D)+2 are positive or negative is made on the basis
of the most significant bit (b31).
(A sign is used with both the quotient and the remainder)

b31 Judgment (+/-)

0 Positive
1 Negative

(5) When divisor S2 is 0, no operation is carried out.

II - 135
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the D*, D*P, D/, or D/P instructions.

Program Example
(1) When X5 is turned ON, multiplication result of BIN data of D7 and D8 and BIN data of D18 and D19 is
stored in D1 to D4.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X5
0 LD X5
0 D*P D7 D18 D1
1 D*P D7
D18
5 END
D1
5 END

(2) When X3 is turned ON, the data of X8 to XF is multiplied by 3.14 and the result is output to Y30 to
Y3F.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X3 0 LD X3
0 *P K2X8 K314 D0 1 *P K2X8
K314
D/P D0 K100 D2 D0
5 D/P D0
MOVP D2 K4Y30 K100
D2
13 END 10 MOVP D2
K4Y30
13 END

II - 136
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instruction

○ B+, B+P, B-, B-P ... BCD 4-digit addition and subtraction operations

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ △ △
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ △ △ ○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○
This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "Explanation of Instructions:Instruction
Tables" for correspondence.
△ : S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs B+ /B-

Command
B+, B-
S1 S2 D

Command
B+P, B-P
P S1 S2 D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

Data to be added to or subtracted from, or the first number of the
S1
device storing such data
Addition or subtraction data, or the head No. of device storing BCD 4-digit
S2
addition or subtraction data
D First number of device storing addition or subtraction data

Functions

B+

(1) Adds the BCD 4-digit data designated by "S1" and the BCD 4-digit data designated by "S2", and
stores the result of the addition at the device designated by "D".
S1 S2 D

5 6 7 8 + 1 2 3 4 6 9 1 2

(2) The values for "S1", "S2", and "D" can be specified between 0 and 9999 (BCD 4-digit).

(3) If the result of the addition operation exceeds 9999, the higher bits are ignored. The carry flag in this
case does not go ON.

6 4 3 2 + 3 5 8 3 0 0 1 5

II - 137
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

B-

(1) Subtracts the BCD 4-digit data designated by "S1" and the BCD 4-digit data designated by "S2", and
stores the result of the subtraction at the device designated by "D".
S1 S2 D

0 6 7 8 - 0 2 3 4 0 4 4 4
Digits higher than those which were designated
will be read as 0.

(2) The values for "S1", "S2", and "D" can be specified between 0 and 9999 (BCD 4-digit).

(3) The following will result if an underflow is generated by the subtraction operation:
The carry flag in this case does not go ON.

0 0 0 1 - 0 0 0 3 9 9 9 8

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is
stored at SD0.
- The "S1", "S2" or "D" BCD data is outside the 0 to 9999 range. (Error code: 80)

Program Example
(1) The following program adds the D3 BCD data and the Z1 BCD data when X20 goes ON, and outputs
the result to Y8 to Y17.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X20
0 LD X20
0 B+P D3 D10 K4Y8
1 B+P D3
D10
5 END
K4Y8
5 END

(2) The following program subtracts the BCD data at D20 from the BCD data at D10 when X20 goes ON,
and stores the result at R10.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X20
0 LD X20
0 B-P D10 D20 R10 1 B-P D10
D20
5 END
R10
5 END

II - 138
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instruction

○ B*, B*P, B/, B/P ... BCD 4-digit multiplication and division operations

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ △ △
○
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ △ △ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /
This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "Explanation of Instructions:Instruction
Tables" for correspondence.
△ : S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs B* /B/

Command
B*, B/
S1 S2 D

Command
B*P, B/P
P S1 S2 D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

Data to be added to or subtracted from, or the first number of the
S1
device storing such data
BCD 4-digit
Addition or subtraction data, or the head No. of device storing
S2
addition or subtraction data
D First number of device storing addition or subtraction data BCD 8-digit

Functions

B*

(1) Multiplies BCD 4-digit data designated by "S1" and BCD 4-digit data designated by "S2", and stores
the result in the device designated by "D".
D+1 D
S1 S2 (Upper 4 digits) (Lower 4 digits)

5 6 7 8 0 8 7 6 0 4 9 7 3 9 2 8

(2) Values for "S1" and "S2" can be specified between 0 and 9999 (BCD 4 digits).

B/

(1) Divides BCD 4-digit data designated by "S1" and BCD 4-digit data designated by "S2", and stores the
result in the device designated by "D".
S1 S2 D D+1(Remainder)

5 6 7 8 0 8 7 6 0 0 0 6 0 4 2 2
Digits higher than those which were designated
will be read as 0.

II - 139
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

(2) 0 to 9999 (BCD 4-digit) for S1, and 1 to 9999 (BCD 4-digit) for S2 can be specified.

(3) Division result (quotient and remainder) is stored by using 32 bits.

Quotient (BCD 4 digits) .................. Stored at the lower 16 bits
Remainder (BCD 4 digits) .................. Stored at the upper 16 bits

(4) When divisor S2 is 0, no operation is carried out.

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is
stored at SD0.
- The BCD data of "S1","S2" or "D" is outside the 0 to 9999 range. (Error code: 80)

Program Example
(1) The following program multiplies the BCD data at X0 to XF and the BCD data at D8 when X1B goes
ON, and stores the result at D0 and D1.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X1B
0 LD X1B
0 B*P K4X0 D8 D0
1 B*P K4X0
D8
5 END
D0
5 END

D+1 D
D8 (Upper 4 digits) (Lower 4 digits)
XF‥‥‥‥‥‥X0
9 7 5 3 x 8 6 4 2 8 4 2 8 5 4 2 6

Multiplicand Multiple Multiplication result

(2) The following program divides the BCD data D7 by the BCD data 1234, stores the result at D502 and
D503, and at the same time outputs the quotient to Y30 to Y3F.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device

M400 0 LD M400
0 B/P D7 H1234 D502 1 B/P D7
H1234
MOVP D502 K4Y30 D502
8 END 5 MOVP D502
K4Y30
8 END

D+1 D
D7 (Upper 4 digits) (Lower 4 digits)

5 6 7 8 ÷ 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 4 0 7 4 2
Quotient Remainder

X3F‥‥‥‥‥‥X30

0 0 0 4
Quotient

II - 140
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instruction

○ INC,INCP,DEC,DECP ... Incrementing and decrementing 16-bit BIN data

Compatible
Usable instruction : INC, DEC
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ ○ /○

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs INC/DEC

Command
INC,DEC
D

Command
INCP,DECP
P D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

Head number of device conducting INC (add 1) or DEC (subtract 1)
D BIN 16 bits
operation

II - 141
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Functions

INC

(1) Adds 1 to device designated by "D" (16-bit data).

D D

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) ＋ 1 5679 (BIN)

(2) If the contents of the device designated by "D" were 32767, and the INC or INCP instruction were
executed on that device, the value -32768 would be stored in the device designated by "D".

DEC

(1) Subtracts 1 from device designated by "D" (16-bit data).

D D

b15‥‥‥‥‥b0 b15‥‥‥‥‥b0

5678 (BIN) － 1 5677 (BIN)

(2) If the contents of the device designated by "D" were 0, and the DEC or DECP instruction were
executed on that device, the value -1 would be stored in the device designated by "D".

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the INC(P) or DEC(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following is a down counter program.

[Ladder Mode]

X7
MOVP K100 D8 Transfers the value of 100 to D8 when X7 is ON
0
X8 M38
4 DECP D8 When M38 is OFF, X8 goes from OFF to ON, and 1 is
decremented from D8.
8 = K0 D8 M38 At D8=0, M38 goes ON.

12 END

[List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
0 LD X7
1 MOVP K100
D8
4 LD X8
5 ANI M38
6 DECP D8
8 LD= K0
D8
11 OUT M38
12 END

II - 142
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instruction

○ DINC,DINCP,DDEC,DDECP ... Incrementing and decrementing 32-bit BIN data

Compatible
Usable instruction : DINC, DDEC
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs DINC/DDEC

Command
DINC,DDEC
D

Command
DINCP,DDECP
P D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

Head number of device what will execute the DINC (+1) or
D BIN 32 bits
DDEC (-1) operation

Functions

DINC

(1) Adds 1 to the device designated by "D" (32-bit data).

D+1 D D+1 D

b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0

73500 (BIN) ＋1 73501 (BIN)

(2) If the contents of the device designated by "D" are 2147483647, and the DINC or DINCP instruction is
executed, the value -2147483648 will be stored at the device designated by "D".

DDEC

(1) Subtracts 1 from the device designated by "D" (32-bit data).

D+1 D D+1 D

b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0 b31‥‥b16b15‥‥b0

73500 (BIN) －1 73499 (BIN)

(2) If the contents of the device designated by "D" are 0, and the DDEC or DDECP instruction is
executed, the value -1 will be stored at the device designated by "D".

II - 143
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the DINC(P) or DDEC(P) instruction.

Program Example
(1) The following program adds 1 to the data at D0 and D1 when X0 is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0
Steps Inst. Device
0 DINCP D0
0 LD X0
1 DINCP D0
3 END
3 END

(2) The following program adds 1 to the data set at X10 to X27 when X0 goes ON, and stores the result at
D3 and D4.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0 Steps Inst. Device

0 DMOVP K6X10 D3 0 LD X0
1 DMOVP K6X10
DINCP D3 D3
6 END 4 DINCP D3
6 END

(3) The following program subtracts 1 from the data at D0 and D1 when X0 goes ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0
Steps Inst. Device
0 DDECP D0
0 LD X0
1 DDECP D0
3 END
3 END

(4) The following program subtracts 1 from the data set at X10 to X27 when X0 goes ON, and stores the
result at D3 and D4.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0
Steps Inst. Device
0 DMOVP K6X10 D3
0 LD X0
1 DMOVP K6X10
DDECP D3 D3
4 DDECP D3
6 END 6 END

II - 144
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instruction

○ NEG,NEGP,DNEG,DNEGP ... Complement of 2 of BIN 16- and 32-bit data (sign reversal)

Compatible
Usable instruction : NEG
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△ ○ /○
△ : This is not available with DNEG (P).

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs NEG/DNEG

Command
NEG,DNEG
D

Command
NEGP,DNEGP
P D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

Head number of the device where data for the complement of 2
D BIN 16/32 bits
operation is stored.

Functions

NEG

(1) Reverses the sign of the 16-bit device designated by "D" and stores at the device designated by "D".
32 Bit
b15･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
Before execution "D" 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 ‥‥ -21846

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Sign conversion 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
-

b15･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
After execution "D" 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 ‥‥ 21846

(2) Used when reversing positive and negative signs.

II - 145
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

DNEG

(1) Reverses the sign of the 32-bit device designated by "D" and stores at the device designated by "D".
32 Bit
b31･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
Before execution "D" 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 ‥‥ -218460

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Sign conversion
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
-

b31･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
After execution "D" 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 ‥‥ 218460

(2) Used when reversing positive and negative signs.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the NEG(P) or DNEG(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program calculates a total for the data at D10 through D20 when XA goes ON, and
seeks an absolute value if the result is negative.

[Ladder Mode]

XA
0 < D10 D20 M3 M3 goes ON when D10 is smaller than D20.
XA
5 - D10 D20 D10
M3
Subtracts D20 from D10.
NEG D10
Seeks an absolute value (complement of 2) whenM3 is ON
13 END .

[List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
0 LD XA
1 AND< D10
D20
4 OUT M3
5 LD XA
6 - D10
D20
D10
10 AND M3
11 NEG D10
13 END

II - 146
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.3 Data Conversion Instruction

8.3 Data Conversion Instruction

○ BCD,BCDP,DBCD,DBCDP ... Conversion from BIN data to 4-digit and 8-digit BCD

Compatible
Usable instruction : BCD, DBCD
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△
○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△
△ : This is not available with DBCD(P).

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs BCD/DBCD

Command
BCD,DBCD
S D

Command
BCDP,DBCDP
P S D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Head number of the device where BIN data is stored BIN 16/32 bits
D Head number of the device that will store BCD data BCD 4/8 digits

Functions

BCD

(1) Converts BIN data (0 to 9999) at the device designated by "D" to BCD data, and stores it at the device
designated by "D".
327 68163 84 81 92 4 096 204 8 1 024 5 12 2 56 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1

S BIN 9999 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Always set these to 0 BCD conversions

80 00 400 0 20 00 100 0 8 00 40 0 200 100 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1

D BCD 9999 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

Thousands Hundreds Tens Ones

digits digits digits digits

II - 147
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

DBCD

(1) Converts BIN data (0 to 99999999) at the device designated by "S" to BCD data, and transfers it at the
device designated by "D".
S+1(Upper 16 bits) S (Lower 16 bits)

22 7

22 4
22 3

21 9

21 5

21 2
2 31
2 30
2 29
2 28

2 26
2 25

2 22
2 21
2 20

2 18
2 17
2 16

2 14
2 13

2 11
2 10
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
S BIN 99999999 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Always set these to 0 BCD conversions
(Upper 5 bits)
×107

×106

×105

×104

×103

×102

×101

×100
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
D BCD 99999999 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
Ten Millions Hu ndred Ten Thousands Hundreds Tens Ones
millions digits thousands thousands dig its digits digits digits
digits digits digits
D+1(Upper 4 digits) D (Lower 4 digits)

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is
stored at SD0.
- The data at S was not in the 0 to 9999 range when the BCD instruction was issued. (Error code: 80)
- The data at "S"+1 and "S" was not in the 0 to 99999999 range when the DBCD instruction was issued.
(Error code: 80)

Program Example
(1) The following program outputs the present value of C4 from Y20 to Y2F to the BCD display device.
Y2C
Y2E

Y2B
Y2A
Y2D
Y2F

Y28

Y25
Y24

Y21
Y27

Y23

Y20
Y29

Y26

Y22
8000
4000
2000
1000

800
400
200
100

80
40
20
10

8
4
2
1

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

7-element display unit

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M400 Steps Inst. Device

0 BCDP C4 K4Y20 0 LD M400
1 BCDP C4
4 END K4Y20
4 END

II - 148
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.3 Data Conversion Instruction

(2) The following program outputs bit data from D0 to D1 to Y40 to Y67.

Y67 to Y64 Y63 to Y60 Y5F to Y5C Y5B to Y58 Y57 to Y54 Y53 to Y50 Y4F to Y4C Y4B to Y48 Y47 to Y44 Y43 to Y40

7-element display unit

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device

M400 0 LD M400
0 D/ D0 K10000 D2
1 D/ D0
K10000
DBCDP D2 K6Y50
D2
6 DBCDP D2
BCD D4 K4Y40
K6Y50
12 END 9 BCD D4
K4Y40
12 END

II - 149
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ BIN,BINP,DBIN,DBINP ... Conversion from BCD 4-digit and 8-digit data to BIN data

Compatible
Usable instruction : BIN, DBIN
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△
○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△
△ : This mode is not available in DBIN(P).

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs BIN/DBIN

Command
BIN,DBIN
S D

Command
BINP,DBINP
P S D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Head number of device storing BCD data BCD 4/8 digits
D Head number of device that will store BIN data BIN 16/32 bits

Functions

BIN

(1) Converts BCD data (0 to 9999) at device designated by "D" to BIN data, and stores at the device
designated by "D".
8 000 40 00 2 000 100 0 800 4 00 20 0 10 0 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1

S BCD 9999 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
Thousands Hundreds Tens digits Ones
digits digits digits
BIN conversion
3 276 81 638 4 819 2 4 096 204 8 1 024 5 12 2 56 1 28 64 32 16 8 4 2 1

D BIN 9999 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

Always s et these to 0

II - 150
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.3 Data Conversion Instruction

DBIN

(1) Converts BCD data (0 to 99999999) at device designated by "S" to BIN data, and stores at the device
designated by "D".
S+1 S

×107

×10 6

×105

×104

×10 3

×10 2

×101

×10 0
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
S BCD 99999999 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
T en millions Millions Hundred Ten Thousands Hundreds T ens digits Ones digit s
digits digit s thousands thousands digits digits
digit s digits BIN conversions
D+1 D
23 1
23 0

22 6

22 2

21 8

21 4

21 0
2 29
2 28
2 27

2 25
2 24
2 23

2 21
2 20
2 19

2 17
2 16
2 15

2 13
2 12
2 11

29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
D BIN 99999999 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Alway s set thes e to 0

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases, an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is
stored at SD0.
- When values other than 0 to 9 are designated to any digits of "S". (Error code: 81)

Program Example
(1) The following program converts the BCD data at Y10 to Y1B to BIN when M40 is ON, and stores it at
D8.

Digital switch
BCD

Can be used
at other
800
400
200
100

40
20
80

10

8
4
2
1

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
Y1F
Y1E

Y1B
Y1A
Y19

Y17
Y16

Y14

Y13
Y12
Y11
Y10
Y1D
Y1C

Y18

Y15

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M40 Steps Inst. Device

0 BINP K3Y10 D8 0 LD M40
1 BINP K3Y10
4 END D8
4 END

II - 151
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

(2) The following program converts the BCD data at X10 to X37 to BIN when X8 is ON, and stores it at D0
and D1.

BCD digital switch

X37 to X34 X33 to X30 X2F to X2C X2B to X28 X27 to X24 X23 to X20 X1F to X1C X1B to X18 X17 to X14 X13 to X10

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X8
0 0 LD X8
DBINP K6X20 D9
1 DBINP K6X20
D9
D* D9 D10000 D5
4 D* D9
BIN K4X10 D3 D10000
D5
MOV K0 D4 8 BIN K4X10
D3
D+ D3 D5 D0 11 MOVK0
D4
17 END 13 D+ D3
D5
D0
17 END

II - 152
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.4 Data Transfer Instruction

8.4 Data Transfer Instruction

○ MOV,MOVP,DMOV,DMOVP ... 16-bit and 32-bit data transfers

Compatible
Usable instruction : MOV, DMOV
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ △2
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △1
△ 1: Transferring to Z from bit device is not possible.
△ 2: Index qualification is not available for bit device and with DMOV.

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
/△
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3
○ △3 /○
△3
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
/△3
△ 3: This is not available with DMOV(P).

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs MOV/DMOV

MOV,DMOV S D

MOVP,DMOVP P S D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Transfer data, or number of device storing transfer data
BIN 16/32 bits
D Number of device to store transferred data

II - 153
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Functions

MOV

(1) Transfers the 16-bit data from the device designated by "S" to the device designated by "D".
b15 ･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
Prior to transfer "S" 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Transmission
b15･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
After transfer "D" 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

DMOV

(1) Transfers the 32-bit data from the device designated by "S" to the device designated by "D".

S+1 S

b15･････････････････････････b0 b15･････････････････････････b0
Prior to transfer "S" 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

Transmission
D+1 D

b15･････････････････････････b0 b15･････････････････････････b0
After transfer "D" 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the MOV(P) or DMOV(P) instructions.

II - 154
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.4 Data Transfer Instruction

Program Example
(1) The following program stores input data from X0 to XB at D8.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M3 Steps Inst. Device

0 MOV K3X0 D8 0 LD M3
1 MOV K3X0
4 END D8
4 END

(2) The following program stores the constant K155 at D8 when X8 goes ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X8 Steps Inst. Device

0 MOVP K155 D8 0 LD X8
1 MOVP K155
4 END D8
4 END

009BH
b15･･･････････････b8b7････････････････b0
D8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

(3) The following program stores the data from D0 and D1 at D7 and D8.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M3
0 DMOV D0 D7 Steps Inst. Device
0 LD M3
1 DMOV D0
4 END
D7
4 END

(4) The following program stores the data from X0 to X1F at D0 and D1.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M3
DMOVP K8X0 D0 Steps Inst. Device
0
0 LD M3
4 1 DMOVP K8X0
END
D0
4 END

II - 155
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ CML,CMLP,DCML,DCMLP ... 16-bit and 32-bit negation transfers

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△ ○ ○
○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△
△ : This is not available with DCML(P).

Instruction Execution
indicates the signs CML/DCML
symbol condition

CML,DCML S D

CMLP,DCMLP P S D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Data to be inverted, or number of device storing this data
BIN 16/32 bits
D Number of device that will store results of inversion

Functions

CML

(1) Inverts 16-bit data designated by S bit by bit, and transfers the result to the device designated by "D".
b15･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
Before execution "S" 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

Inversion
b15･････････････････････････････････････････････････b0
After execution "D" 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1

DCML

(1) Inverts 32-bit data designated by S bit by bit, and transfers the result to the device designated by "D".

S+1 S

b15･････････････････････････ b0b15･････････････････････････b0
Before execution "S" 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

Inversion
D+1 D
b15･････････････････････････ b0b15･････････････････････････b0
After execution "D" 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1

II - 156
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.4 Data Transfer Instruction

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the CML(P) or DCML(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program inverts the data from X0 to X7, and transfers result to D0.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M3 Steps Inst. Device

0 CML K2X0 D0 0 LD M3
1 CML K2X0
4 END D0
4 END

When the number of bits at "S" is less than the number of bits at "D"

X7 ･････････ X0
These bits are all 1 10 1 00 00
read as "0".

b15 ････････ b8 b7 ････････ b0

D0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1

(2) The following program inverts the data at M16 to M35, and transfers the result to Y40 to Y53.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M3
Steps Inst. Device
0 DCML K5M16 K6Y40
0 LD M3
4 1 DCML K5M16
END
K5Y40
4 END

When the number of bits at "S" is less than the number of bits at "D"

M35 ･･････････ M24M23 ･･････ ･･ M16

These bits are all
read as "0". 0 10 0 01 11 0 01 01 10 0

Y57 ･････Y53 ･･････････ Y48Y47 ･･･････ ･Y40

1 1 11 1 01 1 10 00 1 10 1 001 1

(3) The following program inverts the data at D0 and D1 when X3 is ON, and stores the result at D16 and
D17.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X3
Steps Inst. Device
0 DCMLP D0 D16
0 LD X3
1 DCMLP D0
4 END
D16
4 END

b31 ････････ b24 ･･･････ b8 b7 ･････････ b0

D0,D1 0000 0100 0111 00101100

b31 ････････ b24 ･･･････ b8 b7 ･････････ b0

D16,D17 1111 1011 1000 11010011

II - 157
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ XCH,XCHP,DXCH,DXCHP ... 16-bit and 32-bit data exchanges

Compatible
Usable instruction : XCH, DXCH
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
D1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△
○ /○
D2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△
△ : This is not available with DXCH(P).

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs XCH/DXCH

XCH,DXCH D1 D2

XCHP,DXCHP P D1 D2

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D1
Head number of device storing data to be exchanged BIN 16/32 bits
D2

II - 158
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.4 Data Transfer Instruction

Functions

XCH

(1) Conducts 16-bit data exchange between "D1" and "D2".

D1 D2
b15･･････････････････b8 b7･･････････････････b 0 b15･････････････････b8 b7･･･････････････････b0

Before execution 01 1 10 01 0 1 01 0 11 1 1 1 11 1 00 0 01 1 1 10 01 0

D1 D2
b1 5･････････････････b8 b7･･･････････････････b0 b15･･････････････････b8 b7･･････････････････b0

After execution 1 1 11 0 00 0 11 1 10 0 10 0 11 1 00 1 01 0 10 1 11 1

DXCH

(1) Conducts 32-bit data exchange between "D1"+1, "D1" and "D2"+1, "D2".

D1+1 D1 D2+1 D2
b31･････････････････････b16 b15･･････････････････････b0 b31･････････････････････b16 b15･･････････････････････b0

Before execution 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1

D1+1 D1 D2+1 D2
b31･････････････････････b16 b15･･････････････････････b0 b31･････････････････････b16 b15･･････････････････････b0

After execution 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the XCH(P) or DXCH(P) instructions.

II - 159
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Program Example
(1) The following program exchanges the present value of T0 with the contents of D0 when X8 goes ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X8 Steps Inst. Device

0 XCHP T0 D0 0 LD X8
1 XCHP T0
4 END D0
4 END

(2) The following program exchanges the contents of D0 with the data from M16 to M31 when X10 goes
ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X10 Steps Inst. Device

0 XCHP D0 K4M16 0 LD X10
1 XCHP D0
4 END K4M16
4 END

(3) The following program exchanges the contents of D0 and D1 with the data at M16 to M47 when X10
goes ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X10 Steps Inst. Device

0 DXCHP D0 K8M16 0 LD X10
1 DXCHP D0
4 END K8M16
4 END

(4) The following program exchanges the contents of D0 and D1 with those of D9 and D10 when M0 goes
ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M0 Steps Inst. Device

0 DXCHP D0 D9 0 LD M0
1 DXCHP D0
4 END D9
4 END

II - 160
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.4 Data Transfer Instruction

○ BMOV,BMOVP ... 16-bit data block transfers

Compatible
Usable instruction : BMOV
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
n ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / /○
n / ○ ○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Command
BMOV
BMOV S D n

Command
BMOVP
BMOVP S D n

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Head number of device storing data to transfer
D Head number of destination device BIN 16 bits
n Number of transfers

Functions
(1) Batch transfers "n" points of 16-bit data starting from the device designated by "S" to the area of "n"
points starting from the device designated by "D".
b15‥‥ ‥‥b0 b15‥ ‥‥‥b0

S H1234 D H1234
Batch
S+1 H5678 transfer D+1 H5678
S+2 H7FF0 D+2 H7FF0
n n

S+(n-2) H6FFF D+(n-2) H6FFF

S+(n-1) H553F D+(n-1) H553F

II - 161
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

(2) When transfer source and transfer destination are duplicated, the following operations are expected.
(a) Transferring to a smaller device No. results in normal operation.
(Example) When BMOV D0 D5 K10 are executed
D0 Normal transfer

Duplicated D5
device
D9

D14

(b) Transferring to a larger device No. results in abnormal operation.

(Example) When BMOV D5 D0 K10 are executed
Abnormal transfer D5

D0 Duplicated
device
D14

D9

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is
stored at SD0.
- In the case where a part of device area between S/D and n-th device does not exist. (Error code: 82)

POINT
Note that if the number of devices in the area between S/D and n-th device exceeds the relevant device,
error will not occur. (In this case, transferred to the other device, as well.)

Program Example
(1) The current value of T33 to T48 is transferred to D908 to D923.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
M90
0 LD M90
0 BMOV T33 D908 H10
1 BMOV T33
D908
6 END
H10
6 END

Before execution After transfer

(Transfer source) (Transfer destination)

T31 0100 D906 0000

T32 0010 D907 03FF
T33 0100 D908 0100
T34 0999 D909 0999
T35 1005 D910 1005 16 data blocks

T48 0115 D923 0115

T49 0000 D924 1000

II - 162
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.4 Data Transfer Instruction

○ FMOV,FMOVP ... 16-bit identical data batch transfer

Compatible
Usable instruction : FMOV
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
n ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / /○
n / ○ ○

Instruction Execution
symbol condition

Command
FMOV
FMOV S D n

Command
FMOVP
FMOVP S D n

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Data to transfer, or head number of device storing data to transfer
D Head number of destination device BIN 16 bits
n Number of transfers

Functions
(1) Transfers 16-bit data from device designated by "S" to location n-points from device designated by
"D".
b15‥‥‥‥b0

D H3456
b15‥‥‥‥b0 Transmission D+1 H3456
S H3456 D+2 H3456
n

D+(n-2) H3456
D+(n-1) H3456

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is
stored at SD0.
- In the case where a part of device area between D and n-th device does not exist. (Error code: 82)

II - 163
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Program Example
(1) When XA is turned ON, D8 to D23 is reset (cleared).

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
XA
0 LD XA
0 FMOV K0 D8 H10
1 FMOV K0
D8
6 END
H10
6 END

S D

0 D8 0
D9 0

16 blocks
Transfer D21 0
D22 0
D23 0

II - 164
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.4 Data Transfer Instruction

○ S.TMOV ... Transfer of timer and counter setting value

Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
S ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for this
instruction.

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Command
S.TMOV S.TMOV S D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S No. of timer and counter device to which setting value is transferred.
BIN 16 bits
D Device No. of the transfer destination

Functions
The setting value of timer and counter device specified with S is transferred to the device specified with D.
Note that, however, the actual setting value is transferred only if specified with constant.
If the setting value is specified with word device, normal transfer will not be carried out.

Timer setting Setting value designation method with the Setting value to be transferred by TMOV
Constant designation OUT Tx Kn ○ Constant "n"
Fixed timer setting
Word device designation OUT Tx Dn × Constant 0(zero)

Variable timer Constant designation OUT Tx Kn ○ Setting value set with the setting display
setting Word device designation OUT Tx Dn × Setting value set with the setting display

[Note]
When this instruction is monitored, the current value is displayed on the timer and counter device
specified with S.
If the timer and counter device are used with any function instructions other than above, everything
indicates the current value.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the S.TMOV instruction.

II - 165
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Program Example
(1) The setting value of T10 is transferred to D0.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X1
0 LD X1
0 T10 K10
1 OUT T10
X2
K10
5 S.TMOV T10 D0
5 LD X2
6 S.TMOV T10
12 END D0
12 END
In this example, D0 equals to 10.

(2) The setting value of C20 is transferred to D0.

Condition: Variable timer is set for the counter C20. This is the case where 100 is set for C20, using
the setting display device.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X1
0 LD X1
0 C20 K50
1 OUT C20
X2
K50
5 S.TMOV C20 D0
5 LD X2
6 S.TMOV C20
12 END D0
12 END
In this example, D0 equals to 100.

II - 166
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.5 Program Branch Instruction

8.5 Program Branch Instruction

○ CJ,JMP ......Conditional jump

Compatible
Usable instruction : CJ
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
P ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
P / ○ /○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Command
CJ
CJ P**

Command
JMP
JMP P**

Label
Command
P**

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

P Pointer number of jump destination Device name

Functions

CJ

(1) Executes program of designated pointer number within the same program file when jump command is
ON.

(2) Executes next step in program when jump command is OFF.

ON

Jump command OFF

Executed
CJ
each scan

II - 167
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

JMP

(1) A program of specified pointer No. in the same program file is executed unconditionally.

POINT
Note the following points when using the jump instruction.
(1) Jump instructions can be used only for pointer numbers within the same program file.

(2) After the timer coil has gone ON, accurate measurements cannot be made if there is an attempt to jump the timer
of a coil that has been turned ON using the CJ or JMP instructions.

(3) Scan time is shortened if the CJ or JMP instruction is used to force a jump to the rear.

(4) The CJ and JMP instructions can be used to jump to a step prior to the step currently being executed.

P8 X9
30 ･ Y80
･
･
･
･
M3 Jumps to P8 label when M3 goes ON.
1001 CJ P8
X10 Executes when M3 is OFF.
1004 Y91

(5) The device to which a jump has been made with CJ or JMP does not change.
XB
20 CJ P19 Jumps to label P19 when XB goes ON.
XC
23 Y43
Y43 and Y49 do not change regardless of
XB
whether XB and XC are ON/OFF during
25 Y49
execution of CJ instruction.
P19 X9
27 Y4C

(6) The lable (P**) occupies step 1.

X8
14 CJ P9
M33
Occupies 17 Y30
step 1 M3
19 Y36
P9 M36
21 Y39
X9
24 Y3E

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation is returned, the error flag (SM0) goes ON, and the error code is
stored at SD0.
- A pointer number which is not in use as a label in the same program has been designated.
(Error code: 20 or 85)
- A common pointer in the other program has been designated. (Error code: 20 or 85)

II - 168
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.5 Program Branch Instruction

Program Example
(1) The following program jumps to P3 when X9 goes ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device

X9
0 LD X9
0 CJ P3
1 CJ P3
X30
Y6F 3 LD X30
3
X41 4 OUT Y6F
P3
6 Y7E 5 P3
6 LD X41
8 END 7 OUT Y7E
8 END

II - 169
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ FEND ... Program termination

Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt design Index
data
S ation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W

The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for this
instruction.

Instruction symbol Execution condition

FEND FEND

Functions
(1) FEND instruction is used when branching a sequence program operation by CJ instruction, etc., or
when dividing between the main routine program and the sub routine program.

0
Main routine CALL P**
program Jump caused by the
CJ P** Main routine
Operations when CJ instruction
program
the CJ instruction Main routine
is not executed program Operation performed
FEND
when the CJ instruction
FEND was executed
P** Sub routine
P** Main routine program
program
FEND END
END
(a) When using the CJ instruction (b) When there is a subroutine program

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is
stored at SD0.
- A FEND instruction is executed after the execution of the CALL instruction, and before the execution
of the RET instruction. (Error code: 26)

II - 170
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.5 Program Branch Instruction

Program Example
(1) The following program uses the CJ instruction.

[Ladder Mode]

X0
0 Y20
X0B When XB is ON, jumps to label P23; from P23, executes the next
2 CJ P23 step
X13
5 Y30
X14 Executed when XB is OFF
7 Y31

9 FEND
P23 X1 Indicates the termination of the sequence program when XB is
11 Y22 OFF

13 END

[List Mode]
0 LD X0
:
:
9 FEND
10 P23
11 LD X1
12 OUT Y22
13 END

II - 171
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ GOEND ... Jump to END

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
/ /
This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "Explanation of Instructions:Instruction
Tables" for correspondence.

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Command
GOEND
GOEND

Functions
(1) Jumps to FEND or END instruction in the same program file.

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is
stored at SD0.
- A GOEND instruction has been executed after the execution of the CALL instruction, and prior
to the execution of the RET instruction. (Error code: 26)

Program Example
(1) The following program jumps to the END instruction if D0 holds a negative number.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device

0 < D0 K0 GOEND
0 LD< D0
K0
3 GOEND

II - 172
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.5 Program Branch Instruction

○ CALL,CALLP,RET ... Sub-routine program calls and return from sub-routine programs

Compatible
Usable instruction : CALL,RET
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
P ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
P / ○ /○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Command
CALL
CALL Pn

Command
CALLP
CALLP Pn

RET
RET

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

Pn First pointer number of sub-routine program Device name

Functions

CALL

(1) When the CALL (P) instruction is executed, executes the sub-routine program of the program
specified by Pn.
Main routine Sub-routine
program program
Pn

RET
CALL Pn

END

(2) CALL or CALLP instructions can be nested up to 8 deep.

POINT
There are the following two pointer numbers to be set by the CALL(P) instruction.
Refer to "Detailed Explanation of Devices: Pointer P" for details.
- Local pointer
- Common pointer

II - 173
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

RET

(1) Indicates end of sub-routine program

(2) When the RET instruction is executed, returns to the step following the CALL(P) instruction which
called the sub-routine program.

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is
stored at SD0.
- Following the execution of the CALL(P) instruction, an END or FEND instruction is executed before the
execution of the RET instruction. (Error code: 26)
- An RET instruction is executed prior to the execution of the CALL (P) instruction. (Error code: 26)
- When stuck area has exceeded due to CALL(P) instruction's nesting, etc. (Error code: 86)

Program Example
(1) The following program executes a sub-routine program when X1 turns ON from OFF.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X8 Steps Inst. Device

10 Y11 10 LD X8
X1 11 OUT Y11
12 CALL P23 12 LD X1
X9 13 CALL P33
15 Y13 15 LD X9
16 OUT Y13
「
17 FEND 17 FEND
18
P33 XA :
500 Y33 500 P33
501 LD XA
Y34 502 OUT Y33
503 OUT Y34
504 RET 504 RET
505

II - 174
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.5 Program Branch Instruction

○ FOR,NEXT ... FOR to NEXT instruction loop

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
/
n ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○
○
This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "6.2 Instruction Tables" for
correspondence.

Instruction symbol Execution condition

FOR
FOR n
Repeated program

NEXT NEXT

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

n Number of repetitions of the FOR to NEXT loop (from 1 to 32767) BIN 16 bits

Functions
(1) When the processing in the FOR to NEXT loop is executed n-times without conditions, the step
following the NEXT instruction will be executed.

(2) The value of n can be designated at between 1 and 32767. If it is designated at a value of from -32768
to 0, it will be executed as though n=1.

(3) If you do not desire to execute the processing called for within the FOR to NEXT loop, use the CJ
instruction to jump.
Setting the repetition times to "0" would not allow you to skip the process between FOR and NEXT
instructions.

(4) To force an end to the repetitious execution of the FOR to NEXT loop during the execution of the loop,
insert a BREAK instruction. Premature termination with CJ instruction, etc. will result in an operation
error.

(5) FOR instructions can be nested up to 16 deep.

II - 175
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

FOR K5
X0

FOR K3
X1

FOR instructions can be

FOR K100 nested up to 16 deep.
X2

NEXT

NEXT

NEXT

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is
stored at SD0.
- An END (FEND) instruction is executed after the execution of a FOR instruction, but before the
execution of a NEXT instruction. (Error code: 31)
- A NEXT instruction is executed prior to the execution of a FOR instruction. (Error code: 31)
- The 17th FOR instruction is encountered when FOR instructions have been nested. (Error code: 30)

Program Example
(1) The following program executes the FOR to NEXT loop when X8 is OFF, and does not execute it
when X8 is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X8
0 CJ P8 Steps Inst. Device
M0 0 LD X8
3 MOV K0 D100 1 CJ P8
3 LDI M0
6 FOR K4 4 MOV K0
D100
M0
6 FOR K4
8 MOV D100 Z0
8 LDI M0
9 MOV D100
MOV D100 D0Z0 Z0
12 MOV D100
INC D100 D0Z0
15 INC D100
16 NEXT 16 NEXT
17 P8
P8 XA
Y33 18 LD XA
17
19 OUT Y33
20 END
20 END

[REMARK]
(1) Use an EGP/ EGF instruction to change an index of contacts between FOR and NEXT.

II - 176
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.5 Program Branch Instruction

○ BREAK,BREAKP ... Forced end of FOR to NEXT instruction loop

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
/
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ /○
P / ○
This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "Explanation of Instructions:Instruction
Tables" for correspondence.

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Command
BREAK
BREAK D Pn

Command
BREAKP
BREAKP D Pn

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D Number of device that will store the number of repetitions remaining BIN 16 bits
Number of branch destination pointer when the end of processing
Pn Device name(Pointer)
repetitions.

Functions
(1) Forces the end of repetition processing based on the FOR to NEXT instruction loop, and shifts to the
execution of the pointer designated by Pn.
Only the pointer within the same program file can be specified for Pn.
If a pointer in the other program file is specified for Pn, an operation error is resulted.

FOR K
If the BREAK instruction has
Forced end condition not been executed, execution
BREAK D Pn will return to the FOR
When forced end condition instruction for the number of
has been established times designated by the FOR
NEXT instruction.

Pn

(2) The number of repetitions remaining at the point that the FOR to NEXT loop was brought to a forced
end is stored at "D".
However, the number of times when the BREAK instruction was executed is also included in the
number of repetitions remaining.

II - 177
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

(3) The BREAK instruction can be used only during the execution of a FOR to NEXT instruction loop.

(4) The BREAK instruction can be used only when there is only one level of nesting.
If an end is forced when there are multiple nesting levels, execute the same number of BREAK
instructions as there are nesting levels.

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is
stored at SD0.
- The BREAK instruction is used in a case other than with the FOR to NEXT instruction loop. (Error code:
32)
- The jump destination for the pointer designated by Pn does not exist. (Error code: 85)
- The pointer of another program file is designated for Pn. (Error code: 85)

Program Example
(1) The following program forces the FOR to NEXT loop to end when the value of D2 reaches 30 (when
the FOR to NEXT loop has been executed 30 times).

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M30
MOV K0 D0 Steps Inst. Device
10
10 LD M30
14 11 MOV K0
FOR K100
D0
M30
14 FOR K100
19 INC D0 19 LD M30
「 20 INC D0
22 = D0 K30 BREAKP D1 P0 22 LD= D0
K30
36 NEXT 25 BREAKP D1
P0
P0
36 NEXT
40
40 P0

[REMARK]
(1) The value 71 is stored at D1 as the remaining number of repetitions when the BREAK instruction is
executed.

II - 178
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.6 Logical Operation Instructions

8.6 Logical Operation Instructions

○ WAND,WANDP,DAND,DANDP ... Logical products with 16-bit and 32-bit data
(Device at storage destination: Independent type)

Compatible
Usable instruction : WAND
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
△ △
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 1
○
△ △
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 1
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
/△ △ △
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 1
2
/△ △ △
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○
2 1 1
/△
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2
△ 1 : S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.
△ 2: This is not available with DAND(P).

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs WAND/DAND

Command
WAND,DAND
S1 S2 D

Command
WANDP,DANDP
P S1 S2 D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S1 Data from which logical product will be determined, or number of
S2 devices storing such data BIN 16/32 bits
D Number of devices where logical product operation results will be

II - 179
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Functions

WAND

(1) A logical product operation is conducted for each bit of the 16-bit data of the device designated at "S1"
and the 16-bit data of the device designated at "S2", and the results are stored in the device
designated at "D".
16 Bit

Before execution S1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
AND
Before execution S2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

After execution D 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

(2) In the case of bit devices, digits above the number designated are processed as 0 in the operation.

DAND

(1) Conducts a logical product operation on each bit of the 32-bit data for the device designated by "S1"
and the 32-bit data for the device designated by "S2", and stores the results at the device
designated by "D".
32 Bit
S1+1 S1

Before execution S1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
S2+1 AND S2

Before execution S2 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
D+1 D

After execution D 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

(2) In the case of bit devices, digits other than the number designated are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 180
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.6 Logical Operation Instructions

○ WAND,WANDP,DAND,DANDP ... Logical products with 16-bit and 32-bit data

(Device at storage destination: Shared type)

Compatible
Usable instruction : DAND
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△ ○ ○
○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△
△ : This is not available with DAND(P).

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs WAND/DAND

Command
WAND,DAND
S D

Command
WANDP,DANDP
P S D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Data from which logical product will be determined, or number
BIN 16/32 bits
D of devices storing such data

Functions

WAND

(1) A logical product operation is conducted for each bit of the 16-bit data of the device designated at "D"
and the 16-bit data of the device designated at "S", and the results are stored in the device
designated at "D".
16 Bit

Before execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
AND

Before execution S 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

After execution D 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

(2) In the case of bit devices, digits other than the number designated are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 181
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

DAND

(1) Conducts a logical product operation on each bit of the 32-bit data for the device designated by "D"
and the 32-bit data for the device designated by "S", and stores the results at the device designated
by "D".
32 Bit
D+1 D

Before execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
S+1 AND S

Before execution S 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
D+1 D

After execution D 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

(2) In the case of bit devices, digits other than the number designated are processed as 0 in the
operation.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the WAND(P) or DAND(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program masks the digit in the 10s place of the 4-digit BCD value at D10 (second digit
from the end) to 0 when XA is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XA Steps Inst. Device

0 WANDP H0FF0F D10 0 LD X0A
1 WANDP H0FF0F
4 END 3 D10
4 END

D10 BCD1234 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
AND
HFF0F 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

D10 BCD1204 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

II - 182
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.6 Logical Operation Instructions

(2) The following program performs a logical product operation on the data from X10 to X1B and the data
at D33 when XA is ON, and outputs the results to D50.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XA Steps Inst. Device

0 WAND K3X10 D33 D50 0 LD XA
1 WAND K3X10
5 END D33
D50
5 END

X1B･･････X18X17･･･････X14X13･･･････X10
X1B to X10 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Seen as "0" AND
D33 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

D50 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

(3) The following program performs a logical product operation on the data at D99 and D100, and the 24-
bit data between X30 and X47 when X8 is ON, and stores the results at D99 and D100.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X8 Steps Inst. Device

0 DANDP K6X30 D99 0 LD X8
1 DANDP K6X30
5 END D99
4 END

b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b3 b2 b1 b0
D100,D99 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
AND
X47X46 X33X32X31X30
X47 to X30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
Seen as 0
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b3 b2 b1 b0
D100,D99 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

II - 183
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ WOR,WORP,DOR,DORP ... Logical sums of 16-bit and 32-bit data

(Device at storage destination: Independent type)

Compatible
Usable instruction : WOR
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
△ △
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 1
○
△ △
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 1
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
/△ △ △
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 1
2
/△ △ △
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○
2 1 1
/△
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2
△ 1: S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.
△ 2: This is not available with DOR(P).

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs WOR/DOR

Command
WOR,DOR
S1 S2 D

Command
WORP,DORP
P S1 S2 D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S1 The data on which a logical sum operation will be performed, or the
S2 number of the devices storing this data
BIN 16/32 bits
Number of devices that will store the results of the logical sum
D
operation

II - 184
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.6 Logical Operation Instructions

Functions

WOR

(1) Conducts a logical sum operation on each bit of the 16-bit data of the device designated by "S1" and
the 16-bit data of the device designated by "S2", and stores the results at the device designated by
"D".
16 Bit

Before execution S1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
OR
Before execution S2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

After execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

DOR

(1) Conducts a logical sum operation on each bit of the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S1" and
the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S2", and stores the results at the device designated by
"D".
32 Bit
S1+1 S1

Before execution S1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
S2+1 OR S2

Before execution S2 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
D+1 D

After execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 185
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ WOR,WORP,DOR,DORP ... Logical sums of 16-bit and 32-bit data

(Device at storage destination: Shared type)

Compatible
Usable instruction : DOR
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△ ○ ○
○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△
△ : This is not available with DOR(P).

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs WOR/DOR

Command
WOR,DOR
S D

Command
WORP,DORP P S D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S The data on which a logical sum operation will be performed, or
BIN 16/32 bits
D the number of the devices storing this data

II - 186
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.6 Logical Operation Instructions

Functions

WOR

(1) Conducts a logical sum operation on each bit of the 16-bit data of the device designated by "D" and
the 16-bit data of the device designated by "S", and stores the results at the device designated by
"D".
16 Bit

Before execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
OR
Before execution S 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

After execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

DOR

(1) Conducts a logical sum operation on each bit of the 32-bit data of the device designated by "D" and
the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S", and stores the results at the device designated by
"D".
32 Bit
D+1 D

Before execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
OR
S+1 S

Before execution S 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

D+1 D

After execution D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the WOR(P) or DOR(P) instructions.

II - 187
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Program Example
(1) The following program performs a logical sum operation on the data at D10 and D20 when XA goes
ON, and stores the results at D10.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XA Steps Inst. Device

0 WOR D20 D10 0 LD X0A
1 WOR D20
5 END D10
4 END

D10 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
OR
D20 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

D10 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

(2) The following program performs a logical sum operation on the data from X10 to X1B, and the data at
D33, and outputs the result to D100 when XA is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XA Steps Inst. Device

0 WOR K3X10 D33 D100 0 LD XA
1 WOR K3X10
5 END D33
D100
5 END

X1B･･････X18X17･･･････X14X13･･･････X10
X1B to X10 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Seen as 0 OR
D33 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

D100 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1

(3) The following program performs a logical sum operation on the 32-bit data from X0 to X1F, and on the
hexadecimal value FF00FF00H when XB goes ON, and stores the results at D66 and D67.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
XB
0 LD X8
0 DMOVP H0FF00FF00 D66
1 DMOVP H0FF00FF00
DORP K8X0 D66 D66
5 DORP K8X0
8 END D66
8 END

II - 188
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.6 Logical Operation Instructions

○ WXOR,WXORP,DXOR,DXORP ... 16-bit and 32-bit exclusive OR operations

(Device at storage destination: Independent type)

Compatible
Usable instruction : WXOR
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
△ △
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 1
○
△ △
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 1
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
/△ △ △
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 1
2
/△ △ △
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○
2 1 1
/△
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2
△ 1: S1 and S2 cannot be specified as constant at the same time.
△ 2: This is not available with DXOR(P).

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs WXOR/DXOR

Command
WXOR,DXOR
S1 S2 D

Command
WXORP,DXORP
P S1 S2 D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S1 Data on which exclusive OR operation will be performed, or number
S2 of devices storing such data BIN 16/32 bits
D Number of devices storing data to be EXCLUSIVE ORed

II - 189
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Functions

WXOR

(1) Conducts an exclusive OR operation on each bit of the 16-bit data of the device designated by "S1"
and the 16-bit data of the device designated by "S2", and stores the results at the device designated
by "D".
16 Bit

Before execution S1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
XOR
Before execution S2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

After execution D 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

DXOR

(1) Conducts an exclusive OR operation on each bit of the 32-bit data designated by "S1" and the 32-bit
data designated by "S2", and stores the results at the device designated by "D".
32 Bit
S1+1 S1

Before execution S1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
S2+1 XOR S2

Before execution S2 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
D+1 D

After execution D 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 190
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.6 Logical Operation Instructions

○ WXOR,WXORP,DXOR,DXORP ... 16-bit and 32-bit exclusive OR operations

(Device at storage destination: Shared type)

Compatible
Usable instruction : DXOR
instruction mode
Usable devices
Consta Digit
Set Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer
nt desig Index
data
S nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SD Z K H P
W
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△ ○ ○
○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△
△ : This is not available with DXOR(P).

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs WXOR/DXOR

Command
WXOR,DXOR
S D

Command
WXORP,DXORP P S D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Data on which exclusive OR operation will be performed, or number
BIN 16/32 bits
D of devices storing such data

II - 191
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Functions

WXOR

(1) Conducts an exclusive OR operation on each bit of the 16-bit data of the device designated by "D" and
the 16-bit data of the device designated by "S", and stores the results at the device designated by
"D".
16 Bit

Before execution D 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
XOR
Before execution S 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

After execution D 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

DXOR

(1) Conducts an exclusive OR operation on each bit of the 32-bit data designated by "D" and the 32-bit
data designated by "S", and stores the results at the device designated by "D".
32 Bit
D+1 D

Before execution D 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
S+1 XOR S

Before execution S 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0

D+1 D

After execution D 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the WXOR(P) or DXOR(P) instructions.

II - 192
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.6 Logical Operation Instructions

Program Example
(1) The following program performs an exclusive OR operation on the data at D10 and D20 when XA is
ON, and stores the result at D10.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XA Steps Inst. Device

0 WXOR D20 D10 0 LD X0A
1 WXOR D20
5 END D10
4 END

D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
XOR
D20 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

D10 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0

(2) The following program conducts an exclusive OR operation on the data from X10 to X1B and the data
at D33 when XA is ON, and outputs the result to D100.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
XA
0 LD XA
0 WXOR K3X10 D33 D100
1 WXOR K3X10
D33
5 END
D100
5 END

X1B･･････X18X17･･･････X14X13･･･････X10
X1B to X10 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Seen as "0" XOR
D33 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

D100 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

(3) The following program compares the bit pattern of the 32-bit data from X20 to X3F with the bit pattern
of the data at D9 and D10 when X6 is ON, and stores the number of differing bits at D16.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X6
0 LD X6
0 DXORP K8X20 D9
1 DXORP K8X20
DSUMP D9 D16 D9
4 DSUMP D9
END D16
8
7 END

II - 193
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ WXNR,WXNRP,DXNR,DXNRP ... 16-bit and 32-bit data non-exclusive logical sum operations
(Device at storage destination: Independent type)

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
/△ △ △
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 1
2
/△ △ △
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○
2 1 1
/△
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2
This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "Explanation of Instructions:Instruction
Tables" for correspondence.
△ 1: S1 and S2 cannot be specified as a constant at the same time.
△ 2: This is not available with DXNR(P).

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs WXNR/DXNR

Command
WXNR,DXNR
S1 S2 D

Command
WXNRP,DXNRP
P S1 S2 D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S1 Data on which non-exclusive logical sum operation will be
S2 performed, or number of devices where such data is being stored BIN 16/32 bits
D Number of devices that will store results of the non-exclusive logical

II - 194
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.6 Logical Operation Instructions

Functions

WXNR

(1) Conducts a non-exclusive logical sum operation on each bit of the 16-bit data of the device designated
by "S1" and the 16-bit data of the device designated by "S2", and stores the results at the device
designated by "D".
16 Bit

Before execution S1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
XNR
Before execution S2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

After execution D 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

DXNR

(1) Conducts a non-exclusive logical sum operation on each bit of the 32-bit data of the device designated
by "S1" and the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S2", and stores the results at the device
designated by "D".
32 Bit
S1+1 S1

Before execution S1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
S2+1 XNR S2

Before execution S2 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0

D+1 D

After execution D 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 195
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ WXNR,WXNRP,DXNR,DXNRP ... 16-bit and 32-bit data non-exclusive logical sum operations
(Device at storage destination: Shared type)

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△ ○ ○
○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△
This cannot be used with the compatible instruction mode. Refer to "Explanation of Instructions:Instruction
Tables" for correspondence.
△ : This is not available with DXNR(P).

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs WXNR/DXNR

Command
WXNR,DXNR
S D

Command
WXNRP,DXNRP
P S D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Data on which non-exclusive logical sum operation will be
BIN 16/32 bits
D performed, or number of devices where such data is being stored

II - 196
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.6 Logical Operation Instructions

Functions

WXNR

(1) Conducts a non-exclusive logical sum operation on each bit of the 16-bit data of the device designated
by "D" and the 16-bit data of the device designated by "S", and stores the results at the device
designated by "D".
16 Bit

Before execution D 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
XNR
Before execution S 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

After execution D 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

DXNR

(1) Conducts a non-exclusive logical sum operation on each bit of the 32-bit data of the device designated
by "D" and the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S", and stores the results at the device
designated by "D".
32 Bit
D+1 D

Before execution D 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
S+1 XNR S

Before execution S 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
D+1 D

After execution D 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

(2) For bit device, the numbers of the digits other than the designated digit are processed as 0 in the
operation.

II - 197
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the WXNR(P) or DXNR(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program performs a non-exclusive OR operation on the data at D10 and D20 when XA
is ON, and stores the result at D10.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XA Steps Inst. Device

0 WXNR D20 D10 0 LD X0A
1 WXNR D20
5 END D10
4 END

D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
XNR
D20 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

D10 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1

(2) The following program conducts a non-exclusive OR operation on the data from X10 to X1B and the
data at D33 when XA is ON, and outputs the result to D100.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
XA
0 LD XA
0 WXNR K3X10 D33 D100
1 WXNR K3X10
D33
5 END
D100
5 END

X1B･･････X18X17･･･････X14X13･･･････X10
X1B to X10 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Seen as "0" XNR
D33 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

D100 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

(3) The following program compares the bit patterns of the 32-bit data located from X20 to X3F with the
bit patterns of the data at D16 and D17 when X6 is ON, and stores the same number of bits at D18.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X6
0 LD X6
0 DXNRP K8X20 D16
1 DXNRP K8X20
DSUMP D16 D18 D16
4 DSUMP D16
8 END D18
7 END

II - 198
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.7 Rotation Instruction

8.7 Rotation Instruction

○ ROR,RORP,RCR,RCRP ... Right rotation of 16-bit data

Compatible
Usable instruction : ROR, RCR
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
n ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○
/△
n ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ ○ ○ ○
△ : Index qualification is not available for constant K/H.

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs ROR/RCR

Command
ROR,RCR
D n

Command
RORP,RCRP P D n

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D Initial number of devices to perform rotation
BIN 16 bits
n Number of rotations (0 to 15)

II - 199
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Functions

ROR

(1) Rotates 16-bit data of the device designated by "D", not including the carry flag, n-bits to the right.
The carry flag is ON or OFF depending on the status prior to the execution of the ROR instruction.
Carry flag
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

D
n-bit rotation

(2) Specify any of 0 to 15 as n. If the value specified as n is 16 or greater, operations will be as follows:
- When n is 16, the value becomes the one when 16-bit rotation was executed.
- When n is 17 or above, the value of D becomes indefinite.

RCR

(1) Rotates 16-bit data of the device designated by "D", including carry flag, n bits to the right.
The carry flag is ON or OFF depending on the status prior to the execution of the ROR instruction.
Carry flag
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

D
n-bit rotation

(2) Specify any of 0 to 15 as n. If the value specified as n is 16 or greater, operations will be as follows:
- When n is 16, the value becomes the one when 16-bit rotation was executed.
- When n is 17 or above, the value of D becomes indefinite.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the ROR(P) or RCR(P) instructions.

II - 200
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.7 Rotation Instruction

Program Example
(1) The following program rotates the contents of D0, though not including the carry flag, 3 bits to the right
when XC is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XC Steps Inst. Device

0 ROR D0 K3 0 LD XC
1 ROR D0
4 END K3
4 END

Carry flag
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Carry flag
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

D0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

Contents of b2 through Contents of b15 through Contents of b3 Contents of b2

b0 prior to execution b4 prior to execution prior to execution prior to execution

(2) The following program rotates the contents of D0, including the carry flag, 3 bits to the right when XC
is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XC Steps Inst. Device

0 RCRP D0 K3 0 LD XC
1 RCRP D0
4 END K3
4 END

Carry flag
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 *

Carry flag
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

D0 1 1 * 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

Contents of b1 and b0 Contents of b15 through Contents of b3 Contents of b2

prior to execution b4 prior to execution prior to execution prior to execution
Contents of carry flag SM12

* The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of RCR.

II - 201
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ ROL,ROLP,RCL,RCLP ... Left rotation of 16-bit data

Compatible
Usable instruction : ROL, RCL
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
n ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○
/△
n ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ ○ ○ ○
△ : Index qualification is not available for constant K/H.

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs ROL/RCL

Command
ROL,RCL
D n

Command
ROLP,RCLP P D n

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D Initial number of devices to perform rotation
BIN 16 bits
n Number of rotations (0 to 15)

II - 202
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.7 Rotation Instruction

Functions

ROL

(1) Rotates the 16-bit data of the device designated at "D", not including the carry flag, n-bits to the left.
The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of ROL instruction.
Carry flag
(SM12) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D

n-bit rotation

(2) Specify any of 0 to 15 as n. If the value specified as n is 16 or greater, operations will be as follows:
- When n is 16, the value becomes the one when 16-bit rotation was executed.
- When n is 17 or above, the value of D becomes indefinite.

RCL

(1) Rotates the 16-bit data of the device designated by D , including the carry flag, n-bits to the left.
The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of RCL instruction.
Carry flag
(SM12) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D

n-bit rotation

(2) Specify any of 0 to 15 as n. If the value specified as n is 16 or greater, operations will be as follows:
- When n is 16, the value becomes the one when 16-bit rotation was executed.
- When n is 17 or above, the value of D becomes indefinite.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the ROL(P) or RCL(P) instructions.

II - 203
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Program Example
(1) The following program rotates the contents of D0, not including the carry flag, 3 bits to the left when
XC is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XC Steps Inst. Device

0 ROL D0 K3 0 LD XC
1 ROL D0
4 END K3
4 END

Carry flag
(SM12) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D0

Carry flag
(SM12) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 D0

Contents of b13 Contents of b12 Contents of b11 to b0 Contents of b15 to b13

prior to execution prior to execution prior to execution prior to execution

(2) The following program rotates the contents of D0, including the carry flag, 3 bits to the left when XC is
ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XC Steps Inst. Device

0 RCLP D0 K3 0 LD XC
1 RCLP D0
4 END K3
4 END

Carry flag
(SM12) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
* 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D0

Carry flag
(SM12) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 * 1 1 D0

Contents of b13 Contents of b12 Contents of b11 to b0 Contents of b15 and

prior to execution prior to execution prior to execution b14 prior to execution
Content of carry flag SM12

*The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of RCL.

II - 204
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.7 Rotation Instruction

○ DROR,DRORP,DRCR,DRCRP ... Right rotation of 32-bit data

Compatible
Usable instruction : DROR, DRCR
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
n ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /
/ △
n ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / ○ ○ ○
△ : Index qualification is not available for constant K/H.

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs DROR/DRCR

Command
DROR,DRCR
D n

Command
DRORP,DRCRP P D n

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D First device number of devices to perform rotation BIN 32 bits
Number of rotations (0 to 31)
n BIN 32 bits
2 words (32 bits) are used for a word device.

II - 205
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Functions

DROR

(1) The 32-bit data of the device designated at "D", not including the carry flag, is rotated n-bits to the
right.
The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of the DROR
instruction.
D+1 D
Carry flag
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 ····· b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 ····· b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

n-bit rotation

(2) Specify any of 0 to 31 as n. If the value specified as n is 32 or greater, the values of D+1 and D
become indefinite.

DRCR

(1) Rotates 32-bit data, including carry flag, at device designated by D n bits to the right.
The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of the DRCR
instruction.
D+1 D
Carry flag
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 ····· b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 ····· b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (SM12)

n-bit rotation
(2) Specify any of 0 to 31 as n. If the value specified as n is 32 or greater, the values of D+1 and D
become indefinite.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no errors associated with DROR(P) or DRCR(P) instructions.

II - 206
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.7 Rotation Instruction

Program Example
(1) The following program rotates the contents of D0 and D1, not including the carry flag, 4 bits to the right
when XC is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
M0 0 LD M0
0 DMOV K4 D10 1 DMOV K4
XC
D10
4 DROR D0 D10
4 LD XC
5 DROR D0
8 END
D10
8 END

Carry flag
b31 ····· b28 b27 ····b24
· b23···· b20 b19 ···· b16 b15····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ····· b4 b3 ····· b0 (SM12)

D0,D1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Number of rotations D11,D10 4

Carry flag
b31 ····· b28 b27 ····b24
· b23···· b20 b19 ···· b16 b15····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ····· b4 b3 ····· b0 (SM12)

D0,D1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

Contents of b3 through b0 Contents of b31 through b4

prior to execution prior to execution Contents of b3 prior to
execution

(2) The following program rotates the contents of D0 and D1, including the carry flag, 4 bits to the right
when XC is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XC Steps Inst. Device

0 DRCRP D0 K4 0 LD XC
1 DRCRP D0
4 END K4
4 END

Carry flag

b31 ····· b28 b27 ····b24

· b23···· b20 b19 ···· b16 b15 ····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ····· b4 b3 ····· b0 (SM12)

D0,D1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 *

Carry flag
b31 ····· b28 b27 ····b24
· b23···· b20 b19 ···· b16 b15 ····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ····· b4 b3 ····· b0 (SM12)

D0,D1 1 1 1 * 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

Contents of b2
Contents of b31 through b4 prior to execution
through b0 prior to Contents of b3 prior
execution Contents of carry flag SM12 prior to execution to execution

* The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of the DRCR instruction.

II - 207
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ DROL,DROLP,DRCL,DRCLP ... Left rotation of 32-bit data

Compatible
Usable instruction : DROL, DRCL
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
n ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /
/△
n ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / ○ ○ ○
△ : Index qualification is not available for constant K/H.

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs DROL/DRCL

Command
DROL,DRCL D n

Command
DROLP,DRCLP P D n

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D First device number of devices to perform rotation BIN 32 bits
Number of rotations (0 to 31)
n BIN 32 bits
2 words (32 bits) are used for a word device.

II - 208
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.7 Rotation Instruction

Functions

DROL

(1) The 32-bit data of the device designated at "D", not including the carry flag, is rotated n-bits to the left.
The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of the DROL
instruction.

Carry flag D+1 D

(SM12) b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 ·····b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 ····· b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

n-bit rotation

(2) Specify any of 0 to 31 as n. If the value specified as n is 32 or greater, the values of D+1 and D
become indefinite.

DRCL

(1) Rotates 32-bit data, including carry flag, at device designated by D n bits to the left. The carry flag
goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of the DRCL instruction.

Carry flag D+1 D

(SM12) b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 ·····b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 ····· b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

n-bit rotation

(2) Specify any of 0 to 31 as n. If the value specified as n is 32 or greater, the values of D+1 and D
become indefinite.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the DROL(P) or DRCL(P) instructions.

II - 209
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Program Example
(1) The following program rotates the contents of D0 and D1, not including the carry flag, 4 bits to the left
when XC is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
M0
0 LD M0
0 DMOV K4 D10
1 DMOV K4
XC D10
4 DROL D0 D10 4 LD XC
5 DROL D0
8 END D10
8 END

Carry flag
(SM12) b31 ····· b28 b27 ····b24
· b23···· b20 b19 ···· b16 b15 ····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ····· b4 b3 ····· b0
0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 D0,D1

Number of rotations D11,D10 4

Carry flag
(SM12) b31 ····· b28 b27 ····b24
· b23···· b20 b19 ···· b16 b15 ····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ····· b4 b3 ····· b0
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 D0,D1

Contents of b27 to b0 Contents of b31 to b28

Contents of b28 prior to execution
prior to execution prior to execution

(2) The following program rotates the contents of D0 and D1, including the carry flag, 4 bits to the left
when XC is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XC Steps Inst. Device

0 DRCLP D0 K4 0 LD XC
1 DRCLP D0
4 END K4
4 END

Carry flag
(SM12) b31 ····· b28 b27 ····b24
· b23···· b20 b19 ···· b16 b15 ····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ····· b4 b3 ····· b0
* 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 D0,D1

Carry flag
(SM12) b31 ····· b28 b27 ····b24
· b23···· b20 b19 ···· b16 b15 ····b12 b11 ····· b8 b7 ····· b4 b3 ····· b0
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 D0,D1

Contents of b27 to b0 Contents of b31 to b29

Contents of b28 prior to execution prior to execution
prior to execution
Contents of carry flag SM12
prior to execution

* The carry flag goes ON or OFF depending on its status prior to the execution of the DRCL instruction.

II - 210
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.7 Rotation Instruction

○ SFR,SFRP,SFL,SFLP ... n-bit shift to right or left of 16-bit data

Compatible
Usable instruction : SFR, SFL
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
n ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○
○ /△
n ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ ○ ○
△ : Index qualification is not available for constant K/H.

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs SFR/SFL

Command
SFR,SFL
D n

Command
SFLP,SFLP
P D n

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D First device number of devices where shift data is being stored
BIN 16 bits
n Number of shifts (0 to 15)

II - 211
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Functions

SFR

(1) Causes a shift to the right by n bits of the 16-bit data from the device designated at "D".
b15 b14 b13 b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

When n=6 Carry flag

(SM12)
b15 b14 b13 b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1

Becomes 0

(2) A total of n bits from the upper level become 0.

(3) A shift by the data of the specified digit is conducted when a bit device has been designated at "D".
[See Program Example (1)]

(4) Specify any of 0 to 15 as n. If the value specified as n is 16 or greater, operations will be as follows:
- When n is 16, the value becomes the one when 16-bit shifting was executed.
- When n is 17, the value of D becomes indefinite.

SFL

(1) Shifts 16-bit data at device designated by "D" n-bits to the left.
b15 b14 b13 b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 D
Carry flag
When n=8
(SM12)
b15 b14 b13 b12b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D

Becomes 0

(2) The bits starting at n-bits from lowest bit become 0.

(3) A shift by the data of the specified digit is conducted when a bit device has been designated at "D".
[See Program Example (1)]

(4) Specify any of 0 to 15 as n. If the value specified as n is 16 or greater, operations will be as follows:
- When n is 16, the value becomes the one when 16-bit shifting was executed.
- When n is 17, the value of D becomes indefinite.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the SFR(P) or SFL(P) instructions.

II - 212
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.7 Rotation Instruction

Program Example
(1) The following program shifts the contents of Y10 to Y1B to the right by the number of bits designated
by D0 when X20 goes ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X20 Steps Inst. Device

0 SFR K3Y10 D0 0 LD X20
1 SFR K3Y10
4 END D0
4 END

Y1B‥‥‥Y18Y17‥‥‥ Y14Y13‥‥‥ Y10

1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

D0 4
Carry flag
Y1B‥‥‥Y18Y17‥‥‥ Y14Y13‥‥‥ Y10 (SM12)

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Becomes 0

(2) The following program shifts the contents of X10 to X17 3 bits to the left when X1C is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X1C Steps Inst. Device

0 SFLP K2Y10 K3 0 LD XC
1 SFLP K2Y10
4 END K3
4 END

Y17‥‥‥Y14 Y13‥‥‥ Y10

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

Carry flag
(SM12) Y17‥‥‥Y14 Y13‥‥‥ Y10
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

Becomes 0

II - 213
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ DSFR,DSFRP,DSFL,DSFLP ... Right/Left shift of word device in batch

Compatible
Usable instruction : DSFR, DSFL
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
n ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /
/○
n / ○ ○

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs DSFR/DSFL

Command
DSFR,DSFL
D n

Command
DSFLP,DSFLP
P D n

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

D First device number of devices to shift
BIN 16 bits
n Number of devices where shift will be conducted

II - 214
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.7 Rotation Instruction

Functions

DSFR

(1) Shifts data n points from device designated by "D" 1 word to the right.
n
D+(n-1) D+(n-2) D+(n-3) D+2 D+1 D
555 212 325 100 50 40

D+(n-1) D+(n-2) D+(n-3) D+(n-4) D+1 D

0 555 212 325 100 50
Becomes 0

(2) Device designated by "D"+(n-1) becomes 0.

DSFL

(1) Shifts data n points from device designated by "D" 1 word to the left.
n
D+(n-1) D+(n-2) D+(n-3) D+2 D+1 D
555 120 325 100 50 40

D+(n-1) D+(n-2) D+3 D+2 D+1 D

120 325 100 50 40 0
Becomes 0

(2) Device designated by "D" becomes 0.

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is
stored at SD0.
- A part of range of the device n-points from the "D" device exceeds the relevant device. (Error code:
82)

II - 215
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Program Example
(1) The following program shifts the contents of D683 to D689 to the right when XB is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XB Steps Inst. Device

0 DSFR D683 K7 0 LD XB
1 DSFR D683
4 END K7
4 END

Designation range for the DSFR instruction

D689 D688 D687 D686 D685 D684 D683

-100 503 600 -336 3802 -32765 5003

D689 D688 D687 D686 D685 D684 D683

0 -100 503 600 -336 3802 -32765

Becomes 0

(2) The following program shifts the contents of D683 to D689 to the left when XB is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

XB Steps Inst. Device

0 DSFLP D683 K7 0 LD XB
1 DSFLP D683
4 END K7
4 END

Designation range for DSFLP instruction

D689 D688 D687 D686 D685 D684 D683

-100 503 600 -336 3802 -32765 5003

D689 D688 D687 D686 D685 D684 D683

503 600 -336 3802 -32765 5003 0

Becomes 0

II - 216
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.8 Data Processing Instructions

8.8 Data Processing Instructions

○ SER,SERP,DSER,DSERP ... 16-bit and 32-bit data searches

Compatible
Usable instruction : SER
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
n ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△ ○ /○
S2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / /
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△ /○
n ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△ ○ ○ ○ /○
△ : This is not available with DSER(P).

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs SER/DSER

SER,DSER S1 S2 D n

SERP,DSERP P S1 S2 D n

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S1 First device number of the devices where search data is being stored
First number of the device where data which is an object of search is
S2
being stored. Word
D First device number of devices which will store search results
n Number of searches

II - 217
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Functions

SER

(1) Takes the 16-bit data of the device designated at "S1" as the entry code to search for n number of
blocks from the 16-bit data from the device designated at "S2".
The number of matches with the entry code is stored at the device designated by "D"+1, and the
relative value of the number of points that the device where the first match was found is from S2 is
stored at the device designated by "D".
Search data 123
S1 123 10
S2 Matching
First number of Search results
S2+1 500 data
searched D Position of match
S2+2 123
Search range D+1 Number of matches
(n blocks)
-123
S2+(n-2) 20
S2+(n-1) 123
123

(2) No processing is conducted if n is 0 or a negative value.

(3) If no matches are found in the search, the devices designated at "D" and "D" +1 become "0".

DSER

(1) Takes the 32-bit data of the device designated at "S1+1", "S1" as the entry code to search for n
number of blocks (for 2 x n points) in 32-bit unit from the device designated at "S2".
The number of matches with the entry code is stored at the device designated by "D"+1, and the
relative value of the number of points that the device where the first match was found is from S2 is
stored at the device designated by "D".
Search data
5678901
S1+1,S1 5678901
S2+1,S2 5678901
First number of Search results
S2+3,S2+2 123456
searched Search range D Position of match
S2+5,S2+4 -1
2xn
D+1 Number of matches

S2+(n-3),S2+(n-4) 5678901
Matching
S2+(n-1),S2+(n-2) 0 data
5678901

(2) No processing is conducted if n is 0 or a negative value.

(3) If no matches are found in the search, the devices designated at "D" and "D" +1 become "0".

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is
stored at SD0.
- When the area of n number of blocks from the device designated at "S2" does not exist. (Error code:
82)

II - 218
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.8 Data Processing Instructions

Program Example
(1) The following program searches D100 to D105 for the contents of D0 when X20 is ON, and stores the
search results at D10 and D11.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X20 0 LD X20
0 SERP D0 D100 D10 K6 1 SERP D0
D100
7 END D10
K6
7 END

Search data Searched data

D0 123 D100 500
D101 123 Search results
D102 300 D10 2 Position of match
D103 123 D11 2 Number of matches
D104 32000
D105 122

(2) The following program searches D100 to D111 for the contents of D11 and D10 when X20 is ON, and
stores the search results at D0 and D1.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X20 0 LD X20
0 DSERP D10 D100 D0 K6 1 DSERP D10
D100
7 END D0
K6
7 END

Search data Searched data

D11,D10 56789051 D101,D100 200000
D103,D102 56789051 Search results
D105,D104 56789051 D0 2 Position of match
D107,D106 -30000 D1 3 Number of matches
D109,D108 56789051
D111,D110 30000

II - 219
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ SUM,SUMP,DSUM,DSUMP ... 16-bit and 32-bit data bit check

Compatible
Usable instruction : SUM
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
/
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
△ ○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /△
△ : This is not available with DSUM(P).

Instruction symbol Execution condition indicates the signs SUM/DSUM

SUM,DSUM S D

SUMP,DSUMP P S D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

First device number of devices that will count total number of bits that
S
are at 1 BIN 16/32 bits
D First device number of devices that will store total number of bits

Functions

SUM

(1) From the 16-bit data in the device designated by "S", stores the total number of bits that are at 1, in the
device designated by "D".
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
S 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

Total number with value of 1

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

Total number with value of 1 stored as BIN

(There are 8 instances in the example)

II - 220
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.8 Data Processing Instructions

DSUM

(1) From the 32-bit data in the device designated by "S", stores the total number of bits that are at 1, in the
device designated by "D".
S+1 S
b31･･･b28 b27･･･ b24 b23･･･b20 b19･･･b16b15･･･b12b11････b8 b7 ･････ b4 b3･････b0
S 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
Total number with value of 1
D+1 D
b31･･･b28 b27･･･ b24 b23･･･b20 b19･･･b16b15･･･b12b11････b8 b7 ･････ b4 b3･････b0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
Total number with value of 1 stored as BIN
(There are 16 instances in the example)

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the SUM(P) or DSUM(P) instructions.

Program Example
(1) The following program stores the number of bits from X8 to X17 which are ON when X10 is ON at D0.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X10 Steps Inst. Device

0 SUM K4X8 D0 0 LD X10
1 SUM K4X8
5 END D0
5 END

X17 X8
0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

Stores the total number of bits at 1 in D0.

D0 7

(2) The following program stores the number of bits from D100 and D101 which are ON when X10 is ON
at D0.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X10 Steps Inst. Device

0 DSUMP D100 D0 0 LD X10
1 DSUMP D100
5 END D0
5 END

b31･･･b28 b27･･･ b24 b23･･･b20 b19･･･b16b15･･･b12b11････b8 b7 ･････ b4 b3･････b0

D100,D101 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Stores the total number of bits at 1 in D0.

D1,D0 15

II - 221
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ SEG,SEGP ... 7-segment decode

Compatible
Usable instruction : SEG
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○
○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

SEG SEG S D

SEGP SEGP S D

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Device number of devices where decoded data is being stored
BIN 16 bits
D First device number of devices where decoding results are stored

Functions

SEG

(1) Decodes the data from 0 to F designated by the lower 4 bits of S to 7-segment display data, and
stores at D.

(2) If "D" is a bit device, indicates the first number of the devices storing the 7-segment display data; if it is
a word device, indicates the number of the device that is storing the data.

(3) Storage is done as follows for bit devices and word devices:
After execution
Before execution Y4F Y48
Bit device SEG K7 K2Y48 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

8 points
D8

b15 b8 b7 b0
Word device SEG K7 D8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

Upper 8 bits are Lower 8 bits used to store the

always 0 7-segment display data

(4) Refer to the next page for the 7-segment display.

II - 222
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.8 Data Processing Instructions

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the SEG(P) instruction.

7-segment decode display

Configuration of D
Display Data
Hex Bit Pattern 7 Segments B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

0 0000 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 0001 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

2 0010 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1

3 0011 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1

4 0100 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

5 0101 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1

6 0110 B0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1

7 0111 B5 B1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
B6

8 1000 B4 B2 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

9 1001 B3 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

A 1010 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

B 1011 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

C 1100 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

D 1101 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0

E 1110 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

F 1111 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

First number of bit device

Lowest bit of word device

II - 223
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Program Example
(1) The following program converts the data from XC to XF when X0 is ON to 7-segment display data and
outputs it to Y38 to Y3F.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

X0 Steps Inst. Device

0 SEG K1XC K2Y38 0 LD X0
1 SEG K1XC
4 END K2Y38
4 END

II - 224
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.8 Data Processing Instructions

○ DECO,DECOP ... Decoding from 8 to 256 bits

Compatible
Usable instruction : DECO
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
n ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ / /
n / ○ ○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Command
DECO
DECO S D n

Command
DECOP
DECOP S D n

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Number of device where decoded data is stored BIN 16 bits
D First device number of devices where decoding results are stored Device name
n Valid bit length (1 to 8) BIN 16 bits

Functions

DECO

(1) Decodes the lower n-bits of the device designated by "S", and stores the results at a location 2n-bits
from the device designated by "D".

(2) The value of n can be designated between 1 and 8.

(3) No processing is conducted if n=0, and there are no changes in data for the device designated at "D".
When n is 9 or above, the device data specified by D becomes indefinite.

(4) The bit devices specified by D are treated as 1 bit, and the word devices specified by D are treated as
16 bits.

II - 225
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is
stored at SD0.
- When the area of a part of 2n bit blocks from the device designated at D does not exist. (Error code: 82)

Program Example
(1) The following program decodes 3 bits of R20 bit 0 to 3 when X20 turns ON and turns D100
corresponding bit to ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X20 0 LD X20
0 DECO R20 D100 K3
1 DECO R20
D100
6 END
K3
6 END

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

R20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

Seen as 0 When the data of bit 0 to 2 is 6 in binary.

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

D100 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Does not change Among bit 0 to 7, only bit 6 turns ON.

Note 1) When R20 b0 to b2 is 0, D100 bit 0 turns ON.

Note 2) D100 data remains the same even when X20 turns OFF.

(2) The following program decodes the 3 bits from D10 bit 0 to 2 and stores the results at M10 when X20
is ON.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X20 0 LD X20
0 DECO D10 M10 K3
1 DECO D10
M10
6 END
K3
6 END

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

When 6 has been
D10 0 1 1 0 designated from X0 to X2.

Seen as 0

M17 M10
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Decoding results

3
Does not change When valid bit 3 has been designated, occupies 8 (=2 ) points.

II - 226
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.8 Data Processing Instructions

○ ENCO,ENCOP ... Encoding from 256 to 8 bits

Compatible
Not available
instruction mode

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ /
n / ○ ○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Command
ENCO
ENCO S D n

Command
ENCOP
ENCOP S D n

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Number of devices where encoded data is being stored
D Number of device where encoding results will be stored BIN 16 bits
n Valid bit length (1 to 8)

Functions

ENCO

(1) 2n bit of the device specified by S is encoded and the result is stored in the lower n bit from the device
specified by D as encode data.

(2) The value of n can be designated between 1 and 8.

(3) When n=0, the device data specified by D does not change due to no operation. When n is 9 or above,
the device data specified by D becomes indefinite.

(4) As for the devices designated at D, bit devices are treated as 1 bit, and word devices as 16 bits.

(5) If more than 1 bit is at 1, processing will be conducted at the upper bit location.

(6) When the 2n bit blocks data is all 0, "0" is stored in D.

Operation Errors
(1) In the following cases an operation error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is
stored at SD0.
- When the area of a part of 2n bit blocks from the device designated at S does not exist. (Error
code: 82)

II - 227
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Program Example
(1) The following program encodes the 3 bits from M10 when X20 is ON, and stores the results at D8.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
X20 0 LD X20
0 ENCO M10 D8 K3
1 ENCO M10
D8
6 END
K3
6 END

M17 M10
When valid bit 3 has been
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3
designated, occupies 8 (=2 )
points.

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

D8 0 1 1 Encoding results

Not changed Counting from M10, the device which is ON

is stored as BIN data.

II - 228
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.8 Data Processing Instructions

○ S.AVE ... Average value calculation

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
n ○ ○

Extended Extended index Non-Provided /

instruction mode modification Provided
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○
D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /○ /○
n / ○ ○

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Command
S.AVE
S.AVE S D n

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Head No. of the device whose average is calculated
D Device No. at the output destination BIN 16 bits
n Average value

Functions

S.AVE

(1) The average of n points of devices counting from the device specified by S is calculated and output to
the device specified by D.
S
Average
S+1 calculation
S+2
n D

S+(n-2)
S+(n-1)

(2) The device specified by S is calculated with signs.

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the S.AVE instruction.

II - 229
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Program Example
(1) In this program the average of D882 to D888 is calculated when XB turns ON, and the result is output
to D0.

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
XB 0 LD XB
0 S.AVE D882 D0 K7
1 S.AVE D882
D0
6 END
K7
5 END

D882 123
Average
D883 10 value
D884 500
7 devices

D0 146
D885 123
D886 20
D887 123
D888 123

Note) Digits after the decimal point is truncated.

II - 230
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.9 Other Instructions

8.9 Other Instructions

○ S.STC,S.CLC ... Carry flag set/reset

Compatible/Extended
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P

The compatible instruction mode and extended instruction mode share the same specifications for this
instruction.

Instruction symbol Execution condition

Command
S.STC
S.STC

Command
S.CLC S.CLC

Functions

S.STC

(1) Set (turn ON) the carry flag contact (SM12).

S.CLC

(1) Reset (turn OFF) the carry flag contact (SM12).

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the S.STC or S.CLC instructions.

II - 231
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Program Example
(1) In this program, D0 data is added to D2 data when M0 turns ON. The carry flag (SM12) is turned ON if
the result exceeds 32767, and turned OFF if 32767 or less.

[Ladder Mode]

M0
0 + D2 D0 D1 Add D2 to D0, and store the result in D1. (D2+D0 → D1)

5 > D2 D1 M1 Turn M1 ON when:

(Summand)>(Addition result) or
> D0 D1 (Augend)>(Added result)

M1
12 S.STC
Turn ON the carry flag when M1 turns ON
M1
17 S.CLC Turn OFF the carry flag when M1 turns OFF

22 END

[List Mode]
Steps Inst. Device
0 LD M0
1 + D2
D0
D1
5 LD> D2
D1
8 OR> D0
D1
11 OUT M1
12 LD M1
13 S.STC
17 LDI M1
18 S.CLC
22 END

II - 232
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.10 Special Instructions for Old Machine Type Compatible

8.10 Special Instructions for Old Machine Type Compatible

○ LDBIT,ANDBIT,ORBIT ... Bit test with "A" contact handling

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
n ○ ○
The compatible instruction mode is available for this instruction; however since this mode will be discontinued
in the future, replacing with the instruction having the same function is strongly recommended.

Extended
Not available
instruction mode

Note that when a sequence program using these instructions is executed in the extended instruction
！ mode, unexpected operation would occur because the instructions will be processed as ones having
different operations.
CAUTION

Instruction symbol Execution condition

LDBIT <= S n

ANDBIT <= S n

<= S n
ORBIT
Above instructions can be
replaced by applying word device S.n
bit designation to LD, AND, and
OR instructions.

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Device No. to which bit test is performed
BIN 16 bits
n Bit to which bit test is performed

II - 233
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Functions
(1) Bit test for 16-bit device is executed with "A" contact handling.

(2) Results of bit test are as shown below.

Condition Result
Tested bit = 1 Continuity
Tested bit = 0 Non-continuity

Replaceable instructions
LDBIT, ANDBIT, and ORBIT instructions can be replaced by executing a word device bit designation
using LD, AND, OR instructions. (Refer to Program Example)

Instruction Example of replacement by word device bit designation

LDBIT Example: LD<= D10 K3 → LD D10.3
ANDBIT Example: AND<= D10 K10 → AND D10.A
ORBIT Example: OR<= D10 HF → OR D10.F

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the LDBIT, ANDBIT, or ORBIT instructions.

II - 234
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.10 Special Instructions for Old Machine Type Compatible

Program Example
(1) Program to test D10 bit 3 (The 0th step and 4th step are the ladders having the same operations.)

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Y33 Steps Inst. Device

0 <= D10 K3 0 LD<= D10
Replaceable Y33 K3
D10.3
3 OUT Y33
4
4 LD D10.3
5 OUT Y33
6 END 6 END

(2) Program to test D10 bit 15 (The 0th step and 5th step are the ladders having the same operations.)

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
M3 Y33 0 LD M3
0 <= D10 K15 1 AND<= D10
K15
Replaceable M3 D10.F Y33
4 OUT Y33
5 5 LD M3
6 AND D10.F
7 END 7 OUT Y33
8 END

(3) Program to tes D10 bit 15 (The 0th step and 7th step are the ladders having the same operations.)

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
0 LD M3
M3 Y33
1 LD<= D10
0 <= D10 HF HF
M8 4 OR M8
Replaceable 5 ANB
M3 D10.F Y33 6 OUT Y33
7 7 LD M3
M8 8 LD D10.F
9 OR M8
10 ANB
12 END
11 OUT Y33
12 END

(4) Program to test D10 bit 10 (The 0th step and 6th step are the ladders having the same operations.)

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M3 M8 Y33 Steps Inst. Device

0 0 LD M3
1 AND M8
2 OR<= D10
Replaceable <= D10 K10
K10
M3 M8 Y33 5 OUT Y33
6 6 LD M3
D10.A 7 AND M8
8 OR D10.A
9 OUT Y33
10 END 10 END

II - 235
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

○ LDBII,ANDBII,ORBII ... Bit test with "B" contact handling

Compatible
instruction mode
Usable devices
Digit
Set Consta
Bit Devices Word Devices Pointer desig Index
data nt
nation
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW SD Z K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
n ○ ○
The compatible instruction mode is available for this instruction; however since this mode will be discontinued
in the future, replacing with the instruction having the same function is strongly recommended.

Extended
Not available
instruction mode

！ Note that when a sequence program using these instructions is executed in the extended instruction mode,
unexpected operation would occur because the instructions will be processed as ones having different operations.
CAUTION

Instruction symbol Execution condition

LDBII <> S n

ANDBII <> S n

<> S n
ORBII
Above instructions can be
replaced by applying word device S.n
bit designation to LDI, ANI, ORI
instructions.

Set Data

Set Data Meaning Data Type

S Device No. to which bit test is performed
BIN 16 bits
n Bit to which bit test is performed

II - 236
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.10 Special Instructions for Old Machine Type Compatible

Functions
(1) Bit test for 16-bit device is executed with "B" contact handling.

(2) Results of bit test are as shown below.

Condition Result
Tested bit = 1 Continuity
Tested bit = 0 Non-continuity

Replaceable instructions
LDBII, ANDBII, and ORBII instructions can be replaced by executing a word device bit designation using
LDI, ANI, and ORI instructions. (Refer to Program Example)

Instruction Example of replacement by word device bit designation

LDBII Example: LD<> D10 K3 → LDI D10.3
ANDBII Example: AND<> D10 K10 → ANI D10.A
ORBII Example: OR<> D10 HF → ORI D10.F

Operation Errors
(1) There are no operation errors associated with the LDBII, ANDBII, or ORBII instructions.

II - 237
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Function Instructions

Program Example
(1) Program to test D10 3 (The 0th step and 4th step are the ladders having the same operations.)

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Y33 Steps Inst. Device

0 <> D10 K3 0 LD<> D10
Replaceable Y33 K3
D10.3
3 OUT Y33
4
4 LDI D10.3
5 OUT Y33
6 END 6 END

(2) Program to test D10 bit 15 (The 0th step and 5th step are the ladders having the same operations.)

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
M3 Y33 0 LD M3
0 <> D10 K15 1 AND<> D10
K15
Replaceable M3 D10.F Y33
4 OUT Y33
5 5 LD M3
6 ANI D10.F
7 END 7 OUT Y33
8 END

(3) Program to test D10 bit 15 (The 0th step and 7th step are the ladders having the same operations.)

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

Steps Inst. Device
0 LD M3
M3 Y33
1 LD<> D10
0 <> D10 HF HF
M8 4 OR M8
Replaceable 5 ANB
M3 D10.F Y33 6 OUT Y33
7 7 LD M3
M8 8 LDI D10.F
9 OR M8
10 ANB
12 END
11 OUT Y33
12 END

(4) Program to test D10 bit 10 (The 0th step and 6th step are the ladders having the same operations.)

[Ladder Mode] [List Mode]

M3 M8 Y33 Steps Inst. Device

0 0 LD M3
1 AND M8
2 OR<> D10
Replaceable <> D10 K10
K10
M3 M8 Y33 5 OUT Y33
6 6 LD M3
D10.A 7 AND M8
8 ORI D10.A
9 OUT Y33
10 END 10 END

II - 238
 9
Exclusive Instructions

II - 239
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Exclusive Instructions

PLC exclusive instruction is limited to its application for the processes which may be difficult to perform only with basic
instruction or function instruction.

PLC exclusive instructions include:

(1) ATC exclusive instruction (ATC)
With this instruction, ATC, such as magazine index control, tool change by arm, etc. is performed.
ATC exclusive instructions include:
- Tool No. search
- Tool change
- Tool table forward/reverse run
- Pointer (which displays magazine index position) forward/reverse run
- Tool data read/write, etc.

(2) Rotary body control instruction (ROT)

With this instruction, the rotary body's target position and rotation direction are determined, as well as the
function as a ring counter is realized.
Based on the output data figured with the tool No. search of ATC exclusive instruction, this instruction is used
when controlling the rotary body position such as calculating rotation direction of the magazine and the number
of index steps, and the turret.

9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

9.1.1 Outline of ATC Control
The ATC (Automatic Tool Change) can be controlled in the following two ways:
(1)Mechanical random control
With the information of magazine position from the machine, and T command, the control method determines the
direction of magazine rotation, number of steps, etc. for index of the magazine, according to the given command.
Each tool and magazine tool pot (socket) have a one-on-one corresponding relation.
Usually, the "intermediate pot" that supports the transfer of the tool is provided between the spindle and the
magazine.
This control is possible by not using ATC instruction, but ROT instruction only.

(2)Memory random control

With the information of magazine rotation, or magazine position from the machine, the control method controls tool
No. stored in the memory. For index of the magazine, the direction of magazine rotation and number of steps, etc.,
are determined by the given T command and tool No. stored in the memory.
Each tool and magazine tool pot (socket) does not always have a one-on-one corresponding relation.
Usually, the "intermediate pot" is not provided.

9.1.2 ATC Operation

The motions related to ATC operation can be largely divided into the following four motions:
(1)Index of magazine (ATC-K1, K2, K5, K6, K7, K8)
(2)Tool change (arm, or the like is used) (ATC-K3, K4)
(3)Transfer of tool to intermediate pot or arm (Normal function instructions such as MOV, XCH are used.)
(4)Others (ATC-K9, K10, K11)

II - 240
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

9.1.3 Explanation of Terminology

(1)Pointer
This points out the position where the magazine is indexed. When a tool table in which tool No. are previously
recorded is used, the tool table does not rotate with rotation of the magazine and the pointer serves as "ring
counter" for control of magazine position.

(2)Fixed pointer method

This is the type with tool pots numbered and the relationship between tool pot and tool No. is fixed if the magazine
is rotated. When the tool table is rotated, fixed pointer does not functionally differ from variable pointer method.

(3)Variable pointer method

This is the type with numbered fixed position on magazine and the relationship between magazine No. and tool No.
changes when the magazine rotates.

7 
One step in CW direction 
4
CW
5

2 
4 5

5 12 2
3 4
12
12 8 3 5
3 8
12 1 3
2 2
1
Pot No. Fixed pointer Relationship between
pot No. and tool No.
 does not change.
Tool No.
4 One step in CW direction CW

4 2 4 6

3 3
9 5 2
12 2 12 2
1 1
12 8 3 5
Magazine No.
3 8
(fixed) Variable pointer Relationship between
pot No. and tool No.
changes.

II - 241
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Exclusive Instructions

9.1.4 Relationship between Tool Registration Screen and Magazines

T REGISTRATION

Magazine 1

Pot Tool No. -D

1 1
2 2
4 3 3
4 3 4 4
5 3
5 5
8 7 6 2
2 6 6
9 5 7 7
8 8
7 10 4 1 1 9 9
11 10 10
3
8 12 11 11
12 2 12
1 12 12
 11
10 11 Pot No.

Tool No.

Magazine No. (floating pointer method, tool table

rotation method) or pot No. (Fixed pointer method)

When the floating pointer method or tool table rotation method is selected on the tool registration screen,
correspondence display between the magazines and tools changes each time the magazine rotates; when the fixed
pointer method is selected, it does not change.

II - 242
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

9.1.5 Use of ATC and ROT Instructions

The use order of the ATC and ROT instructions during the T command or tool change command is shown below:

T command Tool No. search Matching place No.

ATC K1 Number of the matches Error process
Pointer or ring Tool No. logical search
counter value ATC K2

Fixed pointer method

Rotary body Turning direction Magazine Ring counter control
index turn
Number of
ROT K1 steps, etc. ROT K3
Variable pointer
method
Pointer forward run
/reverse run
ATC K5, K6

Tool table forward run

/reverse run
ATC K7, K8

Magazine stop Tool change

Tool change ATC K3
command
Arbitrary position tool change
ATC K4

The relationship between the tool number search instruction and rotary body indexing instruction when the tool table
rotation method or variable pointer method is used is explained below.

Tool table rotation method Variable pointer method

R10700 5 0 Current R10700 1 0

position
: 6 : 2 10
1 1
: 3 1 9
: 7
2 2 Target
: 8 : 4 8
2 position
: 5 3 Current
: 9 3 position
: 10 : 6 4
4 7
: 7 3
: 1 5
5 : 8
: 2 4 6
6 : 9 6 5
: 3
R10709 4 7 R10709 10 7
Current
position

Tool No. Pointer

(1) When indexing tool number 8 in the situation given in the previous page
(a)In the tool table rotation method, the tool number search instruction outputs 3.
(b)In the variable pointer method, the tool number search instruction outputs 7.

(2) The tool number search instruction output result is used by the rotary body indexing instruction to find the rotation
direction, the number of steps, etc.
(a)In the tool table rotation system, rotation direction CW and number of steps 3 are found from the relationship
between current value 0 (pointer 0) and tool number search output result 3.
(b)In the variable pointer method, rotation direction CW and number of steps 3 are found from the relationship
between current value 4 (pointer 4) and tool number search output result 7, as in (a) above.
In the fixed pointer system, the pointer is fixed to 0 and the ring counter of 0 to n-1 (n is the number of magazines)
separate from the pointer is controlled. The counter value is used as the current position.

II - 243
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Exclusive Instructions

9.1.6 Basic Format of ATC Exclusive Instruction

ACT
S.ATC Kn Rn Rm Mn

END signal ("1" for ERROR signal)

Tool number storage R (register) No.
(Number of tools in magazine is specified.)
Control data buffer R No.
(Control data buffer is specified.)
Type of instruction

Rn
Control data buffer
Rn+1 Buffer size differs depending on type of instruction.
Rn+2 For details, refer to the explanation of instructions.
Rn+3
:

9.1.7 Instruction List

Instruction Description
S.ATC K1 Rn Rm Mn Tool No. search
S.ATC K2 Rn Rm Mn Tool No. logical AND search
S.ATC K3 Rn Rm Mn Tool change
S.ATC K4 Rn Rm Mn Arbitrary position tool change
S.ATC K5 Rn Rm Mn Pointer forward run
S.ATC K6 Rn Rm Mn Pointer reverse run
S.ATC K7 Rn Rm Mn Tool table forward run
S.ATC K8 Rn Rm Mn Tool table reverse run
S.ATC K9 Rn Rm Mn Tool data read
S.ATC K10 Rn Rm Mn Tool data write
S.ATC K11 Rn Rm Mn Automatic tool data write

9.1.8 Control Data Buffer Contents

Instruction Rn Rn+1 Rn+2

1 Tool No. search R No. to store search data R No. to which data output ―
Logical AND data position R
2 Tool No. logical AND search R No. to store search data R No. to which data output
No.
Tool change R No. to specify the position of
3 ― ―
Ex.: Spindle-Indexposition tool change
R No. to specify the position of R No. to specify the tool to be
4 Arbitrary position tool change ―
tool change changed
5 Pointer forward run ― ― ―
6 Pointer reverse run ― ― ―
7 Tool table forward run ― ― ―
8 Tool table reverse run ― ― ―
R No. for magazine position
9 Tool data read R No. to which data read ―
(to be read)
R No. for magazine position
10 Tool data write R No. to which data written ―
(to be written)
11 Automatic tool data write R No. to store Initial data ― ―

II - 244
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

9.1.9 File Register (R Register) Assignment and Parameters

(1)Control parameter contents

R10600 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0: T4-digit
Max. number of standby 1: T8-digit
displayed: 4

0: Magazine starts from "1"

1: Magazine starts from "0"

Number of tools per magazine

0: Do not set arbitrarily
1: Set arbitrarily

For details on the control parameters, refer to "Examples of Tool Registration Screen".

(2)Arbitrary setting of number of tools per magazine

This function allows the number of tools per magazine to be set freely.
(a)Do not set arbitrarily
The number of magazine rows is set to the maximum three rows, and the number of tools that can be
registered is set to maximum 120 tools/magazine.
The magazine tool data assignment is fixed.
(b)To set arbitrarily
There is a maximum of five magazine rows, and the number of tools that can be registered is a total of 360
tools for all magazines.
Set the number of tools per magazine in the "number of magazine designation" register.
(If there are any magazines not being used, set the designation register to 0.)
Number of magazine designation" register
No. 1 magazine ... R10610 No. 2 magazine ... R10611
No. 3 magazine ... R10612 No. 4 magazine ... R10613
No. 5 magazine ... R10614
The magazine tool data is assigned for the set tools in order from No. 1 magazine based on the set number of
tools.

II - 245
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Exclusive Instructions

(3)File registers for ATC control

The file registers used with the ATC are as shown below.

Corresponding file (R) register

Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine No.4 magazine No.5 magazine Remarks
T4-digit/T8-digit (data type)
T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T4-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit
specifications
ATC control
parameters
R10600 ← ← ← ← ← ← ← ← ←

Number of
magazine R10610 ← R10611 ← R10612 ← R10613 ← R10614 ← Binary
designation
Pointer
designation
R10615 ← R10616 ← R10617 ← R10618 ← R10619 ← Binary

R10620 R10630 R10640 R10650 R10660

Spindle tool R10620 R10630 R10640 R10650 R10660 BCD
R10621 R10631 R10641 R10651 R10661
R10622 R10632 R10642 R10652 R10662
Standby 1 tool R10621 R10631 R10641 R10651 R10661 BCD
R10623 R10633 R10643 R10653 R10663
R10624 R10634 R10644 R10654 R10664
Standby 2 tool R10622 R10632 R10642 R10652 R10662 BCD
R10625 R10635 R10645 R10655 R10665
R10626 R10636 R10646 R10656 R10666
Standby 3 tool R10623 R10633 R10643 R10653 R10663 BCD
R10627 R10637 R10647 R10657 R10667
R10628 R10638 R10648 R10658 R10668
Standby 4 tool R10624 R10634 R10644 R10654 R10664 BCD
R10629 R10639 R10649 R10659 R10669
Spindle tool D R10670 ← R10675 ← R10680 ← R10685 ← R10690 ← Binary
Standby 1 tool D R10671 ← R10676 ← R10681 ← R10686 ← R10691 ← Binary
Standby 2 tool D R10672 ← R10677 ← R10682 ← R10687 ← R10692 ← Binary
Standby 3 tool D R10673 ← R10678 ← R10683 ← R10688 ← R10693 ← Binary
Standby 4 tool D R10674 ← R10679 ← R10684 ← R10689 ← R10694 ← Binary
AUX data R10604 ← ← ← ← ← ← ← ← ← Binary
Magazine ・When not setting arbitrarily
tool data 　　The number of magazine rows is set to the maximum three rows, and the number of tools that can be
registered is set
to maximum 120 tools/magazine.
　　The magazine tool data assignment is fixed. Refer to (a) on the next page for details.
Magazine ・When setting arbitrarily
tool data 　　There is a maximum of five magazine rows, and the number of tools that can be registered is a total of 360
(auxiliary D) tools for all
magazines.
　　The assignment of the magazine tool data to each magazine varies between R10700 and R11779.
Refer to the assignment examples in (b) on the next page for details on the assignment method.

II - 246
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(a)Tool data assignment when not setting arbitrarily

There are up to three magazines, and up to 120 tools per magazine.
The tool data assignment is fixed between R10700 and R11779 as shown below.

Corresponding file (R) register

Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine No.4 magazine No.5 magazine Remarks
T4-digit/T8-digit (data type)
T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit
specifications
Pot 1 R10700 R11060 R11420
R10700 R11060 R11420 ― ― ― ― BCD
(MG1) R10701 R11061 R11421
Pot 2 R10702 R11062 R11422
R10701 R11061 R11421 ― ― ― ― BCD
(MG2) R10703 R11063 R11423
Pot 3 R10704 R11064 R11424
R10702 R11062 R11422 ― ― ― ― BCD
Magazine (MG3) R10705 R11065 R11425
tool data

Pot 119 R10936 R11296 R11656

R10818 R11178 R11538 ― ― ― ― BCD
(MG119) R10937 R11297 R11657
Pot 120 R10938 R11298 R11658
R10819 R11179 R11539 ― ― ― ― BCD
(MG120) R10939 R11299 R11659
Pot 1 R10940 ← R11300 ← R11660 ← ― ― ― ― Binary
Pot 2 R10941 ← R11301 ← R11661 ← ― ― ― ― Binary
Magazine Pot 3 R10942 ← R11302 ← R11662 ← ― ― ― ― Binary
tool data
(auxiliary
D)
Pot 119 R11058 ← R11418 ← R11778 ← ― ― ― ― Binary
Pot 120 R11059 ← R11419 ← R11779 ← ― ― ― ― Binary

II - 247
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Exclusive Instructions

(b)Example of tool data assignment when setting arbitrarily

There are up to five magazines, and a total of 360 tools for all magazines.
The tool data assignment varies between R10700 and R11779.
The data is assigned to the tools starting from the No. 1 magazine based on the set number of tools.
(Example)Number of magazines :5 magazines
Number of tools
No. 1 magazine :100 tools
No. 2 to No. 5 magazines :50 tools each

Corresponding file (R) register

Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine No.4 magazine No.5 magazine Remarks
T4-digit/T8-digit (data type)
T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit
specifications
Pot 1 R10700 R11000 R11150 R11300 R11450
R10700 R11000 R11150 R11300 R11450 BCD
(MG1) R10701 R11001 R11151 R11301 R11451
Pot 2 R10702 R11002 R11152 R11302 R11452
R10701 R11001 R11151 R11301 R11451 BCD
(MG2) R10703 R11003 R11153 R11303 R11453
Pot 3 R10704 R11004 R11154 R11304 R11454
R10702 R11002 R11152 R11302 R11452 BCD
(MG3) R10705 R11005 R11155 R11305 R11455

Magazine Pot 49 R10796 R11096 R11246 R11396 R11546

R10748 R11048 R11198 R11348 R11498 BCD
tool data (MG49) R10797 R11097 R11247 R11397 R11547
Pot 50 R10798 R11098 R11248 R11398 R11548
R10749 R11049 R11199 R11349 R11499 BCD
(MG50) R10799 R11099 R11249 R11399 R11549

Pot 99 R10896
R10798 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― BCD
(MG99) R10897
Pot 100 R10898
R10799 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― BCD
(MG100) R10899
Pot 1 R10900 ← R11100 ← R11250 ← R11400 ← R11550 ← Binary
Pot 2 R10901 ← R11101 ← R11251 ← R11401 ← R11551 ← Binary
Pot 3 R10902 ← R11102 ← R11252 ← R11402 ← R11552 ← Binary

Magazine Pot 49
tool data (MG49)
R10948 ← R11148 ← R11298 ← R11448 ← R11598 ← Binary
(auxiliary Pot 50
D) (MG50)
R10949 ← R11149 ← R11299 ← R11449 ← R11599 ← Binary

Pot 99
R10998 ← ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― Binary
(MG99)
Pot 100 R10999 ← ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― Binary

II - 248
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

9.1.10 Details of Each Instruction

(1)Tool No. search
This instruction is used to search for tool No. stored in the magazine (tool data table).
When the instruction tool No. is found, number of searched data and its location are output. If two or more tool No.
are found, the location of tool No. nearest to the pointer is output.

ACT
S.ATC K1 R9800 R10610 M10

R No. to store search data

R9800 9830
R9801 9840
R No. to which data output

R9830 234 Search data (BCD)

Location is "3"
R9840 3
Number of search Output.... Based on the output result, the
2 data found: 2
(for error) rotation direction, the number of
steps, etc., are figured out by using
R10615 2 Pointer the ROT K1 instruction.

R10700 234(0) Tool data table head (fixed)

R10701 567(1)
: 100(2) There are two data "234", since location "3"
is nearest to pointer, "3" is output.
: 234(3)
:
:
:
R10708 101(8)
R10709 102(9)

(Example for 10 magazines)

(Note 1) Pointer and location are counted up, like 0,1,2...9, in the tool data table, starting from the tool data table
head.
(Note 2) When pointer is not used, R10615 should be set to "zero".

MOV K0 R10615
(Example)

II - 249
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Exclusive Instructions

(2)Tool No. logical product (AND) search

Tool number AND search is the same as the tool number search instruction (ATC K1) in function: search data and
in-magazine tool number and AND data are ANDed together for a search.

ACT
S.ATC K2 R9800 R10610 M10

R9800 9830 R No. to store search data

R9801 9840
R9802 9831 R No. to which data output
R No. to store logical product (AND) data

R9830 2000 Search data 2*** and F000 are ANDed together.
2000 is search data.
F000 Logical AND data * is any desired data.

Location of
R9840 3 searched data: 3
Number of Output --- Based on the output result, the rotation
R9841 3 searched data direction, the number of steps, etc.,
found (for error): 3
are figured by using the ROT K1
R10615 2 Pointer instruction.

R10700 2001(0) Tool data table head

R10701 1002(1)
: 3003(2) There are three data "2***" and the location of data
"2***" nearest to the pointer is "3".
: 2004(3)
: 1005(4)
: The in-magazine tool No. is ANDed with AND data F000 in
sequence. The result is compared with the search data.
: ( denotes AND.)
R10708 1009(8)
R10709 2010(9) Search data 2000 = 2001 F000
1002 F000
3003 F000
:
:

(Note 1) Pointer and location are counted up, like 0, 1, 2 .... 9, in the tool data table, starting from the tool data table
head.
(Note 2) When pointer is not used, R10615 should be set to "zero".

MOV K0 R10615
(Example)

II - 250
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(3)Tool change
When a spindle tool and a magazine index tool are exchanged by the ATC arm, etc., the contents in the memory (R
register) must be updated correspondingly.

ACT
S.ATC K3 R9800 R10610 M10

R9800 10620 R No. to specify the position of tool change

R9801

Tool data (tool to be chanegd, usually tool in spindle)

R10615 2 Pointer
R10620 1234
The content "1234" of R10620 (tool change position register
R10700 1000(0) No.) is replaced with the content "1002" of R10702 which
corresponds to the pointer value "2" of R10615 (pointer
R10701 1001(1) position register No.).
R10702 1002(2)
: 1003(3)
: :
: :
: :
: :
R10708 1008(8)
R10709 1009(9)

(Note) When pointer is not used, R10615 should be set to "zero".

MOV K0 R10615
(Example)

II - 251
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Exclusive Instructions

(4)Arbitrary position tool change

In tool change, a spindle tool is usually exchanged with a magazine index tool. It may often occur, however, that tool
change must be performed at a station other than the usual tool change position (tool change at spare tool change
position, for example). This instruction is used in such cases.

ACT
S.ATC K4 R9800 R10610 M10

R9800 10620 R No. to specify the position of tool change

(position of tool to be changed, tool in spindle in this example)
R9801 9840
R9802 R No. to specify the tool to be changed (arbitrary position)

R9840 5 Magazine No. to be changed

R10615 2 Pointer

R10620 1234 Tool data to be changed

R10700 1000(0) 9 8
R10701 1001(1) 10 9
R10702 1002(2) MG MG
: 1003(3) 1 0
: 1004(4) 2 1
: 1005(5) 3 2
: 1006 (6) 4 3
: 1007 (7) 5 4
R10708 1008(8) 6 5
R10709 1009(9) 7 6
8 7

For start of magazine from "0" position

For start of magazine from "1" position

(Note 1) Tool change position differs depending on whether magazine No. starts with "0" or "1". However, the
substantial consequence does not differ.
(Note 2) When pointer is not used, R10615 should be set to "zero".

MOV K0 R10615
(Example)

II - 252
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(5)Pointer forward run

In the ATC control with variable pointer, pointer count is controlled so that it coincides with the actually indexed
magazine position when the magazine rotates in forward direction for index.

ACT
S.ATCK5 R10615 R10610 M10

R10615 1 2 Pointer is incremented.

When a magazine with 10 tools is used, for example, the control sequence is as follows:
0,1,2,3……9,0,1,2……8,9,0,1…
(Note 1) When this instruction is executed, the relationship between magazine No. and tool No., appearing on the
tool entry display, changes accordingly.

(6)Pointer reverse run

In the ATC control with variable pointer, pointer count is controlled so that it coincides with actually indexed
magazine position when the magazine rotates in reverse direction for index.

ACT
S.ATC K6 R10615 R10610 M10

R10615 2 1 Pointer is decremented.

When a magazine with 10 tools is used, for example, the control sequence is as follows:
2,1,0,9,8……2,1,0,9,8……1,0,9,8…
(Note 1) When this instruction is executed, the relationship between magazine No. and tool No., appearing on the
tool entry display, changes accordingly.

(7)Tool table forward run

The tool table rotates in forward direction in accordance with the magazine rotation.

ACT
S.ATC K7 R10610 R10610 M10

R10700 1000
R10701 1001
: :
: :
R10710 1010

(Note 1) In this control mode, pointer always indicates "0" (tool table head).
(Note 2) When this instruction is executed, the relationship between magazine No. and tool No., appearing on the
tool entry display changes accordingly.

II - 253
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Exclusive Instructions

(8)Tool table reverse run

The tool table rotates in reverse direction in accordance with the magazine rotation.

ACT
S.ATC K8 R10610 R10610 M10

R10700 1000
R10701 1001
: :
: :
R10709 1009

(Note 1) In this control mode, pointer always indicates "0" (tool table head).
(Note 2) When this instruction is executed, the relationship between magazine No. and tool No., appearing on the
tool entry display changes accordingly.

(9)Tool data read

This instruction is used to call a specific tool No. in the magazine.

ACT
S.ATC K9 R9800 R10610 M10

R9800 9840 R No. to specify magazine No. to be read

R9801 9845
R9802 ---- R No. to specify position to which read data output

R9840 3 Magazine No. to be read

R9845 1004 /1005 Read data

R10615 2 Pointer

R10700 1000 (0) 9 8

R10701 1001 (1) 10 9
R10702 1002 (2) MG MG
: 1003 (3) 1 0
: 1004 (4) 2 1
: 1005 (5) 3 2 Read out data differs depending on whether
magazine No. starts with "0" or "1".
: : (6) 4 3 However, the substantial consequence does not differ.
: : (7) 5 4
R10708 : (8) 6 5
R10709 1009 (9) 7 6
8 7

For start of magazine from "0" position

For start of magazine from "1" position

(Note) When pointer is not used, R10615 should be set to "zero".

MOV K0 R10615
(Example)

II - 254
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(10)Tool data write

Instead of setting tool No. through the setting and display unit, the tool No. is entered to each magazine No. set
through PLC program.

ACT
S.ATC K10 R9800 R10610 M10

R9800 9840 R No. having magazine No. to which data is written

R9801 9845
R9802 ---- R No. where data to be written is stored

R9840 3 Magazine No. to which data is written

R9845 1234 Data to be written

R10615 2 Pointer

R10700 1000(0) 9 8
R10701 1001(1) 10 9
R10702 1002(2) MG MG
: 1003(3) 1 0
: (4) 2 1
Data "1234" is written to magazine No. 3 .
: (5) 3 2
: : (6) 4 3
: : (7) 5 4
R10708 1008(8) 6 5
R10709 1009(9) 7 6
8 7

Magazine starts from "0"

Magazine starts from "1"

(Note) When pointer is not used, R10615 should be set to "zero".

MOV K0 R10615
(Example)

II - 255
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Exclusive Instructions

(11)Automatic tool data write

All tool Nos. are written (entered) in batch. This instruction is used for initialization, etc.
The data are written one after another for each tool, starting from the default value.

ACT
S.ATC K11 R9800 R10610 M10

R9800 9840 R No. where default value is stored

R9801

R9840 1000 Default value

R10615 2 Pointer

R10700 1008(0) Tool data table head

R10701 1009(1)
R10702 1000(2) Tool data of the number of tools are written while
incrementing the default value one by one from the
: 1001(3)
spot indicated by the pointer.
: 1002(4)
: 1003(5)
: 1004(6)
: 1005(7)
R10708 1006(8)
R10709 1007(9)

(Note) When pointer is not used, R10615 should be set to "zero".

MOV K0 R10615
(Example)

II - 256
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

9.1.11 Precautions for Using ATC Exclusive Instructions

(1)When tool data is rewritten by ATC or other than ATC instruction, tool registration screen display is not updated. The
following processing is required:
・Turn ON special relay SM64 by using the SET instruction.

(Program example)

ACT
PLS M10

M10
SET SM64

・SM64 processing is not required for ATC instructions ATC K5, K6 (forward run, reverse run of pointer),
ATC K7, K8 (forward run, reverse run of tool table).
・SM64 is set through the use of the user PLC and reset by controller.

(2)Method of tool registration prohibiting during magazine rotation

If tool data is set on the tool registration screen during magazine rotation, data may be set in erroneous position. To
prevent this error, a signal called "tool registration screen setting prohibited Y710" is provided.

(Program example)

Y710

CW

CCW

・Y710 turns ON during magazine rotation.

・Setting of AUX data (R10604) is valid while Y710 is being ON.

II - 257
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Exclusive Instructions

9.1.12 Examples of Tool Registration Screen

Tool registration screen examples are given below. For operation, refer to the Operation Manual.

Comment display area

Spindle, standby tool No.

display area

Magazine tool No.

display area

(1)Comment display area

The display at the comment display area is created using the message creation function explained in the "
Peripheral Development Environment".

(2)Spindle tool, standby tool display area

The number of display items can be changed according to the control parameter value.

Control parameter (R10600)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

00: Only spindle tool is displayed.

01: Spindle tool and standby 1 are displayed.
02: Spindle tool and standby 1 and 2 are displayed.
03: Spindle tool and standby 1 to 3 are displayed.
04: Spindle tool and standby 1 to 4 are displayed.
05 or more: No spindle tool or standby tool is displayed.
Hexadecimal expression

(3)Magazine tool No. display area

The number of displayed magazine tools and the magazine No. start value can be changed according to the
number-of-magazine parameter and control parameter values.
(a)Number of magazines
Number-of-magazine parameter (R10610)… Setting range
0 to 120: When not arbitrary setting the tools
0 to 360: When arbitrary setting the tools
(Note)If 0 is set, the magazine tool is not displayed. However, the magazine No. and magazine tool number
guide area is displayed.

II - 258
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

(b)Magazine No. start value

Control parameter (R10600)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0: The magazine No. starts at 1.

1: The magazine No. starts at 0.

(Example) Magazine number display when the number of magazines is 12.

MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D

1 0
2 11 1 10
12 11

The magazine No. starts at 1 The magazine No. starts at 0

II - 259
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Exclusive Instructions

9.1.13 Display of Spindle Tool and Standby Tool

The tool mounted on the spindle or the tool to be mounted next on the spindle (standby tool) and tool No. in the
magazine are set and displayed on the tool registration screen. However, the spindle and standby tool Nos. can also be
displayed on the position display screen and tool length measurement screen that are often used. With this, the changes
in the magazine pot and spindle tool No. according to the tool selection command or tool change command can be
confirmed.

(1)Position display screen

Spindle and
standby display

(2)Display tool selection parameter

A maximum of four standby tools can be displayed on the tool registration screen. The No. of the standby tool and
the title to be displayed on the monitor screen and setup screen, etc., are selected.

Display tool selection parameter (R10603)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Spare Selection of display tool

000000 : Spindle, standby 1
000001 : Spindle, standby 2
000010 : Spindle, standby 3
000011 : Spindle, standby 4
Others : Not display

Selection of display 1 : Display tool

0 : Do not display tool

II - 260
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.2 ROT Instructions

9.2 ROT Instructions

With this instruction, the rotary body's target position and rotation direction are determined, as well as the function as a
ring counter is realized.
Based on the output data figured with the tool No. search of ATC exclusive instruction, this instruction is used when
controlling the rotary body position such as calculating rotation direction of the magazine and the number of index steps,
and the turret.

9.2.1 Instruction List

Instruction Description
S.ROT K1 Rn Rm Mm Rotary body indexing
S.ROT K3 Rn Rm Mm Ring counter

(Note 1) Rot instructions are programmed with "S.ROT".

(1) Rotary body indexing

Direction of rotation and number of steps of ATC magazine (or turret) are determined.

Rn Rp Parameter setting R No.

Rn+1 Current position R No.
Indirect designation
Rn+2 Target position R No.
Rn+3 Output R No.

ACT
S.ROT K1 Rn Rm Mm

0: Direction of rotation CW
Index
instruction 1: Direction of rotation CCW

(Note) CW or CCW output is controlled so that it takes a

short circuit regardless of parameter specification.
Number of rotary body indexing cycles
designating R No.
Control data buffer position designating R No.

Rp (parameter) contents

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

(Spare)
0 : Rotary body starts from 1
Error output 1 : Rotary body starts from 0
0 : Normal completion
1 : Error completion 0 : Direction of rotation is determined for
4 3 shorter reach.
1 : Direction of rotation is not determined for
͐
͐

shorter reach.
0 , 0 : (Step No. +1) is counted.
0 , 1 : Step No. is counted.
1 , 0 : (Step No. –1) is counted.
When the current value is equal to the target value, -1 will appear.

(Note 1) The Index instruction is executed after setting R Nos. to Rn to Rn+3 and writing data in the file registers
(R) each corresponding to the R Nos. However, data setting to the parameter (Rp) is done once before
execution of the index instruction; this is to prevent the error code from being cleared.
(Note 2) The error code stored in bit F of the parameter (Rp) is not cleared even if the index instruction activating
signal (ACT) goes OFF.

II - 261
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Exclusive Instructions

(a) Example of rotary body index by ROT K1 instruction

Conditions:
(i)The number of rotary body index is 6.
(ii)The target position is set with the T command. The T command is set with the parameters so that it outputs
to the PLC with a binary. (Set base specification parameter Tbin to 1.)

6
1 5
Target position

2 4
M
3

Current position

PLC
0
Index code 2 X30 Y10 CW
1 PLC
Index code 2 X31 Y11 CCW
2 processing
Index code 2 X32
3
Index code 2 X33
R536 YC1E
Index code X34
strobe

CNC
Auxiliary function
completed (Fin)
T code data,
T command start

In the example of ladder circuit shown below, the rotation direction is determined by the T command and current
position data given by the machine, and the rotary body is rotated in that direction until the target position reaches
the current position. When indexing is completed, the auxiliary command completion signal is turned ON.

II - 262
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.2 ROT Instructions

File register (R) map

ACT
S.ROT K1 Rn Rm Mm
T command R536 1 to 6 (Binary)
Top of control data buffer (from CNC)
0:CW R537 0
(R9800 in this example) 1:CCW
R No. to specify rotary body
index (R9811 in this example)

M1000
MOV R9810 R9800 R No. to store the parameter R9800 9810
MOV R9812 R9801 R No. to store the current position R9801 9812

MOV K536 R9802 R No. to store the target position R9802 536
MOV K9813 R9803 R No. to store the output position R9803 9813
MOV H8 R9810 Parameter is set.

MOV K6 R9811 Number of rotary body

X34 index are set.
PLS M100 R9810 8
Strobe rising signal created
M100
MOV K1X30 R9812 The current value is set at R9811 6
XC68 R9812CW or CCW is determined by
the ROT instruction. R9812 1 to 6
S.ROT K1 R9800 R9811 M200
M201 Error check When required R9813 0 to 3 (number
<= R9810 H0F of output steps)
XC68 M202 Stop signal created (Note 1)
= R536 R9812 (target value=current value)
XC68 M203
= K0 R9813 Stop signal created (Note 1)
XC68 M202 M200 Y10 (number of steps=0)

CW
(M203) M200 Y11
CCW
YC1E
Completion circuit Auxiliary function completed
M1000 M1000
On-signal after PLC1 scan
M1000

(Note 1) Either M202 or M203 can be used for a stop signal.

(Note 2) The devices (X, Y, and R) are used in this example for no special purpose. Use any device within the available
range.
(Note 3) If a number from 1 to 6 has not been specified for current position data (R9812) before the ROT instruction is
activated, an error will occur.
(Note 4) The control parameters (R9810) are specified as follows:
(1)Rotary body starts from 1
(2)Take a short cut.
(3)Calculate the number of steps.

II - 263
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Exclusive Instructions

(2) Ring counter (Up/down counter)

This instruction is used to control position of rotary body (or turret).

ACT
S.ROT K3 Rn Rm Mm
(Pulse coding)
Completion ("1" for error)
Ring counter instruction
R No. to specify rotary body index

Control buffer data position designating R No.

Rn Rp Parameter setting R No.

Rn+1 Counter setting R No. (File register o. which is the content in Rn+1 is
actual ring counter.)

The ring counter is a binary counter; it is used as an up/down counter of "start from 0" or "start from 1" according to
the parameter rotary body instruction.

Contents of Rp (parameter)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Error output Rotary body selection

Instruction code: S.ROT Kn is not "1" or "3". 0 : Rotary body starts from 1
1 : Rotary body starts from 0

Up/down selection
0 : Up counter
1 : Down counter

(Note 1) The ring counter instruction is executed after setting R No. to Rn to Rn+1 and specifying data for the
parameter.
(Note 2) The error completion (Mm) of the ring counter instruction and the error output in bit F of the parameter (Rp) are
cleared when the activating signal (ACT) goes OFF. The activating signal (ACT) of the ring counter instruction
is generally pulsed. This makes it hard for the interface diagnostic and ladder monitor programs to detect an
error signal. For debugging, therefore, an error hold circuit is provided after the ring count instruction to ease
error detection.

II - 264
 10
PLC Help Function

II - 265
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

To help the user PLC, an exclusive interface is provided between the user PLC and controller.
The function and interface are explained below.

PLC help function examples:

・Tool life management

・External search
・PLC axis control
・External machine coordinate system compensation
・Alarm message display
・Operator message display
・PLC switches
・Key operation by user PLC
・Load meter display
・User PLC version display

II - 266
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1.1 Outline of Tool Life Management Function
- The tool status is monitored by counting the tool usage time and number of uses.
- When the tool being used reaches its life, the tool life over signal is output, and the tool No. displayed on the LIFE
MANAGEMENT DATA screen is highlighted. Tool life over signal turns ON at the moment when the usage time or the
number of uses of the tool reaches the limit.
- When the tool is commanded, an arbitrary tool is selected from the tool group.(Only for tool life management II.)

[Cutting] [[Tool command]

Use time and The life is checked
number of uses when the tool is Tool life is over
are counted selected

[Preparation]
The life time [WARNING]
and number of Tool life over
life times are
set [Tool life management screen]
# No. is highlighted

Tool life register

(R register) User PLC

II - 267
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.1.2 Tool Life Management Methods

The following three management methods are available.

(1)Tool life management I (When Base common parameter "#1096 T-Ltyp" is set to 1.)
The use time or use count of the spindle tool specified from user PLC (R12200, R12201) is integrated and the tool
use state is monitored. Tool data corresponding to the spindle tool is also output. (R11824 to R11847)

(2)Tool life management II (When Base common parameter "#1096 T-Ltyp" is set to 2.)
A function to select a spare tool has been added to the tool management I. The spare tool is selected from the
group by the spare tool selection processes executed by the NC when the tool is commanded, etc. The tool data for
that spare tool is output.
Tool data corresponding to the spindle tool specified from user PLC (R12200, R12201) is output (R11824 to
R11847) and tool compensation corresponding to the spindle tool is made.

(3)Tool life management III (set "3" to basic specification parameter "#1096 T-Ltyp")
The use time or use count of the spindle tool specified from user PLC (R12200, R12201) is integrated and the tool
use state is monitored. Tool data corresponding to the spindle tool is also output. (R11824 to R11847)
This function is not controlled by the group No. Only group No.1 can be created.

10.1.3 Procedure when Tool Command is Executed

(1)Tool life management I and III
(a)When the tool command (T command) is commanded, the NC outputs the T code data (BCD) and the tool strobe
signal.
The T code data (BCD) is binary converted and then used.
(b)The NC checks the tool command, and executes the tool selection process if there is a need for life
management.
(c)The tool selection process outputs the tool data for the tool corresponding to the designated tool No.
(d)The user PLC decides whether or not the tool can be used according to the status in the output tool data, and
selects command tool or performs alarm processing.

(2)Tool life management II

(a)When the tool command (T command) is commanded, the NC outputs the T code data (BCD) and the tool strobe
signal.
The T code data (BCD) is binary converted and then used.
(b)The NC checks the tool command, and executes the spare tool selection process if there is a need for life
management.
(c)The spare tool selection process selects the spare tool corresponding to the specified No. (group No., tool No.)
and outputs the tool data of the spare tool.
(d)The user PLC decides whether or not the tool can be used according to the status in the output tool data, and
selects command tool or performs alarm processing.

(Note )If -1 is set in the group No. in the output tool data, the tool data is invalid. As for the tool life management III, if
other than "1" is set to the group No., the tool data is invalid. At the time, the specified tool No. is output to the
tool No. in the output tool data as it is.

<When tool command is executed>

Tool command (Rm) Spare tool selection Tool data (Rn)

(Tool No., group No.) function command

In tool life management I, Tool is selected according

tool No. is only specified to tool No. in tool data.
and spare tool is selected.

II - 268
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1.4 Procedure when Spindle Tool is Changed

(1)When spindle tool is changed during the spindle tool change command (M06), etc., the user PLC specifies the tool
No. of the spindle tool (R12200 to R12201).
NC outputs the spindle tool data corresponding to the tool No. of the spindle tool every user PLC main cycle
(R11824 to R11847).
(2)NC integrates the use time or use count of the spindle tool based on the spindle tool data in the tool data file.
In tool life management II, it also executes tool compensation corresponding to the spindle tool.

(Note)If -1 is set in the group No. in the output spindle tool data, the spindle tool data is invalid. As for the tool life
management III, if other than "1" is set to the group No., the tool data is invalid. At the time, the specified tool No.
(R12200 to R12201) is output to the tool No. in the output spindle tool data as it is. NC does not integrate the usage
time or usage count of the spindle tool or make tool compensation.

<When tool is changed>

Spindle tool No.

(R11802-R11803)
When tool is changed, the spindle tool No. is set
in R12200, R12201. (User PLC)

Spindle tool No. NC Tool data file

(R12200 to R12201) (NC internal data)

Standby tool No.

(R12202 to R12203) When the spindle tool No. changes, the
controller assumes that the spindle tool is
changed, and searches the tool data file for
Spindle tool data the tool data of the new tool.
(R11824 to R11847) The controller executes life management and
tool compensation based on the tool data. It
also outputs the tool data to R11824 to
R11847 every user PLC main cycle.

10.1.5 Tool Life Management II Method

(1)Tool command method
One of the following two can be selected by using a parameter for command tool No. (Rm contents) input to the
spare tool selection process in tool life management II:
(a)Group No. command method (When Base common parameter "#1104 T-Com2" is set to 0.)
The command tool No. (Rm contents) input to the spare tool selection process is handled as group No. Spare
tool is selected among the tools corresponding to the group No. in tool data.
(b)Tool No. command method (When BASE SPEC parameter "#1104 T-Com2" is set to 1.)
The command tool No. (Rm contents) input to the spare tool selection process is handled as a tool No. The
group No. containing the command tool No. is found and spare tool is selected among the group.

(2)Spare tool selection method

One of the following two can be selected by using a parameter for the spare tool selection method of the spare tool
selection process in tool life management II:
(a)Selection in tool registration order (When Base common parameter "#1105 T-Sel2" is set to 0.)
This selects the tool from the tools in use in the same group, following the registration No. order.
If there are no "Tools in use", the tools are selected in order of "Tools not in use", "Normal life tools" and
"Abnormal tools", following the registration No. order.

II - 269
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

(b)Life equality selection (When Base common parameter "#1105 T-Sel2" is set to 1.)
This selects the tool with the maximum remaining life from the tools in use and not in use in the same group.
When several tools have the same remaining life, the tools are selected in order of registration No. If there are
no "Tools in use" or "Tools not in use", the tools are selected in order of "Tools not in use", "Normal life tools"
and "Abnormal tools", following the registration No. order.

10.1.6 Maximum Number of Registerable Tools

The maximum number of registerable tools is decided by the system's specifications.

10.1.7 Tool Data

The tool data is tool management data such as the group No., tool No., and tool status.

Tool data name Explanation Data range

No. to manage tools of the same type (form and
dimensions) in a group is set.
Group No. The tools assigned the same group No. are assumed to 1 to 99999999
be spare tools.
Only group No.1 is valid for the tool life management III.
No. unique to each tool actually output during tool
Tool No. 1 to 99999999
command execution.
(1)Tool life management method 0-2
(2)Tool length compensation method 0-2
(3)Tool radius compensation method 0-2
Set the parameter for tool life management method,
Tool data flag length compensation method, radius compensation bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
method, etc.

Tool status The tool state is indicated. 0 to FF (H)

May differ according to the machine tool builder
Auxiliary data 0 to 65535
specifications.
Life time or life count for each tool is set. 0 to 4000 (minutes)
Tool life data
(If 0 is set, infinity is assumed to be specified.) 0 to 65000 (times)
Usage time or usage count for each tool.
0 to 4000 (minutes)
Tool usage data (Refer to the following "Usage time, usage count" section
0 to 65000 (times)
for details on the count method.)
Compensation No. (Note1)
Tool length The tool length compensation data is set with the format
Direct offset amount (Note2)
compensation data designated with the tool data flag.
Addition offset amount (Note2)
Compensation No. (Note1)
Tool radius The tool radius compensation data is set with the format
Direct offset amount (Note2)
compensation data designated with the tool data flag.
Addition offset amount (Note2)
(Note 1)The data range for the tool offset Nos. is decided by the specifications of the number of tool offset sets.

Number of tool offset sets Data range

40 sets 1 to 40
200 sets 1 to 200
400 sets 1 to 400
999 sets 1 to 999
(Note 2)The setting range of the compensation amount varies depending on the parameter "#11050 T-ofs digit
type".

#11050 Tool compensation digit type Data range

Absolute -999.999 ～ 999.999
0: Set with a 3-digit integer
Incremental -999.999 ～ 999.999
Absolute -999.999 ～ 999.999
1: Set with a 4-digit integer
Incremental -999.999 ～ 999.999

II - 270
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

(1)Tool data flag

Parameter Details Value Explanation

Tool life Usage time 0 Manages the cutting feed with the execution time.
management Mount count 1 Manages the number of times the tool becomes the spindle tool at tool change, etc.
method Work count 2 Manages with the number of times the cutting feed command is issued.
Compensatio Handles the compensation data in the tool data as the compensation No., and
n number 0 compensates by replacing the compensation No. commanded in the machining
Tool length method program with this value.
compensation Handles the compensation data in the tool data as the addition compensation
Addition
method amount.
compensatio 1
Tool radius Compensates by adding the amount to the compensation amount indicated by the
n method
compensation compensation No. commanded in the machining program.
method Direct Handles the compensation data in the tool data as the direct compensation amount.
compensatio 2 Compensates by replacing the amount to the compensation amount indicated by
n method the compensation No. commanded in the machining program with this value.

(2)Tool status

Details Value Explanation

Unused tool 0 Set to 0 when replacing the tool with a new tool.
Tool in use 1 This state is activated when cutting is actually started.
Normal life tool 2 This state is activated when the usage data exceeds the life data.
Error tool 1 3 This state is activated when the NC receives tool error 1 signal.
Error tool 2 4 This state is activated when the NC receives tool error 2 signal.
- Values 3 and 4 may differ according to the machine tool builder specifications.
- The unused tool and tool in use are usable spare tools.

(3)Tool life data, tool usage data

The setting range and unit differ according to the tool data flag's tool life management method.

Tool life management method Setting range Unit

0 : Usage time 0 to 4000 Minute
1 : Mount count 0 to 65000 Times
2 : Work count 0 to 65000 Times

(4)Tool length compensation data, tool radius compensation data

The tool corresponding to the spindle tool can be compensated with tool life management II.
The setting details and range differ according to the tool data flag's tool length compensation method and tool
radius compensation method.

Tool compensation data Setting details Setting range

0 : Compensation number method Compensation No. Ref. to (Note 1) on the previous page.
1 : Addition compensation method Compensation amount Ref. to (Note 2) on the previous page.
2 : Direct compensation method Compensation amount Ref. to (Note 2) on the previous page.

II - 271
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.1.8 Usage Time, Work Count

The usage data is counted with the life system (usage time, work count, mount count) set for each tool.
Tool life management is executed even when the operation mode is MDI.

G00 G01 G00 G04 G01 G04 G04 G00

During cutting
feed During cutting feed

+1 count +1 count

- The usage time is the cumulative time during operation (during cutting feed) in the group 1 modal.
- The cut count is the number of times the state was changed to the group 1 modal (G01, G02, G03, G33).
Note that rapid traverse and cutting feed commands with no movement are not counted.
If a command other than a rapid traverse command is issued between the cutting feed commands, the data
will not be counted.
- The mount count is the number of times the tool became the spindle tool with tool change.
If the group 1 modal is not activated even once after becoming the spindle tool, the mounting will not be
counted.
- If the automatic machine lock signal is input to even only one axis, it will not be counted regardless of the life
management method.
If the machine lock signal is turned ON while the program is running, it will be counted at the block where the
machine lock signal is turned ON but it will not be counted at the subsequent blocks.
On the contrary, if the machine lock signal is turned OFF while the program is running, it will not be counted at
the block where the signal is turned OFF but it will be counted at the subsequent blocks.

The following cases are not counted even when tool life management is valid.
- When control parameter "tool management valid" is OFF
- When the usage data count valid signal is OFF
- When the life data setting value is 0
- When the tool status is 2 (normal life tool)
(However, only when the parameter "Enable normal life tool's data count (for M system only)" ("#1259
set31/bit0) is set to "0")
- When there are three or more tool statuses (abnormal tool 1, abnormal tool 2)
- During machine lock
- During miscellaneous function lock
- During dry run
- Single block
- During skip

II - 272
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1.9 Tool Data Flow (R Register)

NC PLC

R536 T command data

T command
(BCD data)
R537

R11800
Group No.
R11801

R11802
Tool No. 1
R11803
When magazine is indexed according to
R11804 Tool data flag/status [DMOV] the read tool No. and new tool is mounted
Auxiliary data on the spindle, tool No. of the new tool is
R11805
set in R12200, R12201.
The NC searches for the tool data
R11806 Cumulative
indicated by the T command
data. usage time
R11807
The searched tool data is set in
R11800 to R11823. R11808
Service lifetime
R11809
Cumulative usage
R11810 count
R11811 Service life count

R11812 Cumulative
usage wear
R11813 amount
Status check, etc.
R11814 Service life wear
amount
R11815

R11816 Length compen-

sation data
R11817

R11818
Radius compen-
R11819 sation data

R11820
Length wear
R11821 amount

R11822
Radius wear
R11823 amount

II - 273
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

NC PLC
1

[DMOV]

Use as life management R12200 Spindle tool No.

and screen display data
R12201

R12202
Use as screen Standby tool Standby tool number is set.
display data. R12203 No.

R11824
Group No.
R11825

R11826
Tool No.
The tool data R11827
corresponding to the
spindle tool No. is R11828 Tool data flag/status
output.
R11829 Auxiliary data Status check, etc.

R11830 Cumulative
usage time
R11831

R11832
Service lifetime
R11833
Cumulative usage
R11834 count
R11835 Service life count

R11836 Cumulative
usage wear
R11837 amount

R11838 Service life wear

amount
R11839

R11840
Length compen-
R11841 sation data
(Note)
R11842 Note that the data handled in tool life management
Radius compen-
sation data except for tool data flag/status is binary, while the
R11843
data used in the ATC instruction, such as search
R11844 data and magazine tool No., is BCD.
Length wear
R11845 amount

R11846
Radius wear
R11847 amount

II - 274
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1.10 User PLC Processing

A PLC processing example when tool change is made by the T command is given below:

START

Spare tool data

already output?
NO
YES

Is life management The control method varies depending on

selected? NO whether or not life management is selected.

YES

Is tool available? The tool status and tool No. are checked to see if
NO the tool can be used.
YES
Index magazine according to tool Desired tool (magazine) is indexed.
No. in the read tool data.

Index up magazine according Desired tool (magazine) is indexed.

to the R536 contents.

Change tool (mount new tool on

spindle) Set the tool No. of the new tool mounted on the
Set the tool No. of the tool spindle in R12200, R12201.
mounted on the spindle R12200, Seeing a change in the R12200, R12201
R12201. contents, NC outputs the life management tool
data corresponding to the tool No. R11824 to
R11847 and starts life management at the same
time.

Turn on auxiliary function The completion signal when life

completion signal. management is selected is turned on after
the spindle tool No. is set in R12200,
R12201.
Error processing

II - 275
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.1.11 Interface with PLC

(1) NC → PLC
X (part system)

1st part 2nd part

Name Details
system system
Sent from the NC to the PLC when the tool life management
XC2B XD6B In tool life management
function is selected (when user parameter is ON).
Sent from the NC to the PLC when the usage data count value
XC2E XD6E Tool life over
exceeds the life data setting value.
Sent from the NC to the PLC when all tools in the tool group
XC2F XD6F Tool group life over
exceed the life. (Valid only in the tool life management II.)
Sent from the NC to the PLC when the miscellaneous function
XC60 XDA0 M function strobe 1
(M function) is executed.
Sent from the NC to the PLC when output of the spare tool's
XC68 XDA8 T function strobe 1
data is completed.

(2) PLC → NC
Y (axis)

1st part 2nd part

Name Details
system system
Y8A0 Y8A8 Auto machine lock 1st axis
Y8A1 Y8A9 Auto machine lock 2nd axis
Y8A2 Y8AA Auto machine lock 3rd axis
Y8A3 Y8AB Auto machine lock 4th axis Tool life management is not executed while these signals are
Y8A4 Y8AC Auto machine lock 5th axis received.
Y8A5 Y8AD Auto machine lock 6th axis
Y8A6 Y8AE Auto machine lock 7th axis
Y8A7 Y8AF Auto machine lock 8th axis

Y (part system)

1st part 2nd part

Name Details
system system
Tool life management is not executed while this signal is
YC12 YD52 Single block
received.
Tool life management is not executed while this signal is
YC15 YD55 Dry run
received.
Execution of the machining program waits until this signal is
YC1E YD5E M function finish 1
received.
Execution of the machining program waits until this signal is
YC5A YD9A Miscellaneous function lock
received.
If the NC receives this signal, the tool status of a spindle tool
YC88 YDC8 Tool alarm 1 or a tool selected when a tool group No. is designated is
changed to 3.
If the NC receives this signal, the tool status of a spindle tool
YC89 YDC9 Tool alarm 2 or a tool selected when a tool group No. is designated is
changed to 4.
The tool usage data is not counted when this signal is not
YC8A YDCA Data count valid
being received.
Tool life management is executed when NC receives this
YC8B YDCB Tool life management input signal, and the output during tool life management is output to
PLC.
This signal is used to set all the tools of a group to an unused
YC8C YDCC Tool change reset signal
state under Tool life management 2.

II - 276
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

(3) R registers
R (part system)

1st part 2nd part

Name Details
system system
R504 R704
M code data 1 This No. is designated with the M command.
R505 R705
R536 R736
T code data 1 This No. is designated with the T command.
R537 R737
This is the No. of the group for which life management is
R567 R767 Group in tool life management
active.
R628 R828 This is the usage time and work count of the tool for which life
Tool life usage data
R629 R829 management is active.
Number of registerable tool life
R630 R830 This is the number of tools for which life management is active.
control tools
R2588 R2788 Tool life management data sort This is the tool life data sort necessity flag.
R2590 R2790 This signal is used to specify the group No. of the tool which
you set to an unused state when it has reached the lifetime, or
Tool group number designation
R2591 R2791 which you forcibly exchange while in use under Tool life
management 2.

R (ATC, life management): Tool life management data (NC PLC) standby tool data

1st part 2nd part

Name Details
system system
R11800 R11850
Standby tool: Group No. This is the standby tool's group No.
R11801 R11851
R11802 R11852
Standby tool: Tool No. This is the standby tool's tool No.
R11803 R11853
R11804 R11854 Standby tool: Flag/Status This is the standby tool's flag/status.
R11805 R11855
Active tool: Group No. This is the active tool's group No.
R11806 R11856
R11807 R11857
Active tool: Tool No. This is the active tool's tool No.
R11808 R11858
R11809 R11859 Active tool: Flag/Status This is the active tool's flag/status.
R11810 R11860 Active tool: Auxiliary data This is the active tool's auxiliary data.
R11811 R11861
Active tool: Cumulative usage time This is the active tool's usage time.
R11812 R11862
R11813 R11863
Active tool: Service lifetime This is the active tool's service lifetime.
R11814 R11864
R11815 R11865 Active tool: Cumulative usage count This is the active tool's work count time.
R11816 R11866 Active tool: Service life count This is the active tool's service life count.
R11817 R11867 Active tool: Cumulative usage wear
This is the active tool's usage wear amount.
R11818 R11868 amount
R11819 R11869
Active tool: Service life wear amount This is the active tool's service life wear amount.
R11820 R11870
R11821 R11871 Active tool: Length compensation
This is the active tool's length compensation amount.
R11822 R11872 amount
Active tool: Radius compensation
R11823 R11873 This is the active tool's radius compensation amount.
amount

II - 277
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

R (ATC, life management): Tool life management data (NC PLC) Active spindle tool data

1st part 2nd part

Name Details
system system
R11824 R11874
Active tool: Group No. This is the active tool's group No.
R11825 R11875
R11826 R11876
Active tool: Tool No. This is the active tool's tool No.
R11827 R11877
R11828 R11878 Active tool: Flag/Status This is the active tool's flag/status.
R11829 R11879 Active tool: Auxiliary data This is the active tool's auxiliary data.
R11830 R11880
Active tool: Cumulative usage time This is the active tool's usage time.
R11831 R11881
R11832 R11882
Active tool: Service lifetime This is the active tool's service lifetime.
R11833 R11883
R11834 R11884 Active tool: Cumulative usage count This is the active tool's work count time.
R11835 R11885 Active tool: Service life count This is the active tool's service life count.
R11836 R11886 Active tool: Cumulative usage wear
This is the active tool's usage wear amount.
R11837 R11887 amount
R11838 R11888
Active tool: Service life wear amount This is the active tool's service life wear amount.
R11839 R11889
R11840 R11890 Active tool: Length compensation
This is the active tool's length compensation amount.
R11841 R11891 amount
R11842 R11892 Active tool: Radius compensation
This is the active tool's radius compensation amount.
R11843 R11893 amount
R11844 R11894
Active tool: Length wear amount This is the active tool's length wear amount.
R11845 R11895
R11846 R11896
Active tool: Radius wear amount This is the active tool's radius wear amount.
R11847 R11897

R (ATC, life management): Tool life management data (NC PLC) Spindle/Standby tool Nos.

1st part 2nd part

Name Details
system system
R12200 R12210
T life mgmt Spindle tool No. This is the active spindle tool No.
R12201 R12211
R12202 R12212
T life mgmt Standby tool No. This is the standby tool No.
R12203 R12213

II - 278
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

10.1.12 Switch of the Tool Status with the Tool Group No. Designation (Tool Life Management II)
(1) Tool group No. designation signal and Tool alarm 1/2 signals
Under Tool life management 2, you can change the status of a spindle tool or a tool of the designated group to
either 3 (Abnormal tool 1) or 4 (Abnormal tool 2) by specifying the group No. with the "Tool group No. designation"
(R2590,R2591) and turning ON the "Tool alarm 1" (TAL1) signal or the "Tool alarm 2"(TAL2) signal. If you select the
group again after turning ON a group No. to the "Tool group No. designation" (R2590,R2591), a new tool of the
group will be selected. The statuses of below listed tools can be changed by these signals.

Tool group No. designation (R2590, R2591) Tools subject to tool status change
0 - Spindle tool
Group No. of spindle tool Spindle tool
Other Registered group No. Group No. of tools other than A tool selected when a group set in the tool
than 0 spindle tool group No. designation is selected (Note)
Unregistered group No. - No tool
(Note) This is a tool selected according to the parameter “#1105 T-Sel2 (Spare tool selection method 2)” when a
group set in the "Tool group No. designation" (R2590,R2591) is selected. If a tool used last time has not
reached the lifetime (the tool status is 1), this tool will be selected.

(a) Example
Registered groups: 10, 20, 30

Tools registered in each group <Tool No.> <Tool status>

Group 10 : 101 1 (Used tool)
: 102 0 (Unused tool)
Group 20 : 201 2 (Normal life tool)
: 202 1 (Used tool)
: 203 0 (Unused tool)
Group 30 : 301 2 (Normal life tool)
: 302 0 (Unused tool)

(Machining program)

:
T10; ← Select Group 10 : Tool #101 is selected.
M06; ← Exchange tools
G1 X50. F1000;
:
T20; ← Select Group 20 : Tool #202 is selected.
M06; ← Exchange tools
G1 X100. F1000;
:

Example of operation after the above machining program is executed

(E.g. 1) When specifying 0 or 20 for “Tool group No. designation” (R2590,R2591) and turning ON “Tool alarm
1” (TAL1) signal
Spindle tool’s tool status changes to 3 (Abnormal tool 1).

<Tool No.> <Tool status>

Group 20 : 202 3 (Abnormal tool 1) ← Spindle tool

II - 279
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

(E.g. 2) when specifying 10 for “Tool group No. designation” (R2590,R2591) and turning ON “Tool alarm 2”
(TAL2) signal
Status of a tool which is used when Group 10 is selected next time changes to 4 (Abnormal tool 2).

<Tool No.> <Tool status>

← Tool to be used when Group 10 is
Group 10 : 101 4 (Abnormal tool 2)
selected next time
(If Tool #101 is expired after execution of the program, status of #102 is to be changed.)
(E.g. 3) When specifying 30 for “Tool group No. designation” (R2590,R2591) and turning ON “Tool alarm 1”
(TAL1) signal
Status of a tool which is used when Group 30 is selected next time changes to 3 (Abnormal tool 1).

<Tool No.> <Tool status>

← Tool to be used when Group 30 is
Group 30 : 302 3 (Abnormal tool 1)
selected next time

(2) Tool group No. designation signal and Tool change reset signal
Under Tool life management 2, you can set all the tools of a group to be unused (clear the tool status and usage
data) by specifying the group No. with the "Tool group No. designation" (R2590,R2591) and turning ON the "Tool
change reset"(TRST) signal.
Whether to change the tool status to “unused” for all the life-expired groups or for a specific group is selected using
the “Tool group No. designation” signal.
When group selection is made next time after this signal is input, the top tool of the group will be selected.
The group designation range is as follows:
For a designated group: Group No. 1 to 99999999
For all groups : R2590: 0xFFFF
R2591: 0xFFFF

(a) Supplementary
If the Tool change reset signal is input to a currently selected group, the usage data of the tool being used
when the signal is input is counted until a next tool selection is made. Thus if you want to change a selected
tool according to the signal input, perform a group selection again. Note, however that if no travel command is
given between the signal input and the next group selection, your target tool may not be selected due to
advance processing. In this case turn ON the "Recalculation request" (CRQ) signal before making group
selection. This can disable the content of advance processing.

(b) Caution
"Tool change reset"(TRST) signal can set a tool to be unused even during automatic operation.

II - 280
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.2 Tool Life Management (Lathe System)

10.2 Tool Life Management (Lathe System)

10.2.1 Outline of Tool Life Management Function
-The tool status is monitored by counting the tool usage time and number of uses.
-When the tool being used reaches its life, the tool life over signal is output, and the tool No. displayed on the
LIFEMANAGEMENT DATA screen is highlighted.
The tool life over signal turns ON at the following timing:
Tool life management 1:
When a T command is issued after the usage time or number of uses has reached the limit
Tool life management 2:
At the moment when the usage time or number of uses reaches the limit
-When the tool is commanded, an arbitrary tool is selected from the tool group.(Only for tool life management II.)

[Cutting] [[Tool command]

Use time and The life is checked
number of uses when the tool is Tool life is over
are counted selected

[Preparation]
The life time [WARNING]
and number of Tool life over
life times are
set [Tool life management screen]
# No. is highlighted

Tool life register

(R register) User PLC

II - 281
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.2.2 Tool Life Management Method

There are two types of management methods as described below.
(1) Tool life management 1
This method accumulates the operating time or the number of uses of the tool specified in a program to monitor the
tool’s operating condition.
Up to 80 tools (Tool Nos. 1 to 80) can be managed by this method.
(a) Management by time
The cutting time (G01, G02, G33 etc.) after a tool selection (T) command is issued is added to the usage time
of the specified tool.
Tool life over signal turns ON when a tool selection command is issued after the tool’s usage time has reached
its lifetime.
The tool status on the tool life screen is updated when the tool usage time is counted up.
(b) Management by the number of uses
The number of uses of the tool specified with T command is counted up every time the tool selection (T)
command is given.
Tool life over signal turns ON when a tool selection command is issued after the number of uses has reached
its life count.
The tool status on the tool life screen is updated when the number of uses is counted up.

(2) Tool life management 2

The life of each tool (time and frequency) is controlled, and when the life is reached, a spare tool that is the same
type is selected from the group where the tool belongs and used.

Number of life management tools 1-part system : Up to 80 tools, Multi-part system : Up to 40 tools/part system
Number of groups 1-part system : Up to 80 groups, Multi-part system : Up to 40/part system
Group No. 1 to 9999
Number of tools in one group Up to 16 tools
Life time 0 to 999999 minutes (approx. 16667 hours)
Number of lives 0 to 999999 times

10.2.3 Display for Management Data Setting

The tool life management data can be set through the machining program or through the tool life management screen.
Refer to the programming manual for the method with the machining program.
Refer to the instruction manual for the setting through the tool life management screen.

II - 282
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.2 Tool Life Management (Lathe System)

10.2.4 PLC Interface Input/Output Signals

(1) Output signals

1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part

Name Details
system system system system
IN TOOL LIFE This signal notifies the PLC that tool life
XC2B XD6B XEAB XFEB
MANAGEMENT management is being carried out.
This signal notifies that tool usage data has
XC2E XD6E XEAE XFEE TOOL LIFE OVER
reached its life data (usage data ≥ life data).
The output condition of this signal can be selected
by setting the parameter #1277 ext13/bit0.
<Type 1> (#1277 ext13/bit0: 0)
This signal notifies the PLC that all tools in a
XC2F XD6F XEAF XFEF TOOL GROUP LIFE OVER
group have reached their lives.
<Type 2> (#1277 ext13/bit0: 1)
This signal notifies the PLC that there is a life-
expired group among all the registered groups.
This signal notifies that a new tool (unused tool) in
XC94 XDD4 XF14 X1054 NEW TOOL CHANGE
the group is selected.
This signal notifies that the [Life data – Usage
data] of the tool being used or the last tool in a
XC96 XDD6 XF16 X1056 LIFE PREDICTION
group has reached the remaining life setting
value.
GROUP IN TOOL LIFE This signal outputs the group No. that is currently
R567 R767 R967 R1167
MANAGEMENT under tool life management.
This signal outputs the usage data of the currently
used tool (if the tool has more than one
R628,9 R828,9 R1028,9 R1228,9 TOOL LIFE USAGE DATA
compensation No., the total usage data of the tool
is output).

(2) Input signals

1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part

Name Details
system system system system
USAGE DATA COUNT This signal is turned ON to enable counting of the
YC8A YDCA YF0A Y104A
VALID tool usage data.
This signal is used to set all the tools of the group
YC8C YDCC YF0C Y104C TOOL CHANGE RESET
to be “unused”.
This signal is used to forcibly exchange the tool
YC88 YDC8 YF08 Y1048 TOOL-SKIP
that has not reached its life.
This signal is used to specify the group No. when
TOOL GROUP NO.
R2590 R2790 R2990 R3190 setting the tools of a life-expired group to be
DESIGNATION
unused, or forcibly exchanging a tool being used.

II - 283
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.2.4.1 Timing Chart

10.2.4.1.1 Tool Life Management 1
(1) Time-count type
The tool usage time is counted up while cutting after a T command is issued.
Life over signal turns ON when a T command is given after the usage time reaches or exceeds the lifetime.

Programmed command T0101 G01X5.F1 G00 Z10. G01X5.F1 T0000 T0101

(In cutting) (In cutting)
TF

In cutting feed

Life over

Usage timecounts up
▲

The mark " ▲ " in the chart indicates the time when usage time becomes equal to the life time.

(2) Number of uses-count type

The number of uses is counted up when cutting feed starts after a T command is given.
Life over signal turns ON when a T command is given after the number of uses reaches the life count.

Programmed command T0101 G01X5.F1 G00Z10. G01X5.F1 T0000 T0101

(In cutting) (In cutting)
TF

In cutting feed

Life over

Number of usescounts up
▲

The mark " ▲ " in the chart indicates the time when usage data reaches life data.

10.2.4.1.2 Tool Life Management 2

Example: Timing of usage data counting and outputs of Life prediction and Life over signals
(When Group 2 reaches the life)

(1) Time-count type

The tool usage time is counted up while cutting after a T command is given.
Life over signal turns ON when the usage time reaches or exceeds the lifetime.

Group selection T199 T299 T199 T299 T199 T299

TF

In cutting feed

New tool selection

Life prediction

Life over

Count up
Group1 Group1 ▲ Group1
Group2 Group2

II - 284
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.2 Tool Life Management (Lathe System)

(2) Number of uses-count type

<Type 1>
The number of uses is counted up when cutting feed starts after a T command is issued.
Life over signal turns ON when the number of uses becomes equal to the life count.

Group selection T199 T299 T199 T299 T199 T299

TF

In cutting feed

New tool selection

Life prediction

Life over

Count up
Group1 ▲
Group2 Group1 Group1
Group2

The mark " ▲ " in the chart indicates the time when usage data reaches life data.

<Type 2>
The number of uses is counted up when Reset is input after a T command is given.
Life over signal turns ON when the number of uses reaches the life count.

Group selection T299 T299 T199 T299 T199

TF

In cutting feed

New tool selection

M30 (reset)

Life prediction

Life over

Count up
Group2 Group1,2

II - 285
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.2.5 Read of Next Tool No.

10.2.5.1 Operation Description
By use of PLC window function, the tool No. to be selected next can be read when a T command containing a group No.
is issued.When an ATC is used for managing spare tools, for example, this enables indexing of the intended tool
magazine beforehand.
Use the following data for PLC window function. For details of PLC window function, refer to "6.6.8 PLC Window" in
M700V/M70V/E70 PLC Interface Manual(IB-1500919).
When reading is carried out by designating a group to which the currently used tool belongs, data may not be correctly
read if the currently used tool reaches its life. If data read is carried out by designating an non-existing group, PLC
window read result will be 0x85 (data No. error).

Section No. : 19
Sub ID : Part system No.
Data No. : The group No. designation to read the next tool No.
Sub-section No. : 100

II - 286
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.2 Tool Life Management (Lathe System)

10.2.5.2 Application Example

An application example of this function is as follows.

(1) PLC program

↓ Initial setting Set "R9800" in the PLC window read register.

[MOV.K9800.R424]
[MOV.K1.R425 ]

X C 6C
When BF (B command strobe) is ON,the tool to be used
[MOV.K19.R9801 ]
next is read by use of B command value as a group No.
[MOV.K1.R9802 ]
[MOV.K100.R9803]
[BIN. R 544 .R9804 ]
[MOV.K0.R9805 ]
[MOV.K1.R9806 ]
[MOV.K1.R9800 ]
After confirming the read complete status,set the tool No.
[= H1 R9800] [= H101 R9807] [MOV.R9808.D100] to be used next in "D100".
[MOV.K0.R9800 ] Clear the read request (R9800).

(Note) This example is given on the assumption that the

circuit for indexing the D100 tool magazine is separately
programmed.

(2) Group registration

Registered groups: 12, 34

Tools registered in each group:
Group 12 : T10, T11, T12
Group 34 : T16, T22

(3) A part of the program

：
T1299; → Select the tool T10.
B34; → The tool No. 16, a tool to be used next in group 34, is set in D100.
G1 X40. F300; T16 is indexed.
G1 X43. Z60.;
:
T3499; → Select the tool T16.
: As indexing of T16 is already finished,
: tool exchange can be done smoothly.

When "Life over" occurs on T16 in the above program, the tool No. possible to be read with B34 command will be
T22.

II - 287
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.3 External Search

External search is a function that searches the machining program according to the machining program storage device,
program No., sequence No. and block No. designated from the user PLC.

10.3.1 Detailed Explanation

The flow of the external search execution process is given below.

(1)The user PLC sets the device, program No., sequence No. and block No.
(2)The user PLC sets the external search strobe signal ON.
(3)The NC searches for the target machining program from the designated device, program No., sequence No. and
block No.
(4)The NC sets the search results as the external search status.
(5)The NC turns the external search finished signal ON.
(6)The user PLC turns the external search strobe signal OFF.
(7)The NC turns the external search finished signal OFF.

Flow of external search process for 1st part system

NC User PLC

Set search results R500 External search status Refer to with error check, etc.

R2525 Device No. Set device No.

R2526
Program No. Set program No.
R2527
R2528
Sequence No. Set sequence No.
R2529
R2530
Block No. Set block No.
R2531

Search process External search

execution strobe signal ON

External search External search

finished signal ON strobe signal OFF

External search
finished signal OFF

II - 288
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 External Search

10.3.2 PLC → NC Interface Signal

Part system No.
Signal name
1st part system 2nd part system 3rd part system 4th part system
External search device No. R2525 R2725 R2925 R3125
R2526 R2726 R2926 R3126
External search program No.
R2527 R2727 R2927 R3127
R2528 R2728 R2928 R3128
External search sequence No.
R2529 R2729 R2929 R3129
R2530 R2730 R2930 R3130
External search block No.
R2531 R2731 R2931 R3131
External search strobe YC1D YD5D YE9D YFDD

(1)External search device No.

The device storing the machining program to be searched is designated with a No.When a front CF card is selected
in
M700VS/M70V/E70 Series,select "2" for the device number.

Device number Device

0 Memory
1 HD (D drive)
2 IC card (Drive E)
3 Floppy disk (Drive A)
4 DS (data server)
5 Tape (RS232C)

(2)Program No.
Designate the No. of the machining program to be searched as a binary. 1 to 99999999 (8 digits)

(3)Sequence No.
Designate the sequence No. of the machining program to be searched as a binary. 1 to 99999 (5 digits)

(4)Block No.
Designate the block No. as a binary. 0 to 99999 (5 digits)

(5)External search strobe

The NC starts the external search at the rising edge of this signal.
The combinations of designation conditions and correspondence of the search blocks are shown below. Under
each condition, the search block + block with designated block No. are searched.

Condition
Search block
Program No. Sequence No.
Designated Designated Designated sequence No. for designated program
Designated Not designated (= 0) Head of designated program
Not designated (= 0) Designated Designated sequence No. in currently selected program
Not designated (= 0) Not designated (= 0) Error: 4 Refer to External search status

II - 289
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.3.3 NC → PLC Interface Signal

Part system No.
Signal name
1st part system 2nd part system 3rd part system 4th part system
External search finished XC1D XD5D XE9D XFDD
External search status R500 R700 R900 R1100

(1)External search finished

This turns ON when the external search is finished. This also turns ON when an error occurs.
This signal turns OFF when the "External search strobe signal" is turned OFF from the user PLC.

(2)External search status

The status at the end of the external search is output.
Refer to "External search status".

10.3.4 Timing Chart

The timing chart for the external search is shown below.

External search strobe

(PLC NC)

Processing external search

(NC internal state)

External search finished signal

(NC PLC)

External search status

(NC PLC)

10.3.5 External Search Status

The correspondence of the external search status values and details output from the NC based on the
external search is shown below.

External search
Details Remedy
status value
0 Normally finished -
Wait for other function's operation search to finish before
1 Operation search is being carried out
searching.
2 Search was attempted while the program was running Stop the program before searching
A device that does not exist or which is disabled was Confirm the presence of the device, and that the device
3
designated is within the specifications
4 The program file is not designated Designate the program No. or sequence No.
The block with the designated program No., sequence No.
5 -
or block No. was not found
6 The external search specifications are not available Check the specifications

II - 290
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 External Search

10.3.6 Precautions
Even if the external search strobe is already OFF when the NC finishes the external search, the external search finished
signal will turn ON for one cycle of the user PLC.

10.3.7 Usage Example

An example of the external search ladder for 1st part system is shown below.

External search start signal

M8000
PLS M8001 External search start pulse

External search start pulse

M8001
MOV D101 R2525 Set external search device No.

DMOV D102 R2526 Set external search program No.

DMOV D104 R2528 Set external search sequence No.

DMOV D106 R2530 Set external search block No.

Turn external search strobe signal

SET YC1D
ON
External search finished signal
XC1D
MOV R500 D108 Retrieve external search status

Turn external search strobe signal

RST YC1D
OFF

II - 291
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.4 PLC Axis Control

This function allows an independent axis to be controlled with commands from the user PLC, separately from the NC
control axis.

10.4.1 Specifications

Item Details
Number of control axes Max. :: 6 axes
Simultaneous control The PLC control axis is controlled independently of the NC control axis. Simultaneous
axes start of multiple PLC axes is possible.
Least command increment (Note 1)
0.001mm (0.0001 inch)
Command unit 0.0001mm (0.00001 inch)
0.00001mm (0.000001 inch)
0.000001mm (0.0000001 inch)
0 to 1000000 mm/min (0 to 100000 inch/min)
Feedrate
(The speed is fixed regardless of the unit system.)
Incremental value commands from the current position.
Movement commands Absolute value commands of the machine coordinate system.
0 to ±99999999 (Note 1)
Rapid traverse, cutting feed
Jog feed (+), (-)
Operation modes
Reference position return feed (+), (-)
Handle feed
Backlash compensation Provided
Stroke end Provided
Soft limit Provided
Provided
Absolute value commands......Rotation amount within one rotation
Rotation axis commands 　　　　　　　　　　　　(Rotates the remainder divided by rotational axis division
count.)
Incremental commands...........Rotates the commanded rotation amount.
Not provided
Inch/mm changeover
Command to match the feedback unit.
Position detector Encoder (absolute position detection also possible)

(Note 1) The following units are used for the input/output data in PLC axis control according to the parameter "#1005
plcunit" setting.

Setting value Unit

B 0.001mm (0.0001inch)
C 0.0001mm (0.00001inch)
D 0.00001mm (0.000001inch)
E 0.000001mm (0.0000001inch)

The screen display changes as follows according to the parameter "#1003 iunit" setting.

Setting value Unit Display

B 0.001mm (0.0001inch) Displays up to three digits after the decimal point
C 0.0001mm (0.00001inch) Displays up to four digits after the decimal point
D 0.00001mm (0.000001inch) Displays up to five digits after the decimal point
E 0.000001mm (0.0000001inch) Displays up to six digits after the decimal point

(Note 2) The unit system is split into the display (iunit) and control data (plcunit), so when confirming the effective value
of the PLC axis control data on the screen, set the display unit (iunit) to the same unit as the control data unit
(plcunit).

II - 292
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.4 PLC Axis Control

Other restrictions
(1) There is no mirror image, external deceleration or machine lock function.
(2) Rapid traverse override, cutting override and dry run control are not possible.
(3) Automatic operation start, automatic operation stop, reset and interlock NC controls are invalid for PLC control
axes.
The same control can be realized using an interface dedicated for PLC axis control.
(4) There is no dedicated emergency stop. The emergency stop is valid in the same manner as the NC control
axis.

10.4.2 Detailed Explanation

The flow of the process during PLC axis control execution is shown below.
(1) The user PLC sets the control data in the R register.
(2) The user PLC sets the PLC axis control information address in the R register.
(3) The user PLC turns the PLC axis control valid signal ON.
(4) The NC executes PLC axis control based on the control data.
During PLC axis control, the status, alarm details, machine position and remaining distance are set in the R register.

Flow of PLC axic control for 1st PLC axis in single mode

NC User PLC

Set PLC axis control

R440 R1n
information address
(2)

R1n+0 (Not used) Set control data (1)

R1n+1 Status

R1n+2 Alarm details

R1n+3 Control signal

R1n+4 (Not used) (Note)

R1n+5 Operation mode

R1n+6
Feed rate
R1n+7

R1n+8
Movement data
R1n+9

R1n+10
Machine position
R1n+11

R1n+12
Remaining distance
R1n+13

(4) Execution of PLC axis PLC axis control (3)

control and setting of valid signal ON
status during process, etc.㩷

(Note) Refer to "(4) Axis specification" in "Details of PLC Axis Control Information Data" for the explanation of
unused register No. R1n+4.

II - 293
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.4.3 PLC Interface

The PLC and NC interface is carried out by turning ON the PLC axis control valid signal or the PLC axis control buffering
mode valid signal after the PLC sets the control information data in the R register.
The operation is executed in single mode if the PLC axis control valid signal is ON, executed in buffering mode if the PLC
axis control buffering mode valid signal is ON.
Single mode and buffering mode cannot be operated simultaneously. An alarm (command mode overlap) occurs when
the valid signal of either mode is turned ON while the other mode is operating. Note that the alarm does not cancel the
operation in the first active mode.

Refer to "Single Mode" and "Buffering Mode" for the details of each mode. For the details of alarms, refer to "(2) Alarm
Details" in "Details of PLC Axis Control Information Data".

(1) PLC axis control valid signal

The PLC axis control process is executed in single mode with the control information data while the PLC axis
control valid signal is ON.
The reset state is activated when the PLC axis control valid signal is turned OFF. In this case, the axis control is
reset only once; when the ON signal is turned OFF.

PLC axis No.

Signal name
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis
PLC axis control valid Y770 Y771 Y772 Y773 Y774 Y775

(2) PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal

When the PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal is ON, the PLC axis control is executed upon the control
information data in buffering mode.
If the PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal is turned OFF, the axis control is reset. In this case, the axis
control is reset only once; when the ON signal is turned OFF.

Signal name Common for all axes

PLC axis control
Y723
buffering mode valid

(3) PLC axis control information address

The PLC axis control information address stores head R registers of the control information for each PLC axis.

PLC axis No.

Signal name
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis
PLC axis control
R440 R441 R442 R443 R444 R445
information address

(Note 1) The following R registers can be used.

R8300 to R9799 (Area backed up by battery)
R9800 to R9899 (Area not backed up by battery)
R18300 to R19799 (Area backed up by battery) (*1)
R19800 to R19899 (Area not backed up by battery) (*1)
R28300 to R29799 (Area backed up by battery) (*1)
R29800 to R29899 (Area not backed up by battery) (*1)
(*1) Not available with M700 series
(Note 2) If the setting value of R register is out of range or odd number, the target PLC axis turns invalid.
(Note 3) In the following explanations, the R register Nos. stored in the PLC axis control information address
are indicated as R1n for the 1st axis, R2n for the 2nd axis, R3n for the 3rd axis, and R4n for the 4th axis,
R5n for the 5th axis, R6n for the 6th axis.

II - 294
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.4 PLC Axis Control

(4) PLC axis control buffering mode information address

The PLC axis control buffering mode information address stores head R registers of the buffering mode control
information for each PLC axis. (Note 1)

Signal name Common for all axes

PLC axis control buffering
R448
mode information address

(Note 1) The following R registers can be used.

R8300 to R9799 (Area backed up by battery)
R9800 to R9899 (Area not backed up by battery)
R18300 to R19799 (Area backed up by battery) (*1)
R19800 to R19899 (Area not backed up by battery) (*1)
R28300 to R29799 (Area backed up by battery) (*1)
R29800 to R29899 (Area not backed up by battery) (*1)
(*1) Not available with M700 series
(Note 2) If the setting value of R register is out of range or odd number, the target PLC axis turns invalid.
(Note 3) In the following explanations, the R register Nos. stored in the PLC axis control buffering mode
information address are indicated with Rn. The PLC axis control information data arrangement
follows the arrangement of "R1n" and others, which is referred in "(3) PLC axis control information
address".

(5) PLC axis control information data

The control information data is stored in the R register value indicated by the PLC axis control information address
and the subsequent register values before starting the PLC axis control process.
The control information data arrangement is shown below.

PLC axis No.

Signal name
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis
(Not used) R1n+0 R2n+0 R3n+0 R4n+0 R5n+0 R6n+0
Status R1n+1 R2n+1 R3n+1 R4n+1 R5n+1 R6n+1
Alarm details R1n+2 R2n+2 R3n+2 R4n+2 R5n+2 R6n+2
Control signal R1n+3 R2n+3 R3n+3 R4n+3 R5n+3 R6n+3
Axis specification (Note) R1n+4 R2n+4 R3n+4 R4n+4 R5n+4 R6n+4
Operation mode R1n+5 R2n+5 R3n+5 R4n+5 R5n+5 R6n+5
R1n+6 R2n+6 R3n+6 R4n+6 R5n+6 R6n+6
Feedrate
R1n+7 R2n+7 R3n+7 R4n+7 R5n+7 R6n+7
R1n+8 R2n+8 R3n+8 R4n+8 R5n+8 R6n+8
Movement data
R1n+9 R2n+9 R3n+9 R4n+9 R5n+9 R6n+9
R1n+10 R2n+10 R3n+10 R4n+10 R5n+10 R6n+10
Machine position
R1n+11 R2n+11 R3n+11 R4n+11 R5n+11 R6n+11
R1n+12 R2n+12 R3n+12 R4n+12 R5n+12 R6n+12
Remaining distance
R1n+13 R2n+13 R3n+13 R4n+13 R5n+13 R6n+13

(Note) Axis specification is valid only for buffering mode.

II - 295
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.4.4 Details of PLC Axis Control Information Data

(1) Status
The status is set by the NC to indicate the execution status of this function instruction and the status of the axis
being controlled.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R1n + 1
(1st axis)

bit0:busy Command processing bit8:oper Option error

1:den Axis movement completed 9:
2:move Axis moving A:
3:SA Servo ready B:
4:svon Servo ON C:
5:ZP Reference position reached D:
6:IMP In in-position E:ALM2 Axis in control alarm
7:WAIT Axis movement wait F:ALM1 Control information datadesignation alarm
bit 0: busy Command processing
This turns ON when the command is being processed.
The next command is not received while this bit is ON.
The next command to be issued is received while this bit is OFF.
bit 1: den Axis movement completed
This bit turns ON when the initialization and commanded movement are completed.
This bit stays OFF during movement, even when an interlock is applied.
This bit turns ON at reset or servo OFF, or when PLC axis control valid is "0".
bit 2: move Axis moving
This bit turns ON when the machine is moving, and turns OFF when the machine is stopped.
bit 3: SA Servo ready
This bit turns ON when the servo is ready.
It turns OFF during emergency stops and servo alarms.
bit 4: svon Servo ON
This bit turns OFF when a servo OFF signal is output.
It also turns OFF during emergency stops and servo alarms.
Machine movement is possible when this signal is ON.
bit5: ZP Reference position reached
This bit turns ON when the reference position is reached after completion of a reference position return.
It turns OFF when the machine moves.
bit 6: IMP In in-position
This bit turns ON when the PLC axis is in the in-position state, and turns OFF when not in the in-position state.
bit7: WAIT Axis movement wait
This bit turns ON in the buffering mode when the axis movement of the previous block has been completed,
and the machine is in a WAIT status. It turns OFF when the previous block movement is completed and the
movement
of the next block begins.
bit 8: oper Option error
This bit turns ON when an attempt is made to execute PLC axis control when there is no PLC axis control
option.

II - 296
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.4 PLC Axis Control

bit E: ALM2 Axis in control alarm

This bit turns ON when an alarm occurs (such as a servo alarm) during execution of axis control. Axis control
cannot be executed while this bit is ON.
After the cause of the alarm has been removed, turn the bit OFF by outputting a reset signal, setting PLC axis
control valid signal to 0, or turning the power OFF then ON again.
(Note) When servo alarm occurs, the same alarms appear in the screen as for NC control axes. Set the
PLC 1st axis to "1", and the PLC 2nd axis to "2".
Example: When a servo alarm occurs for the PLC 1st axis

S03 Servo alarm 52 1

PLC axis

bit F: ALM:1 Control information data designation alarm

This bit turns ON when the designated details of the control information data are illegal. When an alarm occurs
for the simultaneous operation of buffering mode and single mode, the mode designated later is not executed
and the mode designated first continues processing.
PLC axis control is not executed when any other alarm occurs. Turn the bit OFF by correcting the data,
outputting a reset signal, or setting PLC axis control valid signal to 0.
(Note) The status of the PLC axis, to which the PLC axis control valid signal is ON, is automatically
updated.

(2) Alarm details

The alarm Nos. of status ALM1 and ALM2 are set.

F 8 7 0

R1n+2 ALM1Alam No. ALM2Alam No.

(1st axis)

The details of each alarm No. are shown below.

ALM1 (Control information data designation alarm)

Alarm No. Details

Control signal illegal
01
(A signal other than a registered control signal has been commanded.)
02 Axis No. illegal
03 Operation mode illegal (0 to 6)
Movement data range exceeded
04
-99999999 to +99999999
05
06
07
Reference position return not complete (absolute value command not
10
possible)
11
12 Command modes overlap (Note 1)

II - 297
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

ALM2 (Axis in control alarm)

Alarm No. Details

Servo alarm (Alarm No. is displayed in the PLC axis monitor screen.
0
Refer to the Drive Unit Maintenance Manual for details.)
1 Z-phase not passed
2 Soft limit (+)
3 Soft limit (-)
4 H/W OT(+)
5 H/W OT(-)

(Note 1) This alarm occurs before the simultaneous operation of single mode and buffering mode.
(Note 2) The alarm details of the PLC axis, to which the PLC axis control valid signal is ON, are automatically
updated.

(3) Control Signals (PLC axis control information data)

Control signals such as start, interlock, reset, axis removal and axis removal 2 are designated for the PLC axis.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R1n+3
(1st axis)

bit0: Start bit8: Absolute value command

1: Interlock 9:
2: Reset A:
3: Servo OFF B:
4: Axis removal C:
5: Axis removal 2 D:
6: E:
7: F:

bit 0: Start
Starting begins at the rising edge (OFF -> ON) of the start signal, based on the control information data.
The axis does not move during interlock, servo OFF, axis removal and axis removal 2.
Movement starts after interlock, servo OFF, axis removal and axis removal 2 are canceled.
Start is invalid during resetting.
bit 1: Interlock
The moving PLC axis executes a deceleration stop when the interlock signal turns ON.
The stopped PLC axis will resume movement when the interlock signal turns OFF (is canceled).
bit 2: Reset
The PLC axis is reset when the reset signal turns ON.
Moving PLC axes will execute a deceleration stop.
Commands and controls are invalid during resetting.
If the reset signal turns ON during an alarm occurrence, the alarm will be cleared.
bit 3: Servo OFF
The PLC axis will execute a deceleration stop and its servo will turn OFF when the servo OFF signal turns ON.
Whether the PLC axis movement is compensated during servo OFF can be selected in the basic specification
parameter "#1064 svof".
A servo ON status will result when the power is turned ON.

II - 298
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.4 PLC Axis Control

bit4: Axis removal

The axis will execute a deceleration stop, and a servo OFF status will result, when the axis removal signal
turns ON.
A servo ON status will result and the stopped PLC axis will resume movement when the axis removal signal
turns OFF (is canceled).
Axis removal is validated when either this signal or machining parameter and axis parameter "#8201 Axis
Removal" is validated.
The reference position return will become incomplete when the axis is removed. Therefore, a dog-type
reference position return must be completed again when starting with an absolute value command.
bit 5: Axis removal 2
The axis will execute a deceleration stop, and a servo OFF/ready OFF status will result, when the axis removal
2 signal turns ON.
A servo ON/ready ON status will result for the stopped PLC axis when the axis removal 2 signal turns OFF (is
canceled).A restart must be executed to start the movement again.
Position control cannot be carried out while the axis removal 2 signal is ON. However, position detection is
possible so the position will not be lost.
bit 8: Absolute value command
Turn this bit ON when the movement data is commanded in absolute values.
When this bit is OFF, the commands will be processed as incremental value commands.

(4) Axis specification

PLC axis No. is designated.

㪩㪈㫅㪂㪋㩷 Axis specification

(1st axis) 

0: 1st axis
1: 2nd axis
2: 3rd axis
3: 4th axis
4: 5th axis
5: 6th axis
Only buffering mode allows the axis specification upon this data.
Single mode, which provides the PLC axis control valid signal for each axis, does not allow the axis
specification upon this data.

(5) Operation Mode

The operation mode for the PLC axis is designated.
For example, in the handle mode, R1n+5=6 (DATA) is set.


㪩㪈㫅㪂㪌㩷 Operation mode
(1st axis)㩷

(Numeric value data)

0: Rapid traverse (G0)
1: Cutting feed (G1)
2: Jog feed (+)
3: Jog feed (-)
4: Reference position return (+)
5: Reference position return (-)
6: Handle feed
The axis movement will not be affected by changing the operation mode, even while the axis is moving.
The new operation mode is validated at the next start.

II - 299
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

(6) Feedrate
When the operation mode is cutting feed or jog feed (operation mode, register = 1 to 3), the PLC axis feedrate is
designated with a binary code.

㪩㪈㫅㪂㪍㩷
Feedrate
㪩㪈㫅㪂㪎㩷
㩷
(1st axis)

Designation value : 1 to 1000000 mm/min. (0.1 to 100000 inch/min.)

(Note 1) The speed unit is fixed regardless of the unit system set with the command unit.
(Note 2) The feedrate designated in the parameters is used for the rapid traverse mode and reference
position return mode.
(Note 3) The feedrate can be changed during axis movement. In that case, change using a direct feedrate
data (R1n + 6, 7) is possible.

(7) Movement Data

When the operation mode is rapid traverse or cutting feed, the movement data is designated with a binary code.

㪩㪈㫅㪂㪏㩷
Movement data
㪩㪈㫅㪂㪐㩷
㩷
(1st axis)

Designation value : 0 to 99999999

(Note 1) Refer to the explanations in "Specifications" "#1003 iunit" and "#1005 plcunit" for details on the unit.
(Note 2) The movement data is classified as follows by the absolute value command flag (bit 8) of the
command signal.
Absolute value command flag = 0: Incremental value from the current position
Absolute value command flag = 1: Absolute value of the machine coordinate system
(Note 3) If the movement amount is changed during axis movement, the new movement amount will be
validated at the next start.

(8) Machine Position

The machine position output to the machine system is expressed. The machine position becomes the
Rfp (reference position) when the reference position is reached.


㪩㪈㫅㪂㪈㪇㩷
Machine position (input unit)
㪩㪈㫅㪂㪈㪈㩷
㩷
(1st axis)

(Note 1) Refer to the explanations in "Specifications" "#1003 iunit" and "#1005 plcunit" for details on the unit.
(Note 2) The machine position of the PLC axis, to which the PLC axis control valid signal is ON, is
automatically updated.

II - 300
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.4 PLC Axis Control

(9) Remaining Distance

The remaining distance of the movement data output to the machine system is expressed.


㪩㪈㫅㪂㪈㪉㩷
Remaining distance (input unit)
㪩㪈㫅㪂㪈㪊㩷
㩷
(1st axis)

(Note 1) Refer to the explanations in "Specifications" "#1003 iunit" and "#1005 plcunit" for details on the unit.
(Note 2) The remaining distance of the PLC axis, to which the PLC axis control valid signal is ON, is
automatically updated.

10.4.5 Timing Chart

(1) For rapid traverse and cutting feed mode

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

Speed

(2) For jog feed mode

PLC axis control
valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

Speed

(Note) The axis moves by jog feed only during start ON.

II - 301
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

(3) For reference position return feed mode

(a) Dog-type reference position return

PLC axis control

valid signal
Start

busy
den

move

ZP

Speed (G1 mode)

(Note 1) The axis moves by reference position return feed only during start ON. Turn the start OFF after
confirming that the reference position has been reached.
(Note 2) The first reference position return after the power is turned ON is always dog-type. All returns after that
are high-speed reference position returns.

(b) High-speed reference position return

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

ZP

Speed
(G1 mode)

II - 302
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.4 PLC Axis Control

(4) For handle feed mode

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

Handle

Speed

(Note) Handle feed is possible only during start ON.

(5) When the interlock signal is ON (= 1)

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

Interlock

busy
den

move

Speed

II - 303
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

(6) When the reset signal is ON (= 1)

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

Reset

busy
den

move

Speed

(7) When the servo OFF signal is ON (= 1)

PLC axis control

valid signal

Start

Servo OFF

busy
den

move
svon

Speed

II - 304
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.4 PLC Axis Control

(8) When the PLC axis control valid signal is OFF (= 0)

PLC axis control
valid signal

Start

busy
den

move

Speed

10.4.6 Reference Position Return Near Point Detection

Set the near point dog signal of the PLC axis reference position return for the following devices in the PLC.

Device No. Signal name

Y718 *PCD1 PLC axis near point detect 1st axis
Y719 *PCD2 PLC axis near point detect 2nd axis
Y71A *PCD3 PLC axis near point detect 3rd axis
Y71B *PCD4 PLC axis near point detect 4th axis
Y71C *PCD5 PLC axis near point detect 5th axis
Y71D *PCD6 PLC axis near point detect 6th axis

(Note) The responsiveness when the dog signal is set in PLC middle-speed processing is worse than when set
in PLC high-speed processing.

10.4.7 Handle Feed Axis Selection

The axis is designated for the following devices when handle feed is carried out with a PLC axis.

Device No. Signal name

Y720 HS1P PLC axis 1st handle valid
Y721 HS2P PLC axis 2nd handle valid
Y722 HS3P PLC axis 3rd handle valid

When Y720, Y721, Y722 are ON, each handle changes to PLC axis dedication.
YC40 to YC44, YC47, YC48 to YC4C, YC4F, YC50 to YC54 and YC57 used with the normal control device are
used to select each handle axis.
PLC axes are counted as PLC such as first axis and second axis. Therefore, if you will operate the first handle
in the first axis of PLC, turn ON Y720, YC40 to YC44 and YC47.

(Note) The handle feed magnification is also used for NC control axes.

II - 305
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.4.8 Single Mode

In the single mode, the command to PLC axis (control information data) is set in one block. Only one command is used
for the PLC axis control.

10.4.9 Buffering Mode

In the buffering mode, the PLC axis command (control information data) is commanded to several blocks. This enables
smooth changeover of commands.
Axis specifications can be set to each control information data. Up to three axes can be controlled in sequence. (Refer to
"G1 → G1 → G0 → G1 (two axes)" in "(2)Timing Chart".)

(1) Control information data

R1n+

Control
information
data A

The control data for the buffering mode is set

in three blocks.
R1n+1 The contents of each control information data
have the same configuration as the normal
Control control information data.
information When executing, the axis is moved in the
data B order that each control information is started.
When the movement is completed, the
movement for the next block starts.
(If the start signals are turned ON
simultaneously, the blocks are executed in the
R1n+2 order of A, B and C.)

Control
information
data C

(Note) Only one set of the buffering mode can be commanded. If two or more sets are commanded
simultaneously, the sets commanded later will cause an alarm.

II - 306
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.4 PLC Axis Control

(2) Timing chart

G1 → G1 → G0 → G1 (same axis)

PLC axis control

valid signal
Start

busy

A den

move

wait

Start

busy

B den

move

wait

Start

busy

C den

move

wait

Speed

(Note) Change and start the data after the busy signal turns OFF.
Starting while the busy signal is ON will be ignored.

II - 307
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

G1 → G1 → G0 → G1 (two axes)

PLC axis control

valid signal

Axis
number 0 1

Start

busy
A
den

move

wait

Axis
number 0

Start

busy
B
den

move

wait

Axis
number 1

Start

busy
C
den

move

wait

1st axis speed

2nd axis speed

II - 308
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.4 PLC Axis Control

10.4.10 PLC Axis Monitor

The PLC axis operation status can be confirmed by checking the PLC section on the servo monitor.

10.4.11 Absolute Position Detection

The absolute position of the PLC axis can be detected in the same manner as the NC control axis.
The initial setting operations are the same as the NC control axis. However, the following restrictions apply to
the absolute position detection with the PLC axis.
(1) Automatic initialization is not possible.
(2) The verify function cannot be used.
(3) The near zero-point signal cannot be output.

10.4.12 Device Random Assignment

The device random assignment can be performed on PLC axis similar to NC control axis.
Select the validity of the device random assignment of the PLC axis with the parameter "#1246 set18/bit7".
#1246 set18/bit7
ON OFF
ON NC axis random device assignment valid
PLC axis random device assignment PLC axis random device assignment
#1226 aux10/bit5
OFF valid invalid
NC axis random device assignment invalid

When this function is valid, the device which is randomly allocated becomes invalid by inputting the "PLC axis near-point
dog ignored" (R279) or "PLC axis OT ignored" (R255) signal.
(By turning the bit ON of the corresponding axis, the device which is randomly allocated to the axis will be ignored.)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit0 : 1st axis

bit1 : 2nd axis
: :
bit5 : 6th axis

When the parameters "#2073" to "#2075" are valid, do not set the same device number.
(When the device random assignment is valid for the NC control axis, do not also set the the device No. same as the
parameter No. of the NC control axis ("#2073" to "#2075")). If the same device number exists, an emergency stop
occurs.

II - 309
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.4.13 Usage Example

The following shows an example of the PLC axis control ladder for the 1st PLC axis in single mode.

PLC axis control start signal

M8000
PLS M8001 PLC axis control start pulse

PLC axis control start pulse

M8001

MOV K1 R9803 Set PLC axis control signal

MOV D102 R9805 Set PLC axis control operation mode

DMOV K60000 R9806 Set PLC axis control feedrate

DMOV D103 R9808 Set PLC axis control movement data

MOV K9800 R440 Set PLC axis control information address

SET Y770 Turn PLC axis control valid signal ON

PLC axis control valid signal

Y770
MOV R9801 K4M8008 Retrieve status from PLC axis control information
busy(bit0)
M8008

RST Y770 Turn PLC axis control valid signal OFF

MOV K0 R9803 Reset PLC axis control signal

RST M8000 Turn PLC axis control start signal OFF

Control data Setting value

Control signal Start
Operation mode D102 value
Feedrate 60mm/min
Movement data D103 value (Value multiplied by plcunit unit.)

II - 310
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.5 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation

10.5 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation

External machine coordinate system compensation is executed by setting compensation data (absolute amount) in the
PLC file register (R) for each axis.
Thus, the compensation timing is when PLC rewrites file register (R) compensation data. Necessary condition, timing,
etc., are set by user PLC.
The interface between user PLC and CNC is shown below.

File register Details File register Details

R5700,5701 $1 compensation data 1st axis R5716,5717 $2 compensation data 1st axis
$2 compensation data 2nd
R5702,5703 $1 compensation data 2nd axis R5718,5719
axis
R5704,5705 $1 compensation data 3rd axis R5720,5721 ―
R5706,5707 $1 compensation data 4th axis R5722,5723 ―
R5708,5709 ― R5724,5725 ―
R5710,5711 ― R5726,5727 ―
R5712,5713 ― R5728,5729 ―
R5714,5715 ― R5730,5731 ―
(Note)File resisters for $1 are used for models with no part systems.

Data in file registers (R5700 to R5731) is not backed up. If it must be backed up, use back-up file registers (R8300 to
R9799).
(Note)The maximum delay to compensation is (one user PLC scan + 15ms). However, smoothing time constant and
servo follow delay are not contained.

II - 311
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.6 Alarm Message Display

The details of the alarms which occur during the sequence (user PLC) process can be displayed on the setting and
display unit.
There are two types of alarm message, which can be selected with a parameter (described later).

Format Alarm message

Max. number of
1024 messages
messages
Max. data length 46 bytes per message
Number of
4 messages
Display messages
F type / R type
Interface
(classification No. designated)
Available language 8 languages
Store method User PLC attached data

10.6.1 Interface
The alarm message display interface is available in the two types: F type in which temporary memory F is used for
message display request and R type in which file register (R) is used for message display request. Either type is selected
by using a parameter.

(1)F type interface

This interface applies to 1024 points of temporary memory F0 to F1023.
If temporary memory F is used as the alarm interface, do not use it for another purpose.

1 F0
0 F1 0th message of message table is displayed (dn1).
1 F2 2nd message of message table is displayed (dn2).
1 F3 3rd message of message table is displayed (dn3).
0 F4 5th message of message table is displayed (dn4).
1 F5

1 F1023

The highest priority is assigned to the F0 signal. The message corresponding to Fn set to "1" is fetched from the
message table and displayed in order starting at F0. If no messages are prepared or Fm without prepared message
is set to "1", the message "USER PLC ERROR m" is displayed.

II - 312
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.6 Alarm Message Display

(2)R type interface

This interface applies to file registers R2556 to R2559. The numeric value (binary) contained in each of the R
registers indicates the position of the message to be displayed in the message table.
The message is cleared by setting the R register to 0.

Message processing module

1 R2556 1st message of message table is displayed (dn1).

0 R2557 20th message of message table is displayed (dn2)
20 R2558 5th message of message table is displayed (dn3)
5 R2559

The messages are displayed starting at the message corresponding to R2556 from top to bottom.
Since message display is cleared by setting the R register to 0, No. 0 in the table message cannot be used in the R
type.
If m without prepared message is set in the R register, the message "USER PLC ERROR m" is displayed.

(3)Alarm classification display (Only for Alarm message type)

Classification No. can be displayed following the message to be displayed regardless of the F or R type. (dn1 to dn4
in the figure of (1) and (2))
For example, one typical alarm message is prepared and classification No. can be used to indicate the alarm
source or cause.
(Example)When spindle alarm occurs, the message "SPINDLE ALARM" is displayed and the alarm source or
cause is indicated by the classification No.

SPINDLE ALARM 5 (Note 2)

This varies depending on the

alarm cause or source.

For the classification No., the contents of each data register specified in alarm message preparation are displayed.
Data register D0 cannot be specified.

(Note 2)The display of the classification No. by cause is updated when an alarm message display changes. It is not
updated if only the contents (dn1 to dn4) of the specified data register (Dn1 to Dn4) change. If the contents of
the specified data register are 0, no classification Nos. are displayed.

II - 313
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.6.2 Screen Display

Screen display depends on the message type as described below.
(1)Alarm message type
Message length is up to 46 characters.
Alarm messages corresponding to four classification Nos. can be displayed.

Example of setting and display unit display

A maximum of messages
can be displayed at a time

Maximum of 46 classificatin No.

characters (specified data register contents)

10.6.3 Message Creation

(1)Alarm message type
Create messages by using PLC development software (GX Developer).
According to the description format, set the number of characters for one message and the number of messages to
be prepared, then enter message data.
The maximum length of an alarm message is 46 characters.
A maximum of 1024 alarm messages can be prepared. For details, refer to the section "PERIPHERAL
DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT" - "PLC Message Development" in this manual.

10.6.4 Parameters
(1)PLC alarm message selection parameter
[Bit selection parameter screen]

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

# (6450) Data ( 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0)

Use No. 6450. 0: PLC alarm message display in user PLC

II - 314
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.6 Alarm Message Display

The operation is as the following depending on the bit state of the bit selection #6450.
Bit 6 = 0
The PLC alarm message in the user PLC is displayed as usual.
Bit 6 = 1
Do not set this value, which clears the display of PLC alarm message.

(2)Language selection parameter

There are two methods for the message data language selection. Method 2 (Method linked with language selection
on the setting and display screen) is recommended although both methods are available.
(Method 1) Specify with 3 bits of bit selection parameter #6453 bit 0 to 2. (Language selection method using PLC
alone)
(Method 2) Specify with display language selection parameter (Base specifications parameter #1043) (Method
linked with language selection on the setting and display screen)
Each method has a different storage method. Refer to "PEROHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT: Common
Items: File Name" for details.
The parameter specifications where method 1 (Language selection method using PLC alone) is applied is shown
below.

[Bit selection parameter screen]

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

# (6453) Data ( 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0)

Use No. 6453. Message language selection code

Bit
No Notes
2 1 0
0 0 0 The language 1 is displayed.
0 0 1 The language 2 is displayed.
0 1 0 The language 3 is displayed.
0 1 1 The language 4 is displayed.
#6453
1 0 0 The language 5 is displayed.
1 0 1 The language 6 is displayed.
1 1 0 The language 7 is displayed.
1 1 1 The language 8 is displayed.

(3)F or R type selection parameter

Set the parameter on the bit selection screen of PLC parameter (setup para).

[Bit selection parameter screen]

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

# (6450) Data ( 0 0 0 0 0 0 * 1)
0: Alarm message invalid.
1: Alarm message valid.
Use No. 6450.
0: F type interface
1: R type interface

[Reference] #6450 corresponds to the high-order byte of the file register R7824.

II - 315
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.7 Operator Message Display

When a condition to inform the operator of a message occurs, an operator message can be displayed independently of
an alarm message.
A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed for the operator message on the alarm diagnosis screen. One operator
message can be displayed at a time.

10.7.1 Interface
An operator message is displayed by setting the No. of the operator message table to be displayed in file register R2560.
It is cleared by setting R2560 to 0. Thus, No. 0 of the operator message table cannot be displayed.

Display example

Message processing module

n R2560

Message table NNN N dn

0 AAA.........A
1 BBB.........B Max. of 60 characters class number
2 CCC........ C
:
: contenrs of specified data register.
n NNN........N (Data register D0 cannot be used.)
n+1 ABC........ Z
n+2 A12......... B

Max. of 60 characters

As with alarm messages, the contents of the data register specified for the class No. display in operator message
preparation are also displayed when creating operator message.
(Note 1)The class No. display is updated when the contents of file register R2560 change. It is not updated if only
the contents of the specified data register (Dn) change.
To change the class No. display only, the contents of R2560 must be cleared to 0. If the contents of the
specified data register are 0, no class Nos. are displayed.

II - 316
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.7 Operator Message Display

10.7.2 Operator Message Preparation

Create messages by using PLC development software (GX Developer).
According to the description format, set the number of characters for one message and the number of messages to be
prepared, then prepare message data.
The maximum length of an operator message is 60 characters. A maximum of 512 operator messages can be prepared.
However, the number of operator messages may be limited depending on the available memory capacity.
For details, refer to the section "PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT" - "PLC Message Development" in this
manual.

10.7.3 Operator Message Display Validity Parameter

Set the parameter on the bit selection screen of PLC parameter (setup para).
[Bit selection parameter screen]

76543210 bit
#(6450) Data (00000000)

0 : Operator message display invalid.

Use No. 6450 1 : Operator message display valid.

[Reference] #6450 corresponds to the high-order byte of file register R2924.

II - 317
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.8 PLC Switches

Similar function to machine operation switches can be provided by using the controller setting and display unit. The
switches can be turned ON and OFF from the PLC Switch screen or the user PLC. The switch names can be given as
desired. 32 points of switches (#1 to #32) are regularly provided. 64 points of switches (#1 to #64) are optionally
provided.

10.8.1 Explanation of Screen

The screen is explained below.

Corresponding to Corresponding to Y680

Y680, Y6C0

For the switch name, a

string of up to 14
characters (2-byte code
character requires
Switch state 2-character space) can be
ON: *, OFF: Nothing displayed.

Corresponding to Y68F, Y6CF

Corresponding to Y68F

Switch No. movement cursor

Switch ON/OFF menu

(Note) When 64 points are provided, switches #32 to #64 are displayed by pressing the

page changeover key PAGE

II - 318
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.8 PLC Switches

10.8.2 Explanation of Operation

To turn ON or OFF a switch, press the "setting valid" key, move to arbitrary No. with the cursor of #No., then press "ON"
or "OFF" menu key.
Depending on the state of the switch, its input device X is turned ON or OFF and accordingly the switch mark indicates
the ON or OFF state.

To turn block start interlock ON

Move to "#4" with the

cursor keys

Press the switch ON menu

key.

To display the switch validity state, etc., the switch name can be highlighted. To do this, turn ON or OFF output device Y
corresponding to the switch name.
Reversing signal Y can reverse the switch ON/OFF states. When reversing signal Y is activated, the ON/OFF state of the
corresponding switch and device X is reversed.
The corresponding table of the switch No., input device X, highlight output device Y, and reversing signal Y is listed
below:

Corresponding device Corresponding device Corresponding device Corresponding device

Switc Switc Switc Switc
h No. Input X Output Reverse h No. Input X Output Reverse h No. Input X Output Reverse h No. Input X Output Reverse
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
#1 X680 Y680 Y6C0 #17 X690 Y690 Y6D0 #33 X6A0 Y6A0 Y6E0 #49 X6B0 Y6B0 Y6F0
#2 X681 Y681 Y6C1 #18 X691 Y691 Y6D1 #34 X6A1 Y6A1 Y6E1 #50 X6B1 Y6B1 Y6F1
#3 X682 Y682 Y6C2 #19 X692 Y692 Y6D2 #35 X6A2 Y6A2 Y6E2 #51 X6B2 Y6B2 Y6F2
#4 X683 Y683 Y6C3 #20 X693 Y693 Y6D3 #36 X6A3 Y6A3 Y6E3 #52 X6B3 Y6B3 Y6F3
#5 X684 Y684 Y6C4 #21 X694 Y694 Y6D4 #37 X6A4 Y6A4 Y6E4 #53 X6B4 Y6B4 Y6F4
#6 X685 Y685 Y6C5 #22 X695 Y695 Y6D5 #38 X6A5 Y6A5 Y6E5 #54 X6B5 Y6B5 Y6F5
#7 X686 Y686 Y6C6 #23 X696 Y696 Y6D6 #39 X6A6 Y6A6 Y6E6 #55 X6B6 Y6B6 Y6F6
#8 X687 Y687 Y6C7 #24 X697 Y697 Y6D7 #40 X6A7 Y6A7 Y6E7 #56 X6B7 Y6B7 Y6F7
#9 X688 Y688 Y6C8 #25 X698 Y698 Y6D8 #41 X6A8 Y6A8 Y6E8 #57 X6B8 Y6B8 Y6F8
#10 X689 Y689 Y6C9 #26 X699 Y699 Y6D9 #42 X6A9 Y6A9 Y6E9 #58 X6B9 Y6B9 Y6F9
#11 X68A Y68A Y6CA #27 X69A Y69A Y6DA #43 X6AA Y6AA Y6EA #59 X6BA Y6BA Y6FA
#12 X68B Y68B Y6CB #28 X69B Y69B Y6DB #44 X6AB Y6AB Y6EB #60 X6BB Y6BB Y6FB
#13 X68C Y68C Y6CC #29 X69C Y69C Y6DC #45 X6AC Y6AC Y6EC #61 X6BC Y6BC Y6FC
#14 X68D Y68D Y6CD #30 X69D Y69D Y6DD #46 X6AD Y6AD Y6ED #62 X6BD Y6BD Y6FD
#15 X68E Y68E Y6CE #31 X69E Y69E Y6DE #47 X6AE Y6AE Y6EE #63 X6BE Y6BE Y6FE
#16 X68F Y68F Y6CF #32 X69F Y69F Y6DF #48 X6AF Y6AF Y6EF #64 X6BF Y6BF Y6FF

(Note 1)Input devices X hold the state even if power is turned OFF.
(Note 2) Switches #33 to #64 are available when 64 points of switches are provided.

II - 319
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.8.3 Signal Processing

Character
background color
changes.

Switch input signal Status display signal

X680 Y680
X680 1 Y680 1
X681 Y681
0 0
X681 Y681
X682 Y682
0 0
X682 Y682
X683 X9 Y683
1 1
X683 Y683
X8
• •

0
• •

Y684
Validity

External switch

・When setting is done on the PLC switch screen, the input device X corresponding to the specified switch No. is turned
ON or OFF to switch over the switch state.
・When reversing signal Y is turned ON from the user PLC, its corresponding input device X and the switch state are
reversed. Reversing signal Y is reset immediately after the CNC reverses the input device X and the switch state. It is
turned ON by one pulse (scan) only also in the user PLC. In either case, when output device Y is set to ON based on the
input device X state, the corresponding switch name is highlighted.

II - 320
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.8 PLC Switches

The following shows an example of operation of reversing signal Y from the user PLC.
(1)Two-point switch
(Example)When two opposite switches, chip conveyer manual and chip conveyer automatic, are provided;

X68 X68 Y68

E F E Chip conveyor manual

SET M1
X68E X68F M1 Y6CE
X68E reversing signal

RST M1

X68F Y68F
X68E Chip conveyor automatic

SET M2
X68E X68F M2 Y6CF
X68F reversing signal

RST M2
X68E X68F
RST M1

RST M2

Switch 15 ON Switch 16 ON Switch 15 ON

(a) Y68E, M1 turns ON when switch 15
(X68E) turns ON and switch 16 (X68F)
X68E (a) turns OFF. [Default state]
(c) (e)
(b)
(b) If switch 16 (X68F) is turned ON in state
(d)
X68F (a), Y68E turns OFF, Y6CE turns ON,
(g)
and M1 turns OFF.

Y68E (c) Y6CE has turned ON, so X68E is reversed

(OFF).

(d) Y6CE turns OFF, and Y68F and M2 turns

Y68F
ON from the X68E OFF and X68F ON
state.

M1
(e) If switch 15 (X68E) is turned ON in state
(d), Y68F turns OFF, Y6CF turns ON,
and M2 turns OFF.
M2
(f) (f) Y6CF has turned ON, so X68F is reversed
(OFF).
Y6CE
(g) Y6CF turns OFF, and Y68E and M1 turns
One scan width ON again from the X68F OFF and X68E
Y6CF ON state.

II - 321
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

(2)Three-point switch
(Example)When three opposite switches 17, 18, and 19 are provided;

X690 X691 X692 Y690

SET M3

X690 X691 X692 M3 Y6D0

X690 turns OFF when
Y6D0 turns ON.
X690 X691 X692
RST M3

X690 X691 X692 Y691

SET M4

X690 X691 X692 M4 Y6D1

X691 turns OFF when
Y6D1 turns ON.
X690 X691 X692
RST M4

X690 X691 X692 Y692

SET M5

X690 X691 X692 M5 Y6D2

X692 turns OFF when
X690 X691 X692
Y6D2 turns ON.
RST M5
X690 X691 X692
RST M3

RST M4

RST M5

II - 322
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.8 PLC Switches

(3) External switch and PLC switch

(Example 1)When an external optional stop switch (X14) is provided;

X14 X683
SET M8

RST M9
X14 X683
SET M9

RST M8

X14 X683 M8
PLS M6

RST M8
X14 X683 M9
PLS M7

RST M9

M6 Y6C3

M7

X683 Y683

Under sequence control in the above example, the switch marks on the PLC switch screen can be operated
from both external and PLC switches.

(Example 2)When an external switch (XC) that inhibits a PLC switch handle interrupt is provided;

X684 XC Y684

X684 XC
PLS M10

M10 Y6C4

Under sequence control in the above example, when the external switch (XC) is ON, the PLC switch for a
handle interrupt cannot be turned ON.

II - 323
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.8.4 Switch Name Preparation

Prepare PLC switch names by using PLC development software (GX Developer).
According to the description format, set the number of characters for one switch name and the number of points for
switches, then prepare switch name data. The maximum length of a switch name is 14 characters. A maximum of 64
switch names (#1 to #64) can be prepared regardless of whether 32 points or 64 points are provided for the switches.

(Note) With 32 points of switches, a maximum of 32 points are displayed on the PLC switch screen display and are
available for input signal reversing with the PLC switch reverse signals.

For details, refer to the section "PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT" - "PLC Message Development" in this
manual.

II - 324
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.9 Load Meter Display

10.9 Load Meter Display

The load meter can be displayed by setting a value in the designated file register (R) with the sequence program. The
spindle load, Z axis load, etc. characters and scale are created with comments in the PLC development software (GX
Developer) message function.
For details, refer to the section "PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT" - "PLC Message Development" in this
manual.
10.9.1 Interface
If Spindle/Standby is not displayed, two load meters are displayed using the four-line area for the spindle/standby and
load meter. If Spindle/Standby is displayed, one load meter is displayed using the two-line area for the load meter.
Maximum value: 30

SP Load Gray section

100%
Red section

Z Load
60%

R2520 value is displayed with Bar graph is displayed

five digits (binary 0 to 32767) according to R2521 value

R2522 value is displayed with Bar graph is displayed

five digits (binary 0 to 32767) according to R2523 value

R2521,R2523 F E DCOA 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
contents
(a)

(b)
(c)
The difference of (a) and (b) is the length
of the red section

(a) Length of entire bar graph (Maximum value: 30 (decimal))

Set the length of bar graph between 0 and 30.
(Ex. 1) When the maximum value of the data n which is read by PLC window is 150 %, set n/5.
(20 = 100 %, 30 = 150 %)
(Ex. 2) When the maximum value of the data n which is read by PLC window is 120%, set n/4.
(25 = 100 %, 30 = 120 %)
(Note) For R2523 (Z axis load), the load output is signed value.
If the sign is negative, convert it into positive. (Use NEG.)
(b) Length of gray section of bar graph
Set the length of gray section of bar graph between 0 and 30.
When setting the length, make consideration of the maximum value which is read by the PLC window
similar to bit0 to 7.
(Ex) When displaying in gray up to 50 % with similar condition as bit0 to 7 in (Ex. 1), set "10".
(c) Load meter display process valid
Load meter display process becomes valid by setting "1".

II - 325
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

Display example of setting and display unit

II - 326
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.9 Load Meter Display

When the detail of R377 is "0", the name of load meter is displayed by describing the following messages

Line Message Detail

Name (Max. 10 characters)
1 ;M,2,0,spindle load $1
(Not used)
2 ;M,2,0,
First Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
3 ;M,2,0,******%
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
4 ;M,2,0,
(Not used) For 1st part
Name (Max. 10 characters) system
5 ;M,2,0, Z-axis load $1
(Not used)
6 ;M,2,0,
Second Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
7 ;M,2,0,******%
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
8 ;M,2,0,
(Not used)
Name (Max. 10 characters)
9 ;M,2,0,spindle load $2
(Not used)
10 ;M,2,0,
First Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
11 ;M,2,0,******%
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
12 ;M,2,0,
(Not used) For 2nd part
Name (Max. 10 characters) system
13 ;M,2,0,Z-axis load $2
(Not used)
14 ;M,2,0,
Second Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
15 ;M,2,0,******%
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
16 ;M,2,0,
(Not used)
Name (Max. 10 characters)
17 ;M,2,0,spindle load $3
(Not used)
18 ;M,2,0,
First Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
19 ;M,2,0,******%
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
20 ;M,2,0,
(Not used) For 3rd part
Name (Max. 10 characters) system
21 ;M,2,0, Z-axis load $3
(Not used)
22 ;M,2,0,
Second Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
23 ;M,2,0,******%
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
24 ;M,2,0,
(Not used)
Name (Max. 10 characters)
25 ;M,2,0,spindle load $4
(Not used)
26 ;M,2,0,
First Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
27 ;M,2,0,******%
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
28 ;M,2,0,
(Not used) For 4th part
Name (Max. 10 characters) system
29 ;M,2,0, Z-axis load $4
(Not used)
30 ;M,2,0,
Second Character string displayed on the right of numerical value
31 ;M,2,0,******%
(Max. 4 characters) (Note 1)
32 ;M,2,0,
(Not used)

(Note 1) Setting of the character string displayed on the right of numerical value:
Of the data set as character string, only four characters, or 7th to 10th characters, are displayed on the screen.
The 1st to 6th characters will be ignored.
To have "%" displayed next to a numerical value, character string must be set as "******%". (This will be the
same even if the 1st to 6th characters are the characters other than "*".)

II - 327
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

(Note 2) Designation of the name of load meter

Depending on the detail of R377 (0 to 10), the name of load meter can be changed.
In the following case, when "2" is set to R377, "spindle load 3" and "Z-axis load 3" will be displayed.

;M,2,0, spindle load 1

;M,2,0,
;M,2,0,******%
;M,2,0,
When R377 is set to "0"
;M,2,0, Z-axis load 1
;M,2,0,
;M,2,0,******%
;M,2,0,
;M,2,1, spindle load 2
;M,2,1,
;M,2,1,******%
;M,2,1,
When R377 is set to "1"
;M,2,1, Z-axis load 2
;M,2,1,
;M,2,1,******%
;M,2,1,
;M,2,2, spindle load 3
;M,2,2,
;M,2,2,******%
;M,2,2,
When R377 is set to "2"
;M,2,2, Z-axis load 3
;M,2,2,
;M,2,2,******%
;M,2,2,
The beginning of the comment ";M, 2," indicates that it is the comment for the load meter comment display.
The following "0,", "1,", and "2," is set by R377.

II - 328
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

10.10.1 Functions
PLC axis indexing is used to move the PLC axis to the positioning destination or an arbitrary coordinate position.
This function is applied to tool exchange and magazine control.

[Positioning command methods]

(1) Station method
The axis will be positioned to the destination (station) that has been decided.
There are two assigning methods: Uniform assignment and arbitrary coordinate assignment.

- Uniform assignment
One rotation (360°) of the rotary axis will be equally divided to determine the stations.
(Maximum number of divisions: 360)

Station
1
8
2

7
3

6
4
5

[Setting 8 stations (8 divisions)]

[For linear axis]

A valid stroke will be equally divided to determine the station. (Maximum number of divisions: 359)

Zero point
Valid stroke length Station

1 2 3 4 5
Station No.

[Setting 5 stations]

- Arbitrary coordinate assignment

A station will be assigned to an arbitrary coordinate set in each table

(2) Arbitrary coordinate designation method

An arbitrary coordinate will be directly designated in PLC program for positioning.

II - 329
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

[Operation functions]
- Automatic mode
Stations will be determined automatically.
- Manual mode
Stations will be determined manually.
While the start signal is ON, the axis will be rotated at a constant speed. When the start signal is OFF, the axis
will be positioned at the nearest station.
- JOG mode
The axis will be rotated at constant speed.
- Incremental feed
The axis will be moved by the designed amount.
- Manual handle feed
The axis will be moved by the manual pulse generator.
- Reference position return
The axis will be positioned at the reference position.

[Feed functions]
- Feed rate selection
Automatic mode and manual mode can have each four different feed rates to be designated in the PLC
program.
- Acceleration/deceleration method
Four different combination can be set from the acceleration/deceleration patterns (linear or S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration) and the acceleration/deceleration time constants. The combination will be selected
in the PLC program.
Select acceleration/deceleration type with parameter: the acceleration/deceleration with constant time or the
one with a constant angle of inclination.
- Short-cut control
A least movement distance is automatically judged when a rotary axis is rotated.

II - 330
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

10.10.2 Programming and Setting

10.10.2.1 Operation Function: Automatic Mode
The axis is positioned automatically.
The axis will be positioned at the designated station by turning ON Operation start (ST).
The arbitrary position command operation is also available: the positioning can be carried out to any position other than
a station by directly commanding the positioning coordinates from the PLC. (Refer to the explanations of the arbitrary
coordinate designation method.)

[Preparation]
Set the following signals before operation.

Abbreviatio
Signal name Explanations
n
Use this signal to select automatic operation mode.
Setting two different operation modes at the same time will cause an error
AUT Automatic operation mode
("M01 0101 Aux ax no operation mode").
Keep this signal ON during automatic mode.
Set the rotation direction based on the direction of station No. assignment.
DIR Rotation direction
This signal setting is not available when short-cut control is enabled.
The operation will be issued at the automatic operation speed (aux_Aspeed)
Operation parameter
PR1, PR2 and acceleration/deceleration time constant(aux_timeN.1, aux_timeN.2) of the
selection 1, 2
selected operation group.
ST1 ～ Station selection Set the station Nos. to be used for positioning.
ST256 1 to 256 Setting "0" (special station No.) will start the special operation mode.

[Operation]
Turning ON Operation start (ST) starts the automatic operation.

Automatic operation mode (AUT)

Value at ST's ON is valid
Rotation direction (DIR)
Operation parameter selection (PR1,2)
Station selection ( ST1㨪 256 )

Operation start (ST)

Travel command (speed command)

In automatic operation mode (AUTO)

"0" is output "0" is output
Station position (STO1 to 256) (Note 1)
Smoothing zero (SMZ)
Near set position (NEAR)
Set position reached (JST)
Automatic set position reached (JSTA) (Note 2) Settling time

Axis selection output (AX1)

In axis plus motion (MVP)

In axis minus motion (MVN)

[Automatic operation mode]

- Turn OFF Operation start (ST) when the positioning has been completed.
Turning OFF Operation start (ST) during the positioning makes the axis be positioned at the nearest station
from the current position.
- The following signals will be output when the positioning has been completed:
Automatic set position reached (JSTA), Set position reached (JST), Near set position (NEAR), and Station
position (STO1 to STO256).

II - 331
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

(Note 1) The operation of station position (STO1 to STO256) represents the one when "#12801 aux_Cont1/bit5" is
OFF.
When "#12801 aux_Cont1/bit5" is ON, the nearest station No. will be output (Station No. constantly output).
The previous station No. will be output if the axis is on somewhere between two stations.
(Note 2)The operation of Automatic set position reached (JSTA) represents the one when "#12802 aux_Cont1/bit3"
is OFF.
If "#12802 aux_Cont1/bit3" is ON, turning OFF Operation start (ST) will turn OFF the Automatic set position
reached
(JSTA) as well. (JSTA will be interlocked with the start signal.)

POINT
1.Setting time is required from when the travel commands become zero (SMZ=1) until the positioning is
completed. The setting time will be lengthen if a set position output width is narrower than required. Therefore,
set required positioning accuracy in the set position output width.
2.If the start signal is turned OFF during positioning, the axis will be positioned at the nearest coming station. In
this case, the Automatic set position reached (JSTA) signal will not be output.

CAUTION
The rotation direction will be determined by the combination of the following: operation mode, input control
signal "Rotation direction (DIR)", parameter "#12802 aux_Cont1.bit9 Rotation direction in the shortcut direction"
and "#1018 ccw". At operation start, pay careful attention to the motor rotation direction. When operating the
servomotor for the first time, the motor should be operated as a single unit to confirm the operation, etc.

II - 332
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

[Designating the shortcut control]

This function automatically judges the direction for the least rotation when positioning the axis to a station in
automatic mode.
When the shortcut control is enabled ("#12802 aux_Cont1/bit9" is set to "1"), the axis will be rotated and positioned
in the direction for the least rotation. (The rotation angle will be below 180 degrees.)
If 180 degrees rotation is required, rotate the axis in the direction set with the parameter "#1018 ccw".
(Note) The parameter "#8213 Rotation axis type" is disabled in PLC axis indexing.

[Special operation with special station No.]

A special operation with one-station rotation will be carried out when station No. 0 is designated and the Operation
start (ST) signal is ON. At this time, the operation will differ depending on whether the machine position is inside or
outside the "near" range.

(1) For rotation axis

Machine
#12802
Station No. position at Positioning operation
aux_Cont1.bit9
start
Inside the Positioning is carried out to the next station in the
-
"near" range designated rotation direction.
(a)
Positioning is carried out to the nearest station in the
(b) 0 1
Outside of the shortcut rotation direction.
(c)
"near" range Positioning is carried out to the nearest station in the
0
designated rotation direction.

Axis position at Axis position at Axis position at

start signal ON start signal ON start signal ON
Station 1 Station 1 Station 1

"Near" range "Near" range "Near" range Designated rotation

direction
Station 2 Station 2 Station 2
(a) (b) (c)

[Special operation of rotation axis]

II - 333
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

(2) For linear axis

(a) When uniform assignment is applied

Shifting from position where When starting from outside of

more than one station distance the "near range", positioning
away from the both stroke ends will be carried out to the nearest
is not available. station in designated direction.

#12804 tleng (Linear axis stroke length)

1 station 1 station
distance distance

ST3 ST4 ST5

ST1 ST2 ST6

When starting within one

station from the stroke ends,
positioning will be carried out When starting from inside of the Shifting to the position where
to the first station. "near range", positioning will be more than one distance away
carried out to the nearest from the ends (ST1 and ST6)
station in designated direction. is not available.

[Special operation of linear axis in uniform assignment]

(b) When arbitrary coordinate assignment is applied

When starting from outside of

the "near range", positioning
will be carried out to the nearest
station in designated direction.
Stroke length

ST3 ST4 ST5

ST1 ST2 ST6

When starting from outside of

the stroke range in direction
toward the stroke range, When starting from inside of the Shifting in direction of going
positioning will be carried out "near range", positioning will be away from the stroke ends
to the first station. carried out to the nearest (ST1 and ST6) is not
station in designated direction. available.

[Special operation of linear axis in arbitrary coordinate assignment]

[Operation with arbitrary coordinate designation]

Positioning is carried out to an arbitrary position other than stations by directly commanding the positioning
coordinates from the PLC.
Set the coordinates as the control command position (R8054/R8055 for the 1st axis).
Command increment and command range depend on the "#1005 plcunit" setting.

#1005 plcunit setting value increment Setting range

B 0.001 (°or mm) -2147483.648 to 2147483.647 (°or mm)
C 0.0001 (°or mm) -214748.3648 to 214748.3647 (°or mm)
D 0.00001 (°or mm) -21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (°or mm)
E 0.000001 (°or mm) -2147.483648 to 2147.483647 (°or mm)
(Note) Inch/metric command is enabled by the "#1040 M_inch" setting.

II - 334
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

Set the following signal in addition to the general automatic mode setting before the operation start.

Abbreviation Signal name Explanations

Arbitrary coordinate The positioning destination input from the PLC will be enabled.
STS
designation enabled Keep this signal ON during arbitrary coordinate designation operation.

When rotation axis is used and "#12802 aux_Cont1/bitE" is set to "1", the rotation will be in the arbitrary coordinate
command sign direction. The sign of designation represents the rotation direction. Positioning will be carried out
based on the absolute value.
When the rotation is more than 360 degrees, the commanded angle is divided by 360 degrees: the quotient will be
the number of the rotation and the remainder will be the actual position.

CW ( #1018 cc w = 0)
(i) Designated value - 90° (iii) Designated value - 450°
450° / 360° = 1 Remainder 90°
Position (ii) Designated value + 90°
Rotation direction
Position
Rotation direction
(-) (+) (-) (+) (-) ( +) Number of rotation
0° Axis position 0° 0°
at start
signal ON
90° 90° 90°

CCW ( #1018 ccw = 1 )

(i) Designated value - 90° (iii) Designated value - 450°

(ii) Designated value + 90° 450° / 360° =1 Remainder 90°
Position Rotation direction
Rotation direction Position
(+) (-) (+) (-) (+) (-) Number of rotation
0° 0° 0°
Axis position
at start
signal ON 90° 90° 90°

POINT
1.When the Operation start signal(ST) is tuned OFF during arbitrary coordinate designation, the axis will
immediately decelerate to a stop.
2.In arbitrary coordinate designation,the signals of Automatic set position reached (JSTA), Set position reached
(JST), and Near set position (NEAR) will be output in respect to the commanded positioning destination.
3.Keep the Arbitrary coordinate designation enabled signal(STS) ON until the positioning is completed. Although
the positioning will be continued after the STS signal is turned OFF, the signals related to the set position
(including JSTA, JST, NEAR) will be output with the usual station method.
4.When the rotation direction is in the arbitrary coordinate designation sign direction, setting ±360°will bring the
same action as that with 0°designated.

II - 335
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.10.2.2 Operation Function: Manual Mode

The axis is positioned manually.
Turning ON Operation start (ST) signal moves the axis; turning the signal OFF places the axis at the nearest station
position.

[Preparation]
Set the following signals before operation.

Abbreviation Signal name Explanations

Use this signal to select manual operation mode.
Setting two different operation mode at the same time will cause an error
MAN Manual operation mode
("M01 0101 Aux ax no operation mode").
Keep this signal ON during manual mode.
Set the rotation direction based on the direction of station No. assignment.
DIR Rotation direction
This signal setting is not available when short-cut control is enabled.
The operation will be issued at the manual operation speed (Mspeed) and
Operation parameter selection 1,
PR1, PR2 acceleration/deceleration time constant (timeN.1 and timeN.2) of the selected
2
operation group.

[Operation]
Turning ON Operation start (ST) moves the axis in the designated direction.
The axis will be positioned at next station by turning OFF Operation start (ST).

Manual operation mode (MAN)

Value at ST's ON is valid
Rotation direction (DIR)
Operation parameter selection (PR1,2)

Operation start (ST)

Travel command (speed command)

     
Positioned to nearest station after ST is OFF
In manual operation mode (MANO) "0" is output "0" is output
Station position (STO1 to 256) (Note 1)
Smoothing zero (SMZ)
Near set position (NEAR)
Set position reached (JST)
Automatic set position reached (JSTA)

Axis selection output (AX1)

In axis plus motion (MVP)
In axis minus motion (MVN)

[Manual operation mode]

- The travel command will be output and the axis will be positioned to the next station even after Operation
start (ST) is turned OFF.
- The following signals will be output when the positioning has been completed:
Set position reached (JST), Near set position (NEAR) and Station position (STO1 to STO256)

aux_Cont2/bit4=1
aux_Cont2/bit4=0
(Arbitrary coordinate
(Uniform assignment)
assignment)
One stroke or further from both
Point of ST's OFF Within one stroke from both ends Out of the both ends
ends
Positioned at the nearest stroke Positioned at the nearest
In moving into stroke range Stopped immediately
end stroke end
In moving out of the stroke
Stopped immediately Stopped immediately Stopped immediately
range

II - 336
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

10.10.2.3 Operation Function: JOG Mode

The axis is moved at a constant speed.
Turning Operation start (ST) ON moves the axis; turning the signal OFF causes the axis immediately decelerate to stop.

[Preparation]
Set the following signals before operation.

Abbreviation Signal name Explanations

Use this signal to select JOG operation mode.
Setting two different operation mode at the same time will cause an error
J JOG operation mode
("M01 0101 Aux ax no operation mode").
Keep this signal ON during JOG mode.
DIR Rotation direction Parameter "#1018 ccw" also reverses the rotation direction.
The operation will be carried out at manual operation speed (Mspeed) of the
PR1, PR2 Operation parameter selection 1, 2
selected operation group.

[Operation]
Turning ON Operation start (ST) moves the axis in the designated direction.
Turning the signal OFF causes the axis immediately decelerates to stop.

JOG operation mode (J)

Value at ST's ON is valid
Rotation direction (DIR)
Operation parameter
selection (PR1, PR2)
Operation start (ST)

Travel command (speed command)

Outputs the value within
the range set by parameter

In JOG operation mode (JO) Outputs "0"

Station position (STO1 to 256) (Note 1)
Smoothing zero (SMZ)

Near set position (NEAR)

Set position reached (JST)
Automatic set position reached (JSTA)

Axis selection output (AX1)

In axis plus motion (MVP)
In axis minus motion (MVN)

[JOG mode]

(Note) The operation of station position (STO1 to STO256) represents the one when "#12801 aux_Cont1.bit5" is OFF.
When "#12801 aux_Cont1.bit5" is ON, the nearest station No. will be output (Station No. constantly output).
The forward station No. will be output if the axis is on somewhere between two stations.

POINT
1.Set position reached (JST) signal will be output if the motor stops within the set position output width of a
particular station.
2.In JOG operation mode, Automatic set position reached (JSTA) signal will not be turned ON when the machine
is positioned at a station.

II - 337
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.10.2.4 Operation Function: Incremental Feed

The axis is moved by the designated amount.
Turning Operation start (ST) ON feeds the axis by the constant amount.

[Preparation]
Set the following signals before operation.

Abbreviation Signal name Explanations

Use this signal to select incremental mode.
S Incremental mode Setting two different operation mode at the same time will cause an error
("M01 0101 Aux ax no operation mode").
DIR Rotation direction Parameter "#1018 ccw" also reverses the rotation direction.
Accelerated/decelerated will be carried out with the accelerate/decelerate
PR1, PR2 Operation parameter selection 1, 2
time constant of selected operation group.
MP1, MP2 Incremental feed magnification 1, 2 Select the feed amount per movement.

[Operation]
Turn ON Operation start (ST). If this signal is turned OFF during the movement, the axis moves for the designated
feed amount before stopping.

Incremental mode (S)

Value at ST's ON is valid
Operation parameter selection
(PR1, PR2)
Incremental feed magnification
(MP1, 2)
Operation start (ST)
Available only in startup
Travel command (speed command)

In incremental mode (SO)

Smoothing zero (SMZ)

[Incremental feed operation]

II - 338
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

10.10.2.5 Operation Function: Manual Handle Feed

The axis is moved by the manual pulse generator.

[Preparation]
Set the following signals before operation.

Abbreviation Signal name Explanations

Use this signal to select handle mode. Setting two different operation modes
at the same time will cause an error "M01 0101 Aux ax no operation mode".
H Handle mode
The handle input will be prioritized for PLC axis indexing by turning this
signal ON.
PR1, PR2 Operation parameter selection 1, 2 Select the operation parameter group.
MP1, MP2 Incremental feed magnification 1, 2 Select the travel amount per handle pulse (notch).

[Operation]
Handle pulse input will be prioritized for PLC axis indexing by turning ON the Handle feed operation mode selection
(H). Therefore, the NC axis will not move. Confirm the In handle feed operation mode (HO) signal is ON before
inputting the handle pulses.

Handle mode (H)

Operation parameter selection (PR1, PR2)

Incremental feed magnification (MP1, 2)

Handle pulse input

Travel command (speed command)

In handle mode (HO)

Smoothing zero (SMZ)

[Handle mode]

DIR signal is invalid in handle mode.

POINT
If there are two or more handles, the 1st handle will be enabled.

II - 339
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.10.2.6 Operation Function: Reference Position Return

Reference position return is executed.
PLC axis indexing allows the reference position return at high-speed which returns the axis to the machine coordinate
zero point determined by the absolute position initialization set.
Refer to the section of "absolute position initialization set" for the details of the method.
Manual operation speed set in the selected operation parameter group will be applied in the reference position return.
(Note) Dog-type reference position return is not available for the axis used in PLC axis indexing.

[Preparation]
Set the following signals before operation.

Abbreviation Signal name Explanations

Use this signal to select reference position return mode. Setting two different
ZRN Reference position return mode operation modes at the same time will cause an error "M01 0101 Aux ax no
operation mode".

[Operation]
Turning ON Operation start (ST) starts the reference position return.

POINT
1. An operation alarm "M00 0003 R-pnt direction illegal" will occur when the axis is moved in opposite direction to
the reference position in high-speed reference position return. Make sure to move the axis in correct direction.
2. An operation alarm "M01 0161 Aux ax R-pnt ret incomplete" will occur when the reference position return is
executed without absolute position initialization set.
3. An operation alarm "M00 0024 Aux ax R ret invld at abs alm" will occur when the reference position return is
executed while an absolute position detection-related alarm is shown.
4. An operation alarm "M00 0025 Aux ax R ret invld at ini" will occur when the reference position return is
executed in the absolute position initialization setting.
5. The axis will be returned to the basic machine coordinate system zero point by the reference position return in
PLC axis indexing. Settings for "#2037 G53ofs Reference position #1" to "#2040 #4_rfp Reference position #4"
will not be concerned.

II - 340
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

10.10.2.7 Machine Compensation Function: Backlash Compensation

This function compensates the error (backlash) when the movement direction is reversed.

When the axis movement direction is reversed, the compensation amount set in the parameter "#2011 G0back (G0
backlash)" will be automatically added to the travel amount. The compensation amount will not be added to the machine
coordinates. The actual machine position will be compensated.
When the power is turned ON, the axis will move to the direction set in "#2030 dir (-) (Reference position direction (-))".
Modification of backlash amount is enabled during axis movement.
Backlash compensation does not work on the axis movement in servo OFF state.

Backlash

10.10.2.8 Protection Function: Interlock

This function cancels the axis movement with a signal input and immediately leads the servomotor to deceleration stop.
For feed in the plus direction, turning ON Interlock+ (*IT+) cancels the axis movement and decelerates the motor to stop.
For
feed in the minus direction, turning ON Interlock- (*IT-) results the same. The signals are B contact. The axis moves
again
when the interlock is turned OFF. The feedrate and acceleration/deceleration time constant follows the setting of the
selected
operation parameter group.

Operation start (ST)

Rotation direction (DIR)
Interlock+ (*IT+)
Interlock- (*IT-)

Axis movement (speed feedback)

[Interlock]

II - 341
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.10.2.9 Protection Function: Stored Stroke Limit

Movable range is set for linear axis to prevent the shaft end from clashing into the machine.
This function is available only for axis whose reference position is established.
Command values must be within the set value in any operation mode. When the machine is stopped by the stored stroke
limit function, an operation error "M00 0007 Aux ax soft limit" will occur. The operation error will be canceled by shifting
the error axis in opposite direction. When machine locates out of the movable range, only the travel command toward the
movable range is permitted.

To activate this function, set limit positions both in plus and minus direction with corresponding parameters.
The movable range will be the narrower one confined either by "#2013 OT- and #2014 OT+" or by "#8204 OT-CHECK-N
and 8205 OT-CHECK-P". However, when "#8202 OT-CHECK OFF" is set to "1", the setting of "#8204 OT-CHECK-N
and #8205 OT-CHECK-P" is invalid.
Setting "#8210 OT INSIDE" is invalid in PLC axis indexing.
For rotation axis, the area confined by the parameters, excluding zero point, will be prohibited.
In setting prohibited area for two or more axes using stroke limit IB and the like, note that the prohibited area will be
disabled if those axes include PLC indexing axis.

Limit for (-) side Station No. Limit for (+) side
(-) direction 1 2 3 4 5 6 (+) direction

Moving into the Moving into the

range is possible Stop Stop range is possible

[Stored stroke limit]

POINT
In actual operation, the axis stops a little before reaching to the set position.

10.10.2.10 Protection Function: Servo OFF

This function releases the servo lock.
To use an external force such as a mechanical clamp for machine lock, stop the servo control and disable the torque
output for the deflection caused by the external force. When the servo OFF state is entered, Servo ready (RDY) will be
turned OFF. Turn OFF Motor brake control output (MBR) as well and activate motor brakes.

When Servo OFF #1064 svof Explanations

The travel amount during servo OFF will become the droop. When the servo is turned ON
Error not again, the machine will return to the servo OFF position.
0
corrected An alarm will occur if the droop that occurs during servo OFF exceeds the excessive error
detection width.
The travel amount during servo OFF will not become the droop; the machine position
Error corrected 1 (command position) will be updated. Thus, when the servo is turned ON again, the machine
will stop at the position to which it moved.

Machine decelerates to stop by turning OFF the Servo OFF signal during movement, and starts moving again by turning
ON the Servo OFF signal while the Operation start signal is ON. In JOG mode, machine will not start moving after the
following operation: deceleration to stop by the Servo OFF signal, turning OFF the Operation start signal, then turning
ON the Servo OFF signal. The machine will be positioned at next station in manual/automatic mode.

II - 342
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

10.10.2.11 Miscellaneous Function: Feedrate Override

The feedrate set in the parameter will be effective after multiplied by override (%). Override, ranging from 0 to 100% and
commanded in 1% units, is valid for all movement except that in the handle mode. The override is invalidated when the
Override valid (OVR) signal is OFF; the feedrate in the parameter will be instantly effective.
The override command is designated with a 7-bit binary (OV1 to OV64). The override is handled as 100% if the
command exceeds 100%. If a 0% override is commanded, the axis will decelerate to stop, causing an operation error
"M01 0103 Aux ax feedrate 0".

10.10.2.12 Miscellaneous Function: Position Switch

This function sets virtual dog switches (position switches) on the coordinate set by the parameter instead of setting dog
switches on the machine's axis. PLC interface signals are output when the axis has reached the position.

Position switches (PSW1 to PSW15) can be set on 15 points at maximum for each axis. The area for each position
switch is set
with the parameters ("#12871 aux_PSW1dog1", "#12872 aux_PSW1dog2" to "#12899 aux_PSW15dog1", and "#12900
aux_PSW15dog2").
The parameter ("#12870 aux_PSWcheck") has two options for the machine position; the machine position without droop
in the command system or the machine feedback position (actual machine position) including droop.

10.10.2.13 NC axis Control Selection

NC axis can be controlled with the PLC axis indexing interfaces.
The signal's ON/OFF selects which controls the axis; PLC or NC.
NC controls the axis with machining programs.
PLC controls the axis with PLC axis indexing interfaces.

[Preparation]
Use "#12800 chgauxno" to set the NC axis which can be operated under PLC axis control.
Refer to the section of "Set up" for the settings.

[Signals for the control selection]

Signal name Explanations

Select the control method of the NC axis which can be operated under PLC control.
NC axis control selection n-
0: PLC control
th axis
1: NC control
This signal indicates the control status (NC control or PLC control) of the NC axis which can be
operated under PLC control.
In NC axis control n-th axis
0: PLC control
1: NC control

II - 343
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

[Changing process]
(1)Changing NC control to PLC control
When changing NC control to PLC control in the program execution, confirm the smoothing zero is set for all
the axes in the part system before making the sequence program for NC axis control selection.
(Example) Changing NC control to PLC control with M code

Commanded program
 G00 X10.; M08;

Travel command (speed command)

M function strobe 1 (MF1)

All axes smoothing zero (TSMZ)

Auxiliary axis smoothing zero (SMZ)

NC axis control selection

In NC axis control

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

(2)Changing PLC control to NC control

When changing PLC control to NC control in the program execution, confirm the smoothing zero is set for the
PLC indexing axes in the part system before making the sequence program for NC axis control selection.
(Example) Changing PLC control to NC control with M code

Commanded program M08;

Command from PLC

Travel command (speed command)

M function strobe 1 (MF1)

All axes smoothing zero (TSMZ)

Auxiliary axis smoothing zero (SMZ)

NC axis control selection

In NC axis control

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

II - 344
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

[Operation screen]
Operation screen shows the NC axis name when NC/PLC control selection is allowed.
The status "CT" will be displayed besides the counter display of the axis under PLC control.

(Example) Display of an axis, applicable to NC/PLC control selection, under PLC control

The NC axis coordinate value counter will be updated even in PLC control.
(Note 1) Origin set, counter set, playback and workpiece position measurement are invalid for the axis in PLC
control.
(Note 2) The characters are prioritized as follows when displayed beside the counter. Thus, "CT" may not be
displayed even if the axis is under PLC control.
Priority High "><" (Axis removal)
: "][" (Servo OFF)
: "#1", etc. (Reference position reached)
: "MR" (Mirror image)
Priority Low "CT" (In PLC control)

[Status output]
Servo ready status, servo alarms and so on will be output to the operation status signal with R resister even if the
axis is under NC control. The output signals are follows:

Signals Abbreviation Signal name

AUXST1/bit0 RDY Servo ready
AUXST1/bit1 INP In-position
AUXST1/bit2 SMZ Smoothing zero
AUXST1/bit4 MVP In axis plus motion
AUXST1/bit5 MVM In axis minus motion
AUXST1/bit6 TLQ In torque limit
Controller ready
AUXST1/bitB MA
completion
AUXST1/bitC SA Servo ready completion
AUXST2/bit8 AL1 Alarm 1
AUXST2/bit9 AL2 Alarm 2
AUXST4/bitB NST Start not possible
Status signals other than above will be OFF during NC axis control.

II - 345
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

[Zero point return]

After zero point return has been executed under NC control or PLC control, the system regards that zero point
return has also been done under the other control.

[Restrictions]
(1) NC axis which is applicable to PLC control (the NC axis for which the axis No. in PLC axis indexing has been set
with "#12800 chgauxno") cannot be used as primary/secondary axis in synchronous control. Setting the axis in
"Synchronization control operation method (R2589)" as primary/secondary axis causes an operation error
"M01 1036 Synchro ctrl setting disable".
(2) The axis under spindle's contour control, which has been set in "#1020 sp_ax", cannot be assigned as the NC
axis applicable to PLC control. If the axis is assigned, "S02 Initial parameter error 12800" will occur at the
power ON.
(3) PLC axis indexing interfaces cannot be used for absolute position initialization set when the NC axis is operated
in PLC control by the machine without PLC axis. Complete the absolute position initialization set under NC
control.
(4) H/W OT of NC axis is invalid when operating NC axis under PLC control.
(5) Manual operation in NC's manual mode is invalid when operating NC axis under PLC control. (Operation error
"M01 Aux axis changeover error" will occur.)

[Caution]
(1) Commanding from machining program to NC axis under PLC control causes a program error "P32 Illegal
address" and stops the operation.
(2) Axis movement by PLC axis indexing does not work by turning ON "Operation start (ST)" under NC control. That
causes "Start not possible (AUXST4.bitB)" ON as status.
(3) Turning OFF "NC axis control selection n-th axis" while moving NC axis (n-th axis) with machining program
command stops the machining program and causes an operation error "M01 0166 Aux axis changeover error".
(4) Changing "NC axis control selection N-th axis" during any axis movement causes an operation error. The axis
will decelerate to stop if "NC axis control selection n-th axis" is changed during its movement.
(5) When PLC control is changed to NC control, the movement amount in the PLC control will be regarded as
manual interrupt amount.
(6) Current limit value and excessive error width of NC axis will be enabled immediately after the change from PLC
control to NC control.
(7) The change from NC control to PLC control will not immediately enable the current limit value and excessive
error width: enables the ones of the operation parameter's group which has been selected at the Operation
start (ST) ON.
(8) Alarms for NC axis under PLC control will be output to NC part system.

II - 346
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

10.10.3 Setup
10.10.3.1 Initial Parameter Settings: Selecting Axes to Use in PLC Axis Indexing (#12800)
Select axes to use in PLC axis indexing.
Both PLC axis and NC axis can be used in PLC axis indexing.
Select NC control or PLC control in "NC axis control selection n-th axis" when using NC axis.
(Changing the control, such as the use of NC control in program operation and PLC control in other operations, is
allowed. )

[Axis specification parameter]

# Item Explanations Setting range

M730/M750/M730VS/M750VS/
M730VW/M750VW : 0 to 6
chgauxno PLC axis indexing Set the axis to use in PLC axis indexing.
12800 M720/M720VS/M720VW/M70/M70V :
(PR) axis No. Set "0" to the axes to use as NC axis or regular PLC axis.
0 to 4
E70 Series : 0 to 1
(Example 1) When using 2nd and 3rd PLC axes in PLC axis indexing
Number of part systems: 1
Number of NC axes: 5
Number of PLC axes: 4

[Base system parameters]

$1 $2 PLC
#1001 SYS_ON 1 0 1
#1002 axisno 5 0 4

[Base axis specification parameters]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
#1013 axname X Y Z A C - - - -

[PLC axis indexing parameters]

X Y Z A C - - - -
#12800 chgauxno 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 0

In the setting above, two axes are set to be used in PLC axis indexing.
1st axis in PLC axis indexing: 2nd PLC axis
2nd axis in PLC axis indexing: 3rd PLC axis
PLC axis control signal valid
1st axis Y770
2nd axis Y771
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3rd axis Y772
axname X Y Z A C - - - - 4th axis Y773
chgauxno 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 0
Control signal I/F
for PLC axis indexing

1st axis R8050

2nd axis R8056
3rd axis R8062
4th axis R8068
[Using interface?

POINT
Skip "#1044 auxno" in this function.

II - 347
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

(Example 2) When using 2nd and 3rd PLC axes, 4th and 5th NC axes in PLC axis indexing
Number of part systems: 1
Number of NC axes: 6
Number of PLC axes: 4

[Base system parameters]

$1 $2 PLC
#1001 SYS_ON 1 0 1
#1002 axisno 6 0 4

[Base axis specification parameters]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
#1013 axname X Y Z A A C - - - -

[PLC axis indexing parameters]

X Y Z A A C - - - -
#12800 chgauxno 0 0 0 3 4 0 0 1 2 0

In the setting above, four axes are set to be used in PLC axis indexing.
1st axis in PLC axis indexing: 2nd PLC axis
2nd axis in PLC axis indexing: 3rd PLC axis
3rd axis in PLC axis indexing: 4th NC axis
4th axis in PLC axis indexing: 5th NC axis

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
axname X Y Z A A C - - - -
chgauxno 0 0 0 3 4 0 0 1 2 0 Control command I/F
for PLC axis indexing
1st axis R8050
2nd axis R8056
3rd axis R8062
4th axis R8068

=Using interface in PLC axis indexing ?

When using NC axis in PLC axis indexing, selecting NC/PLC control with "NC control selection n-th axis"
signal is required other than the settings above.

POINT
Multiple NC axes can have the same axis name, although the commands from the machining program are valid
when only one axis is under NC control. When the multiple NC axes are under the control, the machining program
will stop and cause a program error "P11 Illegal axis address" or "P32 Illegal address".

II - 348
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

10.10.3.2 Initial Parameter Settings: Setting the Control Parameter 1

Set each control parameter.

Setting range
# Abbreviation Parameter name Explanations
(Increment)
aux_Cont1
12802 Control parameter 1 Set this in hexadecimal format. The bits that are not explained here must be set to "0".
(PR)

Bit Details in "0" setting Details in "1" setting

0
1
2
Automatic set position reached
Automatic set position reached signal
3 signal does not interlock with
interlocks with Operation start signal
Operation start signal
Automatic set position reached Automatic set position reached signal
4
signal is turned ON again isn't turned ON again
Station No. Output within fixed
5 Station No. Constantly output
position
6
7
8
Rotation direction determined by Rotation direction in the shortcut
9
operation control signal (DIR) direction
A
B
C
D
Rotation direction in operation
Rotation direction in the arbitrary
E control signal (DIR) or in the
position command sign direction
shortcut direction
Stopper direction is in the Stopper direction is in the sign
F
positioning direction direction of the stopper amount

II - 349
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.10.3.3 Initial Parameter Settings: Setting Stations (#12801 to #12805, #12850 to #12868)
Set the positioning destinations (stations).
When assigning stations with equally-spaced intervals: Uniform assignment
When assigning stations to arbitrary coordinates: Arbitrary coordinate assignment

[Uniform assignment setting]

Uniform assignment will be selected by turning OFF "#12803 aux_Cont2.bit4".
The assignment divides one rotation (360°) of rotary axis, and equally divides the designated range of linear axis.
The divided points will be stations.
Station Nos. will be assigned automatically in ascending order. The one closer to the reference position (zero point)
gets smaller No.

(1) For rotation axis

Set the number of division points of one rotation (360°) (number of stations) to the parameter "#12801
aux_station1(Number of indexing stations)". The number of stations must be an integral number from 2 to 360.
Station 1 will be assigned on the reference position. Station 2 onwards will be assigned in order in the motor
CW
(forward) direction.
1 Station No.
8 2
Station

7 3

6 4
5

[Uniform assignment for rotation axis]

(2) For linear axis

Decide the interval of stations based on the linear axis stroke length and the number of stations to evenly
assign the
stations. Station 1 will be assigned on the shifted position by amount of "#12805 aux_ST.offset (Station
offset)"
from the coordinate zero point (coordinate position = 0). Station 2 onwards will be positioned in order in the
assignment direction ("#1018 ccw"). Thus, the last station will be assigned on the coordinate which is linear
axis
stroke length (set in "#12804 aux_tleng") away from station 1.

#1018 ccw Mortor ccw

Coordinate zero point

Reference position
Station No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

#12805 aux_ST.offset
Station offset
#12804 aux_tleng (Linear axis stroke length)

When the number of stations is 8 (the number of divisions is 7)

[Uniform assignment for linear axis]

II - 350
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

(3) Related parameters

Setting range
# Abbreviation Parameter name Explanations
(Increment)
Set this parameter in hexadecimal format. The bit that are not explained here must be
set "0".
aux_Cont2
12803 Control parameter 2 bit4
(PR)
0: Uniform assignment
1: Arbitrary coordinate assignment
Set the number of stations. For linear axis, this value is expressed
aux_station Number of
12801 by: 2 to 360
(PR) indexing stations
number of divisions = number of stations -1.
Set the movement stroke length for linear axis.
aux_tleng Linear axis This parameter is meaningless at the arbitrary coordinate 0.001 to
12804
(PR) stroke length assignment 99999.999 mm
or arbitrary coordinate command.
-99999.999 to
aux_ Set the distance (offset) between the reference position and station 99999.999
12805 (Station offset)
ST.offset 1. °
(mm)

[Arbitrary coordinate assignment setting]

Arbitrary coordinate assignment will be selected by turning ON "#12803 aux_Cont2.bit4".
The number of stations for arbitrary coordinate assignment is 20 at maximum.
Station 1 will be assigned on the coordinate zero point (coordinate position = 0). Stations 2 to 20 are set with the
parameters "#12850 aux_stpos2" to #12868 aux_stpos20".
Setting an offset amount in "#12805 aux_ST.offset(Station Offset)" shifts the stations 1 to 20 by the offset amount.
(Note) The set values (coordinate positions) of stations 2 to 20 does not need to be in ascending order.

(1) For rotation axis

Reference position
Station offset = 0 =1

stpos2

stpos6 stpos3

stpos4
stpos5

1
Station offset = 30°
Reference position

stpos6 1

stpos2

stpos5 stpos3

stpos4

[Arbitrary coordinate assignment for rotation axis]

II - 351
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

(2)For linear axis

Reference position
= Station 1
2 3 4 5 6

stpos 2 stpos3 stpos4 stpos 5 stpos 6

[Linear axis arbitrary coordinate assignment (with station offset)]

Reference position
Station 1 2 3 4 5 6

stpos2 stpos3 stpos4 stpos5 stpos6

#12805 aux_
ST.offset [Linear axis arbitrary coordinate assignment (without station offset)]

Station offset

(3) Related parameters

Setting range
# Abbreviation Parameter name Explanations
(Increment)
Set this parameter in hexadecimal format. The bit that is not explained
here must be set "0".
aux_Cont2
12803 Control parameter 2 bit4
(PR)
0: Uniform assignment
1: Arbitrary coordinate assignment
-99999.999 to
aux_ Set the distance (offset) between the reference 99999.999
12805 Station offset
ST.offset position and station 1. °
(mm)
12850 aux_stpos2 Station 2 coordinate
12851 aux_stpos3 Station 3 coordinate
12852 aux_stpos4 Station 4 coordinate
12853 aux_stpos5 Station 5 coordinate
12854 aux_stpos6 Station 6 coordinate
12855 aux_stpos7 Station 7 coordinate
12856 aux_stpos8 Station 8 coordinate
12857 aux_stpos9 Station 9 coordinate
12858 aux_stpos10 Station 10 coordinate Set the coordinate value for each station when -99999.999 to
arbitrary coordinate assignment is selected. 99999.999
12859 aux_stpos11 Station 11 coordinate
The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" °
12860 aux_stpos12 Station 12 coordinate (machine coordinate zero point). (mm)
12861 aux_stpos13 Station 13 coordinate
12862 aux_stpos14 Station 14 coordinate
12863 aux_stpos15 Station 15 coordinate
12864 aux_stpos16 Station 16 coordinate
12865 aux_stpos17 Station 17 coordinate
12866 aux_stpos18 Station 18 coordinate
12867 aux_stpos19 Station 19 coordinate
12868 aux_stpos20 Station 20 coordinate

II - 352
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

[Setting for station No. automatic assignment direction]

The station No. assignment direction can be selected with parameters.

#1018 ccw Explanations

Assign the station Nos. in the motor rotation CW direction. When forward run is selected in Rotation direction
0
(DIR), the motor rotates in the CW direction (in the station No. increment direction).
Assign the station Nos. in the motor rotation CCW direction. When forward run is selected in Rotation
1
direction (DIR), the motor rotates in the CCW direction (in the station No. increment direction).

By turning ON the power again after changing the "#1018 ccw" setting, the set station positions will be
modified.

POINT
Changing the "#1018 ccw" setting in absolute position detection system requires the initial setting. Set this
parameter before the initial setting.

[Precautions]
(1) Special operation by special station No. (0) is invalid in arbitrary coordinate assignment. This will cause an
operation error "M01 165 Aux uneven index sta No. ilgl".
(2) To set more than 20 coordinates in the arbitrary coordinate assignment, execute the positioning with arbitrary
coordinate commands.
(3) If two or more station Nos. have the same coordinate, the smallest station No. will be output when the axis stays
within the station neighborhood in non-automatic operation mode.
(4) The smallest station No. will also be output when the axis is at the same distance from two or more stations.
(5) Zero point setting
Auxiliary axis (MR-J2-CT) and PLC axis indexing have the following differences in operation.

Auxiliary axis (MR-J2-CT) PLC axis indexing

Coordinate zero point will be decided first and
reference position will be decided by parameter.
Coordinate zero point will be decided first, which
Setting a station offset does not shift the coordinate
will be the reference position as well. Setting a
Dog-less type zero point (station 1 position): it shifts the reference
station offset sets the station 1 on the position an
position instead. In this case, a zero point setting in
offset amount away from the original position.
absolute position screen is required to shift the
coordinate zero point.

II - 353
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.10.3.4 Initial Parameter Settings: Setting Operation Parameter Groups (#12810 to #12848)
The axis is positioned automatically.
The axis will be positioned at the designated station by turning ON Operation start (ST).
The arbitrary position command operation i Four operation parameter groups can be set in total. By selecting any group
with Operation parameter selection 1, 2 (PR1, PR2) from the PLC before operation, the operating conditions can be
changed to match the machine status each time. There are also operation modes such as stopper positioning control, in
which the drive unit automatically selects the operation parameter group and controls the machine.

Parameters to designate operation pattern

Operation parameter group 4 PR1 = 1, PR2 = 1
Operation parameter group 3 PR1 = 0, PR2 = 1
Operation parameter group 2 PR1 = 1, PR2 = 0
Operation parameter group 1 PR1 = 0, PR2 = 0
Parameter names Functions
Automatic operation speed Automatic operation feedrate
Manual operation speed Manual and jog operaion feedrate
Acceleration/deceleration Acceleration/deceleration time constant
time constant 1 linear part for all operation mode
Acceleration/deceleration Acceleration/deceleration time constant
time constant 2 non - linear part for all operation mode
Torque limit value Torque (current) limit value
Excessive error detection width Position droop (compliance delay) tolerable value
Set position output width Set position signal output tolerable value
Near set position output width Near set position output tolerable value 4 sets

[Feedrate setting]
Set the machine speeds as feedrate in the parameters separately for automatic operation and manual operation.
Since the electronic gear automatically calculates the motor speed, the setting can be done without being
concerned with gear ratio, pitch, detector resolution, etc.

Setting range
No. Abbreviation Parameter name Explanations
(Increment)
Operation parameter
12810 aux_Aspeed1 group 1
Automatic operation speed
Operation parameter
12820 aux_Aspeed2 group 2 Set the feedrate in automatic operation when the
Automatic operation speed operation parameter group is selected. 1 to 100000
"#12810 aux_Aspeed1" is regarded as the clamp °/min
Operation parameter value for the automatic operation speeds and (mm/min)
12830 aux_Aspeed3 group 3 manual operation speeds of all operation groups.
Automatic operation speed
Operation parameter
12840 aux_Aspeed4 group 4
Automatic operation speed
Operation parameter
12811 aux_Mspeed1 group 1
Manual operation speed
Operation parameter
12821 aux_Mspeed2 group 2
Manual operation speed 1 to 100000
Set the feedrate in manual and JOG operations
°/min
Operation parameter when the operation parameter group is selected.
(mm/min)
12831 aux_Mspeed3 group 3
Manual operation speed
Operation parameter
12841 aux_Mspeed4 group 4
Manual operation speed

POINT
"Operation parameter group 1 automatic operation speed" (aux_Aspeed1) functions as clamp speed in all
operations. A feedrate exceeding aux_Aspeed1 cannot be commanded.

II - 354
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

[Setting the acceleration/deceleration pattern and time constant]

Set the automatic operation mode acceleration/deceleration type in the parameter "#1361 aux_acc".

(1) Acceleration/deceleration with constant time: When "#1361 aux_acc"= "0"

Acceleration/deceleration pattern will be fixed with the time constant aux_timeN.1 and aux_timeN.2 in
operation parameter group N (N= 1 to 4).
(2) Acceleration/deceleration with a constant angle of inclination: When "#1361 aux_acc" = "1"
Acceleration/deceleration pattern will be with the inclination decided by "Operation parameter group 1
automatic operation speed" (#12810 aux_Aspeed1) and "Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1, 2"
(aux_timeN.1, aux_timeN.2) in the operation parameter group N (N= 1 to 4).

Set the automatic operation mode acceleration/deceleration pattern in "Operation parameter group N acceleration/
deceleration type" (aux_smgstN).

(1) Linear acceleration/deceleration: Set "1" in "#128N8 aux_smgstN"

(2) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration: Set "F" in "#128N8 aux_smgstN"

However, when "Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2" (aux_timeN.2) is set to "1", linear acceleration/
deceleration will be applied regardless of "Acceleration/deceleration type" (aux_smgstN).

As for the acceleration/deceleration time constant in each of the groups, set a linear acceleration/deceleration time
up to the clamp speed (aux_Aspeed1) in "Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1" (aux_timeN.1). When the
operation speed is less than the clamp speed, acceleration/deceleration will be carried out with the same
inclination. In this case, set "1" (default value) in acceleration/deceleration time constant 2 (aux_time.2).

When S-pattern acceleration/deceleration is applied, set a total acceleration/deceleration time (both in non-linear
and linear parts) to "Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1", and set a acceleration/deceleration time in non-
linear part to "Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2".

Speed

Time

(b) (c)

(a)

(a) : Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1 set value

(b)+(c) : Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2 set value ((b) and (c) are each half of the set value)

In handle feed mode, execute linear acceleration/deceleration using "Acceleration/deceleration time constant
2" (aux_timeN.2) only.

II - 355
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

Setting range
No. Abbreviation Parameter name Explanations
(Increment)
Operation parameter group 1
Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for
Acceleration/deceleration
12812 aux_time1.1 "Operation parameter group 1 automatic operation
time
speed" (clamp speed) when "operation parameter
constant 1
group n" is selected.
Operation parameter group 2 When this is set with "Acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2", S-pattern acceleration/
12822 aux_time2.1
time deceleration will be carried out. In this case, this
constant 1 parameter determines the acceleration/deceleration
1 to 4000ms
Operation parameter group 3 time of the linear part.
Acceleration/deceleration When operating at a speed less than the clamp
12832 aux_time3.1 speed: if "#1361 aux_acc" is set to "0", the axis will
time
constant 1 accelerate/decelerate with the time constant set in
this parameter; if "#1361 aux_acc" is set to "1", the
Operation parameter group 4
axis will accelerate/decelerate at the constant
Acceleration/deceleration
12842 aux_time4.1 inclination determined by this parameter and
time
"aux_Aspeed1".
constant 1
Operation parameter group 1
Acceleration/deceleration
12813 aux_time1.2
time
constant 2
Operation parameter group 2
Acceleration/deceleration
12823 aux_time2.2 Set this parameter for S-pattern acceleration/
time
constant 2 deceleration. Set the total time of the non-linear
parts in the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration. 1 to 4000ms
Operation parameter group 3 When "1" is set, linear acceleration/deceleration will
Acceleration/deceleration be carried out
12833 aux_time3.2
time
constant 2
Operation parameter group 4
Acceleration/deceleration
12843 aux_time4.2
time
constant 2
Operation parameter group 1
aux_smgst1
12818 Acceleration/deceleration
(PR)
type
Operation parameter group 2
aux_smgst2
12828 Acceleration/deceleration Select the acceleration/deceleration type when
(PR)
type "operation parameter group n" is selected.
1,F
Operation parameter group 3 1: Linear acceleration/deceleration
aux_smgst3 F: S-pattern acceleration/deceleration
12838 Acceleration/deceleration
(PR)
type
Operation parameter group 4
aux_smgst4
12848 Acceleration/deceleration
(PR)
type

POINT
As for acceleration/deceleration time constants, set acceleration/deceleration times up to the clamp speed
(aux_Aspeed1).
When the operation speed is less than the clamp speed, acceleration/deceleration will be carried out with the
same inclination as that at the clamp speed.

II - 356
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

[Setting the torque limit value]

Set an individual torque limit value (current limit value) to each operation parameter group.

Setting range
No. Abbreviation Parameter name Explanations
(Increment)
Operation parameter
12814 aux_TL1 group 1
Torque limit value
Operation parameter
12824 aux_TL2 group 2 Set the motor output torque limit value when "operation
Torque limit value parameter group n" is selected. At the default value, the
torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor 1 to 500%
Operation parameter specifications. Set the default value when torque limiting is not
12834 aux_TL3 group 3 required.
Torque limit value
Operation parameter
12844 aux_TL4 group 4
Torque limit value

[Setting the excessive error detection width]

Set an excessive error alarm detection width to each operation parameter group.
An alarm is detected when the position droop (between position command and feedback) exceeds the setting
value. The standard setting value is calculated from the feedrate using the following equation. The excessive error
alarm can occur easily when the load inertia is large or the auto-tuning response is lowered. Raise the excessive
error detection width in these cases.

OD(N) = Aspeed(N) / 1000 (°or mm)

Setting range
No. Abbreviation Parameter name Explanations
(Increment)
Operation parameter
group 1
12815 aux_OD1
Excessive error
detection width
Operation parameter
group 2
12825 aux_OD2
Excessive error Set the excessive error detection width when "operation
detection width parameter group n" is selected. The excessive error alarm
0 to 32767°(mm)
Operation parameter (S03 0052) will be detected when the position droop becomes
group 3 larger than this setting value.
12835 aux_OD3
Excessive error
detection width
Operation parameter
group 4
12845 aux_OD4
Excessive error
detection width

II - 357
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

[Setting the output width of signals related to the set position]

Set the following signals: Set position reached (JST) which indicates the machine has completed positioning,
detection width of Automatic set position reached (JSTA), and detection width of Near set position (NEAR) which
indicates that the machine is near to any stations.

Setting range
No. Abbreviation Parameter name Explanations
(Increment)
Operation parameter
group 1
12816 aux_just1
Set position output
width
Operation parameter Set position reached (JST) indicates that the machine
group 2 position stays at any one of the stations. During automatic
12826 aux_just2
Set position output operation, Automatic set position reached (JSTA) is detected
width under the same conditions. 0.000 to
Operation parameter Set the tolerable values at which these signals are output 99999.999°(mm)
group 3 when each operation parameter group is selected. These
12836 aux_just3 signals turn OFF when the machine position is away from the
Set position output
width station by more than this value.
Operation parameter
group 4
12846 aux_just4
Set position output
width
Operation parameter
group 1
12817 aux_near1
Near set position
output width
Operation parameter
group 2 The signal indicating that the machine position stays near to
12827 aux_near2 one of the stations is the near set position (NEAR) signal. Set
Near set position
output width the tolerable values at which this signal is output when each
0.000 to
operation parameter group is selected. Generally set the
Operation parameter tolerable value larger than set position output width. 99999.999°(mm)
group 3 Operations are related to special commands when Station
12837 aux_near3
Near set position selection is set to "0".
output width
Operation parameter
group 4
12847 aux_near4
Near set position
output width

II - 358
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

10.10.3.5 Initial Parameter Settings: Setting Position Switches (#12870 to #12900)

Set the position switch area. 15 types of position switches, PSW1 to PSW15, can be set.

Setting range
No. Abbreviation Parameter name Explanations
(Increment)
Set this parameter in hexadecimal format. The bits that are not explained here
must be set to "0".

bit Position switch Details in "0" setting Details in "1" sett ing
0 PSW1
1 PSW2
2 PSW3
3 PSW4
4 PSW5
12870 aux_PSWcheck PSW detection method 5 PSW6
6 PSW7
The position switch output will be The position switch output will be
7 PSW8
judged by the machine position of judged by machine feedback
8 PSW9 the command system. position (actual position).
9 PSW10
A PSW11
B PSW12
C PSW13
D PSW14
E PSW15
F

12871 aux_PSW1dog1 PSW1 area setting 1

12872 aux_PSW1dog2 PSW1 area setting 2
AUX_PSW2dog
12873 PSW2 area setting 1
1
12874 PSW2 area setting 2
aux_PSW2dog2
12875 aux_PSW3dog1 PSW3 area setting 1
12876 aux_PSW3dog2 PSW3 area setting 2
12877 aux_PSW4dog1 PSW4 area setting 1
12878 aux_PSW4dog2 PSW4 area setting 2
When the machine is positioned at the area determined by
12879 aux_PSW5dog1 PSW5 area setting 1 the area settings 1 and 2, the position switch of the
12880 aux_PSW5dog2 PSW5 area setting 2 corresponding No. will turn ON.
-99999.999 to
12881 aux_PSW6dog1 PSW6 area setting 1 Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or
99999.999°(mm)
12882 aux_PSW6dog2 PSW6 area setting 2 vice versa) does not affect the position switch operation.
For rotation axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding
12883 aux_PSW7dog1 PSW7 area setting 1
0.000 degree.
12884 aux_PSW7dog2 PSW7 area setting 2
12885 aux_PSW8dog1 PSW8 area setting 1
12886 aux_PSW8dog2 PSW8 area setting 2
12887 aux_PSW9dog1 PSW9 area setting 1
12888 aux_PSW9dog2 PSW9 area setting 2
aux_PSW10dog
12889 1 PSW10 area setting 1
12890 aux_PSW10dog PSW10 area setting 2
2
aux_PSW11dog
12891 1 PSW11 area setting 1
12892 aux_PSW11dog PSW11 area setting 2
2
aux_PSW12dog
12893 1 PSW12 area setting 1
12894 aux_PSW12dog PSW12 area setting 2
2
aux_PSW13dog
12895 1 PSW13 area setting 1
12896 aux_PSW13dog PSW13 area setting 2
2
aux_PSW14dog
12897 1 PSW14 area setting 1
12898 aux_PSW14dog PSW14 area setting 2
2
aux_PSW15dog
12899 1 PSW15 area setting 1
12900 aux_PSW15dog PSW15 area setting 2
2

II - 359
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.10.3.6 Absolute Position Zero Point Initialization Set: Machine End Stopper Method
This method determines the absolute position basic point by pushing the axis against the machine, etc.

[Selecting machine end stopper method]

Set "1" to "#2049 type (Absolute position detection method)" and turn ON the power again.

[Initial setting]
Set suitable values for the stopper method when setting a torque limit value ("#2054 clpush (Current limit (%))") and
an excessive error detection width ("#2253 SV053 OD3").

[Operation and performance]

(1) Turn ON the following signals to enable the absolute position reference position basic point initialization set
mode.

Abbreviation Signal name Explanations

Zero point The absolute position basic point initialization mode will be entered.
AZS
initialization mode This mode will be kept until the NC is turned OFF.

(2) Move the axis in jog or handle feed until the axis is pushed against the stopper without machine. When the
torque (current) reaches the limit value due to this pushing, In torque limit (TLQ) will be output, and the position
will be saved as the "absolute position basic point".

(3) Move the axis in the direction opposite to the pushing direction. When the axis reaches the first grid point, the
axis automatically stops, and the absolute position coordinates will be established.
When "#2059 zerbas(Select zero point parameter and basic point)"is set to "1", "absolute position basic point"
is set to the electrical zero point (grid) instead of the pushed position.

(4) In this state, the absolute position basic point will be the coordinate zero point.
To set the absolute position coordinate zero point to a position other than the pushing position or electrical
zero point, move the machine coordinate zero point with the parameter "#2 Zero-P".

Axis stopper position

Axis movement (2)

(3)
Distance set in "#2 Zero-P"
When "#2059 zerbas" = "1"
When "#2059 zerbas" = "0"

Grid
Machine coordinate Electrical zero point
zero point

[Machine end stopper method]

II - 360
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.10 PLC Axis Indexing

10.10.3.7 Absolute Position Zero Point Initial Setting: Marked Point Alignment Method
This method determines the absolute position basic point by aligning the axis to the marked point on the machine.

[Selecting the marked point alignment method]

Set "2" to "#2049 type (Absolute position detection method)" and turn ON the power again.

[Initial setting]
Set "#2050 absdir (Basic point of Z direction)" with the direction of the grid point, which is an electrical zero point,
from the marked point alignment position.


Marked point alignment position

Electrical zero point  Electrical zero point

when "absdir" is set to "1" when "absdir" is set to "0"

(-) direction (+) direction

[Operation and performance]

(1) Turn ON the following signals to enable the absolute position reference position basic point initialization set
mode.

Abbreviation Signal name Explanations

Zero point The absolute position basic point initialization mode will be entered.
AZS
initialization mode This mode will be kept until the NC is turned OFF.

(2) Move the axis to the desired "absolute position basic point" in jog handle or incremental feed.

(3) Turn ON the Reference point setting (ZST) signal.

(4) Using jog, handle or incremental feed, move the axis in the direction of the grid to be an electrical zero point.
When the axis will automatically stop at the grid to be an electrical zero point, then the absolute position
coordinates will be established. When "#2059 zerbas (Select zero point parameter and basic point)"is set
to "1", the "absolute position basic point"
will be set to the electrical zero point (grid) instead of the Reference point setting position.

(5) In this state, the absolute position basic point will be the coordinate zero point.
To set the absolute position coordinate zero point to a position other than the one where Reference point
setting (ZST)is ON or the electrical zero point, move the machine coordinate zero point with "#2 Zero-P".

Marked point alignment position

Axis movement (2)

(4)
Distance set in "#2 Zero-P"
When "#2059 zerbas" = "1"
When "#2059 zerbas" = "0"

Machine coordinate Electrical Grid

zero point zero point

[Reference point setting method]

10.10.4 Test Operation in Auxiliary Axis Test Screen

The absolute position setting and test operations can be carried out by separating the axis control from PLC using the
auxiliary axis test screen. As for the operation details, refer to "MITSUBISHI CNC 700/70 Series Instruction Manual" (IB-
1500042(ENG)).

II - 361
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.11 Direct Screen Selection

The direct screen selection is the function to control the screen transition of NC screens by the user PLC.
An arbitrary NC screen can be selected by setting the screen selection information to file register.
The following each screen can be selected as the screen transition direction: Monitor screen, Setup screen, Edit screen,
Diagnosis screen, Maintenance screen.

NC

User
File register
PLC
Screen selection (R356 to R359)
information

Automatic
transition
Screen
process
Automatic
transition

[Direct screen selection]

II - 362
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.11 Direct Screen Selection

10.11.1 Screen Selection Information

The descriptions of the screen selection information (file registers) are shown below.

Register
Description Setting value
No.
0: Initial state
1: Screen selection requirement
R356 Selection requirement/completion data
4: Screen selection completion
8: There is no application for the screen selection requirement
R357 Function No. Set "4" to transit to the alarm message display screen.
R358 Selection Main menu No. Set "6" to transit to the alarm message display screen.
requirement Set "1" to transit to the NC alarm display screen,
R359 Sub menu No.
"2" to the PLC alarm display screen.

(1) Confirm the initial state ("0") is set to R356, the selection requirement/completion data.
(2) Set the function No. (to R357), main menu No. (to R358) and sub menu No. (to R359). Then enter "1" to R356,
the selection requirement/completion data.
(3) NC confirms the screen selection requirement and then sets the screen selection completion ("4") to the
selection requirement/completion data (R356) to execute the screen transition.
(4) After the screen transition, user PLC confirms the screen selection completion ("4") in R356 and then initializes
the data (to "0").

(Note 1)Setting the function No. is necessary. Without this No., the screen transition is not executed.
(Note 2)If the main menu No. has not been set (stays "0"), the function No. designates the screen transition. The
screen transition is as same as when each function key has been pressed.
(Note 3)When the sub menu No. has been set, the main menu No. has also to be set. Unless the main menu is set,
the transition is as same as when only the function No. is set.
(Note 4)When either the function No., main menu No. or sub menu No. is out of range, the screen transition is not
executed. Then the selection requirement/completion data (R356) remains "1".

The setting values of the function No. (R357), main menu No. (R358) and sub menu No. (R359) are as follows.

Target No. Setting value

1: Monitor screen
2: Setup screen
Function No. 3: Edit screen
4: Diagnosis screen
5: Maintenance screen
Main menu No. 0 to 30
Sub menu No. 0 to 70

Main menu No. and sub menu No. are designated at the position from the left of each screen's menu.
When the menu which was switched by the menu changeover (F12 key) is designated, add "Number of menu
switching × 10".

Menu No. = Number of menu switching × 10 + Position from the left of menu (1 to 10)

When a menu is not designated, designate "0".

When "0" is designated to the main menu No., the sub menu No. is treated as "0".
(Note 1) The menu No. is always designated from the first page.
(Note 2) When the third page is designated to the menu there are only two pages (ex. 21), the first page is a
target menu page because of switching the menu twice.

II - 363
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.11.2 Timing Chart

The timing chart of the selection requirement/completion data is shown below.

0 → 1 4 → 0
PLC

 1 → 4
NC

Screen Before transition After transition

10.11.3 Precautions
(1) The operation when the screen selection requirement while executing some processing on the screen is as same as
when the key where the screen transition is generated (ex. function key) is pressed. Examples are shown below.
(a) File editing on the Edit screen:
The screen transits after confirming save.
(b) Inputting/Outputting:
The screen transits at once. Input/Output is operated on the background at this time.
(c) During buffer correction:
The screen transits at once. The content during buffer correction is not saved.
(d) During operation search:
The screen transits after finishing operation search.

(2) A failure of the screen transition does not display or set any error data, except for "8" in R356, which informs that no
application software is found to make the direct screen selection requirement.

(3) The transition to the screen where the password input is necessary to display is possible only when the password is
input.

10.11.4 Restrictions
(1) This signal is used only for the transition to each display screen of Monitor screen, Setup screen, Edit screen,
Diagnosis
screen, Maintenance screen. No other screen transition is executed by setting the screen selection data (F0 or
SFP).

(2) The direct screen selection is not available with the display unit FCU7-DA201-xx or FCU7-DA211-xx.

(3) When a target main menu is not processed, the sub menu is not designated.

(4) When a custom release menu is designated to the target main menu, the sub menu is not designated.
When a custom release menu is designated, the sub menu should designate "0".

(5) When transition to the same window screen is executed, the target window screen is shut once, and is displayed
again.

(6) The direct screen selection function displaying "NCDesigner interpreter method" screen by the custom release
cannot
correspond because there is no macro for the notification to a designated window.

II - 364
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.12 Control Axis Superimposition II

10.12 Control Axis Superimposition II

There are two types of control axis superimposition according to command method: Control axis superimposition I and
Control axis superimposition II.
Control axis superimposition I: G command
Control axis superimposition II: PLC signal command
For selection, set the base specifications parameter “#1280 ext16/bit7”.

This chapter explains different points from the control axis superimposition I.
For the functions of the control axis superimposition, refer to the chapter of the control axis superimposition in the
programming manual (lathe system) M700V/M70V.

10.12.1 Command Method

(1) Superimposition start command
Issue a superimposition start command in the following procedure.
(a) Set the reference axis corresponding to the superimposed axis using the parameter “#2089 bsax_pl”.
(b) Set the movement direction of the superimposed axis corresponding to the movement of the reference axis
using the parameter “#2143 polor”.
0: Move in the same direction as that of the reference axis
1: Move in the opposite direction from that of the reference axis
(c) The superimposition control starts at a rising edge (0 → 1) of a PLC signal (PILE1 to PILE8) corresponding to
the superimposed axis.

(2) Superimposition end command

The superimposition control by PLC signal is canceled at a falling edge (1 → 0) of the PLC signal (PILE1 to PILE8)
corresponding to the superimposed axis.

10.12.2 Machining Program Example

(1) When commanding from a part system that contains the reference axis
[Part system 1] [Part system 2]
: :
: :
!L1 ; !L1 ;
M** ; Z2 is superimposed on Z1
Due to the command of timing synchronization between part
! L2 ; !L2 ;
systems, the axis is waited to stop.
G01 Z50. F100 ; Superimposition operation G01 X-10 F100 ;
X4. Z4 ; Z60. ;
: :
: :
: :
Due to the command of timing synchronization between part
!L3 ; !L3 ;
systems, the axis is waited to stop.
M** ; ZSuperimposition of Z2 axis is finished
!L4 ; !L4 ;
: :

(Note) The machine specifications determine M**.

II - 365
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.12.3 Precautions
(1) The control axis supermimposition by PLC signal is enabled only when "#1280 ext16/bit7" is "1".
If the parameter "#1280 ext16/bit7" is "0", the superimpsition control request signals (PILE1 to PILE8) will be
ignored.
(2) The superimpsition control request signals (PILE1 to PILE8) will be ignored, if any of them is input without the
option.
(3) To conduct a superimposition, the superimposition axis No. must be bigger than that of the reference axis.
An alarm (Operation error 1044) will occur if the superimposition axis No. is smaller than that of the reference axis.
The axis No. increases towards the right side of the reference axis-specific parameter setting screen.
(4) A rotary axis cannot be set to be the reference axis/superimposed axis. An alarm (Operation error 1044) will occur if
the superimposition control request signal is turned ON for such an axis.
(5) An axis whose parameter "#2071 s_axis" (Inclined axis selection) is not "0" cannot be designated as reference axis
nor superimposed axis.
An alarm (Operation error 1044) will occur if the superimposition control request signal is turned ON for such an
axis.
(6) An axis whose parameter "#1205 G0bdcc" (Acceleration and deceleration before G0 interpolation) is not "0" cannot
be designated as reference axis nor superimposed axis. An alarm (Operation error 1044) will occur if the
superimposition control request signal is turned ON for such an axis.

II - 366
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.13 Change the Area of Stored Stroke Limit I

10.13 Change the Area of Stored Stroke Limit I

10.13.1 Explanation of Function
This function allows you to change the area of stored stroke limit I to be the one set in R registers for each axis. Turning
ON the "Stored stroke limit I : Change request" (SLMC) signal will change the stored stroke limit area. The area of stored
stroke limit I is allowed to be changed during automatic operation. The present setting of stored stroke limit I can be
checked using the R registers.

Note
Do not generate any collision by the change of the tool entry prohibited range when using this function.

(1) How to use

(a) Set the parameter "#1278 ext14/bit2" to "1", to enable change of stored stroke limit I area.
(b) Specify the No. of R register to be used for designating the area of stored stroke limit I in the parameter "#2190
OT_Rreg".
(c) Specify the area of stored stroke limit I in the R registers you selected in (b).
(d) Turn ON the "Stored stroke limit I : Change request" (SLMC) signal (YB60 to YB7F). This changes the area of
stored stroke limit I for the axis corresponding to the signal.
(e) Changing the area of stored stroke limit I is carried out independently for each axis. If you want to change the
settings of two or more axes at a time, turn ON the Stored stroke limit 1 change request signals of the target
axes within one cycle of user PLC.
(f) The R registers for checking allows you to confirm that the area change has normally been completed. For the
sake of safety, it is advisable to confirm that the change has normally been done before allowing movement.

(2) Setting the range for change of stored stroke limit I area
The area of stored stroke limit I is specified using the R registers in user area. Which R registers to use is specified
by the parameter "#2190 OT_Rreg". The value set in this parameter serves as the start number, and eight R
registers are used for setting/checking of one axis. If stored stroke limit I is unused, set this parameter to "0". The
values to be set in the R registers must follow the PLC unit (#1005).

R register Item Description

RA OT-set (L)
OT-
RA+1 OT-set (H)
Soft limit I (Setting)
RA+2 OT+set (L)
OT+
RA+3 OT+set (H)
RA+4 OT-check (L)
OT-
RA+5 OT-check (H)
Soft limit I (Check)
RA+6 OT+check (L)
OT+
RA+7 OT+check (H)

(Note) RA is set by the parameter "#2190 OT_Rreg" individually for each axis. Make sure that there is no
overlap among the R registers you use.

II - 367
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

(3) Available R registers

Listed below are the R registers that can be used to set the area of stored stroke limit I.
Choose an R register from which eight consecutive R registers are available.

R8300 to R9799 1500 points of back up area

R9800 to R9899 100 points of non-back up area
R18300 to R19799 1500 points of back up area
User area
R19800 to R19899 100 points of non-back up area
R28300 to R29799 1500 points of back up area
R29800 to R29899 100 points of non-back up area

(Note that the No. of start R register must be an even number.)

Setting example) When you use non-backup areas for two axes (X and Z) of each of the 1st and 2nd part systems

Parameter X1 Z1 X2 Z2
#2910　　OT_Rreg 9800 9808 19800 19808

Item X1 Z1 X2 Z2
OT-set R9800/R9801 R9808/R9809 R19800/R19801 R19808/R19809
OT+set R9802/R9803 R9810/R9811 R19802/R19803 R19810/R19811
OT-check R9804/R9805 R9812/R9813 R19804/R19805 R19812/R19813
OT+check R9806/R9807 R9814/R9815 R19806/R19807 R19814/R19815

(4) Available setting range

When setting the R register values, make sure to follow the PLC unit specified by #1005. The available setting
ranges are as listed below.

PLC unit (#1005) Available setting range (mm) Available setting range (R register value)
B -99999.999 to 99999.999 0xFA0A1F01 to 0x05F5E0FF
C -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 0xC4653601 to 0x3B9AC9FF
D -21474.83648 to 21474.83647 0x80000000 to 0x7FFFFFFF
E -2147.483648 to 2147.483647 0x80000000 to 0x7FFFFFFF

(5) Execution of change

When the "Stored stroke limit I : Change request" (SLMC) signal (YB60) is turned ON, the stored stroke limit area
you specified in R registers becomes active. Change of the stored stroke limit I area is conducted only at the rising
edge of the "Stored stroke limit I : Change request" (SLMC) signal (YB60). Thus make sure to specify the area of
stored stroke limit I in R registers before turning ON the "Stored stroke limit I : Change request" (SLMC) signal
(YB60).

(6) Operation at power ON

After power ON, the settings of the parameters "#2013 OT-" and "#2014 OT+" take effect until the "Stored stroke
limit I : Change request" (SLMC) signal (YB60) is turned ON. If you want to use the same area as that applied
during power OFF when the power is turned ON, enable this operation through user PLC (make a backup at a
change, and set it at power ON).

II - 368
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.13 Change the Area of Stored Stroke Limit I

10.13.2 Usage Example

Illustrated below is an operation example when you change the area of stored stroke limit I for X and Y axes using the
stored stroke limit I area change at a T command.
(To present the relation with the set values in an easy-to-understand manner, both X and Y axes are handled as radius
designation axes in this example.)

[Parameter settings]
#1005(plcunit) :C
#1278(ext14)bit2 : ON
#2190(OT_rrag) : Xaxis_9800
Yaxis_9810
#2013(OT-) : -100.0(X), -100.0(Y)
#2014(OT+) : +1600.0(X), 400.0(Y)

[Machining program]
N1 G90 G28 XY
N2 G00 X100.0 Y100.0
N3 T1010
N4 G01 X1000. Y500.
N5 G01 X200.

600.0
Y axis’ OT+ of (2)

400.0
Y axis’ OT+ of (1)

N1 N4

N2 X
−100.0 800.0 1600.0
−50.0 −100.0
Y axis’ OT- of (1)

−200.0 Y axis’ OT- of (2)

X axis’ OT+ of (2)
X axis’ OT- of (2)
X axis’ OT+ of (1)
X axis’ OT- of (1)

II - 369
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

[X axis]
R register
for setting
Change info not specified R9800 : 0x5EE0 R9802 : 0x1200
R9801 : 0xFFF8 R9803 : 0x007A
(OT- : - 50.0 OT+ : 800.0)
Stored stroke limit 1
change request

(1) (2)
Stored stroke limit 1
range OT- : -100.0 OT- : -50.0
OT+ : 1600.0 OT+ : 800.0

[Y axis]
R register
for setting
Change info not specified R9810 : 0x7B80 R9812 : 0x8D80
R9811 : 0xFFE1 R9813 : 0x005B
Stored stroke limit 1 (OT- : - 200.0 OT+ : 600.0)
change request

Stored stroke limit 1 (1) (2)

range OT- : -100.0 OT- : -200.0
OT+ : 400.0 OT+ : 600.0

Execution block N3 N4
N1 N2
(Axis motion)

Operation error “S/W stroke end axis exists”

X axis

Y axis

(1) The range specified by parameters takes effect until the "Stored stroke limit I : Change request" (SLMC) signal is turned
ON.
(2) After the "Stored stroke limit I : Change request" (SLMC) signal is turned ON, the soft limit 1 range is changed.
In this example, the stored stroke limit + of X axis changes to 800.0, and the operation error “S/W stroke end axis exists”
occurs before this limit.

II - 370
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.13 Change the Area of Stored Stroke Limit I

10.13.3 Cautions
(1) For an axis whose parameter "#2190 OT_Rreg" is set to "0", or an axis whose prohibition area includes any R
register outside the user area, the stored stroke limit I area coincides with the settings of the parameters "#2013
OT-" and "#2014 OT+". Changing the area of stored stroke limit I is disabled for these axes.
(2) If the area of stored stroke limit I is changed, the settings of the parameters "#2013 OT-" and "#2014 OT+" are
unchanged.
(3) If you change the area of stored stroke limit I and this causes the present position to be included in the prohibition
area, it is not until axis movement starts that the operation error (M01 S/W stroke end axis exists) occurs. After
occurrence of this error, it is still possible to move the tool manually in a direction opposite to the prohibition area
(direction of pulling out the tool).
(4) Even when changing the area of stored stroke limit I is enabled, this change will not affect the operation of the other
stored stroke limit function (IB, IC, II or IIB) or barrier function (chuck or tailstock barrier). The narrower movable
range is applied to operation.
(5) After changing the area of stored stroke limit I, you need to turn OFF and ON the power. Otherwise you are unable
to set the changed area back to the parameters. If needed, enable the same values as the parameter settings to be
set in the R registers.
(6) If you change the values of R registers in which the range of stored stroke limit I has been set, with the "Stored
stroke limit I : Change request" (SLMC) signal (YB60) ON, the area of stored stroke limit I is unchanged. Only at the
rising edge of the "Stored stroke limit I : Change request" (SLMC) signal (YB60), the area of stored stroke limit I is
changed.

(a) (b)
R register

R9800: 0x7960 R9802: 0xE1C0 R9800: 0xBDC0 R9802: 0x1200 R9800: 0x5EE0 R9802: 0x2D00
R9801: 0xFFFE R9803: 0x00E4 R9801: 0xFFF0 R9803: 0x007A R9801: 0xFFF8 R9803: 0x0131
(OT- : -10.0 OT+:1500.0) (OT- : -100.0 OT+:800.0) (OT- :- 50.0 OT+:2000.0)

Stored stroke limit 1 (c)

change request

R register
for checking
R9804: 0x7960 R9806: 0xE1C0 R9804: 0x5EE0 R9806: 0x2D00
R9805: 0xFFFE R9807: 0x00E4 R9805: 0xFFF8 R9807: 0x0131
(OT- : -10.0 OT+:1500.0) (OT- :- 50.0 OT+:2000.0)

(a) Change the setting values of R registers. (Area of Soft limit I is not yet changed in this state.)
(b) Change the setting values of R registers. (Area of Soft limit I is not yet changed in this state.)
(c) Area of Stored stroke limit I is changed at the rising edge of "Stored stroke limit I : Change request" (SLMC) signal.

(7) If you attempt a change of stored stroke limit I area while an identical value (other than zero) is set in OT- and OT+
(R register settings), stored stroke limit I will be disabled. In this case, the minimum of the R register setting is output
to OT- of the R register for checking, and the maximum of the R register setting is output to OT+.
(8) If the stored stroke limit you have set is exceeding the range of the R registers for checking, the values to be set in
these R registers are clamped at the setting limit.
(9) To the R registers for checking, the setting range of stored stroke limit I is output. The setting values of other
function such as stored stroke limit II are not output to these R registers.
(10) For an axis specified as a diameter designation axis, also use a radius value when setting the R registers.
(11) You are unable to cancel the operation error (M01 S/W stroke end axis exists) by widening the area of stored stroke
limit I. Thus cancel the error first, and then move the axis.

II - 371
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.14 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization

10.14.1 Outline
This function is for a machine with a spindle motor to rotate a guide bushing: This function allows the guide bushing
spindle motor (hereinafter called G/B spindle) to synchronize with a reference spindle motor (hereinafter called reference
spindle).

Spindle motors that are controlled by MDS-D or later drive unit are required (for both reference and G/B spindles) in
order to use this function.

Bar feeder
Collet chuck Guide bushing
(Reference spindle) (G/B spindle)

(1) Designate a reference spindle and a G/B spindle using the parameter "#3074 GBsp".
(2) When the ladder turns ON the "G/B spindle synchronization valid" (GBON) signal, the reference spindle and the G/
B spindle enter the spindle synchronization state. “M01 GB spindle synchro signal OFF 1014” occurs if the spindle
forward/reverse run start command, orientation command, or C axis servo ON command is issued with the "G/B
spindle synchronization valid" (GBON) signal OFF. Turn the "G/B spindle synchronization: temporary cancel"
(GBOFF) signal ON in order to control independently each of the reference spindle and the G/B spindle.
(3) The reference spindle and the G/B spindle accelerate/decelerate synchronizing.
(4) Set the spindle gear ratio to 1:1 for both reference and G/B spindles.

10.14.2 Detailed Explanation

10.14.2.1 Operation of G/B Spindle Synchronization
10.14.2.1.1 How to Command
(1) Turn the "G/B spindle synchronization valid" (GBON) signal ON using the ladder.
The reference spindle and the G/B spindle enter the spindle synchronization state at the position where the "G/B
spindle synchronization valid" (GBON) signal is turned ON, then the "G/B spindle synchronizing mode" (GBMOD)
signal and the "G/B spindle synchronization: position control synchronizing" (GBSYN) signal turn ON.
(2) When the Forward run/reverse run start signal of the reference spindle is turned ON,the reference spindle and the
G/B spindle accelerate/decelerate to the commanded rotation speed following the spindle synchronization
acceleration/deceleration time constant, multi-step acceleration/deceleration changing speed and time constant
scale set in the parameters with keeping the synchronous state.
(The multi-step acceleration/deceleration speed to be used is of the spindle whose acceleration calculated from the
limit rotation speed and spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant.)
(3) When the command speed for the reference spindle is changed, acceleration/deceleration is carried out with the
reference spindle and the G/B spindle synchronizing even when stopping the reference spindle.

II - 372
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.14 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization

10.14.2.1.2 Explanation of Operation

Signal from PLC to CNC

(a) G/B spindle
synchronization
valid (GBON) Stopping Stopping

Signal from CNC to PLC

(b) G/B spindle

synchronizing
mode (GBMOD)

(c) G/B spindle

synchronization:
position control
Coast to a G/B spindle synchronization Coast to a
synchronizing (GBSYN)
stop stop

<Signal timing chart of G/B spindle synchronization>

[Program example]
M○○; (Turn ON G/B spindle synchronization valid)
N10 S1=1000M03;
;
N20 S1=500;
;
Spindle rotation speed (r/min) N30 M4;
1000 ;
N40 M5
;
M ; (Turn OFF G/B spindle synchronization valid)
Forward rotation

500
Reference spindle
G/B spindle

0
Time
Reverse rotation

-500
Acceleration Rotation Rotation Deceleration
speed speed
change change

-1000
N10 N20 N30 N40
Reference spindle Reference Reference spindle Reference spindle run start
forward run start spindle rotation reverse run start command OFF
command speed change command

<Rotation speed of reference spindle and G/B spindle during G/B spindle synchronization>

II - 373
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.14.2.2 Phase Alignment of Reference Spindle and G/B Spindle

In order to insert a square bar, it is necessary to align the phases of the reference spindle and the G/B spindle. For the
phase alignment, it is necessary to save the phase gap between the reference spindle and the G/B spindle when
inserting the bar for the first time. By doing so, inserting the bar becomes easy by turning ON the "G/B spindle
synchronization: phase alignment" (GBPHS) signal before inserting the bar to align the relative position of the reference
spindle and the G/B spindle that was saved the first time the bar was inserted.
The phase gap that is once saved is available until another phase is saved again.

10.14.2.2.1 Saving Phase Gap Between Reference Spindle and G/B Spindle
(1) Insert a square bar in the G/B reference spindle and the G/B spindle.
(2) Turn the "G/B spindle synchronization valid" (GBON) signal ON to rotate the reference spindle.
(3) After the "Z phase passed" (SZPH) signal turns ON, stop the reference spindle. Do not turn OFF the "G/B spindle
synchronization valid" (GBON) signal at this point.
(4) After the reference spindle and the G/B spindle stop, turn ON the "G/B spindle synchronization: phase memory"
(GBPHM) signal to save the phase gap (relative position) between the reference spindle and the G/B spindle.
(Check the stop state of the reference spindle and the G/B spindle referring to the Zero speed signal.)
(5) After turning OFF the "G/B spindle synchronization: phase memory" (GBPHM) signal, turn OFF the "G/B spindle
synchronization valid" (GBON) signal.

10.14.2.2.2 Phase Alignment of Reference Spindle and G/B Spindle

(1) After turning ON the "G/B spindle synchronization valid" (GBON) signal, rotate the reference spindle at 300r/min or
below.
(2) After the reference spindle enters the steady state, turn ON the "G/B spindle synchronization: phase alignment"
(GBPHS) signal.
(Check the steady state referring to the "Spindle up-to-speed" (USO) signal.)
(3) A phase alignment starts targeting the phase gap (relative position) between the reference spindle and the G/B
spindle that has been saved.
(4) When the phase alignment is completed, the "G/B spindle synchronization: phase alignment complete" (GBPHF)
signal turns ON.
(5) Turn OFF the "G/B spindle synchronization: phase alignment" (GBPHS) signal, and insert the square bar.

II - 374
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.14 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization

10.14.2.2.3 Explanation of Operation

Signal from PLC to CNC

<Square bar is inserted the first <Square bar is inserted the second time
time (phase memory)> and following (phase alignment)>
(a) G/B spindle
synchronization
valid (GBON)

(b) G/B spindle

synchronization:
phase memory (GBPHM)

(c) G/B spindle

synchronization:
phase alignment (GBPHS)
Constant
(d) Forward run start (SRN) or Rotate by one revolution or more speed rotation
reverse run start (SRI) of
reference spindle
(S command of 300r/min
or below)
Signal from CNC to PLC
(e) Z phase passed
(SZPH) of reference
spindle/G/B spindle

(f) Zero speed (ZSO) of

reference spindle/G/B
spindle
(g) Spindle up-to-speed
(USO) of reference
spindle/G/B spindle

(h) G/B spindle synchronization:

phase alignment complete
(GBPHF)

Insertion of square bar

<Signal timing chart of G/B spindle synchronization phase memory/phase alignment>

II - 375
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.14.2.3 G/B Spindle Synchronization Position Error Compensation

When machining a square bar during G/B spindle synchronization mode, the bar’s torsion may cause either of the
reference spindle or the G/B spindle the overload alarm (S03 Overload 1 0050) or the over regeneration alarm (S03 Over
regeneration 0030, S04 Pw sply: Over regeneration 0073). These alarms can be avoided by turning ON the "G/B spindle
synchronization: position error compensation" (GBCMON) signal to compensate the position error caused by the bar’s
torsion.
Workpiece’s torsion is different depending on the area. So turn ON the "G/B spindle synchronization: position error
compensation" (GBCMON) signal at every cycle to reexecute a G/B spindle synchronization position error
compensation.

10.14.2.3.1 How to Command

(1) During G/B spindle synchronization mode, turn ON the "G/B spindle synchronization: position error compensation"
(GBCMON) signal when the Chuck close signal turns ON. When turning it ON, make sure that the rotation of the
reference spindle and the G/B spindle is in the steady state in order to find the position error compensation amount.
(2) Measure the position error of the reference spindle and the G/B spindle 16 times to start the compensation. The
position error compensation amount can be checked with R465. (Unit is pulse,1pulse ≒ 0.088°)
(3) After the measurement is completed, turn ON the "G/B spindle synchronization: position error compensating"
(GBPCM) signal.
(4) Cancel the G/B spindle synchronization position error compensation by turning OFF the "G/B spindle
synchronization: position error compensation" (GBCMON) signal when the Chuck close signal turns OFF. The G/B
spindle synchronization position error compensation can be held by turning ON the "G/B spindle synchronization:
keep position error compensation amount signal" (GBCMKP) signal.

II - 376
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.14 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization

10.14.2.3.2 Explanation of Operation

Signal from PLC to CNC

(a) G/B spindle
synchronization valid
(GBON)
(b) G/B spindle synchronization:
position error compensation
(GBCMON)
(c) G/B spindle synchronization:
keep position error
compensation amount signal
(GBCMKP)
Signal from CNC to PLC
(d) G/B spindle synchronization:
position error compensating
(GBPCM)
Machine-specific signal
(e) Chuck close of
reference spindle
1 cycle 1 cycle

Position error compensation amount

(f) G/B spindle
synchronization position
error compensation
amount
Time

<Timing chart of G/B spindle synchronization position error compensation 1 (Compensation signal ON at chuck close,
and the signal turns OFF at chuck open [Keep position error compensation amount signal OFF])>

Signal from PLC to CNC

(a) G/B spindle
synchronization valid
(GBON)
(b) G/B spindle synchronization:
position error compensation
(GBCMON)
(c) G/B spindle synchronization:
keep position error
compensation amount signal
(GBCMKP)
Signal from CNC to PLC
(d) G/B spindle synchronization:
position error compensating Turns OFF during measuring position
(GBPCM) error compensation amount
Machine-specific signal
(e) Chuck close of
reference spindle 1 cycle 1 cycle

Position error compensation amount

(f) G/B spindle
synchronization position
error compensation
amount

Time

<Timing chart of G/B spindle synchronization position error compensation 2 (Compensation signal ON at chuck close,
and the signal turns OFF at chuck open [Keep position error compensation amount signal ON])>

II - 377
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

10.14.2.3.3 Precautions
(1) If the alarms cannot be avoided even though the "G/B spindle synchronization: position error compensation"
(GBCMON) signal is ON, increase the number of times of compensations.
Note that the larger the number of times of compensations is, the longer the measurement time for the position error
compensation becomes. In such a case, decrease the number of times of compensations by setting the scale
applied to the first compensation.
( R390 | Compensation scale applied to the first compensation | The number of times of compensations | )
(2) The In G/B spindle synchronization position error compensation signal turns OFF:
(a) when both "G/B spindle synchronization: keep position error compensation amount signal" (GBCMKP) signal
and "G/B spindle synchronization: position error compensation" (GBCMON) signal are turned OFF
(b) when the G/B spindle synchronization mode is canceled
(c) during measuring the G/B spindle synchronization position error compensation amount.
(3) Even if the "G/B spindle synchronization: position error compensation" (GBCMON) signal is turned OFF during
measuring the G/B spindle synchronization position error compensation amount, the signal is not actually turned
OFF until the measurement is completed.
(4) The G/B spindle synchronization position error compensation is executed only during the G/B spindle
synchronization mode. If the "G/B spindle synchronization: position error compensation" (GBCMON) signal is
turned ON not during the G/B spindle synchronization mode, the compensation starts when the G/B spindle
synchronization mode starts.

II - 378
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.14 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization

10.14.2.4 Relative Position Error Sampling

During G/B spindle synchronization mode, the following five values are calculated based on the relative position error
between the reference spindle and the G/B spindle, and they are output to the R registers when the state changes
between the acceleration/deceleration state and the steady state. (Unit is pulse, 1pulse ≒ 0.088°)
(1) Maximum range of the relative position error during acceleration/deceleration
(2) Maximum value of the relative position error during acceleration/deceleration
(3) Maximum range of the relative position error during the steady state
(4) Maximum value of the relative position error during the steady state
(5) Average value of the relative position error during the steady state
This sampling is constantly carried out during the G/B spindle synchronization mode. It stops when the G/B spindle
synchronization mode is canceled.

10.14.2.4.1 How to Command

(1) This function is constantly active during G/B spindle synchronization mode. Values are set in the following R
registers when the state changes between the acceleration/deceleration state and the steady state.
Spindle rotation speed

(1) Accelerating (2) Steady rotation (3) Decelerating

Time
Relative position error

(a) (c) (d)

(f) (g)
0 (e)
(b)

<Relative position error during G/B spindle synchronization>

II - 379
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

<R registers to output the relative position error>

R register Operation
Maximum value ((a) above) of the relative position error is written after the spindle
Maximum range of the relative
motor completes acceleration.
R460 position error for G/B spindle
Maximum value ((b) above) of the relative position error is written after the spindle
synchronization
motor decelerates and stops.
Maximum value ((c) above) of the relative position error is written after the spindle
Maximum value of the relative
motor completes acceleration.
R461 position error for G/B spindle
Maximum value ((d) above) of the relative position error is written after the spindle
synchronization
motor decelerates and stops.
Average value of the relative
position error during the steady Average value ((e) above) of the relative position error is written after the spindle
R462
state for G/B spindle motor completes steady rotation.
synchronization
Maximum range of the relative
position error during the steady Maximum value ((f) above) of the relative position error is written after the spindle
R463
state for G/B spindle motor completes steady rotation.
synchronization
Maximum value of the relative
position error during the steady Maximum value ((g) above) of the relative position error is written after the spindle
R464
state for G/B spindle motor completes steady rotation.
synchronization

(Note) The relative position error is calculated by “Reference spindle’s feedback position - G/B spindle’s
feedback position”.

II - 380
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.14 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization

10.14.3 Relation with Other Functions

A: Available A (*n): Available (with restriction) N/A: Not available
Operation
Function name Reference G/B Remarks
spindle spindle
(*4)“M01 GB SP sync runs independently 1138”
Synchronous tapping cycle A N/A(*4) occurs if the G/B spindle is commanded as a
synchronous tapping spindle.
(*1)Normal synchronous tapping
(*4) “M01 GB SP sync runs independently
High-speed synchronous tapping A(*1) N/A(*4)
1138”occurs if the G/B spindle is commanded as a
synchronous tapping spindle.
Spindle rotation command (forward/reverse) A N/A
Analog spindle I/F “Y05 Initial parameter error 3025” occurs at power
N/A N/A
Encoder input I/F ON.
Coil that was selected immediately before turning
Coil changeover
N/A N/A ON the "G/B spindle synchronization valid" (GBON)
Automatic coil changeover
is held.
Set the spindle gear ratio of the reference spindle
Gear changeover N/A N/A
and the G/B spindle to 1:1.
Constant surface speed control A N/A
Spindle override A N/A
(*2)During G/B spindle synchronization, spindle
zero point detection with contactless switch and
Spindle orientation A(*2) N/A turret indexing cannot be enabled. “M01 GB spindle
synchro signal OFF 1014” occurs when the
“Orientation command” signal is turned ON.
(*3)During G/B spindle synchronization, the spindle
C axis parameter cannot be changed. “M01 GB
Spindle position control (Spindle C axis control) A(*3) N/A
spindle synchro signal OFF 1014” occurs when
servo ON is carried out for C axis.
(*5)“M01 GB SP sync runs independently 1138”
Spindle synchronization control I,
A N/A(*5) occurs if the G/B spindle is commanded as a
Spindle synchronization control II
spindle related to spindle synchronization.
Tool spindle synchronization IA (Spindle-Spindle
(*6)“M01 GB SP sync runs independently 1138”
polygon machining)
A N/A(*6) occurs if the G/B spindle is commanded as a
Tool spindle synchronization IB (Spindle-Spindle
spindle related to tool spindle synchronization IA/IB.
polygon machining)
(*7)“M01 GB SP sync runs independently 1138”
Tool spindle synchronization IC occurs if the reference spindle or the G/B spindle is
A(*7) N/A(*7)
(Spindle-NC axis polygon machining) commanded as a spindle of tool spindle
synchronization IC.
(*8)“M01 Internal interlock axis exists 0005” occurs
and servo ON state is set if the reference spindle is
commanded as a workpiece axis and servo OFF is
carried out.
Tool spindle synchronization II (Hob machining) A(*8) N/A(*9)
(*9)“M01 GB SP sync runs independently 1138”
occurs if the reference spindle or the G/B spindle is
commanded as a spindle of tool spindle
synchronization II.
Spindle speed clamp A N/A
Tap retract A N/A
The reference spindle and the G/B spindle
decelerate and stop asynchronously. However,the
relative position between the reference spindle and
the G/B spindle is not guaranteed. The "G/B spindle
Emergency stop A A
synchronizing mode" (GBMOD) signal and the "G/B
spindle synchronization: position control
synchronizing" (GBSYN) signal turn OFF at an
emergency stop.

II - 381
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 PLC Help Function

During G/B spindle synchronization mode, the

reference spindle and the G/B spindle cannot be
detached.
Axis detachment N/A N/A
The G/B spindle synchronization mode cannot be
turned ON while the reference spindle and the G/B
spindle are detached.

10.14.4 Precautions and Restrictions

(1) In the G/B spindle synchronization function, both reference spindle and G/B spindle are required to be controlled by
MDS-D or later spindle drive unit.
(2) The lower setting value between the reference spindle and the G/B spindle is used as the limit rotation speed of the
G/B spindle synchronization mode signal.
(3) Both reference spindle and G/B spindle coast to a stop when the "G/B spindle synchronization valid" (GBON) signal
is OFF.
(4) If the "G/B spindle synchronization valid" (GBON) signal is turned OFF immediately after turning OFF the forward/
reverse run command, the reference spindle and the G/B spindle stop and then enter the coasting status.
(5) Parameters such as of C axis and orientation function follow the spindle synchronization function.
(6) Spindle gear changeover command for the reference spindle and the G/B spindle is disabled.
(7) Set the spindle gear ratio of the reference spindle and the G/B spindle to 1:1.
(8) “M01 GB SP sync:Cancel sgnl illegal 1028” occurs if the G/B spindle synchronization temporary cancel signal is
turned ON/OFF when the reference spindle or the G/B spindle is in any of the following modes.
- During rotation (when not stopped)
- During tap cycle synchronization mode
- During spindle synchronization mode/tool-spindle synchronization I (polygon machining) mode/tool-spindle
synchronization II (hobbing) mode
- During spindle C axis control C axis mode
- During orientation/indexing
(9) “Y05 Initial parameter error 3025” occurs at power ON if one of the reference spindle and the G/B spindle uses a
spindle detector that cannot be connected to a spindle drive unit.
(10) If the parameter GBsp is changed in G/B spindle synchronization mode, the changed parameter is enabled when
the "G/B spindle synchronization valid" (GBON) signal is turned OFF → ON.
(11) If the reference spindle is commanded as a workpiece axis of tool spindle synchronization II, “M01 Internal interlock
axis exists 0005” occurs and servo OFF cannot be carried out for the workpiece axis even when servo OFF is
attempted in tool spindle synchronization II mode. Carry out servo OFF after canceling tool spindle synchronization
II.
(12) “M01 GB SP sync runs independently 1138” occurs if the reference spindle is commanded as a spindle of tool
spindle synchrnization IC.
(13) If the reference spindle is commanded as a synchronous tapping spindle, set the same value in the reference
spindle’s position loop gain (#13003 SP003) and the tapping axis’s axis servo gain (#2017 tap_g).

II - 382
 11
External PLC link

II - 383
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

11.1 CC-Link
NC module can be connected to the PLC network to serve as the master (Ver.2 mode)/local (Ver.1 mode, Ver.2 mode)
station of the MELSEC CC-Link. The CC-Link specification is not available in E70 Series.
CC-Link is the abbreviation of Control & Communication Link. For CC-Link, refer to the following documents.
“CC-Link Specification (Overview/Protocol)” (BAP-05026-J) issued by CC-Link Partner Association
“CC-Link System Master/Local Module User’s Manual” (SH-080394-EJ) issued by Mitsubishi Electric Corp.

In order to use CC-Link, it is necessary to install the CC-Link master/local module in the NC control module. If not
installed, it cannot be connected to the PLC network, and the screen for the CC-Link related parameters will not be
displayed.
Even if the CC-Link master/local module is installed but the cable is not connected, the alarm “Z68 CC-Link
unconnected” will occur. For names of each section of the communication module and how to set the module, refer to
"CC-Link(Master/Slave) Specifications Manual(BNP-C3039-214)".
If the NC is a local station, it is dealt as an intelligent device station.

[Outline of CC-Link]
(1) Distributing and installing each module to the equipments such as conveyor line and mechanical device and so on
can simplify the wiring of the whole system.
(2) The ON/OFF data and numerical data such as input/output treated by each module can be communicated easily
and at high speed.
(3) The simple distributed system can be established by connecting several PLC CPUs or NCs.
(4) Connecting the device equipments made by the partner maker can flexibly support various systems.

II - 384
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

Outline Drawing

Master station Master

(NC unit) station

or

Sequencer CPU Remote I/O station

M700VW : HN576 / HN577

M700VS/M70V : HN746
M700/M70 : HN576 / HN577
Remote device station
Partner manufacturer product
CC-Link

Intelligent
Remote I/O station
device Local
station station
(NC unit)

or

Sequencer CPU

Abbreviations and terms related to CC-Link are as follows.

Abbreviations and terms Description
Station that controls the remote and local stations.
Master station
One master station is required for each system.
Station having a CPU and the ability to communicate with the master
Local station
and other local stations.
Remote I/O station Remote station that handles bit information only.
Remote device station Remote station that handles bit information and word information data.
Generic term for remote I/O station and remote device station.
Remote station
Controlled by the master station.
Station to backup the data link control instead of the master station when
Standby master station
an error occurs to the master station.
Intelligent device station Station that can perform transient transmission. (Including local stations)
Generic term for remote I/O station, remote device station, local station,
Slave station
intelligent device station and standby master station.
Link special relay (for CC-Link)
SB Bit unit information that indicates the module operating status and data
link status of the master station/local station. Represented as SB for the sake of convenience.
Link special relay (for CC-Link)
SW 16-bit unit information that indicates the module operating status and
data link status of the master station/local station. Represented as SW for the sake of convenience.
Remote input (for CC-Link)
RX Information entered in bit units from the remote station to the master
station. Represented as RX for the sake of convenience.
Remote output (for CC-Link)
RY Information output in bit units from the remote station to the master
station. Represented as RY for the sake of convenience.
Remote register (Write area for CC-Link)
RWw Information output in 16-bit units from the master station to the remote
device station. Represented as RWw for the sake of convenience.
Remote register (Read area for CC-Link)
RWr Information entered in 16-bit units from the master station to the remote
device station. Represented as RWr for the sake of convenience.

II - 385
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

11.1.1 Performance Specifications

M7 Series except E70 Series is compliant with CC-Link Ver.1.10, Ver.2.00.
CC-Link master/local module
Item
Ver.1.10 Ver.2.00
2048 points
Remote I/O (RX, RY) 8192 points each
each
Maximum number of link
Remote register (RWw)
points per system 256 points 2048 points
(master station -> slave station)
(Note 1)
Remote register (RWr)
256 points 2048 points
(slave station -> master station)
Extended cyclic setting - Single Double Quadruple Octuple
128 points
Remote I/O (RX, RY) 32 points each 32 points each 32 points each 64 points each
each
Occupies Remote register (RWw)
4 words 4 words 8 words 16 words 32 words
1 station (master station -> slave station)
Remote register (RWr)
4 words 4 words 8 words 16 words 32 words
(slave station -> master station)
192 points 384 points
Remote I/O (RX, RY) 64 points each 64 points each 96 points each
each each
Occupies Remote register (RWw)
8 words 8 words 16 words 32 words 64 words
2 stations (master station -> slave station)
Number of link Remote register (RWr)
points per 1 8 words 8 words 16 words 32 words 64 words
(slave station -> master station)
slave station
(Note 2) (Note 160 points 320 points 640 points
Remote I/O (RX, RY) 96 points each 96 points each
3) each each each
Occupies Remote register (RWw)
12 words 12 words 24 words 48 words 96 words
3 stations (master station -> slave station)
Remote register (RWr)
12 words 12 words 24 words 48 words 96 words
(slave station -> master station)
128 points 128 points 224 points 448 points 896 points
Remote I/O (RX, RY)
each each each each each
Occupies Remote register (RWw)
16 words 16 words 32 words 64 words 128 words
4 stations (master station -> slave station)
Remote register (RWr)
16 words 16 words 32 words 64 words 128 words
(slave station -> master station)

(Note 1) If the points which can be reserved as the device for the CC-Link in the NC side (RX, RY) does not satisfy 8192
points, the number of points which can be reserved is the max. number of link points per one system. The
remote register (RWw, RWr) is also in the same manner.
(Note 2) The final station of the local stations has 30 points.
(Ex.) If 4 stations are occupied, the number of link points=32 × 3 + 30 = 126 points
(Note 3) The number of link points per slave station can be calculated from the number of occupied stations and cyclic
setting as follows.
Version Cyclic setting Expression
Ver.1.10 - RX/RY Number of occupied stations×4×8 (Point)
1 time RWr/RWw Number of occupied stations×4 (Word)
Ver.2.00 RX/RY (Number of occupied stations×4-2)×Cyclic setting×8 (Point)
2 times or more
RWr/RWw Number of occupied stations×4×Cyclic setting (Word)

Refer to "CC-Link(Master/Slave) Specifications Manual(BNP-C3039-214)" on parameter setting.

II - 386
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

Item CC-Link master/local module

The number of occupied
1 to 4 stations (Select by parameter)
stations (Local stations)
Transmission speed Can select from 156kbps / 625kbps / 2.5Mbps / 5Mbps / 10Mbps (Select by parameter)
Communication method Polling method
Synchronous method Frame synchronization method
Encoding method NRZI method
Transmission path Bus (conforming to EIA RS485)
Transmission format Conforms to HDLC
Error control system CRC(X16 + X12 + X5 + 1)
64 modules Note that the following conditions must be satisfied.

Condition 1:
(1×a)+(2×b)+(3×c)+(4×d) ≤ 64
a: Number of modules occupying 1 station
b: Number of modules occupying 2 stations
c: Number of modules occupying 3 stations
Ver. 1.10
d: Number of modules occupying 4 stations

Condition 2:
(16×A)+(54×B)+(88×C) ≤ 2304
A: Number of remote I/O stations ≤ 64
B: Number of remote device stations ≤ 42
C: Number of local stations, standby master stations, intelligent device stations ≤ 26
64 modules Note that the following conditions must be satisfied.

Condition 1:
(a+a2+a4+a8)+(b+b2+b4+b8)×2+(c+c2+c4+c8)×3+(d+d2+d4+d8)×
4 ≤ 64
(a×32+a2×32+a4×64+a8×128)+(b×64+b2×96+b4×192+b8×384)+(c
×96+c2×160+c4×320+c8×640)+(d×128+d2×224+d4×448+d8×896) ≤ 8192
(a×4+a2×8+a4×16+a8×32)+(b×8+b2×16+b4×32+b8×64)+(c×12+c2
×24+c4×48+c8×96)+(d×16+d2×32+d4×64+d8×128) ≤ 2048

Maximum number of a : Number of modules that occupy 1 station which are set to "Single".
connected stations b : Number of modules that occupy 2 stations which are set to "Single".
c : Number of modules that occupy 3 stations which are set to "Single".
d : Number of modules that occupy 4 stations which are set to "Single".
a2: Number of modules that occupy 1 station which are set to "Double".
b2: Number of modules that occupy 2 stations which are set to "Double".
Ver. 2.00
c2: Number of modules that occupy 3 stations which are set to "Double".
d2: Number of modules that occupy 4 stations which are set to "Double".
a4: Number of modules that occupy 1 station which are set to "Quadruple".
b4: Number of modules that occupy 2 stations which are set to "Quadruple".
c4: Number of modules that occupy 3 stations which are set to "Quadruple".
d4: Number of modules that occupy 4 stations which are set to "Quadruple".
a8: Number of modules that occupy 1 station which are set to "Octuple".
b8: Number of modules that occupy 2 stations which are set to "Octuple".
c8: Number of modules that occupy 3 stations which are set to "Octuple".
d8: Number of modules that occupy 4 stations which are set to "Octuple".

Condition 2:
{(16×A)+(54×B)+(88×C)} ≤ 2304
A: Number of remote I/O stations ≤ 64
B: Number of remote device stations ≤ 42
C: Number of local stations, standby master stations, intelligent device stations ≤ 26
(Note) For checking the number of modules to connect, the check sheet can be downloaded from CC-Link
Partner Assorciation's website.
Check it in advance.
URL http://www.cc-link.org/jp/cclink/info_ver.html
Remote station No. 1 to 64

II - 387
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

Item CC-Link master/local module

Version 1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable (terminal resistor of 110Ω used)
Transmission speed Maximum overall cable distance
156 kbps 1200 m
625 kbps 900 m
Maximum overall cable 2.5 Mbps 400 m
distance and station to 5 Mbps 160 m
station cable length 10 Mbps 100 m

Station to station cable length is 20 cm or longer regardless of the transmission speed.

(Note) When CC-Link Ver.1.00 compliant cables are mixed, the cable length between stations and the
maximum total length of the cable should follow the specifications for CC-Link Ver.1.00.
Version 1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable
(3-core twisted pair cable with shield)
Connection cable
This can be used with the cables made by different manufacturers as long as they are Ver.1.10 compliant
cables.
- Automatic return function
RAS function
- Slave station cut-off function
(Note)
- Error detection by the link special relay/register

(Note) "RAS" is short for "Reliability", "Availability" and "Serviceability".

II - 388
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

11.1.2 Usable Functions

Of all the CC-Link functions, the following functions can be used with the NC.

( ○ : Available ×: Not available −: Not relevant)

MELSEC NC module
Function item Master station
Master station Local station Local station
(Note 1)
Method

Ver.1.10 ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver.2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○
Communication between master station and remote I/
O station ○ - ○ -

Communication between master station and remote

device station ○ - ○ -

Communication between master station and local

station ○ ○ ○ ○

Mixed system communication ○ ○ ○ ○

Reserved station function ○ - ○ -
Master function

Error cancel station setting function ○ - ○ -

Data link status setting when the master station CPU
has an error ○ ○ ○ ○

Registration of parameters in E2PROM ○ - - -

Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty
station ○ ○ ○ ○

Module reset function using the sequence program ○ ○ - -

Data link stop/restart ○ ○ ○ ○
Parameter registration function ○ ○ ○ ○
Automatic refresh function ○ ○ ○ ○
Scan synchronization Synchronous mode ○ - ○ -
function Asynchronous mode ○ ○ - -
Setting & display function

16-point display
LED diagnosis status 16-point display
(A1SJ61QBT11)
Station number setting Parameters
Baud rate setting
Parameters
Mode setting switch Module front panel switches

Condition setting H/W switch (SW1)

Automatic return function ○ ○ ○ ○

Slave station cut-off function ○ - ○ -
Other station data link status (SB/SW) ○ ○ ○ ○
RAS function

Offline test ○ ○ ○ ○
Online test ○ ○ ○ ○
Monitor diagnosis ○ ○ × ×
Standby master function ○ - ○ -
Temporary error cancel station designation function ○ - ○ -
Exclusive instruction

READ instruction / SREAD instruction ○ ○ × ×

WRITE instruction / SWRITE instruction ○ ○ × ×

RIRD instruction / RIWT instruction ○ ○ * *

* Not supported by M70V (TypeB) and M70 (TypeB).

(Note 1) When using HN577 (2ch), both two channels cannot be configured as a master station.
(Note 2) Refer to "CC-Link(Master/Slave) Specifications Manual(BNP-C3039-214)" on parameter setting.

II - 389
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

[Configurable combination at NC side when using HN577 (2ch)]

( ○ : Available ×: Not available −: Not relevant)
1 ch 2 ch
(CC-Link module 1 side) (CC-Link module 2 side)
Master ×
Master ○
Local ○
Master ○
Local ○
Local ○

11.1.2.1 Machine Input/Output Signal Allocation By CC-Link

Input/output device allocation when HN571 is mounted is as shown below.
RIO only With CC-Link communication
RIO1 RIO2 RIO3 RIO1 RIO2 RIO3 CC-Link communication
X00 X100 X200 X00 X100 X200 X0
Input : : : : : : :
XFF X1FF X2FF XFF X1FF X2FF X5FF
Y00 Y100 Y200 Y00 Y100 Y200 Y0
Output : : : : : : :
YFF Y1FF Y2FF YFF Y1FF Y2FF Y5FF

(Note) When using CC-Link communication, do not duplicate the devices used by actual RIO.

11.1.2.2 File Register By CC-Link

Device Description
R8300 to R9799 User backup area
R9800 to R9899 User work area

II - 390
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

11.1.3 Communication Data

11.1.3.1 Communication Data Flow
The flow of data communicated by the CC-Link’s link scan is as follows.
(The master station and local station of MELSEC CPU can be also mixed.)

NC (Master station) NC (Local station)

Built-in PLC Built-in PLC

Local station Remote device Remote I/O

Devices Devices
(1) station station
(1) (1) (1)
X device, etc. RX RY RX RY Y device, etc.
RX

RY (2) RX (2) (2) (2) RX

Y device, etc. RY RY X device, etc.

(3) (3) (3)

R device, etc. RWr (3) RWw RWw
RWr R device, etc.

(4) (4) (4) (4)

R device, etc. RWw RWr RWw RWr R device, etc.

<Flow of data>
Lisk scan
Transmission data
Automatic refresh
(When master station/local station is NC.)

(1) By executing a link scan, data in the remote I/O station, and remote device station's remote input (RX) and local
station's remote output (RY) are transmitted to the master station's remote input (RX) and the local station's remote
output (RY).
(2) By executing a link scan, data in the master station's remote output (RY) is transmitted to the remote I/O station and
remote device station's remote output (RY) and the local station's remote input (RX).
(3) By executing a link scan, data in the remote device station's remote register (RWr) and the local station's remote
register (RWw) is transmitted to the master station's remote register (RWr) and the local station's remote register
(RWw).
(4) By executing a link scan, data in the master station's remote register (RWw) is transmitted to the remote device
station's remote register (RWw) and the local station's remote register (RWr).

II - 391
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

11.1.3.2 Register Allocation

Allocation of remote input, remote output, remote register by protocol version is as follows.

11.1.3.2.1 Ver.1 mode

(1) Ver.1 remote input and remote output
Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station Local station
Master station
(Station No.1: Occupied 1 station) (Station No.2: Occupied 2 stations) (Station No.4:Occupied 1 station) (Station No.5: Occupied 1 station)

Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote output RY

RX F RX 0 RY F RY 0 RY F RY 0
For station
No. 1 RX 1F RX 10 RY 1F RY 10 RY 1F RY 10
RX 2F RX 20 RY 2F RY 20 RX0F RX00 RY 2F RY 20
For station
No. 2 RX 3F RX 30 RY 3F RY 30 RX1F RX10 RY 3F RY 30
RX 4F RX 40 RY 4F RY 40 RX2F RX20 RY 4F RY 40
For station
No. 3 RX 5F RX 50 RY 5F RY 50 RX3F RX30 RY 5F RY 50
RX 6F RX 60 RY 6F RY 60 X0F X00 RY 6F RY 60
For station
No. 4 RX 7F RX 70 RY 7F RY 70 X1F X10 RY 7F RY 70
RX 8F RX 80 RY 8F RY 80 RY 8F RY 80
For station
No. 5 RX 9F RX 90 RY 9F RY 90 RY 9F RY 90

The last two bits of the local station cannot be used.

[Ver.1 RX/RY]

Master station <- Local station/Remote device station/Remote I/O station

(a) Master station
- The input status from the local station (RY), remote device station and remote I/O station (RX) is stored.
- Two words are used per station.
(b) Local station
- Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote output (RY) of the address corresponding to the host
station number.
- The input status from the remote device station, remote I/O station (RX) and other remote local stations is stored.
- Two words are used per station.

II - 392
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station (Station No.4 Local station
Master station (Station No.1 : Occupied 1 stations) (Station No.2 : Occupied 2 stations) : Occupied 1 stations) (Station No.5 : Occupied 1 stations)

Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote input RX

For station RY F to RY 0 RX F to RX 0 RX F to RX 0
No. 1
RY 1F to RY 10 RX 1F to RX 10 RX 1F to RX 10
For station RY 2F to RY 20 RX 2F to RX 20 RY0F to RY00 RX 2F to RX 20
No. 2 RY 3F to RY 30 RX 3F to RX 30 RY1F to RY10 RX 3F to RX 30
For station RY 4F to RY 40 RX 4F to RX 40 RY2F to RY20 RX 4F to RX 40
No. 3
RY 5F to RY 50 RX 5F to RX 50 RY3F to RY30 RX 5F to RX 50
For station RY 6F to RY 60 RX 6F to RX 60 Y0F to Y00 RX 6F to RX 60
No. 4
RY 7F to RY 70 RX 7F to RX 70 Y1F to Y10 RX 7F to RX 70
For station RY 8F to RY 80 RX 8F to RX 80 RX 8F to RX 80
No. 5
RY 9F to RY 90 RX 9F to RX 90 RX 9F to RX 90

The last two bits of the local station cannot be used.

[Ver.1 RX/RY]

Master station -> Local station/Remote device station/Remote I/O station

(a) Master station
- The output status to the local station (RY), remote device station and remote I/O station (RX) is stored.
- Two words are used per station.
(a) Local station
- The data received from the remote device station, remote I/O station (RY), and master station (RY) is stored.
- Two words are used per station.

II - 393
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

(2) Ver.1 remote register

Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station (Station No.4 Local station
Master station (Station No.1 : Occupied 1 stations) (Station No.2 : Occupied 2 stations) : Occupied 1 stations) (Station No.5 : Occupied 1 stations)

Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Remote register RWw

For station RWr 01 to RWr 00 RWw 01 to RWw 00 RWw 01 to RWw 00

No. 1
RWr 03 to RWr 02 RWw 03 to RWw 02 RWw 03 to RWw 02
For station RWr 05 to RWr 04 RWw 05 to RWw 04 RWr 01 to RWr 00 RWw 05 to RWw 04
No. 2
RWr 07 to RWr 06 RWw 07 to RWw 06 RWr 03 to RWr 02 RWw 07 to RWw 06
For station RWr 09 to RWr 08 RWw 09 to RWw 08 RWr 05 to RWr 04 RWw 09 to RWw 08
No. 3
RWr 11 to RWr 10 RWw 11 to RWw 10 RWr 07 to RWr 06 RWw 11 to RWw 10
For station RWr 13 to RWr 12 RWw 13 to RWw 12 RWw 13 to RWw 12
No. 4
RWr 15 to RWr 14 RWw 15 to RWw 14 RWw 15 to RWw 14
For station RWr 17 to RWr 16 RWw 17 to RWw 16 RWw 17 to RWw 16
No. 5
RWr 19 to RWr 18 RWw 19 to RWw 18 RWw 19 to RWw 18

[Ver.1 RWr/RWw]

Master station <- Local station/Remote device station

(a) Master station
- The input status from the local station (RWw) and remote device station (RWr) is stored.
- Four words are used per station.
- Area for the remote I/O station is also secured.
(b) Local station
- Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote output (RWw) of the address corresponding to the
host station number.
- The input status from the remote device station (RWr) and other local stations is stored.
- Four words are used per station.
- Area for the remote I/O station is also secured.

II - 394
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station (Station No.4 Local station
Master station (Station No.1 : Occupied 1 stations) (Station No.2 : Occupied 2 stations) : Occupied 1 stations) (Station No.5 : Occupied 1 stations)

Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Remote register RWr

For station RWw 01 to RWw 00 RWr 01 to RWr 00 RWr 01 to RWr 00

No. 1
RWw 03 to RWw 02 RWr 03 to RWr 02 RWr 03 to RWr 02
For station RWw 05 to RWw 04 RWr 05 to RWr 04 RWw 01 to RWw 00 RWr 05 to RWr 04
No. 2
RWw 07 to RWw 06 RWr 07 to RWr 06 RWw 03 to RWw 02 RWr 07 to RWr 06
For station RWw 09 to RWw 08 RWr 09 to RWr 08 RWw 05 to RWw 04 RWr 09 to RWr 08
No. 3
RWw 11 to RWw 10 RWr 11 to RWr 10 RWw 07 to RWw 06 RWr 11 to RWr 10
For station RWw 13 to RWw 12 RWr 13 to RWr 12 RWr 13 to RWr 12
No. 4
RWw 15 to RWw 14 RWr 15 to RWr 14 RWr 15 to RWr 14
For station RWw 17 to RWw 16 RWr 17 to RWr 16 RWr 17 to RWr 16
No. 5
RWw 19 to RWw 18 RWr 19 to RWr 18 RWr 19 to RWr 18

[Ver.1 RWr/RWw]

Master station -> Local station/Remote device station

(a) Master station
- The output status to the remote device station (RWw) and all local stations (RWr) is stored.
- Four words are used per station.
- Area for the remote I/O station is also secured.
(b) Local station
- The data received from the remote device station (RWw) and master station (RWw) is stored.
- Four words are used per station.
- Area for the remote I/O station is also secured.

II - 395
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

11.1.3.2.2 Ver.2 mode

(1) Ver.2 remote input and remote output

Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station (Station No.4 : Local station
(Station No.1 : Occupied (Station No.2 : Occupied Occupied 1 station, set to “Single”) (Station No.5 : Occupied
Master station 1 station, set to “Double”) 2 stations, set to “Single”) (8 points+8 points reserved) 1 station, set to “Single”)

Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote output RY Remote input RX

For station RX F to RX 0 RY F to RY 0 RY F to RY 0
No. 1
RX 1F to RX 10 RY 1F to RY 10 RY 1F to RY 10
For station RX 2F to RX 20 RY 2F to RY 20 RX0F to RX00 RY 2F to RY 20
No. 2 RX 3F to RX 30 RY 3F to RY 30 RX1F to RX10 RY 3F to RY 30
For station RX 4F to RX 40 RY 4F to RY 40 RX2F to RX20 RY 4F to RY 40
No. 3
RX 5F to RX 50 RY 5F to RY 50 RX3F to RX30 RY 5F to RY 50
For station
No. 4
RX 6F to RX 60 RY 6F to RY 60 X07 to X00 RY 6F to RY 60

For station RX 7F to RX 70 RY 7F to RY 70 RY 7F to RY 70
No. 5 RY 8F to RY 80
RX 8F to RX 80 RY 8F to RY 80

The last two bits of the local station cannot be used.

[Ver.2 RX/RY]

Master station <- Local station/Remote device station/Remote I/O station

(a) Master station
- The input status from the local station (RY), remote device station and remote I/O station (RX) is stored.
- The number of used points changes depending on the number of occupied stations and the extended cyclic
setting. (Refer to "Performance Specification".)
- For remote I/O station, the number of used points can be set to 8, 16 points, or 32 points with parameter.
(b) Local station
- Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote output (RY) of the address corresponding to the host
station number.
- The input status from the remote device station, remote I/O station (RX) and other remote local stations is stored.
- The input status from the remote device station, remote I/O station (RX), and other local stations is stored. (Refer
to "Performance Specification".)
- For remote I/O station, the number of used points can be set to 8, 16 points, or 32 points with parameter of the
master station.

(Note) Refer to "CC-Link(Master/Slave) Specifications Manual(BNP-C3039-214)" on parameter setting.

II - 396
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station (Station No.4 : Local station
(Station No.1 : Occupied (Station No.2 : Occupied Occupied 1 station, set to “Single”) (Station No.5 : Occupied
Master station 1 station, set to “Double”) 2 station, set to “Single”) (8 points+8 points reserved) 1 station, set to “Single”)

Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote input RX

For station RY F to RY 0 RX F to RX 0 RX F to RX 0
No. 1 RY 1F to RY 10 RX 1F to RX 10 RX 1F to RX 10
For station RY 2F to RY 20 RX 2F to RX 20 RY0F to RY00 RX 2F to RX 20
No. 2 RY 3F to RY 30 RX 3F to RX 30 RY1F to RY10 RX 3F to RX 30
For station RY 4F to RY 40 RX 4F to RX 40 RY2F to RY20 RX 4F to RX 40
No. 3
RY 5F to RY 50 RX 5F to RX 50 RY3F to RY30 RX 5F to RX 50
For station
RY 6F to RY 60 RX 6F to RX 60 Y07 to Y00 RX 6F to RX 60
No. 4
For station RY 7F to RY 70 RX 7F to RX 70 RX 7F to RX 70
No. 5 RX 8F to RX 80
RY 8F to RY 80 RX 8F to RX 80

The last two bits of the local station cannot be used.

[Ver.2 RX/RY]

Master station -> Local station/Remote device station/Remote I/O station

(a) Master station
- The output status to the local station (RY), remote device station and remote I/O station (RX) is stored.
- The number of used points changes depending on the number of occupied stations and the extended cyclic
setting. (Refer to "Performance Specification".)
- For remote I/O station, the number of used points can be set to 8, 16 points, or 32 points with parameter.
(a) Local station
- The data received from the remote device station, remote I/O station, and master station (RY) is stored.
- The number of used points changes depending on the number of occupied stations and the extended cyclic
setting. (Refer to "Performance Specification".)
- For remote I/O station, the number of used points can be set to 8, 16 points, or 32 points with parameter of the
master station.

(Note) Refer to "CC-Link(Master/Slave) Specifications Manual(BNP-C3039-214)" on parameter setting.

II - 397
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

(2) Ver.2 remote register

Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station (Station No.4 : Local station
(Station No.1 : Occupied (Station No.2 : Occupied Occupied 1 station, set to “Single”) (Station No.5 : Occupied
Master station 1 stations, set to “Double”) 2 station, set to “Single”) (8 points+8 points reserved) 1 station, set to “Single”)

Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Remote register RWw
RWr 01 to RWr 00 RWw 01 to RWw 00 RWw 01 to RWw 00
For station RWr 03 to RWr 02 RWw 03 to RWw 02 RWw 03 to RWw 02
No. 1 RWw 05 to RWw 04
RWr 05 to RWr 04 RWw 05 to RWw 04
RWr 07 to RWr 06 RWw 07 to RWw 06 RWw 07 to RWw 06
For station RWr 05 to RWr 04 RWw 05 to RWw 04 RWr 01 to RWr 00 RWw 05 to RWw 04
No. 2
RWr 07 to RWr 06 RWw 07 to RWw 06 RWr 03 to RWr 02 RWw 07 to RWw 06
For station RWr 09 to RWr 08 RWw 09 to RWw 08 RWr 05 to RWr 04 RWw 09 to RWw 08
No. 3
RWr 11 to RWr 10 RWw 11 to RWw 10 RWr 07 to RWr 06 RWw 11 to RWw 10
For station RWr 13 to RWr 12 RWw 13 to RWw 12 RWw 13 to RWw 12
No. 5 RWr 15 to RWr 14 RWw 15 to RWw 14 RWw 15 to RWw 14

[Ver.2 RWr/RWw]

Master station <- Local station/Remote device station

(a) Master station
- The input status from the local station (RWw) and remote device station (RWr) is stored.
- The number of used points changes depending on the number of occupied stations and the extended cyclic
setting. (Refer to "Performance Specification")
- Area for the remote I/O station is also secured.
(b) Local station
- Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote register (RWw) of the address corresponding to the
host station number.
- The input status from the remote device station (RWw) and other local stations is stored.
- Four words are used per station.
- Area for the remote I/O station is also secured.

II - 398
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station (Station No.4 : Local station
(Station No.1 : Occupied (Station No.2 : Occupied Occupied 1 station, set to “Single”) (Station No.5 : Occupied
Master station 1 stations, set to “Double”) 2 station, set to “Single”) (8 points+8 points reserved) 1 station, set to “Single”)

Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Remote register RWr
RWw 01 to RWw 00 RWr 01 to RWr 00 RWr 01 to RWr 00
For station RWw 03 to RWw 02 RWr 03 to RWr 02 RWr 03 to RWr 02
No. 1 RWr 05 to RWr 04
RWw 05 to RWw 04 RWr 05 to RWr 04
RWw 07 to RWw 06 RWr 07 to RWr 06 RWr 07 to RWr 06
For station RWw 05 to RWw 04 RWr 05 to RWr 04 RWw 01 to RWw 00 RWr 05 to RWr 04
No. 2 RWr 07 to RWr 06
RWw 07 to RWw 06 RWw 03 to RWw 02 RWr 07 to RWr 06
For station RWw 09 to RWw 08 RWr 09 to RWr 08 RWw 05 to RWw 04 RWr 09 to RWr 08
No. 3
RWw 11 to RWw 10 RWr 11 to RWr 10 RWw 07 to RWw 06 RWr 11 to RWr 10

For station RWw 13 to RWw 12 RWr 13 to RWr 12 RWr 13 to RWr 12

No. 5 RWw 15 to RWw 14 RWr 15 to RWr 14 RWr 15 to RWr 14

[Ver.2 RX/RY]

Master station -> Local station/Remote device station

(a) Master station
- The output status to the remote device station (RWw) and all local stations (RWr) is stored.
- The number of used points changes depending on the number of occupied stations and the extended cyclic
setting. (Refer to "Performance Specification")
- Area for the remote I/O station is also secured.
(b) Local station
- The data received from the remote device station (RWw) and master station (RWw) is stored.
- Four words are used per station.
- Area for the remote I/O station is also secured.

II - 399
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

11.1.3.3 Automatic Refresh

Data transfer between the CC-Link master/local module and the NC built-in PLC device is performed automatically. Set
the destination device to automatically refresh in the following parameters.
Parameter #24014+40(n-1) “RX dev name” to #24025+40(n-1) “SW dev No.”
(n=Slot No.)
The devices possible to set as destination devices in the automatic refresh are as follows.
Device name Device range RX,RY,SB RWr,RWw,SW
X X0 to X5FF (Do not duplicate the devices used by actual I/O) RX only ×
Y Y0 to Y5FF (Do not duplicate the devices used by actual I/O) RY only ×
M M0 to M10239 ○ ○
L L0 to L511 ○ ○
B B0 to B1FFF ○ ○
D D0 to D2047 ○ ○
R R8300 to R9799, R9800 to R9899 (User area) ○ ○
W W0 to W1FFF ○ ○
SB SB0 to SB1FF SB only ×
SW SW0 to SW1FF × SW only

II - 400
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

11.1.3.4 Occupied Number of Stations of the System and Settable Range of the Device
The device range allocated for CC-Link remote I/O (RX, RY) and remote register (RWw, RWr) varies depending on the
number of occupied stations (actual number of link points) set per system. In order to operate the NC and CC-Link
normally, calculate the device range in the expressions in the blow table, and confirm that the settable range is not
exceeded.
RX,RY,SB RWr,RWw,SW Settable device name Settable device range
Min.: X0
RX only - X
Max.: X5FF - Actual number of link points
Min.: Y0
RY only - Y
Max.: Y5FF - Actual number of link points
Min.: M0
○ ○ M
Max.: M10239 - Actual number of link points
Min.: L0
○ ○ L
Max.: L511 - Actual number of link points
Min.: B0
○ ○ B
Max.: B1FFF - Actual number of link points
Min.: D0
○ ○ D
Max.: D2047 - Actual number of link points
Area 1:
Min.: R8300
Max.: R9799 - Actual number of link points
○ ○ R
Area 2:
Min.: R9800
Max.: R9899 - Actual number of link points
Min.: W0
○ ○ W
Max.: W1FFF - Actual number of link points

(Note 1) NC or PLC ladder does not operate normally when the device area secured for CC-Link is duplicated with the
actual machine input/output signal used by the NC or machine side or when it is outside the range indicated
above.
When the NC does not start normally, reduce the number of connections or set the station No. to a smaller one
so that the actual number of link points is reduced and the device area falls in the range indicated in the table
above. Then, restart the NC and set the CC-Link parameters again.
(Note 2) When changing CC-Link system configuration, always confirm that the parameters of all the NCs connected
with CC-Link is within the range.
(Ex.) Setting range when the occupied number of stations is 30 per one CC-Link system:
(1) Actual number of remote input/output points (Actual number of link points): Occupied number of
stations(30)*32=960 points
(2) Setting range of RX and RY when they are set (in the order of RX, and then RY) with M devices: RY
device: M10239–Actual number of link points (960)= to M9279
RX device: M9279 – Actual number of link points (960)= to M8319
(with securing 960 points from the head of RY)

M0
M8319
M device area RX M9279 960 points
RY M10239 960 points
L0
L device area
L511

* Make sure not to duplicate the L device area.

II - 401
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

11.1.4 Standby Master Function

This function enables the data link to continue working by switching to a standby master station (backup station for the
master station) if a malfunction occurs in the master station.
The master station can return to online even during data link controlled by the standby master station, and prepares itself
for standby master station's system down. (Master station duplex function)
NC can function both as a master and standby master station.

Controlling : controls data link in CC-Link system

Waiting : stands by for failure of the station controlling data link CC-Link system
Data link is controlled by the master station Standby master station
Master station Station No.1 : occupies1 station

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Controlling Station No.2 : occupies2 stations Station No.4 : occupies1 station Waiting

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

Master station is down -> The standby master station controls data link Standby master station
Master station Station No.1 -> 0*1

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Station No.2 : occupies 2 stations Station No.4 : occupies 1 station Controlling

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

Master station returns to normal and comes back online ->

Master station prepares itself for standby master station’s failure
Master station Standby master station
Station No.0 -> 1*2 occupies1 station Station No.0

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Waiting Station No.2 : occupies 2 stations Station No.4 : occupies 1 station Controlling

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

To the next page

*1 When data link control is transferred to standby master station at the master station's
system down, the station No. of the standby master station is changed to "0".
*2 When master station comes back online as a standby master station, the master station's
No. changes to the one set in the network parameter "Standby master station No.".

II - 402
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

Continued from the previous page

Failure occurs in the standby master station -> Data link is controlled by the master station
Master station
Station No. 1 -> 0 Standby master station

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Controlling Station No.2 : occupies 2 stations Station No.4 : occupies 1 station

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

Standby master station returns to normal and comes back online ->
Standby master station prepares itself for the master station's system down Standby master station
Master station Station No.1 : occupies 1 station

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Controlling Station No.2 : occupies 2 stations Station No.4 : occupies 1 station Waiting

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

11.1.4.1 How to Set

To enable this function, set the parameter #24010+40(n-1) (n=slot No.) "Standby master station".
When NC is master station, set the station No. of standby master station.
When NC is standby master station, set this parameter to "1".
When NC is neither master nor standby master station, set "0".

II - 403
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

11.1.4.2 Overview of Link Data Transmission When Standby Master Function is in Use
Below is the outline of how link data are transmitted when standby master function is in use.
(1) When master station controls data link:
(a) Master station

Standby master station (waiting)

Master station (controlling) Station No.1 : occupies 1 station

Remote Remote Remote Remote

input RX output RY input RX output RY
Remote I/O station
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F
Station No.2 : occupies 1 station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F
Remote I/O station
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
Station No.3 : occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

Data sent from the master station to the remote input RX and remote register RWr in the standby master
station (shown by the shaded areas in the above diagram) are used as output data when the master station
becomes faulty; these data should be saved in another device using the sequence program.
When the master station becomes faulty, the saved data are transferred to the remote output RY and remote
register RWw in the standby master station using the sequence program.

(b) Master station input

Standby master station (waiting)

Master station (controlling) Station No.1 : occupies 1 station

Remote Remote Remote Remote

input RX output RY input RX output RY
Remote I/O station
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F
Station No.2 : occupies 1 station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F
Remote I/O station
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
Station No.3 : occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the standby master station are used as input
data by the standby master station when local stations are operating; thus these data don't need to be saved in
another device.

II - 404
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

(2) When master station is faulty --> Standby master station controls data link
(a) Standby master station output

Standby master station (controlling)

Master station Station No.1 -> 0

Remote Remote Remote Remote

input RX output RY input RX output RY
Remote I/O station
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F
Station No.2 : occupies 1 station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F
Remote I/O station
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
Station No.3 : occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the standby master station by the sequence
program are then transmitted to other stations as output data.
When NC is master station, and a mounted module other than NC has failure,
the alarm "Z67 CC-Link communication error B9FF" will occur.c

(b) Standby master station input

Standby master station (controlling)

Master station Station No.1 -> 0

Remote Remote Remote Remote

input RX output RY input RX output RY
Remote I/O station
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F
Station No.2 : occupies 1 station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F
Remote I/O station
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
Station No.3 : occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

Data in the standby master station's shaded areas are either input or retained in accordance with the
parameter "Setting of data link faulty station".
(When NC is standby master station, the said parameter is #24003+40(n-1) (n=slot No.) "set of faulty sta.")

II - 405
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

(3) Master station's recovery --> Standby master station controls data link
(a) Standby master station output

Master station (waiting) Standby master station (controlling)

Station No.0 -> 1 : occupies 1 station Station No.0

Remote Remote Remote Remote

input RX output RY input RX output RY
Remote I/O station
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F
Station No.2 : occupies 1 station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F
Remote I/O station
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
Station No.3 : occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

Data sent from the standby master station to the remote input RX and remote register RWr in the master
station (shown by the shaded areas in the above diagram) are used as the output data in case of the standby
master station's failure.
In the event that the standby master station becomes inoperable, the saved data are then transferred to the
master station's remote output RY and remote register RWw using the sequence program.

(b) Standby master station input

Master station (waiting) Standby master station (controlling)

Station No.0 -> 1 : occupies 1 station Station No.0

Remote Remote Remote Remote

input RX output RY input RX output RY
Remote I/O station
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F
Station No.2 : occupies 1 station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F
Remote I/O station
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
Station No.3 : occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

Data sent to the master station's remote output RY and remote register RWw are used by the master station
as input information to operate the local stations. Thus, there is no need to save these data in another device.

II - 406
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

(4) Standby master station becomes faulty --> Master station controls data link:
(a) Master station output

Master station (controlling)

Station No.1 -> 0 Standby master station

Remote Remote Remote Remote

input RX output RY input RX output RY
Remote I/O station
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F
Station No.2 : occupies 1 station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F
Remote I/O station
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
Station No.3 : occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

Data sent to the master station's remote output RY and remote register RWw using the sequence program are
transmitted to the other station as output information.

(b) Master station input

Master station (controlling)

Station No.1 -> 0 Standby master station

Remote Remote Remote Remote

input RX output RY input RX output RY
Remote I/O station
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F
Station No.2 : occupies 1 station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F
Remote I/O station
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
Station No.3 : occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

The information in the master station's shaded areas is either input or held in accordance with the setting of the
network parameter "Setting of data link faulty station".
(If NC is master station, the said parameter is #24003+40(n-1) (n=slot No.) “set of faulty sta.”)

II - 407
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

11.1.4.3 Points to Note When Using Standby Master Function

(1) Only one standby master station resides in a single data link system.

(2) The total number of stations is 64, including standby master station.

(3) If a master station error is detected in the initial state (before parameter communication starts), switching to the
standby master station won't be carried out.

(4) The data link control is automatically transferred to the standby master station in the event of the master station's
failure, but refreshing cyclic data won't be instructed.
Thus, give this instruction using the sequence program. For the instruction timing, see "ON/OFF Timings of Link
Special Relays (SB) Relating to Standby Master Function".
After instructing this, the information before the master station failure is output to each station.

(5) When the data link is being controlled by the standby master station, the master station's parameters cannot be
updated.

(6) The error (error code: B39A) occurs at the standby master station if there is a difference between the standby
master station's station number setting and the number set with the master station's parameter "Standby master
station No.”.
If this error has occurred, change the master station's parameter setting, or change the station No. setting switch of
the standby master station, and then reset the standby master station.
(Note) If master station or standby master station is NC,the said parameter is
#24001+40(n-1) (n=slot No.) “station No.” , and
#24010+40(n-1) (n=slot No.) “stanby master sta.”

(7) If you detach the master station's terminal block and then attach it again without turning OFF the power while the
master station is controlling data link, both the master and standby master stations operate as master stations,
which will result in an error (error code: BBC5). ("ERR." LED flashes)

(8) When the data link control is transferred to the standby master station at the master station's failure, the “ERR.”
LED of the standby master station flashes.
(This is because the station No. of the standby master station will change from the one set with a parameter to zero
and the standby master station becomes absent. Data link itself is normally performed.)
To avoid this, set the standby master station to be an error cancel station.
(When NC is master station, the parameter to change is #24126+15(n-1) (n=n-th connected station) “reserved
station”.)
But, if you set the station to be an error cancel station, other errors can't be detected. Thus, be careful.

(9) Among the data sent from (the station operating as) the master station to (the station operating as) the standby
master station, the point number and range of devices that will be saved by the sequence program may differ
according to the system used.
In the case of the example in "Overview of Link Data Transmission When Standby Master Function is in Use" (1),
the above-mentioned devices are in the shaded areas between RX20 and RX5F.

II - 408
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

11.1.4.4 ON/OFF Timings of Link Special Relays (SB) Relating to Standby Master Function
The following shows the ON/OF timings of the link special relays (SB) relating to the standby master function.

ON
SB70 OFF
(Master station information)

SB7B ON
(Host master/standby master operation status)
OFF
ON(a)
SB5A OFF
(Master switching request acknowledgement)
ON(b)
SB5B OFF
(Master switching request complete) *
ON(c)
SB01 (User operation) OFF
(Refresh instruction at standby master switching)
ON
SB42 OFF
(Refresh instruction acknowledgement status at
standby master switching) ON(d)
SB43 OFF
(Refresh instruction complete status at standby
master switching)

* When SB5B is turned ON, the sequence program switches RX to RY and RWr to RWw.
In addition, SB01 is turned ON by the sequence program. (Enclosed with dotted lines)

(a) to (d) in the diagram correspond to those in the program example in "Program Example When Using Standby Master
(Master Station Duplex) Function" (4).

II - 409
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

11.1.4.5 Program Example When Using Standby Master (Master Station Duplex) Function
A program when using the standby master function (master station duplex function) is generated under the
following conditions.
(1) System configuration

Standby master station

Master station Station No.1 : occupies 1 station

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Station No.2 : occupies 2 stations Station No.4 : occupies 1 station

(2) Master station's parameter setting (in the case of the slot No.1)
#24001 station No. 0
#24010 stanby master sta. 1
#24014 RX dev name X
#24015 RX dev No. 1000
#24016 RY dev name Y
#24017 RX dev No. 1000
#24018 RWr dev name W
#24019 RWr dev No. 0
#24020 RWw dev name W
#24021 RWw dev No. 100
#24022 SB dev name SB
#24023 SB dev No. 0
#24024 SW dev name SW
#24025 SW dev No. 0

(3) Standby station's parameter setting (in the case of the slot No.1)
#24001 station No. 1
#24010 stanby master sta. 1
#24014 RX dev name X
#24015 RX dev No. 1000
#24016 RY dev name Y
#24017 RX dev No. 1000
#24018 RWr dev name W
#24019 RWr dev No. 0
#24020 RWw dev name W
#24021 RWw dev No. 100
#24022 SB dev name SB
#24023 SB dev No. 0
#24024 SW dev name SW
#24025 SW dev No. 0

II - 410
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

Program example when using standby master function (master station duplex function)
(a) to (d) on the left correspond to those of the timing chart in "ON/OFF Timings of Link Special Relays (SB)
Relating to Standby Master Function".
Initial device set
SM402
0 SET M10

SET M11

Control ladder when master station is in operation

X0 X1 X0F SB7B
12 MC N0 M0

N0 M0

Save RX and RWr data in W device at master switching

SB5A
(a) 31 BMOVP K4X1000 W1000 K8

BMOVP D1000 W1500 K16

Set the saved data in W device to RY and RWw.

SB5B
(b) 61 BMOVP W1000 K4Y1000 K8

BMOVP W1500 D2000 K16

Refresh change instruction request ON

SB5A SB5B
(c) 90 SET SB1

Refresh change instruction request OFF

SB42 SB43
(d) 105 RST SB1

= K0 SW43 SET M10

M10
125 A control program when master station is operating

127 MCR N0

Control ladder when standby master station

(local station operation) is in operation
X0 X1 X0F SB7B
128 MC N1 M1

N1 M1

M11
155 A control program when standby master station
(local station) is operating

SM400
RST M10

157 MCR N1

158 END

M10 Control start relay when master station is in operation

M11 Control start relay when standby station is in operation
SB1 Refresh instruction at standby master switching
SB42 Refresh instruction acknowledgment status at standby master switching
SB43 Refresh instruction completion status at standby master switching
SB5A Master switching request acknowledgment
SB5B Master switching request complete
SB7B Host master/standby master operation status
SM400 Always ON
SM402 1 scan ON after RUN
SW43 Refresh instruction at standby master switching result
W1000 RX save device
W1500 RWr save device
X0 Module malfunction
X0F Module ready
X1 Host data link status

II - 411
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

(5) When data link control is compulsorily transferred from standby master station to master station
The parts enclosed with broken or dotted lines in the program example (4) need to be changed to as shown below.

M10
A control program when master station is operating

M200 SB46
SET SB0C

MCR N0

M11
A control program when standby master station
(local station) is operating

SB5D
RST SB0C

M10 Control start relay when master station is in operation

M11 Control start relay when standby station is in operation
M200 Forced master switching request
SB0C Forced master switching
SB46 Forced master switching executable status
SB5D Forced master switching completion signal

II - 412
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

11.1.5 Transient Function

Transient function enables data to be written and read with an arbitrary station when needed, without constantly
transmitting data. To enable this function, the counterpart station should also support the
transient function.
This function follows RIRD/RIWT instructions.
This function is available at the PC's medium speed. Do not use this at the PC's high speed.
Two or more instructions cannot be executed at a time. Thus, give the second instruction after completing the first
instruction.

Transient Instruction (RIRD/RIWT) format

Compatible
Available instructions: G.RIRD, G.RIWT
instruction mode
Available devices
Data to Consta
Bit devices Word devices Pointer Digit Index
set nt
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Extension
Available instructions: G.RIRD, GP.RIRD, G.RIWT, GP.RIWT
instruction mode
Available devices
Data to Consta
Bit devices Word devices Pointer Digit Index
set nt
X Y M L F B SB T SM V T C D R W SW Z SD K H P
S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
D2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

G.RIRD Un S1 D1 D2
G.RIRD/RIWT
7Step

GP.RIRD Un S1 D1 D2
GP.RIRD/RIWT
11Step

* These instructions are directed to the master/local stations of QnCPU, QnACPU, ACPU or either MELDAS master or local
station, or the positioning module AJ65BT-D75P2-S3.

(1) Data to set

RIRD instruction
Data to set Description
Un Start I/O number of the host station
S1 Start number of the host station's device in which control data is stored.
D1 Start number of the device where data to read is stored.
Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of reading.
D2
At an abnormal completion, (D2)+1 device also turns ON.

RIRD instruction
Data to set Description
Un Start I/O number of the host station
S1 Start number of the host station's device in which control data is stored.
D1 Start number of the device where data to write is stored.
Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of writing.
D2
At an abnormal completion, (D2)+1 device also turns ON.

* For the Un value, specify U1 for channel 1, U2 for channel 2, and U3 for channel 3.

II - 413
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

(2) Control data

RIRD instruction
Setting
Device Item Data to set Set by (*1)
range
Stores the status when the instruction is complete.
(S1)+ 0 Completion status 0 : No error (normal completion) - System
Other than 0 : Error code
Specify the station numbers of the local and intelligent device
(S1)+ 1 Station number 0 to 64 User
stations.

b15 b8 b7 b0
Access code
(S1)+ 2 See (3). User
Attribute code
Access code Attribute code

(S1)+ 3 Device number Specify the device start number. (*2) User
1 to 480 (*3)
(S1)+ 4 Number of points to read Specify the read data count (in word units). User
1 to 32 (*4)

RIRW instruction
Setting
Device Item Data to set Set by (*1)
range
Stores the status when the instruction is complete.
(S1)+ 0 Completion status 0 : No error (normal completion) - System
Other than 0 : Error code
Specify the station numbers of the local and intelligent device
(S1)+ 1 Station number 0 to 64 User
stations.

b15 b8 b7 b0
Access code
(S1)+ 2 See (3). User
Attribute code
Access code Attribute code

(S1)+ 3 Device number Specify the device start number. (*2) User
1 ～ 480(*3)
(S1)+ 4 Number of points to write Specify the number of data to write (in word units). User
1 ～ 10(*4)

(*1) User: means the data set by a user before executing the exclusive instruction.
System: NC stores the execution result of the exclusive instruction.
(*2) See the manuals of the local or intelligent device station where reading is performed.
(*3) The maximum number of data to be read.
Specify the value within the receive buffer area setting range which has been set by the parameter.
(*4) To read the PLC CPU's devices when the counterpart CPU is other than QCPU (Q mode), QCPU (A mode)
and QnACPU/AnUCPU, the setting range shall be 1 to 32 words.

II - 414
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 CC-Link

(3) Access code/Attribute code

Device memory in the CPU
Device type
Device meaning Name Unit Access code Attribute code
Bit Word
Input relay X ○ Hexadecimal 01H
Output relay Y ○ Hexadecimal 02H
Internal relay M ○ Decimal 03H
Latch relay L ○ Decimal 83H
Link relay B ○ Hexadecimal 23H
Timer (contact) T ○ Decimal 09H
Timer (coil) T ○ Decimal 0AH
Timer (present value) T ○ Decimal 0CH
Retentive timer (contact) ST ○ Decimal 89H
Retentive timer (coil) ST ○ Decimal 8AH
Retentive timer (present
value)
ST ○ Decimal 8CH 05H

Counter (contact) C ○ Decimal 11H

Counter (coil) C ○ Decimal 12H
Counter (present value) C ○ Decimal 14H
Data register D ○ Decimal 04H
Link register W ○ Hexadecimal 24H
File register R ○ Decimal 84H
Link special relay SB ○ Hexadecimal 63H
Link special register SW ○ Hexadecimal 64H
Special relay SM ○ Decimal 43H
Special register SD ○ Decimal 44H

(Note) Devices other than shown above cannot be accessed.

When accessing a bit device, specify the address with 0 or a multiple of 16.

(4) Error code

Error code Error description
When the Un value is outside the specified range.
2111
When CC-Link module is not mounted on the expansion module specified by Un
When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module.
2112
When the module specified by Un is not a special function module.
4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction.
4003 When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect.
4004 When the instruction contains the device which cannot be used.
4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used.
When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range.
4101 When the storage data or constants of the device specified by the
instruction exceeds the allowable range.
F110 Time out
When the other transient process instruction is being executed (in a
busy state).

(5) Points to note

If you want to execute the next transient instruction after checking the completion device (D2), give the next
transient instruction during the falling edge of the completion device (D2).
If the next transient instruction is given during the rising edge, the control data's completion status ((S1)+0) will be
F114 (Error completion).

II - 415
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 External PLC link

II - 416
12
Appendix

II - 417
MITSUBISHI CNC
12 Appendix

12.1 Example of Faulty Circuit

Wrong configurations of circuits are shown below. Correct the circuitry, if any.

Faulty circuit producing errors 　　　　⇒ 　　　　　　Correct circuit

(1) Circuit containing OR

　　　　　　

(2) Rounding circuit

X1 Y10
X1 Y10
X2 X3 X4
X2 Y11 Necessity
X1 X2 Y11
X3 X4 X3 X4

　　　　　　　
Whether or not the Y10 condition includes X3, X4 and X2 is unknown

(3) Modification of loopback circuit

1
0
0
0
1

　　　　　　　

(4) Presence of a contact before RET, FEND,

or MCR circuit

RET RET

　　　　　　　

II - 418
III PERIPHERAL
DEVELOPMENT
ENVIRONMENT
 1
Outline

III - 1
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 Outline

This CNC supports the user PLC development environment which uses the Mitsubishi integrated FA software MELSOFT
Series (GX Developer), which is the PLC development tool for the Mitsubishi PLC MELSEC Series.
This manual explains user PLC development environment using GX Developer, mainly usage specific to MITSUBISHI
CNC.
(Note 1) Do not connect GX Developer while displaying PLC onboard.
(Note 2) Do not use GX Developer simultaneously when several PCs are connected with NC.

1.1 Software Configuration

Data conversion software

package GX Converter - (1)
RS-232C (For MELSEC)
PLC onboard PLC development tool
or
GX Developer - (2)
QnA simulator Ethernet (For MELSEC)
IBM PC/AT *1
CNC controller Compatible PC
*1: IBM PC/AT compatible personal computer with Windows OS

(1) GX Converter (data conversion software package)

The GX Converter is a tool that carries out file conversion of GX Developer data files and the following:
GX Converter is an add-on tool of GX Developer and is started from the GX Developer menu.
- Ladder list files and comment text files output by the CLST6L
- Alarms and operator messages created by the text editor
- Data files of commercially available spreadsheet software, word processors and editors
This tool is a software package for various MELSEC support. GX Converter needs to be used with the versions
following GX Developer Version 3 (SW3D5C-GPPW). Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual for function
details.

(2) GX Developer (PLC development software package)

GX Developer is a programming software package (model name: SW8D5C-GPPW) designed for Mitsubishi
Electric's MELSEC Series programmable logic controllers. By performing operations similar to those of the
MELSEC Series, you can develop user PLC ladders for the MITSUBISHI CNC Series. Note that some functions
specific to the "MELSEC Series" may not be unavailable.
For MITSUBISHI CNC Series sequence program development, we recommend you to use GX Developer Version 4
(SW4D5C-GPPW) or later. For function details, refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual.

III - 2
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
1.2 Operating Environment

1.2 Operating Environment

The tools that make up the development environment can be used with the personal computer that satisfies the following
operating environment of GX Developer.
The following are the specifications of the "GX Developer Version 8" operating environment. For the specifications of
different versions, check them in the respective Operating Manuals (startup).

Item Contents
Personal computer Personal computer in which Windows operates.
Peripheral device
PC CPU module MELSEC-Q Series-compatible PC CPU module (CONTEC CO., Ltd.)
Personal computer CPU See "Applicable operating system and the corresponding required PC
main body Required memory performance" shown below.
Available hard disk space 200MB or more
Disk drive CD-ROM drive (if using CD-ROM media)
Resolution 800x600 pixels or higher *1
Monitor However, set the resolution to 1024x768 pixels or higher when using the CC IE
Controldiagnostics function.
Needed when communicating with the programmable
controller CPU.
RS-232 port
(Required when accessing the Basic model QCPU, QCPU
(A mode), ACPU, QnACPU, and FXCPU)
Can be used when communicating with the QCPU (Q
Communication interface
mode), LCPU, QSCPU, FXCPU(FX3G).
USB port
(Excludes the Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU and remote I/O
modules.)
Can be used when communicating with the Built-in Ethernet
Ethernet port
port QCPU and LCPU
Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System *2
Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System
Microsoft Windows NT R Workstation Operating System Version 4.0
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System
Operating system *3 Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System
Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System
Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System
Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System
Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Operating System
Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System
Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System
Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System
Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System

*1: Resolution 1024 × 768 pixels or higher is recommended for Windows Vista or Windows 7.
*2: Windows 95 does not support the structured text language function.
*3: 64-bit Windows XP and 64-bit Windows Vista are not supported.

III - 3
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 Outline

Applicable operating system and the corresponding required PC performance.

Required PC performance
Item
CPU Required memory
Windows 95 (Service Pack 1 or higher) Pentium 133MHz or higher*4 32MB or more*5
Windows 98 Pentium 133MHz or higher*4 32MB or more*5
Windows Millennium Edition Pentium 150MHz or higher*4 32MB or more*5
WindowsNT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 3 or higher) Pentium 133MHz or higher*4 32MB or more*5
Windows 2000 Professional Pentium 133MHz or higher*4 64MB or more*5
Windows XP Pentium 300MHz or higher*4 128MB or more*5
Windows Vista Pentium 1GHz or higher 1GB or more
1GB or more (32-bit Windows 7)
Windows 7 Pentium 1GHz or higher
2GB or more (64-bit Windows 7)
*4: Pentium R 300MHz or higher is recommended when creating label programs.
*5: 64MB or more is recommended when creating label programs.

(1) Instruction for use of the online manual

Addition of memory ensures more comfortable use.
(2) Instruction for use of the PDF data
Use with addition of personal computer memory ensures comfortable operation.
(3) Depending on the operating environment of the personal computer, editing on multiple screens opened for
programming or like may cause a memory shortage error.
When the personal computer is used with only GX Developer booted, the number of edit screens should be up to 40
as a guideline.
(4) When Microsoft Windows XP , Windows Vista or Windows 7 is used, the following new functions cannot be used.
If any of the following new functions is used, this product may not operate normally.
- Start of application in Windows compatible mode
- Fast user switching
- Remote desktop
- Big fonts (Details setting of Screen properties)
(5) In Windows Vista and Windows 7, log in as a user having User authority or higher.
(6) When Windows 7 is used, the following new functions cannot be used.
- Windows XP Mode
- Windows Touch

III - 4
 2
GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI
CNC

III - 5
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC

The GX Developer functions explained here are those supported by this CNC in the "offline functions" operated with the
GX Developer independently, and the "online functions" carried out in connection with the CNC controller. Refer to the
enclosed Operating Manual for function details.

2.1 Function Support Conditions (General Section)

The GX Developer outline functions supported by this CNC are listed below.
The ◎ mark indicates functions that can be used with this CNC. An r mark indicates that the function cannot be used
because it is related to "MELSEC Series" characteristic functions. The function details during on-line are described in the
next section.

List of general section functions (1) ◎ : Possible, △ : Limitedly possible, × : Not possible

Program type Support Remarks

Ladder ◎
List ◎
SFC ×
MELSAP-L ×
Function block ×

Function Menu Sub menu Support Remarks

New project ◎
Open project ◎
Close project ◎
Save ◎
Save as ◎
Delete project ◎
Verify ◎
Copy ◎
New ◎
Copy ◎
Edit Data
Delete ◎
Rename ◎
Change PLC type △ Fixed Q4A
Import from GPPQ format file ◎
Import from GPPA format file ×
Import from FXGP(WIN) format
×
Project Import file file
Import from FXGP(DOS) format
×
file
Import from TEXT ,CSV format file ◎
Export to GPPQ format files ◎
Export to GPPA format files ×
Export file Export to FXGP(WIN) format file ×
Export to FXGP(DOS) format file ×
Export to TEXT ,CSV format file ◎
Registration macros ◎
Macro utilize ◎
Macro
Delete macros ◎
Macro reference path ◎
Printer setup ◎
Print ◎
Start new GX Developer session ◎
Exit GX Developer ◎

III - 6
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.1 Function Support Conditions (General Section)

List of general section functions (2) ◎ : Possible, △ : Limitedly possible, × : Not possible

Function Menu Sub menu Support Remarks

Undo ◎
Restore after ladder conversion ◎
Cut ◎
Copy ◎
Paste ◎
Insert line ◎
Delete line ◎
Insert row ◎
Delete row ◎
Insert NOP batch ◎
Delete NOP batch ◎
Draw line ◎
Delete line ◎
Change TC setting ◎
Read mode ◎
Write mode ◎
Open contact ◎
Close contact ◎
Open branch ◎
Edit Close branch ◎
Coil ◎
Application instruction ◎
Vertical line ◎
Horizontal line ◎
Delete vertical line ◎
Ladder symbol Delete horizontal line ◎
Rising pulse △
Falling pulse △
Rising pulse open branch △ When
expanding PLC
Falling pulse close branch △ instruction
Invert operation results △ mode.
Convert operation results to rising Refer to
pulse △ "#6452".
Convert operation results to falling
pulse △

Comment ◎
Statement ◎
Documentation
Note ◎
Statement/Note block edit ◎
Find device ◎
Find instruction ◎
Find step no. ◎
Find character string ◎
Find contact or coil ◎
Replace device ◎
Find/Replace Replace instruction ◎
Change open/close contact ◎
Replace character string ◎
Change module start address ×
Replace statement/note type ◎
Cross reference list ◎
List of used devices ◎

III - 7
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC

List of general section functions (3)

◎ : Possible, △ : Limitedly possible, × : Not possible

Function Menu Sub menu Support Remarks

Convert ◎

Convert
Convert (All programs being edited) ◎
Refer to
Convert (Online change) ◎ "#6455".
Comment ◎
Statement ◎
Note ◎
Alias ◎
Macro instruction format display ◎
Comment format 4*8 characters ◎
3*5 characters ◎
Alias format display Replace device name and display ◎
Arrange with device and display ◎
Toolbar ◎
Status bar ◎
View
50% ◎
75% ◎
100% ◎
Zoom
150% ◎
Specify ◎
Auto ◎
Project data list ◎
Instruction list ◎
9 contacts ◎
Set the contact
11 contacts ◎
Elapsed time ×
Refer to "List of on-line section Refer to "2.2 Function Support
Online
functions" Conditions (Online Section)"
PLC diagnostics △ Limited partly
MELSECNET(II)/10/H diagnostics ×
Ethernet diagnostics ×
Diagnostics
CC-Link/CC-Link/LT ×
System monitor ×
Online module change ×

III - 8
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.1 Function Support Conditions (General Section)

List of general section functions (4)

◎ : Possible, △ : Limitedly possible, × : Not possible

Function Menu Sub menu Support Remarks

Check program ◎
Merge data ◎
Check parameter ×
Read ×
Write ×
Transfer ROM
Verify ×
Write to file ×
Delete unused comments ◎
Clear all parameters ×
Read IC memory card ×
Write IC memory card ×
IC memory card
Read image data ×
Tools
Write image data ×
Start ladder logic test ×
Connection ×
Disconnection ×
Set TEL data TEL data ×
AT command ×
Call book ×
Intelligent function utility Utility list ×
Customize keys ◎
Change display color ◎
Options △ Limited partly
Create start-up setting file ◎
Cascade ◎
Tile vertically ◎
Window Tile horizontally ◎
Arrange icons ◎
Close all windows ◎
CPU error ×
Special relay/register ×
Help Key operation list ◎
Product information ◎
Connect to MELFANSweb ◎

III - 9
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC

2.2 Function Support Conditions (Online Section)

The GX Developer functions supported by this CNC are listed below.
The ◎ mark indicates functions that can be used currently with this CNC. An r mark indicates that the function cannot be
used because it is related to "MELSEC Series" characteristic functions.

List of online section functions (1)

◎ : Possible, △ : Limitedly possible, ×: Not possible

Menu Sub menu Detailed function Support Remarks

PC side I/F ◎
PLC side I/F △ Only for QnACPU
Transfer setup Other station ×
Network route ×
Co-existence network route ×
Target memory ◎
Title ◎
File selection ◎
Device data ×
Read from Program ×
PLC Common ×
Local ×
Refresh view ◎
Free space volume ◎
Create title ×
Target memory △
Title ◎
File selection ◎
Device data ×
Write to PLC Program ×
Common ×
Local ×
Free space volume ◎
Create title ×
Target memory ◎
Title ◎
File selection ◎
Verify with
Program ×
PLC
Refresh view ◎
Free space volume ◎
Create title ×
Write to PLC Write the program memory to ROM ×
(Flash ROM) Write to PLC (Flash ROM) ×
Target memory ◎
Title ◎
Delete PLC File selection ◎
data Refresh view ◎
Free space volume ◎
Create title ×
Change PLC
×
data attributes
Read PLC user data ×
PLC user data Write PLC user data ×
Delete PLC user data ×

III - 10
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.2 Function Support Conditions (Online Section)

List of online section functions (2)

◎ : Possible, △ : Limitedly possible, ×: Not possible

Menu Sub menu Detailed function Support Remarks

ON/OFF state ◎
Monitor mode/Start/Stop Scan time display ◎
CPU state display ◎
Monitor [Write mode] ×
Start monitor [All windows] ◎
Stop monitor [All windows] ◎
Change current value monitor
[Decimal] ◎

Change current value monitor

[Hexadecimal] ◎

Local device monitor ×

Device ◎
Connect ◎
Coil ◎
Setting value ◎
Current value ◎
Monitor format : Bit & word ◎
Monitor format : Bit ◎
Monitor format : word ◎
Device batch
Display : 16bit integer ◎
Display : 32bit integer ◎
Display : Real number ×
Display : ASCII character ×
Value : DEC ◎
Value : HEX ◎
Monitor T/C set value Reference program ◎
Device test ◎
Device ◎
ON/OFF/Current ◎
Setting value ◎
Connect ◎
Coil ◎
Display : 16bit integer ◎

Entry data monitor

Display : 32bit integer ◎
Display : Real number ×
Display : ASCII character ×
Value : DEC ◎
Value : HEX ◎
T/C setting value, Local label
Reference program ◎

Device test ◎
Buffer memory batch ×
Device ◎
Monitor condition setup
Step No. ◎
Device ◎
Monitor stop condition setup
Step No. ◎
Program monitor list ×
Interrupt program monitor list ×
Scan time measurement ×
Entry ladder monitor ◎
Delete all entry ladder ◎

III - 11
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC

List of online section functions (3)

◎ : Possible, △ : Limitedly possible, ×: Not possible

Menu Sub menu Detailed function Support Remarks

FORCE ON ◎
FORCE OFF ◎
Toggle force ◎
Device test Device ◎
Forced input output registration/
×
Debug cancellation
Buffer memory ×
Debug ×
Skip execution ×
Partial execution ×
Step execution ×
Wizard setting/execution ◎
Individual setting/execution ◎
Trace data storage destination × Cannot select
No. of traces △ Setting range: 1 to 8192
Trigger position ◎
Trace additional information ×
Trace point setup △ Interval, step No. not possible
STRA instruction,step No. not
Trigger point setup △ possible
Trace Sampling trace
Limit to device type/No. of
Device point setup △ points
Trace operation ◎
Trace status ◎
Trace result ◎
CSV file creation ◎
Trace settings file operation ◎
Trace settings PLC operation ◎
Data retention at power OFF ×
PLC status ◎
RUN ◎
STOP ◎
PAUSE △ Use when writing into ROM
Remote operation Latch clear ×
STEP-RUN ×
Reset ×
Operation during RUN ×
Specify execution destination ×
Register ◎
Keyword setup Delete ◎
Disable ◎
Clear PLC memory ×
Target memory △
Format PLC memory
Format Type ×
Arrange PLC
×
memory
YY MM DD Hr. Min. Sec. ◎
Set time Day of week ×
Specify execution destination ×

III - 12
 3
Preparation

III - 13
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Preparation

3.1 Installing the Tools

In this CNC's PLC development environment, it is assumed that the various tools are used with an IBM PC/AT
compatible personal computer. Prepare each tool so that it is IBM PC/AT compatible personal computer.
Refer to the enclosed Operating Manual (Startup) and Operating Manual for the setup and start procedures of each tool.

3.2 Preparation for Serial (RS-232C) Communication

3.2.1 Connecting the Serial Cable
The serial port connected with the CNC controller differs depending on the model. Also, it may require a special branch
cable. Refer to the connection manual of that model.
A bit selection parameter "#6451/bit5" needs to be set to "1" when using GX Developer with serial communication (RS-
232C). Refer to "Common Items : NC-related Parameters" for details.

Between the IBM PC/AT compatible personal computer that uses GX Developer and the CNC controller, use an RS-
232C serial cable equivalent to the one shown below in the RS-232C connection diagram.

[Note]
The cables given in the connection diagrams of the GX Developer Operating Manual cannot be used.

Personal
NC side
computer side
(25-pin D-SUB)
(9-pin D-SUB)
Cable
Pin Pin
Signal name connection and Signal name
No. No.
signal direction
CD 8 1 DC
SD 2 2 RD
RD 3 3 SD
DR (DSR) 6 4 ER (DTR)
SG 7 5 SG
ER (DTR) 20 6 DR (DSR)
CS (CTS) 5 7 RS (RTS)
RS (RTS) 4 8 CS (CTS)
22 9 RI

* The above shows a general RS-CS method connection format.

* The pin Nos. of dotted lines are not used.

III - 14
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
3.2 Preparation for Serial (RS-232C) Communication

3.2.2 Setting the Connection Target

The connection target must be specified before performing online operations from GX Developer to the CNC
controller.Perform the following operation with GX Developer to start the setting screen.

[Online] → [Connection Setup]

Set the following items only. Leave the other items unchanged from the initial values.

(1) Personal computer side

Interface : [Serial]
Serial port name : [COM1] or [COM2]
Baudrate : [19.2Kbps]

(2) PLC side

Interface : [CPU unit]

■ SW7D5-GPPW setting screen

III - 15
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Preparation

3.3 Preparation for Ethernet Communication

Procedures for preparing for Ethernet communication is as follows. Refer to each respective instruction manual for
details.
(1) Confirm IP address of the CNC unit.
(2) Set IP address for the personal computer side.
(3) Connect the Ethernet cable.
(4) Set the connection target of GX Developer.

3.3.1 Confirming IP Address of the CNC Unit

Confirm the IP address set in the CNC unit. IP address is set in the parameters below.

Base common
Item Details Setting example
parameter
IP address of the CNC unit looking from
#1926 Global IP address 192.168.200.1
outside
#1927 Global Subnet mask Subnet mask of #1926 255.255.255.0

Example given here is the case where "192.168.200.1" is set as the initial value after SRAM clear.

3.3.2 Setting IP Address for the Personal Computer Side

For the personal computer for which GX Developer is available, IP address has to be set within the same subnet mask
as NC unit.
In the case of section 3.3.1, set the address other than "192.168.200.1", using from "192.168.200.0" to
"192.168.200.255".
Note that when other CNC and devices are connected on the same network, be careful not to duplicate the address with
other CNC and devices.

III - 16
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
3.3 Preparation for Ethernet Communication

3.3.3 Connecting the Ethernet Cable

Connect the Ethernet cable to the connector LAN1 (or LAN) of the control unit below. If the connector is already
connected, connect the cable to the HUB of the connection target, etc.

[M700VS Series] [M700VW Series]

LAN1

LAN

[M700 Series] [M70V/M70/E70 Series]

MITSUBISHI 

LAN1

LAN

III - 17
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Preparation

3.3.4 Setting the Connection Target

The connection target must be specified before performing online operations from GX Developer to the CNC controller.
The following two connection methods are supported when connecting with Ethernet. Use these accordingly.

- TCP protocol: Connection type used with typical networks. The communication amount is high so the speed is not
as fast, but the reliability is high. (A resend request is made when there is a lapse in communication.)
- UDP protocol: Connection-less type suitable for closed networks such as small-scale LAN. The reliability is not as
high, but the speed is fast. (A resend request is not made when there is a lapse in communication.)

Perform the following operation with GX Developer to start the setting screen.

[Online] → [Transfer Setup]

Set the following items in order. Leave the other items unchanged from the initial values.
Normally use connection setting example 1 (using TCP protocol) for setting.

Connection protocol
Connection setting Connection setting Connection setting
example 1 example 2 example 3
Setting item TCP UDP UDP
Interface Ethernet
PC side I/F
Protocol TCP UDP None
Interface Ethernet unit
Unit type name QJ71E71 AJ71QE71
Station No. 1
PLC side I/F
IP address Set CNC controller's IP address
Routing parameter conversion
Automatic conversion method
method
Other station Interface Other station (same network)

■ SW7D5-GPPW setting screen

III - 18
 4
Common Items

III - 19
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Common Items

4.1 Precautions before Development

Pay careful attention to the following items before developing sequence programs using the GX Developer.

CAUTION
Always observe the following precautions during work.

(1) PLC Type Selection

The PLC type must be set when newly creating programs, etc. Select the following CPU type when requested to
select the PLC type by the GX Developer. An error will occur during transfer of the sequence program to the CNC
controller if another PLC type is selected.

CAUTION
Select "Q4A" for CPU type.

(2) Device Setting

The number of device points must always be set when developing the sequence program for the CNC controller.
The sequence program will not be transferred to the CNC controller correctly if it is developed with the setting
values given later.

CAUTION
Always set the number of devices.

(3) PLC Instructions

MELSEC-specific PLC instructions cannot be used in the sequence program development for the CNC controller.
Only PLC instructions and formats in "II PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION" can be used.
The format, etc., are changed with some instructions. Refer to "Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each
Mode".

CAUTION
MELSEC-specific PLC instructions cannot be used.

(4) Saving the sequence program

The sequence program transferred from the GX Developer or PLC onboard to the CNC controller is stored in the
temporary memory. The temporary memory is erased when the power is turned OFF. (This is because the
sequence program stored in the internal flash ROM is validated when the power is turned ON again.)
Thus, if the sequence program is to be held even when the power is turned ON again, always write it to the internal
flash ROM.

CAUTION
Sequence programs that are not saved in the internal flash ROM are not held when the power is turned OFF.

III - 20
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.2 NC-related Parameters

4.2 NC-related Parameters

Each model has bit selection parameters related to GX Developer. If an appropriate value is not set in the parameters,
an error will occur in communication with GX Developer.

(1) GX Developer serial communication enabled

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ←Bit
#(6451) Data ( 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 )

0 : GX Developer communication disabled

Use No. 6451. 1 : GX Developer communication enabled

[Reference] #6451 corresponds to the low side of the file register R7825.

When bit5 is set to "0":

The serial port is not used for communication with GX Developer.
(When the serial port is used for another function)

When bit5 is set to "1":

The serial port is used for communication with GX Developer.
GX Developer can be connected to the 2ch of RS-232C.

III - 21
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Common Items

4.3 PLC Data Storage Areas

The M7 Series stores the PLC data in the internal flash ROM (hereinafter, internal F-ROM). The following shows the
storage area structure. (Refer to "PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION: User Memory Area Configuration and Size" on data
size.)

Standard

Control information

Sequence program
storage area

Control information

Storage area for

files other than
sequence programs
Messages, device
comments, etc.

The PLC data transferred from GX Developer or PLC onboard is executed with the following path.

(1) At power ON
The data is transferred from the internal F-ROM to the PLC processor execution area via the temporary memory D-
RAM, and is then executed.

Temporary memory PLC processor

area D-RAM execution area

Internal PLC RUN

F-ROM

- Set "1" to the rotary switch of the CNC unit. ("0" is set as default）.

(2) During PLC development

The PLC data transferred from the GX Developer or PLC onboard is stored in the volatile RAM (hereinafter, D-
RAM) for the temporary memory. The sequence program is transferred to the PLC processor execution area before
PLC execution, and is then executed.
The D-RAM in the temporary memory is not held when the power is turned OFF. If the data needs to be held even
after the power is turned OFF, it must be stored in the internal F-ROM.

PLC onboard

Conversion

Temporary memory PLC processor

GX Developer area D-RAM execution area
Transfer
Manual save

Internal PLC RUN

F-ROM

III - 22
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.3 PLC Data Storage Areas

(3) Areas that can be selected on GX Developer

The following table indicates the storage areas that can be selected for the online functions of GX Developer.

Selectable storage area

Function
[Target memory] Storage area (M7 Series)
Write to PLC, Delete PLC data, Format PLC memory Internal RAM/device memory Temporary memory D-RAM
Internal RAM/device memory Temporary memory D-RAM
Read from PLC, Verify PLC
IC memory card A (ROM) Internal F-ROM
Read from PLC (Checking the execution area size) IC memory card A (RAM) Execution area

(4) Display of storage area on GX Developer

Any of the storage areas that can be selected for the online functions of GX Developer can be specified as a [Target
memory] item on the corresponding operation screen. Also, pressing the [Title] button displays the comment of that
storage area if PLC data exists. It is not displayed if the storage memory is not fitted or the data does not exist.

The free space in the selected area will appear when the "Free space volume" button is pressed. "Largest
continuous volume" and "Total free space volume" have the following meanings.
"Largest continuous volume" : Free space in sequence program storage area
"Total free space volume" : Free space in sequence program storage area + other file storage areas
"Total free space volume" - "Largest continuous volume" : Free space in file storage areas other than
sequence program storage area

The following table indicates the relationships between the [Target memory] items and storage areas.

Target memory Meaning in M7 series Title indication Free area indication

Largest continuous volume: Free space in
Internal RAM/device TEMPORARY STORAGE
Temporary memory D-RAM sequence program storage area
memory AREA
Total free space volume: Total free space
Execution area size
IC memory card A (RAM) LAD.EXEC.SIZE AREA Not used (insignificant value)
confirmation
Largest continuous volume: Free space in
IC memory card A (RAM) Internal F-ROM FLASH ROM AREA sequence program storage area
Total free space volume: Total free space
Not used (cannot be
IC memory card B (RAM) None
selected)
Not used (cannot be
IC memory card B (RAM) None
selected)

III - 23
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Common Items

4.4 File Name

The PLC related data, such as the sequence programs and message data, are controlled and stored with the following
categories in this CNC. Therefore, they are also developed in the same categories.

CAUTION
If the data transferred does not follow the file name rule, unexpected operations will occur.
E.g. PLC program erasure

4.4.1 File Name Rule for Sequence Program, Parameter, and Device Comment

File name rule (Sequence program, parameter, device comment)

㹷㹶㹶㹶㹶㹶㹶㹶 . 㹕㹶㹶
Extensions (expresses file classification):
Automatically attached, depending on GX Developer or PLC
onboard
Arbitrary character string

Reserved character string or arbitrary character string

When storing data with GX Developer or PLC onboard, the data type is identified with the file name. Up to
8 one-byte alphanumeric characters (excluding the extension), hyphen (-) and underline (_) can be used
to the file name. The extension is automatically attached and expresses classification of the file.
Note that the first character may be reserved for expressing the data type.

[Caution] Reserved file names

The file name is reserved on the NC side if the following head character is used.
• "㹆"
Do not use file name in combination with this head character.

List of sequence program, parameter, and device comment

Storage
　 Data class Data type File name
quantity
Remarks

H+[Arbitrary character
High-speed process Execution type (scan) *1
string].WPG
Main process [Arbitrary character string].WPG Total 32 Execution type (scan) *1
1 Sequence program
Initialization process [Arbitrary character string].WPG programs Execution type (initialization) *1
Execution type (standby/low-
Standby process [Arbitrary character string].WPG
speed) *1
PLC parameters
2 Parameter PARAM.WPA (fixed) 1 parameter
Network parameters
Common for all sequence
Common comment COMMENT.WCD (fixed)
Total 10 programs
3 Device comment
comments For sequence programs having
Comment for each program [Arbitrary character string].WCD
same name

"Arbitrary character string" means a character string consisted of up to 8 one-byte alphanumeric

characters, hyphen (-) and underline (_).
*1: The execution type is the sequence program operation type designated with the parameters.

III - 24
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.4 File Name

4.4.2 File Name Rule for Message Data

There are two methods for the message data language selection. Method 2 (Method linked with language selection on
the setting and display screen) is recommended although both methods are available.

(Method 1) Specify with 3 bits of bit selection parameter #6453 bit 0 to 2. (Language selection method using PLC
alone)
(Method 2) Specify with display language selection parameter. (Base specifications parameter #1043) (Method
linked with language selection on the setting and display screen)

File name rule (Message data)

(Method 1) M N X x x x x x . W P G
Arbitrary character string 6 characters
(1st character has to be other than number)
Number (1 digit)
Reserved character

(Method 2) M N N x x x x x . W P G
Arbitrary character string 5 characters
Number (2 digits)
Reserved character

Alphanumeric characters, hyphen (-) and underline (_) can be used for the arbitrary character string. The
extension is automatically attached and expresses classification of the file.
Note that the first character may be reserved for expressing the data type.

Specify which method is valid with the name of the message file to be stored.
If the file with condition 1 and 2 exist together, the method 1 will be valid.

(Condition 1) Method 1 is valid when the first two characters of the file name is "M + 1-digit number".
(Condition 2) Method 2 is valid when the first three characters of the file name is "M + 2-digit number".

(1) Method 1
Language is specified with bit 3 of the bit selection parameter #6453 bit 0 to 2, and the No. corresponds to the No.
used in message file name.
List of message file name (Method 1)

Bit selection
Data class parameter Data type File name Storage quantity Storage quantity
#6453 bit0-2
0 1st language M1Xxxxxx.WPG
1 2nd language M2Xxxxxx.WPG
2 3rd language M3Xxxxxx.WPG It is not possible to store multiple files
3 4th language M4Xxxxxx.WPG having the same language Nos. even
Message One for each
if their names are different.A
(Method 1) 4 5th language M5Xxxxxx.WPG language
message confirming overwriting the
5 6th language M6Xxxxxx.WPG same language No. is displayed.
6 7th language M7Xxxxxx.WPG
7 8th language M8Xxxxxx.WPG

* "Xxxxxx" part of a file name consists of up to 6 arbitrary alphanumerical characters including hyphen (-)
and underline (_). Note that however, the third character "X" has to be other than numerical character.
(To avoid confusion with method 2.)

III - 25
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Common Items

(2) Method 2
Language is specified with the language parameter #1043 on the setting and display screen, and the No.
corresponds to the 2-digit No. used in message file name.
When no corresponding message file for a certain language parameter is stored, an English language display file
(M00xxxxx.WPG) is referred to as an alternative file. Thus, message data file for the English language display must
be stored.

List of message file name (Method 2)

Language parameter
Storage
Data class (Base specifications File name Remarks
quantity
parameter #1043)
0 (English) [mandatory] M00xxxxx.WPG
1 (Japanese) M01xxxxx.WPG
11 (German) M11xxxxx.WPG
12 (French) M12xxxxx.WPG
13 (Italian) M13xxxxx.WPG When no corresponding file for a certain language
parameter is stored, an English language display
14 (Spanish) M14xxxxx.WPG
One for each file (M00xxxxx.WPG), if stored, is referred to as an
Message 15 (Chinese -traditional-) M15xxxxx.WPG language alternative file.
(Method 2) 16 (Korean) M16xxxxx.WPG Total 8 It is not possible to store multiple files having the
languages same language Nos. even if their names ("xxxxx"
17 (Portuguese) M17xxxxx.WPG
part) are different. A message confirming
18 (Dutch) M18xxxxx.WPG overwriting the same language No. is displayed.
19 (Swedish) M19xxxxx.WPG
20 (Hungarian) M20xxxxx.WPG
21 (Polish) M21xxxxx.WPG
22 (Chinese -simplified-) M22xxxxx.WPG
If the message for a corresponding No. exists, it is displayed.
Other than above;up to 99
If not, an English file (M00xxxxx.WPG) is displayed.
Other than above;above 100 An English file (M00xxxxx.WPG) is displayed.

(3) Precautions
- Even if the file is made with the conventional specifications method 1, when the third character of the file name is
a numerical character, it may be identified as method 2 (language selection parameter.
(Example) "M1720V02.WPG", "M750MESS.WPG", "M65S-MES.WPG", etc.

- Files having the same No. and different arbitrary names are identified as the same files and will be overwritten.
(Example) "M1TEST.WPG" and "M1JAPAN.WPG", "M00ENG01.WPG" and "M00ENG02.WPG", etc.

- Files having the same arbitrary name ("xxxxx" part) and different method types are not identified as the same files
and will not be overwritten. If method 1 and 2 exist together, method 1 will be valid.
(Example) "M1TEST.WPG" and "M01TEST.WPG", "M1JAPAN.WPG" and "M01JAPAN.WPG", etc.

- Files that are not applied to condition 1 and 2 are not identified as a message file. They are identified as a
sequence program (ladder), instead.
(Example) "M0TEST.WPG", "M9MESS.WPG", "M0-1TEST.WPG", "M-01JPN.WPG", "MM00ENG.WPG", etc.

III - 26
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.5 Creating a Project

4.5 Creating a Project

GX Developer treats PLC related data such as sequence program and message data collectively as a "project".
In this section, the method of creating a project is explained.

4.5.1 Project
Project is a collection of sequence program, device comment, PLC message data and parameters. Usually, data is
controlled by the project level per machine type or version.

Project

Sequence program

Sequence program

PLC message data

PLC message data

Device comment

Device comment

Parameter

Item Details
Sequence program Sequence program for MITSUBISHI CNC (User PLC)
PLC message data This defines PLC messages such as alarm message and PLC switch.
This is the comment for a sequence program device.
Device comment There are "common comment" which is common for a project and "comment by program"
which is particular for each program.
Parameter This sets the device range and execution order of the sequence program.

(1) One project per GX Developer

Only one project can be edited with a GX Developer. Therefore, if two or more projects are to be edited, multiple GX
Developers must be operated.

(2) Device comment

Number to be
Comment type Details
created
Common
1 Common device comment for all the programs existed in the project.
comment
Comment by Same as the Device comment set for each program. Always set the same name as that of
program number of programs program.

III - 27
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Common Items

4.5.2 Operating Procedures

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the operation screen.

[Project] → [New Project]

Set the PLC series, PLC type and project name required to create a new project with the screen below.









(1) PLC series

Sets the series name of PLC (Programmable controller). Select "CNC(M6/M7)" or "QnACPU" here. Note that
selecting "CNC(M6/M7)" or "QnACPU" does not make a difference.
"CNC(M6/M7)" can be selected for GX Developer ver8.23Z or later version.
* E70 Series is included in "CNC(M6/M7)".

(2) PLC type

Set the PLC type. Set "Q4A" here.

(3) Program type / Label setting

Default values are set for these items. Refer to the enclosed Operating Manual for details.

(4) Project name / Title

Set drive/path+project name (8 or more characters can be set) with up to 154 one-byte alphanumerical characters
together. Title must be set with up to 32 one-byte characters.
Refer to the enclosed Operating Manual for details on the available characters.
When inputting/outputting built-in PLC editing function (PLC onboard function) and project data by turns, consider
the following restrictions and set.

Alphanumeri Alphanumeri Japanese

PLC onboard function Japanese input Number of characters
cal display cal input display
Project name ○ ○ × × 18 (abbreviated hereafter)
Title ○ ○ × × 32

III - 28
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.6 Setting the Parameters

4.6 Setting the Parameters

The GX Developer parameters must be set before the CNC controller sequence program can be developed with GX
Developer. The required parameter settings are shown below. Refer to the GX Developer's Programming Explanation for
details on each setting item.

- Setting the number of device points

- Setting the number of common pointer points
- Setting the program execution order

4.6.1 Parameter Setting Screen

(1) Displaying the project data list and Parameter Setting screen
Open the "Project data list" window with the following operations. Double-click on "PLC parameter" to open the
parameter setting screen. The same operation can be completed by designating the data type "Parameter" and
data name "PLC parameter" from the tool bar.

Double-click on "PLC parameter" under [View] → [Project data list].

Tool bar

Project data list window

PLC parameter

(2) Displaying the Parameter Setting screen

If the characters on the tab are "red", the default values are set.

III - 29
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Common Items

4.6.2 Setting the Number of Device Points

After creating the area (project) for controlling the sequence program, the number of devices used in that project must be
set first. This operation must be carried out each time a new project is created.
[Caution] An error will occur if the sequence program is downloaded to the CNC controller without completing this
operation.

Select the [Device] tab

Set the value for the number of device points on the following screen, and then click on [End].
Internal relay M: Change from [8K] to [10K]

Retentive timer ST: Change from [0K] to [64] ([NOTE] K is not added.)

Change 10K

Change 64

[Note] If a non-designated value is set, an error will occur when downloading to the CNC controller.

(1) When device setting value is illegal

If there is a problem with the device setting value, the following error dialog will appear when writing the sequence
programs to the CNC controller. Set the number of device points as explained above in this case.

III - 30
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.6 Setting the Parameters

4.6.3 Setting the Number of Common Pointer Points

When creating the sequence programs with the multi-program method, the number of common pointers must be set for
each sequence program. This operation must be carried out each time a new project is created and the parameter file is
written to the CNC controller.
[Note] The default value will be used for the number of common pointer points if this operation is not completed.

Select the [PLC System] tab

Set the "Common pointer No." value on the following screen, and then click on [End].

III - 31
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Common Items

4.6.4 Setting the Program Execution Order

When creating the sequence programs with the multi-program method, the execution method and execution order of
each sequence program must be set. This operation is carried out before the sequence program is executed with the
CNC controller. The parameter file must be written to the CNC controller.
[Caution] If this operation is not completed when using the multi-program method, an error will occur when RUN is
executed in the sequence program.

Select the [Program] tab

Select the sequence program name to be registered for execution from the program list on the left of the following
screen, and then press the "Insert" button. Select the execution mode from the registration program list on the right side.
After registering all sequence programs to be executed, click on [End].

III - 32
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.6 Setting the Parameters

4.6.5 Writing and Reading Parameters to and from the CNC Controller
When creating the sequence programs with the multi-program method, the parameter file must be written to the CNC
controller. The parameter file can also be read from the CNC controller and used with GX Developer.
The operation methods are the same as reading and writing the sequence programs.

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the operation screen.

[Online] → [Write to PLC]

On the following screen, choose the parameter [PLC/Network] file to be written from the [File selection] tab and click
[Execute].

[Note] As [Target memory], only [PLC RAM/Device memory] is valid.

Do not set the other tabs ([Device data], [Program], [Common], [Local]) than [File selection].

III - 33
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Common Items

4.7 Starting/Stopping the PLC

Before writing a sequence program, you must stop the PLC of the CNC controller.
PLC stop and restart, which is generally confirmed before and after the operation requiring PLC stop, can be done in
advance by the following procedures.

4.7.1 Operation Procedure

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the operation screen.

[Online] → [Remote operation] or Alt 㧗 6

On the following screen, set "STOP" or "RUN" in the [PLC] part under [Operation] and click [Execute]. The current status
is displayed in [PLC status] under [Connection target information].

[Note] Operations other than RUN and STOP cannot be executed.

The operation is completed when the following dialog appears. Click [OK]. The status after completion appears in [PLC
status] on the remote operation screen displayed behind. If the status does not change, check whether an alarm is
displayed or not on the CNC controller side.

III - 34
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.8 Ladder Program Writing during RUN

4.8 Ladder Program Writing during RUN

Ladder program writing during RUN (or RUN write/ online change) enables to edit and change sequence programs
without stopping PLC operation.

“Editing + conversion” operation

Update

Ladder program writing

during RUN
Executing status of
sequence program
STOP RUN
Normal writing

Update
PLC STOP due to writing

CAUTION
Only the person who knows well about sequence programs can execute ladder program writing during RUN.
When the RUN write is enabled, the modification will be immediately effective after the data editing and
conversion.
The machine might operate in unexpected way when the ladder program is incomplete.
Consider well the influence of the modification in advance. Also, always make sure that the system's safe
operation with the sequence programs.

4.8.1 Setting Ladder Program Writing during RUN

Turn ON the corresponding bit selection parameter and turn the power ON again to enable ladder program writing during
RUN.
(1) Bit selection parameter

Standard
# No. Bit Item Details Setting range
value
Enable ladder
Select whether to permit ladder program writing during
program writing
RUN to built-in PLC (in high-speed processing).
6455 Bit 6 during RUN (in 0,1 0
0: Not permit ladder program writing during RUN
high-speed
1: Permit ladder program writing during RUN
processing)
Select whether to permit ladder program writing during
Enable ladder
RUN to built-in PLC (except in high-speed processing).
6455 Bit 7 program writing 0,1 0
0: Not permit ladder program writing during RUN
during RUN
1: Permit ladder program writing during RUN

(2) Precautions
- These parameters will be enabled after the power is turned ON again.
- Turning ON only "#6455 Bit6 (Enable ladder program writing during RUN (in high-speed processing))" will not
effect. When setting "#6455 bit 6" to "1", also set "#6455 bit 7 (Enable ladder program writing during RUN)" to
"1".
- When "Enable ladder program writing during RUN (in high-speed processing)" is set to "1", high-speed processing
program will use 2,000 steps of execution area. Thus, when the programs have been of almost maximum size
before modification, an error may occur due to insufficient execution area after the modification.

III - 35
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Common Items

4.8.2 PLC Data Available for Ladder Program Writing during RUN
The following shows the PLC data which can be stored in CNC controller and available for ladder program writing during
RUN.

Table 4.8.2 Data type available for RUN write

Data class Data type GX Developer Onboard PLC edit

Sequence program (independent program method) × ×
High-speed
○ (Note 2) ○ (Note 2)
process
Sequence program Main process ○ ○
(Multi-program method)
(Note 1) Initialization
process ○ ○

Standby process ○ ○
Parameters, device comments and message data × ×

(Note 1) Only the program whose execution order has been registered in the parameter is available.
(Note 2) There are some restrictions on the contents of high-speed processing programs. (For the details,
refer to "4.8.6 Precautions".)

4.8.3 Data Unit for Writing

The following is the data unit available for ladder program writing during RUN. Ladder blocks are written at the
conversion after edited. Up to 512 steps are allowed to be written at once. File operation is not allowed in RUN write.

Table 4.8.3 Data unit for RUN write

Data unit GX Developer Onboard PLC edit

Ladder block (single/ multiple) ○ ○
File × ×

III - 36
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.8 Ladder Program Writing during RUN

4.8.4 Available Number of Steps for Writing

Ladder program writing during RUN is available under the condition that total number of steps for the sequence program
registered in the parameter does not exceed the maximum number of steps in the PLC processor execution area. (For
maximum number of steps in the execution area, refer to the machine's specifications.)
Note that when RUN write in high-speed processing is enabled, the maximum number of execution steps will be fixed to
2,000 steps. If the number of steps exceeds 2,000, NC will show an alarm and RUN write will be disabled.
The following shows the relation between the settings and available number of steps for RUN write.

Table 4.8.4.1 Settings and available number of steps (except for M700V/M70V/M70/E70 Series)

Setting of "Enable ladder

Number of steps available for writing or execution
program writing during RUN"
High-speed High-speed processing
Main process Main processing program
process program
Steps in main processing program ≦ (Maximum number of
ON ON ≦ 2,000 steps
execution steps - 2,000 steps)
OFF ON (Total number of steps in high-speed processing program and main processing program)
OFF OFF ≦ Maximum number of execution steps

In M700 Series, if RUN write in high-speed processing is enabled, the maximum execution steps will be fixed to 2,000
steps for high-speed process program and to 38,000 steps for main processing program.

Table 4.8.4.2 Settings and available number of steps (for M700 Series)

Setting of "Enable ladder

Number of steps available for writing or execution
program writing during RUN"
High-speed High-speed processing
Main process Main processing program
process program
ON ON ≦ 2,000 steps ≦ 38,000 steps
OFF ON (Total number of steps in high-speed processing program and main processing program)
OFF OFF ≦ 42,000 steps

If high-speed processing program does not need to be written during RUN, the available execution steps
for main processing program can be increased by setting OFF the bit selection parameter "Enable ladder
program writing during RUN (in high-speed processing)".

III - 37
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Common Items

4.8.5 Operation with GX-Developer

There are three ways to execute ladder program writing during RUN with GX Developer.
- Executing "Conversion (online)"
- Set the RUN write in "Options" window before executing "Conversion".
- Execute "Conversion" in "Monitor (write) mode" window.

4.8.5.1 Common "Conversion" Operation

Conversion procedure in RUN write is the same in any methods. Regardless of PLC status, either "RUN" or "STOP",
operation procedure is the same. When "Conversion" is executed, the following dialog box will be displayed.

(1) Pressing [Yes] button executes the RUN write, displaying the following dialog box.
Processing time of RUN write depends on the total number of steps used in the ladder programs and the points
where the steps are written in.

 Ignore (a)"There are xxx RUN write maintenance

steps remaining." in the completion dialog box.
CNC does not use such kind of steps.


   㩿㪸㪀 

(2) Pressing [No] button cancels the conversion and the RUN write, displaying the following dialog box.

III - 38
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.8 Ladder Program Writing during RUN

4.8.5.2 Executing "Conversion (online change)"

"Conversion (online change)", dedicated to RUN write, is provided separately from common conversion. After editing
ladder program as usual, do as follows for conversion. Further operation is the same as that in 4.8.5.1.

Select [Conversion] → [Conversion(online change)] or Press "shift" and "F4" key together.

4.8.5.3 Setting Ladder Program Writing during RUN before Executing "Conversion"
The following explains how to change the settings to execute ladder program writing during RUN instead of common
conversion. Display the setting screen with the following operation:

Select [Tool] → [Options] and [Program common] tab

Select "After conversion writing behavior" and "Step No. specification used in writing" in the following window, then click
[OK].
After this setting, RUN writing can be executed with the common conversion operation. Further operation is the same as
that in 4.8.5.1.

(1) Select "Write during RUN (while PLC is running)" in "After conversion writing behavior".
(2) Select "Absolute step No. (default)" in "Step No. specification used in writing".

III - 39
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Common Items

4.8.5.4 Executing "Conversion" in "Monitor (Write mode)"

"Monitor (Write mode)" is the monitor mode that enables editing, conversion, and ladder program writing during RUN
while executing ladder monitor.
Do as follows:

Select [Online] → [Monitor] → [Monitor(Write mode)] or Press "Shift" and "F3" key together.

The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Clicking [OK] starts the preparation for the monitor (write mode):
compares the program on the GX Developer ladder screen with the stored files in NC.

After the comparison, ladder editing can be executed on the ladder monitoring screen. RUN write can also be executed
with the common conversion operation. Further operation is the same as that in 4.8.5.1.

4.8.5.5 Operation when Ladder Program Writing during RUN is Disabled

Without settings for enabling ladder program writing during RUN, the followings will occur at the RUN write execution.
The action will be the same when RUN write is executed for the CNC system which does not support the function.
If "Yes" is pressed in the section "4.8.5.1" dialog box after any operation from "4.8.5.2" to "4.8.5.4", the following error
dialog box will appear.

Pressing [OK] will cause another error dialog box as follows.

III - 40
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.8 Ladder Program Writing during RUN

4.8.6 Precautions
4.8.6.1 Limitations on Program Configuration
(1) Limitations on independent program method
Ladder program writing during RUN is not available for the sequence program in independent program method. Bit
selection parameter setting is not available. Still, program execution is available.

(2) Limitations on high-speed processing program

Enabling "ladder program writing during RUN (in high-speed processing)" with bit selection parameter makes RUN
write in the high-speed processing programs available, although the following limitations are imposed:

(a) Available execution steps

The followings are the maximum number of available execution steps for high-speed processing program. If
the number has been exceeded due to RUN write, an error will occur.
- Maximum number of available execution steps is "2,000 steps".
- 2,000 steps of executing area will be used regardless of the size of high-speed processing program.

(b) Available number of local labels

The followings are available number of local labels in high-speed processing program. If the number has been
exceeded due to RUN write, an error will occur.
- Maximum number of local labels is "256".
- If the number of local labels is set to 256 or less, the set number will be the maximum number of local labels.

(c) Use of common pointers in high-speed processing program

RUN write is disabled when the common pointer is used in high-speed processing program. In this case, bit
selection parameter will not enable the RUN write. Still, program execution is available.

Use only local pointer for RUN write in high-speed processing program. The following is an example of the use
of common pointer for subroutine call from standby processing program.

High-speed
processing program Standby processing program
˜RUN write invalid㩷
CALLP1804 P180 CALL P0

END RET

٤RUN write valid㩷 Main processing program P180

CALLP1805 RET

END END

III - 41
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Common Items

4.8.6.2 Precautions for Command Operation in Ladder Programming Writing during RUN
(1) When commanding rising/ falling edge
When rising or falling edge is commanded in ladder program writing during RUN, the following action will be taken
after the command. The rising/falling edge may not always be executed in the first processing cycle due to the
change of operation path such as subroutine call or jump junction.

The first execution after The second execution

change after change
Rising/falling commands in contact
system Command status is OFF Normal execution
LDP, LDF, ANDP, …, MEP, MEF, …
Other rising/falling edge
commandsPLS, PLF, FF, MOVP, **P, Not executed Normal execution
…

(2) When a device is deleted in the program

If an output command is deleted in the program, the output status of the device designated by the command will be
kept as before the deletion.

(3) When a program error occurs in RUN write

When a program error occurs in the process of RUN write, the display of the error step may be inaccurate
regardless of the relation of the command and the error point.

(4) Actual updating timing of program in RUN write

An updated program may not be executed in the cycle right after the RUN write (after executing the ladder
conversion). The actual execution of the updated program may be delayed by a few or a few dozens cycles,
because the processing time of RUN write depends on the total number of steps used in the sequence programs
and the points where the steps are written in.

"Ladder programming writing during

RUN" operation

Execute the program before Update

conversion

Main processing
executing cycle

Ladder program writing processing Actual program

time updating

III - 42
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.8 Ladder Program Writing during RUN

4.8.6.3 Other Precautions

(1) Number of steps that can be written during RUN
Up to 48 lines of ladders can be edited and converted in GX-Developer and PLC onboard edit function.
Ladder blocks to be written at a conversion include the block between the edited ones. Up to 512 steps can be
written during RUN at a conversion.

When editing two or more detached ladder blocks

Up to 512 steps can be

Editing part -1 written at a conversion.

MOV K10 D100

Up to 48 lines of The block between the
ladders can be edited parts is to be
edited and written as well.
converted.

Editing part -2

(2) Change of processing time in RUN write

The processing time depends on the total number of steps used in the running sequence programs and the points
where the steps are written in. The process will be completed in a few seconds at the longest.

III - 43
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Common Items

4.9 Keyword Registration

Keyword is used to protect the sequence programs stored in CNC. Read and overwrite operations by GX Developer or
with the onboard PLC edit function are prohibited.

4.9.1 Data Protected by a Keyword

A keyword protects a whole range of data. The data to be protected includes all the PLC-related data stored in the flash
ROM in CNC (files of sequence programs, device comments, PLC messages and parameters). Only the files with
particular names can be free from the keyword protection.
The keyword is also set to the backup data that is output in the I/O operation: the backup data is kept protected by the
keyword after copied to other CNCs.

4.9.2 Operations Prohibited by a Keyword

The following two types of conditions can be selected at the keyword registration.
- Write protection: Writing and editing are restricted.
- Read/Write/Display protection: Writing, reading, verification and list display are restricted.
The operations, once prohibited at the keyword registration, cannot be executed by GX Developer or with the onboard
PLC edit function until the keyword is disabled.

4.9.3 Structure of the Keyword Function

The keyword is encoded and stored in the PLC data of CNC. GX Developer does not store the keyword in its saved data
after executing the keyword registration. The keyword is kept encoded when it is set to the backup data output in the I/O
operation.
Registering a keyword means to write a keyword into the stored data. Canceling a keyword means to delete a keyword
from the stored data. Disabling a keyword means to give the keyword information for verification to request an access to
the stored data.
(a) GX Developer can register, cancel and disable a keyword.
(b) The PLC onboard edit function can only be used to disable a keyword.

Ethernet

Personal
䝟䝋䝁䞁 Register Cancel Disable CNC
㹁㹌㹁
( a) RS-232C PLC
PLCcontrol
(a)
GGX
X- Developer E-ROM
CF Card F-
Ke yword
䡳䡬䢘䡬䢀䢚
Keyword PLCPLC
data
ࣂࢵࢡ
Backup 䡳䡬䢘䡬䢀䢚
Project data
data
䡿䢚䡬䡼
Ladders
䢈䢛䢗䡸䢚䡦䡴䢀䡿䢚䡬䡼 ࢔ࢵࣉ PLC
Comments PLC data
䞉䝷䝎䞊䚸䝁䝯䞁䝖
Parameters ࢹ࣮ࢱ
䝟䝷䝯䞊䝍
Disable
((b) P LC
PLC onboard
࣮࢜ࣥ࣎ࢻ
edit function
Copied to other CNCs ⦅㞟ᶵ⬟

III - 44
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.9 Keyword Registration

4.9.4 File Names Excluded from the Target of Keyword Protection

Only the files with particular names as follows can be free from the keyword protection.
- The file names that have the character "U$" in the "arbitrary character string" that is defined by the file name rule.
The file name list is shown below.

Table 4.8.1 List of file names excluded from the target of keyword protection
File name Storage
Data class Data type
: 8 + 3(extension name) characters quantity
"U$" in the arbitrary character string
H + [Arbitrary character
High-speed process sets off the keyword protection
string(7)]. W P G
Ex) "HxxxxxU$.WPG”
Sequence Total 32
1 Main process "U$" in the arbitrary character string
program comments
Initialization process [Arbitrary character sets off the keyword protection
string(8)].WPG Ex) "U$xxxxxx.WPG"
Standby process
Ex) "xxxU$xxx.WPG"
PLC parameters
2 Parameter PARAM.WPA (fixed) 1 parameter
Network parameters
Common comment COMMENT.WCD (fixed)
Device "U$" in the arbitrary character string Total 10
3 Comment for each [Arbitrary character
comment sets off the keyword protection comments
program string].WCD
Ex) "U$xxxxxx.WCD"
Language selection M1xxxxxx.WPG "U$" in the arbitrary character string
method using PLC : sets off the keyword protection One for each
alone M8xxxxxx.WPG Ex) "MnxxxxU$.WPG" language
4 PLC message
Method linked with M00xxxxx.WPG "U$" in the arbitrary character string Total 8
language selection on : sets off the keyword protection languages
the screen) M99xxxxx.WPG Ex) "MnnU$xxx.WPG"

"Arbitrary character string" means a character string consisted of up to 8 one-byte alphanumeric

characters, hyphen (-) and underline (_).

4.9.5 Compatibility and Precautions when Using the System with No Keyword Support
The data before the keyword registration is compatible with the old system. The data after the keyword registration has
the following limitations and precautions.

(1) The backup data after the keyword registration is not recognized as PLC data at the restoration to the old system.
An error occurs when the data is restored.

(2) If the PLC data stored in F-ROM has originally been created in the old system, the data needs to be formatted
before the first keyword registration.

(3) When a keyword has been registered, the data is secured in various ways. If the data is changed by any editor and
the like, neither the registered keyword can be disabled nor is the data recognized as PLC data.

(4) If the registered keyword is forgotten, reformatting the data is the only way to recover the keyword.

(5) The following ways are available to undo a disabled keyword.

- Turning the CNC power OFF
- Terminating the GX Developer that disabled the keyword.
- Terminating the PLC onboard edit function that was used to disable the keyword.
- Enabling the keyword with the same PLC onboard edit function as was used to disable it.

III - 45
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Common Items

4.9.6 Registering a Keyword

The following shows how to register or change a keyword. Open the operation screen according to the following
procedure.

[Online] → [Keyword setup] → [Register]

Set the "Keyword" and "Registration condition" and then click [Execute] in the screen as follows.

(1)

(2)
(3)

(1) Input a keyword (6 numeric characters).

(2) Select the functions restricted by the keyword.
- Read/Write/Display protection: writing, reading, verification, deletion and list display are restricted.
- Write protection: writing is restricted.
(3) When the [Execute] button is clicked, the following dialog box appears. Input the same keyword again.

(Note) Only "PLC RAM/Device memory" is available for "Target memory".

The keyword is directly written into CNC when the registration is executed. Further writing operation is not
needed.
If the PLC data stored in F-ROM has originally been created in the old system, the following error message
may appear. When the message appears, select [Online] - [Format PLC memory] to write the sequence
programs again before registering a keyword.

III - 46
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.9 Keyword Registration

4.9.7 Canceling the Keyword

The following shows how to cancel (delete) the registered keyword. Open the operation screen according to the following
procedure.

[Online] → [Keyword setup] → [Delete]

Set the "Keyword" and then click [Execute] in the following screen.

(1) (2)

(1) Input the currently registered keyword.

(2) After inputting the keyword, click [Execute].

(Note) Only "PLC RAM/Device memory" is available for "Target memory".

4.9.8 Disabling the Keyword

The following shows how to release the lock imposed by a keyword in order to allow access to the CNC on which the
keyword is registered. After a keyword has been released, there is free access to the CNC until GX Developer is
terminated. Open the operation screen according to the following procedure.

[Online] → [Keyword setup] → [Disable]

Set the "Keyword" and then click [Execute] in the following screen.

(2)

(1)

(1) Input the currently registered keyword. 。

(2) After inputting the keyword, click [Execute].

(Note) Only "PLC RAM/Device memory" is available for "Target memory".

Whether the keyword has been successfully disabled is not confirmed until the access is confirmed.
The following ways are available to cancel the "disabled" status of a keyword.
- Terminating GX Developer
- Closing the project that is currently opened in GX Developer

III - 47
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Common Items

4.9.9 Disabling the Keyword as Required when Accessing to CNC

The following screen appears and requires disabling the keyword when any access is attempted to CNC on which the
keyword was registered.

(2)

(1)

(1) Input the currently registered keyword.

(2) After inputting the keyword, click [Execute].

III - 48
 5
Sequence Program Development

III - 49
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

The sequence program development procedures are explained in this section focusing on usage methods unique to
MITSUBISHI CNC.

5.1 Development Procedures

The following two methods can be used to develop the sequence program.

(1) Method to use sequence program developed with conventional MITSUBISHI CNC PLC programming tool
(PLC4B).
(2) Method to newly create sequence program with GX Developer.

Refer to the enclosed GX Developer Operating Manual for the method to newly create sequence program.

5.1.1 Method for Using Sequence Program Developed with PLC4B

IBM PC/AT compatible

personal computer
Creation
PLC4B/LIST4B
LIST4B output
ladder list
ZZZZ.TXT
Ladder list conversion
CNVM6

Ladder list
for this CNC
zzzz.TXT
List to sequence program
conversion GX Converter

Sequence program CNC controller

for this CNC
zzzz.WPG
Editing {transfer}
GX Developer

Device comment Message

for this CNC for this CNC
zzzz.WCD M1xxx.WPG

(1) Creation
The sequence program created for the old model is output in a list format.

(2) Conversion
The data is converted into a sequence program (list format) for this CNC using CNVM6 (PLC data integrated
conversion tool). Using GX Converter (data conversion software package), the list format program is converted into
the GX Developer data.

(3) Editing/transfer
The resultant program can be handled like a newly created sequence program.

III - 50
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.2 Writing the Sequence Program to the CNC Controller

5.2 Writing the Sequence Program to the CNC Controller

The following section explains how to write sequence programs from GX Developer to the CNC controller (especially the
restrictions and CNC-specific operations.)

5.2.1 Operation Procedure

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the operation screen.

[Online] → [Write to PLC]

On the following screen, choose the sequence program file to be written from the [File selection] tab and click [Execute].
You can command RUN/STOP of the PLC using [Remote operation] under [Related functions].

[Note] As [Target memory], only [PLC RAM/Device memory] is valid.

Do not set the other tabs ([Device data], [Program], [Common], [Local]) than [File selection].

III - 51
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

5.2.2 Writing Operation

As soon as a ladder is written from GX Developer to the CNC controller, the CNC controller converts it into the CNC-
specific ladder machine code.
A conversion error occurs if any of the devices and instruction formats not supported by the CNC controller side is used.
The writing will not stop even if a conversion error occurs. The instruction causing an error is converted into a "NOP
instruction" (no process instruction), and the sequence program is transferred up to the last step.

[Note] A ladder resulting in an error cannot be RUN for safety purposes.

5.2.3 Operations and Check Items at Conversion Error

(1) Operations at conversion error
The following dialog appears on the GX Developer screen when a conversion error occurs.

If you execute RUN the PLC as-is, an alarm occurs on the CNC side and the PLC does not RUN.
If the ladder file resulting in a conversion error is selected with the [File Selection] tab on the [Read from PLC]
screen, the file name and title will change and be displayed as shown below.
If this ladder file is read out to the GX Developer, it will be stored under the file name "ERRLAD-0".

'44.#& .&6'56%QPXGTV'4414 (1) File name at error

(2) Title statement including


 transferred original file name

CAUTION
Do not read out a ladder file resulting in a conversion error to the GX Developer and use it. It may contain
unexpected data, and result in incorrect operations.

III - 52
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.2 Writing the Sequence Program to the CNC Controller

(2) How to confirm the conversion error step No.

The PLC verification function can be used to confirm the error step. For details of the PLC verification function, refer
to "Sequence Program Development: Verifying the Sequence Programs".

Verify source: Select the ladder file (source file) on the GX Developer side
Verify dest.: Select the file resulting in an error "ERRLAD-0" on the CNC controller side

When PLC verification is executed, the mismatching details will appear as shown in the following example.
The NOP instruction section in the CNC controller side is the step with the conversion error. Double-click the
mismatch to display and to edit the corresponding part of the GX Developer side.
<Memory> indicates the GX Developer side, and <PLC> the CNC controller side.

GX Developer side CNC controller side

III - 53
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

5.2.4 Operations and Check Items at the Other Errors

(1) Other errors
Some of the popular errors that would occur in writing sequence programs are given below.
Note that the description of the dialogue message is primarily provided for the MELSEC sequencer, and the precise
description of the error may not be available for the M7 Series. The last 4 digits of display No. are indicated in
"Status".
For the other errors, refer to "Troubleshooting:List of Errors During GX Developer Online Operations".

Status Message Cause Remedy

Check the size of execution area. (Refer
Writing of data which exceeds
The maximum number of steps that to (2) of this section.)
4005 the capacity of the PLC was
can be executed with NC has been Reduce the number of steps for the
(Note 1) attempted. Execute again within
exceeded. sequence program to be executed
the capacity of the PLC.
according to that value.
Cannot write because the PLC
is executing a RUN command. After stopping the PLC of the NC, start
4010 The PLC of the NC is running.
Stop the PLC, then execute execution again.
again.
The applicable drive is not
The specified target memory does
4021 ready. Check the applicable Change the target memory.
not exist or is not in a usable status.
drive, then execute again.
Insufficient file capacity.
An attempt was made to write a file Examine the file structure so that the data
4029 Execute again after deleting
that exceeds the storage capacity. falls within the limited capacity.
unnecessary files.
The file is write protected.
The specified target memory is a Specify "internal RAM" as the target
4052 Change the file attributes to
write-disabled device (F-ROM). memory.
enable writing to the file.
A mismatch occurred between
the PLC and peripheral Set the number of device points. (Refer to
There is a problem in the device
4065 parameters Match the "Common Items: Setting the
setting value.
parameters between the PLC Parameters".)
and peripherals.
Perform verification to identify the
instruction that is the cause of the
The program before correction
A ladder instruction outside the problem. (Refer to "Writing the Sequence
4070 differs from the registered
specification is included. Program to the CNC Controller:
program.
Operations and Check Items at
Conversion Error".)

III - 54
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.2 Writing the Sequence Program to the CNC Controller

(2) How to confirm the size of execution area

Confirm the size of execution area in the following manner when "error status (4005): Execution area size over"
(See (Note 1) in the list of errors above.) occurs. Refer to "PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION : PLC Processing
Program:PLC Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode" for details on execution area.

When [Target memory] "IC memory card A(RAM)" is selected with "Read from PLC" operation, the file name and
title are changed and displayed as follows.

(a) indicates the settings of target memory. (Regular reading from PLC is executed with "internal RAM/device
memory".)
(b) indicates the number of steps at execution when the title section is replaced. An alphabet before the number of
steps at execution represents the state of parameter designation.
I: Initial H: High speed M: Medium speed W: Wait
-: No parameters or parameters not stored.

(c) indicates the total number of steps at execution. (Total of "initial", "high speed", "medium speed" and "wait to be
executed.)
The denominator indicates the maximum size of the execution area.
When there is no parameter, the single program method is applied and "TOTAL" will not be displayed.

㻔㻌㼍㻕

㻔㻌㼎㻕

㻔㻌㼏㻕

In the screen example above, the sequence program size must be adjusted so that the total number of steps at
execution of (c) (43091) is smaller than the maximum size of the denominator's execution area (43008).

III - 55
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

5.3 Reading the Sequence Program from the CNC Controller

The following indicates how to read a sequence program from the CNC controller to GX Developer.

5.3.1 Operation Procedure

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the operation screen.

[Online] → [Read from PLC]

On the following screen, choose the sequence program file to be read from the [File selection] tab, and click [Execute].

[Note] As [Target memory], the fitted memory is valid.

Do not set the other tabs ([Device data], [Program], [Common], [Local]) than [File selection].

If a sequence program file with the same name already exists in the GX Developer side, following dialogue will appear.

[Note] Choosing [Yes (Y)] in the dialogue will overwrite the GX Developer side sequence program file. The file
before overwriting will be erased. Confirm the file enough before choosing [Yes (Y)].

III - 56
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Reading the Sequence Program from the CNC Controller

The [Read from PLC] screen can also be used as a CNC controller side file listing function. Move the scroll bar of the
[File selection] tab to the right to display the write date and size of each file. Click [Free space volume] to display the free
area of the target memory.

III - 57
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

5.4 Verifying the Sequence Programs

The following indicates how to verify sequence program between the CNC controller and GX Developer.

5.4.1 Operation Procedure

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the operation screen.

[Online] → [Verify with PLC]

On the following screen, choose the sequence program files to be verified from the [File selection] tab, and click
[Execute].

[Verify source] : GX Developer side, [Verify dest] : CNC side

[Note] As [Target memory], the fitted memory is valid.

Do not set the other tab ([Program], [Device data]) than [File selection].

If verification mismatches occur, the following mismatch screen appears. Double-click the mismatch to display the
corresponding part of the GX Developer side file.

GX Developer side CNC controller side

III - 58
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.5 Using Sequence Programs from Older Models

5.5 Using Sequence Programs from Older Models

The sequence program list converted with the PLC data integrated conversion tool (CNVM7) is converted into GX
Developer data with the following method. Use "GX Converter (data conversion software package)" for conversion. GX
Converter can be started from the GX Developer menu.

5.5.1 Starting GX Converter and Specifying the File to be Converted

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start GX Converter (read).

[Project] → [Import file] → [Import to TEXT, CSV format file]

On the following screen, choose the file to be converted (LDTEST.TXT) and click [OK].

5.5.2 Conversion Format Setting

Set the conversion format on the following data conversion wizard screen.

(1) Data conversion wizard 1/4

Choose [Original Data Type]-[Delimited] and [Data Type]-[List], and click [Next>].

III - 59
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

(2) Data conversion wizard 2/4

Choose [Delimiters]-[Tab] and click [Next>]

(3) Data conversion wizard 3/4

Choose to highlight the instruction column part in the [Data Preview] list and choose [Column Data Format]-
[Instruction].

(4) Data conversion wizard 3/4

Further, choose to highlight the argument column part in the [Data Preview] list and choose [Column Data Format]-
[I/O(Device)]. Click [Next>].

III - 60
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.5 Using Sequence Programs from Older Models

(5) Data conversion wizard 4/4

Set the program name used on GX Developer at [Data name] column and a sequence program annotation at [Title]
column, and click [Finish].

(6) Completion
The setting is complete when the following completed dialog appears after the converting dialog. Click [OK].

III - 61
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

5.6 Monitoring the Sequence Program

There are no MITSUBISHI CNC-specific operations to monitor a sequence program. Refer to the Operating Manual for
the operation methods. For usable functions, refer to ""GX Developer Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI
CNC:Function Support Conditions (Online Section)". This section explains the operation procedure outline and
precautions.
(Note 1) Do not connect GX Developer while displaying PLC onboard.
(Note 2) Do not use GX Developer simultaneously when several PCs are connected with NC.

5.6.1 Operation Procedure

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start monitoring.

(1) Display the sequence program to be monitored and move to the circuit part to be monitored.

(2) Perform the following operation to start monitoring.

[Online] → [Monitor] → [Monitor mode] or "F4" key

(3) Perform the following operation to stop monitoring.

[Online] → [Monitor] → [Stop monitor] or Press "Alt" and "F3" key together.

[Caution] If the sequence program being RUN with CNC controller differs from the sequence program displayed on GX
Developer, monitoring will not result in an error but will appear to continue normally.
Confirm that the sequence program on the CNC controller side and GX Developer are the same before starting
monitoring.

III - 62
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

Status of various devices that are used for the CNC controller external signals and for the user ladder can be traced by
using GX Developer. Trace result at an arbitrary point will be read out from CNC controller and displayed on a screen or
output in a CSV file format.

[Example of trace result display for bit devices]

Current value of bit device per sampling point is displayed.

Bit device name Trace point position (Number of traces when trigger position is "0") Bit device curr

Example of bit device trace result display

[Example of trace result display for word devices]

Current value of word device per sampling point is displayed.

Word device name Trace point position (Number of traces when trigger position is "0".) Word device current value

Example of word device trace result display

No. of traces, trace condition, trigger condition, and No. of traces after trigger can be set as trace setting.
Trace is executed when the trace condition is set.
After the trigger condition is set, execute "No. of traces after trigger" only and end sampling. Sampling the status
before and after the trigger is set is also possible.

Setting value for No. of traces

Setting value for
No. of traces after trigger

Bit device

Trace starts Trigger condition established End of trace

Specifications chart (Establishment of trigger condition to the end of sampling)

III - 63
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

5.7.1 Basic Operation

Use GX Developer for operation. Execute sampling trace function, following the procedures below.
(1) Carry out trace setting.

Setting item Setting details

Set the number of traces to be saved. The latest data is saved for the number of traces. If exceeds
No. of traces
the number of traces, oldest data is erased in order.
Set the number of traces taken place after trigger has been established until sampling is
No. of traces after trigger
completed.
Set the data trace timing. "Each scan" and "Detail" can be selected. "Detail" enables the trace
Trace point
execution condition setting.
Set the trigger timing. When trigger is established, status of trace device is taken in. "At the time
Trigger point of trigger operation from GX Developer" and "Detail" can be selected. "Detail" enables the trigger
establishment condition setting.
Trace device Set the device for sampling.

(2) Write the trace settings into CNC controller.

(3) Execute tracing. CNC controller starts tracing the device. Tracing execution status can be checked with GX
Developer tracing status display or CNC special relay SM800 to SM805. Tracing will be continued until the
following conditions are set.
(a) Tracing is completed upon establishment of trigger.
(b) Stop tracing from GX Developer.
(c) Turn the CNC controller power OFF.
(d) PLC turns to STOP mode.

(4) Read trace data out from CNC controller.

(5) Display the result and output in a file format, if necessary.

Special relay
IBM PC/AT compatible CNC controller
㧯㧺㧯ࠦࡦ࠻ࡠ࡯࡜ SM800 to SM805
personal computer (2) Write the setting
(3) Display the
execution status
(1) Trace setting
Trace setting (3) Execute the trace

User ladder
GX Developer

(4) Read out the data

Trace data

(3) Data trace

(5) Save the result

(3) Display the (5) Display the result

execution status

Sampling trace function basic operations (Image)

Trace result
file

III - 64
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7.2 Basic Specifications

Basic specifications list

Item Specifications
The number between 1 and 8192 can be set. Note that, however, the total trace data size has to be
No. of traces smaller than 60kbyte.
Refer to *1 for trace data size calculation.
No. of traces after trigger Sets the number smaller than the No. of traces.
Each scan Traces per scan of the main process.
Applicable device: Refer to *2.
Trace point Setting condition: Sets the value to be used for judgement. When
Word device
(Two types of setting - Detail the setting value becomes equal to the word device value,
"Each scan" and "Detail" (Refer to *4 for judgement will be effective and trigger is executed.
- are available.) precaution.) Applicable device: Refer to *2.
Bit device Setting condition: Sets ↑ or ↓ . When the setting condition is
satisfied, trace is executed.
At the time of
trigger operation
Executes trigger by GX Developer operations.
from GX
Trigger point Developer
(Two types of setting -
Applicable device: Refer to *2.
"At the time of trigger
Setting condition: Sets the value to be used for judgement. When
operation from GX Word device
the setting value becomes equal to the word device value,
Developer" and "Detail" Detail
(Refer to *5 for judgement will be effective and trigger is executed.
are available.)
precaution.) Applicable device: Refer to *2.
Bit device Setting condition: Sets ↑ or ↓ . When the setting condition is
satisfied, trace is executed.
50 points of word device, 50 points of bit device can be set. Note that, however, the total trace data size
has to be smaller than 60kbyte.
Trace device
Refer to *1 for trace data size calculation.
Refer to *3 for applicable devices.

*1 Calculation of trace data size

Set the number of traces and the trace devices so that the trace data size is 60kbyte (61440 byte) or smaller. Trace
data size will be calculated as follows.

[Trace data size (byte)] = [Size required for one trace (byte)] x [Number of traces]

Size required for one trace is calculated from word device points and bit device points of the trace device and the
size required for one trace of each device.

Size required for one trace of each device

Trace device type Size (byte) required for one trace

Word device 2byte per 1 point
2byte per 1 unit (1 unit = 16 points)
1 to 16 points → 1 unit → 2byte
Bit device 17 to 32 points → 2 units → 4byte
33 to 48 points → 3 units → 6byte
49 to 50 points → 4 units → 8byte

III - 65
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

Calculation example for trace data size is shown below.

Trace data size calculation example

No. Bit device points Word device points Trace points Trace data size Sampling
(1x2+2x2)x8192
1 16 points (1 unit) 2 points 8192 points Possible
= 49152 byte
(1x2+8x2)x1000
2 8 points (1 unit) 8 points 1000 points Possible
= 18000 byte
(4x2+50x2)x568
3 50 points (4 units) 50 points 568 points Possible
= 61344 byte
(4x2+50x2)x569
4 50 points (4 units) 50 points 569 points Not possible
= 61452 byte

*2 Applicable devices with trace/trigger point details setting

Applicable device
Bit device: X, Y, M, L, F, SB, B, SM, T(contact), ST(contact), C(contact)
Word device: T(current value), ST(current value), C(current value), D, R, SW, SD, W
Following qualifications are available for the above devices.
- Bit device digit designation
- Word device bit designation

Process following an inapplicable device setting is as follows.

- If one or more applicable devices already exist, the setting of the inapplicable device will be ignored.
- If no applicable devices exist, error occurs when trace setting file is read upon trace execution.

*3 Applicable devices with device setting

Applicable device
Bit device: X, Y, M, L, F, SB, B, SM, T(contact), T(coil), ST(contact), ST(coil), C(contact), C(coil)Word device:
T(current value), ST(current value), C(current value), D, R, SW, SD, W Following qualifications are available for
the above devices.- Bit device digit designation - Word device bit designation

Process following an inapplicable device setting is as follows.

- If one or more applicable devices already exist, the setting of the inapplicable device will be ignored.
- If no applicable devices exist, error occurs when trace setting file is read upon trace execution.

III - 66
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

*4 Precautions for trace point details setting

- When trace point is set only with "Step No.", the operation will be same as when trace point is set to "Each scan".
- When trace point is set with AND condition of "Step No." and "Device", "Step No." setting will be ignored and only
"Device" setting will be effective.
- When only devices that are not corresponding with MITSUBISHI CNC are set for "Device", operation will be same
as when trace point is set to "Each scan".

Operations at the time of trace point details setting are as shown in the table below.
List of operations at trace point details setting

Setting ( ○→ Yes × → No)

Operations
Device Step No.
Valid setting available in device → Device
○ ○
Valid setting not available in device → Each scan
Valid setting available in device → Device
○ ×
Valid setting not available in device → Each scan
× ○ Each scan
× × Setting disabled (Error is displayed on GX Developer)

*5 Precautions for trigger point details setting

- When trigger point is set only with "Step No.", the operation will be same as when trigger point is set to "At the time
of trigger operation from GX Developer".
- When trigger point is set only with "Step No.", the operation will be same as when trigger point is set to "At the time
of trigger operation from GX Developer".
- When trigger point is set only with "Step No.", the operation will be same as when trigger point is set to "At the time
of trigger operation from GX Developer".

Operations at the time of trigger point details setting are as shown in the table below.
List of operations at trigger point details setting

Setting ( ○→ Yes × → No)

Operations
Device Step No.
Valid setting available in device → Device
○ ○ Valid setting not available in device
　→ At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer
Valid setting available in device → Device
○ × Valid setting not available in device
　→ At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer
× ○ At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer
× × Setting disabled (Error is displayed on GX Developer)

III - 67
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

5.7.3 Status of Special Relay during Sampling Trace

Status during sampling trace function being executed can be checked by the status of SM device 800 to 805.

Starts trace SM801 ON after

Trigger execution End of trace
Sampling trace registration trace started

SM800
(Sampling trace preparation)

SM801
(Sampling trace starts)

SM802
(In sampling trace execution)

SM803
(Sampling trace trigger)

SM804
(After sampling trigger)

SM805
(End of sampling trace)

*SM800 automatically turns ON when sampling trace preparation is done.

Device status when trace execution operation is carried out.

Trigger Trigger End of trace

execution Stop trace SM801 ON after
trace started execution

No. of traces No. of traces

Clear No. of traces
after trigger after trigger

SM800
(Sampling trace preparation)

SM801
(Start sampling trace)

SM802
(In sampling trace execution)

SM803
(Sampling trace trigger)

SM804
(After sampling trigger)

SM805
(End of sampling trace)

Device status when trace stop operation is carried out

III - 68
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

Specifications for SM800 to SM805 is as shown below.

Specifications list for the devices that are related with sampling trace function

No. Name Details

OFF: Preparation not
completed
SM800 Sampling trace preparation
ON: Preparation
completed
OFF: Cancel
SM801 Starts sampling trace
ON: Start
OFF: Cancel
SM802 In sampling trace execution
ON: Start
OFF → ON
SM803 Sampling trace trigger
: Trigger execution
OFF: Not after trigger
SM804 After sampling trace trigger
ON: After trigger
OFF: Not completed
SM805 End of sampling trace
ON: Completed

5.7.4 Sampling Trace Operation Screen

In this section, outline of the operation procedures and precautions are explained, using the case where wizard setting/
execution is applied. Individual setting/execution is also available. For available functions, refer to "GX Developer
Functions Supported by MITSUBISHI CNC:Function Support Conditions (Online Section)".
Refer to GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual (SW8D5C-GPPW-*) for basic operations.

III - 69
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

5.7.4.1 Sampling Trace Main Screen

Start the sampling trace main screen below by selecting [Online] → [Trace] → [Sampling trace]. All the operations for
sampling trace functions are carried out on this main screen.

(1)
(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) (6) (7)

(1) Set the sampling trace execution method. Select either "wizard setting/execution" method or "Individual setting/
execution" method. Necessary setting items are set in an order by using the wizard setting/execution method.

(2) This is the menu when the wizard setting/execution method is applied. Sampling trace execution method is valid
when wizard setting/execution is applied. Click the button in the order of "Trace setting...", "Trace execution..."
and "Trace result...".

(3) This is the menu when the individual setting/execution method is applied. Sampling trace execution method is
valid when individual setting/execution is applied. Click the button in the order of "Trace condition setting",
"Trace data setting" and "Trace execution". Setting details are same as when wizard setting/execution is
applied.

(4) Display the details of setting for the trace currently valid.

(5) This is the menu for trace setting file operation. Saving of the currently valid trace settings in the local area is
possible, as well as reading and deleting of the saved file.

(6) This is the menu for trace setting PC operation. Currently valid trace settings can be written into CNC, and also
the trace settings currently set in CNC can be read out.

(7) The [Close] button closes the "Sampling trace" screen. Tracing will continue even if the screen is closed during
trace execution.

III - 70
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7.4.2 Wizard Setting/Execution Screen

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the sampling trace.

[Online] → [Trace] → [Sampling trace]

(1) Select wizard setting/execution with radio button.

(2) Click in the following order and operate according to the wizard.
(2-1) [Trace setting] : Refer to "Trace Setting" for details.
(2-1) [Trace setting] : Refer to "Trace Execution" for details.
(2-3) [Trace result] : Refer to "Trace Result" for details.

(1) (2-1) (2-2) (2-3)

Explanation of wizard setting/execution

III - 71
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

5.7.4.3 Trace Setting

Start "Sampling trace setting wizard" screen by clicking [Trace setting].
Set the conditions and data required for sampling trace according to the wizard.

Screen transitions for trace setting is as shown below.

Press Trace data Trace Trace Trace Trace Trigger Device End of
[Trace storage execution count additional point point setting trace
setting] setting method setting informatio setting setting screen setting
button screen setting screen n setting screen screen
screen screen

Trace point Trigger point

Details setting details details
setting setting
screen screen

Details setting

When executed with the trace setting saved in CPU

Trace setting screen transitions at wizard setting/execution

(1) Trace data (setting/result) storage setting screen

"Target memory" and "File name" cannot be set. Click [Next >] and proceed to the trace execution method setting
screen.

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard - Trace data (Setting + result) storage setting screen

[Note]
- Since "Target memory" is DRAM integrated in CNC controller, trace data (setting+result) will be deleted when
the power is turned OFF.
- Trace data (setting+result) that can be saved on CNC controller is only one. Trace data result is overwritten
every [Trace execution] execution.
- When file name is changed, the overwriting confirmation dialogue may not be dispalyed at PC write
operation.
- When file name has been changed, trace result may not be displayed with [Trace result]. Read the data out
from PLC, then click [Trace result] again.

III - 72
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

(2) Trace execution method setting screen

Select a trace execution method and click [Next >].

When "Execute trace after overwriting the current trace settings to the PLC" is selected:
Proceed to the trace count setting screen.

When "Execute trace for the settings written in PLC" is selected:

End "Sampling trace setting wizard" and return to the "Sampling trace" screen.

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – Trace execution method setting screen

(3) Trace count setting screen

Set the number of traces and trigger position, click [Next >] and proceed to the trace additional information setting
screen.
Refer to "Basic Specifications" for details on trace count that can be set.

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – No. of traces setting screen

III - 73
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

(4) Trace additional information setting screen

Only "Time" can add information. Put a check mark at "Time" to display time when the trace result is shown.
Click [Next >] and proceed to the trace point setting screen.

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – Trace additional information setting screen

(5) Trace point setting screen

Select "Each scan" or "Detail" and click [Next >].
When "Detail" is selected, proceed to the trace point details setting screen. Set "Device" at [Trace point setting].
When "Detail" is selected, proceed to the trace point details setting screen. Set "Device" at [Trace point setting].
- "Each scan": Trace is executed after scanning the main process.
- "Detail": Trace is executed when the device set with trace point setting satisfies its condition after scanning
the main process.

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – Trace point setting screen

[Note] Only "Each scan" and "Detail" are valid for trace point setting.
When "Interval" is set, the movement will be the same as when "Each scan" is set.

III - 74
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – Trace point setup – Details setting screen

[Note] Only "Device" is valid for trace point setting.

Do not set "Step No.".
Refer to "Basic Specifications" for the devices that can be set.

(6) Trigger point setting screen

Select "At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer" or "Detail" and click [Next >].
When "At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer" is selected, proceed to the device setting screen.
When "Detail" is selected, set "Device" at [Trigger point setting].

"At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer":

When executing trace, carry out "Execute trigger" from the "Sampling trace setting wizard execution"
screen.
The data at the time of "Execute trigger" after scanning of the main process will be the start point (0
point).
"Detail":
Check trigger conditions after scanning of the main process. The data at the time of trigger condition
establishment will be the start point (0 point). (Refer to [" PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION: Multi-
program Method: Number and Types of Registerable Programs" Number and Types of Registerable
Programs] for explanation of 'Main process'.)

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – Trigger point setting screen

[Note] Only "At the time of trigger operation from GX Developer" and "Detail" are valid for trigger point setting.
When "At the time of STRA instruction execution" is set, operation will be the same as when "At the time
of trigger operation from GX Developer" is set.

III - 75
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – Trigger point setup – Details setting screen

[Note] Only "Device" is available for trigger point "Details" setting.

Do not set "Step No.".
Refer to "Basic Specifications" for the devices that can be set.

(7) Device setting screen

Set the devices of which trace is executed and click [Next >].
After setting the device, click [Finish] and end the trace setting.
Refer to "Basic Specifications" for the devices that can be set.

At wizard setting/execution – Sampling trace setting wizard – Trigger point setting – Device setting screen

III - 76
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7.4.4 Trace Execution

Start the "Sampling trace setting wizard execution" screen below by clicking [Trace execution].
Carry out "Start trace", "Stop trace" and "Execute trigger".

At wizard setting/execution – Trace execution screen

(1) Starting trace
Select "Start trace" under [Trace operation] and click [Execute]. Trace begins.
Tracing progress can be checked at [Trace status].

Status of each device under tracing can be check with [Trace result].
Display the current status by clicking [Trace result] after closing the trace execution screen by clicking [Close].
Tracing will continue even after [Close] is clicked.

Once [Close] is clicked and display the trace execution screen again, click [Trace execution]. Since [Trace status] is
hidden at this point, click [Start monitor].

[Note] Once trace is resumed, trace data up to the previous time will be deleted.
If resuming trace after once executing trace, end trace in the following manner.
- After trigger execution, execute trace after trigger.
- Execute "Stop trace" at [Trace operation].
- CNC power is turned OFF.
- PLC status is turned to "STOP".

(2) Trigger execution

Trigger can be executed at an arbitrary timing. Select "Execute trigger" and click [Execute].

(3) Stopping trace

To stop tracing, select "Stop trace" and click [Execute].
To display the trace result before stop, click [Trace result] after pressing [Close].

[Note] Once "Stop trace" is executed, trace cannot be resumed.

When the trace information before stop is required, save the data in CSV file with [Trace result].
If "Start trace" is executed before saving the data, the data before "Stop trace" will be deleted.

III - 77
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

(4) End of trace

When trace after trigger has been completed after trigger execution, "Finished" is displayed on [Trace status], and
then trace will be finished. Click [Close] upon completion of tracing and end the "Sampling trace setting wizard
execution" screen.

At wizard setting/execution – Trace execution screen – Trace status display at trace "Finished"

(5) Trace status display

When trace status is being monitored, the button displays [Suspend monitor]. To stop monitoring, click the button.
When not monitoring, the button displays [Start monitor]. To start monitoring, click the button.

[Trace] within [Trace status] includes the following four display items.
- Executing: Trace is being executed.
- Suspend: Trace has been stopped.
- Execution failed: Trace is not executed.
- Finished: Trace has been completed.

III - 78
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

5.7.4.5 Trace Result

Start the "Trace result" screen below by clicking [Trace result].
Trace result of bit device is chronologically shown in the upper section and word device in the lower section. Trace result
can be saved in the CSV file format. Trace result can be displayed even during trace execution.

ON/OFF status of bit device is

displayed per trace count

Value of word device is displayed per

trace count

At wizard setting/execution – Trace result screen

"Count": Counts are displayed. (Trigger execution point is set as start point or 0 point)
"Time(sec.)": Time is displayed. (Head of trace data is set as standard or 0.000 sec.)
If trace interval exceeds 65 seconds, correct time will not be displayed.
"Step","Program": Not displayed.

[Create CSV file]

The following screen is displayed by clicking [Create CSV file].

At wizard setting/execution – Trace result screen – Create CSV file

Save the trace result data following the procedures (1) to (4) below.
(1) Click [Browse] and select the storage destination.
(2) Input the file name.
(3) Select [Device storage method].
(Refer to the Operating Manual for details on [Device storage method].)
(4) Click [Execute].

[Note]
Trace result data is overwritten per each trace execution. Always save the necessary data in CSV file.

III - 79
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

5.7.5 Operation at Error

Error will occur under the following conditions. The following dialog will be displayed on the GX Developer screen when
parameter check during trace execution is carried out.

Error details

No. Error definition Remedies

Set the applicable device for sampling trace with device
1 No applicable device for sampling trace is set with device setting.
setting.

Error dialogue

When sampling trace cannot be executed, check the following items.

- Check if CPU type is Q4ACPU.
- Check the trace execution status. (Trace execution command is not possible during tracing.)
- When trace execution method is set to "Execute trace for the settings written in PLC.", check if setting file is saved
in CNC.
- Check if devices on the program and that set by trace match.

5.7.6 Operation Example

Example 1 Trigger judgment and trace result with device setting
[Setting details]
Trace setting details for example 1

Setting item Setting value Setting item Setting value

Target memory IC memory card A ■ Device
File name MAIN Word device
Trigger point setting Word device 1 = 11
Total number 10 ■ Step
30
Number after trigger 4 ■ Bit device
Trace additional information Time, step No. Device No.1
Device setting Device No.2
Trace point setting Interval: 10msec ■ Word device
Word device 1

III - 80
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

Medium speed ladder scan cycle

Device No.1

Device No.2

Word device 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Trigger

Trigger execution timing

(Scan when "word device 1=11" has been established.
Ignores step No. setting; only device setting will be
valid for trigger point.

Device status when sampling trace is executed at example 1

[Trace result]
Trace result display for example 1

← The scan in which trigger has been

Count -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 executed is regarded as count "0".
Trace data is retrieved when trigger
has been established. Thus, when
Device No.1 trigger establishment and trace
execution happen simultaneously,
count "0" and count "1" will be the
Device No.2 same data.
← "Interval" trace point setting is
ignored. Execute trace per scan.
Word device 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 12 13
← Word device is shown as numerical
value.

Time 0 0.007 0.014 0.021 0.028 0.035 0.042 0.042 0.049 0.056 ← Time is displayed as trace
additional information.

Step No - - - - - - - - - - ← Nothing is displayed as trace

additional information other than
time.
File name - - - - - - - - - -

Example 2 Trace judgment and trace result with device setting

[Setting details]
Trace setting details for example 2

Setting item Setting value Setting item Setting value

Target memory IC memory card A
■ At the time of STRA
File name MAIN Trigger point setting
instruction execution
Total number 6
Number after trigger 4
■ Bit device
Trace additional information None Device No.1
■ Device Device setting Device No.2
Trace point setting Bit device ■ Word device
Device No.1 ↑ Word device 1

III - 81
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

Medium speed ladder scan cycle

Device No.1

Device No.2

Word device 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Trigger

Trigger execution
from GX Developer

Trigger input from GX Developer

Ignores "At the time of STRA instruction execution"

and "At the time of trigger operation from GX
Developer" will be valid for trigger point.
Device status when sampling trace is executed at example 1

[Trace result]
Trace result display for example 2

← The scan in which trigger has

Count -2 -1 0 1 2 3 been executed is regarded as
count "0".
Device No.1
← Trace is executed only for the
Device No.2
scan where device No.1 turns
Word device 1 2 4 7 8 10 12 ON from OFF.
Note that, however, the device
data for the scan when trigger
has been executed will be saved.

5.7.7 Precautions
(1) Sampling can be executed for the other stations on network or with serial communication connection. Note that,
however, sampling is not possible from multiple areas at the same time.

(2) Since trace conditions and trace data that have been registered in CNC controller are saved in DRAM area, when the
CNC power is turned OFF, the data will be deleted.

(3) Sampling trace is executed by connecting CNC controller and GX Developer.

(4) Trace data within CNC is deleted during trace execution. So, please be aware that the data up to previous time will be
deleted.

III - 82
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.7 Executing Sampling Trace on Device

(5) When trace is ended before reaching the set No. of traces, such as when trigger occurs as soon as trace is started,
the shortened data will not be displayed.

<Example> Trigger occurred at 10th trace when No. of traces is set to 2000 and No. of traces after trigger is set to 1000.

No. of traces setting value=2000

10 times No. of times after trigger=1000

Bit device

Establishment of
Sampling starts End of sampling
trigger condition

Trace result

Count -10 㨯㨯㨯 0 1 㨯㨯㨯 1000

Device No.1

Word device 1 9 10 11 12 13 14

(6) Descriptions about sampling trace in this manual are given under the assumption of GX Developer Ver.8
specifications.
Sampling trace setting wizard is not available for the version prior to GX Developer Ver.8.
Refer to the precautions for each setting item described in this manual and perform settings respectively.

(7) When the trace setting that is invalid with this CNC is performed, the setting is forcibly corrected to the valid one
within CNC controller. Refer to "Sampling Trace Operation Screen" for trace settings that can be used.

(8) Status of SM800 to SM805 cannot be checked on CNC controller screen. Check the sampling trace status with GX
Developer.

III - 83
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Sequence Program Development

III - 84
 6
PLC Message Development

III - 85
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 PLC Message Development

This chapter describes a procedure for developing PLC-related data such as alarm messages, operator messages, and
PLC switches.

6.1 Development Procedure

There are the following two methods as a general development procedure of message data.
Refer to the Operating Manual for details on newly creating a PLC message.

(1) Making conversion into GX Developer data using a general text editor or spreadsheet tool and data conversion
package.
(When there is a large volume of message data and you want to control them with a commercially available
tool, for example)

(2) Entering messages directly from GX Developer

(When there is a small volume of message data or when addition or correction is to be made, for example)
IBM PC/AT compatible
personal computer
Creation
Spreadsheet tool
Text editor
Message
for this CNC
M1xxx.TXT
Conversion
GX Converter

Message CNC controller

for this CNC
M1xxx.WPG
Transfer (edit)
GX Developer

Device comment Sequence program

for this CNC for this CNC
zzzz.WCD zzzz.WPG

6.1.1 Using a General Text Editor

(1) Creation
The message data is described using a general text editor. The description method and format will be described
later.

(2) Conversion
The conversion from text data to GX Developer data is carried out using the "GX Converter (data conversion
software package)".

(3) Transfer
With the GX Developer, the message data is handled as a sequence program interlinear comment, and can also be
edited. The message data is transferred to the CNC controller using the GX Developer, in the same manner as the
sequence program.

6.1.2 Entering Messages Directly from GX Developer

(1) Creation
The message data is described directly from GX Developer. The message data is handled as a sequence program
interlinear comment by GX Developer. The description method and format will be described later.

(2) Transfer
The message data is transferred from GX Developer to the CNC controller in the same manner as the sequence
program.

III - 86
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.2 Message Data Description Method

6.2 Message Data Description Method

The message data can be described as text data by a general text editor and also by commercially available
spreadsheet software in addition to the direct input with GX Developer.

6.2.1 Description Format

The message data is described using the following description format.
The description format cannot be abbreviated. Comma(,) and Line feed code must be described, even the message
character string is blank.

Message classification Description format

message character
Alarm message ;A, index No. data register No. Line feed code
string
message character
Operator message ;O, index No. data register No. Line feed code
string
PLC switch ;P, switch No. message character string Line feed code
message character
Comment message ; M , device device No. Line feed code
string

Message classification code : A one-byte alphabetic character expressing each message classification
Index No. : One-byte number (0 to No. of messages in the setting area - 1)
Switch No. : One-byte number (0 to No. of messages in the setting area - 1)
Data register No. : One-byte number
Device : One-byte number (1 or 2)
Device No. : One-byte number (0 to 10)
Message character string : One-byte alphanumeric character, No. of characters in the setting area message length.
Semicolons, commas, spaces and tabs can also be used. Note that the tab at the head of the message character
string is ignored.
Semicolon( ; ) : Message data identification code
Comma( , ) : Separator between each description (a comma only is used to leave a message character string blank)
Line feed code : (CR/LF) or (LF).
Back slash (\) : Continue to next line. If the end of the description is a back slash, continue to head character on
next line.

[Note] Setting area

The setting area (each message's message length and message quantity declaration) used with the old
models is no longer required. The storage area in the CNC controller is always stored in the most efficient
state.
Even if the old setting area remains in the data, it will be ignored and will not result in an error.

III - 87
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 PLC Message Development

6.2.2 Description Method

The message data is described as text data by the following description format.

;#M700 Ladder ver1.0 ’04.03.03 --- Comment

NOPLF
㧧A,0,0,Emergency stop
;A,11,1,Spindle alarm
;
;
NOPLF --- Message area
; (Alarm messages)
;
NOPLF
;
;
NOPLF --- Page break code
;0,1,9000,MELDAS 600 LADDER Ver1.0
;0,20,9000,BND-400W000-A0 --- Message area
; (Operator messages)
;
NOPLF
;P,1,Program restart
;P,2,Automatic power OFF --- Message area
; (PLC switches)
;
NOPLF
;M,1,0,[ Spindle ]
;M,1,0,[ Standby 1 ] --- Message area
; (Comment)
;
END --- End code

(1) Comment
A line with a semicolon (;) followed by a sharp (#) at the head of the line are interpreted as comments.

; # comment character string [CR]

(2) Message area

Collect similar messages in a group and describe them. There is no description order in the respective messages,
but the latter description is validated if there are descriptions with the same factors (index No., etc.).

(3) Page break code

A page break code is described at one or more places approx. every 15 lines in the setting area and message area.
The message data may skip if there is no page break code.

(4) End code

An end code is described at the end of the description. Description after the end code are ignored. An error will
occur if there is no end code.

(5) Other descriptions

A description that does not have a semicolon (;) at the head will result in an error. A description with a format other
than the above will also result in an error.

III - 88
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.2 Message Data Description Method

6.2.3 Precautions
No. of characters, quantity limitations, handling of information other than settings, handling of information other than
format are described below.

(1) Message data maximum value

The maximum value of the described messages is shown below.

Message classification Max. message length Max. No. of messages

Alarm messages 46 byte 1024
Operator messages 60 byte 512
PLC switches 14 byte 64
Comments 60 byte 100

When maximum number of characters is exceeded: An error will not occur, but the excessive characters will not be
displayed.
When maximum number of messages is exceeded: An error will occur when writing.

[Note]
Two-byte data in the message character string is handled as two characters.

(2) When message cannot be described on one line

With GX Developer, up to 64 characters can be input on one line as an interlinear statement. However, information
other than the message character string (such as message classification code, index No., data register No., etc.),
so a 60-character message character string cannot be described on one line.
A 60-character description is possible by splitting the message into two lines using a back slash (\) at the end of the
line.

;0,1,1000,Operator Message....0123456789012345678901234567890123456789

Section exceeding 64 characters, and

which cannot be described
;0,1,1000,
;Operator Message....0123456789012345678901234567890123456789

Description split into two lines using back slash

[Note]
If the message is split into two lines, an asterisk (*) cannot be used as the head character of the second line.
Use another character, such as a space, in this case.

III - 89
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 PLC Message Development

6.3 Converting Data into GX Developer Format

Convert the message data, which was described using a text editor or like, into GX Developer data in the following
method. Use "GX Converter (data conversion software package)" for conversion. GX Converter can be started from the
GX Developer menu.

6.3.1 Starting GX Converter and Specifying the File to be Converted

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start GX Converter (read).

[Project] → [Import file] → [Import from TEXT ,CSV format file]

On the following screen, specify the file to be converted (M1TEST.TXT) and click [OK].

6.3.2 Conversion Format Setting

Set the conversion format on the following data conversion wizard screen.

(1) Data conversion wizard 1/4

Choose [Original Data Type]-[Fixed Width] and [Data Type]-[List], and click [Next>].

III - 90
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.3 Converting Data into GX Developer Format

(2) Data conversion wizard 2/4

Just click [Next>].

(3) Data conversion wizard 3/4

Choose to highlight the instruction column part in the [Data Preview] list and choose [Column Data Format]-
[Instruction, Statement, Note]. Click [Next>].

III - 91
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 PLC Message Development

(4) Data conversion wizard 4/4

Set the program name used on GX Developer in [Data name] and a data annotation in [Title], and click [Finish]. The
setting is complete when the completed dialog appears. Click [OK].

III - 92
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.4 Entering/Editing Data using GX Developer

6.4 Entering/Editing Data using GX Developer

The message data in GX Developer are handled as the "integrated type interlinear statements" of a sequence program.
"Integrated type interlinear statements" are interlinear comments provided to assist the understanding of the sequence
program, and those transferred to the controller together with the sequence program are called the "integrated type".
"Interlinear statements" can be displayed and edited using [Ladder] or [Instruction list].

6.4.1 Interlinear Statement Display using Circuit Display

(1) Display of project data list
Perform the following operation to display the "Project data list" window and double-click the file name to display the
edit screen. First, the normal ladder screen appears.

[View] → [Project data list], then double-click [File name you want to display].

(2) Display of message data

Perform the following operation to display the message data that are integrated type interlinear statements.

[View] → [Statement]

III - 93
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 PLC Message Development

6.4.2 Interlinear Statement Display using List Display

(1) Display of project data list
Perform the following operation to display the "Project data list" window and double-click the file name to display the
edit screen. First, the normal ladder screen appears.

[View] → [Project data list], then double-click [File name you want to display].

(2) Display of list data

Perform the following operation to display the list data. The list display also shows the message data that are
integrated type interlinear statements.

[View] → [Instruction list]

Perform the following operation to return to the circuit display.

[View] → [Ladder]

III - 94
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.4 Entering/Editing Data using GX Developer

6.4.3 Editing of Integrated Type Interlinear Statements

(1) Circuit display
On the circuit display screen that shows the integrated type interlinear statements, double-clicking the interlinear
statement you want to edit displays the following dialog. Perform editing operation on the dialog and click [OK] or
press [Enter].

(2) List display

On the list display screen, double-clicking the interlinear statement you want to edit displays the following dialog.
Perform editing operation on the dialog and click [OK] or press [Enter].

(3) Entering new message data

- Displaying new edit screen
Perform the following operation to display the [New] dialog, and set the [Data name] and [Title]. After setting,
click [OK].

[Project] → [Edit Data] → [New]

- Changing to list display mode

Perform the following operation to display the list data.

[View] → [Instruction list]

- Entering message data

Press "Enter" on the "END" line, enter data as in the section "(2) List display", and then press "Enter" on the
next line and enter message data.

III - 95
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 PLC Message Development

6.5 Writing to the CNC Controller

The following shows the method of transferring a message from the GX Developer to the CNC controller. The transfer
method is the same as the sequence program transfer method. Sequence program and message data are distinguished
by their file names only.

6.5.1 Operation Procedure

Perform the following operation to display the "Write to PLC" screen, and select the file to be written.

[Online] → [Write to PLC]

The following example transfers a message first language file "M1TEST.GPG".

[Note] Restrictions for writing message data

Only one message data file can be stored in the same language. If message data in the same language,
but having a different file name, is overwritten, a dialog confirming overwrite will occur.

6.5.2 Writing Operation

When executing message write from GX developer, the data will be checked by the CNC controller.
A conversion error will occur if there is a description exceeding the specifications. An error mark will be added to the
description section in which the error occurred, and the data will be transferred to the last step.

;A,0,Alarm Message No.0. Message occuring error

;E,0,Alarm Message No.0. State with error mark added

Error mark (Alphabetic character E)

[Note] The message data file in which an error occurred cannot be displayed.

III - 96
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.5 Writing to the CNC Controller

6.5.3 Operation at Write Error

The following dialog appears on the GX Developer screen when a conversion error occurs.

If the message file resulting in a conversion error is selected with the [File Selection] tab on the [Read from PLC] screen,
the file name and title will change and be displayed as shown below.
If this message file is read out to the GX Developer, it will be stored under the file name "ERRMES-0".

ERRMES-0 <-- M1TEST : Convert ERROR.

(1) (2)

(1) File name at error

(2) Title statement including transferred original file name

CAUTION
Do not read out a message file resulting in a conversion error to the GX Developer and use it. It may contain
unexpected data, and result in incorrect operations.

III - 97
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 PLC Message Development

6.5.4 How to Confirm the Error Position

The error position can be confirmed with the PLC verification function. Refer to section "Sequence Program
Development:Verifying the Sequence Programs" for details on the PLC verification function.

Verify source: Select the message file transferred to the GX Developer

Verify dest.: Select the message file resulting in an error "ERRMES-0" on the CNC controller

When PLC verification is executed, the mismatching details will appear as shown in the following example. The section
with the error mark in the CNC controller side is the message description section with the check error. Double-click the
mismatch to display and to edit the corresponding part of the GX Developer side.

<Memory> indicates the GX Developer side, and <PLC> the CNC controller side.

GX Developer side CNC controller side

III - 98
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.6 Reading and Verifying from the CNC Controller

6.6 Reading and Verifying from the CNC Controller

The following shows the method of reading and verifying a message from the CNC controller to the GX Developer. The
method of reading and verifying is the same as that of sequence program. Sequence program and message data are
distinguished by their file names only.

6.6.1 Menu Selection/Screen Operation

Refer to the following sections for operation methods.

For read: "Sequence Program Development: Reading the Sequence Program from the CNC Controller"
For verification: "Sequence Program Development: Verifying the Sequence Programs"

III - 99
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 PLC Message Development

III - 100
 7
Device Comment Creation

III - 101
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Device Comment Creation

There are no MITSUBISHI CNC-specific operations for device comments. Therefore, refer to the Operating Manual for
the development method. This section describes the device comment development procedure outline and the
development method using a general-purpose tool.

7.1 Development Procedure

There are the following two methods as a general development procedure of device comments.

(1) Indirect entry

In this method, device comments are converted into GX Developer data using a general text editor or spreadsheet
tool and data conversion package. Use this method when you want to divert the device comments of the old model
or when a device comment volume is large and you want to control them with a commercially available tool, for
example.

IBM PC/AT compatible

personal computer
Creation
Spreadsheet tool
Text editor

Device comment
for this CNC
zzzz.TXT
Conversion
GX Converter

Device comment CNC controller

for this CNC
zzzz.WCD
Editing
GX Developer

Sequence program
for this CNC
zzzz.WPG

(2) Direct entry

In this method, device comments are entered directly from GX Developer. Use this method when a device comment
volume is small or when addition or correction is to be made, for example.
There are the following three methods for direct entry from GX Developer. Refer to the Operating Manual for details.

- Creating comments on the device comment edit screen

- Creating device comments after circuit creation during sequence program creation
- Making addition/correction to device comments in the created sequence program

III - 102
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.2 Description Method for Indirect Entry

7.2 Description Method for Indirect Entry

The following explains the description method for creating device comments using a spreadsheet tool or like. The
following example describes device comments using a spreadsheet tool.

Safety unit run Describe device, equipment

name and comment on the
Safety cover close
same line.
Operation ready complete
Oil pressure motor
Parts A ready complete

Device- Equipment Comment-

only name-only only
column column column

Column data format Explanation

(1) Describe a device.
Device - Conversion cannot be made if a device has not been described. Always describe a device.
(2) A device is a required item. Describe it in one-byte code.
(1) Describe a comment.
Comment - It is not registered if the device part on the same row is blank or the device is illegal.
(2) You can describe a comment of up to 32 characters.
(1) Describe an equipment name.
Equipment name - It is not registered if the device part on the same row is blank or the device is illegal.
(2) You can describe an equipment name of up to 8 characters.

[Note] Describe data in any of the following combinations.

(1) Device, equipment name, comment
(2) Device, comment
(3) Device, equipment name

Save the above data in the CSV format. The following example shows the above data saved in the CSV format.

X0, SAFETY, Safety unit run

X1, COVER, Safety cover close
X2, READY, Operation ready complete
X3, OIL-M, Oil pressure motor
X4, PARTS-A, Parts A ready complete

III - 103
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Device Comment Creation

7.3 Converting Comment Data into GX Developer Data

Convert the comment data (CSV format), which was created using a spreadsheet tool or like, into GX Developer data in
the following method. Use "GX Converter (data conversion software package)" for conversion. GX Converter can be
started from the GX Developer menu.

7.3.1 Starting GX Converter and Specifying the File to be Converted

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start GX Converter (read).

　[Project] → [Import file] → [Import from TEXT ,CSV format file]

On the following screen, specify the file to be converted (cmnt_all.txt) and click [OK].

7.3.2 Conversion Format Setting

Set the conversion format on the following data conversion wizard screen.

(1) Data conversion wizard 1/4

Choose [Original Data Type]-[Delimited] and [Data Type]-[Comment], and click [Next>].

III - 104
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.3 Converting Comment Data into GX Developer Data

(2) Data conversion wizard 2/4

Choose [Delimiters]-[Tab] and click [Next>].

(3) Data conversion wizard 3/4

Make sure that the column parts in the [Data Preview] list are in order of [Device Number], [Label] and [Comment],
and click [Next>].

III - 105
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Device Comment Creation

(4) Data conversion wizard 4/4

Choose [Data type]-[Common comment] or [Program comment], set the comment file name used on GX Developer
in [Data name] and a comment annotation in [Title], and click [Finish].

(5) Completion
The setting is complete when the following dialog appears. Click [OK].

(6) Error status

If an error occurred during conversion, its status and the line where it occurred are displayed.

III - 106
 8
Troubleshooting

III - 107
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Troubleshooting

8.1 List of Errors During GX Developer Online Operations

If an error has occurred in GX Developer, the following dialog appears. The error message and error status are displayed
in the dialog. Note that the display error messages are primarily for the MELSEC sequencer. Therefore, they are not
necessarily accurate for M7 Series. Error status is shown in the last 4 digits of the number displayed.

(1) Error message

(2) Error status

CAUTION
When an error occurred at GX Developer On-line function, the error message may not explain exactly the state in
the CNC side.
Always refer to the error list.

The following table indicates the causes and remedies of the errors that can occur during online operation with the CNC.
For other errors, refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual.

Status Message Cause Remedy

The executed function is not
An operation not supported by
supported. Please check the
4002 the specifications was Check the operation procedures.
manual and other
attempted.
documentation.
Check the size of execution area.
(Refer to the section "Sequence
Program Development:
Writing the data exceeding the
Maximum number of steps that Operations and Check Items at
size of sequencer was
4005 can be executed with NC has the Other Errors".) Reduce the
attempted. Execute again within
been exceeded. number of steps for the relevant
the range of sequencer size.
sequence program to be
executed with reference that
value.
Cannot write because the PLC is
executing a RUN command. After stopping the PLC of the NC,
4010 The PLC of the NC is running.
Stop the PLC, then execute start execution again.
again.
The applicable drive is not ready. The specified target memory
4021 Check the applicable drive, then does not exist or is not in a Change the target memory.
execute again. usable status.
Ladder program writing during
A file which does not exist in the Check the editing program
4022 RUN was attempted to
PLC was specified. whether it exists in NC or not.
nonexistent sequence program.
Application has turned unstable. The format does not allow the Reformat the PLC data storage
4024
Restart keyword registration. area.

III - 108
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.1 List of Errors During GX Developer Online Operations

Status Message Cause Remedy

Insufficient file capacity. Execute An attempt was made to write a Examine the file structure so that
4029 again after deleting unnecessary file that exceeds the storage the data falls within the limited
files. capacity. capacity.
The file cannot be accessed. After deleting the same type of
An attempt was made to write the
402b Carry out formatting, then file from the NC side, start
same type of file.
execute again. execution again.
The specified device No.
The access request given is
exceeds the permissible range. Check the number range of each
4031 outside the accessible device
Specify a device No. that is within device.
range.
the range set in the parameter.
The file is write protected.
The specified target memory is a Specify "internal RAM" as the
4052 Change the file attributes to
write-disabled device (F-ROM). target memory.
enable writing to the file.
Ladder program writing during
RUN was attempted in the
following situations: Execute following operations.
1) A sequence program is run 1) Change the method into multi-
with independent program program one.
method. 2) Delete the command which
2) A high-speed processing uses common pointers from the
program using common pointers high-speed processing program.
is run. 3) Turn ON the bit selection
No condition set. 3) The writing was attempted into parameter "Enable ladder
4061
Check the settings and program. a high-speed processing program writing during RUN (for
program while the high-speed high-speed processing)".
processing is disabled. 4) Change the CALL instruction
4) A common pointer CALL into local pointer one.
instruction writing was attempted 5) Reduce the number of steps in
into a high-speed processing the high-speed processing
program. program. (Refer to of status
5) Execution size of the high- 4005's remedy)
speed processing program
exceeds 2000 steps.
A mismatch occurred between
the PLC and peripheral Set the number of device points.
There is a problem in the device
4065 parameters Match the (Refer to "Common Items:
setting value.
parameters between the PLC Setting the Parameters".)
and peripherals.
(1) Verify the program and
(1) In writing into PLC, an
specify the instruction which has
unspecified sequence instruction
caused the error.
The program before correction is included in the program.
(2) Check whether the target
4070 differs from the registered (2) In ladder program writing
program is the same as the
program. during RUN, the program before
running one in the NC. Check the
the modification does not match
device setting in PC parameter
with the one in the NC.
as well.
The sequence program or
message data in the CNC
When executing "Read from
controller may be damaged.
PLC" or "Verify PLC" function:
Delete the corresponding file and
Data not included in the
start again, or initialize the PLC
specifications was found in the
data storage area. If the problem
4080 Incorrect abnormal. designated file.
cannot be resolved, contact the
Mitsubishi System Department.
When executing "Write to PLC": Edit the sequence program in the
Multiple END instructions were list mode to delete END
found in the designated instructions except only one at
sequence program file. the last line.
A program without registered Ladder program writing during The RUN writing is available only
4083 parameters exists in PLC. Set RUN was attempted to an to a registered program. Check
PLC parameters in the program. unregistered sequence program. the program registration.

III - 109
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Troubleshooting

Status Message Cause Remedy

The specified P and I are already
The label to be written during
4086 in use. Please use another P Designate a different label.
RUN has already been used.
and I.
The number of labels written Check the number of local labels
The accessible pointers in the
4087 during RUN has exceeded the used in high-speed processing
PLC exceed the specified range.
allowable number of local labels. and main processing.
An unusable port or IP address
was specified. Execute again The Ethernet setting on the GX Check the Ethernet setting, or
8008
after checking the port/IP Developer is incorrect. check the cable connection.
address setting.
Cannot communicate with the The serial communication cable
PLC. Execute again after is faulty. Check the serial port setting and
8201
checking the connections with - Not connected cable connection.
the PLC. - DTR signal off
Cannot communicate with the Check the following:
PLC. Execute again after There was no response from the - CNC status
8301
checking the connections with NC connected with Ethernet. - Cable connection
the PLC. - Ethernet address setting
Cannot communicate with PLC
There is no response from the
for one of the following reasons.
NC.- The CNC has not started
Communications timeout Check the following.
properly.- The connection
Cable error - CNC side status
channel of the CNC side serial
Specified baud rate not - Cable connection
840b port is different.- The serial cable
supported for connected PLC - Bit selection:
outside the specifications is used
Monitor condition set status is GPP communication valid
for signal connection.- An
read by device - Set the Ethernet address
incorrect Ethernet address is set
The project PLC and the
on the NC side
connected PLC are different.

[Note] Read "PLC" in the message as "CNC controller".

III - 110
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Confirmation of PLC Alarms on CNC Controller Side

8.2 Confirmation of PLC Alarms on CNC Controller Side

When an error occurs during starting or executing a sequence program, user PLC alarm status will be entered. There are
three methods of confirming alarm details.

- Method by using the "ALARM" screen on the CNC controller setting display unit.
- Method by using the "PLC DIAGNOSIS" screen of the internal PLC edit function.
- Method by using the GX Developer "PLC diagnostics" window.

In the GX Developer "PLC diagnostics" window, the same kind of information as displayed in the "ALARM" screen of the
CNC controller setting display unit is displayed in a simple manner. In addition, the ladder in which error has occurred is
displayed, as well.

III - 111
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Troubleshooting

8.2.1 Operating Procedures

With the GX Developer, follow the procedures given below to startup the "PLC diagnostics" window.

[Diagnostics] → [PLC diagnostics]

The following screen is displayed. Error information is indicated in the area (a) to (f).

(a) (b)

(e)

(c)
(g)

(f)
(d)

(a) PLC operation status display: RUN/STOP status of PLC is displayed.

(b) Rotary switch status display: The status of rotary switch "CS2" of the control unit is displayed.
(c) Error status display: "ERROR" section flickers in red when an error has occurred.
(d) Error information display: Error No. and error occurrence time are displayed.
- If there is no error, "No error" is displayed.
- Error No. is the upper 2 digits of the CNC side alarm sub status1.
- Further detail is available upon double-click. (Described later)
(e) Error message display: A brief message corresponding with the error No. is displayed.
- A character string with up to 16 alphabetical characters that shows the alarm details.
(f) Error jump button: Ladder in which error has occurred is displayed. (Described later)
(g) Error display, start monitor and stop monitor button: Monitoring error information is started/stopped.
[Note] All the buttons other than (a) to (g) and [CLOSE] do not have any significant meaning. Therefore, do not
touch them.

III - 112
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Confirmation of PLC Alarms on CNC Controller Side

8.2.2 Details of Each Display

(1) Rotary switch status display (b)
The status of control unit rotary switch "CS2" is displayed.
"STOP" is displayed when "CS2" is set to "1", "RUN" is displayed for all the other settings.
"CS2" is usually set to "0". By setting to "1", PLC status can be compulsorily changed to STOP.

(2) Error status (c), error information (d), error message display (e)
The error occurred last after PLC RUN is displayed here. The display will not be changed until a new error has
occurred.
Error display will be cleared only when RUN is executed from PLC STOP.

8.2.3 Detailed Error Information Display

Detailed error information can be displayed in the "PLC diagnostics window" following the operating procedures below.

Double-click "(d) error display list box" in the "PLC diagnostics window".

The "Error details" screen (see below) is displayed.

(1) When there is a cause in the sequence program:

C

D

(a) File name: The name of sequence program file in which error has occurred is displayed.
(b) Sequence step No.: The step No. for which an error occurred in (a) is displayed.

III - 113
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Troubleshooting

(2) When there is a cause in the parameter setting:

C

D

(a) Parameter No.: Illegal parameter No. is displayed.

1005: Common pointer No.
7000: Program setting
(b) File name: The name of parameter setting file relating with the error is displayed.

[Note]
The displays other than (a) and (b) in (1) and (2) above have no significant meanings.
Also, depending on the error factors, (a) or (b) may not be displayed.

8.2.4 Display of the Error-generated Ladder

The ladder in which an error has occurred is displayed in the "PLC diagnostics" window. By following the operations
below, the error-generated ladder which exists in the project currently opened with the GX Developer can be displayed in
the edit mode.

Click "Error Jump" button (f) in the "PLC diagnostics" window.

The ladder of the file in which an error has occurred is displayed in the other window. Then the cursor moves to the step
where the error has occurred.
The following conditions are required to accurately display the error-generated ladder section.
- The file name and sequence program No. must be displayed in the "Error details" screen.
(In this case, no response or error dialog display will be given even if the button is clicked.)
- A project including the sequence program currently in operation in the CNC controller side must be opened.
(Even when a project not in operation is opened, if the same program name already exists, a ladder different
from the actual error-generated ladder is displayed. So, be careful.)
- Depending on the type of error, sequence step No. does not show the error-generated ladder accurately.

III - 114
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Confirmation of PLC Alarms on CNC Controller Side

8.2.5 List of Corresponding PLC Alarms

The followings are the PLC alarms whose details and/or ladders in which an error has occurred are displayed in the
"PLC diagnostics" window. Refer to "List of PLC Alarms" for further detailed cause and remedy for each alarm.

NC side NC alarm display GX Developer PC diagnosis display

Sub status

File name

Step No.
Error Diagnosis display Error details
Message
1 2 code character string

U10 0x0010 - 0 PROG. TIME OVER - - Scan time error

0x0040 - 0 PLCSEL ERR - - Ladder selection parameter error
Illegal PLC 0x04xx STP 4 S/W INT. ERR Software instruction interruption error
(Use PLC 0x20xx STP 20 JUMP LABEL ERR Label branching error
0x21xx STP 21 DUP. LABEL(P) Label duplicate error
illegal) 0x22xx - 22 LOCAL LABEL OVER - Local label over
0x23xx - 23 LABEL PARA. ERR - - Global label boundary value error
0x24xx STP 24 RSV. LABEL ERR Reserved label error
0x25xx - 25 PRG. PARA. ERR - Program setting error
0x26xx - 26 MISSING RET INS. - RET instruction error
Program No. if
0x27xx - 27 LAD. CODE ERR - Ladder code error
the lower 16 0x28xx - 28 MISSING LAD(M) - - No main process ladder
0x29xx - 29 EXE. AREA OVER - Execution area over
bits are 0x30xx STP 30 FOR INS. OVER FOR instruction nesting over
displayed as 0x31xx STP 31 NEXT INS. ERR NEXT instruction error
0x32xx STP 32 BREAK INS. ERR BREAK instruction error
"xx" in NC 0x400* - 40 PLC SYSTEM DOWN - - PLC system error
alarm display Caution; Ladder program writing during RUN is
0x700* - 70 RUNWRT ILL. MODE - -
sub status1.
disabled (In independent program method)

Caution; Ladder program writing during RUN is

Step No. if
"STP" in sub
0x71xx STP 71 RUNWRT CPOINT(F) disabled (common pointer is used in high speed

status 2. processing)

Caution; Ladder program writing during RUN is

0x720* - 72 RUNWRT SIZOVR(F) - - disabled (high-speed processing size is

exceeding)

Caution; Ladder program writing during RUN is

0x730* - 73 RUNWRT LLABEL(F) - - disabled (number of labels in high-speed

processing is beyond the capacity)

Exceptional interruption (BCD instruction error)
0x80xx STP 80 EXC.INT(BCD)
has occurred.
Exceptional interruption (BIN instruction error)
0x81xx STP 81 EXC.INT(BIN)
has occurred.
Exceptional interruption (bus error) has
0x82xx STP 82 EXC.INT(D-BUS)
occurred.
Exceptional interruption (unpopulated instruction
0x83xx 83 EXC.INT(INST.)
error) has occurred.
Exceptional interruption (instruction format error)
0x84xx 84 EXC.INT(I-FMT)
has occurred.
Exceptional interruption (instruction bus error)
0x85xx 85 EXC.INT(I-BUS)
has occurred.
Exceptional interruption (CALL/RET instruction
0x86xx 86 EXC.INT(CALL)
error) has occurred.
Exceptional interruption (memory area error) has
0x87xx 87 EXC.INT(MEM.)
occurred.
Exceptional interruption (division-by-zero error)
0x88xx 88 EXC.INT(ZERO)
has occurred.
Exceptional interruption (Double exceptional
0x89xx 89 EXC.INT(DUP.)
generation error) has occurred.
Exceptional interruption (HALT instruction halt)
0x90xx 90 EXC.INT(HALT)
has occurred.

○ : Correct information is displayed △ : Information may not be accurate -: Not displayed

III - 115
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Troubleshooting

8.3 Initialization for PLC Data Storage Area

In the following cases, initialize the CNC controller's temporary memory area and start again.
The internal F-ROM is not initialized by this initialization operation. To hold the recovered state after the power is turned
OFF, it must be stored in the internal F-ROM.
- If an error occurs while writing to the CNC controller
- If the state cannot be recovered even after remedying the error
- To delete the stored data at once

8.3.1 Operation Procedure

Perform the following operation from GX Developer to start the operation screen.

[Online] → [Format PLC memory]

On the following screen, click [Execute].

[Note] As [Target memory], only "PLC RAM/Device memory" is valid. The setting is not necessary for [Format
Type].

The setting is completed when the following dialog appears. Click [OK]. All data stored in the temporary memory have
been deleted and initialized.

III - 116
 9
Procedures for Backing Up Data Such as Sequence
Programs

III - 117
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Procedures for Backing Up Data Such as Sequence Programs

This section explains the methods for backing up the developed sequence programs and PLC related data in a personal
computer.

9.1 Backup Target Data

The following four types of data can be backed up.

Related data classification Remarks

1 Sequence program Sequence program code
2 Parameter Execution order setting information, etc.
3 Sequence program comment GX Developer comment data
Message data such as alarm messages, operator messages and
4 Messages in 1st to 8th languages
PLC switches in each language

9.2 Backup Procedures

The data is backed up from the CNC controller's input/output screen.
Designate the transmission source information (CNC controller side) and transmission target information (personal
computer side) on the input/output screen. When transmission is started, the sequence programs, etc., stored in the
RAM will be backed up in the personal computer.
The input/output screen and operation procedures are shown below.

(a)
(b)

(c)

(d)
(e)
(f)

Refer to the instruction manual for the respective model for details on the input/output screen.

III - 118
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.3 Restoring Backed Up Data

(1) CNC controller settings

Set the "Device name", "Directory" and "File name" at "A: Device".
(a) Setting "Device name"
Select "Memory".
(b) Setting "Directory"
Input the character string "/LAD".
(c) Setting "File name"
"USERPLC.LAD" is automatically set when "Directory" is set.

(2) Personal computer settings (Setting "Device name", "Directory" and "File name")
Set the "Device name", "Directory" and "File name" at "B: Device".
(d) Setting "Device name"
Select "HD".
(e) Setting "Directory"
Input the character string "/".
(f) Setting "File name"
Set the name of the file to be stored. When omitted, "USERPLC.LAD" is assigned.

(3) Transmission
The backup process starts when the menu key "Send A → B" is pressed.

9.3 Restoring Backed Up Data

The data is restored following the backup operation in reverse (Set personal computer settings in "A: Device" and the
CNC controller settings in "B: Device".)
The PLC must be STOP before restoration can be started.

III - 119
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Procedures for Backing Up Data Such as Sequence Programs

III - 120
IV EXPLANATION OF BUILT-
IN EDITING FUNCTION
 1
Outline

IV - 1
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 Outline

This manual explains the M7 Series PLC onboard function. (Operations related to the PLC carried out with the CNC unit
are collectively called as "onboard".)
Integration with the MELSEC Series PLC development tool (GX Developer) has been improved to enable reading and
writing of data saved in each unit.
M700VW/M700 Series onboard includes "Standard operation mode" and "Simple operation mode".
Standard operation mode: All the onboard functions are available.
Simple operation mode: Limited to the functions mainly related to ladder monitoring, which are designed for routine
maintenance operations.
Operation mode at the time of onboard startup can be switched between standard operation mode and simple operation
mode by changing bit selection parameter settings. Switching modes is also possible after the onboard has been started.
The onboard functions are listed below.
(Note 1) Do not connect GX Developer while displaying PLC onboard.
(Note 2) Do not use GX Developer simultaneously when several PCs are connected with NC.

List of functions

M700VW/ M700
M700 VS
Function Purpose of function M70
M70V
Std Sim E70

■ Circuit monitoring
AUTO LADDER MONITOR This executes the whole procedures to the ladder monitor. ○ ○ ○ ○
Monitor start/stop This starts or stops the monitor. ○ ○ ○ ○
Device registration monitor This monitors the circuit and the device registration simultaneously. ○ ○ ○ ○
Circuit registration monitor This monitors the circuit and the arbitrary registered circuit simultaneously. ○ ○ ○ ○
Registered circuit all delete This deletes all circuits registered with the circuit registration monitor. ○ ○ ○ ○
Device test This changes the device ON/OFF state, and changes the device value. ○ ○ ○ ○
This stops the monitor when the set device or step No. conditions are
Monitor stop condition setting
established. ○

Current value monitor changeover This changes the circuit monitor device current value between the decimal
(10/16) and hexadecimal display. ○ ○ ○ ○

■ Circuit editing
Edit mode changeover This edits the circuit. ○
Line insert This inserts a line at the cursor position. ○ ○ ○ ○
Line delete This deletes the line at the cursor position. ○ ○ ○ ○
Copy & Paste This copies and pastes the circuit in the designated range. ○ ○ ○ ○
Statement edit This edits the statements. ○ ○ ○ ○
Note edit This edits the notes. ○ ○ ○ ○
Comment edit This edits the comments. ○
PLC message edit This edits the PLC message. ○ ○ ○
This converts the circuit. (Stops its running during writing) ○ ○ ○ ○
Conversion
This converts the ladder. (Ladder program writing during RUN) ○ ○ ○ ○
Undo This undoes the last edit operation. ○ ○ ○ ○

IV - 2
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual

M700VW/M700 M700
VS
Function Purpose of function M70
Std Sim M70V
E70
■ Circuit search
This executes a simple search of contact, coil and device. ○ ○ ○ ○
Simple search
This returns to the start. ○ ○ ○ ○
Contact coil search This searches the contact coils. ○
Device search This searches the devices. ○
Instruction search This searches the instructions. ○
Step No. search This searches the step Nos. ○ ○ ○ ○
Character string search This searches the character strings. ○
AB contact change This changes the circuit's contact between A and B. ○
Device replace This replaces the devices. ○
TC setting value change This changes the timer and counter setting values in a batch. ○
■ Circuit display
Comment display This sets whether to display a comment. ○ ○ ○ ○
Program changeover This changes the PLC program in circuit display. (Device comment tracking) ○ ○ ○ ○
This sets the circuit display size and the maximum number of contacts on one
Circuit display
circuit line. ○ ○ ○ ○

Zoom display This switches the circuit display size (Reduction, standard, expansion). ○ ○ ○ ○
Zoom cursor This enlarges the cursor display area. ○ ○ ○ ○
This changes ON/OFF of the display for the contents set with "Comment
Comment ON/OFF
display". ○ ○ ○ ○

This specifies the number of lines for the device comment display between 1
Comment line designation
to 4. ○ ○ ○ ○

Current value monitor line delete This specifies whether to display the current value at monitoring. ○ ○ ○ ○
■ Tool
Contact coil usage list This displays the device's step No. and usage state. ○ ○
Device usage list This displays the usage list in a batch for each device type. ○ ○
Program check This checks the sequence program (ladder). ○ ○
■ Device operation
Device batch monitor This monitors the devices in a batch. ○ ○ ○ ○
Device registration monitor This monitors registered devices on a dedicated screen. ○ ○ ○
Sampling trace This executes sampling trace. ○ ○ ○ ○
■ Parameters
Program setting This determines the sequence program (ladder) execution order. ○ ○ ○ ○
Common pointer setting This displays the common pointer head P No. ○ ○ ○ ○

IV - 3
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 Outline

M700VW/M700 M700
VS
Function Purpose of function M70
Std Sim M70V
E70
■ NC file operation
File list This displays a list of the stored files. (execution step size is displayed) ○ ○ ○
This displays the PLC data in the temporary memory at the onboard editing
area.
Open
Manually executed; the menu is selected when needed ○ ○ ○ ○
Automatically executed at power ON; no menu exists ○ ○ ○
This saves the PLC data edited on the onboard in the temporary memory.
Manually executed; the menu is selected when needed (execution step
Save
size is displayed) ○

Automatically executed at conversion; no menu exists. ○ ○ ○ ○

This verifies the PLC program in the onboard editing area with the PLC data
Verify
in the temporary memory. ○

ROM-Write This saves the PLC data in the temporary memory to the ROM. ○ ○ ○ ○
File operations/ Add new data This adds new PLC data to the temporary memory area. ○
File operations/ Delete data This deletes the PLC data from the temporary memory area. ○
File operations/ Rename data This renames the PLC data in the temporary memory area. ○
Delete This deletes the PLC data from the temporary memory. ○ ○ ○ ○
Format This formats the temporary memory. ○ ○ ○ ○
PLC RUN/STOP This runs or stops the PLC. ○ ○ ○ ○
This writes the ladders files in the external device into the NC's temporary
PLC VERSION UP
memory and ROM. ○ ○

Disable keyword This releases the keyword that has been set to the PLC data in NC. ○ ○ ○ ○
■ External file operations
This reads the PLC data from an external medium into NC and opens it on
External ->NC
onboard. ○ ○ ○

NC-> External This saves the PLC data from NC into an external medium. ○ ○ ○
Delete external file This deletes projects in an external medium. ○ ○ ○
Verify external file This verifies the PLC data in NC with that in an external medium. ○ ○ ○
■ Project operations
Open project This displays the PLC data in a project at the onboard. ○
Save project This saves the PLC data edited on the onboard in a project. ○
Delete project This deletes a project from the external device. ○
This verifies the PLC data edited on the onboard with the PLC data in a
Verify project
project. ○

Edit data operation/Add This adds PLC data to the onboard editing area. ○
Edit data operation/Delete This deletes PLC data from the onboard editing area. ○
Edit data operation/Name change This changes the name of the PLC in the onboard editing area. ○
Edit data operation/Initial setting This initializes the data in the onboard editing area. ○
■ Environment setting
This changes modes between simple operation mode and standard
Operation mode changeover
operation mode. ○ ○

Comment storage setting This sets the destination of device comment storage. ○ ○

IV - 4
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual

M700
VS
Function Purpose of function M700VW/M700 M70
M70V
E70
■ Diagnosis
This displays the error occurred during sequence program (ladder)
PLC diagnosis
execution. ○ ○ ○ ○

Corresponding table for the files handled/not handled in simple operation mode, standard operation mode and M70/
M700VS/M70V/E70 Series is shown below.

Standard operation mode Simple operation mode M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series

Handling Display Edit Handling Display Edit Handling Display Edit
Sequence program (Ladder) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
PLC message data ○ ○ ○ × × × ○ ○ ○
Parameter ○ ○ (Note2) ○ (Note2) ○ ○ (Note2) ○ (Note2) ○ ○ (Note2) ○ (Note2)
Device comment ○ ○ ○ (Note1) ○ ○ × ○ ○ ×

(Note 1) Alphanumerical characters only

(Note 2) The available parameters are restricted to those for the program settings and the like.

IV - 5
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 Outline

IV - 6
 2
Starting and Ending Onboard

IV - 7
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 Starting and Ending Onboard

2.1 Starting
Onboard starts up when [F0] key is pressed on the NC.
In M700VW/M700 Series, operation mode (Standard operation mode / Simple operation mode) at the time of startup can
be determined by bit1 of the bit selection #6451.

76543210 Bit
#(6451) Data ( 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 )

0: Startup with standard operation mode

Use #6451 1: Startup with simple operation mode

IV - 8
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.1 Starting

2.1.1 Startup with Standard Operation Mode

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

Initial screen

(1) State at Initial Startup

The state of the menu buttons on the main screen are as follows at the very initial startup of the onboard.

Menu button State

AUTO LADDER This button will be invalid (displayed in gray) when data is opened in automatic ladder
MONITOR monitor, NC file operation, or external file operation.
NC FILE This can be pressed at any time.
PROJECT OPERATION This can be pressed at any time.
LADDER This cannot be pressed until the program data is opened in the onboard editing area.
DEVICE This cannot be pressed until the program data is opened in the onboard editing area.
PARAM. This cannot be pressed until the parameter data is opened in the onboard editing area.
DIAGNOS. This can be pressed at any time.
ENVIRON. SETTING This can be pressed at any time.
HELP This can be pressed at any time.
END This can be pressed at any time.

(2) PLC data previously opened on the onboard

(a) PLC data on the onboard editing area
PLC data which was previously opened on the onboard will not be retained.
Open the program data from [NC FILE] or [PROJECT OPERATION] again.
(b) Connected NC
At the initial start-up, the onboard has to be connected to the same NC as the setting and display device
screen side. Connected NC is displayed in the lower right corner of all the screens.

IV - 9
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 Starting and Ending Onboard

2.1.2 Startup with Simple Operation Mode

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

Initial screen

When starting up the onboard, all the files except for PLC message data
(sequence program, parameter, and device comment) will be read out from NC temporary memory
and the sequence program will be automatically displayed on the ladder monitor screen.

NC
When onboard
Temporary Simple Onboard
operation mode Sequence program is
Sequence program is active displayed on ladder
Parameter
monitor screen
Device comment

Parameter
PLC message Device comment

- When the number of stored sequence programs is one, that sequence program is displayed on the ladder monitor.
- When the number of stored sequence program is two or more, the upper level program determined by the
parameter setting is displayed on the ladder monitor screen.
- When the device comment storage destination is specified with the standard operation mode environment setting
menu key, device comment is read out from the specified storage area.

IV - 10
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.1 Starting

2.1.3 M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series Startup

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○

Initial screen

When starting up the onboard, all the files except for PLC message data
(sequence program, parameter, and device comment) will be read out from NC temporary memory
and the sequence program will be automatically displayed on the ladder monitor screen.

NC When onboard
Temporary memory M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Onboard
Series
is active Sequence program is
Sequence program
displayed on ladder
Parameter monitor screen
Device comment

Parameter
PLC message Device comment

- When the number of stored sequence programs is one, that sequence program is displayed on the ladder monitor.
- When the number of stored sequence program is two or more, the upper level program determined by the
parameter setting is displayed on the ladder monitor screen.
- If no sequence program can be read, the MAIN screen appears.

IV - 11
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 Starting and Ending Onboard

2.2 Ending
M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

In M700VW/M700 Series, onboard ends when the [END] menu key on the MAIN screen is pressed.
If there is any editing data which has not been saved in the temporary memory or external device when ending, the "END
CONFIRMATION" popup screen will open.
In M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series, onboard ends when the CNC power is turned OFF.

■ When there is editing data which has not been saved

"END CONFIRMATION" popup screen (In 700 Series)

Menu corresponding to
the popup screen

This cancels the ending process.

This ends the onboard. Any editing data which has not been saved will be lost.

(Note 1) If NC is shut down (power turned OFF) without executing ROM-Write

The data in the onboard editing area and the data in the NC's temporary memory will be lost when the NC
power is turned OFF. Always save this data on a ROM using ROM-Write.
(Note 2) If onboard is not ended with END menu (M700VW/M700 Series)
The data opened in the onboard editing area will be discarded.If the program data is under the NC
automatic update mode (LADDER screen's background color is white), the data up to the "converted"
circuit will be saved in the NC's temporary data. (However, if it is not written to the ROM it will be lost
when the NC power is turned OFF.)If the program data is under the local editing mode (LADDER
screen's background color is light blue), the data including the "converted" circuit will be lost. (The last
"save" state will be retained.)

IV - 12
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.3 Switching from Simple Operation Mode to Standard Operation Mode

2.3 Switching from Simple Operation Mode to Standard Operation Mode

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

(1) Switching method

When "MAIN" → "SWITCH STANDARD MENU KEY" menu key is pressed, the following confirmation message will
be displayed.
It switches to the standard operation menu key. Is it good? YES/NO
When switching from simple operation mode to standard operation mode, PLC data in the onboard editing area will
be held as it is.

Simple operation mode Standard operation mode

Parameter Parameter
(*)

Program Device Program Device

AAA Comment(*) AAA comment

(*) Change not possible with simple (Switch with the data opened.)
operation mode

IV - 13
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 Starting and Ending Onboard

2.4 Switching from Standard Operation Mode to Simple Operation Mode

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

When switching from standard operation mode to simple operation mode, the state will be where the onboard is turned
OFF and ON again. All the PLC data in the onboard editing area will be discarded and automatically reloaded from the
NC temporary memory area.

Standard operation mode Simple operation mode

Parameter Parameter

Program Device Program Device

AAA comment AAA comment

(State at the time of onboard startup)

(1) Switching method

When "SWITCH SIMPLE MENU KEY" menu key is pressed, the following "END CONFIRMATION" popup screen
will be displayed.

"END CONFIRMATION" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

This cancels the ending process.

This ends the onboard. Restart the onboard with the simple operation mode menu
key. Any editing data which has not been saved will be lost.

IV - 14
 3
Screens

IV - 15
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Screens

3.1 Screen Resolution

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ VGA only
The setting and display unit's screen resolution differs according to the NC model. Onboard is compatible with the
following two screen resolutions. This manual uses the VGA (640 x 480 pixel) screen display as an example.
(1) VGA (640 × 480 pixels)
(2) XGA (1024×768 pixels)
(Note 1) M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series onboard is compatible with VGA only.

3.2 Types
M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
The following three types of screens are displayed with the onboard.

Full screen This screen uses the full screen area.

Split screen This screen splits the full screen into two areas and displays.
This screen is displayed over the full screen display or split screen.
Popup screen
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series have two display types; "window type" and "bar type".

IV - 16
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
3.3 Full Screen Display

3.3 Full Screen Display

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
The full screen display ("LADDER" screen) is shown below.

■ In M700VW/M700 Series
Cursor display
Title display

Scroll bar
The position
changes according
to the screen
movement.

Message display

Connected NC
confirmation
warning display

Connected NC nam

Menu horizontal
movement enabled
status display

Menu hierarchical movement enabled status display

■ In M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series

Cursor display
Title display

Scroll bar
The position
changes according
to the screen
movement.

Message display

Connected NC
confirmation
warning display

Connected NC name

Menu horizontal
movement enabled
status display

Menu hierarchical movement enabled status display

IV - 17
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Screens

(1) Title display

The currently displayed screen's menu hierarchy, program name, function mode (WRITE, MONITOR, etc.), editing
mode (OVR.WRITE, INSERT), and total number of steps are displayed.
Refer to "Screen Title Display" for details.

(2) Scroll bar

This displays the position of the entire program.
(Note 1) In M700VW/M700 Series, if the model is not provided with a pointing device such as a mouse or touch
panel, the screen cannot be moved with the scroll bar. (Refer to (3) Moving the screen.)
(Note 2) M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series cannot move the screen with the scroll bar, even if any pointing device is
provided.

(3) Screen movement

The screen can be moved with the following methods.
- Move the cursor with the arrow keys. (Move further at the top or bottom of the screen.)

- Move in page units with the page keys PAGE

and .
PAGE

(Note)If there is an unconverted circuit on the "LADDER" screen, the movement range may be limited.Q&A

(4) Cursor display on the screen

The cursor displayed on the screen changes according to the function mode and writing mode state.

Function mode Writing mode Cursor

OVR. WRITE
Blue .Not filled in
WRITE
INSERT
Purple. Upper left corner is filled in
MONITOR
START/STOP MONITOR Red. Not filled in

(5) Message display, progress display

Warning messages are displayed. ("WRITE RADDER TO ROM", etc.)
In M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series, a process progress (progress bar) is additionally displayed.

(6) Connected NC confirmation warning display

When the NC connected at the setting display unit screen side and the NC connected with the onboard differ, the
warning is displayed.
However, currently this display is not available.

(7) Connected NC name display

The number of the NC to which the onboard is currently connected is displayed.

Connected NC name
Connected NC
display
M01 Connected with machine No. 1 NC
M02 Connected with machine No. 2 NC
: :

(8) Menu hierarchical movement enabled status display, menu horizontal movement enabled status display
"Menu hierarchical movement enabled status display" is displayed when switching to the menu in the upward
hierarchy is possible with menu key. If this movement is not possible, this will not be displayed.
"Menu horizontal movement enabled status display" is displayed when switching menus within the same hierarchy
or switching to the menu on the second page with menu key. If these movements are not possible, this will not
be displayed.

IV - 18
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
3.4 Color-coded Display of "LADDER" Screen

3.4 Color-coded Display of "LADDER" Screen

The "LADDER" screen (screen on which ladder circuit is displayed) is color-coded into two types and displayed.

(1) NC automatic update mode

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
When the circuit is converted, the circuits of the program in the onboard editing area are converted, and the
program with the same name in the NC temporary memory is rewritten.

Backgrou
Mode Display conditions
nd color
NC automatic update mode

- When displaying the circuits for a program for which

White [OPEN] , [SAVE]has been executed from the "NC
FILE" menu.

(2) Local editing mode

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○
When the circuit is converted, only the program in the onboard editing area is rewritten.

Background
Mode Display conditions
color
Local editing mode

- When displaying the circuits for a program for which

[OPEN PROJECT] , [SAVE PROJECT] has been
executed from the "EXTERNAL FILE" menu.
- When displaying the circuits for a program for which
Light blue the data has been added or the data name has been
changed with [FILE] on the "MAIN" menu.
- When displaying the circuits for a program newly
created with [INITIAL SETTING] from the "FILE"
menu.

IV - 19
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Screens

3.5 Split Display

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
The split display ("LADDER MONITOR" screen) is shown below. (The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

Cursor display
Title display

Split screen
display

Close split screen Connected NC name

(1) Title display
The currently displayed screen's menu hierarchy, program name, function mode (WRITE, MONITOR, etc.), editing
mode (OVR.WRITE, INSERT), and total number of steps are displayed. Refer to "Screen Title Display" for details.

(2) Cursor movement between split screens

Use "MOVEMENT ON SPLIT SCREEN" menu key to switch cursor between two split screens.
When the screen is not split, menu key is masked.
"#" key can also be used for switching cursor.

(3) Screen movement

The operation is the same as for the full screen display.
Note that only the screen in which the cursor is displayed can be moved. In simple operation mode, when jumping
to the other screen, split display will be cleared.

(4) Screen cursor display and message display

These displays are the same as the full screen.

(5) Split screen menu key

When menu key is pressed, the split screen is closed.

IV - 20
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
3.6 Popup Screen

3.6 Popup Screen

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
The popup screen ("SELECT PROJECT" screen) is shown below. (The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

Popup screen

Menu keys change according to the popup screen

(1) Menus corresponding to popup screen

When a popup screen appears, menu keys corresponding to each item on the popup screen will appear. The popup
screen can be operated with these menu keys.
Refer to "Basic Screen Operations" for details.

(2) Closing the popup screen

Press the key to close the popup screen.

IV - 21
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Screens

3.7 Confirmation Popup Screen

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
This popup screen opens to reconfirm the execution of operations or to confirm writing of data during PLC RUN.

(Example) "END CONFIRMATION" popup screen (The screen is an example of M700VW/M700

 Series)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

3.8 Error Display Popup Screen

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
This popup screen opens to reconfirm the execution of operations or to confirm writing of data during PLC RUN.
(Example) "ERROR" popup screen (The screen is an example of M700 Series)

Menus corresponding to
popup screen

IV - 22
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
3.9 Screen Title Display

3.9 Screen Title Display

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

Menu hierarchy display Program name Mode 1 Mode 2 Total steps

(The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

(1) Menu hierarchy display

The hierarchy of the currently displayed menu is displayed. The levels are delimited with "/".
(Example) For "EDIT" menu: "Main/circuit/edit"

(2) Program name

The name of the program currently targeted for editing and monitoring with onboard is displayed.

(3) Mode 1 display

The edit mode and monitor mode are indicated. The cursor display changes according to the mode status.

Mode 1 Status
WRITE Indicates circuit editing.
MONITOR Indicates monitoring is active.
STOP MONITOR Indicates monitoring is stopped.

(4) Mode 2 display

OVR.WRITE/INSERT are indicated for the WRITE mode, and the PLC RUN/STOP are indicated during MONITOR
and MONITOR STOP. The cursor display changes according to OVR.WRITE and INSERT.

Mode 2 Status
OVR. WRITE The circuit can be edited with overwriting.
INSERT The circuit can be edited with insertion.
RUN The PLC is running.
STOP The PLC is stopped.
(5) Total number of steps
The total number of steps in the program targeted for editing is displayed.

3.10 Menu Key Display

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The menu keys displayed at the bottom of the screen change according to the configuration given in "Explanation of
Keys (Keys related to Onboard): Menu Keys". When a mouse or touch panel is used, pressing of the menu button can be
confirmed by the instant denting and highlighting of the button. (The button is not highlighted in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70
Series.)
The menu keys, which allow the usage of INPUT key when entered, are enhanced (by the black border) in M700VS/
M70V/M70/E70 Series.
(Note) If a popup screen is displayed, the menu keys will change according to each item on the popup screen.

IV - 23
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Screens

3.11 Basic Screen Operations

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The basic screen operations used commonly for each screen are explained in this section.

(1) Selection of items on screen

The input and selection items on the screen can be selected with the following two methods.

[Method 1] Selection of items with TAB keys (, )

When the TAB key is pressed, the active window will move in order of the items which must be input or
selected. If the key is pressed when the active window is at the last item, it will return to the head item. The
selected item is highlighted in light purple.
(Example) For "COMMENT DISPLAY" screen (The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

(1) When →| is pressed, the selection items (light

(2) purple items) will move in the forward order 1 to 4.
(3) When |← is pressed, the selection items (light
purple items) will move in the reverse order 4 to 1.
(4)

[Method 2] Selection of items with menu keys (Direct selection of selection items)
When the menu button with the same name as the item displayed on the screen is pressed, the item can be
selected. Once the button is pressed, the item name is displayed in "light purple' and the data can be set.
(Example) For "FIND STEP NO." screen

Press

IV - 24
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
3.11 Basic Screen Operations

(2) Pressing buttons in screen (M700VW/M700 Series only)

The buttons on the screen can be operated with the following two methods.

[Method 1] Select button with TAB key and then press [INPUT] key.
(Example) Operation using same menu as button on "COMMENT DISPLAY" screen.

Select the SET button with the

TAB key, and then press the
INPUT key.

(Supplement) If operations are possible with the touch panel, the buttons on the screen can be directly
pressed.

[Method 2] Press the menu key with the same name as the button.
(Example) Operation using same menu as button on "FIND STEP NO." screen.

IV - 25
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Screens

(3) Setting characters (values)

Characters (values) can be set in the items with a white box. The input methods are explained below.
(a) Select the item to be input. Refer to (1) for details.
(b) Input the data.

(Example) To input X80 on the "CROSS REF. LIST" screen (The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

(4) Setting unique selection items

Only one data item is selected from two or more data items. The highlighted data is the currently selected item.
There are two methods to change the selection.
[Method 1] When the menu key with the same name as the item is pressed, the selection data will move in the right
direction. If the currently selected item is at the far right, the selection data will return to the head.
[Method 2] After selecting the item with the TAB key, change the data with the [ ← ] and [ → ] keys.

(Example) To select ZOOM DISPLAY on the "LADDER DISPLAY" screen (The screen is an example of M700VW/
M700 Series)

[Method 1]

The selected data changes in sequence as

the ZOOM DISPLAY menu key is
pressed.

[Method 2] ← Moves in the left direction.

→ Moves in the right direction.

IV - 26
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
3.11 Basic Screen Operations

(5) Setting the list selection items

Data can be selected from a list. When the menu key with the same name as the item name is pressed, or when an
item is selected with a TAB key, a list will appear. The data at the very top is selected (highlighted) first, and the
selected data can be changed with the [ ↑ ] and [ ↓ ] arrow keys.
Press the [INPUT] key to set the selection.

(Example) When "EXE. ORDER" is selected on the "PROGRAM SETTING" screen (The screen is an example of
M700VW/M700 Series)

   

Select the data with the ↑ and ↓ arrow keys.
Set the selection with the INPUT key.

(6) Items with validity setting (M700VW/M700 Series only)

The validity of each item can be set with the following two methods.
[Method 1] When the menu key with the same name as the item is pressed, the status will alternate between valid
(with check mark) and invalid (no check mark).
[Method 2] When the [SP] key is pressed after selecting the item with the TAB key, the validity status will alternate.

(Example) For "COMMENT DISPLAY" screen

[Method 1]
Press COMMENT menu key.

[Method 2]
After selecting item with TAB key,
press SP key.

IV - 27
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Screens

(7) Selecting tree-structure data

Tree-structure data is configured of data and a directory. The data and directories are shown below.

Indicates valid data

- Directory 1
<Moving the data and directory>
 Data 1 • The data will move by one item according to the direction of the
 Data 2 pressed arrow key ↑ , ↓ , ← or → .
:
 Data 3 <Setting the data validity>
The following two methods of operations are available.
+ Directory 2
• Move the cursor to the data to be set, and press SP .
(The validity will change with each press.)
- Directory 3 • Move the cursor to the data to be set, and press the
"SELECT/CANCEL" menu key.
 Data 4 (The validity will change with each press.)
<Directory + and - >
• If the + key is pressed in the → state, the data in the
directory will appear.
• If the - key is pressed in the ← state, the data in the
directory will be hidden.

(Example) NC file operation - "OPEN" screen (The screen is an example of M700 Series)

IV - 28
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
3.12 Language

3.12 Language
M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

3.12.1 Screen Display Language

The language used for the buttons, items, error messages on the onboard, the device name and instruction on the ladder
screen and the displayed monitor value can be displayed either in English or Japanese with the NC's language
parameter. (If other than Japanese is selected, they are displayed in English.)
To switch the display language for the onboard, the onboard needs to be restarted.

3.12.2 Comment (Statement, Note, Comment, Device Name) Language

The language used to display comments (STATE, NOTE, COMMENT, ALIAS) can be changed with the language
parameter setting. If the language parameter value is not for the valid language, the language will be handled as English
characters.
To switch the display language for the onboard, the onboard needs to be restarted.
(Note) When other than Japanese is selected for M700/M70 Series, they are displayed in English.

IV - 29
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Screens

IV - 30
 4
PLC Data

IV - 31
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 PLC Data

4.1 PLC Data Storage Area

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
The PLC data is stored in the following areas of the NC.

Storage area Application

This area stores the data when executing the PLC. It can be edited with onboard and GX Developer.
Temporary memory area
The data in this area is lost when the NC power is turned OFF.
This area stores the PLC data. The data in this area is not lost even when the NC power is turned
OFF.
ROM area
(Note)The data in the temporary memory is lost when the NC power is turned OFF, so always save
the data in the ROM area.
This area is used to edit and monitor the PLC data with the onboard. When editing or monitoring,
Onboard editing area
open the PLC data in the temporary memory into the onboard editing area.
PLC data can be read from the external device to the onboard editing area. The GX Developer project
External device
data can be read.

PLC data storage area configuration drawing - Standard operation mode -

Automatic Manual
External device

Save project Open project

NC
Convert
ROM-Write
ROM area or save Onboard
Temporary
editing area
memory area
Copy when
power is Open
turned ON

Ladder execution Edit and monitor

PLC data storage area configuration drawing - Simple operation mode in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series

Automatic Manual External device

Save Open
project project

NC
Auto
ROM-Write saving
ROM Temporary Onboard
area memory editing
Copy when area Auto area
power is readout
turned ON

Ladder execution Edit and monitor

IV - 32
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.2 Type of Data

4.2 Type of Data

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
Onboard can handle the same type of PLC data (programs, device comments, parameters) as GX Developer.

(Note 1)The following GX Developer data cannot be used with onboard.

- Parameter's network parameter data
- Device memory data
- Device default value data

List of data handled by onboard

Data type Data name Application

The data name is configured
of up to eight arbitrary one-
byte uppercase alphanumeric The user PLC, statements and notes can be stored.The PLC
Program characters *1 messages (alarm, operator, PLC switch, comment) can be stored with
(Note)A reserved name is a reserved name.
used only when storing the
PLC message. * Refer to *2.
Comments (comment, device name) can be stored.
(Note 1)With the onboard, the device name is only displayed and
The data name is configured
cannot be edited.
of up to eight arbitrary one-
Device comment (Note 2) Data name "COMMENT" is the reserved name for a common
byte uppercase alphanumeric
comment and cannot be changed. The common comment
characters.
"COMMENT" will be displayed even when the other device comment
data is designated if no comment is defined for the data.
Parameter Fixed name "param" The program setting parameters can be stored.

*1: Symbols and spaces cannot be used in the data name.

*2: When storing PLC message data, the following reserved names are used. Reserved name specifications differ
depending on the language specification method. Refer to "PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT :
Common Items: File name rule for message data" for details.
(Method 1) Specify with 3 bits of bit selection parameter #6453 bit 0 to 2. (Language selection method using
PLC alone)

Data type Data name Details of data

M1xxxxxx PLC message of the 1st language
：
Program
M7xxxxxx PLC message of the 7th language
M8xxxxxx PLC message of the 8th language

(Method 2) Specify with display language selection parameter. (Base specifications parameter #1043)
(Method linked with language selection on the setting and display screen）

Data type Data name Details of data

M00xxxxx Language para 0 (English) PLC message
M01xxxxx Language para 1 (Japanese) PLC message
Program
：
M22xxxxx Language para 22 (Chinese -simplified-) PLC message

IV - 33
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 PLC Data

Example: PLC data on "FILE" screen (The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

Type : Program
Data name : MAIN

Type : Device comment

Data name : COMMENT

Type : Parameter
Data name : Param

4.2.1 Program Data

The following details can be saved in the data created as program data.

Saved details Outline

Program (ladder) circuit is the data used to edit and monitor the user PLC with a circuit
Program (ladder) circuit
diagram consisting of .
A statement is character string data added to each program (ladder) circuit block to make
it easy to understand the flow of the entire program. Statements include integrated
Statement
statements that can be stored in the NC, and peripheral statements that cannot be stored
in the NC. (Refer to *1)
A note is character string data added to each coil and function instruction in the program
(ladder circuit) to make it easy to understand the flow of the entire program in the same
Note
manner as statements. Notes include integrated notes that can be stored in the NC, and
peripheral notes that cannot be stored in the NC. (Refer to *1)

*1: Integrated statements and notes, peripheral statements and notes

Integrated The integrated types can be saved in the NC. Note that the program data takes up a large memory when
type stored in the NC.
Peripheral The peripheral types are deleted when saved in the NC, and cannot be saved. Thus, when using peripheral
types statements or notes, they must be controlled with GX Developer projects.

For PLC messages and special programs

Saved details Outline

Alarm messages These are PLC alarm message character strings displayed on the NC.
Operator messages These are PLC operator message character strings displayed on the NC.
PLC switches These are character strings for the PLC switch names.
Comment messages These are PLC comment character strings displayed on the NC.

IV - 34
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
4.2 Type of Data

4.2.2 Device Comment Data

The following can be saved in data created as device comments.

Saved details Outline

This is character string data added to each device. The program is easier to understand
Comment
when meanings are assigned to the devices.
This character string is displayed instead of the device name, and makes it easier to see
Device name the devices.(Note that the device name cannot be edited with the onboard, so this is used
only for display.)

4.2.3 Parameter Data

The following can be saved in data created as parameters.

Saved details Outline

Program settings The program (ladder) execution order can be defined when using multi-programs.

4.2.4 Precaution When Creating the Data

When creating the PLC data using a software such as GX Developer, do not use the characters listed in the table below
for the statement, the note, the device comment and the PLC message.
If a character in the table below is used, the data may not be displayed correctly. For example, the applicable character
may be displayed in two-byte character, may not be displayed in the screen, or the display characters may overlap.

Language Applicable character

German € ‚ ƒ „ … † ‡ ˆ ‰ ‹ ‘ ’ “ ” • – — ˜ ™ ›
French € ‚ ƒ „ … † ‡ ˆ ‰ ‹ ‘ ’ “ ” • – — ˜ ™ ›
Italian € ‚ ƒ „ … † ‡ ˆ ‰ ‹ ‘ ’ “ ” • – — ˜ ™ ›
Spanish € ‚ ƒ „ … † ‡ ˆ ‰ ‹ ‘ ’ “ ” • – — ˜ ™ ›
Portuguese € ‚ ƒ „ … † ‡ ˆ ‰ ‹ ‘ ’ “ ” • – — ˜ ™ ›
Dutch € ‚ ƒ „ … † ‡ ˆ ‰ ‹ ‘ ’ “ ” • – — ˜ ™ ›
Swedish € ‚ ƒ „ … † ‡ ˆ ‰ ‹ ‘ ’ “ ” • – — ˜ ™ ›
Hungarian € ‚ „ … † ‡ ‰ ‹ ‘ ’ “ ” • – — ™ › ˇ ˘ ˛ ˝ ˙
Polish € ‚ „ … † ‡ ‰ ‹ ‘ ’ “ ” • – — ™ › ˇ ˘ ˛ ˝ ˙
Russian € ‚ „ … † ‡ ‰ ‹ ‘ ’ “ ” • – — ™ › №
Turkish € ‚ ƒ „ … † ‡ ˆ ‰ ‹ ‘ ’ “ ” • – — ˜ ™ ›
Czech € ‚ „ … † ‡ ‰ ‹ ‘ ’ “ ” • – — ™ › ˇ ˘ ˛ ˝ ˙

IV - 35
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 PLC Data

IV - 36
 5
Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)

IV - 37
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)

5.1 Basic Operation Keys

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The keys used with onboard are shown below.

Key Explanation
[F0] This opens the onboard screen.
[A] to [Z],[0] to [9] These are alphanumeric keys, etc., used to input arbitrary data.
This key deletes the last character input before it is set.This key deletes one circuit during ladder
[DELETE]
circuit editing.
[C・B] This key deletes the input character string before it is set (cancels the input).
[INPUT] This key is used to set and select the input data.
This key changes between the circuit overwrite and insert modes.
[INSERT]
In M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series, this key changes between the data overwrite and insert modes.
[ ↑ ][ ↓ ][ ← ][ → ] These keys are used to move the cursor to up, down, left and right, and to select items.
This key moves the items on the screen in the forward order.This key moves the instruction circuit in
the forward order during ladder circuit editing.
This key moves the items on the screen in the reverse order.This key moves the instruction circuit in
the reverse order during ladder circuit editing.
This switches the cursor between screens when device registration monitor or circuit registration
[#]
monitor is displayed in split screen.
[EOB(;)] This switches ON and OFF of device comment display on the circuit screen.
This returns the menu of one level up in hierarchy. When a popup screen is displayed, this closes the
or [ESC] popup screen.
This changes the menu in the same hierarchy.

PAGE This moves the page forward in a page unit.

PAGE This moves the page backward in a page unit.

SP (Space) This switches valid/invalid of the check box.
Ctrl ＋ Z This cancels the last edit operation and returns to the previous state with the edit ladder mode.
<,> When <,> key does not exist on keyboard depending on the machine type, use (,) instead.

*: Key allocations may differ depending on the machine type.

IV - 38
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.2 Soft Key

5.2 Soft Key

M700VW/M700 M700VS
E70 M70
Standard Simple M70V
○ ○ ○ ○

For the touch panel specification and no keyboard, operate with the soft keys on the screen.

5.2.1 Soft Keys for M700VW/M700 Series

Press [S/W key] on the screen to display the soft keys.

(1)

Display item Description

(1) Display the soft keys.

IV - 39
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)

[General key display]

(1)

(2)

Display item Description

Switch from general key display to the function key display.
(1)
General keys cannot be used while displaying the function keys.
(2) Switch from keyboard to the keyboard display window.

[Function key display]

Press [Fn] while displaying the general key to display the up and down display switching key and the function keys.
In this mode, it is only valid for the keys (1) to (3) in the table below.

(3)

(1)

(2)

Display item Description

(1) Switch from general key display to the function key display.
(2) Move the keyboard up and down.
(3) They are equivalent to the NC's function keys.

IV - 40
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.2 Soft Key

5.2.2 Soft Keys for M700VS/M70V/M70 Series

5.2.2.1 Display Mode for the Soft Keys

There are two display mode for the soft keys.

[Two-tiered key display mode]

This mode displays the simple key which is assumed that the input is limited to step numbers and device.
This mode is normally used.

(2)

(1)

Display item Description

(1) Switch the soft key's display mode to the four-tiered display mode.
(2) They are equivalent to the NC's function keys.

IV - 41
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)

[Four-tiered key display mode]

This mode displays the full key which is assumed that the instructions and character strings are input.
The menu for the menu key is not displayed.

(2)

(1)

Display item Description

(1) Switch the soft key's display mode to the two-tiered display mode.
(2) They are equivalent to the NC's function keys.

IV - 42
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.2 Soft Key

5.2.2.2 Device Search and Ladder Input Using the Soft Keys

[Device search operation while monitoring]

The pop-up screen for search is displayed at the lowermost of the screen.

[Ladder input operation while editing]

The pop-up screen for ladder input is displayed at the lowermost of the screen.

5.2.3 Precautions
Use the menu switching key for the setting display device to move the menu hierarchy.

IV - 43
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)

5.3 Menu Keys

5.3.1 Menu Keys in Standard Operation Mode and Simple Operation Mode
Menu keys in standard operation mode : Entire onboard function can be used.
Menu keys in simple operation mode : User-friendly configuration, limiting the functions strictly to maintenance
purposes.

5.3.2 Menu Key Hierarchies and Movement

5.3.2.1 Menu Keys in Standard Operation Mode
M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

The menu for standard operation mode is configured of the following four hierarchies.

Moves to downward hierarchy

Corresponding
menu Moves to upward hierarchy

Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3 Hierarchy 4

MAIN NC FILE
PROJECT OPERATION

Movement in same hierarchy

LADDER EDIT LADDER SYMBOL 1
LADDER SYMBOL 2
COPY/INSERT
MONITOR
FIND, REPLACE
VIEW, TOOLS
DEVICE DEVICE BATCH
ENTRY DEVICE
SAMPLING TRACE
PARAM

IV - 44
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Menu Keys

5.3.2.2 Menu Keys in Simple Operation Mode

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

The menu for simple operation mode is configured of the following three hierarchies.

Moves to downward hierarchy

Corresponding
menu
Moves to upward hierarchy

Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3

MAIN NC FILE
Switch pages
EXTERNAL FILE

LADDER MONITOR 1st page

2nd page

LADDER EDIT 1st page LADDER SYMBOL 1

LADDER SYMBOL 2 Movement within the same hierarchy
2nd page

COPY/INSERT

5.3.2.3 Menu Keys in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○

The menu for M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series is configured of the following three hierarchies.

Moves to downward hierarchy

Corresponding
menu
Moves to upward hierarchy

Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3

MAIN NC FILE
Switch pages
LADDER MONITOR 1st page

2nd page

LADDER EDIT 1st page LADDER SYMBOL 1

LADDER SYMBOL 2 Movement within the same hierarchy
2nd page
COPY/INSERT

IV - 45
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)

5.3.3 Details of Menu Keys

5.3.3.1 Menu Keys in Standard Operation Mode
M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

(1) "MAIN" menu keys

AUTO LADDER MONITOR This reads the program data from NC and display it with ladder monitor mode.
NC FILE This changes to the "NC FILE" menu key.
PROJECT OPERATION This changes to the "PROJECT OPERATION" menu key.
This changes to the "LADDER" menu key.
LADDER When no program is opened in the onboard editing area, this button will be invalid
(displayed in gray).
DEVICE This changes to the "DEVICE" menu key.
PARAM. This changes to the "PARAM." menu key.
DIAGNOS. This changes to the "DIAGNOS." menu key.
ENVIRON. SETTING This changes to the "ENVIRON. SETTING" menu key.
HELP This opens the "HELP" screen.
END This ends the onboard.

(2) "LADDER" menu keys

EDIT This changes to the "EDIT" menu key.

This changes to the "MONITOR" menu key.
(Note) Only the program in the NC's temporary memory can be monitored. Thus, the
MONITOR
"monitor" menu for the circuit with light blue background turns gray and the circuit
cannot be monitored.
FIND, REPLACE This changes to the "FIND, REPLACE" menu key.
VIEW, TOOLS This changes to the "VIEW, TOOLS" menu key.
PLC DIAGNOSIS This opens the "PLC DIAGNOSIS" popup screen.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.
PROGRAM CHANGE This changes the programs in the circuit display.

IV - 46
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Menu Keys

(2-1) "EDIT" menu keys

LADDER SYMBOL 1 This changes to the "LADDER SYMBOL 1" menu key.
LADDER SYMBOL 2 This changes to the "LADDER SYMBOL 2" menu key.
COPY/INSERT This changes to the "COPY/INSERT" menu key.
EDIT LADDER MODE This changes the mode to the EDIT LADDER mode.
EDIT COMMENT MODE This changes the mode to the EDIT COMMENT mode.
FIND This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited. The converted ladder will
CONVERT LADDER
be updated to the temporary memory in the NC automatic update mode.
PROGRAM CHANGE This changes the programs in the circuit display.

(2-2) "COPY/INSERT" menu keys

MARK The start point and end point are designated to select the circuit group.
COPY This copies the circuit in the designated range.
PASTE This pastes the copied circuit.
INSERT LINE This inserts a line at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
DELETE LINE This deletes the line at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.
CANCEL EDIT LADDER This cancels the unconverted ladder and undoes the last editing.
This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited. The converted ladder will
CONVERT LADDER
be updated to the temporary memory in the NC automatic update mode.
UNDO This undoes the last edit operation.

(2-2-1) "LADDER SYMBOL 1", "LADDER SYMBOL 2" menu keys

Ladder symbols other than the During edit mode:This opens the "INPUT" popup screen.
following During monitor mode:This opens the "FIND" popup screen
- (Cross bar) This writes a "cross bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
| (Vertical bar) This writes a "vertical bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
| (Vertical bar) DELETE This deletes the "vertical bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited. The converted ladder will
CONVERT LADDER
be updated to the temporary memory in the NC automatic update mode.
UNDO This undoes the last edit operation.

IV - 47
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)

(2-3) "MONITOR" menu keys

(When cursor is placed on the "LADDER" screen)

(When cursor is placed on the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen)

(When cursor is placed on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.)

START/STOP MONITOR This starts or stops the monitor.

ENTRY DEVICE This splits the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen or cancels the split display.
ENTRY LADDER MONITOR This splits the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen or cancels the split display.
REGISTER MONITOR This registers the circuit on the cursor position in the entry ladder monitor.
DEVICE TEST This opens the "DEVICE TEST" popup screen.
MONITOR STOP CONDITI. This opens the "MONITOR STOP CONDITI." popup screen.
This changes displays of the current value for the device on the ladder monitor
CHANGE MONITOR DEC/HEX
between decimal and hexadecimal.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
MOVEMENT ON SPLIT This moves the cursor between "LADDER" screen and "ENTRY DEVICE"/"ENTRY
SCREEN LADDER MONITOR" screen on the split screen.
PROGRAM CHANGE This changes the programs in the circuit display.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.
FIND This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
ENTRY LADDER ALL DEL. This deletes all the circuits registered in the entry ladder monitor.
DIVISION RATIO CHANGE This changes the ratio of the split screen.
This displays when the cursor is on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.
16 BIT/32 BIT This changes between word and W word of the word device registered in the ENTRY
DEVICE MONITOR.
* "MONITOR" menu can be used only in the circuit (program) whose background color is white.
When the circuit's (program's) background color is light blue, the same hierarchial movement to the
"MONITOR" menu will be skipped.

IV - 48
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Menu Keys

(2-4) "FIND, REPLACE" menu keys

FIND CONTACT OR COIL This opens the "FIND CONTACT OR COIL" popup screen.
FIND DEVICE This opens the "FIND DEVICE" popup screen.
FIND INST This opens the "FIND INST" popup screen.
FIND STEP NO. This opens the "FIND STEP NO." popup screen.
FIND STRING This opens the "FIND STRING" popup screen.
CHANGE AB CONTACT This opens the "CHANGE AB CONTACT" popup screen.
REPLACE DEVICE This opens "REPLACE DEVICE" popup screen.
CHANGE T/C SETTING This opens the "CHANGE T/C SETTING" popup screen.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.
PROGRAM CHANGE This changes the programs in the circuit display.

* "CHANGE AB CONTACT", "REPLACE DEVICE", and "CHANGE T/C SETTING" menus can be used only in
the circuit (program) whose background color is light blue.

(2-5) "VIEW, TOOLS" menu keys

COMMENT DISPLAY This opens the "COMMENT DISPLAY" popup screen.

LADDER DISPLAY This opens the "LADDER DISPLAY" popup screen.
CROSS REF. LIST This opens the "CROSS REF. LIST" popup screen.
LIST OF USED DEVICES This opens the "LIST OF USED DEVICES" popup screen.
CHECK PROGRAM This opens the "CHECK PROGRAM" popup screen.
ZOOM CURSOR This enlarges the cursor display area.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.
PROGRAM CHANGE This changes the programs in the circuit display.

(3) "DEVICE" menu keys

DEVICE BATCH This opens the "DEVICE BATCH" screen.

ENTRY DEVICE This opens the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen.
SAMPLING TRACE This opens the "SAMPLING TRACE" screen.

(4) "PARAM." menu keys

PROGRAM SETTING This opens the "PROGRAM SETTING" popup screen.

COMMON POINTER SETTING This opens the "COMMON POINTER SETTING" popup screen.

IV - 49
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)

(5) "NC FILE" menu keys

OPEN This opens the "OPEN" popup screen.

SAVE This opens the "SAVE" popup screen.
VERIFY This opens the "VERIFY" popup screen.
ROM WRITE This opens the "ROM WRITE" popup screen.
DELETE This opens the "DELETE" popup screen.
FORMAT This opens the "FORMAT" popup screen.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
PLC VERSION UP This opens the "PLC VERSION UP" popup screen.
KEYWORD This opens the "KEYWORD" screen.

(6) "PROJECT OPERATION" menu keys

OPEN PROJECT This opens the "OPEN PROJECT" popup screen.

SAVE PROJECT This opens the "SAVE PROJECT" popup screen.
DELETE PROJECT This opens the "DELETE PROJECT" popup screen.
VERIFY PROJECT This opens the "VERIFY PROJECT" popup screen.
EDIT DATA OPERATION This opens the "EDIT DATA OPERATION" popup screen.

(7) "DIAGNOSIS" menu keys

PLC DIAGNOSIS This opens the "PLC DIAGNOSIS" popup screen.

(8) "ENVIRON. SETTING" menu keys

CONNECT NC SETTING This opens the "CONNECT NC SETTING" popup screen.

NC FILE SETTING This opens the "NC FILE SETTING" popup screen.
SWITCH SIMPLE MENU KEY This changes the display to the simple menu key.

IV - 50
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Menu Keys

5.3.3.2 Menu Keys in Simple Operation Mode

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

(1) "MAIN" menu keys

NC FILE This changes to the "NC FILE" menu key.

EXTERNAL FILE This changes to the "EXTERNAL FILE" menu key.
LADDER MONITOR This changes to the "LADDER MONITOR" menu key. (*1)
LADDER EDIT This changes to the "LADDER EDIT" menu key. (*1)
DEVICE This changes to the "DEVICE" menu key.
PARAM. This changes to the "PARAM." menu key.
PLC DIAGNOSIS This opens the "PLC DIAGNOSIS" popup screen.
ENVIRON. SETTING This changes to the "ENVIRON. SETTING" menu key.
HELP This opens the "HELP" screen.
END This ends the onboard.

*1: When no program is opened in the onboard editing area, this button will be invalid (displayed in gray).

(2) "NC FILE" menu keys

FILE LIST This opens the "FILE LIST" popup screen.

OPEN This opens the "OPEN" popup screen.
ROM WRITE This opens the "ROM WRITE" popup screen.
DELETE This opens the "DELETE" popup screen.
FORMAT This opens the "FORMAT" popup screen.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
KEYWORD This opens the "KEYWORD" screen.
PLC VERSION UP This opens the "PLC VERSION UP" popup screen.

(3) "EXTERNAL FILE" menu keys

EXT.->NC This opens the "EXT.->NC" popup screen.

NC->EXT. This opens the "NC->EXT." popup screen.
EXTERNAL FILE VERIFY This opens the " EXTERNAL FILE VERIFY " popup screen.
EXTERNAL FILE DELETE This opens the " EXTERNAL FILE DELETE " popup screen.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
KEYWORD This opens the "KEYWORD" popup screen.

IV - 51
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)

(4) "LADDER MONITOR" menu keys

(When cursor is placed on the "LADDER" screen.)

(When cursor is placed on the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen.)

(When the cursor is placed on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.)

START/STOP MONITOR This starts or stops the monitor.

ENTRY DEVICE This splits the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen or cancels the split display.
ENTRY LADDER MONITOR This splits the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen or cancels the split display.
REGISTER MONITOR This registers the circuit on the cursor position in the entry ladder monitor.
DEVICE TEST This opens the "DEVICE TEST" popup screen.
FIND This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
FIND STEP NO. This opens the "FIND STEP NO." popup screen.
COMMENT ON/OFF This changes ON/OFF of the comment display.
MOVEMENT ON SPLIT This moves the cursor between "LADDER" screen and "ENTRY DEVICE"/"ENTRY
SCREEN LADDER MONITOR" screen on the split screen.
PROGRAM CHANGE This changes the programs in the circuit display.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.
ZOOM CURSOR This enlarges the cursor display area.
This changes displays of the current value for the device on the ladder monitor
CHANGE MONITOR DEC/HEX
between decimal and hexadecimal.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
ENTRY LADDER ALL DEL. This deletes all the circuits registered in the entry ladder monitor.
DIVISION RATIO CHANGE This changes the ratio of the split screen.
This displays when the cursor is on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.
16 BIT/32 BIT This changes between word and W word of the word device registered in the ENTRY
DEVICE MONITOR.

IV - 52
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Menu Keys

(5) "LADDER EDIT" menu keys

LADDER SYMBOL 1 This changes to the "LADDER SYMBOL 1" menu key.
LADDER SYMBOL 2 This changes to the "LADDER SYMBOL 2" menu key.
COPY/INSERT This changes to the " COPY/INSERT " menu key.
FIND This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
FIND STEP NO. This opens the "FIND STEP NO." popup screen.
COMMENT ON/OFF This changes ON/OFF of the comment display.
CONVERT LADDER This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited.
PROGRAM CHANGE This changes the programs in the circuit display.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.
ZOOM CURSOR This enlarges the cursor display area.
OVR.WRITE/INSERT This changes overwrite/insert.
PLCRUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
CANCEL EDIT LADDER This discards the unconverted circuit.
UNDO This undoes the last edit operation.

(5-1) "LADDER SYMBOL 1", "LADDER SYMBOL 2" menu keys

Ladder symbols other than the During edit mode:This opens the "INPUT" popup screen.
following During monitor mode:This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
- (Cross bar) This writes a "cross bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
| (Vertical bar) This writes a "vertical bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
| (Vertical bar) DELETE This deletes the "vertical bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
CONVERT LADDER This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited.
UNDO This undoes the last edit operation.

IV - 53
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)

(5-2) "COPY/INSERT" menu keys

MARK The start point and end point are designated to select the circuit group.
COPY This copies the circuit in the designated range.
PASTE This pastes the copied circuit.
INSERT LINE This inserts a line at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
DELETE LINE This deletes the line at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.
CANCEL EDIT LADDER This discards the unconverted circuit.
CONVERT LADDER This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited.
UNDO This undoes the last edit operation.

(6) "PARAM." menu keys

PROGRAM SETTING This opens the "PROGRAM SETTING" popup screen.

(7) "DEVICE" menu keys

DEVICE BATCH This opens the "DEVICE BATCH" screen.

ENTRY DEVICE This opens the "DEVICE REGISTRATION MONITOR" screen.
SAMPLING TRACE This opens the "SAMPLING TRACE" screen.

(8) "ENVIRON. SETTING" menu key

CONNECT NC SETTING This opens the "CONNECT NC SETTING" popup screen.

NC FILE SETTING This opens the "NC FILE SETTING" popup screen.
LADDER DISPLAY This opens the "LADDER DISPLAY" popup screen.
COMMENT DISPLAY This opens the "COMMENT DISPLAY" popup screen.
SWITCH STANDARD MENU
This changes the display to the standard menu key.
KEY

IV - 54
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Menu Keys

5.3.3.3 Menu Keys in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○

(1) "MAIN" menu keys [Common in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series]

NC FILE This changes to the "NC FILE" menu key.

EXT.FILE OPERATION This changes to the "EXTERNAL FILE" menu key.
LADDER MONITOR This changes to the "LADDER MONITOR" menu key. (*1)
LADDER EDIT This changes to the "LADDER EDIT" menu key. (*1)
DEVICE This opens the "DEVICE BATCH" screen. (*1)
PARAM. This changes to the "PARAM." menu key. (*1)
PLC DIAGNOSIS This opens the "PLC DIAGNOSIS" popup screen.
ENVIRON. SETTING This changes to the "ENVIRON. SETTING" menu key.
HELP This opens the "HELP" screen.
*1: When no program is opened in the onboard editing area, this button will be invalid (displayed in gray).

(2) "NC FILE" menu keys

[M700VS/M70V/E70 Series]

[M70 Series]

LIST This opens the "FILE SIZE DISPLAY" screen.

OPEN This opens the "OPEN" screen.
ROM WRITE This opens the "RO M WRITE" screen.
DELETE This opens the "DELETE" popup screen.
FORMAT This opens the "FORMAT" popup screen.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
KEYWORD This opens the "KEYWORD" screen.
FILE OPE. This opens the "FILE OPE." popup screen.

(3) "EXTERNAL FILE" menu keys [Common in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series]

EXT.->NC This opens the "EXT.->NC" screen.

NC->EXT. This opens the "NC->EXT." screen.
VERIFY EXT.FILE This opens the "VERIFY" screen.
DELETE EXT.FILE This opens the "DELETE" popup screen.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
KEYWORD This opens the "KEYWORD" screen.

IV - 55
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)

(4) "LADDER MONITOR" menu keys

(When cursor is on the "LADDER" screen.) [Common in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series]

[M700VS/M70V/E70 Series]

[M70 Series]

(When cursor is on the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen.) [Common in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series]

(When the cursor is on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.) [Common in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series]

START/STOP MONITOR This starts or stops the monitor.

ENTRY DEVICE This splits the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen or cancels the split display.
ENTRY LADDER MONITOR This splits the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen or cancels the split display.
REGISTER MONITOR This registers the circuit on the cursor position in the entry ladder monitor.
DEVICE TEST This opens the "DEVICE TEST" popup screen.
FIND This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
FIND STEP NO. This opens the "FIND STEP NO." popup screen.
COMMENT ON/OFF This changes ON/OFF of the comment display.
MOVEMENT ON SPLIT This moves the cursor between "LADDER" screen and "ENTRY DEVICE"/"ENTRY
SCREEN LADDER MONITOR" screen on the split screen.
PROGRAM CHANGE This changes the programs in the circuit display.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.
LIST OF USED DEVICES This opens the "LIST OF USED DEVICES" popup screen.
CROSS REF. LIST This opens the "CROSS REF. LIST" popup screen.
ZOOM CURSOR This enlarges the cursor display area.
This changes displays of the current value for the device on the ladder monitor
CHANGE MONITOR DEC/HEX
between decimal and hexadecimal.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
ENTRY LADDER ALL DEL. This deletes all the circuits registered in the entry ladder monitor.
DIVISION RATIO CHANGE This changes the ratio of the split screen.
This displays when the cursor is on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.
16 BIT/32 BIT This changes between word and W word of the word device registered in the ENTRY
DEVICE MONITOR.
DEC/HEX This switches the decimal/hexadecimal display.

IV - 56
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
5.3 Menu Keys

(5) "LADDER EDIT" menu keys [Common in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series]

[M700VS/M70V/E70 Series]

[M70 Series]

LADDER SYMBOL 1 This changes to the "LADDER SYMBOL 1" menu key.
LADDER SYMBOL 2 This changes to the "LADDER SYMBOL 2" menu key.
COPY/INSERT This changes to the " COPY/INSERT " menu key.
FIND This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
FIND STEP NO. This opens the "FIND STEP NO." popup screen.
COMMENT ON/OFF This changes ON/OFF of the comment display.
CONVERT LADDER This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited.
PROGRAM CHANGE This changes the programs in the circuit display.
ZOOM DISPLAY This expands/reduces the ladder display size.
ZOOM CURSOR This enlarges the cursor display area.
LIST OF USED DEVICES This opens the "LIST OF USED DEVICES" popup screen.
CROSS REF. LIST This opens the "CROSS REF. LIST" popup screen.
OVR.WRITE/INSERT This changes overwrite/insert.
PLC RUN/STOP This opens the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen.
CANCEL EDIT LADDER This discards the unconverted circuit.
UNDO This undoes the last edit operation.

(5-1) "LADDER SYMBOL 1", "LADDER SYMBOL 2" menu keys [Common in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series]

Ladder symbols other than the During edit mode:This opens the "INPUT" popup screen.
following During monitor mode:This opens the "FIND" popup screen.
- (Cross bar) This writes a "cross bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
| (Vertical bar) This writes a "vertical bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
| (Vertical bar) DELETE This deletes the "vertical bar" at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
CONVERT LADDER This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited.
UNDO This undoes the last edit operation.

IV - 57
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 Explanation of Keys (Keys Related to Onboard)

(5-2) "COPY/INSERT" menu keys

[M700VS/M70V/E70 Series]

[M70 Series]

MARK The start point and end point are designated to select the circuit group.
COPY This copies the circuit in the designated range.
PASTE This pastes the copied circuit.
INSERT LINE This inserts a line at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
DELETE LINE This deletes the line at the cursor position in the "LADDER" screen.
CHECK PROGRAM This opens the "CHECK PROGRAM" popup screen.
CONVERT LADDER This converts the program (ladder) currently being edited.
UNDO This undoes the last edit operation.

(6) "DEVICE" menu keys

[M700VS/M70V/E70 Series]

[M70 Series]

DEVICE BATCH This opens the "DEVICE BATCH" screen.

ENTRY DEVICE This splits the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen or cancels the split display.
SAMPLING TRACE This opens the "SAMPLING TRACE" screen.

(7) "PARAM." menu keys [Common in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series]

PROGRAM SETTING This opens the "PROGRAM SETTING" screen.

COMMON POINTER SETTING This opens the "COMMON POINTER SETTING" screen.

(8) "ENVIRON. SETTING" menu keys

[M700VS/M70V/E70 Series]

[M70 Series]

LADDER DISPLAY This opens the "LADDER DISPLAY" screen.

COMMENT DISPLAY This opens the "COMMENT DISPLAY" screen.
COMMENT STORAGE
This opens the "COMMENT STORAGE SETTING" screen.
SETTING

IV - 58
 6
Environment Setting

IV - 59
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Environment Setting

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○

Various settings required when the onboard is used are explained below.

■ In M700VW/M700 Series

■ In M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series

(Note) In M70 Series, [COMMENT STRAGE SETTING] menu is not available.

(1) "ENVIRON. SETTING" screen display

Select "MAIN" → [ENVIRON. SETTING] menu key. When selected, "ENVIRON. SETTING" screen will be
displayed in full size.

When using M700VW/M700 Series, refer to "IV EXPLANATION OF BUILT- IN EDITING FUNCTION: Environment
Setting:Setting the Connected NC Control Unit", "Environment Setting: NC File Operation Setting" and "Environment
Setting: Simple Operation Mode Menu Key Switchover".
When using M70 Series, refer to "Environment Setting: Ladder Display Setting" and "Environment Setting: Comment
Display Setting".
When using M700VS/M70V/E70 Series, refer to "Environment Setting: NC File Operation Setting","Environment Setting:
Ladder Display Setting", "Environment Setting: Comment Display Setting".

IV - 60
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.1 Setting the Connected NC Control Unit

6.1 Setting the Connected NC Control Unit

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

When NC display unit and NC control unit are connected in the proportion of one display unit to multiple NC control units,
the NC unit connected with onboard can be selected. (At the initial start-up of onboard, connect to the same NC unit as
HMI screen side.)
Connections of NC control unit can be changed on the "CONNECT NC SETTING" popup screen.When a connected NC
(control unit) is switched to another, the following information will be discarded.

(Note) All the PLC data in the onboard editing area will be discarded. (Program data having unconverted circuit will
be discarded, as well.)

NC display unit
(Onboard)

M01 M02 M0n

NC control unit NC control unit NC control unit

IV - 61
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Environment Setting

6.1.1 Arbitrary Switchover of Connected NC

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

When multiple NC control units are connected, connection target can be switched freely.

"CONNECT NC SETTING" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) "CONNECT NC SETTING" popup screen display

Select "MAIN" → [ENVIRON. SETTING] → [CONNECT NC SETTING] menu key.
When selected, the "CONNECT NC SETTING" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
* When the popup screen is displayed, the name of the NC unit currently connected is shown. ("M01" above)
* When connected NC is only one, "SET" menu button will be displayed in gray and disabled.

(2) Switchover of connected NC (control unit)

(a) Select [CONECT NC] menu key and specify the name of the NC unit to be connected.
* NC unit name can be selected from the pull-down list.
(b) Select the [SET] menu key. When selected, "CONNECT NC SETTING" popup screen will be closed, and NC
control unit connection switchover will be carried out.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key. Connection switchover will not be carried out.

6.1.2 Information to be Updated at Connection Switchover

When the NC control unit connection destination is changed, the followings on the onboard will be updated.

- According to the NC language parameter, language used for the screen menu display, button and error message
will be changed.
- Font used for the comment (statement, note, comment, device name) display will be the one corresponding to the
language parameter.
- Alarm on NC side (ROM-Write incomplete) is displayed. (Changes to the status of connected NC)
- Password setting state on the "maintenance" screen of HMI screen (Changes to the status of connected NC)
- PLC RUN/STOP status (Changes to the status of connected NC)
- Connected NC's warning display
- Connected NC's NC name ("M01", etc.)
- Onboard editing area will turn to the (no data) state where PLC data is cleared.

IV - 62
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.2 NC File Operation Setting

6.2 NC File Operation Setting

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○

Settings related to NC file operation are explained below.

6.2.1 Setting the Storage Destination of Device Comment

When saving into NC temporary memory is not possible due to excessive device comment size, HD and IC memory card
can be specified and used as a virtual NC area.

<Application example 1>

NC temporary memory serves as the device comment storage destination. (Normal application)
- With NC file operation, save the parameter and program into NC temporary memory and ROM area.
- For saving into HD and IC memory card, external file operation is applied.

NC Onboard
Temporary editing area
ROM write memory area Save to NC
ROM area

Parameter Parameter Parameter

program program
Open from NC program
Copy at
power ON
Save to Device
Parameter external file
HD/ comment
program
IC memory card
Open from
Device external file
comment

<Application example 2>

Device comment storage destination is specified.
- When saving to the NC with NC file operation, parameter and program will be saved into NC temporary memory,
and device comment will be saved into any specified folder.
- When opening from NC with NC file operation, parameter and program will be opened from NC temporary
memory, and device comment will be opened from any specified folder.
*When deleting NC data with NC file operation, delete the NC temporary memory for parameter and program, and
the data in specified folder for device comment.
*When formatting NC temporary memory, the device comment in specified folder will not be deleted.

Temporary Onboard
NC memory area
ROM area editing area
ROM write Save to NC
Parameter Parameter
program Parameter
program
Copy at program
power ON

Device
Specified folder comment
HD/

IC memory card
Device Open from NC
comment

IV - 63
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Environment Setting


M700VW/M700 Series standard operation mode "NC FILE SETTING" popup screen

Menus corresponding to
popup screen

M700VS/M70V/E70 Series "Device comment storage setting" screen

(1) "Comment storage setting" popup screen display

Select "MAIN" → [ENVIRON. SETTING] → [NC FILE SETTING] menu key.

(2) Setting the device comment storage destination

(a) Select the [DEV. COM. STRAGE DEST.] menu key.
(b) Press the [SET] menu key. When pressed, the "NC FILE SETTING" popup screen will close.

* Device comment storage destination set once will be held even after terminating the onboard.
When the onboard is started up again, the device comment storage destination is shown in the same state as it was
set last.

IV - 64
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.3 Simple Operation Mode Menu Key Switchover

6.3 Simple Operation Mode Menu Key Switchover

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

Change to the simple operation mode menu key.

Refer to "Starting and Ending Onboard: Switching from Standard Operation Mode to Simple Operation Mode" for details.

IV - 65
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Environment Setting

6.4 Ladder Display Setting

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○

Ladder display settings are specified on this screen.

6.4.1 Maximum Number of Contacts

The maximum number of contacts is specified. 11 contacts display and 9 contacts display are available.

6.4.2 Zoom Display

The ladder display size is changed.

REDUCTION Enables the ladder display with 11 contacts.

STANDARD Enables the ladder display with 9 contacts.
EXPANSION Cannot display the whole circuit.

For details, refer to "Circuit Operations: Changing the Displayed Details: Setting the Circuit Display Scale".

6.4.3 Current Monitor Value Display

The current monitor value display is set.
Setting "None" deletes the line for the current value display.
This helps to increase the density of the ladder display.

IV - 66
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
6.5 Comment Display Setting

6.5 Comment Display Setting

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○
Comment display settings are specified.

6.5.1 Comment Line

The number of lines is specified to display a device comment.
The characters out of the specified number of lines by this setting are not displayed.

6.5.2 Various Displays

The comment display, statement display, note display and device name display are set valid/invalid.
Refer to "Circuit Operations: Changing the Displayed Details: Comment Display" for details.

IV - 67
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Environment Setting

6.5.3 Common Comment File

Settings for the common comment are specified. Two methods are available to specify a common comment file.

- COMMENT (GX Developer compatible) method

This method is compatible with GX Developer. The "COMMENT" file, which is common for all the programs, and
each comment file, which has the same name as each program file name, are used accordingly to the program
displayed.

- Common comment file designation method

A comment file is designated to be common for each program. This method is used to designate a comment file for
each language.

(1) Setting the COMMENT (GX Developer compatible) method

(a) Select "MAIN" → [ENVIRON. SETTING] → [COMMENT DISPLAY] → [COMMON COMMENT] menu key.
(b) Select "COMMENT (GX Developer COMPATIBLE)" with the [COMMON COMMENT] menu or the cursor key.

(2) Setting the common comment file designation method

(a) Select "MAIN" → [ENVIRON. SETTING] → [COMMENT DISPLAY] → [COMMON COMMENT] menu key.
(b) Select "DESIGNATE OTHER COMMENT FILES" with the [COMMON COMMENT] menu or the cursor key.
(c) Select the [SELECT FILE] menu. "SELECT FILE" field is focused.
(d) Select any file with " ↑ " or " ↓ " key, and set the file by pressing the [SELECT FILE] menu or the[INPUT] key.

IV - 68
 7
Basic Operations

IV - 69
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Operations

7.1 Basic Operations 1 (Steps for Creating a Program for the First Time)
M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

The steps (newly creating -> starting the ladder -> saving -> ending) for creating a program for the first time are given
below.

Operation
Step
Mode 1 Menu button

Start

Newly create project data in MAIN/ FILE

the onboard
INITIAL Parameters and the program MAIN
created

Create a circuit program

MAIN/ LADDER Program is created

MAIN/LADDER

Save the program and

parameters in the NC's MAIN/ NC FILE
temporary memory
MAIN/NC FILE FORMAT NC's temporary memory is formatte

SAVE

Run the PLC MAIN/NC FILE PLC RUN/STOP Run the PLC

Read the program and Stop the PLC

parameters saved in the MAIN/NC FILE PLC RUN/STOP
NC's temporary memory into
the NC's ROM ROM WRITE When ending, write the data in the
temporary memory into the ROM so
that the data is not lost even when
power is turned OFF
Save the created program in
MAIN/ EXTERNAL FILE
an external file
MAIN/EXTERNAL FILE
SAVE PROJECT

EXTERNAL SAVE
PROJECT

End onboard
Designate the drive and path for sa
MAIN/ END
Finished

IV - 70
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.2 Basic Operations 2 (Creating, Monitoring and Testing Programs)

7.2 Basic Operations 2 (Creating, Monitoring and Testing Programs)

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○
The steps for creating, monitoring and testing the program are given below.

Operation
Step
Mode 1 Menu button

Start
Standard Simple
operation mode operation mode

Newly create project data on Refer to basic operation 1.

the onboard.

Create the ladder program. MAIN/ LADDER LADDER EDIT

EDIT
When no program exists in NC
MAIN/LADDER
temporary memory, local editing
mode (background color is light
blue) is applied.

MAIN/LADDER/EDIT EDIT LADDER MODE Creates a program.

<Sample data>
M0

P4002|-|/|----[INC D0]-|

CONVERT LADDER CONVERT LADDER Edited circuit data is confirmed

by conversion operation.

Save program and parameter Refer to basic operation 1.

in NC temporary memory.

Monitor the ladder. MAIN/ LADDER LADDER MONITOR

When a program exists in NC
MAIN/LADDER MONITOR temporary memory, NC auto
update mode (background color
is white) is applied.

MAIN/LADDER/ When running PLC with

MONITOR START/STOP MONITOR START/STOP MONITOR
<Sample data>, value of D0
will be incremented.

Test the device. MAIN/LADDER/MONITOR DEVICE TEST DEVICE TEST Reverse ON/OFF of M0 forcibly.

Go to save
operation

(Note 1) Do not connect GX Developer while displaying PLC onboard.

(Note 2) Do not use GX Developer simultaneously when several PCs are connected with NC.

IV - 71
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Operations

7.3 Basic Operations 3 (Correcting Programs Stored in NC)

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

The steps for correcting the programs stored in the NC's temporary memory are given below.

Operation
Step
Mode 1 Menu button

Start

Open the program and MAIN/ NC FILE

parameters in the temporary
memory in the onboard MAIN/NC FILE OPEN Open the data in the NC's temporary
memory

Change the circuit program MAIN/ LADDER When there is a program in the NC's
temporary memory, the local editing
mode (white background) is activate

MAIN/LADDER EDIT

MAIN/LADDER/EDIT PLC RUN/STOP Stop the PLC to change the program

EDIT LADDER MODE Change the program

CONVERT LADDER When converted, the data in the NC'

temporary memory is also changed

Go to monitor
operations

IV - 72
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.4 Basic Operations 4 (Creating Multiple Programs with Multi-program Method)

7.4 Basic Operations 4 (Creating Multiple Programs with Multi-program

Method)
M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

The steps for splitting the program and creating several programs are given below.

Operation
Step
Mode 1 Menu button

Start

Add the circuit program data MAIN/ FILE

in the onboard
DATA NEW Create the 2nd to 4th circuit programs

<Sample data>
Data name Header statement
MAIN Machine A
INIT Initial
LOW Communication
process
TAIKI Error process

Set the parameters MAIN/ PARAM.

MAIN/PARAM. PROGRAM SETTING Set the circuit program execution type

<Sample data>

Program name Execution type

MAIN Scan
INIT Initial
LOW Low-speed
TAIKI Standby

Change the circuit program MAIN/ LADDER

to be edited
MAIN/LADDER VIEW, TOOLS

MAIN/LADDER/VIEW, TOOLS
PROGRAM CHANGE Create each program while changing
the program to be edited.

Go to monitor
operations

IV - 73
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Operations

7.5 Basic Operations 5 (Creating Device Comments)

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

The steps for creating a program device comment are given below.

Operation
Step
Mode 1 Menu button

Start

Create the comment data in MAIN/ FILE

the onboard
Set a data type comment, and create
DATA NEW the device comment MAIN

Create a circuit program Refer to Basic operations 1

Set the device comment data

to be displayed in the circuit MAIN/ LADDER
program
MAIN/LADDER VIEW, TOOLS

MAIN/LADDER/ VIEW, TOOLS

PROGRAM CHANGE Set the device comment to be edited as
MAIN

Create the comment data for MAIN/LADDER EDIT

the circuit program device
Save the data in the NC's MAIN/LADDER/EDIT
temporary memory EDIT COMMENT MODE Create a comment for the device at the
cursor position in the circuit program

Change the comment MAIN/LADDER VIEW, TOOLS

display ON or OFF state
MAIN/LADDER/VIEW, TOOLS
COMMENT DISPLAY Change the comment display ON or
OFF state

Go to save
operations

IV - 74
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
7.6 Basic Operations 6 (Upgrading the Program Version)

7.6 Basic Operations 6 (Upgrading the Program Version)

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

The steps for upgrading the program saved in the NC ROM to the version of the program in the IC card are given below.

Operation
Step
Mode 1 Menu button

Start

(Program design)

Create and test the program Set the file version, etc., in the header
with GX Developer or
onboard

Write the program file to be This operation cannot be completed

upgraded into the IC card with onboard. Use Windows Explorer,
etc.

(Maintenance) The data saved in the NC ROM is read

out to the NC's temporary memory
Turn the NC power ON

Upgrade the ROM contents MAIN/ NC FILE

to the version of the data in
the IC card MAIN/NC FILE PLC VERSION UP The programs in the NC ROM and IC
card are both displayed
The data can be upgraded to only one
version

Go to monitor
operations

IV - 75
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Basic Operations

7.7 Basic Operations 7 (Loading Programs Created with GX Developer)

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

The steps for loading and adjusting ladders creating with GX Developer are given below.

Operation
Step
Mode 1 Menu button

Start

Create a program with GX

Developer

Syntax check tool Correct instructions that cannot be

used with NC

Write project data created with GX

Save the program in IC card
developer into IC card
using GX developer

Open the program in IC card MAIN/ EXTERNAL FILE

with onboard
MAIN/EXTERNAL FILE
OPEN PROJECT Open IC card data

Save the program and

Refer to Basic operations 1
parameters in NC's
temporary memory

Go to monitor
operations

IV - 76
 8
Circuit Operations

IV - 77
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

The PLC data read out onto the onboard editing area can be edited and monitored with circuit operations.
The saving area and editing area are split, so before editing (including monitoring), open the PLC data in the temporary
memory in the onboard editing area.

(Note) The circuit menu cannot be selected if even one program is not opened in the onboard editing area. (When
moving in the same hierarchical menu, the operation will be skipped.)

8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The continuity state of contacts and coils can be monitored while displaying the PLC circuits.

(Note 1) Open the PLC data in the temporary memory in the onboard editing area before starting monitoring.
(Note 2) Circuits (programs) in the local editing mode (light blue background) cannot be monitored.
(The circuit menu "MONITOR" and "MONITOR" menu will all be displayed in gray and disabled. Movement in
the same hierarchy to the "MONITOR" menu will also be skipped.)
Monitor the data with a circuit (program) opened from the NC's temporary memory.
(Note 3) Do not connect GX Developer while displaying PLC onboard.
(Note 4) Do not use GX Developer simultaneously when several PCs are connected with NC.

"LADDER" screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Indicates monitoring is active

Cursor

IV - 78
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

(1) Circuit display

During monitoring, the contact and coil ON/OFF state and the device's current value are displayed. These will
change according to the PLC operation sate.
The circuit ON/OFF state is shown in the following manner.

̪
OFF

ON ̪

*1: can be used only for comparative instruction, which is equivalent to the contact and SET, RST,
PLS, PLF, SFT and MC, which is equivalent to coils.

(2) Searching for circuits

Move the cursor to the circuit to be searched and press the [INPUT] key or the circuit symbol menu key. A popup
screen for searching will open.
Refer to "Circuit Operations: Searching and Replacing: Searching for Ladder (Simple search)" for details.
(The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

When circuit symbol menu

(Example : -| |- ) is pressed

When INPUT key is pressed.

(3) Finding a step No.

When numerical key or [FIND STEP NO.] menu key is pressed, "Find step No." popup screen will open.
Refer to "Circuit Operations: Searching and Replacing: Searching for Step No.(Simple saerch)" for details.

"Find step No." popup screen (The screen is an example of 700 Series)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

8.1.1 Restrictions
The following restrictions apply to the circuit display on the "LADDER DISPLAY" screen.
- One circuit block must be created with 24 or less lines. An error will occur if there are more than 24 lines.
- The maximum number of contacts in one circuit line can be changed with the "LADDER DISPLAY" setting.
- The number of characters displayed in the comment is shown below.

Number of characters displayed on

circuit screen
All characters are displayed with 8
COMMENT
characters on 4 lines
STATE
NOTE The set characters are all displayed
ALIAS

IV - 79
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

8.1.2 Starting and Stopping Monitoring

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The monitor start and stop state can be changed.

(The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

Function mode display

"START/STOP MONITOR" menu keys

(1) Setting the monitor start/stop state

Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [MONITOR]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR]
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR]
; then, press the [START/STOP MONITOR] menu key to change the monitor start and stop state. The monitor
status can be checked with the function mode display.
When [MONITOR] menu key is pressed in the ladder entry mode or comment input mode, the state will change to
the monitor state upon changing the menu keys.

IV - 80
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

8.1.3 Device Registration Monitor (Split Screens)

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

When [ENTRY DEVICE] is pressed, the screen is split, and the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen opens. The circuit
monitor can be displayed and the device registration can be monitored simultaneously.

(Note) When switching from the NC automatic update mode (white background color) circuit (program) to a local
editing mode (light blue background) circuit (program), monitoring of the device registration on the split screen
will end. Monitor the device registration for the circuit (program) opened from the NC's temporary memory.

(The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

"LADDER" screen

"ENTRY DEVICE
MONITOR" screen

(1) "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen display

Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [MONITOR]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR]
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR]
; then, press the [ENTRY DEVICE] menu key to change the ON/OFF status of the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR"
screen display.
When menu key is pressed on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen, "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen
will be closed.

* Menus are different between "LADDER" screen (upper part) and "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen (lower
part).

(2) Moving the cursor

Use the [MOVEMENT ON SPLIT SCREEN] menu key to move the cursor on the screen between "LADDER"
screen and "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen. When the screen is not split, the menu key is masked. The [#]
key can be used as well for this operation.

IV - 81
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

(3) Registering devices

Devices on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" can be registered in the following two methods.
- Register by using the "REGISTER MONITOR" button on the "LADDER" screen. (Registration is possible only
when the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen is displayed. When only the "LADDER" screen is displayed,
ENTRY LADDER MONITOR is executed.)
- Register directly from the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.
(a) When registering by using the "REGISTER MONITOR" button on the "LADDER" screen.
(The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

(ii) Select the device you

want to register

(iii) Press the "REGISTER

MONITOR" button
(i) Display the entry
device monitor

(i) Press the [ENTRY DEVICE] button and the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen is split and displayed.
* When the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen is not displayed, "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen
will be displayed. So, always display the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen.
(ii) Align the cursor with the circuit of the device to be registered from the "LADDER" screen (upper half of the
screen).
(iii) Press the [REGISTER MONITOR] button.
(iv) Press the [REGISTER MONITOR] and the device at the cursor position on "LADDER" will be registered in
the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen (lower side of the split screen).
(A blank is searched from the row on the left side on the "DEVICE ENTRY" screen, and the device is
registered in the first blank found.)

(b) When registering by using the [REGISTER MONITOR] button on the "LADDER" screen.
(i) Move the cursor to the row of "DEVICE" on the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen.
(ii) Switch to the input mode by using alphanumeric character or [INPUT] key.
(iii) Enter the device name and press the [INPUT] key.
(Note) Timer and counter's setting value display shows the program setting value to be edited.

IV - 82
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

(4) Deleting devices

(a) Move the cursor to the line where the device to delete exists on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.
(b) Press the [DELETE] key.

(5) Switching between 16 bit and 32 bit for the device registered on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR".
*Only word device can be changed.
(a) Move the cursor to the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" side.
(b) Press the[16BIT/32BIT] button. (For 32 bit, "(D)" is displayed next to the device name. For 16 bits, "(D)" is not
displayed.)

(6) Switching between decimal and hexadecimal for the device registered on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR".
(a) Move the cursor to the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" side.
(b) Press the [DEC/HEX] button.
*Only word device can be changed. (Bit device will not be changed.)
*Current value display on the "LADDER" screen is not changed. (Change with the menus on the "LADDER"
screen.)

(7) Close the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen. (The "LADDER" screen will appear on the full screen.)
Press the menu key while the cursor is located on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen side.

IV - 83
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

8.1.4 Ladder Entry Monitor (Split Screens)

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
When [ENTRY LADDER MONITOR] is pressed, the screen is split, and the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen
opens. The circuit monitor can be displayed and the randomly registered circuits can be monitored simultaneously.

(Note) When switching from the NC automatic update mode (white background color) circuit (program) to a local
editing mode (light blue background) circuit (program), monitoring of the circuit registration on the split screen
will end. Monitor the circuit registration for the circuit (program) opened from the NC's temporary memory.

(The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

"LADDER"
screen
Cursor

"ENTRY
LADDER
MONITOR"
screen

"ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" keys

The name and number of steps for the

program whose ladder has been registered.

(1) "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen display

Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [MONITOR]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR]
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR]
; then, press the [ENTRY LADDER MONITOR] menu key to change the ON/OFF status of the "ENTRY LADDER
MONITOR" screen display.
The cursor position ("LADDER" screen or "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen) changes the menu display.
When menu key is pressed on the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen, "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR"
screen will be closed.

(2) Starting and stopping monitoring

Press the [START/STOP MONITOR] menu key.

IV - 84
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

8.1.5 Registering the Monitor

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

Ladder registration with "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" or device registration with "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" can be
possible.
"ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" and "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" will be as shown below depending on the screen
display status.

Screen display status "REGISTER MONITOR" button Registration operation

"REGISTER MONITOR" button on the The ladder specified with the "ENTRY LADDER
"LADDER" screen
LADDER screen MONITOR" is registered.
"REGISTER MONITOR" button on each
"LADDER" screen Execution is not possible.
search screen.
Split display of "LADDER" screen and "REGISTER MONITOR" button on the The ladder specified with the "ENTRY LADDER
"ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen LADDER screen and each search screen. MONITOR" is registered.
Split display of "LADDER" screen and
"REGISTER MONITOR" button on the The device specified with the "DEVICE
"DEVICE REGISTRATION MONITOR"
LADDER screen and each search screen. REGISTRATION MONITOR" is registered.
screen

(1) Ladder registration with "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR"

(a) Move the cursor in the "LADDER" screen to the circuit block you wish to register.
(b) Press the [REGISTER MONITOR] menu key. The circuit block at the cursor position is registered on the
"ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen.
*The circuit block that you want to register can be searched and selected.
Press the [REGISTER MONITOR] menu key on the "FIND CONTACT OR COIL", "FIND DEVICE", "FIND
INSTRUCTION", "FIND STEP NO." and "FIND STRING" popup screen for registration.

IV - 85
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

(2) Device registration with "DEVICE REGISTRATION MONITOR"

(The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

(ii) Select the device you

want to register

(iii) Press the "REGISTER

MONITOR" button
(i) Display the entry
device monitor

(a) Press the [ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR] button to split and display the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.
*When the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen is not displayed, "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen will be
displayed. So, always display the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.
(b) Point the cursor to the device circuit to be registered from the "LADDER" screen (upper part of a split screen).
(c) Press the [REGISTER MONITOR] button.
(d) When the [REGISTER MONITOR] button is pressed, the device on the cursor position in "LADDER" is displayed
in the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen (lower part of a split screen).
*Press the [REGISTER MONITOR] menu key on the "FIND CONTACT OR COIL", "FIND DEVICE", "FIND
INSTRUCTION", "FIND STEP NO." and "FIND STRING" popup screen for device registration.
(Note that, however, this is only possible only when the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" split screen is
displayed.)

(3) Deleting the registered ladder

(a) Press the [MOVEMENT ON SPLIT SCREEN] button to move the cursor to the "ENTRY" side (the lower split
screen).
(b) Press [FIND] or move the cursor to set the cursor at any ladder.
(c) Bring the cursor to the leftmost end of the ladder (on the left of the left bus bar). The whole ladder block will be
highlighted.
(d) Press [DELETE] .
(e) Press the [ENTRY LADDER ALL DEL] button. The message "Deleting all the registered ladder. OK?" will
appear. Pressing [YES] deletes all the registered ladders.

IV - 86
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

8.1.6 Testing the Devices

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The NC bit devices can be turned ON and OFF forcibly, and the word device's current value can be changed.

■ In M700VW/M700 Series

"DEVICE TEST" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Testing the bit devices

(a) Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [MONITOR]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR]
; then, [DEVICE TEST] menu key.
When selected, the "DEVICE TEST" popup screen will appear at the middle of the screen.
(b) Select the [BIT DEVICE] menu key, and input the device.
* When "DEVICE TEST" is selected while bit device exists on the cursor position, the device at the cursor
position is displayed in "BIT DEVICE".
(c) To turn ON forcibly, select the [FORCE ON] menu key.
(d) To turn OFF forcibly, select the [FORCE ON] menu key.
(e) To toggle between forced ON and OFF, select the [TOGGLE FORCE] menu key.
* When device test is executed, performance history is displayed in "BIT DEVICE".

(2) Testing the word devices

(a) Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [MONITOR]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR]
; then, [DEVICE TEST] menu key.
When selected, the "DEVICE TEST" popup screen will appear at the middle of the screen
(b) Select the [DISPLAY] menu key, and set the device's display format.
(c) Select the [VALUE] menu key, and set whether the device setting value is a decimal or hexadecimal.
(d) Select the [WORD DEVICE] menu key, and input the device.
* When "DEVICE TEST" is selected while word device exists on the cursor position, the device at the cursor
position is displayed in "WORD DEVICE". When multiple devices exist on the cursor position, they are
displayed in the combo box; word device can be selected from there.
(e) Select the [SETTING VALUE] menu key, and input the value to set in the device.
(f) Select the [SET] menu key, and change the word device's current value.
* When device test is executed, performance history is displayed in "WORD DEVICE".

IV - 87
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

■ In M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series

"DEVICE TEST" BIT DEVICE screen

"DEVICE TEST" WORD DEVICE screen

(1) Testing the bit devices

(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR] then, [DEVICE TEST] menu key.
When "DEVICE TEST" is selected while bit device exists on the cursor position, the bit device screen where
the device at the cursor position was displayed is displayed.
(b) Select the [BIT DEVICE] menu key, and input the device.
(c) To turn ON forcibly, select the [FORCE ON] menu key.
(d) To turn OFF forcibly, select the [FORCE ON] menu key.
(e) To toggle between forced ON and OFF, select the [TOGGLE FORCE] menu key.

(Note 1) When [WORD DEVICE] menu key is pressed, the screen changes to the WORD DEVICE screen.

(2) Testing the word devices

(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR] then, [DEVICE TEST] menu key.
When "DEVICE TEST" is selected while word device exists on the cursor position, the word device screen
where the device at the cursor position was displayed is displayed.
(b) Select the [DISPLAY] menu key, and set the device's display format.
(c) Select the [VALUE] menu key, and set whether the device setting value is a decimal or hexadecimal.
(d) Select the [WORD DEVICE] menu key, and input the device.
(e) Select the [SETTING VALUE] menu key, and input the value to set in the device.
(f) Select the [SET] menu key, and change the word device's current value.

(Note 1) When [BIT DEVICE] menu key is pressed, the screen changes to the BIT DEVICE screen.

IV - 88
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

8.1.7 Changing the Current Value Monitor

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The current value displayed while monitoring the "LADDER" screen can be changed from decimal to hexadecimal and
vice versa.

(Note) This function is valid only during monitoring.

(1) Changing the value

Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [MONITOR]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR]
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR]
; then, [CHANGE MONITOR DEC/HEX (10/16)] menu key.

8.1.8 Movement on Split Screen

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

Cursor is moved between split screens.

(1) Moving the cursor

Use the [MOVEMENT ON SPLIT SCREEN] menu key to move the cursor on the screen between "LADDER"
screen and "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen, "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen. When the screen is not
split, the menu key is masked.
The [#] key can be used as well for this operation.
When the "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen is displayed in 100%, and the cursor is moved to the "LADDER"
screen side, the split ratio will be changed to 50%, and the cursor stays on the "LADDER" screen side.

8.1.9 Searching
M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

Refer to "Circuit Operations: Searching and Replacing" for details.

8.1.10 Deleting All the Entry Ladders

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

All the circuit registered with "ENTRY LADDER" function is deleted.

(1) Deleting all the entry ladders
Select the [ENTRY LADDER ALL DEL.] menu key.
When executed, the following confirmation message appears.
"Deleting all the registered ladder. OK? YES/NO"

IV - 89
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

8.1.11 Changing the Split Ratio

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The split ratio to display "ENTRY LADDER MONITOR" screen and "LADDER" screen is changed.
When "DIVISION RATIO CHANGE" menu key is pressed, the split ratio changes to "25%" → "50%" → "75%" → "100%"
→ "25%".
The default split ratio is 50%.
The split ratio set once will be held until ending the onboard.
(The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

25% 50% 75% 100%

IV - 90
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.1 Monitoring a Program (Ladder)

8.1.12 Setting the Monitor Stop Conditions

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

The conditions for stopping the "LADDER" screen monitor can be set.

Displays the validity of stop conditions

"Monitor stop condition"

popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Setting the monitor stop conditions for the device

(a) Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [MONITOR]
; then, select the [MONITOR STOP CONDITI.] menu key. When selected, "Monitor stop condition" popup
screen will appear at the middle of the screen.
(b) Select the [SELECT] menu key, and select the word device or bit device.
(c) Select the [DEVICE] menu key, and input the device.
(d) Select the [CONDI.1], [CONDI.2], [CONDI.3] menu keys, and set the stop conditions.
(Only condition 1 is set for the bit device.)
(e) Select the [REGISTER] menu key, and register the stop conditions. When registered, the "Monitor stop
condition" popup screen will automatically close.
(2) Canceling the monitor stop condition settings
(a) Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [MONITOR]
; then, select the [MONITOR STOP CONDITI.] menu key. When selected, the "Monitor stop condition" popup
screen will appear at the middle of the screen.
(b) The monitor stop condition validity is displayed as follows when the monitor stop conditions are set.

Status Display
No monitor stop conditions Only screen title
Monitor stop conditions set Screen title (Monitor stop condition setting has been registered)

(c) Select the [CANCEL] menu key. The monitor stop condition setting display will disappear.

(3) When monitor stop conditions are established

(a) A popup screen indicating "The monitor condition has been established" will appear.
(b) This popup screen will close when the [INPUT] key is pressed.

(4) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 91
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

8.2 Editing
The PLC data circuit opened on the onboard editing area can be written, inserted and deleted.
During standard operation mode, PLC data must be retrieved from the NC or external device and opened in the onboard
editing area to edit the data.
The range of editable PLC data in the simple operation mode is more and M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series limited than
that of the standard operation mode.
Editable PLC data in each mode is shown below.

M700VW/M700 Series M700VS/M70V/M70/E70

Standard operation mode Simple operation mode Series
Sequence program (Ladder) ○ ○ ○
PLC message data ○ × ○
○ (Alphanumerical
Device comment × ×
characters only)
○ (Alphanumerical
Statement ○ ○
characters only)
○ (Alphanumerical
Note ○ ○
characters only)

(Note 1) After editing the data, save it in the NC or external device. If not saved, the edited details will be lost.
(Note 2) If the password has not been released, the [CONVERT LADDER] button will appear in gray and will be
disabled.

IV - 92
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Editing

8.2.1 Changing to Circuit Editable Screen

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
(1) Changing to the circuit editable mode
Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT][EDIT LADDER MODE]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [ LADDER EDIT ]
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [ LADDER EDIT ]
to change the state to the circuit editable state. The current mode can be checked at the title bar.
(The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

Program display Function mode display Write mode display

Cursor

FIND

In standard operation mode, when the "EDIT" button under "LADDER" menu is pressed while the MONITOR mode
is currently selected, the mode will be automatically changed to the EDIT LADDER MODE.

Before EDIT button in the ladder menu is pressed After EDIT button in the ladder menu is pressed
MONITOR Changed to EDIT LADDER MODE.
MONITOR STOP Changed to EDIT LADDER MODE.
EDIT LADDER MODE (OVR.WRITE/INSERT) Not changed (stays in EDIT LADDER MODE.)
EDIT COMMENT MODE Not changed (stays in EDIT COMMENT MODE.)

(2) Moving the cursor

The cursor on the screen can be moved with the up, down, left and right arrow keys.

The cursor can also be moved in circuit units (ignoring cross bars) by pressing the and keys.

(3) Moving the screen

If the cursor is moved when it is at the top or bottom of the screen, the screen will follow the cursor and move.

To move the screen in page units, press the PAGE

and PAGE
keys.

IV - 93
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

8.2.2 Restrictions
The restrictions which apply for editing circuits on the "LADDER DISPLAY" screen are shown below.

- Up to 24 lines can be edited in one circuit block.

- Up to 24 lines in one block and up to 48 lines in total can be edited.
- The maximum number of contacts in one circuit line can be changed with the "LADDER DISPLAY" setting.
- The master control (MC) symbol cannot be edited. The MC symbol is displayed during circuit monitoring. (The MC
symbol does not appear during circuit editing.)
- If a series circuit exceeding the maximum number of contacts is created in one line, the line will automatically return
and move to the next line. The return symbol is created with K0 to K99. The OUT ( ) and IN (>-) return symbol No.
always have to be the same.
- Another circuit cannot be inserted between the OUT ( ) line and IN (>-) line of the return line.
- When writing the circuit, the return symbol is assigned with a serial number even if it is not in the same circuit block.
Note that in the circuit block read out with the read function, the return number is assigned in order from No. 0.
- If the contact and coil to be overwritten extends over several contacts, the circuit cannot be edited with the write
(overwrite) mode.
(Example)
X0 X1
Y10

An instruction that uses multiple contacts such as "-[ = D0 D1 ]-" at this position cannot
be overwritten with the overwrite mode. (This is because the next instruction will also be
overwritten.)
To make the above type of revision, insert "-[ = D0 D1 ]-" beforehand with the write (insertion) mode, and then
delete "LD X0" with the [DELETE] key.
- If a return results from the insertion of a contact in the first row of the circuit, the contact cannot be inserted.
(Example)

X0 X1 X2 X3 X0A
Y10

A contact or row cannot be inserted at the first row of the circuit.

(Insertion is possible if the second and following rows are empty and a return
will not result from the insertion.)
- Insertion of the circuit symbol is processed by right alignment and row insertion, so there may be causes when the
symbol cannot be inserted because of the circuit shape.

(Example)
X0 (a) If the following conditions are
established when inserting the circuit
(c)
symbol at position (a), the message "Editing
position is incorrect" will result, and the
X1 X2 X3
 (a)  
circuit will not be inserted.
 (b) There is no space between (a) and (b)
Insertion into row (c) is not possible
Cursor position

(Note) The position (b) is the closest position to the cursor position among the branch symbols and
the coil-equivalent instructions.

- If one circuit block has two or more lines, and the instruction does not fit on one line, return the instruction before
inputting it.
- Create the number of steps for one circuit block within approx. 4k steps. The NOP instruction in the circuit block is also
included in the number of steps. The NOP instruction between circuit blocks is irrelevant.
- If there is an unconverted circuit, the screen movement range may be limited.

IV - 94
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Editing

8.2.3 Inputting a Circuit

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

A circuit can be written in or inserted.

(Note 1) The MITSUBISHI CNC compatible instructions (instructions usable only with MITSUBISHI CNC) are also
checked when the circuit is input.

(1) Switching between circuit overwrite and insertion

The circuit can be edited by overwriting or by inserting.
Change between these methods with the [INSERT] key in standard operation mode, with the [OVR.WRITE/
INSERT] menu key in simple operation mode. The overwrite and insertion state can be confirmed with "Mode 2" or
cursor shape on the title bar.

(2) Inputting circuits (excluding cross bars, vertical bars and labels)
(a) Move the cursor to the position to input the circuit.
(b) Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT
; then, select the [LADDER SYMBOL 1] or [LADDER SYMBOL 2] menu key. When selected, the "ENTER
SYMBOL" popup screen will appear.
* In M700VW/M700 Series, the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen appears as shown below so that it does
not overlap the cursor line on the LADDER DISPLAY screen.

When cursor in LADDER screen is on upper half of screen Displayed on lower part of screen
When cursor in LADDER screen is on lower half of screen Displayed on upper part of screen

In M70/M700VS/M70V/E70 Series, the popup screen appears at the bottom of the circuit screen.

Circuit symbol 1 menus

Circuit symbol 2 menus

* These menus are shown in M700VW/M700 Series. Some menus appear different in M700VS/M70V/M70/
E70 Series.
* Some of the instructions in circuit symbol 2 are available only in the instruction extension mode.
* Instruction extension mode is set with bit selection 6452:BIT1.
(c) Input the instruction on the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen.
(The screen is an example of M700 Series)

Circuit symbol selected with menu key Input instruction (device) * Refer to circuit input patterns.

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

The "<" and ">" keys may not exist on the keyboard for some machine types. Use "(",")" key instead.
(d) Select the [OK] menu key to set the input circuit.

IV - 95
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

(3) Circuit input patterns

The basic input patterns for inputting circuits are shown below.
- Inputting contact instructions

(Example) For

Circuit symbol Instruction

-||- Device name (Example) X0

- Inputting coil instructions

(Example) For

Circuit symbol Instruction

-< >-| Device name (Example) Y0

- Inputting timer and counter coil instructions

(Example) For * [SP] indicates a space code

Circuit symbol Instruction

-< >-| Device [SP] device (Example) T0 K10

(Example) For * [SP] indicates a space code

Circuit symbol Instruction

-< >-| Instruction [SP] device [SP] device (Example) H T0 K10

- Inputting function instructions

(Example) For * [SP] indicates a space code

Circuit symbol Instruction

-[ ]- Instruction [SP] device [SP] device (Example) MOV K0 R0

- Inputting labels
(Example) For P4002

Circuit symbol Instruction

(Empty) Device (Example) P4002

(4) Inputting vertical bars and cross bars

(a) Move the cursor to the input position.
(b) Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
; then, select the [LADDER SYMBOL 1] [ ─ ] and [ ｜ ] menu keys.

LADDER SYMBOL 1 menus

(c) A vertical bar or cross bar is input at the cursor position.

(5) Deleting a circuit

(a) Move the cursor to the position to delete.
(b) Select the [DELETE] key. The circuit at the cursor position will be deleted.

IV - 96
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Editing

(6) Deleting a vertical bar

(a) Move the cursor to the upper right of the vertical bar to be deleted.
(b) Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
; then, select the [LADDER SYMBOL 2] → [| DELETE] menu keys.

LADDER SYMBOL 2 menus

(c) The vertical bar at the lower left of the cursor will be deleted.

(7) Inputting a label

(a) Move the cursor to the position to input, and press the [INPUT] key.
(b) Input the label No. in the instruction field of the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen.
(The circuit symbol does not need to be input.)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

The "<" and ">" keys may not exist on the keyboard for some machine types. Use "(",")" key instead.
(c) Select the [OK] menu key and set the input circuit.

(8) Displaying the revised circuit block

The circuit revised with edited operations is displayed as a circuit block unit with a gray background.

Circuit block
being revised

(9) Inputting circuits with list format

A list instruction character string can be directly input and edited. (Normally, the circuits should be input with the
method given in (2) Circuit symbols.)
(a) Move the cursor to the position to input the circuit.
(b) When the [INPUT] key is pressed, the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen (with blank circuit symbol) will appear.
(c) Input the list instruction character string.

(Example) For Use a space code to delimit the instructions and devices

The "<" and ">" keys may not exist on the keyboard for some machine types. Use "(",")" key instead.
(d) Select the [OK] menu key, and set the input circuit.

IV - 97
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

8.2.4 Inserting a Line

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

A new line can be inserted at the cursor position to create a circuit.

(1) Inserting a line

(a) Move the cursor to the position to insert the line.
(b) Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
; then, select the [COPY/INSERT] and [INSERT LINE] menu key.
(c) A new line will be inserted above the cursor.

8.2.5 Deleting a Line

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The line where the cursor is at can be deleted.

(1) Deleting a line

(a) Move the cursor to the position to delete.
(b) Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
; then, select the [COPY/INSERT] and [DELETE LINE] menu key.
(c) The line where the cursor is will be deleted.

IV - 98
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Editing

8.2.6 Designating the Range

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The range can be designated as a circuit block unit or as a circuit unit.

(1) Designating the range for a circuit unit

(a) Move the cursor to the left end of the circuit to be designated.
(b) Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
; then, select the [COPY/INSERT] and [MARK] menu key.
(c) Next, move the cursor to the right end of the range to be designated. The background of the selected range
will change to blue.

Start point (left end) End point (right end)

(2) Designating the range for a circuit block unit

(a) Move the cursor to the left end (position where label No. and step No. are displayed) of the circuit block to be
designated.
(b) Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
; then, select the [COPY/INSERT] and [MARK] menu key.
(c) Move the cursor up and down, and move to the circuit block to be designated. The background of the selected
range will change to blue.

Start point End point

(Note 1) In the NC automatic update mode (LADDER screen background is white), batch delete and copy & paste
cannot be carried out on a circuit which has been designated.

IV - 99
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

(3) Canceling the range designation

(a) When the background of the selected range is blue,
Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
; then, select the [COPY/INSERT] and [MARK] menu key.
(b) The background of the selected range will return to the original color.

8.2.7 Deleting in a Batch

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The circuits can be deleted in a batch.

(1) Deleting in a batch

(a) Refer to "Designating the Range", and designate the circuit range to delete.
(b) Press the [DELETE] key. The circuits in the designated range will all be deleted.
*When the range is the circuit block unit, conversion is also executed automatically.
(Note 1) When the background color of LADDER screen is white (auto renewal mode), a batch deletion in the
circuit block unit is not possible. (An error message appears.)

8.2.8 Copy & Paste

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The circuits can be copied and pasted at another position or in another program.

(1) Copying
(a) Refer to "Designating the Range", and designate the range of circuits to be copied.
(b) Press the [COPY] menu key.
* If necessary memory could not be secured in the copied circuit, the error is displayed and the selected area to be
copied is cleared. The error message "it is over the circuit size which can be copied" is displayed.
(Note 1) When a background color of LADDER screen is white (auto renewal mode), copy & paste in the circuit
block unit is not possible. (An error message appears.)
(2) Pasting
(a) Move the cursor to the position to paste into.
* The [PASTE] key is displayed in gray until a circuit is copied.
* To paste to another program, change to that program.
(b) Press the [PASTE] menu key.
The paste operations differs according to the overwrite and insertion modes.

IV - 100
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Editing

8.2.9 Converting a Program

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The program conversion operation differs according to the mode.

- NC automatic update mode
- Local editing mode

(1) Conversion operation for NC automatic update mode

The background color is white if the program was opened from the temporary memory into the onboard editing area
using "NC FILE", or when a "LADDER" for a program temporarily saved from the onboard editing area is displayed.
After this type of program is converted, the circuit will automatically be saved in the program with the same name in
the temporary memory.
(Note 1) Only the program currently being edited is updated.
(Note 2) The temporary memory is lost when the NC power is turned OFF. Refer to "NC File Operations: Writing
the Temporary Memory's PLC Data to the ROM", and always save the data on the ROM. (The message
"ROM-Write incomplete" appears in the message area until the data is saved in the ROM.)
(Note 3) If the password has not been released, the [CONVERT LADDER] button will appear in gray and will be
disabled.
(Note 4) Up to 512 steps can be converted at once.
(Note 5) When PLC is in RUN, a message appears to confirm whether to stop PLC to execute the operation.
When PLC is not stopped, programs will not be automatically written into the temporary memory. (An
error message appears.)
After the conversion has been successfully completed, a message confirming whether to have PLC
returned to the RUN state is displayed.
(Note that, however, if the conversion is executed during PLC STOP, this message will not be displayed.)
(Note 6) The circuit cannot be converted if it exceeds the temporary memory's capacity.) (An error will appear.)

Converting the NC automatic update mode (LADDER screen background is white) screen

IV - 101
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

(2) Conversion operation for local editing mode (LADDER screen background is light blue) (M700VW/M700
Series)
The background color is light blue if the program was opened from an external device, or if a program to which data
was added, the data name was changed or the program was initially set with the mentioned in "NC File Operations"
operations is displayed on the "LADDER" screen. If this program is converted, only the program in the onboard
editing area will be converted. (The program will not be automatically written into the temporary memory.)
To save the program in the temporary memory, save it with the "NC FILE" operations.
(Note 1) The program is not saved in the temporary memory after conversion.

Converting the local editing mode (LADDER screen background is light blue) screen

(3) Conversion method

Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
M70/M700VS/M70V/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
; then, select the [CONVERT LADDER] menu key, or
Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
M70/M700VS/M70V/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]
; then, select [LADDER SYMBOL 1]
[LADDER SYMBOL 2]
[COPY/INSERT]
and the [CONVERT LADDER] menu key.

* The circuit block being edited will be converted. (The gray background will change to white when the data is
correctly converted.)
* It may take slightly longer when saving to the temporary memory.

IV - 102
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Editing

8.2.10 Editing a Statement

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

Statements can be added to the program displayed on the "LADDER" screen.

A statement is character string data added to each circuit block to make it easy to understand the flow of the entire
program.
(Note 1) If a user PLC containing an integrated statement is saved in the NC, a large user PLC memory will be
required.
(Note 2) Only alphanumeric characters can be input on the onboard.

Storage destination data

Comment type Display Edit Input character range
type
Statement ○ ○ 64 one-byte alphanumeric characters Program

- Example of interlinear integrated statement display

(1) Displaying a statement

To display a statement, validate the statement display as explained in "Changing the Displayed Details: Comment
Display".

(2) Switching between integrated statement and peripheral statement.

Statements include integrated types and peripheral types. The integrated type and peripheral type is switched with
the head character.

Head character is * (asterisk) Peripheral statement

Head character is not an * (asterisk) Integrated statement
An example of inputting the peripheral statement is shown below.

; (semicolon) * (asterisk) Statement

"ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen

IV - 103
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

(3) Inputting an interlinear statement

(a) Press "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT] and [EDIT LADDER MODE] menu key, and activate the circuit input
mode.
(b) Press the [INSERT] key, and activate the insertion mode.
(c) Move the cursor on the "LADDER" screen to the left end of the position to input.

Designate the left end.

(d) Press the [INPUT] key, and the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen will appear.
(e) Input the statement on the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen. Add a ; (semicolon) at the head when inputting.

; (semicolon) Statement

"ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen

(f) After setting the input, press the [INPUT] key or [OK] menu key. The statement will appear between the cursor
lines.
(g) Select the [CONVERT LADDER] menu to complete the editing.

(4) Inputting a P statement

(a) Press "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT] and [EDIT LADDER MODE] menu key, and activate the circuit input
mode.
(b) Move the cursor on the "LADDER" screen to the P label to be input, and then press the [INPUT] key. The
"ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen will appear.
(c) Input a statement on the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen. Input the label, semicolon (;) and then statement.

; (semicolon) Statement

(d) After setting the input, press the [INPUT] key or [OK] menu key. The P label statement will appear.
(e) Select the "CONVERT LADDER" menu to complete the editing.

IV - 104
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Editing

8.2.11 Editing a Note

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

Notes can be added to the program displayed on the "LADDER" screen.

A note, just like a statement, is character string data added to each coil and function instruction to make it easy to
understand the flow of the entire program.
(Note 1) If a user PLC containing an integrated note is saved in the NC, a large user PLC memory will be required.
(Note 2) Only alphanumeric characters can be input on the onboard.

Storage destination data

Comment type Display Edit Input character range
type
Note ○ ○ 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters Program

- Example of integrated note display

(1) Displaying a note

To display a note, validate the note display as explained in "Changing the Displayed Details: Comment display".

(2) Switching between integrated note and peripheral note.

Notes include integrated types and peripheral types. The integrated type and peripheral type is switched with the
head character.

Head character is * (asterisk) Peripheral note

Head character is not an * (asterisk) Integrated note
An example of inputting the peripheral note is shown below.

; (semicolon) * (asterisk) Note

"ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen

(3) Inputting a note

(a) Press "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT] and [EDIT LADDER MODE] menu key, and activate the circuit edit mode.
(b) Move the cursor on the "LADDER" screen to the position of the coil or function instruction to be input, and
press the [INPUT] key. The "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen will appear.
(c) Input a note on the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen. Add a ; (semicolon) following the instruction when
inputting.

; (semicolon) Note

"ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen

(d) After setting the input, press the [INPUT] key or [OK] menu key. The note will appear at the coil or function
instruction at the cursor position.
(e) Select the [CONVERT LADDER] menu to complete the editing.

IV - 105
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

8.2.12 Editing a Comment

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

Comments can be added to each device. The program is easier to understand when meanings are assigned to the
devices. Refer to "PLC Data: Types of Data" for details on the data.
The validity of comment display and editing, the input character range, types of data that can be saved, and a display
example are given below.
(Note 1) Only alphanumeric characters can be input on the onboard.

Storage destination data

Comment type Display Edit Input character range
type
Comment ○ ○ 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters Device comment

- Example of comment display

(1) Designating the device comment data containing comment to edit

The comment is stored in the device comment data file. Refer to "Changing the Displayed Details: Program
Changeover", before editing, and designate the device comment data.

(2) Displaying a comment

To display a comment, validate the comment display as explained in "Changing the Displayed Details: Comment
Display".

(3) Editing a comment

(a) Press "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT] and [EDIT COMMENT MODE] menu key. The line spacing on the
"LADDER" screen will increase so that comments can be input.
(b) Move the cursor to the instruction for which a comment is to be input, and press the [INPUT] key. The popup
screen for editing the comment will appear.
(c) Input a comment on the "COMMENT INPUT" popup screen.
(d) After setting the input, press the [INPUT] key or [OK] menu key. The comment will appear at the selected
circuit.
(e) If there are multiple devices in the instruction, the process will shift to the input of the comment for the next
device.

(Example) To add a comment to the X0 device on the "LADDER" screen

Device name Device comment data name

"COMMENT INPUT" popup screen

IV - 106
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Editing

8.2.13 Editing a PLC Message

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○
The PLC messages (alarm messages, operator messages, PLC switches, comments) can be edited. These messages
are created as programs with reserved names (example: M1xxxxx). The user PLCs, statements and notes cannot be
written into this program.
Characters other than the alphanumeric character (Roman figure (ex. ) etc.) can be edited by inputting the character-
code.

(1) PLC message data description format

The PLC message data is created using the interlinear integrated statement editing function.

Return page code

File comment

Alarm
message

Operator
message

PLC switch

Comment
message

End code

- Alarm, operator, PLC switch and comment messages

Details Each message is described. One message is described on a line.

Alarm message
;A, "Index No. ", "data register No. ", "message character string"
(Example) ;A,0,0,Emergency stop
;A,11,1,Spindle alarm
Operator message
;O, "Index No. ", "data register No. ", "message character string"
(Example) ;O,1,9000,MELDAS 700 PLC
Description ;O,20,9000,PLC version
format PLC switch
;P, "Switch No. ", "message character string"
(Example) ;P,1,AUTO RESTART
;P,2,BLOCK DELETE
Comment message
;M, "Index No. ", "device No. ", "message character string"
(Example) ;M,1,0,[SP LOAD]
;M,1,0,[ Z LOAD]

IV - 107
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

-File comment

The integrated statement which starts with a character other than A, O, P or M can be used as a file
Details
comment.
Description ;"File comment"
format (Example) ;# M7 PLC message

- Return page code

This is the circuit function instruction NOPLF instruction. This is created as a circuit instruction instead
of a statement.
Details
(Note)One or more return page codes is created every 15 lines of setting areas or messages.
(The message data could be skipped if a return code is not described.)

- End code

Details This is the circuit END instruction, and is normally created automatically.

- Range of each message data input characters

Message type code A: Alarm message, O: Operator message, P: PLC switch, M: Comment message
Index No. One-byte numbers (0 to number of messages in setting area -1)
Switch No. One-byte numbers (0 to number of messages in setting area -1)
Data register No. One-byte numbers
Device One-byte number (1 or 2)
Device No. One-byte numbers (0 to 10)
Alphanumeric character or other characters (Input by character-code (Unicode))
Message character string (Note) To display characters other than the alphanumeric character, the correspondence
language should be able to be displayed.
; (semicolon) Statement input code
Described element delimiter (only commas can be used to set a blank in the message
, (comma)
character string)

- Maximum value of each message data

Maximum message Maximum

Message type
length number
1024
Alarm message 32 Byte
messages
512
Operator message 60 Byte
messages
32
PLC switch 14 Byte
messages
100
Comment messages 60 Byte
messages

IV - 108
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Editing

(2) Designating the PLC message to edit

Refer to "Changing the Displayed Details: Comment Display" for designating the PLC message.

(3) Displaying the PLC message

When the PLC message is set to be edited, the message editing screen is displayed as follows. No setting is
needed to validate the display of statements or comments.

(4) Inputting one-byte alphanumeric characters in the PLC message

(a) Move the cursor to the message to edit, and press the [INPUT] key. The "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen, as
shown below, appears for editing the message.
(b) Move the cursor to any position and input characters in the "DEVICE/INST" field on the "ENTER SYMBOL"
popup screen.
(c) After confirming the input characters, press the [INPUT] key or the [OK] menu key. The edited message is
displayed in the circuit.
(d) Select the [CONVERT LADDER] menu key to complete the editing.

"ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen dedicated to messages

In M700VW/M700
 Series

In M700VS/M70V/M70/E70
 Series

IV - 109
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

(5) Using character codes to input characters in the PLC message

(a) Move the cursor to the message to edit, and press the [INPUT] key. The "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen, as
shown below, appears for editing the message.
(b) Move the cursor to any position in the "DEVICE/INST" field on the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen. Then the
right-bottom field in the "ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen displays the character code of the character at the
cursor.
(c) Click the [CHAR. CODE INPUT] menu key and input a character code in the "STR. CODE" ("CHAR. CODE")
entry field. The character corresponding to the entered character code is displayed.
Pressing the / keys and page up/down keys can change the character code.
(d) Click the [CHAR. SET] menu key. The cursor position in the "DEVICE/INST." field displays the character as
set in the "STR. CODE" ("CHAR. CODE") field. When canceling the input with character code, click the
[DEVICE/INST.] menu key to move the cursor back to the "DEVICE/INST." field.
(e) After confirming the input characters, press the [INPUT] key or [OK] menu key. The edited message is
displayed in the circuit.
(f) Select the [CONVERT LADDER] menu key to complete the editing.

"ENTER SYMBOL" popup screen dedicated to messages

In M700 Series

In M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series

IV - 110
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Editing

8.2.14 Undoing the Last Editing Operation

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

Cancels the last editing operation with circuit input mode and restores the previous state.
Undo operation is possible for only one most recent edit.
Menu is masked when undo operation is not possible.

(1) Procedures for undo operation

There are two ways of undo operations.
(a) Method with menu key selection:
Select
Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT] → [COPY/INSERT]
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT]] → [EDIT] → [COPY/INSERT]
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT] → [LADDER SIMBOL 1]/[LADDER SIMBOL 2]/
[COPY/INSERT]
and then [UNDO] menu key.
(b) Press Ctrl, then Z key.

(2) Restorable edits and unrestorable editing

Restorable editing:
- Editing contacts/coils/lines etc. (add ・ change ・ delete)
- Editing statement/note
- Line insertion ・ line deletion
- Pasting in one circuit unit
Unrestorable editing:
- When a circuit is changed, the state prior to the change cannot be restored.
- When an unconverted circuit is discarded, the state prior to discarding cannot be restored.
- Editing with replacement, change of AB contacts or TC setting value
- Editing device comment with comment input mode
- Editing in a split display of a circuit
When pasted in a circuit block unit, the state prior to pasting cannot be restored.

IV - 111
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

8.2.15 Ladder Program Writing during RUN by Conversion

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

Ladder program writing during RUN (or RUN write) enables to edit and change sequence programs without stopping
PLC operation. With RUN write ON in "bit selection parameter", RUN write is available with normal operation.

Refer to section "PREPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT: Ladder Program Writing during RUN"．Peripheral
development environment" for the details of RUN write.

DANGER
1. Only the person takes charge and knows well about sequence program can execute ladder program writing
during RUN.
2. The modification by ladder program writing during RUN will be enabled immediately after conversion.
3.The machine might operate in unexpected way when ladder program is uncompleted.
4. Concern carefully the influence from the modification in advance. Also, make sure that system safety is
ensured.

(1) Conformation of RUN write execution

Select Conversion menu key in either "EDIT" or "LADDER EDIT". The screen for the confirmation or RUN write
execution will be displayed. (The following is an image of M700VW/M700 Series screen)

RUN write will be executed by selecting [WRITING DURING RUN] menu key. The processing time of online
change depends on how many steps the ladder program has and where to execute the ladder program. (one
second or less to several seconds)
PLC will be stopped and writing will be executed by selecting [WRITING AFTER STOP] menu key. After the
writing, PLC can be switched into RUN mode again.
PLC will be back to the status before conversion by selecting [CANCEL] menu key.

(2) Completion of RUN write

The following dialog box will be displayed when RUN write is completed. (The following is an image of M700VW/

IV - 112
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.2 Editing

M700 Series screen)

IV - 113
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

8.3 Searching and Replacing

Contacts, coils, instructions, step Nos. and character strings can be searched for while editing and monitoring circuits. In
addition, AB contacts can be changed, and devices, etc., can be replaced.
This search function is also used when selecting the circuit to register with the circuit register monitor.
(Note) If a circuit block is being edited in the editing mode, the following confirmation popup screen will appear.
"Unconverted circuit found. Okay to abort unconverted circuit?"
If [YES] is selected, the unconverted circuit will be aborted.
If [NO] is selected, the search will not be executed. (The unconverted circuit will remain.)

8.3.1 Searching for Ladder (Simple search)

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

Move the cursor to the circuit to be searched and press the "INPUT" key, alphanumerical key, or ladder symbol menu
key, and then popup screen for searching will appear.

(1) Displaying "FIND" screen

■ In M700VW/M700 Series

"FIND" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

■ In M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series

"FIND" screen

(a) When pressing "INPUT",[LADDER SYMBOL] menu and alphabetical key on the LADDER MONITOR screen,
"FIND" popup screen will appear.
- When "INPUT" is pressed while device exists on cursor position, the device on the cursor position is
displayed.
- When [LADDER SYMBOL] menu is pressed, ladder symbol is displayed on the ladder symbol section.
- When alphabetical key is pressed, the pressed character is displayed and the instruction or device to be
consecutively searched can be entered.
The "<" and ">" keys may not exist on the keyboard for some machine types. Use "(",")" key instead.
(b) With the simple operation mode, execute the following menu key operation to open the "FIND" popup screen.
- "MAIN" → "LADDER MONITOR" "FIND"
- "MAIN" → "LADDER EIDIT" "FIND"

IV - 114
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.3 Searching and Replacing

(2) Search direction and types

Menu item Search direction and type

This searches the designated device or instruction from the top of program.
FIND TOP TO BOTTOM When "INPUT" is pressed as soon as the popup screen is opened, search begins from the top, as
well.
FIND CURSOR TO BOT. This searches the designated device or instruction downward from the cursor position.
FIND CURSOR TO TOP This searches the designated device or instruction upward from the cursor position.
This searches the designated device contact instruction from the top of program. Ignore the status
of "LADDER SYMBOL" at this time.
FIND CONTACT
(Example: When contact is searched in the "-()- M0" state, error will not occur and instead the contact
of M0 will be searched.)
This searches the designated device coil instruction from the top of program. Ignore the status of
FIND COIL
"LADDER SYMBOL" at this time.

(3) Consecutive searching method

Once the search using menu key or "INPUT" is started, the menu key of selected search type turns to "FIND
NEXT". When "FIND NEXT" menu key or "INPUT" is pressed, search continues consecutively.
When multiple programs are opened, a program is searched to the end. Then, the next program will be searched
consecutively.

(4) Consecutive searching of multiple programs

When multiple programs are opened, program search is performed to the end of a program, and then continued on
to the next program in response to the following message.
When searched object was found in the first program:
"Find completed. Find another program. YES/NO"
When searched object was not found in the first program:
"The find target could not be found. Find another program. YES/NO"
(Message will not appear after the second program.)
(Search continues by simply pressing "INPUT" as the message focus is on "Yes")
If "Yes" is selected, the next program will be searched consecutively. When all the programs have been searched,
"Find is complete" will appear.
If "No" is selected, search will be ended.

(Example)

Find another
program?
Yes/No
Search ends Search begins

Program Program Program Program

(5) Ladder monitor registration method

Circuit block on the cursor position of the "LADDER" screen can be registered in the "ENTRY LADDER" screen.
Refer to "Circuit Operations: Monitoring a Program(Ladder): Ladder Entry Monitor (Split Screens)" for details.

(6) Device monitor registration method

Devices can be registered when "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen (lower part of screen) is displayed in a split
screen format.
Refer to "Circuit Operations: Monitoring a Program(Ladder): Device Registration Monitor(Split Screens)" for details.

IV - 115
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

(7) Returning to the start

By pressing "RETURN FIND START" menu key or button, the operation goes back to the program step from which
the search started.
The "FIND START" position will be updated when another searching is executed for a new target.

(8) Search by equipment name

The ladder can be searched by the equipment name instead of the device name.
(a) Display the "FIND" screen in accordance with the procedure (1).
(b) Enter the equipment name in the "DEVICE/INST." using one of the following methods.
- "'" (single quote) + an arbitrary equipment name
- "." (period) + an arbitrary equipment name
(c) Press an arbitrary menu key listed in (2).
(Note) The operations such as changing the search direction and types, consecutive search and return to the
search start position are same as the normal search.

8.3.2 Searching for Step No. (Simple search)

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

(1) Displaying "FIND STEP NO." screen

(a) When number key is pressed in the LADDER EDIT screen or LADDER MONITOR screen, "FIND STEP NO."
popup screen will appear.
(b) With the simple operation mode and M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series, execute the following menu key operation
to open the "FIND STEP NO." popup screen.
- "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR] [FIND STEP NO.]
- "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT] [FIND STEP NO.]
* When numerical key is pressed while cursor is located on the ENTRY LADDER MONITOR (split screen)
side, circuit "FIND" popup screen will appear.

"FIND STEP NO." popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(2) Search methods

Input the step No. to be searched and press [FIND] menu key or [INPUT] key. Then, the specified step No. will be
searched.

IV - 116
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.3 Searching and Replacing

8.3.3 Searching for Contacts and Coils

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

Contact or coil devices can be searched from the circuits on the "LADDER" screen.
Also, in the same manner as the simple search, multiple programs can be searched consecutively.

"FIND CONTACT OR COIL" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Search methods

(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [FIND, REPLACE] and [FIND CONTACTOR COIL] menu key.
When selected, the "FIND CONTACT OR COIL" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [DEVICE] menu key, and input the device.
* The device to be searched can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from the list.
(Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Select contact or coil with the [TARGET] menu key. (Contact is selected as a default.)
(d) Press the [FIND] menu key.
* Search is always carried out downward from the head of the circuit.
(e) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.

(2) Registering monitor

Registering the ladder specified with the entry ladder monitor or the device specified with the device registration
monitor can be executed.
Refer to "Circuit Operations: Monitoring a Program(Ladder): Registering the Monitor" for details.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 117
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

(4) Search method by equipment name

The contactor coil can be searched by equipment name by the following procedure.
(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [FIND, REPLACE] and [FIND CONTACTOR COIL] menu key.
When selected, the "FIND CONTACTOR COIL" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [DEVICE] menu key, and enter the equipment name using one of the following methods.
- "'" (single quote) + an arbitrary equipment name
- "." (period) + an arbitrary equipment name
* The equipment name can be entered directly or by selecting the previously entered name from the list.
(Note that the list will be cleared once the onboard is ended.)
(c) Select contact or coil with the [TARGET] menu key. (Contact is selected as a default.)
(d) Press the [FIND] menu key.
* Search is always carried out downward from the beginning of the circuit.
(e) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
* The process for going back to the search start position can be performed with similar manner to the device
search.

8.3.4 Searching for Device

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

A device can be searched from the circuits on the "LADDER" screen.

"FIND DEVICE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Search methods

(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [FIND, REPLACE] and [FIND DEVICE] menu key.
When selected, the "FIND DEVICE" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [DEVICE] menu key, and input the device.
* The device to be searched can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from the list.
(Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Designate the search direction with the [FIND DIRECTI.] menu key. (As a default, the devices are searched
downward from the head.)
(d) Designate the search options with the [FIND OPTION] menu key. (No default setting.)
(e) Press the [FIND NEXT] menu key.
(f) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(g) If the [FIND NEXT] menu key is pressed again, the search will continue from the current position.

IV - 118
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.3 Searching and Replacing

(2) Registering monitor

Registering the ladder specified with the entry ladder monitor or the device specified with the device registration
monitor can be executed.
Refer to "Circuit Operations: Monitoring a Program(Ladder): Registering the Monitor" for details.
(3) Closing the popup screen
Press the menu key.

(4) Consecutive searching of multiple programs

Refer to "Circuit Operations: Monitoring a Program(Ladder): Searching for Ladder (Simple search)" for details.

* Changing the search target program (ladder)

The program to be searched can be changed.
Refer to "Circuit Operations: Changing the Displayed Details: Program Changeover" for details on the operation
methods.

(5) Search method by equipment name

The device can be searched by equipment name by the following procedure.
(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [FIND, REPLACE] and [DEVICE] menu key.
When selected, the "FIND DEVICE" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [DEVICE] menu key, and enter the equipment name using one of the following methods.
- "'" (single quote) + an arbitrary equipment name
- "." (period) + an arbitrary equipment name
* The equipment name can be entered directly or by selecting the previously entered name from the list.
(Note that the list will be cleared once the onboard is ended.)
(c) Designate the search direction with the [FIND DIRECTI.] menu key. (As a default, the devices are searched
downward from the beginning.)
(d) Designate the search options with the [FIND OPTION] menu key. (“NONE” is set as default.)
(e) Press the [FIND NEXT] menu key.
(f) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(g) If the [FIND NEXT] menu key is pressed again, the search will continue from the current position.
* Selecting the search direction, [FIND OPTION] , and the process for going back to the search start position
etc. can be performed with similar manner to the device search.

IV - 119
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

8.3.5 Instruction Search

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

Instructions can be searched from the ladder on the "LADDER" screen.

"FIND INSTRUCTION" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(Supplement)
The "<" and ">" keys may not exist on the keyboard for some machine types. Use "(",")" key instead.

(1) Search methods

(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [FIND, REPLACE] and [FIND INST.] menu key.
When selected, the "FIND INSTRUCTION" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [LADDER SYMBOL] menu key, and select the circuit symbol from the list.
This can be omitted for a function instruction such as MOV.
(c) Input the search instruction with the [FIND INST.] menu key.
* The instruction to be searched can be directly input, or a previously input instruction can be selected from the
list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(d) Designate the search direction with the [FIND DIRECTI.] menu key. (As a default, the devices are searched
downward from the head.)
(e) Press the [FIND NEXT] menu key or [INPUT] key.
(f) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(g) If the [FIND NEXT] menu key or [INPUT] key is pressed again, the search will continue from the current
position.

(2) Registering monitor

Registering the ladder specified with the entry ladder monitor or the device specified with the device registration
monitor can be executed.
Refer to "Circuit Operations: Monitoring a Program(Ladder): Registering the Monitor" for details.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 120
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.3 Searching and Replacing

(4) Consecutive searching of multiple programs

Refer to "Circuit Operations: Searching and Replacing: Searching for Ladder (Sample search)" for details.

* Changing the search target program (ladder)

The program to be searched can be changed.
Refer to "Circuit Operations: Changing the Displayed Details: Program Changeover" for details on the operation
methods.

(5) Search method by equipment name

The instructioncan be searched by equipment name by the following procedure.
(a) Select "MAIN" -> [LADDER] -> [FIND, REPLACE] and [FIND INST.] menu key.
When selected, the "FIND INSTRUCTION" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [LADDER SYMBOL] menu key, and select the circuit symbol from the list.
This can be omitted for a function instruction such as MOV.
(c) Select the [FIND INST.] menu key, and enter the equipment name using one of the following methods.
- "'" (single quote) + an arbitrary equipment name
- "." (period) + an arbitrary equipment name
* The equipment name can be entered directly or by selecting the previously entered name from the list.
(Note that the list will be cleared once the onboard is ended.)
(d) Designate the search direction with the [FIND DIRECTI.] menu key. (As a default, the devices are searched
downward from the beginning.)
(e) Press the [FIND NEXT] menu key or [INPUT] key.
(f) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(g) If the [FIND NEXT] menu key or [INPUT] key is pressed again, the search will continue from the current
position.
* Selecting the search direction and the process for going back to the search start position etc. can be
performed with similar manner to the instruction search.

IV - 121
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

8.3.6 Step No. Search

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

A circuit with a designated step No. can be searched from the circuits on the "LADDER" screen.

"FIND STEP NO." popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Search method

(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [FIND, REPLACE] and [STEP NO.] menu key.
When selected, the "FIND STEP NO." popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [STEP NO.] menu key, and set the step No.
* The step No. to be searched can be directly input, or a previously input step No. can be selected from the
list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Press the [FIND] menu key.
(d) The circuit with the designated step No. will appear, and the popup screen will close.

(2) Registering monitor

Registering the ladder specified with the entry ladder monitor or the device specified with the device registration
monitor can be executed.
Refer to "Circuit Operations: Monitoring a Program(Ladder): Registering the Monitor" for details.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 122
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.3 Searching and Replacing

8.3.7 Character String Search

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

A designated character string can be searched from the circuit statements and notes on the "LADDER" screen.

"FIND STRING" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Search methods

(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [FIND, REPLACE] and [FIND STRING] menu key.
When selected, the "FIND STRING" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [STRING] menu key, and set the character string.
* The character string to be searched can be directly input, or a previously input character string can be
selected from the list. (Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Designate the search direction with the [FIND DIRECTI.] menu key. (As a default, the devices are searched
downward from the head.)
(d) Press the [FIND NEXT] menu key.
(e) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(f) If the [FIND NEXT] menu key is pressed again, the search will continue from the current position.

(2) Registering monitor

Registering the ladder specified with the entry ladder monitor or the device specified with the device registration
monitor can be executed.
Refer to"Circuit Operations: Monitoring a Program(Ladder): Registering the Monitor" for details.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(4) Consecutive searching of multiple programs

Refer to "Circuit Operations: Searching and Replacing: Searching for Ladder (Simple search)" for details.

* Changing the search target program (ladder)

The program to be searched can be changed.
Refer to "Circuit Operations: Changing the Displayed Details: Program Changeover" for details on the operation
methods.

IV - 123
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

8.3.8 Changing the AB Contacts

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○
The A contact for a designated device in the circuits on the "LADDER" screen can be changed to a B contact and vice
versa.
"CHANGE AB CONTACT" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Search methods

(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [FIND, REPLACE] and [CHANGE AB CONTACT] menu key.
When selected, the "CHANGE AB CONTACT" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [DEVICE] menu key, and set the device.
* The device to be changed can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from the list.
(Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Designate the search direction with the [FIND DIRECTI.] menu key. (As a default, the devices are searched
downward from the head.)
(d) Press the [FIND NEXT] menu key.
(e) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(f) If the [FIND NEXT] menu key is pressed again, the search will continue from the current position.

(2) Changing the AB contact

(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [FIND, REPLACE] and [CHANGE AB CONTACT] menu key.
When selected, the "CHANGE AB CONTACT" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [DEVICE] menu key, and set the device.
* The device to be changed can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from the list.
(Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Designate the search direction with the [FIND DIRECTI.] menu key. (As a default, the devices are searched
downward from the head.)
(d) Press the [FIND NEXT] menu key.
(e) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(f) Press the [REPLACE] key to replace the device.
(g) After replacing, the device search will continue, and the cursor will move accordingly.
(h) All devices can be replaced in a batch when the [REPLACE ALL] menu key is selected.

IV - 124
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.3 Searching and Replacing

(Supplement) Device designation

Extensions and bit No. modifiers can be designated when designating the device, but index modifiers cannot
be designated.
- Example of device designation
X0Z3 cannot be designated (Cannot be designated because this is an index modifier)
- The A contact and B contact in the following instructions can be changed.
A contact:LD,AND,OR,LDP,ANDP,ORP,EGP
B contact:LDI,ANI,ORI,LDF,ANDF,ORF,EGF

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

* Changing the search target program (ladder)

The program to be searched can be changed.
Refer to"Circuit Operations: Changing the Displayed Details: Program Changeover" for details on the operation
methods.

(4) Search method by equipment name

The AB contacts can be searched by equipment name by the following procedure.
(a) Select "MAIN" -> [LADDER] -> [FIND, REPLACE] and [CHANGE AB CONTACT] menu key.
When selected, the "CHANGE AB CONTACT" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [DEVICE] menu key, and enter the equipment name using one of the following methods.
- "'" (single quote) + an arbitrary equipment name
- "." (period) + an arbitrary equipment name
* The equipment name can be entered directly or by selecting the previously entered device from the list.
(Note that the list will be cleared once the onboard is ended.)
(c) Designate the search direction with the [FIND DIRECTI.] menu key. (As a default, the devices are searched
downward from the beginning.)
(d) Press the [FIND NEXT] menu key.
(e) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(f) If the [FIND NEXT] menu key is pressed again, the search will continue from the current position.
* Selecting the search direction and the process for changing AB contact by specifying the range and going
back to the search start position etc. can be performed with similar manner to when the device is specified.

(5) Changing the AB contacts by equipment name

The AB contacts can be changed by equipment name by the following procedure.
(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [FIND, REPLACE] and [CHANGE AB CONTACT] menu key.
When selected, the "CHANGE AB CONTACT" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [DEVICE] menu key, and enter the equipment name using one of the following methods.
- "'" (single quote) + an arbitrary equipment name
- "." (period) + an arbitrary equipment name
* The equipment name can be entered directly or by selecting the previously entered name from the list.
(Note that the list will be cleared once the onboard is ended.)
(c) Designate the search direction with the [FIND DIRECTI.] menu key. (As a default, the devices are searched
downward from the beginning.)
(d) Press the [FIND NEXT] menu key.
(e) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(f) Replace the contact using the [REPLACE] menu key.
(g) After replaced, carry on the device search and move the cursor.
(h) If [REPLACE ALL] menu key is selected, the device replacement is executed at once.
* Selecting the search direction and the process for changing AB contact by specifying the range and going
back to the search start position etc. can be performed with similar manner to when the device is specified.

IV - 125
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

8.3.9 Replacing Devices

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

Devices and character string constants, etc., on the "LADDER" screen can be replaced.

"REPLACE DEVICE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Search methods

(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [FIND, REPLACE] and [REPLACE DEVICE] menu key.
When selected, the "REPLACE DEVICE" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [OLD DEVICE] menu key, and set the device to be replaced.
* The device to be changed can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from the list.
(Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Select the [NEW DEVICE] menu key, and set the new device.
* The device to be changed can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from the list.
(Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(d) Designate the search direction with the [FIND DIRECTI.] menu key. (As a default, the devices are searched
downward from the head.)
(e) Press the [FIND NEXT] menu key.
(f) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(g) If the [FIND NEXT] menu key is pressed again, the search will continue from the current position.

(2) Replacement methods

(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [FIND, REPLACE] and [REPLACE DEVICE] menu key.
When selected, the "REPLACE DEVICE" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [OLD DEVICE] menu key, and set the device.
* The device to be changed can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from the list.
(Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Select the [NEW DEVICE] menu key, and set the device.
* The device to be changed can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from the list.
(Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(d) Designate the search direction with the [FIND DIRECTI.] menu key. (As a default, the devices are searched
downward from the head.)
(e) Press the [FIND NEXT] menu key.
(f) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(g) Press the [REPLACE] key to replace the device.
(h) After replacing, the device search will continue, and the cursor will move accordingly.
(i) All devices can be replaced in a batch when the [REPLACE ALL] menu key is selected.

IV - 126
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.3 Searching and Replacing

(Supplement)
- Device designation
The following devices can be replaced.
- Word devices to word devices
- Bit devices to bit devices
Note that digits, indexes and indirect modifiers cannot be replaced.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

* Changing the search target program (ladder)

The program to be searched can be changed.
Refer to "Circuit Operations: Changing the Displayed Details: Program Changeover" for details on the operation
methods.
* When all replace is executed, the following progress bar will appear.

(4) Search method by equipment name

The device can be searched by equipment name by the following procedure.
(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [FIND, REPLACE] and [REPLACE DEVICE] menu key.
When selected, the "REPLACE DEVICE" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [OLD DEVICE] menu key, and enter the equipment name using one of the following methods.
- "'" (single quote) + an arbitrary equipment name
- "." (period) + an arbitrary equipment name
* The equipment name can be entered directly or by selecting the previously entered name from the list.
(Note that the list will be cleared once the onboard is ended.)
(c) Select the [NEW DEVICE] menu key, and enter the equipment name using one of the following methods.
- "'" (single quote) + an arbitrary equipment name
- "." (period) + an arbitrary equipment name
* The equipment name can be entered directly or by selecting the previously entered name from the list.
(Note that the list will be cleared once the onboard is ended.)
(d) Designate the search direction with the [FIND DIRECTI.] menu key. (As a default, the devices are searched
downward from the beginning.)
(e) Press the [FIND NEXT] menu key.
(f) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(g) If the [FIND NEXT] menu key is pressed again, the search will continue from the current position.
* Selecting the search direction and the process for replacing the device by specifying the range and going
back to the search start position etc. can be performed with similar manner to when the device is specified.

IV - 127
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

(5) Replace method by equipment name

The device can be replaced by equipment name by the following procedure.
(a) Select "MAIN" -> [LADDER] -> [FIND, REPLACE] and [REPLACE DEVICE] menu key.
When selected, the "REPLACE DEVICE" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [OLD DEVICE] menu key, and enter the equipment name using one of the following methods.
- "'" (single quote) + an arbitrary equipment name
- "." (period) + an arbitrary equipment name
* The equipment name can be entered directly or by selecting the previously entered name from the list.
(Note that the list will be cleared once the onboard is ended.)
(c) Select the [NEW DEVICE] menu key and set the device.
- "'" (single quote) + an arbitrary equipment name
- "." (period) + an arbitrary equipment name
* The equipment name can be entered directly or by selecting the previously entered name from the list.
(Note that the list will be cleared once the onboard is ended.)
(d) Designate the search direction with the [FIND DIRECTI.] menu key. (As a default, the devices are searched
downward from the beginning.)
(e) Press the [FIND NEXT] menu key.
(f) If the search target is found, the cursor will move to the searched circuit.
(g) Replace the device by [REPLACE] menu key.
(h) After replaced, carry on the device search and move the cursor.
(i) If [REPLACE ALL] menu key is selected, the device replacement is executed at once.
* Selecting the search direction and the process for replacing the device by specifying the range and going
back to the search start position etc. can be performed with similar manner to when the device is specified.

IV - 128
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.3 Searching and Replacing

8.3.10 Changing the T/C Setting Value

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

The timer and counter setting values used in the program displayed on the "LADDER" screen can be listed, and the
setting values can be changed in a batch.

"T/C SETTING CHANGE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the timer and counter device list

(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [FIND, REPLACE] and [T/C SETTING CHANGE] menu key.
When selected, the "T/C SETTING CHANGE" popup screen will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [DEVICE] menu key, and input the timer or counter device.
* The timer or counter device can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from the list.
(Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(c) Select the [DISPLAY VALUE] menu key. When selected, the list of timer or counter devices will appear.

(2) Changing the timer and counter setting value

(a) List the timer or counter devices.
(b) Select the [LIST] menu key, move the cursor to the "AFTER" column of the device for which the setting value
is to be changed, and then press the [INPUT] key. The cursor can be moved with the "up, down, left, right"
arrow keys.
(c) Input the new setting value. (Example: To change the value to 10, input "K10".)
(d) Select the [CHANGE] menu. The setting will be changed, and the "T/C SETTING CHANGE" popup screen will
automatically close.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 129
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

8.4 Changing the Displayed Details

The program data and device comment data to be edited can be changed, and the comments can be displayed and set.

8.4.1 Program Changeover

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
The programs in the circuit display can be changed.

(1) Changing the displayed programs

(a) Select "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR] [PROGRAM CHANGE] - or -
"MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT] [PROGRAM CHANGE] menu.
When the menu key is pressed, the screen shows the list of the programs that have been read.
(b) Select the program with the arrow keys or page up/down key. The selected program is displayed by pressing
the [INPUT] key.

IV - 130
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.4 Changing the Displayed Details

8.4.2 Comment Display

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○
The validity of the comment display, statement display, note display and device name display can be set.
In M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series, these display settings are in "ENVIRON. SETTING" screen. Refer to "Environment
Setting:Comment Display Setting".
(Note 1) If an incompatible language is designated for the comment, it will not be displayed correctly.
(Note 2) In reduced display, Japanese characters will be displayed as "????". Change the display to standard or
expanded one, or use zoom cursor to display Japanese characters.

(1) Displaying a comment, statement, note or device name

* The method for displaying a comment is given as an example below.
(a) Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [VIEW, TOOLS] [COMMENT DISPLAY] menu key
Simple operation mode: "MAIN" → [COMMENT DISPLAY] menu key
When selected, the "COMMENT DISPLAY" popup menu will appear at the lower center of the screen.
(b) Select the [COMMENT DISPLAY] menu key.
A check mark will appear at "COMMENT".
(c) When the [COMMENT DISPLAY] menu key is selected again, the check mark will be removed.
(d) Press the "SET" menu key. The "COMMENT DISPLAY" popup menu will close, and the comment display
setting will change.
* Comment display set once will be held even after terminating the onboard.
When the onboard is started up again, the comment display is shown in the same state as it was set last.

IV - 131
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

(2) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

Examples of displaying various comments are given below.

- Example of displaying comment, statement and note

Statement
Note

Comment Comment

- Example of displaying equipment name (When replacing the equipment name with the device name.)

- Example of displaying equipment name (When displaying the equipment name aligned with the device name)

(3) Comment ON/OFF by "EOB(;)"

Comment can be switched ON or OFF by using "EOB(;)".
Refer to "Comment ON/OFF" for details.

(4) Setting comment line

The number of lines is specified to display a device comment. (line 1 to line 4)
The comment out of the specified number of lines by this setting will not be displayed.

IV - 132
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.4 Changing the Displayed Details

(5) Setting a common comment file

Settings for the common comment are specified. Two methods are available to specify a common comment file.
- COMMENT (GX Developer compatible) method
This method is compatible with GX Developer. The "COMMENT" file, which is common for all the programs,
and each comment file, which has the same name as each program file name, are used accordingly to the
program displayed.
- Common comment file designation method
A comment file is designated to be common for each program. This method is used to designate a comment
file for each language.

(a) Setting the COMMENT (GX Developer compatible) method

Select "COMMENT (GX Developer COMPATIBLE)" with the [COMMON COMMENT] menu or the cursor key.

(b) Setting the common comment file designation method

- Select "DESIGNATE OTHER COMMENT FILES" with the [COMMON COMMENT] menu or the cursor key.
- Select the [SELECT FILE] menu. "SELECT FILE" field is focused.
- Select any file with " ↑ " or " ↓ " key, and set the file by pressing the [SELECT FILE] menu or the [INPUT] key.
䠍䠊 When selecting
㻯㻻㻹㻹㻱㻺㼀 COMMENT (GX-Developer compatible)
䠄㻳㼄㻙㻰㼑㼢㼑㼘㼛㼜㼑㼞

䕔 With common comment

ඹ㏻䝁䝯䞁䝖䛾䜏Ꮡᅾ䛩䜛ሙྜ 䕔 With common comment and comment for each program
䕔 ඹ㏻䝁䝯䞁䝖䛸䝥䝻䜾䝷䝮ู䝁䝯䞁䝖䛜Ꮡᅾ䛩䜛ሙྜ
䛩䜉䛶䛾䡸䡬䡵䢙䡹䢈䢛䢗䡴䢚䢓䢍䛻䛚䛔䛶ඹ㏻䝁䝯䞁䝖䠄ྡ⛠
The common comment (Name is fixed to㻯㻻㻹㻹㻱㻺㼀ᅛᐃ䠅䛜 䢈䢛䢗䡴䢚䢓䢍ู䡶䢎䢙䢀䛿䚸ྠྡ䛾䡸䡬䡵䢙䡹䢈䢛䢗䡴䢚䢓䢍䛷䛾䜏ཧ↷䚸
COMMENT) is Comment for each program will be referred only in the same
ཧ↷䛥䜜䜛䚹 䛭䛾௚䛾䡸䡬䡵䢙䡹䢈䢛䢗䡴䢚䢓䢍䛻䛚䛔䛶ඹ㏻䝁䝯䞁䝖䛜ཧ↷䛥䜜䜛䚹
referred in all sequence programs. name programs. Common comment will be referred in other
Sequence program(MAIN)
sequence programs.
䝅䞊䜿䞁䝇䝥䝻䜾䝷䝮䠄㻹㻭㻵㻺䠅
Comment for each
Sequence program(HLADDER)䠅 Sequence program(HLADDER) program (HLADDER) 䠅
䢈䢛䢗䡴䢚䢓䢍ู䡶䢎䢙䢀䠄
䝅䞊䜿䞁䝇䝥䝻䜾䝷䝮䠄

Sequence program(P1800)䠅 Sequence program(P1800) Comment for each

䢈䢛䢗䡴䢚䢓䢍ู䡶䢎䢙䢀䠄
program (P1800)
Common comment Sequence program(MAIN)䠅
Sequence program(P1801)䠅 ඹ㏻䝁䝯䞁䝖䠄
(COMMENT)
Sequence program(P1802)䠅 Sequence program(P1801)
Common comment
Sequence program(P1810)䠅 Sequence program(P1802)䠅 ඹ㏻䝁䝯䞁䝖䠄㻯㻻㻹㻹㻱㻺㼀䠅
(COMMENT)

Sequence program(P1820)䠅 Sequence program(P1810)䠅

Sequence program(P1820)䠅

2.When selecting other comment file(conventional M700 compatible)

Only one of the comment files referred in all sequence program can be selected
separately. Changing file name in environment setting enables to change the
comment to be referred immediately.
(This function is provided in case changing comment files based on language.)

Sequence program(MAIN) Modifiable in

environment setting
Sequence program(HLADDER)

Sequence program(P1800) Common comment(C-JPN)

Sequence program(P1801) Common comment(C-ENG)

Sequence program(P1802) Common comment(C-CHN)

Sequence program(P1810)

Sequence program(P1820)

IV - 133
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

(6) Specifying the equipment name display format

Select the equipment name display format using one of the following two options.
- Replace device name and display
This format displays the equipment name by replacing with the corresponding device.
- Arrange with device and display
The equipment name and the corresponding device name are displayed in tandem.
The equipment name display formcat can be selected as follows.
(a) Press [ALIAS FORMAT DISPLAY] menu key to select the equipment name display format selection list.
(b) Press [ALIAS FORMAT DISPLAY] successively to swich between "Replace device name and display"
and "Arrange with device and display".
(c) Press [SET] menu key to set the equipment name display format display.
* If [ALIAS] is not checked even the equipment name display format is selected, the equipment name will
not be displayed even pressing [SET] menu key and go back to the ladder screen.

8.4.3 Comment ON/OFF

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
Comment set with circuit's "COMMENT DISPLAY" can be switched ON or OFF.

(1) Switching by key

Comment can be switched ON or OFF by using "EOB(;)".

(2) Switching by menu key (Simple operation mode and M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series)
- "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR] [COMMENT ON/OFF] - or -
- "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT] [COMMENT ON/OFF]

When comment display is switched ON while "COMMENT DISPLAY" box is unchecked, comment, statement and note
will be checked.

(Example) "COMMENT ON/OFF" button operations when "COMMENT DISPLAY" is set as shown below. (The screen is
an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

Comment display ON/OFF switch

IV - 134
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.4 Changing the Displayed Details

8.4.4 Setting the Circuit Display Scale

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
(1) Switching by menu key
The circuit's display scale can be switched by using [ZOOM DISPLAY] menu key.
(a) With standard operation mode
- "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [VIEW, TOOLS] [LADDER DISPLAY] [ZOOM DISPLAY]
(b) With simple operation mode and M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series
- "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR] [ZOOM DISPLAY] - or -
- "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT] [ZOOM DISPLAY]

By pressing the menu key, the scale changes in 3 stages: "Reduction" → "Standard" → "Expansion" → "Reduction"
In M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series, "ENVIRON. SETTING" screen has the same setting menu. Refer to "Ladder
Display Setting: Zoom Display".
Current value display in monitoring can be switched by pressing the current monitor value display menu key.
(Note1) The setting of circuit's expanded/reduced display and maximum number of contacts will be held even after
terminating the onboard.
(When the onboard is started up again, the circuit will be displayed with the same settingas as before.)

■ In M700VW/M700 Series

Reduced display

Standard display

Expanded display

IV - 135
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

■ In M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series

<9 contacts display>

Reduced display

Standard display

Expanded display

<11 contacts display>

Reduced display

Standard display

Expanded display

IV - 136
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
8.4 Changing the Displayed Details

The [ZOOM CURSOR] menu will enlarge only cursor display area in reduced or standard display.

Normal cursor display Zoom cursor display

When displaying
cursor on top or
bottom ladder,
adjust㩷zoom
direction to
display the whole
cursor on the
screen.

(Note 1) In reduced display, Japanese characters will be displayed as "????".

(2) Specifying the maximum number of contacts

In M700VW/M700 Series, maximum number of contacts are determined by the resolution of the display unit.
Maximum number of contacts will be changed from "LADDER DISPLAY" menu in the standard operation mode.
In the standard operation mode, select "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [VIEW, TOOLS] [LADDER DISPLAY] [NUMBER
OF CONTACT] menu key to switch display size.
In M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series, the maximum number of contacts is changed in "ENVIRON. SETTING" screen.
Refer to "Circuit Operations: Maximum Number of Contacts" for details.
When screen resolution is VGA (640x480) (9 contacts)

9 contacts + 1 coil

When screen resolution is XGA (1024x768) (11 contacts)

11 contacts + 1 coil

(3) Displaying the circuit with horizontal scroll

There may be cases when the entire width of the circuit is not displayed because of the screen resolution, maximum
number of contacts or the expansion/reduction display state. In this case, a scroll bar will appear at the bottom of
the circuit screen. When the cursor is move to the left or right end of the circuit, the screen will follow the movement
and display the hidden circuit. In M700VS/M70/E70 Series, the scroll bar is not displayed.

Cases in which horizontal scroll appears

Maximum
Screen resolution number of Reduced display Standard display Expanded display
contacts
Entire circuit can be Horizontal scroll
VGA(640x480) 11 contacts Horizontal scroll appears
displayed appears
(M700VS/M70V/
M70/E70 Series) Entire circuit can be Entire circuit can be
9 contacts Horizontal scroll appears
displayed displayed
Entire circuit can be Entire circuit can be
XGA(1024x768) 11 contacts Horizontal scroll appears
displayed displayed
Entire circuit can be Entire circuit can be
9 contacts Horizontal scroll appears
displayed displayed

(Supplement)The reduced circuit display can also be changed with the "DISPLAY EXPANSION REDUCTION"
menu key on the EDIT menu.The display scale is switched in the order of "Reduction" → "Standard" →
"Expansion" → "Reduction" by pressing.

IV - 137
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Circuit Operations

8.4.5 Restrictions
Some characters used in comments might not be displayed depending on the ladder display (expanded or reduced).
Dots in the bottom line of characters may not be displayed. (Most of the Japanese two-byte characters, except
underscore shown below, will be displayed.)
- Japanese two-byte character "_" (underscore bar (under bar))
In reduced display, Japanese characters will be displayed as "????". Change the display to standard or expanded one,
or use zoom cursor to display Japanese characters.

IV - 138
 9
Other Functions

IV - 139
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Other Functions

With the contact coil usage list function, step, instruction and position in which specified device is used can be displayed
in a list.
With the device usage list function, device usage state in a program can be displayed per specified device.
By specifying device, the circuit sign, number of device usages in program and error state can be displayed.
Logical errors and input mistakes in the program can be checked with the program check function.

9.1 Contact Coil Usage List

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○

The steps, instructions and position in which the designated device is used can be listed in the contact coil usage list.

[M700VW/M700 Series]

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

[M700VS/M70V/E70 Series]

IV - 140
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.1 Contact Coil Usage List

(1) Displaying the usage list

(a) Select Standard : "MAIN" → [ LADDER] → [ VIEW,TOOLS]
M700VS/M70V/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [ LADDER MONITOR] or "MAIN" -> [LADDER EDIT]
and [CROSS REF. LIST] menu key. When selected, the "CROSS REF. LIST" popup screen will appear at the
center of the screen.
(b) Specify the device by selecting [FIND DEVICE] menu key or [DEVICE] menu key.
* Enter the device directly to search. With the standard operation mode, it is available to enter the previously
entered device from the list. The list will be cleared once the onboard is ended.

(c) Carry out the following operation and select the program to search.
- Standard operation mode
Select [PROGRAM] menu key and select the program to search.
- M700VS/M70V/E70 Series
Select [PROGRAM] menu key and select either currently displayed program or all programs.
If "ALL PROGRAMS" is selected, all programs opened in the onboard editing area are subject to search.
(d) Carry out the following operation and select the program to search. ("NONE" is set as a default setting)
- Standard operation mode
Select the [FIND OPTION] menu key, and designate the search option.
- M700VS/M70V/E70 Series
Select [OPTION] menu key and select whether to have option.
(e) Select the [EXECUT] menu key.
The usage list of designated devices will appear.

(2) Jumping to the usage position

(a) Display the usage list as explained above.
(b) Select the [LIST] menu key, and select the position in the list to jump to.
(c) Press the [JUMP] menu key.
The circuit of the position designated in the list will appear at the head of the "LADDER" screen.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

*The device usage list is held even if the popup window is closed. When the "CROSS REF. LIST" screen is displayed
again, the previous list details will appear. (The list is cleared when onboard is ended.)

IV - 141
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Other Functions

(4) Display the usage list by the equipment name

The contact coil usage list by the equipment name can be displayed by the following procedure.
(a) Standard operation mode: "MAIN" -> [ LADDER] -> [ VIEW,TOOLS]
M700VS/M70V/E70 Series: "MAIN" -> [ LADDER MONITOR] or "MAIN" -> [LADDER EDIT]
and select [CROSS REF. LIST] menu key. When selected, the [CROSS REF. LIST] popup screen will appear
at the center of the screen.
(b) Select [FIND DEVICE] menu key or [DEVICE] menu key and specify the equipment name using one of the
following methods.
- "'" (single quote) + an arbitrary equipment name
- "." (period) + arbitrary equipment name
* Enter the equipment name directly. With the standard operation mode, it is available to enter the previously
entered equipment name from the list. The list will be cleared once the onboard is ended.
(c) Carry out the following operation and select the program to search.
- Standard operation mode
Select [PROGRAM] menu key and select the program to search.
- M700VS/M70V/E70 Series
Select [PROGRAM] menu key and select either currently displayed program or all programs.
If "ALL PROGRAMS" is selected, all programs opened in the onboard editing area are subject to search.
(d) Carry out the following operation and select the search option. ("NONE" is set as a default setting)
- Standard operation mode
Select the [FIND OPTION] menu key, and designate the search option.
- M700VS/M70V/E70 Series
Select [OPTION] menu key and select whether to have option.
(e) Select [EXECUTE] menu key.
The device usage list that the specified equipment name is set is displayed.

IV - 142
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.2 List of Used Devices

9.2 List of Used Devices

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○

The usage state of devices in the program can be displayed for each designated device with the list of used devices.
The circuit symbols, usage quantity and presence of errors can be displayed by designating the device.

[M700VW/M700 Series]

"LIST OF USED DEVICE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

[M700VS/M70V/E70 Series]

IV - 143
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Other Functions

(1) Displaying the list of used devices

(a) Select Standard : "MAIN" → [ LADDER] → [ VIEW,TOOLS]
M700VS/M70V/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [ LADDER MONITOR] or "MAIN" -> [LADDER EDIT]
and [LIST OF USED DEVICE] menu key. When selected, the "LIST OF USED DEVICE" popup screen will
appear at the center of the screen.
(b) Specify the device by selecting [FIND DEVICE] menu key or [DEVICE] menu key.
* Enter the device directly to search. With the standard operation mode, it is available to enter the previously
entered device from the list. The list will be cleared once the onboard is ended.
(c) Carry out the following operation and select the program to search.
- Standard operation mode
Select [PROGRAM] menu key and select the program to search.
- M700VS/M70V/E70 Series
Select [PROGRAM] menu key and select either currently displayed program or all programs.
If "ALL PROGRAMS" is selected, all programs opened in the onboard editing area are subject to search.
(d) Select the [EXECUTE] menu key. The usage list of designated devices will appear.

(2) Changing the displayed list page

(a) Display the list of used devices as explained above.
(b) Select the [LIST] menu key.

(c) Change the display in page units by pressing the and

PAGE
keys.
PAGE

*Note that the range that can be moved with page changeover is limited to 512 devices. To move more, use
"Changing the device display range" explained below.

(3) Changing the device display range

(a) The range of devices that can be displayed in the list is a unit of 128 devices.
(b) To move the display range upward, select the [DISPLAY RANGE UP] menu key.
(c) To move the display range downward, select the [DISPLAY RANGE DOWN] menu key.
* The relationship between the list's display page change and device display range change is shown below.

Example) In the case of M device

M0 to M127
Movable range when
Movable range when the
DISPLAY RANGE UP/DOWN M128 to M255 and are used.
keys are used.
M256 to M383

M384 to M511

(4) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 144
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.2 List of Used Devices

(5) Display the device usage list by the equipment name

The device usage list by the equipment name can be displayed by the following procedure.
(a) Standard operation mode: "MAIN" -> [ LADDER] -> [ VIEW,TOOLS]
M700VS/M70V/E70 Series: "MAIN" -> [ LADDER MONITOR] or "MAIN" -> [LADDER EDIT]
and select [LIST OF USED DEVICE] menu key. When selected, the [LIST OF USED DEVICE] popup screen
will appear at the center of the screen.
(b) Select [FIND DEVICE] menu key or [DEVICE] menu key and specify the equipment name using one of the
following methods.
- "'" (single quote) + an arbitrary equipment name
- "." (period) + an arbitrary equipment name
* Enter the equipment name directly. With the standard operation mode, it is available to enter the previously
entered equipment name from the list. The list will be cleared once the onboard is ended.
(c) Carry out the following operation and select the program to search.
- Standard operation mode
Select [PROGRAM] menu key and select the program to search.
- M700VS/M70V/E70 Series
Select [PROGRAM] menu key and select either currently displayed program or all programs.
If "ALL PROGRAMS" is selected, all programs opened in the onboard editing area are subject to search.
(d) Select [EXECUTE] menu key.
The specified device usage list is displayed.

(6) Display the contact coil usage list (M700VS/M70V/E70 Series only)
Using the contact coil usage list, which part of the program the device listed in the device usage list is used can be
checked.
(a) Search the device by either procedure (1) or (5).
(b) Select the device to check the usage state in the program from the list.
(c) Select [CROSS REF. LIST] menu key to display the contact coil usage list.
* The contact coil usage list is displayed with the state where the device selected by the device usage list is
searched.

IV - 145
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Other Functions

9.3 Program Check

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○

Logical errors and input mistakes in the program can be checked with the program check function.

[M700VW/M700 Series]

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

[M700VS/M70V/E70 Series]

(1) Checking a program (ladder circuit)

(a) Select Standard : "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [VIEW,TOOLS]
M700VS/M70V/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT] → [COPY/INSERT]
and [PROGRAM CHECK] menu key. When selected, the "PROGRAM CHECK" popup screen will appear at
the lower center of the screen.
(b) Press [CHECK PROGRAM] or [PROGRAM] menu key to select the checking range.
If "CUR. PROGRAM" or "CURRENT" is selected, only the program which is currently subject to edit is
checked.
If "ALL PROGRAM" or "ALL" is selected, all programs opened in the onboard edit area are subject to check.
(c) Select the menu key corresponding to the search option ([INST. CHECK],[DOUBLE COIL CHECK],[CONSIST.
CHECK],[ LADDER CHECK], [DEVICE CHECK]), and set the option validity.
(d) Select the [EXECUTE] menu key. The results of the program check will appear under RESULT LIST.

IV - 146
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
9.3 Program Check

(2) Moving the RESULT LIST display up, down, left or right
(a) Execute the above program check.
(b) Select the [RESULT LIST] menu key.
(c) The listed display data can be moved in one line units with the [ ↑ ] and [ ↓ ] arrow keys.
(d) The listed display can be moved left and right with the [ ← ] and [ → ] arrow keys.

(e) The display can be moved up or down in page units with the PAGE
and PAGE
keys.

(3) Jumping to the error section in the check results.

(a) Execute the above program check.
(b) Select the [LIST] menu key, and select the section in the list to jump to.
(c) Press the [JUMP] menu key.
The circuit of the position designated in the list will appear at the head of the "LADDER" screen.

(4) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

* The check results list is held even if the popup window is closed. When the "PROGRAM CHECK" screen is
displayed again, the previous list details will appear. (The list is cleared when onboard is ended.)

* A progress bar appears during program check as shown below.

IV - 147
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Other Functions

IV - 148
 10
Device Monitor Operations

IV - 149
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

(Note 1) Do not connect GX Developer while displaying PLC onboard.

(Note 2) Do not use GX Developer simultaneously when several PCs are connected with NC.

10.1 Device Batch Monitor

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

With device batch monitor, one type of device is designated, and the continuing devices can be monitored with a list
format.

(Note 1) If this screen is changed to another screen during monitoring, the monitoring operation will automatically stop.
(Note 2) The device batch monitor can be used in the NC automatic update mode (white background) or local editing
mode (light blue background).
(Note 3) Number of device points when the monitor format is "bit & word" is displayed with 16 points.

"DEVICE BATCH" screen (The screen is an example of M700 Series)

(1) Displaying the "DEVICE BATCH" screen

Select Standard operation mode: "MAIN" → [DEVICE] [DEVICE BATCH MONITOR] menu key
Simple operation mode and M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [DEVICE BATCH MONITOR] menu
key
When selected, the "DEVICE BATCH" screen will appear on the full screen.

(2) Starting device batch monitoring

(a) Select the [DEVICE] menu key, and designate the head device to be monitored.
* The device to be searched can be directly input, or a previously input device can be selected from the list.
(Note that the list is cleared when onboard is ended.)
(b) Select the [FORMAT] menu key, and set the monitor format.
(c) Select the [DISPLAY] menu key, and set the display format.
(d) Select the [VALUE] menu key, and set decimal or hexadecimal.
(e) Select the [START MONITOR] menu key. When selected, monitoring of the devices designated in the list will
start.

IV - 150
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.1 Device Batch Monitor

(3) Moving the list monitor data

(a) Start the device list monitoring.
(b) Select the [LIST] menu key.
(c) The listed display data can be moved in one line units with the [ ↑ ] and [ ↓ ] arrow keys.

(d) The display can be moved up or down in page units with the and
PAGE
keys.
PAGE

(Note) If the data is moved to a device number not included in the specifications, insignificant data may be
displayed.

(4) Stopping the monitor

Select the [STOP MONITOR] menu key. If there is a registered device, monitoring of the device will stop.

(5) Testing the device

Select the [DEVICE TEST] menu key. When selected, the "DEVICE TEST" popup screen will appear.Refer to
section "Circuit Operations:Testing the Devices" for details on the device test operations.

(6) Run and stop the PLC

Select the [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key. When selected, the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen will open. Refer to
"NC File Operations:Controlling PLC RUN/STOP" for details on the PLC RUN/STOP operations.

(7) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 151
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

10.2 Device Registration Monitor

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○

Devices at a separated position in the circuit or different types of devices can be monitored simultaneously on one
screen.

(Note 1) If this screen is changed to another screen during monitoring, the monitoring operation will automatically stop.
(Note 2) The device registration monitor can be used in the NC automatic update mode (white background) or local
editing mode (light blue background).

"ENTRY DEVICE" screen

(1) Displaying the "ENTRY DEVICE" screen

Select "MAIN" → [DEVICE] and [ENTRY DEVICE] menu key. The "ENTRY DEVICE" screen will appear on the full
screen.

(2) Registering a device

(a) Move the cursor to the row of "device" on the "ENTRY DEVICE MONITOR" screen.
(b) Enter the input mode with alphabet or [INPUT] key.
(c) Enter the device name and press the [INPUT] key.

(3) Deleting a device

(a) Select the [LIST] menu key, and move the cursor to the device to be deleted.
(b) Select the [DEVICE DELETION] menu key. When selected, the device at the cursor position in the list will be
deleted.

(4) Deleting all devices

(a) Select the [DELETE ALL DEVICES] menu key.
(b) A confirmation popup screen will open. To delete all devices, press the [INPUT] key.
(c) All devices displayed in the list will be deleted.

IV - 152
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.2 Device Registration Monitor

(5) Starting the monitor

Select the [START MONITOR] menu key. If devices are registered in the list, monitoring of the listed devices will
start. (The device contact and data state are read out from the NC and displayed.)

(6) Stopping the monitor

Select the [STOP MONITOR] menu key. Monitoring of the registered devices in the list will stop.

(7) Testing the device

Select the [DEVICE TEST] menu key. When selected, the "DEVICE TEST" popup screen will appear.Refer to
section "Circuit Operations: Testing the Devices" for details on the device test operations.

(8) Run and stop the PLC

Select the [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key. When selected, the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen will open. Refer to
"NC File Operations: Controlling PLC RUN/STOP" for details on the PLC RUN/STOP operations.

(9) Switching 16bit/32bit of registration device

*Only the word device can be changed.
Press the "16 BIT/32 BIT" button.

(10) Switching decimal/hexadecimal of registration device

*Only the word device can be changed.
Press the "DEC/HEX" button.

(11) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 153
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

10.3 Sampling Trace

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
With the sampling trace function, the PLC device (bit device and word device) signals can be traced (data collection) and
its result will be displayed in chronological order so that the operator can check and analyze the signal status.

Trace conditions (Data collection conditions)

Trace execution

Trace result

IV - 154
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 Sampling Trace

Details
No. of traces(Number of The number between 1 and 8192 can be set. Note that, however, the total trace data size has
times when data is to be smaller than 60kbyte.
collected) Refer to *1 for trace data size calculation.
No. of traces after trigger Sets the number smaller than the No. of traces.
Tracing can be repeated. (An execution automatically starts after the previous execution is
Trace repetition
completed.) The execution will be repeated until cancelled.
High-speed Trace is executed at every scan of PLC high-speed processing .
Each scan *Up to 8 points of bit devices can be set for the trace data.
Main
Trace is executed at every scan of PLC main processing.
Each scan
Trace point
(Timing for collecting Trace is executed when the device set at the trace data at every scan of
data) Trace data change main processing is changed. (When changed from OFF->ON,ON->OFF
Trace condition for bit device; When the value is changed for word device.)
(Data collection
Trace is executed when the device setting condition at the time of device
condition)
Device designation specification on the "TRACE POINT SETUP" screen has been established
at every scan of the main processing. Refer to *2 for the settable devices.
Trigger is executed by pressing the "EXECUTE TRIGGER" button on the
Screen input
"EXECUTE TRIGGER" screen.

Trigger point Trigger is executed by either one of the following two methods.
(Point where trigger Trigger is executed by pressing the "EXECUTE TRIGGER" button on the
condition has been "EXECUTE TRIGGER" screen.
established.) Device designation Trigger is executed when the device setting condition at the time of device
specification on the "TRIGGER POINT SETUP" screen has been
established.
Refer to *2 for the settable devices.
Trace additional Time (displayed in the unit of hour, minute and second): Step No. and program name cannot
information be added.
Bit device ・50 points of word device and 50 points of bit device can be set. Note that, however, trace data
Trace data
size has to be 60kbyte or less in total. Refer to *1 for calculation of trace data size. Refer to *3
(Collected data) Word device
for the settable devices.
Trace (data collection) is started by pressing the "START TRACE" button on the "TRACE
Start trace
EXECUTION" screen.
Trace execution
Trace (data collection) is stopped by pressing the "STOP TRACE" button on the "TRACE
Stop trace
EXECUTION" screen.
Trace result display The data on the number of traces (or the number of counts until trace is stopped) is display on
Trace result display screen the "TRACE RESULT" screen.
Trace result output Trace results are output to an external device in the CSV file format.
Trace file in the external device (trace condition and trace result) is input. (The trace file is
Input included in the GX-Developer project.)
Refer to *4 for the file compatibility with the GX-Developer.
Trace file in the external device (trace condition and trace result) is output. (The trace file is
File input/output
Output included in the GX-Developer project.)
Refer to *4 for the file compatibility with the GX-Developer.
Trace file in the external device (trace condition and trace result) is deleted. (The trace file is
Delete
included in the GX-Developer project.)

IV - 155
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

*1 Calculation of trace data size

Set the number of traces and the trace devices so that the trace data size is 60kbyte (61440 byte) or smaller.Trace
data size will be calculated as follows.

[Trace data size (byte)] = [Size required for one trace (byte)] x [Number of traces]

Size required for one trace is calculated from word device points and bit device points of the trace device and the
size required for one trace of each device.

Trace device type Size (byte) required for one trace

Word device 2byte per 1 point
2byte per 1 unit (1 unit = 16 points)
1 to 16 points → 1 unit → 2byte
Bit device 17 to 32 points → 2 units → 4byte
33 to 48 points → 3 units → 6byte
49 to 50 points → 4 units → 8byte

Trace data size calculation example

No. Bit device points Word device points Trace points Trace data size Trace execution
(1x2+2x2)x8192= 49152
1 16 points (1 unit) 2 points 8192 points Possible
byte
(1x2+8x2)x1000= 18000
2 8 points (1 unit) 8 points 1000 points Possible
byte
(4x2+50x2)x568= 61344
3 50 points (4 units) 50 points 568 points Possible
byte
(4x2+50x2)x569= 61452
4 50 points (4 units) 50 points 569 points Not possible
byte

*2 Applicable devices with trace/trigger point details setting

Applicable devices with trace/trigger point details setting

Bit device: X, Y, M, L, F, SB, B, SM, T(contact), ST(contact), C(contact)
Word device: T(current value), ST(current value), C(current value), D, R, SW, SD, W
Following qualifications are available for the above devices.
- Bit device digit designation
- Word device bit designation
Process following an inapplicable device setting is as follows.
- If one or more applicable devices already exist, the setting of the inapplicable device will be ignored.
- If no applicable devices exist, error occurs when trace setting file is read upon trace execution.

*3 Applicable devices with device setting

Applicable devices with device setting

Bit device: X, Y, M, L, F, SB, B, SM T(contact), T(coil), ST(contact), ST(coil), C(contact), C(coil)
Word device: T(current value), ST(current value), C(current value), D, R, SW, SD, W
Following qualifications are available for the above devices.
- Bit device digit designation
- Word device bit designation
Process following an inapplicable device setting is as follows.
- If one or more applicable devices already exist, the setting of the inapplicable device will be ignored.
- If no applicable devices exist, error occurs when trace setting file is read upon trace execution.

IV - 156
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 Sampling Trace

*4 File compatibility of the trace file

Trace file

When trace condition

Input for the GX-Developer's Output
Onboard trace file is supported GX-Developer
by the MITSUBISHI
CNC

When trace condition

Input for the GX-Developer's Output
trace file is not
supported by the
MITSUBISHI CNC.
Input
Trace file output with
the onboard. Input

Output

Note 1) Deleting of trace file is possible only for the trace file output with the onboard.

*5 Trace file written into the NC using the GX-Developer

The trace file written into the NC with the GX-Developer is upper-compatible with the onboard trace file and can be
read.

IV - 157
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

10.3.1 MAIN Screen

Sampling trace function is executed with this screen. Trace condition setting, trace execution, trace result display and file
operations (READ FILE, WRITE FILE, DELETE FILE) can be performed.

(Note 1) The following operations cannot be performed during trace. (An error message appears.)
- Trace condition setting ("TRACE COUNT SETUP", "TRACE POINT SETUP", "TRIGGER POINT SETUP",
"TRACE DATA SETUP")
- Reading and writing of the trace file in the file operation (Deleting of file is possible.)
(Note 2) Maximum size of trace data that can be registered is 60kbyte in total. If exceeded, an error message appears
when the "TRACE EXECUTION" button is pressed. Refer to "*1 Calculation of trace data size" for calculation
of trace data.

C
D
E
F
G

The flow chart of sampling trace operation is shown below.

(a) Set the number of traces.

(b) Set the trace point (timing where trace data is collected).

(c) Set the trigger (condition) to be the start position (0 point)

at the time of trace execution.

(d) Set the data (bit device, word device) to be traced.

(e) Execute the trace.

Wait until trigger is executed and trace is completed.
:
Display the trace result.

IV - 158
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 Sampling Trace

(1) Displaying the "SAMPLING TRACE" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → "DEVICE" → [SAMPLING TRACE] menu key. When selected, the "SAMPLING TRACE"
screen will appear on the full screen.

(2) Trace count setting

(a) Select the [TRACE COUNT SETUP] menu key. When selected, the "TRACE COUNT SETUP" popup screen will
appear. (Refer to " Trace Count Setting" for details.)

(3) Trace point setting

(a) Select the [TRACE POINT SETUP] menu key. When selected, the "TRACE POINT SETUP" popup screen will
appear. (Refer to " Trace Point Setting" for details.)

IV - 159
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

(4) Trigger point setting

(a) Select the [TRIGGER POINT SETUP] menu key. When selected, the "TRIGGER POINT SETUP" popup screen
will appear. (Refer to " Trigger Point Setting" for details.)

(5) Trace data setting

(a) Select the [TRACE DATA SETUP] menu key. When selected, the "TRACE DATA SETUP" popup screen will
appear. (Refer to " Trace Data Setting" for details.)

IV - 160
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 Sampling Trace

(6) Trace execution

(a) Select the [TRACE EXECUTION] menu key. When selected, the "TRACE EXECUTION" popup screen will
appear. (Refer to " Trace Execution" for details.)

(7) Trace result display

(a) Select the [TRACE RESULT] menu key in the "TRACE EXECUTION" screen. When selected, the "TRACE
RESULT" popup screen will appear. (Refer to " Trace Result Display" for details.)

(8) Trace condition setting display

Outline of trace condition is displayed in the main screen of "SAMPLING TRACE".

Total number Total number of traces is shown.

Number of traces
Number after trigger Number of traces after trigger is shown.
Trace point setting - Trace point (timing for collecting trace data) setting method is shown.
Trigger point setting - Setting method for the start point (0 point) trigger at the execution of trace.
Trace data setting - Setting status for bit device and word device is shown.

(9) File operation (input, output, delete)

(a) Select "FILE OPERATION" → [READ FILE], [WRITE FILE], [DELETE FILE] menu key. When selected, a popup
screen will appear.
Refer to the following sections for details.
" File Input", " File Output", " Deleting File"

(10) Return to the higher hierarchy of the menu

(a) Press the menu key.

IV - 161
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

10.3.2 Trace Count Setting

Number of traces (data collection) and number after trigger can be set.

Total number
Set the number of traces in the range from 1 to 8192.
(Default: 1024)
Number after trigger Set the number of traces after the trigger establishment.
(Default: 512) The setting value should be less than the total number.

(Note 1) The setting of "NO. OF TRACES", etc. will not be valid until the "SETTING" menu key is pressed.
(Note 2) Trace data (trace condition + trace result) is discarded by turning the NC power OFF.
(Note 3) Setting is not possible during trace. (An error message appears.)

(1) Displaying the "TRACE COUNT SETUP" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → [DEVICE] → [SAMPLING TRACE] → [TRACE COUNT SETUP] menu. When selected, the
"TRACE COUNT SETUP" popup screen will appear.

(2) Setting the total number

(a) Select the [TOTAL] menu key.
(b) Press the [ ↑ ] / [ ↓ ] key and specify whether to select the number of times from the list or to directly input.
When selecting from the list, the following settings are available.
"1024 times, 2048 times, 3072 times, 4096 times, 5120 times, 6144 times, 7168 times, 8192 times"

(3) Setting the number after trigger

(a) Select the [AFTER TRIGGER] menu key.
(b) Press the [ ↑ ] / [ ↓ ] key and specify whether to select the number of times from the list or to directly input.
When selecting from the list, the following settings are available.
"0 time, 1024 times, 2048 times, 3072 times, 4096 times, 5120 times, 6144 times, 7168 times, 8192 times"

IV - 162
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 Sampling Trace

(4) Setting the trace repetition

(a) Select the [TRACE REPEAT] menu key.
(b) Without check mark on [TRACE REPEAT], trace will stop upon the completion.
With check mark on [TRACE REPEAT], trace will automatically start again upon the completion. Trace will be
repeated until canceled.
(Supplement)
- Trace result display during trace repetitions will be as follows.
(a) When any trace has not been completed
Displays the result of currently operating trace.
(b) When one or more traces have been completed
Displays the result of the last completed trace.
- To add time information in trace data, enable "ADD TIME" in "TRACE DATA SETUP" screen.

㧔&KURNC[TGSWGUV
㧔&KURNC[TGSWGUV
㧔&KURNC[TGSWGUV
㧔&KURNC[TGSWGUV
㧔&KURNC[TGSWGUV
㧔&KURNC[TGSWGUV
%QORNGVG %QORNGVG %QORNGVG
5VCTV 6TKIIGT 6TKIIGT 6TKIIGT TGUVCTV
TGUVCTV TGUVCTV

4GUWNVFCVCQH

&KURNC[VJGRTGXKQWU &KURNC[VJGRTGXKQWU
4GUWNVFCVCQH
 TGUWNVFCVC TGUWNVFCVC
4GUWNVFCVCQH

CPF

4GUWNVFCVCQH

CPF


(5) Establishment of trace count setting

(a) Select the [SETTING] menu key. When selected, the "TRACE COUNT SETUP" screen is closed and the
changes will be validated.
*An error occurs if the number of traces is not correctly set. (The "TRACE COUNT SETUP" screen will not be
closed.)

(6) Invalidate the changes and close the popup screen.

(a) Press the menu key.
*The changed settings will be invalid.

IV - 163
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

10.3.3 Trace Point Setting

Trace point (timing of collecting trace data) can be set.
Trace point can be specified with the method described below.

Every main scan

Trace data is collected every time after main scan is executed.
(Default)
Trace data is collected every time after PLC high speed processing scan is executed.
Every high speed scan
*Up to 8 points of bit device can be set for the trace data.
Trace data is collected when the device status set in the trace data setting at every scan of main processing
is changed. When multiple devices are set in the trace data setting, trace data is collected even one of the
Trace data change
devices is changed.
*Up to 8 points of bit device and 2 points of word device can be set for the trace data.
Trace data is collected when the device setting condition registered in the device specification area has
Device designation been established at every scan of main processing.
*8 points of bit device and 2 points of word device can be specified.

Trace point condition at the time of device designation is as follows.

Condition Establishment condition

↑ *1 When a bit device has changed from OFF to ON.
↓ When a bit device has changed from ON to OFF.
Bit device setting
ON When a bit device is ON.
OFF When a bit device is OFF.
= *1 When equal to the value
<> When differed from the value
< When smaller than the value
> When greater than the value
<= When equal to the value or less
>= When equal to the value or more
After masking (AND) the traced device value with the mask value, establishment condition is
checked.
(Example)
Word device setting Device D100
Current value 12A5(Hexadecimal)
Trace condition =
Trace condition value 1200(Hexadecimal)
Mask
Trace condition mask FF00 (Hexadecimal)
(1) Mask the trace point data.
12A5 & FF00 = 1200
(2) Check the trace condition.
Equal (=) to the value?
1200 = 1200
∴ Condition established
Device setting AND *1 All the conditions set with bit device and word device have been established.
condition OR Any one of the conditions set with bit device and word device has been established.
*The value for the word device setting is displayed in decimal and hexadecimal.
*1 is the default condition.
(Note 1) The setting of "TRACE POINT SETUP" etc. will not be valid until the "SETTING" menu key is pressed
(Note 2) Trace data (trace condition + trace result) is discarded by turning the NC power OFF.
(Note 3) Setting is not possible during trace. (An error message appears.)

IV - 164
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 Sampling Trace

(1) Displaying the "TRACE POINT SETUP" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → [DEVICE] → [SAMPLING TRACE] → [TRACE POINT SETUP] menu. When selected, the
"TRACE POINT SETUP" popup screen will appear.

(2) Setting the trace point

(a) Select the [TRACE POINT SETUP] menu key.
(b) Press the [ ↑ ] / [ ↓ ] key and select a setting method from the list.

(3) Setting the bit device

*This is the trace point setting and set only when "SPECIFIED DEVICES" is selected.
(a) Select the [BIT DEVICE SETUP] menu key. When selected, the cursor is displayed in the table for bit device
specification.
(b) Move the cursor to the bit device section and specify the device.
*Press the [INPUT] key after the device entry, and then " ↑ " is set automatically in the "CONDI." area.
*When the cursor is moved to another cell by using an arrow key, " ↑ " is set automatically in the "CONDI."
area.
*An error occurs if an invalid device is specified.

(c) Select the [SELECT CONDI.] menu. When selected, the following conditions are changed in turns.

↑ Condition is established when a device has changed from OFF to ON.

↓ Condition is established when a device has changed from ON to OFF.
ON Condition is established when a device is ON.
OFF Condition is established when a device is OFF.

IV - 165
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

(4) Setting the word device

*This is the trace point setting and set only when "SPECIFIED DEVICES" is selected.
(a) Select the [WORD DEVICE SETUP] menu key. When selected, the cursor is moved to the table for word device
specification.
(b) Move the cursor to the word device section and specify the device. Press the [INPUT] key or [→ ] key so that the
cursor is moved automatically to the "CONDI." section and "=" is set as the condition.
*An error occurs if an invalid device is specified.
(c) Select the [SELECT CONDI.] menu. When selected, the following conditions are changed in turns.

= Condition is established when a device is equal to the value.

<> Condition is established when a device is differed from the value.
< Condition is established when a device is smaller than the value.
> Condition is established when a device is greater than the value.
<= Condition is established when a device is equal to the device or less.
>= Condition is established when a device is equal to the device or more

(d) Press the [VALUE] menu.

(e) Directly input the word device establishment condition. Press the [INPUT] key or [ → ] key to determine the entry.
*Decimal numbers are used in the initial setting. Enter the data in decimal.
(f) Mask data is input in hexadecimal. Mask data is used as shown below.
((Device current value) &(Mask data))[Setting condition] (Setting value)

Example) Condition establishment judgment in the following case.

Device D100
Current value 12A5 (Hexadecimal)
Setting condition =
Setting value 1200 (Hexadecimal)
Mask FF00 (Hexadecimal)

((Device current value) & (Mask data)) <Setting condition> (Setting value)
( (12A5) & (FF00) ) = (1200)

(1) Mask the current value.

12A5 & FF00 = 1200
(2) Check the trace condition.
Equal (=) to the value?
1200 = 1200

∴ Condition established

IV - 166
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 Sampling Trace

(5) Deleting the bit device and word device

(a) Move the cursor to the device to be deleted from the table.
(b) Press the [DELETE] key to delete the device.
*Note that, however, deletion will not be valid until the [SETTING] menu key is pressed.

(6) Device setting condition

(a) The condition of combinations of bit device and word device is set.

Trace (data collection) is executed when the condition of all the devices registered with bit device and
AND condition
word device has been established.
Trace (data collection) is executed when the condition of any one of the devices registered with bit
OR condition
device and word device has been established.

(7) Determination of settings

(a) Select the [SETTING] menu key. When selected, the "TRACE POINT SETUP" screen is closed and the
changes will be validated.
*An error occurs if the trace point is not correctly set. (The "TRACE POINT SETUP" screen will not be closed.)
*An error occurs if the trace point setting is "SPECIFIED DEVICES" and the device specification has not been
made. (The "TRACE POINT SETUP" screen will not be closed.)

(8) Invalidate the changes and close the popup screen.

(a) Press the menu key.
*The changed settings will be invalid.

IV - 167
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

10.3.4 Trigger Point Setting

The trigger (condition) that can be the origin (0 point) at the time of trigger execution can be set.
Trigger point is specified in the following methods.

Screen input
Trigger is set with "EXECUTE TRIGGER" on the "TRACE EXECUTION" screen.
(Default)
The following two conditions must be satisfied for trigger setting:
1) The "EXECUTE TRIGGER" button in the "TRACE EXECUTION" screen is pressed
Device designation
2) The setting condition of the device registered in the device specification area is established
*8 points of bit device and 2 points of word device can be specified.

The following trace point conditions can be set at the time of device specification.

Condition Establishment condition

↑ *1 When a bit device has changed from OFF to ON.
↓ When a bit device has changed from ON to OFF.
Bit device setting
ON When a bit device is ON.
OFF When a bit device is OFF.
= *1 When equal to the value
<> When differed from the value
< When smaller than the value
> When greater than the value
<= When equal to the value or less
>= When equal to the value or more
After masking (AND) the traced device value with the mask value, establishment
condition is checked.
Example)
Word device setting Device D100
Current value 12A5(Hexadecimal)
Trace condition =
Trace condition value 1200(Hexadecimal)
Mask
Trace condition mask FF00 (Hexadecimal)
(1) Mask the trace point data.
12A5 & FF00 = 1200
(2) Check the trace condition.
Equal (=) to the value?
1200 = 1200
∴ Condition established
Device setting AND *1 All the conditions set with bit device and word device have been established.
condition OR Any one of the conditions set with bit device and word device has been established.

* Word device setting value can be displayed both in decimal and hexadecimal.
*1 is the default condition.
(Note 1) The setting of "TRIGGER POINT SETUP", etc. will not be valid until the "SETTING" menu key is pressed.
(Note 2) Trace data (trace condition + trace result) is discarded by turning the NC power OFF.
(Note 3) Setting is not possible during trace. (An error message appears.)

IV - 168
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 Sampling Trace

(1) Displaying the "TRIGGER POINT SETUP" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → [DEVICE] → [SAMPLING TRACE ] → [TRIGGER POINT SETUP] menu. When selected, the
"TRIGGER POINT SETUP" popup screen will appear.

(2) Setting the trigger point

(a) Select the [TRIGGER POINT SETUP] menu key.
(b) Press the [ ↑ ] / [ ↓ ] key and select a setting method.

(3) Setting the bit device

*This is the trigger point setting and set only when "SPECIFIED DEVICES" is selected.
(a) Select the [BIT DEVICE SETUP] menu key. When selected, the cursor is displayed in the table for bit device
specification.
(b) Move the cursor to the bit device section and specify the device.
* Press the [INPUT] key after the device entry, and the " ↑ " is set automatically in the "CONDI." area.
* When the cursor is moved to another cell by using an arrow key, " ↑ " is set automatically in the "CONDI."
area.
*An error occurs if an invalid device is specified.
(c) Select the [SELECT CONDI.] menu. When selected, the following conditions are changed in turns.

↑ Condition is established when a device has changed from OFF to ON.

↓ Condition is established when a device has changed from ON to OFF.
ON Condition is established when a device is ON.
OFF Condition is established when a device is OFF.

IV - 169
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

(4) Setting the word device

* This is the trigger point setting and set only when "SPECIFIED DEVICES" is selected.
(a) Select the [WORD DEVICE SETUP] menu key. When selected, the cursor is displayed in the table for word
device specification.
(b) Move the cursor to the word device section and specify the device.Press the [INPUT] key or [ → ] key so that the
cursor is moved automatically to the "CONDI." section and "=" is set as the condition.
*An error occurs if an invalid device is specified.
(c) Select the [SELECT CONDI.] menu. When selected, the following conditions are changed in turns.

= Condition is established when a device is equal to the value.

<> Condition is established when a device is differed from the value.
< Condition is established when a device is smaller than the value.
> Condition is established when a device is greater than the value.
<= Condition is established when a device is equal to the device or less.
>= Condition is established when a device is equal to the device or more

(d) Select the [VALUE] menu.

(e) Directly input the word device establishment condition. Press the [INPUT] key or [ → ] key to determine the entry.
*Decimal numbers are used in the initial setting. Enter the data in decimal.
(f) Mask data is input in hexadecimal. Mask data is used as shown below.
((Device value) AND (Mask data)) <Setting condition> (Setting value)

Example) Condition establishment judgment in the following case.

Device D100
Current value 12A5 (Hexadecimal)
Setting condition =
Setting value 1200 (Hexadecimal)
Mask FF00 (Hexadecimal)

((Device current value) & (Mask data)) <Setting condition> (Setting value)
( (12A5) & (FF00) ) = (1200)

(1) Mask the current value.

12A5 & FF00 = 1200
(2) Check the trace condition.
Equal (=) to the value?
1200 = 1200

∴ Condition established

(5) Deleting the bit device and word device

(a) Move the cursor to the device to be deleted from the table.
(b) Press the [DELETE] key to delete the device.
*Note that, however, deletion will not be valid until the [SETTING] menu key is pressed.

(6) Device setting condition

(a) The condition of combinations of bit device and word device is set.

Trace (data collection) is executed when the condition of all the devices registered with bit device and
AND condition
word device has been established.
Trace (data collection) is executed when the condition of any one of the devices registered with bit
OR condition
device and word device has been established.

IV - 170
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 Sampling Trace

(7) Establishment of setting

(a) Select the [SETTING] menu key. When selected, the "TRIGGER POINT SETUP" screen is closed and the
changes will be validated.
*An error occurs if the trigger point is not correctly set. (The "TRIGGER OPINT SETUP" screen will not be closed.)

(8) Invalidate the changes and close the popup screen.

(a) Press the menu key.
*The changed settings will be invalid.

10.3.5 Trace Data Setting

Devices (bit device, word device) to which trace is executed can be set.

Up to 50 devices can be registered.

(Note 1) When trace point is set in "every high speed scan", valid bit device is
Bit device limited to 8 points or less.
(Note 2) When trace point is set in "TRACE DATA CHANGE", valid bit device is
limited to 8 points or less.
Up to 50 devices can be registered.
Word device (Note 1) When trace point is set in " TRACE DATA CHANGE ", valid word device
is limited to 2 points or less.
The time of trace point can be displayed on the "time" field on the trace result
display screen.
Time addition (Time is added to the result (Note 1) Note that if time addition is carried out, the size of traceable data is smaller
information) than usual.
(Note 2) If an interval to trace is over 65 seconds, the time will not be displayed
correctly. ("########" will be displayed.)

(Note 1) Changes will not be valid until the [SETTING] menu key is pressed.
(Note 2) Trace data (trace condition + trace result) is discarded by turning the NC power OFF.
(Note 3) Setting is not possible during trace. (An error message appears.)

(1) Displaying the "TRACE DATA SETUP" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → [DEVICE] → [SAMPLING TRACE] → [TRACE DATA SETUP] menu. When selected, the
"TRACE DATA SETUP" popup screen will appear.

IV - 171
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

(2) Setting the bit device

(a) Select the [BIT DEVICE] menu key. When selected, the cursor moves to the table.
(b) Move the cursor and decide where to input the device.
(c) Directly enter the bit device name into the device section.
(d) After device name was entered, press the [INPUT] key or [ ↑ ] / [ ↓ ] key to determine the input.
*When T,ST and C devices are set, "COIL" is automatically set in the type section. If wish to change the type to
"CONTACT", move the cursor to "COIL" and select the [SELECT TYPE] menu key.
*An error occurs if an invalid device is specified.

(3) Setting the word device

(a) Select the [WORD DEVICE] menu key. When selected, the cursor moves to the table.
(b) Move the cursor and decide where to input the device.
(c) Directly enter the word device name into the device section.
(d) After device name was entered, press the [INPUT] key or [ ↑ ] / [ ↓ ] key to determine the input.
*An error occurs if an invalid device is specified.

(4) Deleting the device in the table

(a) Move the cursor to the device to be deleted in the table.
(b) Press the [DELETE] key to delete the device.
*Deletion will not be valid until the [SETTING] menu key is pressed.

(5) Scrolling the table

(a) The cursor on the table can be moved to the top or bottom and then scrolled to the next line. Or, the [Page UP/
DOWN] key can be used to scroll in one unit size.

(6) Addition of time (time is added to the result information) is carried out.
(a) Press the "ADD TIME" button. When pressed, time addition check mark is put. (If pressed once again, the check
mark is removed.)
(Note 1)Changes will not be valid until the [SETTING] menu key is pressed.
(Note 2) If an interval to trace is over 65 seconds, the time will not be displayed correctly. ("########" will be
displayed.)

(7) Determination of settings

(a) Select the [SETTING] menu key. When selected, the "TRACE DATA SETUP" screen is closed and the changes
will be valid.
*When trace data is not correctly set, an error occurs. (The "TRACE DATA SETUP" screen will not be closed.)

(8) Invalidate the changes and close the popup screen.

(a) Press the menu key.
*The changed settings will be invalid.

(9) Addition of monitor device

Devices registered in "ENTRY DEVICE" screen can be added as trace data.
Timer and counter device will be registered as coil of bit device.
(a) Register the device in "ENTRY DEVICE" screen in advance.
(b) Press [ADD MONITOR DEVICE] menu key in "TRACE DATA SETUP" screen.
(c) Select "Yes" in confirmation dialog. The device in "ENTRY DEVICE" screen will be registered in BIT DEVICE or
WORD DEVICE table.

IV - 172
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 Sampling Trace

(10) Inserting a line

Empty lines can be inserted in a selected table.
(a) Select a bit or word device table.
(b) Move the cursor to the position to insert a line.
(c) Press the [INSERT LINE] menu key. The lines below the cursor will shift down by a line, and an empty line will
be inserted.
(Note) If any device is set in the last line of the table, inserting is invalid.

(11) Deleting a line

Lines can be deleted from the selected table.
(a) Select a bit or word device table.
(b) Move the cursor to the line to delete.
(c) Press the [DELETE LINE] menu key. The line with the cursor will be deleted, and the following lines will shift up.

10.3.6 Trace Execution

Trace start/stop and trigger execution are carried out.

Trace is started upon automatically writing the trace condition set on the onboard into the NC
Starting trace
control unit.
Stopping trace Trace is stopped.
Trigger can be compulsorily executed from the screen.
Compulsory trigger
Even when the trigger point setting is "SPECIFIED DEVICES", trigger can be compulsorily
execution
executed.
Trace status monitor start/stop is carried out.
Monitor start/stop When the "trace execution" screen is closed during trace, monitor display is automatically stopped.
If you wish to display again, press the "monitor start" button again.
Trace result display The "TRACE RESULT" screen is displayed.

(Note 1) If trace has been started already, an error occurs and trace will not be started.
(Note 2) If PLC is STOP, an error occurs and trace will not be started.
(Note 3) If trace condition (trace count, trace data) is not set correctly, trace will not be started. (An error message
appears.)
(Note 4) Trace data (trace condition + trace result) is discarded by turning the NC power OFF.
(Note 5) When trigger has not been executed and the trace count has been exceeded, trace data will be erased from the
oldest one in order.
(Note 6) When trace point is set as "every high speed scan", number of points that is valid with trace data is limited to 8
or less bit device points. (if more than 8 points of device are set, only 8 points from the head can be target.)
(Note 7) If the trace point is "device change", valid number of points for trace data is limited to bit device 8 points or less,
word device for 2 or less

IV - 173
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

(1) Displaying the "TRACE EXECUTION" screen

(a) Select "MAINT" → [DEVICE] → [SAMPLING TRACE] [TRACE EXECUTION] menu. When selected, the
"TRACE EXECUTION" popup screen will appear.

(2) Starting trace

(a) Select the [START TRACE] menu key.
When selected, execution status is displayed in "TRACE STATUS".

(3) Stopping trace

(a) Select the [STOP TRACE] menu key.
Trace is stopped.

(4) Executing trace

(a) Select the [EXECUTE TRIGGER] menu key.
*Compulsory trigger is executed from the screen.

(5) Monitor start/stop

(a) Select the [START MONITOR] / [SUSPEND MONITOR] menu key.
Display of trace status is started or sopped.

(6) Displaying trace result

(a) Select the [TRACE RESULT] menu key. When selected, the "TRACE EXECUTION" screen is closed and the
"TRACE RESULT" screen is displayed. (Refer to " Trace Result Display" for details.)

(7) Trace status display

When trace status is being monitored, the button displays [Suspend monitor]. To stop monitoring, click the button.
When not monitoring, the button displays [Start monitor]. To start monitoring, click the button.
[Trace] within [Trace status] includes the following four display items.
- Executing: Trace is being executed.
- Suspended: Trace has been stopped.
- Execution failed: Trace is not executed.
- Finished: Trace has been completed.

(8) Repetition count display

This displays the number of tracing repetitions. Count "0" means that no trace has been completed.
(Counts up to 65535.)

(9) Close the popup screen.

(a) Press the [CLOSE] menu key or the menu key.
When the screen is closed, trace status monitoring is stopped.

IV - 174
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 Sampling Trace

10.3.7 Trace Result Display

After trace execution, the collected trace result can be displayed in chronological order. Also, the output result can be
output to an external device in the CSV file format.

The bit device (contact/coil) trace result is displayed on the upper part of a screen.
Device display area Variation of device is displayed chronologically, regarding the trigger position as the base point
(0).
Bit device COUNT Trace count at the cursor position in the bit device display section is displayed.
TIME Trace time (hour, min., sec.) at the cursor position in the bit device display section is displayed.
Display scale (display trace count) can be changed within the following range.
DISP. UNITS
10 (default), 20, 50, 100
The word device (current value) is displayed on the lower part of a screen.Variation of value
Device display area
is displayed chronologically, regarding the trigger position as the base point (0).
COUNT Trace count at the cursor position in the word device display section is indicated.
Trace time (hour, min., sec.) at the cursor position in the word device display section is
TIME
Word indicated.
device 16-bit in decimal (Default)
16-bit in hexadecimal
32-bit in decimal
DISP. UNITS
32-bit in hexadecimal
Note) In order to realize a 32-bit display, upper/lower level devices must be set in the trace
data.
Move the cursor between bit device display area and word device display area. On the screen
DEVICE CHANGE
where the cursor exists, the details of result can be scrolled.
Change the display unit of the screen at the cursor position in the bit device or word device
DISP. UNITS
display area.
Adjust the display position of one screen (ex. Word device display area) based on the cursor
ADJUST POSITION
position of the screen where the cursor exists (ex. Bit device display area).
LINE CHANGE (UP) Move the device at the cursor position in the bit device or word device display area upward.
LINE CHANGE
Move the device at the cursor position in the bit device or word device display area downward.
(DOWN)
Common
Move the display position to one screen page left from the screen at the cursor position in the
PAGE LEFT FEED
bit device or word device display area.
Move the display position to one screen page right from the screen at the cursor position in
PAGE RIGHT FEED
the bit device or word device display area.
Move the display result of the screen at the cursor position in the bit device or word device
LEFT SCROLL
display area to the left for one trace amount.
Move the display result of the screen at the cursor position in the bit device or word device
RIGHT SCROLL
display area to the right for one trace amount.
CREATE CSV FILE The trace result can be output to an external file in the CSV format.
(Note 1) Trace data (trace condition + trace result) is discarded by turning the NC power OFF.
(Note 2) When repetition of the execution is enabled, the trace result will display the data of the latest tracing, if any.

IV - 175
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

(1) Displaying the "TRACE RESULT" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" →　[DEVICE] → [SAMPLING TRACE] → [TRACE RESULT] menu. When selected, the "TRACE
RESULT" popup screen will appear.

(2) Switching cursor between bit device and word device

(a) Press the [DEVICE CHANGE] menu. When the [DEVICE CHANGE] menu is pressed, the cursor on the screen
moves in turn between bit device section and word device section.

(3) Move the result in the bit device section and word device section vertically.
(a) Move the cursor to a desired screen with the [DEVICE CHANGE] menu.
(b)Move the cursor up and down with the [ ↑ ] / [ ↓ ] key. The screen is scrolled up/down according to the cursor
movement.
(c) Press the [PAGE UP] / [PAGE DOWN] key to move one page up/down.

(4) Move the result in the bit device section and word device section horizontally.
(a) Move the cursor to a desired screen with the DEVICE CHANGE menu.
(b) Move the cursor right and left with the [←] / [→] key. The screen is shifted to the right/left according to the cursor
movement.
(c) Press the [PAGE LEFT FEED] / [PAGE RIGHT FEED] menu to move one page to the right/left.

(5) Move the result of bit device and word device for the amount of one trace data.
(a) Move the cursor to a desired screen with the [DEVICE CHANGE] menu.
(b) Press the [LEFT SCROLL] / [RIGHT SCROLL] menu.

(6) Switching the display unit

(a) Move the cursor to a desired screen with the [DEVICE CHANGE] menu.
(b) Press the [DISP.UNITS] menu. Display unit is changed in turn.

IV - 176
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 Sampling Trace

(7) Align the bit device display position with the word device display position.
(a) Select the [DEVICE CHANGE] menu. When selected, the bit device display position and the word device display
position can be aligned based on the cursor position in the currently selected table.

Data at the cursor position is displayed.

(8) Switch orders of devices in the list

(a) Move the cursor to a desired screen with the [DEVICE CHANGE] menu.
(b) Place the cursor at the device position to which you wish to move.
(c) Press the [LINE CHANGE (UP)] menu key to move one line up; press the [LINE CHANGE (DOWN)] menu key
to move one line down.

(9) Output the trace result to an external device in the CSV format.
(a) Select the [CREATE CSV FILE] menu. When selected, the "CREATE CSV FILE" popup screen will appear.
Refer to " Creating CSV File" for details.

(10) Close the "TRACE RESULT" screen.

(a) Select the [CLOSE] menu key or the menu key. When selected, the "TRACE RESULT" popup screen will
appear.

IV - 177
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

10.3.8 Creating CSV File

Trace result can be output to an external device (IC card, etc.) in the CSV format.

(1) Displaying the "CREATE CSV FILE" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" →　[DEVICE] → [SAMPLING TRACE] → [TRACE RESULT] → [CREATE CSV FILE] menu.
When selected, the "CREATE CSV FILE" popup screen will appear.

(2) Displaying the "BROWSE" screen

(a) Select "MAIN"→ [DEVICE] →[SAMPLING TRACE] → [TRACE RESULT] → [CREATE CSV FILE] →[BROWSE]
menu. When selected, the "BROWSE" popup screen will appear.
* If no path is set, set the route of the drive which runs the onboard as the path.
* When the "BROWSE" screen is displayed for the first time after starting the onboard, the same path as that of the
external project will be the default path. Once a path has been set on the "BROWSE" screen, the set path will
be the default path.

IV - 178
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 Sampling Trace

(3) Specifying the CSV file output destination

(a) Select the [BROWSE] menu. When selected, the "BROWSE" popup screen will appear and the path and file of
the output destination can be specified.
(b) The drive and path of the output destination is selected on the "BROWSE" popup screen.
(c) File name is directly input by selecting the [FILE] menu on the "BROWSE" popup screen.
*Characters that can be used for a file name are as follows.

Item Restrictions on input characters

8 one-byte alphanumerical characters only. (Two-byte characters are prohibited.) (Signs and
File name
space codes cannot be used.)
(d) Select the [SETTING] menu on the "BROWSE" popup screen. When selected, the specified drive/path and file
name are verified and the "BROWSE" popup screen is closed.
* When the [CANCEL] menu or the menu is selected on the "BROWSE" popup screen, the specified drive/path
and file name will be disabled.
* When the set file name is illegal, an error appears. (The "BROWSE" screen will not be closed at this time.)

(4) Specifying the device storage method

(a) When outputting in CSV, data alignment (vertical or horizontal) can be specified.
(b) Press the "DEVICE STORAGE METHOD" menu. When selected, vertical or horizontal way of device storage
method can be changed.

(5) Creating the CVS file

(a) Select the [EXECUTE] menu. When selected, the trace result data is created in the CSV file format with the
specified drive/path and file name.

When successfully created, the following popup screen is displayed.

*When a file already exists under the same name, a message confirming the overwriting of this file appears. If
selected "Yes", overwriting is executed.

IV - 179
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

10.3.9 File Input

Trace data created with the GX-Developer on the external device can be read into the onboard.

NC (Onboard) External device

GX-Developer project
Onboard
Input Onboard
Trace file
Trace file

Trace condition Trace count, trace point, trigger point, trace data, etc.
Input data
Trace result Trace data of bit device and word device
GX-Developer project's trace file or the trace file written with the onboard
File format
Note) Trace file format is differed between GX-Developer and onboard.

(Note 1) Trace data (trace condition + trace result) is discarded by turning the NC power OFF.
(Note 2) Input/output of trace file is not possible during trace.
(Note 3) Trace file created with the GX-Developer cannot be read if the trace file includes the trace conditions that are
not supported by the MITSUBISHI CNC.

(1) Displaying the "SAMPLING FILE (READ FILE)" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → [DEVICE] → [SAMPLING TRACE] → [READ FILE] menu. When selected, the "SAMPLING
TRACE (READ FILE)" popup screen will appear.

(2) Inputting the sampling trace file

(a) Select the [SELECT PROJECT] menu and select the project to which sampling trace data is read. Refer to "
Selecting Project" for details.
If a project has been opened already by the external file operation "OPEN PROJECT" or "SAVE PROJECT", that
project will serve as the default project.
(b) Select the [TRACE FILE NAME] menu. When selected, the cursor is move to the file name section.
(c) Press the [ ↑ ] / [ ↓ ] key and specify the sampling trace file name to be input.
(d) Select the [EXECUTE] menu. When selected, the specified sampling trace file is read into the onboard. After
reading, "SAMPLING TRACE (READ FILE)" screen is closed.

(3) Stop the file input and close the popup screen.
(a) Press the menu key. Writing of file will not be executed.

IV - 180
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 Sampling Trace

10.3.10 File Output

Trace data created with the onboard can be saved into the external device in the GX-Developer project format.

NC (Onboard) External device

GX-Developer project

Onboard Onboard
Output
Trace file Trace file

Trace condition Trace count, trace point, trigger point, trace data, etc.
Output data
Trace result Trace data of bit device and word device
File format Trace file that is unique to the onboard

(Note 1) Input/output o trace file is not possible during trace.

(Note 2) The trace file written with the onboard cannot be read with the GX-Developer.(There is no compatibility)

(1) Displaying the "SAMPLING TRACE (WRITE FILE)" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → [DEVICE] → [SAMPLING TRACE] → [WRITE FILE] menu. When selected, the "SAMPLING
TRACE (WRITE FILE)" popup screen will appear.

(2) Outputting the sampling trace file

(a) Select the [SELECT PROJECT ] menu and specify the project to be output. Refer to " Selecting Project" for
details.
If a project has been opened already by the external file operation "OPEN PROJECT" or "SAVE PROJECT",
that project will serve as the default project.
(b) Select the [TRACE FILE NAME] menu. When selected, the cursor moves to the file name field.
(c) Press the [ ↑ ] / [ ↓ ] key to specify the file name of the sampling trace to be output.
(d) Select the [TRACE TITLE] menu to directly input the title.
(e) Select the "EXECUTE" menu. When selected, output is executed with the specified project or trace file name.
When output is done, the "SAMPLING TRACE (WRITE FILE)" screen is closed.
*If a trace file with the same name already exists in the output destination project, confirmation of overwriting is
prompted before execution.
(3) Stop the file output and close the popup screen.
(a) Press the menu key. Reading of file will not be executed.

IV - 181
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

10.3.11 Deleting File

Trace data file on the external device can be deleted.

External device
NC (Onboard)

GX-Developer project

Onboard
Onboard
Trace file
Trace file


Trace condition Trace count, trace point, trigger point, trace data, etc.
Deletion data
Trace result Trace data of bit device and word device
File format Trace file output with the onboard

(Note 1) Only the trace file that has been output with the onboard can be deleted. Trace file created with the GX-
Developer cannot be deleted.

(1) Displaying the "SAMPLING TRACE (DELETE FILE)" screen

(a) Select "MAIN" → [DEVICE] → [SAMPLING TRACE] → [DELETE FILE] menu. When selected, the "SAMPLING
TRACE (DELETE FILE)" popup screen will appear.

(2) Deleting the sampling trace file

(a) Select the [SELECT PROJECT] menu to select the project from which the sampling data should be deleted.
Refer to " Selecting Project" for details.
If a project has been opened already by the external file operation "OPEN PROJECT" or "SAVE PROJECT",
that project will serve as the default project.
(b) Select the [TRACE FILE NAME] menu. When selected, the cursor is moved to the file name field.
(c) Press the [ ↑ ] / [ ↓ ] key and specify the sampling trace file name to be input.
(d) Select the [EXECUTE] menu. When selected, a screen confirming whether the specified sampling trace file is
OK to delete or not appears.

(e) If selected "YES" on the confirmation screen, deletion of trace file will be executed. If selected "NO", deletion will
not be executed. After the execution, the SAMPLING TRACE (DELETE FILE) screen will be closed.

(3) Stop the file deletion and close the popup screen.
(a) Press the menu key. File deletion will not be executed.

IV - 182
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
10.3 Sampling Trace

10.3.12 Selecting Project

A project for when the sampling trace file operation "READ FILE", "WRITE FILE", or "DELETE FILE" is executed can be
selected.

(1) Displaying the "SELECT PROJECT" screen

(a) This is displayed when "MAIN" → [DEVICE] → [SAMPLING TRACE] → [READ FILE] / [WRITE FILE]/[DELETE
FILE] → [SELECT PROJECT] menu is pressed.
*If no path is set, set the route of the drive which runs the onboard as the path.

(2) Selecting the project

(a) Select the [DRIVE] menu to specify the drive.
(b) Select the [SELECT PROJECT] → [LIST] menu to specify the project.By selecting the [DRIVE/PATH] menu, a
direct input is possible, as well, to specify the drive and path.
(c) Select the [PROJECT NAME] menu to specify the project name.
(d) Press the [SELECT] menu. When selected, the "SELECT PROJECT" screen will be closed.
*When the [CANCEL] menu is pressed, the "SELECT PROJECT" screen is closed without selecting a project.
* An error message appears if the specified project name is illegal. (The "SELECT PROJECT" screen will not be
closed at this time.)

(3) Stop the file deletion and close the popup screen.
(a) Press the menu key. File deletion will not be executed.

IV - 183
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Device Monitor Operations

IV - 184
 11
Setting the Parameters

IV - 185
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 Setting the Parameters

Parameters for controlling the PLC operation can be set.

These parameters are stored in the following data. Open the parameters onto the onboard with "OPEN" before starting.

Data type Data name

Parameter param

The parameters which can be set are shown below.

Parameter Outline
PROGRAM SETTING The execution order for executing multiple PLCs on the NC is designated.
COMMON POINTER
The common pointer settings for the multi-program method are displayed.
SETTING

"PARAM." screen (The screen is an example of M700 Series)

(1) Displaying the "PARAM." screen

Select "MAIN" and menu key. When selected, the "PARAM." screen will appear on the full screen.

IV - 186
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 Setting the Program

11.1 Setting the Program

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The execution order for executing multiple PLCs on the NC can be designated.
The execution order is registered under "EXE.ORDER" on the "PROGRAM SETTING" popup screen.
Refer to "PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION: PLC Processing Program: Multi-program Method"
or details on execution order.
The maximum number of programs that can be registered is shown in the table below.
Series Max. number
M700VW/M700/M700VS Series 30
M70V/M70/E70 Series 20

(Note 1) Open the parameter data and program to be set on the onboard editing area.
(Note 2) Do not register programs with the same name in the "EXE. ORDER" list.

IV - 187
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 Setting the Parameters

"PROGRAM SETTING" popup screen (In M700 Series)

High
↑
Execution order
↓

Low

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

"PROGRAM SETTING" screen (In M70V/M70/E70 Series)

High
↑
Execution
order
↓

Low

"PROGRAM SETTING" screen (In M700VS Series)

High
↑
Execution
order

↓
Low

IV - 188
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
11.1 Setting the Program

(1) Displaying the "PROGRAM SETTING" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → [PARAM.] and [PROGRAM SETTING] menu key. When selected, the "PROGRAM SETTING"
popup screen will appear, and the program execution order will appear in the "EXE. ORDER" list.

(2) Designating the program execution order

(a) Press the [EXE. ORDER] menu key. Move the cursor on the list of "EXE. ORDER" to the row of "PROGRAM
NAME".
(b) Press the "Input" menu key at the position where you wish to register. When the "Input" key is pressed, the list of
program opened in the onboard edit area is displayed.
(c) Select a program name to set from the list of program and press the "Input" key.
(d) Move the cursor on the list of "EXE. ORDER" to the row of "EXECUTION TYPE".
(e) Press the [INPUT] key at the position where you wish to register. When the [INPUT] key is pressed, the list of
execution type (SCAN (default), WAIT, INITIAL, LOW-SPEED) is displayed.
(f) Select a type to set from the list of execution type and press the "Input" key.
(g) Repeat the operation (a) to (f) and set the execution order of a program.
(h) Press the "SETTING END" button when all settings are completed.
*The changed contents will be discarded if the [SETTING END] button is not pressed.
(i) When the [SETTING END] button is pressed, the following popup screen appears.
When [YES] is selected, the parameter will be stored in the NC's temporary memory.
When [NO] is selected, the parameter will not be stored in the NC's temporary memory. (Note that the
parameter in the onboard edit area has been changed.)

(3) Inserting a line

(a) Press the [EXE. ORDER] menu key. Move the cursor on the "EXE. ORDER" list to the line to insert.
(b) Press the [INSERT LINE] menu key. The line at the cursor position in the "EXE. ORDER" list moves one step
down, and then a blank line will be inserted.
*If the maximum number of registerable programs has already been registered, a line cannot be inserted.
*The new settings will not be reflected in the parameter unless the [SETTING END] button is pressed.

(4) Deleting a line

(a) Press the [EXE. ORDER] menu key. Move the cursor on the "EXE. ORDER" list to the line to delete.
(b) Press the [DELETE LINE] menu key. The contents of the line at the cursor position in the "EXE. ORDER" list is
deleted.
*The new settings will not be reflected in the parameter unless the [SETTING END] button is pressed.

(5) Displaying the execution order details

(a) Select the [EXE. ORDER] menu key. The cursor can be moved up and down in the "EXE. ORDER" list to
confirm the details of numbers which are not displayed (No. 10 and following).

(6) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 189
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 Setting the Parameters

11.2 Common Pointer Setting

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The head P No. of the common pointer (which is used to call the sub-routine programs from all the programs) can be
changed.
Refer to "PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION: Detailed Explanation of Devices: Pointer P" for details on the common
pointer.

(Note 1) Set the common pointer within the range from P0 to P2047.
(Note 2) The head P No. of the common pointer is set to enable the program execution by the multi program method.
(Note 3) When executing the program with the conventional independent program method, leave it as blank and press
the "SET" button.
(Note 4) When using the multi-program method, if the COMMON POINTER NO. setting area is blank (no data is set), the
default value, P1800 and after, will be applied as the common pointer.

"COMMON POINTER SETTING" popup screen

(In M700 Series)

Menus corresponding to
popup screen

"COMMON POINTER SETTING" screen (In M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series)

(1) Displaying the "COMMON POINTER SETTING" popup screen

Move to "MAIN" → "PARAMETER" screen, then select the [COMMON POINTER SETTING] menu key. When
selected, "COMMON POINTER NO." popup screen will appear and the common pointer head P No. will be
displayed.
(2) Setting the common pointer
(a) Press the [COMMON POINTER No.] menu key. Enter the common pointer head P No.
(b) Press the [SET] menu key.
(c) When the [SET] button is pressed, the following popup screen appears.
When [YES] is selected, the parameter will be stored in the NC's temporary memory.
When [NO] is selected, the parameter will not be stored in the NC's temporary memory. (Note that the
parameter in the onboard edit area has been changed.)

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 190
 12
File Operations

IV - 191
MITSUBISHI CNC
12 File Operations

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○

In the onboard editing area, PLC data can be added, deleted and renamed, and also the initial settings can be made.

Function Outline
Standard operation mode This opens a new data in onboard editing area.
DATA NEW
M700VS/M70V/E70 Series This opens a new data in NC temporary memory area.
Standard operation mode This deletes PLC data in onboard editing area.
DATA DELETE
M700VS/M70V/E70 Series This deletes PLC data in NC temporary memory.
Standard operation mode This changes the name of the PLC data in the onboard editing area.
DATA RENAME
M700VS/M70V/E70 Series This changes the name of the PLC data in NC temporary memory area.
INITIAL. Standard operation mode This determines initial settings of onboard editing area.
(Note 1) The parameter data cannot be added, deleted or renamed.

"FILE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "FILE" popup screen.

Select Standard : "MAIN" → [PROJECT OPERATION]
M700VS/M70V/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [NC FILE]
and [FILE] menu key. When selected, the "FILE" popup screen will appear.

(2) Displaying the list data

(a) Select the [LIST] menu key.
(b) If there are many PLC data items which do not fit on one screen, move the cursor in the list to display them all.

(Supplement)
If the [DATA DELETE] or [DATA RENAME] menu key is selected after selecting data from the list, the data name
selected in the list will be set as the data name (old data name) in the respective popup screen.

IV - 192
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
12.1 Adding New Data

12.1 Adding New Data

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○

Open new data on the onboard editing area.

(Note 1) The newly added data should be saved with the operations given in "NC File Operations:Saving PLC Data in
Temporary Memory". After that, the data can be automatically updated to the temporary memory with the
"circuit conversion" operation.
(Note 2) Program and device comment data can be created. Parameters cannot be newly created. When creating
program data for a PLC message, refer to "PLC Data: Types of Data" and set the designated data name.
(Note 3) When there is no parameter data in the onboard editing area, default parameter data is created and used.
(Note 4) When the same name data already exists, a popup screen confirming an overwrite appears.

"DATA NEW" popup screen (In M700VW/M700 Series)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

"DATA NEW" popup screen (In M700VS/M70V/E70 Series)

IV - 193
MITSUBISHI CNC
12 File Operations

(1) Displaying the "DATA NEW" popup screen

Select Standard : "MAIN" → [PROJECT OPERATION]-> [EDIT DATA OPERATION] -> [DATA NEW]
M700VS/M70V/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [NC FILE]-> [FILE OPE.] -> [DATA NEW]
When selected, the "DATA NEW" popup menu will appear.

(2) Adding data

(a) When the [DATA NEW] menu key is selected, the "DATA NEW" popup screen will appear.
(b) Select the [DATA TYPE] menu key, and designate the data type (program or comment).(Standard mode only.)
(c) Select the [DATA NAME] menu key, and input the name of the data to be newly created.
(d) Select the "TITLE" menu key, and input the data title. (The title can be omitted.)

Item Limits to input characters

Data name 8 one-byte alphanumeric characters only (no full-byte characters)
Title 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters only (no full-byte characters)

(e) Select the [OK] menu. The "DATA NEW" popup menu will close, and the newly added PLC data will appear in
the data list on the "FILE" popup screen.

IV - 194
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
12.2 Deleting PLC Data

12.2 Deleting PLC Data

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○

PLC in the onboard editing area can be deleted. (The data in the temporary memory is not deleted.)

(Note 1) The program and device comment data can be deleted. Parameters cannot be deleted.

"DATA DELETE" popup screen (In M700VW/M700 Series)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

"DATA DELETE" popup screen (In M700VS/M70V/E70 Series)

(1) Displaying the "DATA DELETE" popup menu.

Select Standard : "MAIN" → [PROJECT OPERATION]
M700VS/M70V/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [NC FILE]
→ [FILE] and [DATA DELETE] menu key. When selected, the "DATA DELETE" popup menu will appear.

(2) Deleting PLC data

(a) When the [DATA DELETE] menu key is selected, the "DATA DELETE" popup screen will appear.
(b) Select the [DATA TYPE] menu key, and designate the data type (program or comment).
(c) Select the [DELETE DATA NAME] menu key, and designate the name of the data to be deleted. (Select the
name of the data from the list on [PROJECT OPERATION] screen to set it automatically.)
(d) Select the [OK] menu. The "DATA DELETE" popup menu will close, and the designated data will be deleted
from the data list on the "FILE" popup screen.

IV - 195
MITSUBISHI CNC
12 File Operations

12.3 Renaming the PLC Data

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○

The PLC data in the onboard editing area can be renamed.

(Note 1) After renaming the data, save it once with the operations explained in "NC File Operations: Saving PLC Data in
Temporary Memory". After that, the data can be automatically updated to the temporary memory with the
"circuit conversion" operation.
(Note 2) Program and device comment data can be renamed. Parameters cannot be renamed.
(Note 3) The name cannot be changed to an existing name. Delete the existing name before designating it as a new
name.

" DATA RENAME " popup screen (In M700VW/M700 Series)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

"DATA RENAME" popup screen (In M700VS/M70V/E70 Series)

(1) Displaying the "DATA RENAME" popup screen

Select Standard : "MAIN" → [PROJECT OPERATION]
M700VS/M70V/E70 Series: "MAIN" → [NC FILE]
→ [FILE] and [DATA RENAME] menu key. When selected, the "DATA RENAME" popup menu will appear.

IV - 196
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
12.3 Renaming the PLC Data

(2) Renaming the data

(a) When the [DATA RENAME] menu key is selected, the "DATA RENAME" popup screen will appear.
(b) Select the [DATA TYPE] menu key, and designate the data type.
(c) Select the [OLD NAME] menu key, and designate the old data name. (Select the name of the data from the list
on [PROJECT OPERATION] screen to set it automatically(for M700VS/M70V/E70 Series, designate it from
the list of [PROJECT OPERAION] screen).)
(d) Select the [NEW NAME] menu key, and designate the new data name.
(e) Select the [TITLE] menu key, and input the new data title. (The title can be omitted.)

Item Limits to input characters

New data name 8 one-byte alphanumeric characters only (no full-byte characters)
Title 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters only (no full-byte characters)
*"COMMENT" cannot be used for the device comment's data name.
(f) Select the [OK] menu. The "DATA RENAME" popup window will close, and the designated data name will be
changed in the data list on the "FILE" popup screen.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 197
MITSUBISHI CNC
12 File Operations

12.4 Initialization
M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

Initialize the onboard editing area.

When initialization is completed, the following PLC data will be created in the onboard editing area.

Data type Data name Details

PROGRAM MAIN User PLC (ladder) program containing only END instruction is created.
PC parameters (for PC parameter data set to the default value (program settings are not
PARAM.
Japanese) registered) is created.

* The device comment data is not created.

(Note 1) This function is an initial setting carried out to create new PLC (ladders) with the onboard.
(Note 2) The data created with initialization is located in the onboard editing area.
(Note 3) After creating the data with initialization, save it once with the operations explained in "NC File
operations:Saving PLC Data in Temporary Memory". After that, the data can be automatically updated to the
temporary memory with the "circuit conversion" operation.

"INITIAL" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "INITIAL" popup screen

Select "MAIN" [PROJECT OPERATION] → [FILE] and [INITIAL] menu keys. When selected, the "INITIAL" popup
screen will appear at the center of the screen.

(2) Initialization
(a) Confirm the displayed message.
(b) Select the [YES] menu key to initialize.
Select the [NO] menu key to cancel the initialization.
*The popup window automatically closes when the [YES] or [NO] menu key is pressed.
(c) If [YES] is selected and initialization is completed, the data created with initialization will appear in the list on the
"FILE" screen.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 198
 13
NC File Operations

IV - 199
MITSUBISHI CNC
13 NC File Operations

The NC PLC can be RUN or STOP, the PLC data in the temporary memory can be read, written or verified, and the data
can be written to the ROM.
Note that functions involving ladder editing or rewriting cannot be used unless the password is completed. (The buttons
corresponding to the function are displayed in gray and are disabled.)
Input the password on the NC "MAINTE" screen to release the password.

M700VW/M700 M700VS
Function Outline M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
OPEN The PLC data is opened from the temporary memory. ○ ○ *1 ○ *1 ○ *1
SAVE The edited PLC data is saved in the temporary memory. ○ ○ *2 ○ *2 ○ *2
The PLC program in the onboard editing area is verified with the
VERIFY
PLC program in the temporary memory. ○

ROM WRITE The PLC data in the temporary memory is written to the ROM. ○ ○ ○ ○
DELETE The PLC data in the temporary memory is deleted. ○ ○ ○ *3 ○
FORMAT The temporary memory is formatted. ○ ○ ○ ○
PLC RUN/STOP The PLC RUN/STOP state can be controlled. ○ ○ ○ ○
PROGRAM UPDATE The temporary memory and ROM ladder versions are upgraded. ○ ○
LIST The list of file size is displayed. ○ ○ ○

*1 Automatically executed at startup.

*2 Automatically executed at conversion. Not exist in the menu.
*3 Available at data deleting in file operation.

"NC FILE" popup screen

(The screen is an example of M700 Series)

(1) Displaying the "NC FILE" screen

Select "MAIN" and the [NC FILE] menu key. When selected, the "NC FILE" screen will appear on the full screen.

(2) Operation during NC communication

A progress bar appears and shows "Reading..." while data is being exchanged between the onboard and NC.

IV - 200
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
13.1 Opening PLC Data from the Temporary Memory

13.1 Opening PLC Data from the Temporary Memory

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ Automatic ○ ○

The PLC data can be opened from the temporary memory to the onboard where it can be edited and monitored and the
parameters edited.

(Note 1) PLC data read in from the temporary memory and PLC data read in from an external device can both be
displayed in the onboard editing area.
(Note 2) If there is no PLC data in the temporary memory, the list will be blank, and the [OPEN] button will be displayed
in gray.
(Note 3) When opening parameter data, parameter in the onboard editing area is used if no parameter data had been
selected. If there is no parameter data in the onboard editing area, default parameter data is created and used.

"OPEN" popup screen (The screen is an example of M700 Series)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

"OPEN" screen (The screen is an example of M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series)

IV - 201
MITSUBISHI CNC
13 NC File Operations

(1) Displaying the "OPEN" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → [NC FILE] and the [OPEN] menu key. When selected, the "OPEN" popup screen will appear at the
center of the screen.

(2) Opening the PLC data

(a) Select the PLC data to be edited from the list. Invalidate the check for data which is not to be opened.
(Note 1) In M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series, these check boxes are all invalidated by default.
(b) After selecting the data, select the [OPEN] menu key. The selected PLC data will be read on the onboard.
* If data with the same name exists, an overwrite confirmation popup screen will appear. Select the operation to be
taken.

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(4) SEL. ALL/CANCEL

Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for all the data in the list.

(5) SELECT PARAM. + PROG.

Makes the parameters and program data in the list selectable.
PLC message data is not selected at this time.
(Example)

IV - 202
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
13.1 Opening PLC Data from the Temporary Memory

(6) SELECT/CANCEL
Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.
"SP (space)" key can also be used for this operation.
When the listed data with a checkbox is not selected, no process occurs.
(Example)
- When data is selected

- When data is not selected

(7) PLC MESSAGE

Makes the PLC messages in the list selectable.

IV - 203
MITSUBISHI CNC
13 NC File Operations

(8) Setting the storage destination of device comment

When the device comment storage destination is set to the location other than NC temporary memory, DEVICE
COMMENT displays the status of the folders that were designated in "DevCom Storage Dest.".
Refer to "Environment Setting: NC File Operations:Setting the Storage Destination of Device Comment" for details.
(Example) When device comment storage destination is specified

IV - 204
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
13.2 Saving PLC Data to the Temporary Memory

13.2 Saving PLC Data to the Temporary Memory

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ Automatic Automatic Automatic

PLC data edited or monitored, or for which the parameters were edited on the onboard, can be saved in the temporary
memory.

(Note 1) The PLC data in the temporary memory is lost when the NC power is turned OFF. Refer to " Writing the
Temporary Memory's PLC Data to the ROM", and always save the data on the ROM. The message "ROM-
Write incomplete" appears in the message area until the data is saved in the ROM.
(Note 2) If there is no PLC data in the onboard editing area, the list will be blank, and the [SAVE] button will be
displayed in gray.
(Note 3) Save is not possible in the temporary memory during PLC RUN. (An error message appears.)
When PLC is in RUN, a message appears to confirm whether to stop PLC to save the data.
When PLC is not stopped, the PLC data cannot be saved in the temporary memory. (An error will appear.)
After successfully saved, a message confirming whether to have PLC returned to the RUN state is displayed.
(Note that, however, if saving to the temporary memory is executed during PLC STOP, this message will not be
displayed.)
(Note 4) The program data saved in the temporary memory operates in the automatic update mode with white
background of LADDER screen.

"SAVE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "SAVE" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → [NC FILE] and the [SAVE] menu key. When selected, the "SAVE" popup screen will appear at the
center of the screen. All of the checks for the PLC data in the onboard editing area will be validated in the "List".
(2) Saving the PLC data in the temporary memory
(a) Select the PLC data to be saved from the list. Invalidate the check for data which is not to be saved.
(b) After selecting the data, select the [SAVE] menu key. The PLC data edited on the onboard will be saved in the
temporary memory.
* When the data is saved in the temporary memory with this function, the "ROM-Write incomplete" message will
appear. Refer to " Writing the Temporary Memory's PLC Data to the ROM", and always save the data on the
ROM.
* If data with the same name exists, an overwrite confirmation popup screen will appear. Select the operation to
be taken.

IV - 205
MITSUBISHI CNC
13 NC File Operations

(3) Displaying the NC free space volume

Select the [FREE SPACE VOLUME] menu key. The free space volume in the temporary memory will appear.

(4) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(5) SEL. ALL/CANCEL

Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for all the data in the list.

(6) SELECT PARAM. + PROG.

Makes the parameters and program data in the list selectable.

(7) SELECT/CANCEL
Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.

(8) Device comment storage destination setting

When the device comment storage destination is set to the location other than NC temporary memory, DEVICE
COMMENT displays the status of the folders that were designated in "DevCom Storage Dest.".
Refer to "Setting the Storage Destination of Device Comment" for details.
(Example) When device comment storage destination is specified

(9) EXECUTE STEP

The "EXECUTE STEP" screen is displayed.
In this screen, NC's execution area size (number of steps) is displayed.

IV - 206
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
13.3 Verifying with the PLC Data in the Temporary Memory

13.3 Verifying with the PLC Data in the Temporary Memory

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○

The PLC data (programs) in the onboard editing area can be verified with the PLC data (program) in the temporary
memory.

(Note 1) Only programs can be verified. (Device comments and parameters cannot be verified.)
(Note 2) Multiple programs cannot be verified simultaneously. (Always verify the programs one at a time.)
(Note 3) When there is no PLC data in either the onboard editing area or temporary memory, the list becomes blank and
the "EXECUTE" button is displayed in gray.
(Note 4) Drive selection is available for M700VW Series and M700 Series (when the display module's OS is Windows
XP).

" VERIFY PROJECT " popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "VERIFY PROJECT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → [NC FILE] and the [VERIFY PROJECT] menu key. When selected, the "VERIFY PROJECT"
popup screen will appear at the center of the screen.

(2) Verifying a PLC program

(a) Select the PLC data (program) to be verified from the VERIFY SRC. (EDIT PLC) and VERIFY DEST. (NC) lists.
Multiple data items cannot be selected. (Select only one data item.)
(b) Select the "VERIFY" menu key. The selected PLC data (programs) will be verified, and the results will be
displayed in the "VERIFY RESULT PROGRAM" popup screen.

(3) Designating the verification step range

(a) Select the [STEP TOP] menu key, and designate the head step No. of the verification range.
(b) Select the [STEP END] menu key, and designate the end step No. of the verification range.
* The entire range will be verified if [STEP TOP] and [STEP END] are set to 0.

IV - 207
MITSUBISHI CNC
13 NC File Operations

(4) Displaying the verification results

(a) When the PLC data is verified, the "VERIFY RESULT PROGRAM" popup screen will appear.
(b) Confirm the verification results, and revise the PLC data (program).
* This cannot jump to the verification results program in the same manner as GX Developer.

"VERIFY RESULT PROGRAM" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(5) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(6) SELECT/CANCEL
Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.

IV - 208
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
13.4 Writing PLC Data in Temporary Memory to ROM

13.4 Writing PLC Data in Temporary Memory to ROM

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The PLC data in the temporary memory can be written to the ROM. The data in the temporary memory, including the
date data, is copied to the ROM.

(Note 1) The data in the temporary memory is lost when the NC power is turned OFF, so always save the data in the
ROM.
(Note 2) The PLC data in the onboard editing area cannot be written directory to the ROM.
(Note 3) When the temporary memory is formatted (in the state where date of creation is not obtained), an error appears
and the "YES" button is displayed in gray.
(Note 4) The date displayed on the "ROM WRITE" screen is the date that the PLC data was last saved in the temporary
memory. The ROM date is also the date that the PLC data was last saved in the temporary memory.

"ROM WRITE" popup screen (The screen is an example of M700 Series)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "ROM WRITE" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → [NC FILE] and the [ROM WRITE] menu key. When selected, the "ROM WRITE" popup screen will
appear at the center of the screen.

(2) ROM-Write operations

Select the [YES] button. Select the [NO] menu key to cancel the operation.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 209
MITSUBISHI CNC
13 NC File Operations

13.5 Deleting the PLC Data from the Temporary Memory

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The PLC data in the temporary memory can be deleted.

(Note 1) If there is no PLC data in the temporary memory, the list will be blank, and the [DELETE] button will be
displayed in gray.
(Note 2) PLC data in the temporary memory cannot be deleted during PLC RUN. (An error message appears.)
When PLC is in RUN, a message appears to confirm whether to stop PLC to delete the data.
When PLC is not stopped, the PLC data in the temporary memory cannot be deleted. (An error will appear.)
A message confirming whether to return the PLC to RUN state will be displayed after deletion is completed.
(Note that when PLC data in the temporary memory is deleted during PLC STOP, a message confirming
whether to return to the RUN state will not be displayed.)
(Note 3) When the program in automatic update mode is deleted, the mode will be changed to local editing mode
(LADDER screen background is blue) in M700VW/M700 Series.

"DELETE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "DELETE" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → [NC FILE] and the [DELETE] menu key. When selected, the "DELETE" popup screen will appear
at the center of the screen.

(2) Deleting the PLC data

(a) Select the PLC data to be deleted from the list of PLC data. Several data items can be selected.
(b) Press the "DELETE" menu key. When selected, the PLC data will be deleted.
* The deleted PLC data will also be deleted from the list.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 210
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
13.5 Deleting the PLC Data from the Temporary Memory

(4) SEL. ALL/CANCEL

Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for all the data in the list.

(5) SELECT PARAM. + PROG.

Makes the parameters and program data in the list selectable.

(6) SELECT/CANCEL
Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.

(7) Device comment storage destination setting

When the device comment storage destination is set to the location other than NC temporary memory, the listed
files display the status of the folders that were designated as storage destinations.
Refer to "Environment Setting: NC File Operations:Setting the Storage Destination of Device Comment" for details.
(Example) When device comment storage destination is specified

IV - 211
MITSUBISHI CNC
13 NC File Operations

13.6 Formatting the Temporary Memory

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The temporary memory can be formatted (cleared of data).

(Note 1) The PLC data in the temporary memory is deleted when format is executed.
(Note 2) The temporary memory cannot be formatted during PLC RUN. (An error will appear.)
(Note 3) The mode in which a program is displayed changes from automatic update mode to local editing mode
(LADDER screen background is light blue).

"FORMAT" popup screen (The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

"FORMAT" popup screen (The screen is an example of M70 Series)

"FORMAT" popup screen (The screen is an example of M700VX/M70V/E70 Series)

(1) Displaying the "FORMAT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → [NC FILE] and the [FORMAT] menu key. When selected, the "FORMAT" popup screen will appear
at the center of the screen.

(2) Formatting operations

(a) Check the displayed message.
(b) Select the [YES] menu key to format the temporary memory.
Select the [NO] menu key to cancel the operation.
* The popup window automatically closes when the [YES] or [NO] menu key is pressed.

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(4) Creating the default data after formatting (M700VS/M70V/E70 Series only)
(a) Select "MAIN" -> [NC FILE] and the [FORMAT] menu key to display the "FORMAT" popup screen. When
selected, [FORMAT] screen will appear.
(b) Select [DEFAULT DATA] menu key and select whether to create the default data.
(c) Press [YES] menu key to format the temporary memory.
* The popup window automatically closes when the [YES] menu key is pressed.

IV - 212
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
13.7 Controlling the PLC RUN/STOP

13.7 Controlling the PLC RUN/STOP

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
The PLC can be run or stopped.
The popup menu that appears changes according to the PLC RUN/STOP state. (The menu key correspondence is the
same.)

"PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen (The screen is an example of M700 Series)

During PLC RUN During PLC STOP

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen

PLC RUN/STOP is carried out frequently, so the operations are carried out with the following menus.
[Standard operation mode]
- "MAIN" → [NC FILE] [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key
- "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [EDIT] menu [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key
- "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [MONITOR] menu [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key
- "MAIN" → [DEVICE] → "DEVICE BATCH MONITOR" screen [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key
- "MAIN" → [DEVICE] → "ENTRY DEVICE" screen [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key
[Simple operation mode]
- "MAIN" → [NC FILE] [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key
- "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR] [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key
[M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series]
- "MAIN" → [NC FILE] [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key
- "MAIN" → [EXTERNAL FILE] [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key
- "MAIN" → [LADDER MONITOR] [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key
- "MAIN" → [LADDER EDIT] [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key
- "MAIN" → [LADDER] → "DEVICE BATCH" screen [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key
When selected, the "PLC RUN/STOP" popup screen will appear at the center of the screen.

(2) PLC STOP

(a) If the [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key is pressed during PLC RUN, the "STOP" popup screen will appear.
(b) When the [YES] menu key is selected, PLC STOP is executed, and the popup screen closes.
(c) When the [NO] menu key is selected, nothing takes place.

(3) PLC RUN

(a) If the [PLC RUN/STOP] menu key is pressed during PLC STOP, the "RUN" popup screen will appear.
(b) When the [YES] menu key is selected, PLC RUN is executed, and the popup screen closes.
(c) When the [NO] menu key is selected, nothing takes place.

(4) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

IV - 213
MITSUBISHI CNC
13 NC File Operations

13.8 Updating the PLC Version (Maintenance Function)

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○

This function is used for maintenance. The following existing functions are carried out in a batch.

(1) The ladders are read out from the external device (IC card).

(2) The read ladders are saved in the NC's temporary memory.

(3) The data saved in the NC's temporary memory is written to the ROM.
(Note 1) Only programs, device comments and parameters that already exist in the NC can be upgraded. (A
different program, device comment and parameter cannot be written to the NC.)
(Note 2) When PLC is in RUN, a message appears to confirm whether to stop PLC to upgrade the ladder.
When PLC is not stopped, ladder cannot be upgraded. (An error will appear.)
A message confirming whether to return the PLC to RUN state will be displayed after upgrading of the
ladder is completed.
(Note that when the ladder is upgraded during PLC STOP, a message confirming whether to return to the
RUN state will not be displayed.)
(Note 3) This function cannot be used unless the password is released. (The [PROGRAM UPDATE] menu button
will be displayed in gray.)
(Note 4) If there is no ladder file in the external device's "\lad" folder, "LIST" will be displayed blank and the "YES"
and "LIST" button will appear in gray.
(Note 5) Among the PLC data to be upgraded, the data stored in project format is given priority.
(Note 6) When the device comment storage destination is specified as "storage destination specified", the device
comment of the specified path will be the one to be upgraded.

IV - 214
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
13.8 Updating the PLC Version (Maintenance Function)

13.8.1 Storing the Upgraded Data

The upgrading PLC data (program, device comment, parameter) can be stored in the following 2 ways.

- Method to store program, device comment and parameter within the same fixed file
- Method to store in the project format

(1) Method to store program, device comment and parameter within the same fixed file
The upgrading data must be stored in the external device (IC card) \lad folder (folder name is fixed).
* If there is data stored in the project format, that data shall be given priority.

[IC CARD]
+%㧔)㧕
NCF
LAD1.wgp
LAD2.wgp
Program
LAD3.wgp
comm1.wcd
comm2.wcd Device comment
comm3.wcd
param.wpa Parameter

(2) Method to store in the project format

The upgrading PLC project folder (plcproj (folder name is fixed)) must be stored in the external device (IC card) \lad
folder (folder name is fixed).

[IC CARD]

IC (G: )
lad PLC project folder (name is fixed)
plcproj
Project.inf
Gppw.gp
Gppw.gpj
ProjectDB.mdb
Resource
Param.wp
Pou

Body
lad1.wgp
lad2.wgp
lad3.wgp
Others
comm1.wc
comm2.wc
comm3.wc

IV - 215
MITSUBISHI CNC
13 NC File Operations

13.8.2 PLC VERSION UP Screen

(1) When the storage destination of device comment is specified as "NC temporary memory":

Menu corresponding to the

popup screen

(2) When the storage destination of device comment is specified as "storage destination specified":

Version up
destination will be
the device comment
specified as the
storage destination.

Menu corresponding to the

popup screen

IV - 216
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
13.8 Updating the PLC Version (Maintenance Function)

13.8.3 Operations of This Function

(1) Displaying the "PLC VERSION UP" popup screen
(a) Select "MAIN" → [NC FILE] screen → [PLC VERSION UP] menu key. When selected, the "PLC VERSION UP"
popup screen will appear at the center of the screen.
*At this time, the program, device comment and parameter to be upgraded will be displayed in "LIST".

(2) Upgrading the ladder version

(a) Select the [LIST] menu key, and select the PLC data to be upgraded from the list. The checks are validated as
the default, so invalidate the check for the ladder not to be upgraded.
The check can be validated only for the program, device comment and parameter stored in the NC ROM and
external device's \lad folder.
(b) Select the [YES] menu key. The "PLC VERSION UP" popup screen will close, and the ladder version upgrading
will start.
The following popup screen appear in sequence during ladder version upgrading.

Start of program transmission to NC

The device is being checked.

Transmission of programs to NC
The programs are being written.

The programs are written to the NC

ROM.

Overwrite and save was completed

normally.

Select the "OK" menu key to return to the "NC FILE" screen

(3) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(4) SEL.ALL/CANCEL
Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for all the data in the list.

(5) SELECT/CANCEL
Switches valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.

IV - 217
MITSUBISHI CNC
13 NC File Operations

13.9 Keyword
M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

Keyword is used to protect the sequence programs stored in CNC. Data is protected from being read or overwritten by
GX Developer or with the onboard PLC edit function.
A keyword protects a whole range of data. Only the files with particular names can be free from the keyword protection.
Only GX Developer can register and cancel the keyword. Onboard is used only to disable the keyword temporarily. For
details of the keyword function, refer to "PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT: Keyword Registration" in the
section "III. PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT".
The following two ways are available to disable the keyword.
- Disabling the keyword on the KEYWORD screen
- Disabling the keyword as required at the read or write operation.

IV - 218
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
13.9 Keyword

13.9.1 Disabling the Keyword on the KEYWORD Screen

The KEYWORD screen can be used to disable the keyword.

(1) Displaying the "KEYWORD" popup screen

Select "MAIN" [NC FILE] and the [KEYWORD] menu key. The "KEYWORD" popup screen will appear.

The details of the display of "Keyword Status" on this screen are as follows.
- "------" : Status is uncertain. (No keyword is disabled or registered.)
- "Disable keyword" : The keyword is being disabled.

(2) Disabling the keyword

Click the [DISABLE KEYWORD] menu key. The popup screen appears to input the keyword. Input the keyword and
click the [EXECUTE] menu key.

If the keyword is successfully disabled, "Keyword Status" is changed from "------" to "Disable keyword". If not, the
popup screen appears and shows the message "Keyword is not correct...".
(Note 1) Any "fictitious keyword" can also be disabled when no keyword is registered.

(3) Enabling the keyword

To undo the disabled keyword, click the [ENABLE KEYWORD] menu key. How to enable the keyword is different
for each series.
M700VW/M700 Series:
End the onboard. The onboard can be ended from the main menu. The keyword runs again with "enabled"
status after the usual onboard start-up. Turning the power OFF and ON also returns the status to "enabled".
M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series:
Restart the onboard to return the keyword status to "enabled". Turning the power OFF and ON also returns the
status to "enabled".
(Note 1) If the screen is changed to the CNC setting and display screen without the keyword enabled, the keyword
stays disabled as long as the power is turned OFF and ON or the keyword is enabled again on onboard.

(4) Reading the programs again

When a keyword is set for the read protection, the onboard in M700VW/M700 Series simple mode or in M700VS/
M70V/M70/E70 Series does not read the sequence programs at its start-up. Disable the keyword and then click the
[PROGRAM RELOAD] menu key in this case. The onboard restarts with the keyword disabled.

IV - 219
MITSUBISHI CNC
13 NC File Operations

13.9.2 Disabling the Keyword as Required at the Read or Write Operation

If the prohibited operation is attempted to the protected data, the popup screen appears and requires disabling the
keyword.

Input the keyword and click the [EXECUTE] menu key. The operation continues after the keyword has been successfully
disabled.
The keyword, once disabled, stays disabled until any operation enables it.
The following popup screen appears when the keyword has not been disabled.

IV - 220
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
13.10 File List

13.10 File List

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○

The file list is displayed.

Three types of display are provided.

(1) FILE LIST

The "FILE SIZE DISPLAY" screen will appear.
(2) EXECUTE STEP
The "FILE SIZE DISPLAY" screen will appear. This menu is used to check the execution area size.
(3) FREE SPACE VOLUME
The "FILE SIZE DISPLAY" screen will appear.

IV - 221
MITSUBISHI CNC
13 NC File Operations

IV - 222
 14
Project Operation/External File Operations

IV - 223
MITSUBISHI CNC
14 Project Operation/External File Operations

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The PLC data can be opened from, s aved to and verified with GX Developer projects in the external device, and projects
can be deleted.

M700VW/M700 M700VS
FUNCTION Outline M70V M70
Standard Simple E70
OPEN PROJECT This opens PLC data of the project from an external device. ○ ○ ○ ○
SAVE PROJECT This saves the edited PLC data in an external device. ○ ○ ○ ○
DELETE PROJECT This deletes the projects in an external device. ○ ○ ○ ○
This verifies the PLC data being edited with that in an external
VERIFY PROJECT
device. ○ ○ ○ ○

Example of GX Developer project

M7onbd The folder name is the project name.

Resource Others xxxx.wcd

Resource POU Body xxxx.wpg
Resource param.wpa
Data in folder (M7onbd)
Gppw.wpj
gppw.wps
Project.inf

(Note) that the function name and some details of processing in simple operation mode differ from those in standard
operation mode.

Operation mode Function (menu) name Processing

Standard operation Processing between the external memory medium and the "editing area
Project operation
mode on onboard"
Processing between the external memory medium and the "temporary
Simple operation mode External file operation
memory area in NC"

- In standard operation mode:

Data is transferred between the "editing area on onboard" and the external memory medium. The data on the
editing area may not be "the same" with that is stored in NC.
To keep the same as those in NC, the transferred data must be opened and saved using "NC FILE" menu. When
the data in NC is opened, however, automatic update mode is entered and the edited data is automatically stored in
NC.

External device

Save project Open project

ROM Write Convert/ Save

-
Onboard
ROM area Temporary editing area

Copy when Open

power is turned
ON Ladder Edit and
NC execution monitor

IV - 224
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual

- In simple operation mode:

Data is transferred between the "temporary memory area in NC" and the external memory medium.
Data on the onboard is "always the same" as that in the NC data storage area.

External device

Save project Open project

ROM WRITE Auto saving

Onboard
ROM area Temporary editing area

Copy when Auto readout

power is turned
ON Ladder Edit and
NC execution monitor

(1) Displaying the "PROJECT OPERATION/ EXTERNAL FILE" screen

-In standard operation mode:
Select "MAIN" then "PROJECT OPERATION" menus. When selected, "PROJECT OPERATION" screen will
be displayed in full size.

-In simple operation mode:

Select "MAIN" then "EXTERNAL FILE" menus. When selected, "EXTERNAL FILE" screen will be displayed in
full size.

IV - 225
MITSUBISHI CNC
14 Project Operation/External File Operations

14.1 Opening PLC Data from a Project

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The PLC data for a GX Developer project can be opened from the external device.

(Note 1) PLC data read in from the temporary memory and PLC data read in from an external device can both be
displayed in the onboard editing area.
(Note 2) The [OPEN] button on the "OPEN PROJECT" popup screen is valid when the PLC data list is correctly read
with "SELECT PROJECT" operations.
(Note 3) Drive selection is available for M700VW Series and M700 Series (when the display module's OS is Windows
XP).
(Note 4) When opening parameter data, parameter in the onboard editing area is used if no parameter data had been
selected. If there is no parameter data in the onboard editing area, default parameter data is created and used.
(Note 5) SFC projected created with the GX-Developer, project of label program, and CPU with other than type Q4A
cannot be opened normally. (An error occurs.)
(Note 6) The common comment created with the GX-Developer, "COMMENT", cannot be used on the onboard.
(Note 7) In M700VW/M700 Series, a program opened from an external device will become the local edit mode.
(Note 8) Available external devices in M70/M70V/E70 Series are as follows.

Compact flash (CF) USB memory

M70 ○ ×
(FCA70P-2AV/FCA70P-4AV/FCA70H-4AV/FCA70P-2BV/
○ ×
M70V FCA70P-4BV/FCA70H-4BV)
Other than the above system type names ○ ○
E70 ○ ○

■ In M700VW/M700 Series Standard operation mode

"OPEN PROJECT" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

IV - 226
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
14.1 Opening PLC Data from a Project

(1) Displaying the "OPEN PROJECT" popup

Select "MAIN" → [PROJECT OPERATION] and the [OPEN PROJECT] menu key. When selected, the "OPEN
PROJECT" popup screen will appear at the center of the screen.

(2) Reading PLC data from an external device

(a) Press the [SELECT PROJECT] menu key. The "SELECT PROJECT" popup screen will open.
* The default drive is "D", and the path is "/(route)".

"SELECT PROJECT" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(b) Select the [DRIVE] menu key, and designate the drive.
(c) Select the [LIST] menu key, and designate the path of the PLC data displayed under "LIST".
* The drive and path can be directly designated with the [DRIVE/PATH] menu key.
(d) Select the [PROJECT NAME] menu key, and designate the name of the file (project) to be read in.
* Normally when selected from the list, this is automatically set.
(e) Select the [SELECT] menu key. The "SELECT PROJECT" popup screen will close, and the check marks for the
read PLC data will be validated on the "OPEN PROJECT" screen.
* Once set, the drive, path and project name are held until the onboard is ended.
* For some machine types, drive/path/project names are not retained.

IV - 227
MITSUBISHI CNC
14 Project Operation/External File Operations

(3) Opening the PLC data

(a) Select the PLC data to be edited from the list of PLC data read with the operations in (2). Several data items can
be selected.
(b) Select the "OPEN" menu key. When selected, PLC data will be read on the onboard.

*If data with the same name exists, an overwrite confirmation popup screen will appear. Select the operation to be
taken.

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(4) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(5) SEL. ALL/CANCEL

Switch valid/invalid of the checkbox for all the data in the list.

(6) SELECT PARAM. + PROG.

Switch valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.

(7) SELECT/CANCEL
Switch valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.

IV - 228
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
14.1 Opening PLC Data from a Project

■ In M700VW/M700 Series Simple operation mode and in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series

(1) Displaying the "OPEN PROJECT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → [EXTERNAL FILE] [EXT.->NC] menu key.
Then the popup screen for selecting the project will appear at the center of the screen.

(2) Reading PLC data from an external device

Select the project to read, and then press the [SELECT] menu key or [INPUT] key.
When the key is pressed, the screen for selecting files will appear.

(3) Opening the PLC data

(a) Select the PLC data to be edited from the list of PLC data. Several data items can be selected.
(b) Press the [READ] menu key. The selected PLC data will be read on the onboard.

For the other operations, refer to the explanations in M700VW/M700 Series.

IV - 229
MITSUBISHI CNC
14 Project Operation/External File Operations

14.2 Saving PLC Data from a Project

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○

The PLC data which has been edited and monitored, and the parameters set on the onboard, can be saved in the
external device. The saved data can be read as a project with GX Developer.

(Note 1) If there is no PLC data in the onboard editing area, the list will be blank, and the "EXTERNAL SAVE" button will
be displayed in gray.
(Note 2) Drive selection is available for M700VW Series and M700 Series (when the display module's OS is Windows
XP).
(Note 3) Available external devices in M70/M70V/E70 Series are as follows.

Compact flash (CF) USB memory

M70 ○ ×
(FCA70P-2AV/FCA70P-4AV/FCA70H-4AV/FCA70P-2BV/
○ ×
M70V FCA70P-4BV/FCA70H-4BV)
Other than the above system type names ○ ○
E70 ○ ○

■ In M700VW/M700 Series Standard operation mode

"SAVE PROJECT" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "SAVE PROJECT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → [PROJECT OPERATION] and the [SAVE PROJECT] menu key. When selected, the "SAVE
PROJECT" popup screen will appear. The checks for the PLC data in the onboard editing area will be validated.

(2) Selecting the PLC data to save

Select the PLC data to save from the list of PLC data. Several data items can be selected.

IV - 230
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
14.2 Saving PLC Data from a Project

(3) Saving the PLC data in the external device

(a) Select the [EXTERNAL SAVE] menu key. The "EXTERNAL SAVE" popup screen will appear.
* The default drive is "D", and the path is "/(route)".

"EXTERNAL SAVE" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(b) Select the [DRIVE] menu key. Designate the save destination drive.
(c) Select the [LIST] menu key, and designate the path of the save destination displayed under "LIST".
* The drive and path can be directly designated with the [DRIVE/PATH] menu key.
(d) Select the [PROJECT NAME] menu key, and designate the name of the file (project) to be saved.
(e) Select the [SAVE] menu key. The "EXTERNAL SAVE" popup screen will close, and the data will be saved with
the designated drive, path and file name. If a file with the same name already exists, an overwrite confirmation
popup screen will appear. Confirm and then save.

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

* Once set, the drive, path and project name are held until the onboard is ended.
* For some machine types, drive/path/project names are not retained.

(4) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(5) SEL. ALL/CANCEL

Switch valid/invalid of the checkbox for all the data in the list.

(6) SELECT PARAM. + PROG.

Make the parameters and program data in the list selectable.

(7) SELECT/CANCEL
Switch valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.

IV - 231
MITSUBISHI CNC
14 Project Operation/External File Operations

■ In M700VW/M700 Series Simple operation mode and in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series

(1) Displaying the "SAVE PROJECT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → [EXTERNAL FILE] [NC ->EXT.] menu key. When selected, the "SAVE PROJECT" screen will
appear.

(2) Selecting the PLC data to save

Select the PLC data to be saved from the list of PLC data. Several data items can be selected.

IV - 232
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
14.2 Saving PLC Data from a Project

(3) Saving the PLC data in the external device

(a) Press the [WRITE] menu key. Then the popup screen for selecting the project will appear.
(b) Select the "[File name] .. [Heading] Upper rank directory" of the first line, and pressing "INPUT" on the
keyboard displays the screen to select USB or CF as shown in the following screen, and then select the
desired device.

(c) When overwriting the existing project, move the cursor to the file to overwrite. When creating a new project,
enter the "PROJECT NAME" and "HEADING".
(d) Press the [SAVE] menu key. The project is saved.

For the other operations, refer to the explanations in M700VW/M700 Series.

IV - 233
MITSUBISHI CNC
14 Project Operation/External File Operations

14.3 Deleting a Project

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

A GX Developer project in the external device can be deleted.

(Note 1) Drive selection is available for M700VW Series and M700 Series (when the display module's OS is Windows
XP).
(Note 2) The project currently opened on the onboard cannot be deleted. (An error message appears.)
(Note 3) Available external devices in M70/M70V/E70 Series are as follows.

Compact flash (CF) USB memory

M70 ○ ×
(FCA70P-2AV/FCA70P-4AV/FCA70H-4AV/FCA70P-2BV/
○ ×
M70V FCA70P-4BV/FCA70H-4BV)
Other than the above system type names ○ ○
E70 ○ ○

■ In M700VW/M700 Series Standard operation mode

"DELETE PROJECT" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "DELETE PROJECT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → [PROJECT OPERATION] and the [DELETE PROJECT] menu key. When selected, the "DELETE
PROJECT" popup screen will appear.
* The default drive is "D", and the path is "/(route)".

IV - 234
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
14.3 Deleting a Project

(2) Deleting a project

(a) Select the [DRIVE] menu key, and designate the drive.
(b) Select the [LIST] menu key, and designate the path of the PLC data displayed under "LIST".
* The drive and path can be directly designated with the [DRIVE/PATH] menu key.
(c) Select the [PROJECT NAME] menu key, and designate the name of the file (project) to be deleted.
* Normally when selected from the list, this is automatically set.
(d) Select the [DELETE] menu key. The "DELETE CONFIRMATION" popup screen will appear.

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(e) When the [YES] menu key is selected, deletion will be executed, and the "DELETE CONFIRMATION" popup
screen and "DELETE PROJECT" popup screen will close.
When the [NO] menu key is selected, the deletion process will be canceled, and the "DELETE
CONFIRMATION" popup screen will close.
* Drive/path/project names set once will be held even after terminating the onboard.When the onboard is
started up again, the path specified last with external file operation is displayed.
* For some machine types, drive/path/project names are not retained.

■ In M700VW/M700 Series Simple operation mode and in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series

(1) Displaying the "DELETE PROJECT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → [EXTERNAL FILE] [DELETE EXT. FILE] menu key. When selected, the "DELETE PROJECT"
popup screen will appear.

(2) Deleting a project

(a) Specify the project to delete. Press the [DELETE] menu key. A popup screen will appear to confirm the deletion
process.
(b) When the [YES] menu key is selected, deletion will be executed. When the [NO] menu key is selected, the
deletion process will be canceled and the screen moves back to the "DELETE PROJECT" popup screen.

IV - 235
MITSUBISHI CNC
14 Project Operation/External File Operations

14.4 Verifying the Project PLC Data

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

The PLC data (programs) being edited the onboard editing area can be verified with the PLC data (program) in the
external device.

(Note 1) Only programs can be verified. (Device comments and parameters cannot be verified.)
(Note 2) Multiple programs cannot be verified simultaneously. (Always verify the programs one at a time.)
(Note 3) The [EXECUTE] button on the "VERIFY PROJECT" popup screen is valid only after the PLC data list has been
correctly read in with the "SELECT PROJECT" operations.
(Note 4) The [EXECUTE] button on the "VERIFY PROJECT" popup screen is displayed in gray if there is no PLC in the
onboard editing area.
(Note 5) Drive selection is available for M700VW Series and M700 Series (when the display module's OS is Windows
XP).
(Note 6) Available external devices in M70/M70V/E70 Series are as follows.

Compact flash (CF) USB memory

M70 ○ ×
(FCA70P-2AV/FCA70P-4AV/FCA70H-4AV/FCA70P-2BV/
○ ×
M70V FCA70P-4BV/FCA70H-4BV)
Other than the above system type names ○ ○
E70 ○ ○

■ In M700VW/M700 Series Standard operation mode

"VERIFY PROJECT" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying the "VERIFY PROJECT" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → [EXTERNAL FILE] and the [OPEN PROJECT] menu key. When selected, the "VERIFY
PROJECT" popup screen will appear.

IV - 236
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
14.4 Verifying the Project PLC Data

(2) Reading the list of PLC data to be verified from the external device
(a) Select the [SELECT PROJECT] menu key. The "SELECT PROJECT" popup screen will appear.
* The default drive is "D", and the path is "/(route)".

"SELECT PROJECT" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(b) Select the [DRIVE] menu key, and designate the drive.
(c) Select the [LIST] menu key, and designate the path of the PLC data displayed under "LIST".
* The drive and path can be directly designated with the [DRIVE/PATH] menu key.
(d) Select the [PROJECT NAME] menu key, and designate the name of the file (project) to be read in.
(e) Select the [SELECT] menu key. The "SELECT PROJECT" popup screen will close, and the read PLC data will
appear under LIST on the "VERIFY PROJECT" screen.
The verification destination display will be "VERIFY DEST. (EXT.)".

* Drive/path/project names set once will be held even after terminating the onboard.
When the onboard is started up again, the path specified last with external file operation is displayed.
* For some machine types, drive/path/project names are not retained.

(3) Verifying the PLC data

(a) Select the PLC data (program) to be verified from the VERIFY SRC. (EDIT PLC) and VERIFY DEST. (NC/EXT.)
lists. Multiple data items cannot be selected. (Select only one data item.)
(b) Select the "VERIFY" menu key. The selected PLC data (programs) will be verified, and the results will be
displayed in the "VERIFY RESULT PROGRAM" popup screen.

(4) Designating the verification step range

(a) Select the [STEP TOP] menu key, and designate the head step No. of the verification range.
(b) Select the [STEP END] menu key, and designate the end step No. of the verification range.
* The entire range will be verified if [STEP TOP] and [STEP END] are set to 0.

IV - 237
MITSUBISHI CNC
14 Project Operation/External File Operations

(5) Displaying the verification results

(a) When the PLC data is verified, the "VERIFY RESULT PROGRAM" popup screen will appear.
(b) Confirm the verification results, and revise the PLC data (program).
* This cannot jump to the verification results program in the same manner as GX Developer.

"VERIFY RESULT PROGRAM" popup screen

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(6) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(7) SELECT/CANCEL
Switch valid/invalid of the checkbox for the selected data in the list.

IV - 238
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
14.4 Verifying the Project PLC Data

■ In M700VW/M700 Series Simple operation mode and in M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series

(1) Displaying the "VERIFY" popup screen

Select "MAIN" → [EXTERNAL FILE] [VERIFY EXT. FILE] menu key. Then the "VERIFY" screen will appear.

(2) Reading the list of PLC data to be verified from the external device
(a) Press the [SELECT PROJECT] menu key. The "PROJECT SELECT" popup screen will appear.
(b) Select the project to read and press the [SELECT] menu key or [INPUT] key. "SELECT PROJECT" popup
screen will close, and the read PLC data will appear in the list on the "VERIFY" screen.

(3) Verifying the PLC data

(a) Select the PLC data (program) to be verified from VERIFY SOURCE (NC) and VERIFY DEST. (EXT.) lists.
Multiple data items cannot be selected. (Select only one data item.)
(b) Select the VERIFY menu key. Then the selected PLC data (program) is verified and the result is displayed on
the "VERIFY RESULT" popup screen.

IV - 239
MITSUBISHI CNC
14 Project Operation/External File Operations

IV - 240
 15
Diagnostics

IV - 241
MITSUBISHI CNC
15 Diagnostics

15.1 PLC Diagnostics

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
When an error occurs during program (ladder) execution, the detail of the error will be displayed on the popup screen.
Refer to the following section for details on the error displayed in PLC diagnosis.
"PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT: Confirmation of PLC Alarms on CNC Controller Side"

"VERIFY PROJECT" popup screen (The screen is an example of M700 Series)

Menus corresponding
to popup screen

(1) Displaying "PLC DIAGNOSIS" popup screen

(a) Standard operation mode
- "MAIN" → [DIAGNOS.] → [PLC DIAGNOSIS] - or -
- "MAIN" → [LADDER] → [PLC DIAGNOSIS]
(b) Simple operation mode
- "MAIN" → [PLC DIAGNOSIS]
(c) M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series
- "MAIN" → [PLC DIAGNOSIS]
When menu key is pressed, "PLC DIAGNOSIS" popup screen is displayed and the error during program (ladder)
execution is displayed.
When popup screen is opened, screen display is regularly (approximately every one second) updated.
When no error is occurring, "No error" is displayed.

(2) PLC operation status

PLC's RUN/STOP status is displayed.

(3) Rotary switch status

CNC unit rotary switch "CS2" status is displayed.
0(Normal) 1(PLC STOP mode)

IV - 242
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
15.1 PLC Diagnostics

(4) Error display

Error No., error type, error occurrence date and time (including seconds), file name, sequence step No., or
parameter No. are displayed. The error with which file name, sequence step No. or parameter No. is not specified
will be displayed in " -------- ".
Year is displayed in 4 digits. (Note: 2000 to 2099 only)

(5) Closing the popup screen

Press the menu key.

(6) ERROR JUMP

Current error jumps to the step of the ladder program shown in the common error information area.
When the conditions are where error jump function is not possible, the button and menu key are masked.
Refer to the following section for details on the error displayed in PLC diagnosis.
"PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT: Confirmation of PLC Alarms on CNC Controller Side"

<Conditions where error jump is possible>

Error file name and step No. are displayed at error occurrence.
Target file has already been opened by the automatic update mode.

IV - 243
MITSUBISHI CNC
15 Diagnostics

IV - 244
16
Help

IV - 245
MITSUBISHI CNC
16 Help

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○

General description of the keys used in the onboard and the version information are displayed.
(The screen is an example of M700VW/M700 Series)

IV - 246
 17
Error Messages

IV - 247
MITSUBISHI CNC
17 Error Messages

17.1 Warning Messages

M700VW/M700 M700VS
M70V M70
Standard Simple
E70
○ ○ ○ ○
The warning messages are displayed in the message display area (above the menu key display).

Warning messages

Message Warning details Remedy

After updating the PLC data (saving, deleting or
Save the contents of the temporary
formatting) in the temporary memory, the data has
memory in the ROM with "ROM-Write".
WRITE LADDER TO ROM not been written to the ROM. (The contents of the
The message will disappear after the
temporary memory are lost when the NC power is
data is saved.
turned OFF.)

17.2 User PLC Alarm

When user PLC alarm occurs, the alarm message appears in the message display area (above the area where menu
key name is displayed).

Message Error details Remedy

USER PLC ALARM Carry out PLC DIAGNOSIS and resolve
Various user PLC alarms
GENERATION the cause of the error.

* When warning message and user PLC alarm occur at the same time, both are shown next each other in the message
display area.

IV - 248
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
17.3 Error Message

17.3 Error Message

Error message is displayed in the popup screen as shown below.

The following shows a list of general error messages.

As for error messages in common with GX Developer, refer to "8.1 List of Errors During GX Developer Online
Operations" in "III. PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT".

Message Display timing

Command that is not supported in the MITSUBISHI CNC is Displays when an unsupported command by MITSUBISHI CNC is
included. Modify the program. found in input command check after ladder entry.
Displays when ROM write has not been successfully performed in
Failed in writing into ROM.
ROM write operation.
It is over the circuit size which can be copied. Displays when memory required to copy circuit data is not secured.
Displays when conversion has been executed at PLC RUN state during
PLC is in a RUN state. Is convert performed after stop PLC?
automatic update mode.
PLC is in a RUN state. Is preservation performed after stop
Displays when saving has been executed at PLC RUN state.
PLC?
Displays when PLC has carried out a deletion process with NC file
PLC is in a RUN state. Is deletion performed after stop PLC?
operation during RUN state.
PLC is in a RUN state. After stop PLC, is updating a program Displays when PLC has carried out a program update process with NC
performed? file operation during RUN state.
Displays when the operation has been successfully performed
PLC is in a STOP state. Is PLC changed into a RUN state?
following PLC STOP after operation at PLC RUN state.

IV - 249
MITSUBISHI CNC
17 Error Messages

IV - 250
V APPENDIX
 1
Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model

V-1
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model

1.1 Development Tools, etc.

With the M7 Series, the user PLC development environment using the MELSEC PLC development tool is used. A
comparison of each process is shown in "Table 2.1 List of development tool comparisons".
Refer to the respective lnstruction Manuals for details on each tool.

Table 1.1 List of development tool comparisons

Development
PLC4B development environment MELSEC PLC development environment
process
Ladder and message conversion
Application from the Tool tool Ladder list converter (CNVM6)
old model (CHG4PB)
Hardware PC9801/PC-AT PC-AT
PLC development software
List -> ladder Tool GX Converter
(list section) (LIST4B)
conversion
Hardware PC9801/PC-AT PC-AT
PLC development software
Tool GX Developer
Ladder creation (ladder section) (PLC4B)
Hardware PC9801/PC-AT PC-AT
PLC development software
Tool Text editor → GX Converter → GX Developer
Message creation (ladder section) (PLC4B)
Hardware PC9801/PC-AT PC-AT
Tool PLC4B ⇔ FLD ⇔ M500 controller GX Developer ⇔ RS232C/Ethernet ⇔ CNC controller
Transfer to the CNC
Hardware Via FLD Via RS-232C/Ethernet
Tool (1) GX Developer
Hardware PC-AT ⇔ CNC controller
Monitor
Tool (2) PLC onboard (ONBD) PLC onboard
Hardware M500 controller CNC controller
Tool PLC onboard → F-ROM PLC onboard → F-ROM
ROM writing
Hardware M500 controller CNC controller
PLC development software
Tool (1) GX Developer
(ladder section) (PLC4B)
Print output Hardware PC9801/PC-AT PC-AT
Tool (2) PLC onboard (ONBD)
Hardware M500 controller

[Note] The arrows → and ⇔ in the list indicate the flow of information when using multiple tools.

V-2
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
1.2 Devices and Device Assignments

1.2 Devices and Device Assignments

Table 1.2.1 List of device differences (Machining center system)

Device name M500M M600M M7 Series Remarks

X(PLC, machine input) X0 to X4FF
(Integrated to X and
U($2 input) U0 to U17F X0 to XAFF X0 to X1FFF
assignment changed)
I($3 and following input) I0 to I4BF
Y(PLC, machine output) Y0 to Y57F
(Integrated to Y and
W($2 output) W0 to W1FF Y0 to YDFF Y0 to Y1FFF
assignment changed)
J($3 and following output) J0 to J63F
(Divided into X and Y and
S(spindle input/output) S0 to S1FF - -
assignment changed)
M(temporary memory) M0 to M5119 M0 to M5119 M0 to M10239
G(temporary memory) G0 to G3071 M5120 to M8191
F(alarm message I/F) F0 to F127 F0 to F255 F0 to F1023
L(latch relay) L0 to L255 ← ←
E(special relay) E0 to E127 SM0 to SM127 SM0 to SM127
Timer(10ms variable) T0 to T15 T0 to T15 The 10ms timer and 100ms
(10ms fixed) Q0 to Q39 T16 to T55 timer are differentiated with the
T0 to T703 instructions
(100ms variable) T16 to T95 T56 to T135
The variable/fixed boundary is
(100ms fixed) Q40 to Q135 T136 to T231 set with parameters.
Integrated timer Integrated timer ST has been
T96 to T103 T232 to R239
(100ms variable) newly added
ST0 to ST63
The variable/fixed boundary is
(100ms fixed) Q136 to Q151 T240 to T255 set with parameters.
C(counter variable) C0 to C23 C0 to C23 The variable/fixed boundary is
C0 to C255
B(counter fixed) B0 to B103 C24 to C127 set with parameters.
D(data register) D0 to D1023 ￢ D0 to D2047
R(file register, NCI/F) R0 to R8191 ￢ R0 to R13311 (Assignment changed)
Discontinued (replaced by D
A(accumulator) A0, A1 - -
register)
Z(index register) Z Z0
Z0 to Z1
V(index register) V Z1
N(master control) N0 to N7 ￢ ￢
P0 to P2047 Reserved label
P(jump, call label) P0 to P255 ← P4000 to P4005 Local, common pointer
K-32768 to K32767
K(decimal constant) K-2147483648 to ← ←
K2147483647
H0 to HFFFF
H(hexadecimal constant)
H0 to HFFFFFFFF ← ←

V-3
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model

Table 1.2.2 List of device differences (lathe system)

Device name M500L M600L M7 Series Remarks

X(PLC, machine input) X0 to X4BF X0 to X4BF
U($2 input) U0 to U17F X4C0 to X63F
(Integrated to X and
I($3 to 8 input) I0 to I3FF X640 to XA3F X0 to X1FFF
assignment changed)
S(No. 5, 6 spindle input) S0 to S3F XA40 to XA7F
S(No. 3, 4 spindle input) S80 to SBF XA80 to XABF
Y(PLC, machine output) Y0 to Y53F Y0 to Y53F
W($2 output) W0 to W1FF Y540 to Y73F
(Integrated to Y and
J($3 to 8 output) J0 to J63F Y740 to YD7F Y0 to Y1FFF
assignment changed)
S(No. 5, 6 spindle output) S40 to S7F YD80 to YDBF
S(No. 3, 4 spindle output) SC0 to SFF YDC0 to YDFF
M(temporary memory) M0 to M5119 M0 to M5119
M0 to M10239
G(temporary memory) G0 to G3071 M5120 to M8191
F(alarm message I/F) F0 to F127 F0 to F127 F0 to F1023
L(latch relay) L0 to L255 ← ←
E(special relay) E0 to E127 SM0 to SM127 SM0 to SM127
T0 to T15 T0 to T15 The 10ms timer and 100ms
Timer(10ms variable)
Q0 to Q39 T16 to T55 timer are differentiated with the
(10ms fixed)
T0 to T703 instructions
(100ms variable) T16 to T95 T56 to T135 The variable/fixed boundary is
(100ms fixed)
Q40 to Q135 T136 to T231 set with parameters.
T96 to T103 T232 to R239 Integrated timer ST has been
Integrated timer
newly added
(100ms variable) ST0 to ST63
Q136 to Q151 T240 to T255 The variable/fixed boundary is
(100ms fixed)
set with parameters.
C(counter variable) C0 to C23 C0 to C23 The variable/fixed boundary is
C0 to C255
B(counter fixed) B0 to B103 C24 to C127 set with parameters.
D(data register) D0 to D1023 ← D0 to D2047
R(file register, NCI/F) R0 to R8191 ← R0 to R13311 (Assignment changed)
Discontinued (replaced by D
A(accumulator) A0, A1 - -
register)
Z(index register) Z Z0
Z0 to Z1
V(index register) V Z1
N(master control) N0 to N7 ← ←
P0 to P2047 Reserved label
P(jump, call label) P0 to P255 ← P4000 to P4005 Local, common pointer
K-32768 to K32767
K(decimal constant) K-2147483648 to ← ←
K2147483647
H0 to HFFFF
H(hexadecimal constant)
H0 to HFFFFFFFF ← ←

V-4
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
1.2 Devices and Device Assignments

Table 1.2.3 List of device differences (M60 Series)

M60 M60
Device name M7 Series Remarks
(PLC4B) (GX Developer)
X(PLC, machine input) X0 to X4BF X0 to X4BF (Integrated to X and
X0 to X1FFF
U($2 input) U0 to U17F X4C0 to X63F assignment changed)
Y(PLC, machine output) Y0 to Y53F Y0 to Y53F (Integrated to Y and
Y0 to Y1FFF
W($2 output) W0 to W1FF Y540 to Y73F assignment changed)
M(temporary memory) M0 to M5119 M0 to M5119
M0 to M10239
G(temporary memory) G0 to G3071 M5120 to M8191
F(alarm message I/F) F0 to F127 F0 ～ F127 F0 to F1023
L(latch relay) L0 to L255 ← ←
E(special relay) E0 to E127 SM0 to SM127 SM0 to SM127
T0 to T15 T0 to T15 The 10ms timer and 100ms
Timer(10ms variable)
Q0 to Q39 T16 to T55 timer are differentiated with the
(10ms fixed)
T0 to T703 instructions
(100ms variable) T16 to T95 R56 to T135
The variable/fixed boundary is
(100ms fixed)
Q40 to Q135 T136 to R231 set with parameters.
T96 to T103 T232 to R239 Integrated timer ST has been
Integrated timer
newly added
(100ms variable) ST0 to ST63
Q136 to Q151 T240 to T255 The variable/fixed boundary is
(100ms fixed)
set with parameters.
C(counter variable) C0 to C23 C0 ～ C23 The variable/fixed boundary is
C0 to C255
B(counter fixed) B0 to B103 C24 ～ C127 set with parameters.
D(data register) D0 to D1023 ← D0 to D2047
R(file register, NCI/F) R0 to R8191 ← R0 to R13311 (Assignment changed)
Discontinued (replaced by D
A(accumulator) A0, A1 - -
register)
Z(index register) Z Z0
Z0 to Z1
V(index register) V Z1
N(master control) N0 to N7 ← ←
P0 to P2047 Reserved label
P(jump, call label) P0 to P255 ← P4000 to P4005 Local, common pointer
K-32768 to K32767
K(decimal constant) K-2147483648 to ← ←
K2147483647
H0 to HFFFF
H(hexadecimal constant)
H0 to HFFFFFFFF ← ←

V-5
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model

Table 1.2.4 List of device differences (M60S Series)

M60S M60S
Device name M7 Series Remarks
(PLC4B) (GX Developer)
X(PLC, machine input) X0 to X4BF X0 to X4BF
U($2 input) U0 to U17F X4C0 to X63F
I($3 to 8 input) I0 to I3FF X640 to XA3F
(Integrated to X and
S(No. 3 spindle input) S0 to S1F XA40 to XA5F X0 to X1FFF
assignment changed)
S(No. 4 spindle input) S40 to S5F XA60 to XA7F
S(No. 5 spindle input) S80 to S9F XA80 to XA9F
S(No. 6 spindle input) SC0 to SDF XAA0 to XABF
Y(PLC, machine output) Y0 to Y53F Y0 to Y53F
W($2 output) W0 to W1FF Y540 to Y73F
J($3 to 8 output) J0 to J63F Y740 to YD7F
(Integrated to Y and
S(No. 3 spindle output) S20 to S3F YD80 to YD9F Y0 to Y1FFF
assignment changed)
S(No. 4 spindle output) S60 to S7F YDA0 to YDBF
S(No. 5 spindle output) SA0 to SBF YDC0 to YDDF
S(No. 6 spindle output) SE0 to SFF YDE0 to YDFF
M(temporary memory) M0 to M5119 M0 to M5119
M0 to M10239
G(temporary memory) G0 to G3071 M5120 to M8191
F(alarm message I/F) F0 to F127 F0 to F127 F0 to F1023
L(latch relay) L0 to L255 ← ←
E(special relay) E0 to E127 SM0 to SM127 SM0 to SM127
T0 to T15 T0 to T15 The 10ms timer and 100ms
Timer(10ms variable)
Q0 to Q39 T16 to T55 timer are differentiated with the
(10ms fixed)
T0 to T703 instructions.
(100ms variable) T16 to T95 T56 to T135 The variable/fixed boundary is
(100ms fixed)
Q40 to Q135 T136 to T231 set with parameters.
T96 to T103 T232 to R239 Integrated timer ST has been
Integrated timer
newly added.
(100ms variable) ST0 to ST63
Q136 to Q151 T240 to T255 The variable/fixed boundary is
(100ms fixed)
set with parameters.
C(counter variable) C0 to C23 C0 to C23 The variable/fixed boundary is
C0 to C255
B(counter fixed) B0 to B103 C24 to C127 set with parameters.
D(data register) D0 to D1023 ← D0 to D2047
R(file register, NCI/F) R0 to R8191 ← R0 to R13311 (Assignment changed)
Discontinued (replaced by D
A(accumulator) A0, A1 - -
register)
Z(index register) Z Z0
Z0 to Z1
V(index register) V Z1
N(master control) N0 to N7 ← ←
P0 to P2047 Reserved label
P(jump, call label) P0 to P255 ← P4000 to P4005 Local, common pointer
K-32768 to K32767
K(decimal constant) K-2147483648 to ← ←
K2147483647
H0 to HFFFF
H(hexadecimal constant)
H0 to HFFFFFFFF ← ←

V-6
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
1.3 Instructions with Changed Designation Format

1.3 Instructions with Changed Designation Format

Comparison of PLC instruction format with the conventional machine type is shown in the "Table 1.3.1 Table of
instruction correspondence". In M7 Series extended PLC instruction mode, a number of new instructions were added.
Also, most of the conventional instructions extended the specifications of argument. Refer to " PROGRAMMING
EXPLANATION : Instruction List" for details.

Table 1.3.1 Table of instruction correspondence

M7 Series (Compatible PLC Instruction

M500M/M500L/M60(*1)/M60S(*1) M600M/M600L/M60(*2)/M60S(*2)
mode)
Inst. Inst.
Function Symbol Inst. sign Symbol Symbol/remarks
sign sign
　　D Disconti Alternative ladder is shown in the next
Bit DEFR ─ [ DEFR D ] ─ ANDP
─┤↑├─ nued page.
Average value AVE ─ [ AVE S D n ] ┤ S.AVE ─ [ S.AVE S D n ] ┤ ←
Carry flag set STC ─ [ STC ] ┤ S.STC ─ [ S.STC ] ┤ ←
Carry flag reset CLC ─ [ CLC ] ┤ S.CLC ─ [ S.CLC ] ┤ ←
ROR ─ [ ROR n ] ┤ ROR ─ [ ROR D n ] ┤ ← Added D is a rotating word device
Right rotation
DROR ─ [ DROR n ] ┤ DROR ─ [ DROR D n ] ┤ ← (Same with RCR and DRCR.)

ROL ─ [ ROL n ] ┤ ROL ─ [ ROL D n ] ┤ ← Added D is a rotating word device

Left rotation
DROL ─ [ DROL n ] ┤ DROL ─ [ DROL D n ] ┤ ← (Same with RCL and DRCL.)
Added D is word device for storing
Search SER ─ [ SER S1 S2 n ] ┤ SER ─ [ SER S1 S2 D n ] ┤ ← search results
Added D is word device for storing
Quantity of 1 SUM ─ [ SUM S ] ┤ SUM ─ [ SUM S D ] ┤ ← total number of bits
─ [ ATC Kn Rn Rm ]-< Mm > ─ [ S.ATC Kn Rn Rm Mm ]
ATC ATC S.ATC ←
┤ ┤
─ [ ROT Kn Rn Rm ]-< Mm > ─ [ S.ROT Kn Rn Rm Mm
ROT ROT S.ROT ←
┤ ]┤
─ [ TSRH Rm Rn ]-< Mn > ─ [ S.TSRH Rm Rn Mn ] Disconti
TSRH TSRH S.TSRH Replaced by PLC window
┤ ┤ nued
Disconti
DDBA DDBA ─ [ DDBA Rn / Dn ] ┤ S.DDBA ─ [ S.DDBA Rn / Dn ] ┤ Replaced by PLC window
nued
DDBS DDBS ─ [ DDBS Rn ] ┤ S.DDBS ─ [ S.DDBS Rn ] ┤ ←
C language
CALL ─ [ CALL Pn ] ┤ S.CAL ─ [ S.CAL Pn ] ┤ S.CALL ─ [ S.CALL Kn ] ┤
release
S1.n　　　(*3)
LDBIT ├ [ BIT S1 n ] ─ LD<= ├ [ <= S1 n ] ─ LD
├┤ ├─
S1.n　　　(*3)
ANDBIT ─ [ BIT S1 n ] ─ AND<= ─ [ = S1 n ] ─ AND
─┤ ├─
S1.n　　　(*3)
ORBIT └ [ BIT S1 n ] ┘ OR<= └ [ <= S1 n ] ┘ OR
└┤ ├┘
BIT
S1.n　　　(*3)
LDBII ├ [ BII S1 n ] ─ LD<> ├ [ > S1 n ] ─ LDI
├┤ / ├─
S1.n　　　(*3)
ANDBII ─ [ BII S1 n ] ─ AND<> ─ [ <> S1 n ] ─ ANDI
─┤ / ├─
S1.n　　　(*3)
ORBII └ [ BII S1 n ] ┘ OR<> └ [ <> S1 n ] ┘ ORI
└┤ / ├┘
Comparative ├ [ = Dn/Kn Dn ] ─
LD= ├ [ = Dn/Kn Dn ] ─ ← ← LD=
instruction ├ [ = Dn Kn ] ─　　　　(*4)
Arithmetic
─ [ + Dn Dn/Kn Dn ] ┤
operation + ─ [ + Dn Dn/Kn Dn ] ┤ ← ← +
instruction ─ [ + Dn/Kn Dn Dn ] ┤　(*5)

Logical opera- ─ [ WAND Dn Dn/Kn Dn ] ─ [WAND Dn Dn/Kn Dn ] ┤

WAND ← ← WAND
tion instruction ┤ ─ [WAND Dn/Kn Dn Dn ] ┤ (*6)

V-7
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model

M7 Series (Compatible PLC Instruction

M500M/M500L/M60(*1)/M60S(*1) M600M/M600L/M60(*2)/M60S(*2)
mode)
Inst. Inst.
Function Symbol Inst. sign Symbol Symbol/remarks
sign sign
Kn/Dn/Rn　(R register
Kn/Dn
Timer OUT T ← ← OUT T correspondence))
─ < Tn > ┤
─ < Tn > ┤　　(100ms dedicated)
H Kn/Dn
Timer (10ms) OUT H
─ < Tn > ┤　　(10ms dedicated)
Timer setting S.TMO
─ [ S.TMOV Tn D ] ┤
value V

(*1) When PLC4B is used as development tool

(*2) When GX Developer is used as development tool
(*3) Follows word device bit designation format. (OUT, SET, and RST instructions also support same format)
(*4) Argument pattern for constant designation added. (AND=, OR=, LDD=, ANDD=, ORD=, LD>, and LD< system
instructions also support same format)
(*5) Argument pattern for constant designation added. (D+, -, D-, *, D*, /, and D/ instructions also support same
format)
(*6) Argument pattern for constant designation added. (WOR and WXOR instructions also support same format)

V-8
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
1.3 Instructions with Changed Designation Format

1.3.1 Alternative Circuits Resulted from the Ban on DEFR Instruction

When using GX Developer as a development tool, DEFR instruction has to be substituted with an alternative instruction
(ANDP), which has different performance specifications. DEFR instruction has to be substituted and banned because
they are expected to become obstacles when expanding PLC functions in the future. So, Do not use DEFR instruction in
M7 Series.
In case DEFR instruction is currently used, substitute the ladder with another one, using the example of alternative
ladders shown below.

DEFR instruction converts operation results up to DEFR instruction into pulse.

Conduction occurs when operation results prior to DEFR instruction is OFF → ON. At the same time, operation results
prior to DEFR instruction will be saved in a specified device.
Examples of circuits and their movement are shown below.

(Ladder example 1) When using PLC4B as a development tool

M0 M100
DEFR M1

(Ladder example 2) When using GX Developer as a development tool

M0 M1 M100

In the case of the ladder above, when M0 is turned OFF → ON (When M0 is ON and M1, or the operation results of one
scan prior, is OFF), M100 will turn ON.
In the case of the ladder other than above, M100 will turn OFF. Also, the operation results prior to DEFR instruction
(Operation result of LD M0 in the case above.) will be saved in M1.

An alternative circuit for the above circuits is shown below.

(Alternative ladder example)

M0 M1 M100

M1

V-9
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 Comparison of PLC Related Sections in Each Model

V - 10
 2
List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer

V - 11
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer

The following instruction lists are excerpts from the "QnACPU Programming Manual (Common Instructions)" (model
name: QNACPU-P (KYOUTU) 13J522).
In these lists, the instructions listed as "convert to "NOP" instructions" in "Handling with this NC" column. are unavailable
for the CNC. (When written from GX Developer to the CNC, they are replaced by "NOP" instructions.)
Note that this list of instructions indicates the status in the extended instruction mode. In the compatible instruction mode,
some instructions cannot be used even if those instructions are listed as "available" in "Handling with this NC" column.
For details on the usable instructions in each mode, refer to the list of instructions in "II PROGRAMMING
EXPLANATION".

V - 12
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.1 Sequence Instructions

2.1 Sequence Instructions

Contact instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

LD available

LDI available

AND available

ANI available

OR available

ORI available
Contact
LDP available

LDF available

ANDP available

ANDF available

ORP available

ORF available

Coupling instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

ANB available
ANB

ORB available
ORB

MPS
MRD MPS
available
MRD
MPP
MPP
Coupling
INV available

MEP available

MEF available

EGP Vn available

EGF Vn available

V - 13
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer

Output instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

OUT available

SET SET D available

RST RST D available

PLS PLS D available

Output
PLF PLF D available

FF FF D available

DELTA DELTA D convert to "NOP" instructions

DELTAP DELTAP D convert to "NOP" instructions

Shift instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

SFT SFT D available

Shift
SFTP SFTP D available

Master control instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

MC MC n D available
Master control
MCR MCR n available

End instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

FEND FEND available

Program end
END END available

Other instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

Stop STOP STOP convert to "NOP" instructions

NOP ────── available

NOPLF NOPLF available

No operation

PAGE PAGE n available

V - 14
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.2 Comparison Operation Instructions

2.2 Comparison Operation Instructions

Comparison operation instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

LD= S1 S2 available

AND= S1 S2 available

OR= available
S1 S2

LD<> S1 S2 available

AND<> S1 S2 available

OR<> available
S1 S2

LD> S1 S2 available

AND> S1 S2 available

OR> available
S1 S2
16-bit data comparison
LD<= S1 S2 available

AND<= S1 S2 available

OR<= available
S1 S2

LD< S1 S2 available

AND< S1 S2 available

OR< available
S1 S2

LD>= S1 S2 available

AND>= S1 S2 available

OR>= available
S1 S2

V - 15
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

LDD= D S1 S2 available

ANDD= D S1 S2 available

ORD= available
D S1 S2

LDD<> D S1 S2 available

ANDD<> D S1 S2 available

ORD<> available
D S1 S2

LDD> D S1 S2 available

ANDD> D S1 S2 available

ORD> available
D S1 S2
32-bit data comparison
LDD<= D S1 S2 available

ANDD<= D S1 S2 available

ORD<= available
D S1 S2

LDD< D S1 S2 available

ANDD< D S1 S2 available

ORD< available
D S1 S2

LDD>= D S1 S2 available

ANDD>= D S1 S2 available

ORD>= available
D S1 S2

V - 16
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.2 Comparison Operation Instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

LDE= E S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

ANDE= E S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

ORE= convert to "NOP" instructions

E S1 S2

LDE<> E S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

ANDE<> E S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

ORE<> convert to "NOP" instructions

E S1 S2

LDE> E S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

ANDE> E S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

ORE> convert to "NOP" instructions

E S1 S2
Real number data comparison
LDE<= E S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

ANDE<= E S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

ORE<= convert to "NOP" instructions

E S1 S2

LDE< E S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

ANDE< E S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

ORE< convert to "NOP" instructions

E S1 S2

LDE>= E S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

ANDE>= E S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

ORE>= convert to "NOP" instructions

E S1 S2

V - 17
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

LD$= $ S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

AND$= $ S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

OR$= convert to "NOP" instructions

$ S1 S2

LD$<> $ S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

AND$<> $ S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

OR$<> convert to "NOP" instructions

$ S1 S2

LD$> $ S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

AND$> $ S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

OR$> convert to "NOP" instructions

$ S1 S2
Character string data
comparison
LD$<= $ S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

AND$<= $ S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

OR$<= convert to "NOP" instructions

$ S1 S2

LD$< $ S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

AND$< $ S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

OR$< convert to "NOP" instructions

$ S1 S2

LD$>= $ S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

AND$>= $ S1 S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

OR$>= convert to "NOP" instructions

$ S1 S2

V - 18
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.2 Comparison Operation Instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

BKCMP= BKCMP S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKCMP<> BKCMP S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKCMP> BKCMP S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKCMP<= BKCMP S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKCMP< BKCMP S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKCMP>= BKCMP S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

Block data comparison
BKCMP=P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKCMP<>P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKCMP>P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKCMP<=P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKCMP<P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKCMP>=P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

V - 19
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer

Arithmetic operation instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

+ + S D available

+P +P S D available

+ + S1 S2 D available

+P +P S1 S2 D available
BIN 16-bit addition/
subtraction
- S D available

-P P S D available

- S1 S2 D available

-P P S1 S2 D available

D+ D+ S D available

D+P D+P S D available

D+ D+ S1 S2 D available

D+P D+P S1 S2 D available

BIN 32-bit addition/
subtraction
D- D S D available

D-P D P S D available

D- D S1 S2 D available

D-P D P S1 S2 D available

* S1 S2 D available

*P P S1 S2 D available
BIN 16-bit multiplication/
division
/ / S1 S2 D available

/P /P S1 S2 D available

D* D S1 S2 D available

D*P D P S1 S2 D available
BIN 32-bit multiplication/
division
D/ D/ S1 S2 D available

D/P D/P S1 S2 D available

B+ B+ S D convert to "NOP" instructions

B+P B+P S D convert to "NOP" instructions

B+ B+ S1 S2 D available

B+P B+P S1 S2 D available

BCD 4-digit addition/
subtraction
B- B S D convert to "NOP" instructions

B-P B P S D convert to "NOP" instructions

B- B S1 S2 D available

B-P B P S1 S2 D available

V - 20
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.2 Comparison Operation Instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

DB+ DB+ S D convert to "NOP" instructions

DB+P B+P S D convert to "NOP" instructions

DB+ DB+ S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

DB+P DB+P S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

BCD 8-digit addition/
subtraction
DB- DB S D convert to "NOP" instructions

DB-P DB P S D convert to "NOP" instructions

DB- DB S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

DB-P DB P S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

B* B S1 S2 D available

B*P B P S1 S2 D available
BCD 4-digit multiplication/
division
B/ B/ S1 S2 D available

B/P B/P S1 S2 D available

DB* DB S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

DB*P DB P S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

BCD 8-digit multiplication/
division
DB/ DB/ S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

DB/P DB/P S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

E+ E+ S D convert to "NOP" instructions

E+P E+P S D convert to "NOP" instructions

E+ E+ S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

E+P E+P S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

Floating-point data addition/
subtraction
E- E S D convert to "NOP" instructions

E-P E P S D convert to "NOP" instructions

E- E S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

E-P E P S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

E* E S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

E*P E P S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

Floating-point data
multiplication/division
E/ E/ S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

E/P E/P S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

BK+ BK+ S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BK+P BK+P S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BIN block addition/subtraction
BK- BK S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BK-P BK P S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

V - 21
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

$+ $+ S D convert to "NOP" instructions

$+P $+P S D convert to "NOP" instructions

Character string data coupling
$+ $+ S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

$+P $+P S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

INC INC D available

INCP INCP D available

DINC DINC D available

DINCP DINCP D available

BIN data increment
DEC DEC D available

DECP DECP D available

DDEC DDEC D available

DDECP DDECP D available

V - 22
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.2 Comparison Operation Instructions

Data conversion instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

BCD BCD S D available

BCDP BCDP S D available

BCD conversion
DBCD DBCD S D available

DBCDP DBCDP S D available

BIN BIN S D available

BINP BINP S D available

BIN conversion
DBIN DBIN S D available

DBINP DBINP S D available

FLT FLT S D convert to "NOP" instructions

FLTP FLTP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

BIN ->floating point
conversion
DFLT DFLT S D convert to "NOP" instructions

DFLTP DFLTP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

INT INT S D convert to "NOP" instructions

INTP INTP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

Floating point ->BIN
conversion
DINT DINT S D convert to "NOP" instructions

DINTP DINTP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

DBL DBL S D convert to "NOP" instructions

DBLP DBLP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

BIN 16-bit <->32-bit
conversion
WORD WORD S D convert to "NOP" instructions

WORDP WORDP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

V - 23
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

GRY GRY S D convert to "NOP" instructions

GRYP GRYP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

BIN ->gray code conversion
DGRY DGRY S D convert to "NOP" instructions

DGRYP DGRYP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

GBIN GBIN S D convert to "NOP" instructions

GBINP GBINP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

Gray code ->BIN conversion
DGBIN DGBIN S D convert to "NOP" instructions

DGBINP DGBINP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

NEG NEG D available

NEGP NEGP D available

DNEG DNEG D available

2's complement
DNEGP DNEGP D available

ENEG ENEG D convert to "NOP" instructions

ENEGP ENEGP D convert to "NOP" instructions

BKBCD BKBCD S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKBCDP BKBCDP S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

Block conversion
BKBIN BKBIN S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKBINP BKBINP S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

V - 24
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.2 Comparison Operation Instructions

Data transfer instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

MOV MOV S D available
16-bit data transfer
MOVP MOVP S D available

DMOV DMOV S D available

32-bit data transfer
DMOVP DMOVP S D available

EMOV EMOV S D convert to "NOP" instructions

Floating-point data transfer
EMOVP EMOVP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

$MOV $MOV S D convert to "NOP" instructions

Character string data transfer
$MOVP $MOVP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

CML CML S D available

16-bit data NOT transfer
CMLP CMLP S D available

DCML DCML S D available

32-bit data NOT transfer
DCMLP DCMLP S D available

BMOV BMOV S D n available

Block transfer
BMOVP BMOVP S D n available

FMOV FMOV S D n available

Same data block transfer
FMOVP FMOVP S D n available

XCH XCH S D available

16-bit data change
XCHP XCHP S D available

DXCH DXCH S D available

32-bit data change
DXCHP DXCHP S D available

BXCH BXCH S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

Block data change
BXCHP BXCHP S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

SWAP SWAP D convert to "NOP" instructions

Upper/lower byte change
SWAPP SWAPP D convert to "NOP" instructions

V - 25
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer

Program branch instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

CJ CJ Pn available

SCJ SCJ Pn convert to "NOP" instructions

Jump
JMP JMP Pn available

GOEND GOEND available

Program execution control instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

Interrupt disable DI DI convert to "NOP" instructions

Interrupt enable EI EI convert to "NOP" instructions

Interrupt disable/enable
IMASK IMASK S convert to "NOP" instructions
setting

Return IRET IRET convert to "NOP" instructions

I/O refresh instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

I/O refresh RFS RFS D n convert to "NOP" instructions

Other useful instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

UDCNT1 UDCNT1 S D n convert to "NOP" instructions
Up/down counter
UDCNT2 UDCNT2 S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

Teaching timer TTMR TTMR D n convert to "NOP" instructions

Special timer STMR STMR S n D convert to "NOP" instructions

Nearest access control ROTC ROTC S n1 n2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

Ramp signal RAMP RAMP n1 n2 D1 n3 D2 convert to "NOP" instructions

Pulse density SPD SPD S n D convert to "NOP" instructions

Pulse output PLSY PLSY n1 n2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

Pulse width modulation PWM PWM n1 n2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

Matrix input MTR MTR S D1 D2 n convert to "NOP" instructions

V - 26
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.3 Application Instructions

2.3 Application Instructions

Logical operation instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

WAND WAND S D available

WANDP WANDP S D available

WAND WAND S1 S2 D available

WANDP WANDP S1 S2 D available

DAND DAND S D available

AND
DANDP DANDP S D available

DAND DAND S1 S2 D available

DANDP DANDP S1 S2 D available

BKAND BKAND S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKANDP BKANDP S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

WOR WOR S D available

WORP WORP S D available

WOR WOR S1 S2 D available

WORP WORP S1 S2 D available

DOR DOR S D available

OR
DORP DORP S D available

DOR DOR S1 S2 D available

DORP DORP S1 S2 D available

BKOR BKOR S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKORP BKORP S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

V - 27
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

WXOR WXOR S D available

WXORP WXORP S D available

WXOR WXOR S1 S2 D available

WXORP WXORP S1 S2 D available

DXOR DXOR S D available

Exclusive OR
DXORP DXORP S D available

DXOR DXOR S1 S2 D available

DXORP DXORP S1 S2 D available

BKXOR BKXOR S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKXORP BKXORP S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

WXNR WXNR S D available

WXNRP WXNRP S D available

WXNR WXNR S1 S2 D available

WXNRP WXNRP S1 S2 D available

DXNR DXNR S D available

NOT exclusive OR
DXNRP DXNRP S D available

DXNR DXNR S1 S2 D available

DXNRP DXNRP S1 S2 D available

BKXNOR BKXNOR S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BKXNORP BKXNORP S1 S2 D n convert to "NOP" instructions

V - 28
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.3 Application Instructions

Rotation instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

ROR ROR D n available

RORP RORP D n available

Right rotation
RCR RCR D n available

RCRP RCRP D n available

ROL ROL D n available

ROLP ROLP D n available

Left rotation
RCL RCL D n available

RCLP RCLP D n available

DROR DROR D n available

DRORP DRORP D n available

Right rotation
DRCR DRCR D n available

DRCRP DRCRP D n available

DROL DROL D n available

DROLP DROLP D n available

Left rotation
DRCL DRCL D n available

DRCLP DRCLP D n available

V - 29
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer

Shift instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

SFR SFR D n available

SFRP SFRP D n available

n-bit shift
SFL SFL D n available

SFLP SFLP D n available

BSFR BSFR D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BSFRP BSFRP D n convert to "NOP" instructions

1-bit shift
BSFL BSFL D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BSFLP BSFLP D n convert to "NOP" instructions

DSFR DSFR D n available

DSFRP DSFRP D n available

1-word shift
DSFL DSFL D n available

DSFLP DSFLP D n available

Bit processing instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

BSET BSET D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BSETP BSETP D n convert to "NOP" instructions

Bit set/reset
BRST BRST D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BRSTP BRSTP D n convert to "NOP" instructions

TEST TEST S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

TESTP TESTP S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

Bit test
DTEST DTEST S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

DTESTP DTESTP S1 S2 D convert to "NOP" instructions

BKRST BKRST S n convert to "NOP" instructions

Bit device Batch reset
BKRSTP BKRSTP S n convert to "NOP" instructions

V - 30
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.3 Application Instructions

Data processing instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

SER SER S1 S2 D n available

SERP SERP S1 S2 D n available

Data search
DSER DSER S1 S2 D n available

DSERP DSERP S1 S2 D n available

SUM SUM S D available

SUMP SUMP S D available

Bit check
DSUM DSUM S D available

DSUMP DSUMP S D available

DECO DECO S D n available

Decode
DECOP DECOP S D n available

ENCO ENCO S D n available

Encode
ENCOP ENCOP S D n available

SEG SEG S D available

7-segment decode
SEGP SEGP S D available

DIS DIS S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

DISP DISP S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

UNI UNI S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

UNIP UNIP S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

NDIS NDIS S1 D S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

NDISP NDISP S1 D S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

Dissociation - Association
NUNI NUNI S1 D S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

NUNIP NUNIP S1 D S2 convert to "NOP" instructions

WTOB WTOB S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

WTOBP WTOBP S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BTOW BTOW S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

BTOWP BTOWP S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

V - 31
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

MAX MAX S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

MAXP MAXP S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

MIN MIN S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

MINP MINP S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

Retrieval
DMAX DMAX S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

DMAXP DMAXP S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

DMIN DMIN S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

DMINP DMINP S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

SORT S1 n S2 D1 D2
SORT S2:Number of data blocks to be com convert to "NOP" instructions
D1:Device to be forced ON at sort c
D2:Used by system
Sort
DSORT S1 n S2 D1 D2
DSORT S2:Number of data blocks to be com convert to "NOP" instructions
D1:Device to be forced ON at sort c
D2:Used by system

WSUM WSUM S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

WSUMP WSUMP S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

Total value calculation
DWSUM DWSUM S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

DWSUMP DWSUMP S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

Table operation instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

FIFW FIFW S D convert to "NOP" instructions

FIFWP FIFWP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

FIFR FIFR S D convert to "NOP" instructions

FIFRP FIFRP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

FPOP FPOP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

Table processing
FPOPP FPOPP S D convert to "NOP" instructions

FINS FINS S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

FINSP FINS S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

FDEL FDEL S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

FDELP FDELP S D n convert to "NOP" instructions

V - 32
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
2.3 Application Instructions

Structuring instructions

Classification Instruction sign Symbol Handling with this NC

FOR FOR n available

NEXT NEXT available

Repeat
BREAK BREAK D Pn available

BREAKP BREAKP D Pn available

CALL CALL Pn S1∼Sn available

CALLP CALLP Pn S1∼Sn available

RET RET available

FCALL FCALL Pn S1∼Sn convert to "NOP" instructions

FCALLP FCALLP Pn S1∼Sn convert to "NOP" instructions

SORT * Pn S1~Sn
ECALL convert to "NOP" instructions
Subroutine program call * : Program name

ECALLP * Pn S1~Sn
ECALLP convert to "NOP" instructions
* : Program name

EFCALL * Pn S1~Sn
EFCALL convert to "NOP" instructions
* : Program name

EFCALLP * Pn S1~Sn
EFCALLP convert to "NOP" instructions
* : Program name

COM COM convert to "NOP" instructions

IX convert to "NOP" instructions

IX S
Device qualification circuit
IXEND convert to "NOP" instructions
IXEND

Fixed index modification IXDEV IXDEV convert to "NOP" instructions

IXSET Pn D
IXSET convert to "NOP" instructions

Designation of qualification

V - 33
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 List of Instructions Usable with GX Developer

V - 34
 3
List of Special Relays and Special Registers

V - 35
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 List of Special Relays and Special Registers

Special relay SM and special register SD are the devices whose specifications are defined in the CNC. Specifications of
the available devices are given below. Do not use the devices not indicated below as they are used in the system.

3.1 Special Relay

Setting side
Device Name Operation Operation details
(Set time)
- Turned ON when the PLC alarm (illegal PLC) has
OFF: No error System side
SM0 PLC error occurred.
ON: Error （Error）
Reset is done by STOP → RUN.
OFF: Carry OFF System side
SM12 Carry flag Carry flag used during function instruction.
ON: Carry ON (State change)
H/W alarm (Temperature rise
SM16
detection)
OFF: No error Used in some machine types. System side
SM17 H/W alarm (DIO 24V illegal)
ON: Error Refer to PLC I/F Manual, etc. for details. (State change)
H/W alarm (Power supply
SM18
error)
SM64 ATC display request flag
Tool life management setting
SM65 Refer to PLC I/F Manual, etc. Used in some machine types. System side
lock
for details. Refer to PLC I/F Manual, etc. for details. (State change)
SM70 Key I/F related
SM71 In ATC rotation
SM80
Refer to PLC I/F Manual, etc. Used in some machine types as the PLC switch. System side
： PLC switch
for details. Refer to PLC I/F Manual, etc. for details. (State change)
SM111
ON System side
SM400 Always ON - Always ON
OFF (Every time END)
ON System side
SM401 Always OFF - Always OFF
OFF (Every time END)
- After RUN, turned ON by only 1 scan.
After RUN, turned ON by only
ON - OFF during STOP. System side
SM402 1 scan 1 scan
OFF This contact can be used only in the medium- (Every time END)
(Medium-speed ladder)
speed ladder.
- After RUN, turned OFF by only 1 scan.
After RUN, turned OFF by only
ON - OFF during STOP. System side
SM403 1 scan 1 scan
OFF This contact can be used only in the medium- (Every time END)
(Medium-speed ladder)
speed ladder.
- After RUN, turned ON by only 1 scan.
After RUN, turned ON by only
ON - OFF during STOP. System side
SM404 1 scan 1 scan
OFF This contact can be used only in the high-speed (Every time END)
(High-speed ladder)
ladder.
After RUN, turned OFF by only - After RUN, turned OFF by only 1 scan.
ON System side
SM405 1 scan 1 scan - OFF during STOP.
OFF (Every time END)
(High-speed ladder) This contact can be used only in the high-speed.
0.05s
SM410 0.1-second clock
0.05s
- ON/OFF is repeated by the specified second.
0.1s
System side
SM411 0.2-second clock - Starts from OFF when the power is turned ON.
0.1s (At high speed
- The clock operation is continued even in STOP.
ladder
0.5s
- Note that the ON-OFF status changes when the
SM412 1-second clock processing)
0.5s designated time has elapsed during the execution
*1
of the medium speed ladder.
1s
SM413 2-second clock
1s

- ON/OFF is repeated according to the second

specified with SD414.
System side
- Starts from OFF when the power is turned ON.
(At high speed
ns - The clock operation is continued even in STOP.
SM414 2n-second clock ladder
ns - If SD414 is 0 or smaller value, operates at n=30.
processing)
- Note that the ON-OFF status changes when the
*1
designated time has elapsed during the execution
of the medium speed ladder.
*1: Processing cycle of the high-speed ladder (sequence program) depends on the machine type.

V - 36
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual
3.2 Special Register

3.2 Special Register

Setting side
Device Name Operation Operation details
(Set time)
- Error No. is stored when PLC alarm (illegal PLC) occurs.
0 is set when normal. The error No. is cleared to 0 when executing PLC System side
SD0 PLC error No. PLC error No.
RUN next time. (Error)
Refer to "Error code" in the list of PLC alarms for details on numbers.
- Year (last 2 digits) and moth when SD0 data was updated is stored as
Time of occurrence the BCD 2-digit code.
SD1
(Year, month) Upper 8 bits (B15-B8): Year (0-99)
Lower 8 bits (B7-B0): Month (1-12)
- The day and hour when SD0 data was updated is stored as BCD 2-
Time of PLC error Time of occurrence digit code. System side
SD2
occurrence (Day, hour) Upper 8 bits (B15-B8): Day of month (1-31) (Error)
Lower 8 bits (B7-B0): Hour (0-23)
- The minute and second when SD0 data was updated is stored as BCD
Time of occurrence 2-digit code.
SD3
(Minute, second) Upper 8 bits (B15-B8): Minute (0-59)
Lower 8 bits (B7-B0): Second (0-59)
PLC operating System side
SD203 PLC operating status Operating status of PLC is stored.During RUN: 0, During STOP: 2
status (Device read)
Character string (15th/
SD220
16th character)
- A message character string that is equivalent to an error No. is stored
Character string (13th/ when PLC alarm (illegal PLC) occurs.
SD221
14th character) (Diagnosis message displayed on the PLC diagnosis screen.) System side
PLC error character
　： string 　： 0 is set when normal. The message character string is cleared to 0 when (State
Character string executing PLC RUN next time. change)
SD226 Refer to "Diagnosis display character string" in the list of PLC alarms for
(3rd/4th character)
details.
Character string
SD227
(1st/2nd character)
Number of points - Stores the number of points currently set for each device
SD290
allocated for X (Note that number of allocated points does not always equal to the
Number of points usable number of points.)
SD291 SD290: Number of points allocated for X
allocated for Y
SD291: Number of points allocated for Y
Number of points
SD292 SD292: Number of points allocated for M
allocated for Y
SD293: Number of points allocated for L
　： 　： SD294: Number of points allocated for B
Device allocation
Number of points SD295: Number of points allocated for F System side
SD302 (Same as SD296: Number of points allocated for SB (Initial)
parameter contents) allocated for D
SD297: Number of points allocated for V
Number of points
SD303 SD298: Number of points allocated for S
allocated for W
SD299: Number of points allocated for T
SD300: Number of points allocated for ST
SD301: Number of points allocated for C
Number of points
SD304 SD302: Number of points allocated for D
allocated for SW
SD303: Number of points allocated for W
SD304: Number of points allocated for SW

- After RUN, +1 is added every second of the medium speed ladder. System side
(At high
Count Nos. of 1 second - Count is repeated as follows.
SD412 1-second counter speed ladder
unit 0 → 32767 → -32768 → 0 (decimal)
processing)
0 → FFFF → 0 (hexadecimal) *1
- Stores the n of 2n-second clock (SM420). (Default value: 30)
SD414 2n-second clock set 2n-second clock unit User side
The setting range is from 1 to 32767.
- After RUN, +1 is added every 1 scan of the medium speed ladder.
Scan counter - Count is repeated as follows. System side
SD420 (Medium-speed Count Nos. by 1 scan (Every time
0 → 32767 → -32768 → 0 (decimal)
ladder) END)
0 → FFFF → 0 (hexadecimal)
- After RUN, +1 is added every 1 scan of the high speed ladder.
- Count is repeated as follows. System side
Scan counter
SD430 Count Nos. by 1 scan (Every time
(High-speed ladder) 0 → 32767 → -32768 → 0 (decimal)
END)
0 → FFFF → 0 (hexadecimal)

V - 37
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 List of Special Relays and Special Registers

Setting side
Device Name Operation Operation details
(Set time)
Current scan time - Stores the medium speed ladder current scan time in SD520 and
Current scan time
SD520 (Medium-speed SD521. (1ms unit is used for measurement)
(1ms unit) System side
ladder) SD520: ms value is stored (Storage range: 0 to 14000)
(Every time
Current scan time SD521: μs value is stored (Storage range: 0 to 999)
Current scan time END)
SD521 (Medium-speed (Example) When the current scan time is 23.6ms, it is stored as follows.
(1μs unit) SD520=23, SD521=600
ladder)
Minimum scan time
Minimum scan time - Stores the minimum value of the medium speed ladder scan time in
SD524 (Medium-speed
(1ms unit) SD524 and SD525. (1ms unit is used for measurement; 2nd scan and System side
ladder)
after is the target after RUN.) (Every time
Minimum scan time SD524: ms value is stored (Storage range: 0 to 14000) END)
Minimum scan time
SD525 (Medium-speed SD525: μs value is stored (Storage range: 0 to 999)
(1μs unit)
ladder)
Maximum scan time
Maximum scan time - Stores the maximum value of medium speed ladder scan time in
SD526 (Medium-speed
(1ms unit) SD526 and SD527. (1ms unit is used for measurement; 2nd scan and System side
ladder)
after is the target after RUN.) (Every time
Maximum scan time SD526: ms value is stored (Storage range: 0 to 14000) END)
Maximum scan time
SD527 (Medium-speed SD527: μs value is stored (Storage range: 0 to 999)
(1μs unit)
ladder)

*1: Processing cycle of the high-speed ladder (sequence program) depends on the machine type.

V - 38
 4
List of PLC Alarms

V - 39
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 List of PLC Alarms

PLC diagnosis for each CNC PLC alarm, as well as the error details, causes and remedies are provided below.

NC alarm display (M Series) PLC diagnosis

Sub-status NC operating status Error code Diagnosis display File Step
Message Level
1 2 SD0 character string name No.

Emergency stop
U01 No user PLC ALM (Red) - - - - - -
(S/W EMG)

Number of Emergency stop

ALM (Red) 0x04xx 4 S/W INT. ERR ○ ○
steps (S/W EMG)

Number of Emergency stop

ALM (Red) 0x20xx 20 JUMP LABEL ERR ○ ○
steps (S/W EMG)

Number of Emergency stop

ALM (Red) 0x21xx 21 DUP. LABEL(P) ○ ○
steps (S/W EMG)

Emergency stop
ALM (Red) 0x22xx - 22 LOCAL LABEL OVER ○
(S/W EMG)

U10 Illegal PLC

(User PLC is illegal) Emergency stop
ALM (Red) 0x23xx - 23 LABEL PARA. ERR
(S/W EMG)
"xx" in the lower 16 bits of the
sub-status 1 indicates the
program No.

Number of Emergency stop

ALM (Red) 0x24xx 24 RSV. LABEL ERR ○ ○
steps (S/W EMG)

Emergency stop
ALM (Red) 0x25xx - 25 PRG. PARA. ERR ○
(S/W EMG)

Emergency stop
ALM (Red) 0x26xx - 26 MISSING RET INS. ○
(S/W EMG)

V - 40
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual

Error Contents and Cause Remedy

No sequence program is included in F-ROM or temporary memory

(1) Write the sequence program from the GX Developer or internal
area.
PLC edit function, and then execute F-ROM writing.
(1) Sequence program is not stored in F-ROM.
(2) Make sure that the ladder size does not exceed the maximum
(2) Sequence program is not written from the GX Developer or
number of steps.
internal PLC edit function.
(3) If (1) does not solve the problem, there is a possibility of broken
(3) Sequence program cannot be read due to broken F-ROM.
F-ROM.
(4)No large capacity PLC option.
Software instruction interruption illegal
An error was found in data for the sequence program in execution.
(1) Sequence program stored in F-ROM is broken. Contact Mitsubishi.
(2) Sequence program under development (before writing into F-
ROM) is broken.
Label branching error (Before executing PLC)
Occurs only when the bit selection parameter (#6452 bit6) "branch
destination label check valid" is set to "1". Check the branch destination of the CJ and CALL instructions
(1) The CJ and CALL instructions were placed to a nonexistent label. existing in the steps occurred.
(2) The CJ instruction was placed to the global label.
(Branching is possible only with the CALL instruction.)
Label duplication error (Before executing PLC)
(1) When using the multi-programming method:
- Global labels are duplicated
Correct the duplication of the labels existing in the steps occurred.
- Local labels are duplicated within the same file
(2) When using the independent program method, labels are
duplicated.
Local label over (Before executing PLC)
(1) Reduce the number of local labels used.
The boundary value set with the PC parameter (global label
- Use as sequentially as possible from P0.
boundary value) has been exceeded by the total number of local
(2) Reset the PC parameter (global label boundary value).
labels.
Global label boundary value error (Before executing PLC)
The content of PC parameter (global label boundary value) is not
(1) When using the multi-programming method, correct the global
normal.
label boundary value to an appropriate value.
(1) When using the multi-programming method, a value greater than
(2) When using the independent program method, delete the global
the maximum value is set.
label boundary value.
(2) When using the independent program method, the global label
boundary value is set.
Reserved label error (Before executing PLC) (1) When using the multi-programming method, delete the reserved
(1) When using the multi-programming method, disabled reserved label.
label exists. (2) When using the independent program method:
(2) When using the independent program method, reserved labels - Delete the PC parameter program settings.
are duplicated. - Correct the duplication of reserved labels.
Program setting error (Before executing PLC)
(1) When using the multi-programming method, PC parameter
(1) When using the multi-programming method, check the PC
setting is not correct.
parameter program settings.
- PC parameter (program setting) is not set.
- Check the program settings and program name stored in the NC.
- Unstored program name is set.
- Set the number to 20 or less.
- More than the maximum number of programs that can be set (20
(2) When using the independent program method:
programs) are set
- Store only one program file.
(2) When using the independent program method, multiple programs
are stored.
Check the following matters for the entire sequence program to be
executed.
RET instruction error (1) Check if RET instruction is programmed at the end of sub-routine
(1) RET instruction was not executed at the branch destination of the (2) Check if diverged to the other operation in the middle of sub-
CALL instruction. routine and RET instruction is not executed.
(2) RET instruction was executed without execution of CALL (3) Check if jumped to the END reservation label (P4005) in the
instruction. middle of sub-routine.
(4) Check if there is delimiter (FEND instruction) between adjacent
program and sub-routine program.

V - 41
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 List of PLC Alarms

NC alarm display (M Series) PLC diagnosis

Sub-status NC operating status Error code Diagnosis display File Step
Message Level
1 2 SD0 character string name No.

Number of Emergency stop

ALM (Red) 0x27xx 27 LAD. CODE ERR △ △
steps (S/W EMG)

Emergency stop
ALM (Red) 0x28xx - 28 MISSING LAD(M)
(S/W EMG)

Emergency stop
ALM (Red) 0x29xx - 29 EXE. AREA OVER ○
(S/W EMG)

Number of Emergency stop

ALM (Red) 0x30xx 30 FOR INS. OVER ○ ○
steps (S/W EMG)

Number of Emergency stop

ALM (Red) 0x31xx 31 NEXT INS. ERR △ △
steps (S/W EMG)

U10 Illegal PLC Number of Emergency stop

ALM (Red) 0x32xx 32 BREAK INS. ERR ○ ○
(User PLC is illegal) steps (S/W EMG)

Emergency stop
"xx" in the lower 16 bits of the ALM (Red) 0x400* - 40 PLC SYSTEM DOWN
(S/W EMG)
sub-status 1 indicates the
program No.
WNG
0x700* - PLC RUN 70 RUNWRT ILL. MODE
(Yellow)

WNG Number of
0x71xx PLC RUN 71 RUNWRT CPOINT(F) ○ ○
(Yellow) steps

WNG
0x720* - PLC RUN 72 RUNWRT SIZOVR(F)
(Yellow)

WNG
0x730* - PLC RUN 73 RUNWRT LLABEL(F)
(Yellow)

WNG Number of
0x80xx PLC RUN 80 EXC.INT(BCD) ○ ○
(Yellow) steps

WNG Number of
0x81xx PLC RUN 81 EXC.INT(BIN) ○ ○
(Yellow) steps

V - 42
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual

Error Contents and Cause Remedy

Ladder code error (Before executing PLC)

An error was found in data for the sequence program to be executed.
Transferring, storing and F-ROM writing of the sequence program
(1) Disabled PLC instruction is used.
must be re-executed with the GX Developer or PLC onboard edit
(2) Sequence program stored in F-ROM is broken.
function.
(3) Sequence program under development (before writing into F-
ROM) is broken.
No main processing ladders (Before executing PLC)
Main processing program to be executed cannot be identified. (1) When using the multi-programming method, check the PC
(1) When using the multi-programming method, main processing parameter program settings.
"scan" is not set in the PC parameter (program setting). (2) When using the independent program method, add the
(2) When using the independent program method, no reservation reservation label (P4002) for the medium speed ladder.
ladder for the main processing ladder is available.
Execution area over (Before executing PLC) Check the PC parameter (program setting) and set so that the total
The total number of steps for the ladder to be executed has number of steps for the ladder to be executed does not exceed the
exceeded the size of PLC processor execution area. PLC processor execution area.
FOR instruction nesting over Check the number of FOR instruction's nestings in the steps
17th level of nesting for FOR instruction was executed. generated, and keep the number to 16 or less.
(1) Check the NEXT instruction existing in the number of steps
generated and correct.
NEXT instruction error (2) Check the ladder circuit of the program No. generated and
(1) NEXT instruction was executed before FOR instruction. correct. (Note that the number of steps at the error position is
(2) After FOR instruction, END(FEND) was executed before NEXT displayed as "0".)
instruction. - Check if JMP,CALL,CJ instructions were executed between FOR
and NEXT instruction, and NEXT instruction was jumped.
- Check if FOR instruction and NEXT instruction are all paired.
BREAK instruction error
Check the BREAK instruction existing in the step generated and
BREAK was executed outside the range between FOR and NEXT
correct.
instruction.

PLC system error Contact Mitsubishi.

Caution; Ladder program writing during RUN is disabled (In

The ladder program writing (RUN write) can not be used in
independent program method)
independent program method.
With RUN write ON, sequence program is operated in independent
Disable RUN write, or change the method into multi-program one.
program method. Run write is not available with this condition.
Caution; Ladder program writing during RUN is disabled (common
RUN write is not available when high-speed processing with
pointer is used in high-speed processing)
common pointer is running. Change the high-speed processing
With RUN write is ON, high-speed program with common pointer is
program to the one without common pointer.
running. RUN write is not available with this condition.
Caution; Ladder program writing during RUN is disabled (high-speed
RUN write is not available when execution size of high-speed
processing size is exceeding)
processing program exceeds 2000 steps. Edit the high-speed
With RUN write ON, the execution size of high-speed processing
processing program to reduce the execution size to 2000 steps or
program has exceeded 2000 steps. RUN write is not available with
less.
this condition.
Caution; Ladder program writing during RUN is disabled (number of
labels in high-speed processing is beyond the capacity) RUN write is not available when the number of local labels in high-
With RUN write ON, the number of local labels in high-speed speed processing program exceeds 256 steps. Edit the high-speed
processing program has exceeded 256. RUN write is not available program to reduce the number of local labels to less than 256.
with this condition.
Software exceptional interruption (BCD instruction error) has
occurred. Check the usage of BCD, DBCD instructions existing in the steps
With BCD and DBCD instructions, BIN value outside its input range occurred.
was attempted to be converted into BCD.
Software exceptional interruption (BIN instruction error) has
occurred. Check the usage of BIN, DBIN instructions existing in the steps
With BIN and DBIN instructions, BCD value outside its input range occurred.
was attempted to be converted into BIN.

V - 43
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 List of PLC Alarms

NC alarm display (M Series) PLC diagnosis

Sub-status NC operating status Error code Diagnosis display File Step
Message Level
1 2 SD0 character string name No.
Number of Emergency stop
ALM (Red) 0x82xx 82 EXC.INT(D-BUS) △ △
steps (S/W EMG)

Number of Emergency stop

ALM (Red) 0x83xx 83 EXC.INT(INST.) △ △
steps (S/W EMG)

U10 Illegal PLC Number of Emergency stop

(User PLC is illegal) ALM (Red) 0x84xx 84 EXC.INT(I-FMT) △ △
steps (S/W EMG)

"xx" in the lower 16 bits of the

sub-status 1 indicates the
program No. Number of Emergency stop
ALM (Red) 0x85xx 85 EXC.INT(I-BUS) △ △
steps (S/W EMG)

Number of Emergency stop

ALM (Red) 0x86xx 86 EXC.INT(CALL) △ △
steps (S/W EMG)
Number of Emergency stop
ALM (Red) 0x8Bxx 91 EXC.INT(A-BUS) △ △
steps (S/W EMG)
WNG Emergency stop
U50 Ladder stopped - - - - - -
(Yellow) (S/W EMG)

V - 44
 M700V/M70V/E70 Series PLC Programming Manual

Error Contents and Cause Remedy

Software exceptional interruption (Bus error) has occurred. Contact Mitsubishi.

Software exceptional interruption (Unmounted instruction error) has

occurred. (1) Set the bit selection parameter (#6452 bit6) "branch destination
(1) When HN102 card is mounted and the bit selection parameter label check valid" to "1" and check the branching step to the
(#6452 bit6) "branch destination label check valid" is set to "0", undefined label.
jumped to an undefined label. (2) Contact Mitsubishi.
(2) Sequence program in execution is broken.
Software exceptional interruption (Instruction format error) has
Contact Mitsubishi.
occurred.
Software exceptional interruption (Instruction bus error) has
occurred. (1) Set the bit selection parameter (#6452 bit6) "branch destination
(1) When HN102 card is not mounted and the bit selection parameter label check valid" to "1" and check the branching step to the
(#6452 bit6) "branch destination label check valid" is set to "0", undefined label.
jumped to an undefined label. (2) Contact Mitsubishi.
(2) Sequence program in execution is broken.
Software exceptional interruption（CALL/RET instruction error）has
Contact Mitsubishi.
occurred.

Software exceptional interruption (ASYNC BUS error) has occurred. Contact Mitsubishi.

The ladder is stopped. RUN the PLC

V - 45
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 List of PLC Alarms

V - 46
 Revision History

Date of
Manual No. Revision details
revision
Nov. 2008 IB(NA)1500918-A First edition created.
Jan. 2009 IB(NA)1500918-B Mistakes were corrected.
June. 2011 IB(NA)1500918-C - Corrections are made corresponding to S/W version G5.
Following chapters are added to "II. PROGRAMMING EXPLANATION"
"4.3.2 SRAM.BIN Output Type"
"10.3.12 Device Random Allocation"
"Chapter 11. External PLC Link"
"11.1 CC-Link"
Following chapters are added to "IV. EXPLANATION OF BUILT-IN EDITING FUNC-
TION"
"4.2.4 Precaution When Creating the Data"
"5.2 Soft Keys"
- Corresponding to M70V Series
- Mistakes are corrected.
Dec.2011 IB(NA)1500918-D - Added "Handling of our product".
Following chapter is corrected to"III PERIPHERAL DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT"
"1.1 Software Configuration"
Mar.2013 IB(NA)1500918-E - Corresponded to E70 Series
Mar. 2014 IB(NA)1500918-F Corrections and additions are made corresponding to S/W version K1.
- Following chapter is revised in "II PLOGRAMING EXPLANATION".
"10.1 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)"
- Following chapters are added to "II PLOGRAMING EXPLANATION".
"10.2 Tool Life Management (Lathe System)"
"10.12 Control Axis Superimposition II"
"10.13 Change the Area of Stored Stroke Limit I"
"10.14 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization"
- The current chapters 10.2 to 10.10 are changed in the numbers for the addition of the
chapter 10.2 in "II PLOGRAMING EXPLANATION".
- Mistakes are corrected.
 Global Service Network

AMERICA EUROPE

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC. (AMERICA FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Central Region Service Center GOTHAER STRASSE 10, 40880 RATINGEN, GERMANY
500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, ILLINOIS 60061, U.S.A. TEL: +49-2102-486-0 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
Germany Service Center
Michigan Service Satellite KURZE STRASSE. 40, 70794 FILDERSTADT-BONLANDEN, GERMANY
ALLEGAN, MICHIGAN 49010, U.S.A. TEL: + 49-711-770598-123 / FAX: +49-711-770598-141
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
France Service Center DEPARTEMENT CONTROLE NUMERIQUE
Ohio Service Satellite 25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE
LIMA, OHIO 45801, U.S.A. TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
CINCINATTI, OHIO 45201, U.S.A. France (Lyon) Service Satellite DEPARTEMENT CONTROLE NUMERIQUE
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 120, ALLEE JACQUES MONOD 69800 SAINT PRIEST FRANCE
TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25
Minnesota Service Satellite
ROGERS, MINNESOTA 55374, U.S.A. Italy Service Center
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 VIALE COLLEONI, 7 - CENTRO DIREZIONALE COLLEONI PALAZZO SIRIO INGRESSO 1
20864 AGRATE BRIANZA (MB), ITALY
West Region Service Center TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206
16900 VALLEY VIEW AVE., LAMIRADA, CALIFORNIA 90638, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 Italy (Padova) Service Satellite
VIA G. SAVELLI, 24 - 35129 PADOVA, ITALY
Northern CA Satellite TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206
SARATOGA, CALIFORNIA 95070, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 U.K. Branch
TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K.
Pennsylvania Service Satellite TEL: +49-2102-486-0 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910
PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA 15644, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-732-560-4500 / FAX: +1-732-560-4531 Spain Service Center
CTRA. DE RUBI, 76-80-APDO. 420
Connecticut Service Satellite 08173 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN
TORRINGTON, CONNECTICUT 06790, U.S.A. TEL: +34-935-65-2236 / FAX: +34-935-89-1579
TEL: +1-732-560-4500 / FAX: +1-732-560-4531
Poland Service Center
South Region Service Center UL.KRAKOWSKA 50, 32-083 BALICE, POLAND
1845 SATTELITE BOULEVARD STE. 450, DULUTH, GEORGIA 30097, U.S.A. TEL: +48-12-630-4700 / FAX: +48-12-630-4701
TEL +1-678-258-4529 / FAX +1-678-258-4519
Mitsubishi Electric Turkey A.Ş Ümraniye Şubesi
Texas Service Satellites Turkey Service Center
GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051, U.S.A. ŞERIFALI MAH. NUTUK SOK. NO.5 34775
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519 ÜMRANIYE, ISTANBUL, TURKEY
HOUSTON, TEXAS 77001, U.S.A. TEL: +90-216-526-3990 / FAX: +90-216-526-3995
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519
Czech Republic Service Center
Tennessee Service Satellite KAFKOVA 1853/3, 702 00 OSTRAVA 2, CZECH REPUBLIC
Nashville, Tennessee, 37201, U.S.A. TEL: +420-59-5691-185 / FAX: +420-59-5691-199
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519
Russia Service Center
Florida Service Satellite 213, B.NOVODMITROVSKAYA STR., 14/2, 127015 MOSCOW, RUSSIA
WEST MELBOURNE, FLORIDA 32904, U.S.A. TEL: +7-495-748-0191 / FAX: +7-495-748-0192
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. (SCANDINAVIA)
Canada Region Service Center Sweden Service Center
4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R OJ2, CANADA HAMMARBACKEN 14 191 49 SOLLENTUNA, SWEDEN
TEL: +1-905-475-7728 / FAX: +1-905-475-7935 TEL: +46-8-6251000 / FAX: +46-8-966877

Canada Service Satellite Bulgaria Service Center

EDMONTON, ALBERTA T5A 0A1, CANADA 4 A.LYAPCHEV BOUL., POB 21, BG-1756 SOFIA, BULGARIA
TEL: +1-905-475-7728 FAX: +1-905-475-7935 TEL: +359-2-8176009 / FAX: +359-2-9744061

Mexico Region Service Center Ukraine (Kharkov) Service Center

MARIANO ESCOBEDO 69 TLALNEPANTLA, 54030 EDO. DE MEXICO APTEKARSKIY LANE 9-A, OFFICE 3, 61001 KHARKOV, UKRAINE
TEL: +52-55-3067-7500 / FAX: +52-55-9171-7649 TEL: +380-57-732-7774 / FAX: +380-57-731-8721

Monterrey Service Satellite Ukraine (Kiev) Service Center

MONTERREY, N.L., 64720, MEXICO 4-B, M. RASKOVOYI STR., 02660 KIEV, UKRAINE
TEL: +52-81-8365-4171 TEL: +380-44-494-3355 / FAX: +380-44-494-3366

Belarus Service Center

BRAZIL OFFICE 9, NEZAVISIMOSTI PR.177, 220125 MINSK, BELARUS
TEL: +375-17-393-1177 / FAX: +375-17-393-0081
MELCO CNC do Brasil Comércio e Serviços S.A
Brazil Region Service Center South Africa Service Center
ACESSO JOSE SARTORELLI, KM 2.1 CEP 18550-000, BOITUVA-SP, BRAZIL 5 ALBATROSS STREET, RHODESFIELD, KEMPTON PARK 1619, GAUTENG, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: +55-15-3363-9900 / FAX: +55-15-3363-9911 TEL: +27-11-394-8512 / FAX: +27-11-394-8513
 ASEAN CHINA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD. (ASEAN FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (CHINA) LTD. (CHINA FA CENTER)
Singapore Service Center China (Shanghai) Service Center
307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943 1-3,5-10,18-23/F, NO.1386 HONG QIAO ROAD, CHANG NING QU,
TEL: +65-6473-2308 / FAX: +65-6476-7439 SHANGHAI 200336, CHINA
TEL: +86-21-2322-3030 / FAX: +86-21-2308-3000
Malaysia (KL) Service Center China (Ningbo) Service Dealer
60, JALAN USJ 10 /1B 47620 UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN, MALAYSIA China (Wuxi) Service Dealer
TEL: +60-3-5631-7605 / FAX: +60-3-5631-7636 China (Jinan) Service Dealer
China (Hangzhou) Service Dealer
Malaysia (Johor Baru) Service Center China (Wuhan) Service Satellite
17 & 17A, JALAN IMPIAN EMAS 5/5, TAMAN IMPIAN EMAS, 81300 SKUDAI, JOHOR MALAYSIA.
TEL: +60-7-557-8218 / FAX: +60-7-557-3404 China (Beijing) Service Center
9/F, OFFICE TOWER 1, HENDERSON CENTER, 18 JIANGUOMENNEI DAJIE,
Philippines Service Center DONGCHENG DISTRICT, BEIJING 100005, CHINA
UNIT NO.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 / FAX: +86-10-6518-8030
SOUTH SUPERHIGHWAY, ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771 China (Beijing) Service Dealer
TEL: +63-2-807-2416 / FAX: +63-2-807-2417
China (Tianjin) Service Center
UNIT 2003, TIANJIN CITY TOWER, NO 35 YOUYI ROAD, HEXI DISTRICT,
VIETNAM TIANJIN 300061, CHINA
TEL: +86-22-2813-1015 / FAX: +86-22-2813-1017
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC VIETNAM CO.,LTD China (Shenyang) Service Satellite
Vietnam (Ho Chi Minh) Service Center China (Changchun) Service Satellite
UNIT 01-04, 10TH FLOOR, VINCOM CENTER 72 LE THANH TON STREET, DISTRICT 1,
HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM China (Chengdu) Service Center
TEL: +84-8-3910 5945 / FAX: +84-8-3910 5946 ROOM 407-408, OFFICE TOWER AT SHANGRI-LA CENTER, NO. 9 BINJIANG DONG ROAD,
JINJIANG DISTRICT, CHENGDU, SICHUAN 610021, CHINA
Vietnam (Hanoi) Service Satellite TEL: +86-28-8446-8030 / FAX: +86-28-8446-8630
SUITE 9-05, 9TH FLOOR, HANOI CENTRAL OFFICE BUILDING, 44B LY THUONG KIET STREET,
HOAN KIEM DISTRICT, HANOI CITY, VIETNAM China (Shenzhen) Service Center
TEL: +84-4-3937-8075 / FAX: +84-4-3937-8076 ROOM 2512-2516, 25/F., GREAT CHINA INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGE SQUARE, JINTIAN RD.S.,
FUTIAN DISTRICT, SHENZHEN 518034, CHINA
TEL: +86-755-2399-8272 / FAX: +86-755-8218-4776
INDONESIA China (Xiamen) Service Dealer
China (Dongguan) Service Dealer
PT. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDONESIA
Indonesia Service Center
GEDUNG JAYA 11TH FLOOR, JL. MH. THAMRIN NO.12, JAKARTA PUSAT 10340, INDONESIA KOREA
TEL: +62-21-3192-6461 / FAX: +62-21-3192-3942
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD. (KOREA FA CENTER)
Korea Service Center
THAILAND 1480-6, GAYANG-DONG, GANGSEO-GU, SEOUL 157-200, KOREA
TEL: +82-2-3660-9602 / FAX: +82-2-3664-8668
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FACTORY AUTOMATION (THAILAND) CO.,LTD
Thailand Service Center Korea Taegu Service Satellite
12TH FLOOR, SV.CITY BUILDING, OFFICE TOWER 1, NO. 896/19 AND 20 RAMA 3 ROAD, 4F KT BUILDING, 1630 SANGYEOK-DONG, BUK-KU, DAEGU 702-835, KOREA
KWAENG BANGPONGPANG, KHET YANNAWA, BANGKOK 10120,THAILAND TEL: +82-53-382-7400 / FAX: +82-53-382-7411
TEL: +66-2-682-6522-31 / FAX: +66-2-682-6020

TAIWAN
INDIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD. (TAIWAN FA CENTER)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDIA PVT. LTD. Taiwan (Taichung) Service Center (Central Area)
India Service Center NO.8-1, INDUSTRIAL 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTRIAL PARK, SITUN DIST.,
2nd FLOOR, TOWER A & B, DLF CYBER GREENS, DLF CYBER CITY, TAICHUNG CITY 40768, TAIWAN R.O.C.
DLF PHASE-III, GURGAON 122 002, HARYANA, INDIA TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 / FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
TEL: +91-124-4630 300 / FAX: +91-124-4630 399
Ludhiana satellite office Taiwan (Taipei) Service Center (North Area)
Jamshedpur satellite office 10F, NO.88, SEC.6, CHUNG-SHAN N. RD., SHI LIN DIST., TAIPEI CITY 11155, TAIWAN R.O.C.
TEL: +886-2-2833-5430 / FAX: +886-2-2833-5433
India (Pune) Service Center
EMERALD HOUSE, EL-3, J-BLOCK, MIDC BHOSARI. PUNE – 411 026, MAHARASHTRA, INDIA Taiwan (Tainan) Service Center (South Area)
TEL: +91-20-2710 2000 / FAX: +91-20-2710 2100 11F-1., NO.30, ZHONGZHENG S. ROAD, YONGKANG DISTRICT, TAINAN CITY 71067, TAIWAN, R.O.C
Baroda satellite office TEL: +886-6-252-5030 / FAX: +886-6-252-5031
Mumbai satellite office

India (Bangalore) Service Center

PRESTIGE EMERALD, 6TH FLOOR, MUNICIPAL NO. 2,
LAVELLE ROAD, BANGALORE - 560 043, KAMATAKA, INDIA
TEL: +91-80-4020-1600 / FAX: +91-80-4020-1699
Chennai satellite office
Coimbatore satellite office

OCEANIA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUSTRALIA LTD.

Australia Service Center
348 VICTORIA ROAD, RYDALMERE, N.S.W. 2116 AUSTRALIA
TEL: +61-2-9684-7269 / FAX: +61-2-9684-7245
Notice

Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this
manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible.
Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this prod-
uct.

Duplication Prohibited

This manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from Mitsub-
ishi Electric Corporation.

COPYRIGHT 2008-2014 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED